WM 

'A 

I 


UNIVERSITY  OF  N.C.  AT  CHAPEL  HILL 


00022245982 


i 


v 


I? 


4^ 


hi 


\ 


Nj 


PETER  PAULEY'S 


COMMON  SCHOOL 


HISTORY 


CroC 


ILLUSTRATED   BY  ENGRAVINGS. 
A  NEW  EDITION, 

REVISED  AND  BROUGHT  DOWN  TO  THE  PRESENT  TIME. 


PHILADELPHIA: 
PUBLISHED  BY  E.    H.    BUTLER  &  CO. 

1857. 


ADVERTISEMENT. 

Tho  design  of  this  work  is  to  furnish  a  clear  outline  of  Universal  His- 
tory, suited  to  common  schools.  It  is  intended  for  beginners,  and  is  therefore 
written  in  a  simple  style,  and,  to  render  it  convenient  both  for  the  pupil  and 
teacher,  it  is  divided  into  brief  paragraphs  and  short  chapters.  Ample  questions 
for  examination  are  appended  to  the  work.  The  teacher  will  doubtless  find  it 
better,  in  many  cases,  to  substitute  questions  of  his  own,  adapting  them  to  the 
various  capacities  of  his  pupils. 

The  publishers  believe  that  the  manner  in  which  the  work  is  prepared,  together 
with  its  cheapness,  will  render  it  fit  to  be  introduced  into  the  Common  Schools 
throughout  our  country.  It  will  be  seen  that  a  pupil  may  commit  the  whole 
volume  to  memory  during  a  winter's  schooling ;  and  if,  in  this  brief  space,  a 
clear  outline  of  Universal  History  may  be  established  in  the  memory,  it  is 
obvious  that  the  subject  is  worthy  the  attention  of  every  person  interested  in 
education. 


Entered  according  to  the  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1837,  by 

S.  G.  GOODRICH, 

in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Massachusetts. 


NOTE  TO  THE  REVISED  EDITION. 

In  this  revised  edition,  the  Author  has  corrected  a  few  errors,  introduced 
recent  events,  and  attempted  certain  emendations,  where  criticism  had  suggested 
their  propriety.  For  the  sake  of  greater  convenience,  the  questions  are  arranged 
at  the  bottom  of  the  pages.  The  chapters,  however,  are  the  same  as  before,  and 
no  change  has  been  made  which  will  render  it  inconvenient  to  use  this  edition 
in  the  same  classes  with  previous  editions. 


Entered  according  to  the  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1854,  by 

S.  G.  GOODRICH, 

in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  for  the  Southern  District  of  New-York. 


CONTENTS. 


INTRODUCTION. 

CHAPTER  pica 

I.  Parley  begins  by  telling  about  History,  Geography,  and  other  matters,    ,  9 

H.  Parley  begins  by  telling  how  the  'World  is  divided  into  Land  and  Water,  10 

HI.  About  the  inhabitants  of  Asia,  Africa,  and  other  Countries,      .        .        .13 

IV.  About  the  different  Kinds  of  People  in  the  World, 13 

ASIA. 

V.  About  the  Climate,  Productions,  Mountains,  People,  and  Animals,  of  Asia, 

and  other  things, 14 

VI.  About  the  Creation.    The  Deluge, 17 

VII.  IIow  Xbah  and  his  Family  came  out  of  the  Ark.    How  the  People  settled 

in  the  Land  of  Shinar.     About  Babel, 18 

VIIT.  More  about  Babel, 20 

IX.  About  the  great  Assyrian  Empire,  and  Reign  of  Queen  Semiramis,  .        .  21 
X.  Queen  Semiramis  sets  forth  to  conquer  the  World,  but  is  defeated  by  the 

King  of  the  Indies, 22 

XI.  About  Xinias.     Reign  of  Sardanapalus,  and  Ruin  of  the  Assyrian  Empire,  23 
XII.  About  the  Hebrews  or  Jews.     Origin  of  the  Hebrews.    The  Removal  of 

Jacob  and  his  Children  to  Egypt, 25 

XILI.  The  Bondage  in  Egypt.    Flight  of  the  Hebrews,  and  Destruction  of 

Pharaoh  and  his  Host, 26 

XIV.  About  the  Wanderings  of  the  Israelites  in  the  'Wilderness,        .        .        .28 
XV.  Overthrow  of  the  Midianites,     Samson,  Judge  of  Israel,    .        .        .        .30 

XVI.  Samson's  Exploits  and  Death, 32 

XVII.  Beginning  of  the  Reign  of  Saul, 34 

XVIII.  Combat  of  David  and  Goliath, So 

XIX.  The  Reign  of  David.    Wisdom  of  Solomon 36 

XX.  The  Building  of  the  Temple.     Visit  of  the  Queen  of  Sheba,        ...  37 

XXI.  The  Decline  of  the  Jewish  Xation, 39 

XXII.  The  Hebrew  Prophets, 40 

XXIII.  Crucifixion  of  the  Saviour.    Destruction  of  Jerusalem,       .        .        .        .42 

XXIV.  Cyrus  conquers  Babylon.     His  Death, 44 

XXV.  Reign  of  Cambyses, .  45 

XXVI.  Expedition  of  Xerxes  into  Greece, 46 

XXVII.  Affairs  of  Persia  till  the  Saracen  Conquest, 48 

XXVIII.  Modern  History  of  Persia, 49 

XXIX.  Early  History  of  China, 51 

XXX.  Anecdotes  of  the  Chinese  Emperors, 52 

XXXI.  Cities  of  China.     Manners  of  the  Chinese, 54 

XXXII.  Origin  of  the  Arabs.     Rise  of  Mahomet, 55 

XXXIII.  Sequel  of  the  History  of  the  Saracens, 57 

XXXIV.  About  Syria,  Phoenicia,  and  Asia  Minor, 59 

XXXV.  A  Brief  View  of  several  Nations, 61 

XXXVI.  Review  of  the  History  of  Asia, 62 

XXXVII.  Chronology  of  Asia, 65 

AFRICA. 

XXXVTTT.  About  the  Geography  of  Africa.    The  Lnhabitants, 69 

XXXIX.  Early  Sovereigns  of  Egypt, 71 

XL.  Egyptian  Architecture  aud  Sculpture, 73 

XLI.  The  Ptolemies  and  Queen  Cleopatra, 76 

1*  (5) 


6  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  PAGB 

XLII.  Sequel  of  the  Egyptian  History, 78 

XLIII.  Summary  of  ..Ethiopian  Matters, 79 

XLIV.  Origin  of  the  Barbary  States,  and  their  Piracies  on  the  Christians,    .  80 

XLV.  Fables  and  Facts  about  Africa, 81 

XLVI.  History  of  the  Slave-Trade, 82 

XL VII.  Chronology  of  Africa, 83 

EUROPE. 

XL YIIT.  Introductory  Remarks  on  its  Geography,  and  other  Matters,      .        .  84 
XLIX.  About  Greece;  where  it  is  situated.  Appearance  of  the  Country ;  Cli- 
mate,           88 

L.  The  Extent  of  Greece.    First  Settlement  of  the  Country,    ...  90 

LI.  The  Grecian  Lawgivers,            91 

LIE  War  with  Persia, 92 

LIII.  Affairs  of  Athens, 93 

LIV.  Beginning  of  the  Theban  War, 95 

LV.  Sequel  of  the  Theban  War, 96 

LVI.  Grecian  Religion  or  Mythology, 97 

LVII.  The  Grecian  Philosophers, 101 

LVIII.  The  Grecian  Philosophers  continued, 102 

LIX.  Something  more  about  Philosophers.     About  the  Greek  Poets,    .        .  103 

LX.  About  the  Mode  of  Life  among  the  Ancient  Greeks,      ....  104 

LXI.  Philip  of  Macedon  conquers  Greece, 106 

LXII.  Conquests  of  Alexander  the  Great 108 

LXIII.  Sequel  to  Alexander's  Career, 110 

LXIV.  Greece  invaded  by  the  Gauls, Ill 

LXV.  End  of  Grecian  Independence, 112 

LXVI.  Modern  History  of  Greece, 113 

LXVII.  About  Italy  as  it  now  is, 114 

I1XVHX  Founding  of  Rome  by  Romulus.    Its  early  State,         ....  117 

LXIX.  Battle  of  thelloratii  and  Curiatii, 120 

LXX.  From  the  reign  of  Ancus  Martius  till  the  Expulsion  of  the  Kings,      .  121 

LXXI.  The  Story  of  Coriolanus, 123 

LXXII.  Rome  invaded  by  the  Gauls.     The  first  Punic  War,      ....  124 

LXXIII.  Second  and  third  Punic  Wars, 126 

LXXIV.  Scipio's  Triumph, 127 

LXXV.  Sylla  and  Marius, 128 

LXXVI.  Cneius  Pompey  and  Julius  Casar, 129 

LXXVII.  Caesar  usurps  the  Supreme  Power, 130 

LXXVIII.  Assassination  of  Julius  Caesar, 131 

LXXIX.  Consequences  of  Caesar's  Death, '  132 

LXXX.  About  the  great  Power  and  Extent  of  the  Roman  Empire  in  the  Time 

of  Augustus, 134 

LXXXI.  The  Means  by  which  Rome  acquired  its  Power, 135 

LXXXII.  Rome  under  the  Emperors, 186 

LXXXIII.  Fall  of  the  Western  Empire  of  the  Romans, 138 

LXXXIV.  Progress  of  the  Decline  of  Rome 139 

LXXXV.  Manners  and  Customs  of  the  Aucicnt  Romans, 141 

LXXXVI.  About  Religion.    Deities.    Temples.     Marriage, 142 

LXXXVII.  About  Funeral  Rites  and  Ceremonies, 144 

LXXXVIII.  Roman  Farms.     Mode  of  Ploughing.     Farm  Houses.    Grain.     Cattle. 

Superstitions  of  the  Farmers.    Gardens.    Vines,        ....  146 

LXXXIX.  Country  Houses.     Description  of  Pliny's  Villa.     Aqueducts,         .        .  147 
XC.  Military  Affairs  of  the  Romans.     Division  of  the  Army.    The  Imperial 
Eagle.     Music.     Arms.     Dress.     Military   Rewards.    Crowns.     The 

Triumph 149 

XCI.  About  Naval  Affairs.    The  War  Galley.    Commerce.    Shows  of  Wild 

Beasts.     Exhibitions  of  Gladiators, 151 

XCII.  Sports^     Chariot  Racing.    The  Circus.     Carriages.     Private  Entertain- 
ments.    Supper  Rooms.     Convivial  Parties.     Luxuries,      .        .        .  152 
XCIII.  About  Theatres.    Clocks  and  Watches.    The  Fine  Arts.    Books  and 

Writing.     Costume.    Conclusion, 154 

XCIV.  Rome  under  the  Popes, 155 

XCV.  About  several  other  Italian  States, 158 

XCVI.  About  the  Ottoman  Empire.    Turkey  in  Europe.    Turkey  in  Asia. 

About  the  Climate,  People,  and  other  Things, 159 


J  0  N  T  E  X  T  S.  7 

CHAPTER  PAOa 
XCYII.  About  the  Saracens.     now  the  Turks  overturned  the  Saracen  Empire. 
How  the   Ottoman   Turks   founded  the   Ottoman  Empire.    About 

Bajazet,  Timour.  and  others, 161 

XCYTn.  Sequel  of  the  Turkish  History, 162 

XCIX.  Early  History  of  Spain.    The  Moorish  Conquest, 163 

C.  Wars  between  the  Moors  and  the  Spaniards, 165 

CI.  The  Spanish  Inquisition, 166 

CII.  The  Invincible  Armada.    Curious  Death  of  a  Spanish  King.    Recent 

Affairs  of  Spain, 168 

CHI.  A  short  Story  about  Portugal, 169 

CIV.  Description  of  France.    Its  Climate.    Cities.    Manufactures.    Manners 

and  Customs  of  the  People, 170 

CV.  About  the  Gauls  and  other  Tribes  of  Barbarians.     How  the  Southern 
Parts  of  Europe  were  first  settled,  and  how  the  Northern  Parts  were 

settled  afterwards, 172 

(J  VI.  Story  of  the  Barbarians  continued, 173 

CVII.  The  Gauls.    Origin  of  the  French  Nation.    Little  King  Pepin,    .        .  175 

CVIII.  About  Clovis  and  little  King  Pepin, 176 

CIX.  The  Reign  of  Charlemagne, 178 

CX.  About  the  Crusades  or  Holy  Wars, 179 

CXI.  About  the  Feudal  System, 182 

CX1I.  About  Chivalry,  or  Knight-Errantry, 184 

CXIII.  More  about  Chivalry 186 

CXIV.  King  Philip  and  Pope  Boniface.    Wars  of  the  French  and  English,    .  1S8 

CXV.  The  Reigns  of  several  French  Kings, 191 

CXVI.  The  Reigns  of  Louis  the  Grand  and  his  Successor,        ....  192 

CXVII.  The  French  Revolution, 194 

CXVIII.  The  Rise  of  Napoleon  Bonaparte, 196 

CXIX.  The  Fall  of  Bonaparte, 198 

CXX.  Recent  Affairs  of  France, 200 

CXXI.  About  Germany, 201 

CXX1I.  About  the  Ancient  Tribes  of  Germany,  Charlemagne,  &<:.,           .        .  202 

CXX1II.  Affairs  of  Switzerland, 203 

CXXIV.  Sequel  of  German  History, 205 

CXXV.  About  Austria,  Hungary,  &c, 267 

CXXVI.  About  Hungary,  Bohemia,  the  Tyrol,  &c, 208 

CXXVII.  About  Prussia, 210 

CXXVIII.  History  of  Prussia, 211 

CXXIX.  Description  of  Russia, 212 

CXXX.  Description  of  Russia  continued,      ........  214 

CXXXI.  The  Reign  of  Peter  the  Great, 216 

CXXXII.  The  Successors  of  Peter  the  Great, 217 

CXXXI1I.  About  Sweden,            219 

CXXXIV.  Charles  the  Twelfth  and  his  Successors, 221 

CXXXV.  About  Lapland,  Norway,  and  Denmark, 222 

CXXXVI.  Brief  Notices  of  several  Kingdoms  and  States, 224 

CXXXVII.  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland, 223 

CXXXVIII.  About  London  and  other  Cities  of  England,  Wales,  Scotland,  and  Ireland,  226 

CXXXIX.  Origin  of  the  British  Nation.     The  Druids, 229 

CXL.  Saxon  and  Danish  Kings  of  England, 231 

CXLI.  Norman  Kings  of  England, 232 

CXLI  I.  English  Wars  and  Rebellions 234 

CXLIII.  The  Lancastrian  Kings  of  England, 235 

CXLIV.  Wars  of  the  Roses, 237 

CXLV.  Reigns  of  the  Tudor  Princes, 239 

CXLVI.  The  Reign  of  Elizabeth, 240 

CXL VI I.  Accession  of  the  House  of  Stuart, 242 

CXLVIII.  Wars  of  the  King  and  Parliament, 244 

CXLI X.  The  Protectorate  and  the  Restoration, 246 

CL.  The  Revolution  of  1688,  and  other  Matters, 247 

CLI.  The  Hanoverian  Kings  of  Great  Britain, 249 

CL1I.  The  Story  of  Wales 251 

CL1II.  The  Stnry  of  Scotland, 252 

CLIV.  About  Ireland,             254 

CLV.  Matters  and  Things, 255 

CLVI.  Review.    The  Dark  Ages.    Important  Inventions,  &c.         ...  257 

CL VII.  Chronology  of  Europe, 200 


0  SCHOOLHISTORY. 

AMERICA. 

CHAPTER  Paoi 

CLVin.  About  America, 267 

CLIX.  The  first  inhabitants  of  America,            .                 269 

CLX.  Discovery  of  America  by  Columbus, 271 

CLXI.  A  few  Words  about  Iceland  and  Greenland.     Settlements  of  the  French 

in  America, 272 

CLXII.  The  French  Colonies  conquered  by  the  English, 274 

CLXIII.  Description  of  the  United  States, 276 

CLXIV.  Settlement  and  Colonial  History  of  New  England,      ....  278 

CLXV.  Affairs  of  New  England  continued, 279 

CLXVI.  Early  History  of  Virginia, 280 

CLXVII.  Braddock's  Defeat,  and  other  Matters, 281 

CLXVIII.  Causes  which  led  to  the  Revolution, 282 

CLXIX.  Account  of  the  Battle  of  Lexington, 283 

\JLXX.  The  Battle  of  Bunker  Hill, 284 

CLXXI.  Progress  of  the  War.     Capture  of  Burgoyne, 285 

CLXXII.  The  Story  of  the  Traitor  Arnold  and  Major  Andre,      .        .        .        .  2S7 

CLXXIII.  War  in  the  South.     Surrender  of  Cornwallis, 288 

CLXXIV.  Affairs  of  the  United  States  since  the  Revolution,        ....  289 

CLXXV.  General  Remarks  upon  the  History  of  the  United  States,    .        .        .  290 

CLXXVI.  General  Remarks  upon  the  History  of  the  United  States  continued,  291 

CLXXVII.  About  South  America.     El  Dorado,  and  the  Fountain  of  Youth,        .  293 

CLXXVIII.  History  of  the  Mexican  Territories.    Guatimala, 295 

CLXXIX.  Spanish  Peruvian  Territories, 297 

CLXXX.  Account  of  the  Brazilian  Territories, 298 

CLXXXI.  The  West  Indies, 299 

CLXXXII.  The  West  Indies  continued, 310 

CLXXXIII.  The  West  Indies  continued,  I .........  802 

CLXXXIV.  Chronology  of  America,                   .        .                                ...  304 

OCEANIA. 

CLXXXV.  About  Oceania.    The  Malaysian  Islands,       ......  305 

CLXXXVI.  The  Australian  Division  of  Oceania, .  306 

CLXXXVII.  Polynesia.    The  Sandwich  Islands,        ...                ...  307 

CLXXXVIII.  Polynesia  continued.    The  Society  Islands, 309 

CLXXXIX.  Story  of  the  Bounty  concluded,      .        .        .        .                .  310 

CXC.  Chronology  of  Oceania, -        .        .        .  311 

CXCI.  General  Views, •        ...  318 


COMMON  SCHOOL  HISTORY. 


CHAPTER  I.— INTRODUCTION. 

The  Author  begins  by  telling  about  History,  Geography,  and 
other  Hatters. 

1.  I  suppose  you  have  often  met  with  the  words  History  and  Ge- 
ography. History  tells  the  story  of  mankind  since  the  world  was 
created,  and  may  he  compared  to  an  old  man  who  has  lived  for 
thousands  of  years,  and  who  has  seen  cities  built  and  fall  into  decay; 
who  has  seen  nations  rise,  flourish,  and  disappear;  and  who,  with  a 
memory  full  of  wonderful  things,  sits  down  to  tell  you  of  all  that  has 
happened  during  so  many  ages. 

2.  Geography  is  a  description  of  towns,  rivers,  mountains,  and 
countries;  the  things  which  a  traveller  sees  in  going  from  one  place 
to  another.  Geography,  then,  may  be  compared  to  some  roving  fel- 
low who  has  been  all  over  the  world  in  ships,  stages,  and  steamboats, 
and  who  has  come  back  to  give  us  an  account  of  all  he  has  seen. 

3.  You  will  see,  then,  that  History  is  a  record  of  events  that  have 
happened,  and  that  Geography  tells  you  of  the  places  where  they 
happened.  In  order  to  understand  the  former,  you  must  know  some- 
thing of  the  latter.  Now,  in  this  little  book  I  propose  to  recount  the 
history  of  the  world ;  I  shall  therefore  sometimes  seem  to  put  on  the  old 
grey -beard  of  history,  who  has  lived  for  thousands  of  years,  and  tell 
you  of  what  has  come  to  pass;  and  sometimes  I  shall  make  you  fancy 
yourself  in  a  balloon  or  vessel,  and  carry  you  with  me  to  the  places 
where  the  events  I  am  to  relate,  have  occurred. 

4.  I  shall,  in  the  progress  of  my  story,  tell  you  about  the  creation 
of  the  first  man  and  woman ;  of  the  large  family  they  had ;  and  how 
these  increased  and  spread  themselves  throughout  different  countries. 
I  shall  tell  you  of  the  great  nations  that  have  existed,  of  the  great 
battles  that  have  been  fought,  and  of  the  deeds  of  celebrated  persons. 

5.  But,  before  I  proceed,  I  must  remind  you  that  the  world  is  round, 
and  that  men  and  animals  live  upon  the  surface;  that  the  face  of  the 

Questions  for  examination.  Chap.  I. — 1.  What  i9  history?  To  what  may  it  be  com 
pared?  2.  What  is  geography  ?  To  what  may  it  be  compared?  5.  What  is  the  shape 
of  the  earth?  Where  oo  men  and  animal.,  live  ?  How  is  the  face  of  the  land  divided? 
V.  i.ai  ;:rr.w  upon  the  land?     What  live  upon  Uie  land?     What  are  buill  upon  the  land? 


(0  INTRODUCTION. 

earth  is  divided  into  land  and  water ;  that  on  the  land,  trees,  grass, 
herbs,  and  flowers  grow  ;  that  on  the  land  men  and  animals  dwell 
that  on  the  land,  towns,  cities,  and  villages  are  built. 

6.  A  high  piece  of  land,  you  know,  is  called  a  mountain  or  hill ;  a 
low  piece  of  land  is  called  a  valley.  You  often  see  water  running  in 
a  stream  through  a  valley,  which  is  called  a  river;  and  you  some- 
times see  a  still  piece  of  water  surrounded  by  hills,  which  is  called  a 
lake. 

7.  About  one  third  of  the  face  of  the  earth  is  land,  and  tavo  thirds 
are  water.  The  land  is  divided  into  two  great  continents;  the 
western  continent  consists  of  North  and  South  America;  the  eastern 
continent  consists  of  Europe,  Africa,  and  Asia. 


CHAPTER  II.— INTRODUCTION  CONTINUED. 

The  Author  tells  how  the  World  is  divided  into  Land  and 

Water. 

1.  I  have  just  told  my  readers,  that  about  two  thirds  of  the  face 
of  the  earth  are  covered  with  water.  This  water  is  one  vast  salt  sea, 
hut  to  different  parts  of  it  we  give  different  names. 

2.  That  part  which  lies  between  America  and  Europe  is  called  the 
Atlantic  Ocean,  and  is  about  three  thousand  miles  wide  ;  that  part 
which  lies  between  America  and  Asia  is  called  the  Pacific  Ocean,  and 
is  about  ten  thousand  miles  Avide.  There  are  many  other  names  given 
to  other  parts  of  the  great  salt  sea. 

3.  Ships,  as  you  Avell  know,  sail  from  one  country  to  another  upon 
the  water,  and  in  this  way  a  great  deal  of  trade  or  commerce  is  car- 
ried on.  But,  as  mankind  live  on  the  land,  my  stories  will  chiefly  re- 
late to  what  has  happened  on  the  land. 

4.  I  suppose  you  have  heard  people  speak  of  the  four  quarters  of 
the  world.  By  this  they  mean  America,  Europe,  Africa,  and  Asia. 
Besides  these,  there  are  a  great  many  pieces  of  land  encircled  by 
water,  called  islands. 

5.  In  the  Pacific  Ocean  there  are  many  of  these,  the  inhabitants  of 
which  are  very  numerous.  These  islands  are  considered  a  fifth  di- 
vision of  the  world,  and  are  called  Oceania. 

6.  Now  what  I  am  going  to  tell  you  has  happened  in  these  differ- 
ent parts  of  the  world.  In  order  to  understand  my  stories,  it  is  ne- 
cessary you  should  look  over  the  maps  which  are  here  given.  These 
will  show  you  where  the  different  countries  are,  about  which  I  am 
going  to  speak. 

6.  AVliat  is  a  mountain  or  Mil?  A  valley  ?  A  river?  Lake?  7.  What  part  of  the  face 
of  the  earth  is  land?  What  portion  is  water?  How  is  the  land  divided?  What  of  the 
western  continent  ?  The  eastern  ?  Ch.  II. — 1.  What  of  the  great  mass  of  water  that 
covers  two  thirds  of  the  earth?  2.  What  of  the  Atlantic  Ocean  ?  The  Pacific?  3.  What 
of  ships?  What  of  the  laud  ?  4.  What  are  the  four  quarters  of  the  world  ?  What  is  an 
island  ?     5.  What,  of  Oceania  ? 


INTRODUCTION. 


11 


Map  of  the  Western  Hemisphere,  including  North  and  South  America. 


Questions  <m  (he  Map.— What  ocean  lies  east  of  America?  What  lies  west?  Into  what  two 
parts  is  America  nearly  divided?  T'-ll  the  direction  of  the  following  places  from  Boston: 
Cape  Horn:  Greenland;  Cape  Verde  Islands:  Rio  Janeiro;  Sandwich  Islands;  New  Zealand; 
Azores:  Mexico;  A*ia;  Kumschatka;  Iceland. 


12 


INTRODUCTION. 


Map  of  the  Eastern  Hemisphere  including  Europe,  Asia  and  Africa. 


Questau  m  the  J/ap.-What  ocean  lies  west  of  Europe?  Wfca*  hes  to  he  west  of  Afncft? 
What  to  the  south  of  Africa  and  Asia?  What  to  the  east  of  Asia?  „H^  Europe °™^ 
Which  way  si  it  from  Africa?  How  is  Africa  separated  from  Asia?  What  I »»«J**^" 
Africa  and  Europe?  Are  Europe  and  Asia  separated  by  water,  or  do  they  lie  together  in  one 
p^r0f  land?  How  U  Asia  bounded?  Point  you,  finger  toward  Asia  Toward  Europe. 
Toward  Africa. 


INTRODUCTION.  13 

CHAPTER  III.— INTRODUCTION  CONTINUED. 

About  the  Inhabitants  of  Asia,  Africa,  and  other  Coun- 
tries. 

1.  Before  I  proceed  farther,  I  must  tell  you  that  Asia  is  a  vasi 
country  with  a  multitude  of  cities,  occupied  by  a  great  many  differen> 
nations. 

.  2.  The  principal  of  these  nations  are  the  Tartars,  who  wander  from 
'place  to  place,  and  dwell  chiefly  in  tents;  the  Arabs,  who  have  large 
flocks  of  camels  and  fine  horses,  with  which  they  roam  over  the  des- 
ert; the  Hindoos,  or  inhabitants  of  India,  who  travel  about  on  ele- 
phants, and  worship  idols  ;  the  Persians,  who  are  very  fond  of  poetry 
and  have  splendid  palaces;  the  Chinese,  from  whom  we  get  tea;  and 
the  Turks,  who  sit  on  cushions  instead  of  chairs. 

3.  The  whole  population  of  Asia  is  about  four  hundred  millions, 
which  is'about  half  the  inhabitants  of  the  whole  globe.  It  has  ten 
times  as  many  people  as  the  whole  of  North  and  South  America  put 
together. 

4.  Africa,  you  know,  is  the  native  land  of  the  negroes.  It  has  a 
few  large  cities,  but  the  whole  number  of  people  is  but  sixty  millions. 

5.  Europe  is  divided  into  several  nations,  such  as  the  English, 
French,  Italians,  Spaniards,  Germans,  Russians,  and  others.  It  has 
many  fine  cities,  and  about  three  hundred  millions  of  inhabitants. 

6.  America  is  the  country  where  we  live.  It  has  some  large  cities, 
and  many  pleasant  towns  and  villages,  but  more  than  half  the  country 
is  uninhabited.     The  whole  population  is  about  forty  millions. 

7.  Oceania,  as  I  have  before  said,  consists  of  many  islands  in  the 
Pacific  Ocean.  Some  of  these,  as  Java,  Sumatra,  Borneo,  and  New 
Holland,  are  very  large,  the  latter  being  the  largest  island  on  the  globe. 
From  these  countries  we  get  pepper,  cloves,  coffee,  and  other  nice 
things.     The  whole  population  of  Oceania  is  about  twenty  millions. 


CHAPTER  IV.-INTRODUCTION  CONTINUED. 

About  the  different  Kinds  of  People  in  the  World. 

1.  Thus  you  see  that  the  whole  number  of  the  inhabitants  upon  lhe 
globe  is  about  ten  hundred  millions.  All  these  are  descended  from 
Adam  and  Eve,  whom  the  Bible  tells  us  lived  in  the  garden  of  Eden  ! 

Ch.  HI.— 1.  What  of  Asia?  2.  What  are  the  principal  nations  of  Asia  ?  8.  Popula- 
tion of  Asia?  4.  What  of  Africa?  Population?  5.  What  of  Europe  ?  Population? 
6  What  of  America?  Population?  7.  What  of  Oceania?  In  which  direction  are  the 
Oceanic  islands  from  New  York  ?  Whatdo  we  get  from  Oceanai?  Population?  When 
ere  the  Oceanic  islands?  Ch.  IV.— 1.  What  is  the  whole  population  of  the  globe  r  When 
did  Adam  and  Eve  live  ? 

2 


14  INTRODUCTION. 

2.  What  an  immense  family  to  have  proceeded  from  one  pair  !  You 
may  well  believe  that  it  has  taken  many  years  for  the  human  family 
to  increase  to  this  extent. 

3.  If  you  were  to  travel  in  different  countries,  you  would  observe 
that  the  inhabitants  differ  very  much  in  their  color,  dress,  and  mode 
of  living. 

4.  Some  have  dark  skins,  like  the  color  of  a  dead  leaf,  as  the 
American  Indians;  some  have  a  yellowish  or  olive  color,  like  the 
Chinese;  some  are  of  a  deep,  sooty  brown,  like  the  Hindoos;  some 
are  black,  like  the  negroes,  and  some  are  white,  like  the  English,  and 
the  people  of  the  United  States. 

5.  In  some  countries  the  people  live  in  huts  huilt  of  mud  or  sticks, 
and  subsist  by  hunting  with  the  bow  and  arrow.  These  are  said  to 
be  in  the  savage  state.  Our  American  Indians,  soma  of  the  negroes 
of  Africa,  some  of  the  inhabitants  of  Asia,  and  most  of  the  Oceanians, 
are  savages. 

6.  In  some  countries  the  people  live  in  houses  partly  of  stone  and 
mud.  They  have  few  books,  no  churches  or  meetinghouses,  and 
worship  idols.  Such  are  most  of  the  negroes  of  Africa,  and  many 
tribes  in  Asia.  These  are  said  to  be  in  the  barbarous  state,  and  are 
often  called  barbarians.     Many  of  their  customs  are  very  cruel. 

7.  In  some  countries  the  inhabitants  live  in  tolerable  houses,  and 
the  rich  have  fine  palaces.  The  people  have  many  ingenious  arts, 
but  the  schools  are  poor,  and  but  a  small  portion  are  taught  to  read 
and  write.  The  Chinese,  the  Hindoos,  the  Turks,  and  some  other 
nations  of  Asia,  with  some  of  the  inhabitants  of  Africa  and  Europe, 
are  in  this  condition,  which  may  be  called  a  civilized  state. 

8.  In  many  parts  of  Europe,  and  in  the  United  States,  the  people 
live  in  good  houses,  they  have  good  furniture,  many  books,  good 
schools,  churches,  meetinghouses,  steamboats,  and  railroads.  These 
are  in  the  highest  state  of  civilization. 

9.  Thus  you  observe  that  mankind  may  be  divided  into  four  class- 
es;— those  who  are  in  the  savage  state,  those  who  are  in  a  barbarous 
state,  those  who  are  merely  civilized,  and  those  who  are  in  the  high- 
est state  of  civilization. 


CHAPTER  V.-ASIA. 

About  the  Climate,  Productions,  Mountains,  People,  and 
Animals,  of  Asia,  and  other  Things. 

1.  I  have  already  said  that  Asia  is  a  vast  country,  containing  a 
great  many  cities,  and  a  multitude  of  inhabitants.     It  lies  on  the  op- 

3.  What  would  you  observe  in  travelling  through  different  countries  ?  5.  What  of  peo- 
ple in  the  savage  state  ?  6.  What  of  people  in  the  barbarous  state?  7.  What  of  people 
in  the  civilized  state  ?  S.  What  of  people  in  the  highest  state  of  civilization  ?  9.  Into 
What  four  classes  may  mankind  be  divided  ?     Ch.  V. — 1.  What  of  Asia  ?    Where  is  Asia 


ASIA. 


15 


posite  side  of  the  earth  from  us,  and  you  may  go  to  it  by  crossing  ihe 
Pacific  Ocean  on  the  west,  or  crossing  the  Atlantic  and  Europe  on  the 
east,  i 


> 


z2^ 


2.  In  the  southern  portion  of  Asia  the  climate  is  warm,  as  in  our 
southern  states.  These  parts  are  chiefly  inhabited  by  the  Chinese, 
Hindoos,  Persians,  Arabians,  and  Turks.  In  many  places  the  country 
is  fertile ;  and  in  the  valleys,  beautiful  flowers,  spicy  shrubs,  and  fra- 
grant trees  are  found. 

3.  Wild  birds  of  the  most  brilliant  colors  are  often  seen  in  the  for- 
ests. Peacocks,  pheasants,  and  our  domestic  fowls  are  natives  of 
these  sunny  regions.  Oranges  grow  wild  in  some  parts,  and  many 
of  our  most  splendid  garden  flowers  are  to  be  found  growing  on  the 
hills  and  in  the  valleys  of  Southern  Asia. 

4.  In  the  centre  of  Asia,  there  are  some  mountains  whose  tops  are 
covered  with  everlasting  snow.  These  are  the  loftiest  peaks  in  the 
world,  and  are  nearly  six  miles  in  height.  To  the  north  of  these  is  a 
cold  region,  where  there  are  vast  plains  with  scattered  tribes  of  Tar- 
tars roaming  over  them  for  the  scanty  pastures  they  afford  for  their 
camels  and  horses. 

5.  In  these  gloomy  tracts,  there  are  few  towns  or  cities.  The  in- 
habitants are  for  the  most  part  wanderers,  who  build  no  houses,  but 
dwell  in  tents,  and  live  upon  the  milk  and  flesh  of  their  flocks.  They 
also  hunt  the  wild  deer,  antelopes,  and  other  animals  that  are  found 
in  these  regions. 

6.  The  native  animals  of  Asia  are  many  of  them  very  remarkable 
The  elephant  is  found  in  the  thickets,  the  rhinoceros  along  the  banks 
of  rivers,  the  lion  in  the  plains,  the  roy&l  tiger  in  the  forests,  monkeys 
and  apes  of  many  kinds  abound  in  the  hot  parts,  and  serpents  thirty 
feet  in  length  are  sometimes  met  with. 


How  can  you  go  lo  it?  Point  your  finder  towards  Asia.  2.  Climate  of  Southern  Alia? 
What  nationf  Ihe  in  Southern  Asia  i  Productions?  3.  Birds?  Fruits?  Flowers  >  4.  Moun- 
tains?    What  of  Northern  Asia?     5.  Inhabitants  ?     6.  Animals  of  Asia  ? 


16 


CHOOL     HISTORY. 


Map  of  Asia. 


ft  5«  INte^s^^^ 

y 

:■■■  -■•<, 


Questions  cm  the  Map. — How  is  Asia  bounded  on  the  north?  East?  South?  West?  Which 
■way  is  Asia  from  Europe?  In  what  part  of  Asia  is  Persia?  In  which  direction  from  Persia  is 
Arabia?  Hindostan?  China?  Tartary?  Siberia?  Red  Sea?  Egypt?  Mediterranean  Sea? 
In  what  part  of  Asia  is  the  river  Euphrates? 


ASIA.  17 

7.  In  the  southern  portions  of  Asia,  hurricanes  are  common  ;  and 
these  sometimes  are  so  violent  as  to  overturn  the  houses,  rend  the  for- 
ests in  pieces,  and  scatter  ruin  and  desolation  over  the  land.  The 
countrv  is  often  parched  with  drought,  and  destructive  famine  follows. 
Sometimes  millions  of  locusts  come  borne  upon  the  wind,  and  devour 
every  green  thing,  so  that  nothing  is  left  for  man  or  beast.  Pestilence 
often  visits  the  people,  aud  sweeps  away  thousands  upon  thousands. 

8.  Such  is  Asia,  a  land  of  wonders  both  in  its  geography  and  his- 
tory. It  is  the  largest  of  the  four  quarters  of  the  globe;  it  contains 
the  loftiest  mountains,  it  affords  the  greatest  variety  of  animal  aud 
vegetable  productions,  and  the  seasons  here  display  at  once  their 
most  beautiful  and  their  most  fearful  works. 

9.  Asia,  too,  is  the  most  populous  quarter  of  the  globe;  it  contain- 
ed the  first  human  inhabitants,  and  from  this  quarter,  all  the  rest  of 
the  globe  has  been  peopled.  Here,  too,  the  most  remarkable  events 
took  place  that  belong  to  the  history  of  man.  Here  the  most  won- 
derful personages  were  born  that  have  ever  trod  this  earth  ;  and  here, 
too,  the  mighty  miracles  of  Jehovah  were  wrought. 


CHAPTER  VI.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

About  the  Creation.      The  Deluge. 

1.  The  first  portion  of  the  world  inhabited  by  mankind,  was  Asia  ; 
the  next  was  Africa ;  the  next  was  Europe,  and  the  last  was  America. 
How  long  it  is  since  this  last  country  was  first  peopled  by  the  Indians, 
we  do  not  know ;  but  the  first  white  people  came  here  not  quite  three 
hundred  and  fifty  years  since. 

"^2.  Let  us  now  go  back  to  the  creation  of  the  world.  This  wonder- 
ful event  took  place  about  six  thousand  years  ago.  The  story  of  it 
is  beautifully  told  in  the  first  chapter  of  Genesis. 

3.  Adam  and  Eve  were  created  in  Asia,  and  were  placed  in  the 
garden  of  Eden,  not  far  from  the  river  Euphrates.  This  river  is  in 
the  western  part  of  Asia,  and  is  about  six  thousand  miles  in  an  east- 
erly direction  from  New  York  and  Boston.^. 

4.  Adam  and  Eve  were  for  a  time  the  only  human  beings  on  this 
vast  globe.  Yet  they  did  not  feel  alone,  for  God  was  with  them.  At 
length  they  had  children,  and  in  the  course  of  "ears  thoir  descendants 
were  very  numerous. 

7.  Southern  parts  of  Asia?  8.  For  what  is  Asia  very  remarkable  as  to  its  geography? 
9.  For  what  is  Asia  reiy  remarkable  as  to  its  history?  Ch.  VI. — 1.  Which  quarter  of  the 
globe  was  first  inhabited?  Which  quarter  was  next  inhabited  ?  Which  next?  Which 
quarter  was  inhabited  last?  When  was  America  first  peopled  by  the  Indians?  Wlien  by 
white  people  ?  i.  How  lone  is  it  since  the  world  was  created  ?  Tell  the  story  of  Ihe  cre- 
ation, as  related  in  the  first  chanter  of  Genesis.  3.  Where  did  Adam  and  Eve  live  ?  Where 
it  ill-  river  Euphrates?  How  far  is  it  from  New  York?  Which  >yay  (Yum  Boston?  What 
oc'in  viuld  voucroM  in  going  to  the  river  Ennliratcj? 

2* 


18  SCHOOL    HISTORY, 

5.  These  dwelt  m  tne  neighborhood  of  the  Euphrates,  and  hers 
they  built  towns,  cities,  and  villages.  But  they  became  very  wicked. 
They  forgot  to  worship  God,  and  Avere  unjust  and  cruel. 

6.  The  Creator  therefore  determined  to  cut  off  the  whole  human 
family,  with  the  exception  of  Noah  and  his  children,  both  as  a  pun- 
ishment to  the  disobedient,  and  as  a  warning  to  all  future  nations  that 
evil  must  follow  sin. 

7.  Noah  was  told  of  the  coming  destruction,  and  therefore  built  an 
ark,  into  Avhich  he  gathered  his  family,  and  a  single  pair  of  the  vari- 
ous kinds  of  land  animals.  It  then  began  to  rain,  until  all  the  coun- 
tries of  the  earth  were  covered  with  a  deluge  of  water. 

S.  Thus  all  the  nations  were  cut  off,  and  the  world  once  more  had 
but  a  single  human  family  upon  it.  This  event  occurred  sixteen  hun- 
dred and  fifty-six  years  after  the  creation. 


CHAPTER  VII.-ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Flow  Noah  and  his  family  came  out  of  the  Ark.  How 
the  People  settled  in  the  Land  of  Shinar.  About 
Babel. 

1.  The  people  who  lived  before  the  flood  are  called  antediluvians. 
We  know  nothing  about  them  except  Avhat  is  told  in  the  Bible.  It 
is  probable  that  they  extended  over  but  a  small  part  of  Asia,  and 
that  no  human  beings  dwelt  either  in  Africa,  Europe,  or  America, 
before  the  flood. 

2.  The  deluge  is  supposed  to  have  commenced  in  November,  and 
the  rain  is  thought  to  have  ceased  in  March.  After  a  Avhile  the 
Avaters  subsided,  and  Noah's  ark  rested  upon  the  top  of  a  tall  moun- 
tain in  Armenia,  called  Ararat,  Avhich  is  still  to  be  seen. 

'A.  The  people  and  animals  noAV  came  out  of  the  ark,  and  from 
them  the  world  Avas  again  stocked  Avith  inhabitants.  The  animals 
spread  themselves  abroad,  and  after  many  centuries  they  Avere  ex- 
tended into  all  countries. 

4.  Noah  had  three  sons,  Shem,  Ham,  and  Japheth.  These,  with 
their  families,  proceeded  to  the  country  of  Shinar,  Avh:ch  lies  to  the 
south  of  Mount  Ararat. 

5.  Here  they  settled  themselves  on  the  borders  of  the  river  Eu- 
phrates, probably  the  same  country  that  had  been  inhabited  by  the 
antediluvians.     It  is  in  this  region  that  the  first  nations  Avere  formed. 

5.  Where  did  the  descendants  of  Adam  and  Eve  dwell  ?  What  did  they  do  ?  6.  Wha< 
did  God  determine  to  do?  Why  did  God  determine  to  destroy  mankind?  7.  What  ol' 
Noah?  Describe  the  deluge.  8.  What  was  the  effect  of  the  deluge?  When' did  the  deluge 
take  place?  Ch.  VII. — 1.  AVhat  of  those  who  lived  before  tire  flood?  When  did  the 
deluge  begin  and  end?  What  of  Mount  Ararat?  3  AVhat  of  the  people  that  came  out 
jf  the  ark?  The  animals?  4.  AVhat  three  sons  had  Noah  ?  AVhat  did  the  descendant! 
of  Noah  do?     5.  Where  did  they  settle  ?     Where  was  the  land  of  Shinar? 


20  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

6.  The  people  increased  very  rapidly,  and,  at  the  end  of  a  hundretl 
years  from  the  deluge,  they  were  quite  numerous.  Most  of  Noahs 
family  were  at  this  time  alive.  They  had  told  their  descendants 
how  the  world  had  been  overflowed  wiih  water,  which  destroyed 
all  the  land  animals,  and  all  the  people,  except  those  that  were  in 
the  ark. 

7.  All  who  remembered  the  deluge,  or  had  heard  of  it,  were  afraid 
that  the  wickedness  of  mankind  would  again  be  punished  in  a  stmi- 

ar  way.     They  therefore  resolved  to  build  a  tower,  that  they  might 
mount  upon  it,  and  save  themselves  from  destruction. 

S.  Accordingly  they  laid  the  foundation  of  the  edifice  on  the 
eastern  bank  of  the  river  Euphrates.  Perhaps  they  expected  to 
rear  the  tower  so  high,  that  its  top  would  touch  the  blue  sky,  and 
enable  them  to  climb  into  heaven. 

9.  Their  building  materials  were  bricks  that  had  been  baked  in 
the  sun.  Instead  of  mortar,  they  cemented  the  bricks  together  with 
a  sort  of  slime  or  pitch. 

10.  The  workmen  labored  very  diligently,  and  piled  one  layer  of 
bricks  upon  another,  till  the  earth  was  a  considerable  distance  be- 
neath them.  But  the  blue  sky,  and  the  sun,  and  the  stars  seemed 
as  far  off  as  when  they  first  began. 


CHAPTER  VIIL— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

More  about  Babel. 

1.  One  day,  while  these  foolish  people  were  at  their  labor,  a  very 
wonderful  thing  took  place.  They  were  talking  together  as  usual, 
but,  all  of  a  sudden,  they  found  it  impossible  to  understand  what 
each  other  said. 

2.  If  any  of  the  workmen  called  for  bricks,  their  companions  at 
the  bottom  of  the  tower  might  mistake  their  meaning,  and  bring 
them  pitch.  If  they  asked  for  one  sort  of  tool,  another  sort  was 
given  them.  Their  words  appeared  to  be  mere  sounds  without  any 
sense,  like  the  babble  of  a  little  child,  before  it  has  been  taught  to 
speak. 

3.  This  event  caused  such  confusion  that  they  could  not  go  on 
building  the  tower.  They  therefore  gave  up  the  idea  of  climbing 
to  heaven,  and  resolved  to  wander  to  different  parts  of  the  earth. 

4.  It  is  likely  that  they  formed  themselves  into  several  parties, 
consisting  of  all  who  could  talk  intelligibly  together.  They  set  forth 
on  their  journey  in  various  directions. 

5.  As  each  company  departed,  they  probably  threw  a  sad  glance 

d.  What  of  the  people?  7.  Why  did  they  resolve  to  build  the  tower  of  Babel? 
f.  Describe  the  building  of  the  tower.  Ch.  VIII. — 1.  Describe  the  confusion  of  liiu 
guages,     3,  What  was  the  consequence  of  this  confusion  of  languages  ? 


ASIA.  o  J 

behind  them  at  the  tower  of  Babel.  The  sun  was  perhaps  shining 
on  its  lofty  summit,  as  it  seemed  to  rise  into  the  very  midst  of  the 
sky;  and  we  may  believe  that  it  was  long  remembered  by  these 
exiles  from  their  country. 

6.  The  descendants  of  Shem  are  supposed  to  have  distributed 
themselves  over  the  country  near  to  the  Euphrates.  The  descend- 
ants of' Ham  took  a  westerly  direction,  and  proceeded  to  Africa. 
They  settled  in  Egvpt,  and  laid  the  foundation  of  a  great  nation  there. 
The  descendants  of  Japheth  proceeded  to  Greece,  and  thus  laid  the 
foundation  of  several  European  nations. 

7.  Some  travellers  in  modern  times  have  discovered  a  large  hillock 
on  the  shore  of  the  Euphrates.     It  is  composed  of  sun-burnt  bricks, 
cemented  together  with  pitch.     They  believe  this  hillock  to  be  the-- 
ruins  of  the  tower  of  Babel,  which  was  built  more  than  four  thousand 
jrears  ago. 


CHAPTER  IX.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

About  the  great  Assyrian  Empire,  and  the  Reign  of 
Queen,  Semiramis. 

1.  When  the  rest  of  mankind  were  scattered  into  different,  parts 
of  the  earth,  there  were  a  number  of  people  who  remained  near  the 
tower  of  Babel.  They  continued  to  inhabit  the  land  of  Shinar,  Avhich 
was  a  warm  country,  and  very  fertile.  In  the  course  of  time  they 
extended  over  a  much  larger  tract  of  country,  and  built  towns  and 
cities. 

2.  This  region  received  the  name  of  Assyria.  It  was  the  first  of 
the  nations  of  the  earth.  Its  boundaries  varied  at  different  times,  but 
its  place  on  the  map  may  be  seen  in  the  vicinity  of  the  two  rivers 
Tigris  and  Euphrates,  northward  of  the  Persian  Gulf. 

[i.  Ashur,  the  grandson  of  Noah,  was  t lie  first  ruler  of  Assyria 
In  the  year  2229,  B.  C.,  he  built  the  city  of  Nineveh,  and  surrounded 
it  with  walls  a  hundred  feet  high.  It  was  likewise  defended  by 
fifteen  hundred  towers,  each  two  hundred  feet  in  height.  The  city 
was  so  lar^e,  that  a  person  would  have  travelled  a  hundred  miles 
merely  in  walking  round  it. 

4.  But  the  city  of  Babylon,  which  was  built  a  short  time  afterwards, 
was  superior  to  Nineveh,  both  in  size  and  beauty.  It  was  situaud 
on   the  river  Euphrates.     The    walls  were  so  very  thick   that  six 

6.  What  of  the  descendants  of  Shem  .'  Of  Ham  ?  Of  Japheth  ?  7.  What  have  some 
travellers  discovered  ?  What  is  the  hillock  supposed  to  be?  Ch.  IX. — 1.  Did  all  the 
people  leave  the  land  of  Shinar  -.Hut  the  confusion  of  languages?  Did  the  people  of  the 
land  of  Shinar  increase?  What  did  they  do  ?  i.  What  name  did  the  country  around 
Shinar  receive  ?  What  was  the  first  empire  or  great  nation  of  the  earth  ■  fn  which  direc- 
tion was  Assyria  from  the  Fenian  Gulf?  Which  way  from  the  Mediterranean  Sea? 
Which  way  from  Egypt?  3.  Who  was  the  first  ruler  of  Assyria  ?  What  city  did  he 
kuild?     Describe  the  city  of  Nineveh.     4.  Where  was  the   city  of  liabyVn .' 


22  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

chariots  drawn  by  horses  could  be  driven  abreast  upon  the  top,  with- 
out  danger  of  falling  off  on  either  side.  In  this  country  we  do  not 
surround  our  cities  with  walls ;  but  in  ancient  times  walls  were 
necessary  to  protect  the  people  from  their  enemies. 

5.  In  this  city  there  were  magnificent  gardens,  belonging  to  the 
royal  palace.  They  were  constructed  in  such  a  manner  that  they 
appeared  to  be  hanging  in  the  air  without  resting  on  the  earth. 
They  contained  large  trees,  and  all  kinds  of  fruits  and  flowers. 

6.  There  was  also  a  splendid  temple  dedicated  to  Belus,  or  Baal, 
who  was  the  chief  idol  of  the  Assyrians.  This  temple  was  six  hun- 
dred and  sixty  feet  high,  and  it  contained  a  golden  image  of  Belus 
forty  feet  in  height. 

7.  The  city  of  Babylon,  which  I  have  been  describing,  was  first 
built  by  Nimrod,  that  mighty  hunter,  of  whom  the  Bible  tells  us. 
But  the  person  who  made  the  beautiful  gardens  and  palaces,  and  who 
set  up  the  golden  image  of  Belus,  was  a  woman,  named  Semiramis. 

8.  She  had  been  the  wife  of  Ninus,  king  of  Assyria ;  but,  when 
king  Ninus  died,  queen  Semiramis  became  sole  ruler  of  the  empire. 
She  was  an  ambitious  woman,  and  could  not  content  herself  to  live 
quietly  in  Babylon,  although  she  had  taken  so  much  pains  to  make 
it  a  beautiful  city. 

9.  She  was  tormented  with  a  wicked  desire  to  conquer  all  the 
nations  of  the  earth.  So  she  collected  an  immense  army,  and 
marched  against  the  rich  and  powerful  king  of  the  Indies,  who  lived 
in  what  we  now  call  Hindostan,  a  country  lying  to  the  southeast  of 
Assyria. 


CHAPTER  X.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Queen  Semiramis  sets  forth  to  conquer  the  world,  but  is 
defeated  by  the  King  of  the  Indies.  ' 

1.  When  the  king  of  the  Indies,  who  was  very  rich  and  powerful, 
heard  that  queen  Semiramis  was  coming  to  invade  his  dominions,  he 
mustered  a  vast  number  of  men  to  defend  them.  Besides  his  soldiers, 
he  had  a  great  many  elephants. 

2.  Each  of  these  enormous  beasts  was  worth  a  Avhole  regiment  of 
soldiers.  They  were  taught  to  rush  into  the  battle,  and  toss  the 
enemy  about  with  their  trunks,  and  trample  them  down  with  their 
hu<re  feet. 


Describe  this  wonderful  city.  Why  did  the  ancients  surround  their  cities  with  walls  ? 
6.  What  of  the  hanging  gardens  ?  6.  The  temple  of  Belus?  7.  Who  built  Babylon: 
Who  made  the  hanging  gardens,  the  image  of  Belus,  &c.  ?  S.  What  of  Semiramis? 
Was  she  contented  with  Babylon  ?  9.  What  foolish  and  wicked  desire  had  she?  What 
did  she  do  ?  Where  did  the  king  of  the  Indies  live  ?  In  which  direction  was  India  from 
Assyria  ?  Ch.  X. — 1.  What  did  the  lung  of  the  Indies  do  when  he  heard  that  Semiiamis 
was  going  to  make  war  upon  his  kingdom  ?       What  sort  of  an  army  had  he  ?       2.  What  ol 

(l.r-.    /-..I.. ,.l. .,n»s  > 


a  s  syria.  23 

3.  Now  queen  Semiramis  had  no  elephants,  and  therefore  she  was 
afraid  that  the  king  of  the  Indies  would  overcome  her.  She  endea- 
vored to  prevent  this  misfortune  by  a  very  curious  contrivance.  In 
the  first  place,  she  ordered  three  thousand  brown  oxen  to  be  killed. 

4.  The  hides  of  the  dead  oxen  were  stripped  off,  and  sewed  to- 
gether in  the  shape  of  elephants.  These  were  placed  upon  camels, 
and  when  the  camels  were  drawn  up  in  battle  array,  they  looked 
pretty  much  like  a  troop  of  great  brown  elephants.  Doubtless  the 
king  of  the  Indies  Avondered  where  queen  Semiramis  had  caught 
them. 

5.  When  the  battle  was  to  be  fought,  the  king  of  the  Indies  with 
his  real  elephants  marched  forward  on  one  side,  and  queen  Semira- 
mis, with  her  camels  and  ox-hides,  came  boldly  against  him  on  the 
other. 

6.  But  when  the  Assyrian  army  had  marched  close  to  the  host  of 
the  Indians,  the  latter  perceived  that  there  was  no  such  thing  as  an 
elephant  among  them.  They  therefore  laid  aside  all  fear,  and  rushed 
furiously  upon  queen  Semiramis  and  her  soldiers. 

7.  The  real  elephants  .put  the  camels  to  flight;  and  then,  in  a 
great  rage,  they  ran  about,  tossing  the  Assyrians  into  the  air,  and 
trampling  them  down  by  hundreds.  Thus  the  Assyrian  army  was 
routed,  and  the  king  of  the  Indies  gained  a  complete  victory. 

8.  Queen  Semiramis  was  sorely  wounded;  but  she  got  into  a 
chariot,  and  drove  away  at  full  speed  from  the  battle-field.  She 
finally  escaped  to  her  own  kingdom,  but  in  a  very  sad  condition. 

9.  She  then  took  up  her  residence  in  the  palace  at  Babylon.  But 
she  did  not  long  enjoy  herself  in  the  beautiful  gardens  which  she 
had  suspended  in  the  air.  It  is  said  that  her  own  son,  whose  name 
was  Ninias,  put  his  mother  to  death,  that  he  might  get  possession  of 
the  throne,  and  reign  over  the  people. 

10.  Such  was  the  melancholy  end  of  the  mighty  queen  Semiramis. 
How  foolish  and  wicked  it  was  for  her  to  spend  her  life  in  trying  to 
conquer  other  nations,  instead  of  making  her  own  people  happy. 
But  she  had  not  learned  that  golden  rule,  "Do  to  another  as  you 
would  have  another  do  to  you." 


CHAPTER  XI.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

About  Ninias.     Reign  of  Sardanapalus,  and  Ruin  of 
the  Assyrian  Empire. 

1.  After  Ninias  had  wickedly  murdered  his  mother,  he  became 
kinj  of  Assyria.  His  reign  began  about  the  year  2000,  B.  C,  or 
about  three  hundred  and  fifty  years  after  the  deluge. 


3.  By  what  contrivance  did  Semiramis  endeavor  to  match  the  elephants  of  the  king  of 
India  ?  5.  Describe  the  buttle.  7.  What  was  the  result  of  the  baUle?  8.  What  of  Sen  i- 
ra.r.u:  0.  What  was  her  fate. ?    Ch.  XI.— I.Whatof  Ninias?    When  did  his  .reign  b«Si„? 


24  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

2.  Ninias  was  not  only  a  very  wicked  man,  but  a  very  slothful  one 
He  did  not  set  out  to  conquer  kingdoms  like  his  mother,  but  shut 
himself  up  in  his  palace,  and  thought  of  nothing  but  how  to  enjoy 
himself. 

3.  He  knew  that  his  people  hated  him  ;  and  therefore  he  kept 
guards  in  his  palace ;  but  he  was  afraid  to  trust  even  his  guards. 
Whether  he  was  murdered  at  last,  or  whether  he  died  quietly  in  his 
bed,  is  more  than  I  can  tell,  for  history  does  not  inform  us. 

4.  After  the  reign  of  Ninias,  there  was  an  interval  of  eight  hundred 
years,  during  which  it  is  impossible  to  say  what  happened  in  the 
kingdom  of  Assyria.  It  is  probable  that  most  of  the  kings  were  like 
Ninias,  that  they  wasted  their  time  in  idle  pleasures,  and  never  did 
anything  worthy  of  remembrance. 

5.  Some  years  afterwards,  there  was  a  king  upon  the  throne  of 
Assyria  whose  name  was  Sardanapalus.  He  is  said  to  have  been  a 
beautiful  young  man ;  but  he  was  slothful,  and  took  no  care  of  his 
kingdom,  and  made  no  attempt  to  promote  the  welfare  of  his  people. 

6.  He  never  went  outside  of  his  palace,  but  lived  all  the  time  among 
the  women.  And  in  order  to  make  himself  more  fit  for  their  company, 
he  painted  his  face,  and  sometimes  put  on  a  woman's  dress.  In  this 
ridiculous  guise,  the  great  king  Sardanapalus  used  to  sit  down  with 
the  women,  and  help  them  to  spin. 

7.  But  while  Sardanapalus  was  feasting,  and  dancing,  and  painting 
his  face,  and  dressing  himself  like  a  woman,  and  helping  the  women 
to  spin,  a  terrible  destruction  was  impending  over  his  head. 

8.  Arbaces,  governor  of  the  Medes,  made  war  against  this  unworthy 
monarch,  and  besieged  him  in  the  city  of  Babylon.  Sardanapalus  saw 
that  he  could  not  escape,  and  that,  if  he  lived  any  longer,  he  should 
probably  become  a  slave. 

9.  So,  rather  than  be  a  slave,  he  resolved  to  die.  He  therefore 
collected  his  treasures,  and  heaped  them  into  one  great  pile  in  a 
splendid  hall  of  his  palace,  and  then  set  fire  to  the  pile.  The  palace 
was  speedily  in  a  blaze,  and  Sardanapalus,  with  his  favorite  officers, 
and  a  multitude  of  beautiful  women,  were  burnt  to  death  in  the 
flames. 

10.  Thus  ended  the  First  Assyrian  Empire,  the  first  that  makes  a 
figure  in  history.  After  a  time,  a  new  empire  arose  of  which  Nineveh 
was  the  capital.  This  is  called  the  Second  Assyrian  Empire.  The 
kings  of  this,  made  war  on  the  Jews,  and  are  often  mentioned  in  the 
Bible.     This  was  destroyed  in  the  year  606,  B.  C. 

2.  What  was  his  character  ?  What  did  he  do  ?  3.  What  else  of  Ninias  ?  i.  What  of 
Assyria  for  eight  hundred  years  after  Ninias?  5.  What  of  Sardanapalus?  6.  How  did  ho 
live?  8.  What  of  Arbaces?  9.  What  did  Sardanapalus  do?  10.  What  was  the  end  of  the 
Assyrian  empire  ?  Do  you  think  it  was  right  for  Sardanapalus  to  live  only  for  his  own 
pleasure,  and  not  try  to  make  his  people  happy?  Does  not  his  story  show  that  even  a  king 
•anjiot  be  idle  without  bringing  destruction  upon  his  people,  and  misery  upon  khnaelf  ? 


THE    HEBREWS.  25 


CHAPTER  XII.-ASIA  CONTINUED. 

About  the  Hebrews  or  Jews.      Origin  of  the  Hebrews. 
The  Removal  of  Jacob  and  his  Children  to  Egypt. 

1.  The  founder  of  the  Hebrew  nation  was  Abraham,  the  son  o. 
Terah.  He  was  born  about  two  hundred  years  after  the  deluge. 
The  country  of  his  birth  was  Chaldea,  which  formed  the  southern 
part  of  the  Assyrian  empire. 

2.  The  rest  of  the  inhabitants  of  Chaldea  were  idolaters,  and  wor- 
shipped the  sun,  moon,  and  stars;  but  Abraham  worshipped  the  true 
God  whom  we  worship.  In  the  early  part  of  his  liie  he  was  a 
shepherd  on  the  Chaldean  plains.  When  his  father  was  dead,  God 
commanded  him  to  leave  his  native  country,  and  travel  westward  to 
the  land  of  Canaan. 

3.  This  region  Avas  afterwards  called  Palestine.  It  lies  north  of 
Arabia,  is  on  the  eastern  border  of  the  Mediterranean  sea,  and  is 
nearly  six  thousand  miles  southeasterly  from  New  York.  It  Avas  a 
rich  and  fertile  country  ;  and  God  promised  Abraham,  that  his  de- 
scendants should  dwell  there. 

4.  Many  years  of  Abraham's  life  were  spent  in  wandering  to  and 
fro.  His  wife  Sarah  went  with  him,  and  they  were  followed  by  a 
large  number  of  male  and  female  servants,  and  by  numerous  Hocks 
and  herds.     They  dwelt  in  tents,  and  had  no  settled  home. 

5.  Abraham  and  Sarah  had  one  son,  named  Isaac.  His  father 
loved  him  fondly;  but,  when  God  commanded  him  to  sacrifice  the 
child,  he  prepared  to  obey.  But  an  angel  came  down  from  heaven, 
and  told  him  not  to  slay  his  son. 

6.  The  life  of  Abraham  was  full  of  interesting  events,  but  I  have 
not  room  to  relate  them  all  here.  He  lived  to  be  a  hundred  and 
seventy-five  years  old,  and  then  died  at  Hebron,  in  Canaan.  His 
burial-place  was  in  a  cave  at  Machpelah  where  Sarah  had  been 
buried,  many  years  before. 

7.  The  Jews  and  the  Arabians  are  descended  from  this  ancient  pa- 
triarch. They  have  always  called  him  Father  Abraham.  It  is  said, 
that  to  this  day,  they  show  the  place  where  Abraham  and  Sarah  lie 
buried,  and  that  they  consider  it  a  holy  spot.  Many  travellers  at  the 
present  day  go  to  see  it. 

8.  Isaac,  the  son  of  Abraham,  left  two  children,  Esau  and  Jacob. 

Ch.  XII. — 1  What  of  Abraham  ?  When  was  he  born?  How  long  ago?  Ans.  Nearly 
four  thousand  years.  What  was  the  native  country  of  Abraham?  '-i.  What  of  the  worship 
of  the  Chaldeans?  Of  Abraham?  What  of  the  early  life  of  Abraham?  What  did  God 
command  Abraham  to  do  ?  Which  way  was  Canaan  from  Chaldea?  How  far  was  Chal- 
dea fp'iu  I  naan?  Ani.  About  five  hundred  miles.  U.  Where  is  the  laud  of  Canaan? 
What  is  it  new  called  ?  Which  way  is  it  from  where  you  live  ?  How  would  you  go  to  the 
land  of  Canaan  or  Paleatine  ?  Ans.  In  a  ship  across  the  Atlantic  Ocean  and  the  Mediter- 
ranean Sea.  4.  What  of  the  life  of  Abraham  ?  Who  went  with  him  from  Chaldea  to  Ca- 
naan ?  5.  What  of  Isaac?  6.  What  else  of  Abraham  :  7.  What  of  the  Jew* '  3  What 
ol    Isaac  .' 


26 


SCHOOL    HISTORY 


The  younger,  Jacob,  persuaded  his  brother  to  sell  his  birthright  for  a 
mess  of  pottage.  He  likewise  obtained  a  blessing,  which  his  father 
intended  to  bestow  on  Esau. 

9.  Jacob  had  twelve  sons,  whose  names  were  Reuben,  Simeon, 
Levi,  Dan,  Juda,  Naphthali,  Gad,  Ashur,  Issachar,  Zebulon,  Joseph, 
ftnd  Benjamin.  The  posterity  of  each  of  these  twelve  afterwards  be- 
came a  separate  tribe  among  the  Hebrews. 

10.  My  young  reader  must  look  into  the  Bible  for  the  beautiful  sto- 
ry of  Joseph  and  his  brethren.  I  can  merely  tell  him  that  Joseph 
was  sold  into  captivity  and  carried  into  the  land  of  Egypt,  and  that 
there  he  was  the  means  of  preserving  his  aged  father  and  all  his 
brothers  from  death  by  famine.     He  died  16o'5  B.  C. 

11.  Jacob  and  his  twelve  children  removed  to  Egypt,  and  took  up 
their  residence  there.  It  was  in  that  country,  that  the  Hebrews  first 
began  to  be  a  nation;  so  that  their  history  may  be  said  to  commence 
from  this  period.     Jacob  died  1689  B.  C. 


CHAPTER  XIII.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 


The  Bondage  in  Egypt.     Flight  of  the  Hebrews,  and 
Destruction  of  Pharaoh  and  his  Host. 


The  Pyramids,  and  a  great  Stone  Head,  called  the  Sphynx. 

2.  Egypt,  you  know,  is  in  Africa.     It  has  many  cities,  and  a  famous 
iiver  called  the  Nile  runs  through  the  country.     But  this  land  is  less 

S.  What  did  Esau  do?  What  is  meant  by  birthright?  Ans.  The  eldest  son  in  ancient 
times  enjoyed  many  privileges  over  his  younger  brothers.  These  Esau  sold  to  Jacob  for 
a  single  meal  of  victuals.  Thus  .Jacob  became  the  head  of  the  Jewish  people.  9.  Who 
were  the  twelve  sons  of  Jacob  ?  What  of  the  descendants  of  these  twelve  sons  of  Jacob  ? 
10.  Can  you  tell  the  story  of  Joseph  as  related  in  Genesis,  chap.  .T7,  &c?  11.  When-  did 
Jacob  go  wkh  hij  family?  Which  way  was  Egypt  from  Canaan?  How  for?  Ans.  About 
(wo  hundred  miles. 


THE    HEBREWS.  07 

populous  now  than  in  the  time  of  Joseph.  It  was  then  lull  of  people, 
and  they  were  the  most  learned  and  civilized  of  all  the  nations  of  the 
earth.  There  are  many  ruins  to  be  seen  in  Egypt,  which  show  that 
the  palaces  and  cities  of  ancient  times  were  very  splendid. 

2.  But  I  must  tell  you  of  the  Hebrews.  Pharaoh,  the  good  king  of 
E?ypt,  died,  and  Joseph  likewise.  Another  king  then  ascended  the 
throne,  who  hated  the  Hebrews,  and  did  all  in  his  power  to  oppress 
them. 

3.  The  Egyptians  treated  them  like  slaves.  All  the  hardest  labor 
was  performed  by  the  Hebrews.  It  is  thought  by  some  writers,  that 
.:he  immense  piles  of  stone,  called  the  Pyramids,  were  built  by  them. 
These  vast  edifices  are  still  standing  on  the  banks  of  the  Nile. 

4.  The  cruel  king  of  Egypt  was  named  Pharaoh,  like  his  predeces- 
sor. One  of  the  most  wicked  injuries  that  he  inliicted  on  the  Hebrews 
was  the  following: — 

5.  He  commanded  that  every  male  child  should  be  thrown  into  the 
river  jN'ile  the  instant  he  was  born.  The  reason  of  this  horrible  cru- 
elty was,  that  the  Hebrews  might  not  become  more  numerous  than 
the  Egyptians,  and  conquer  the  whole  country. 

6.  One  of  the  Hebrew  women,  however,  could  not  make  up  her 
mind  to  throw  her  son  into  the  Kile.  If  she  had  positively  disobeyed 
the  kind's  order,  she  would  have  been  put  to  death.  She  therefore 
very  privately  made  a  little  ark  or  boat  of  bulrushes,  placed  the  child 
in  it,  and  laid  it  among  the  flags  that  grew  by  the  river's  side. 

7.  In  a  little  while  the  king's  daughter  came  down  to  the  river  to 
bathe.  Perceiving  the  ark  of  bulrushes,  she  went  with  her  maids  to 
fetch  it.  When  they  looked  into  it,  they  found  a  little  Hebrew  boy 
there ! 

8.  The  heart  of  the  princess  was  moved  with  compassion,  and  she 
resolved  to  save  his  life.  She  hired  his  own  mother  to  nurse  him. 
She  gave  him  the  name  of  Moses,  and,  when  he  grew  old  enough  to 
be  put  to  school,  she  caused  him  to  be  instructed  in  all  the  learning  of 
the  Egyptians.  At  that  period  they  were  the  most  learned  people 
on  earth. 

9.  But,  though  he  himself  was  so  well  treated,  Moses  did  not  for- 
get the  sufferings  of  the  other  Hebrews.  He  remembered  that  they 
were  his  brethren,  and  he  resolved  to  rescue  them  from  their  oppres- 
sors. 

10.  He  and  his  brother  Aaron  received  power  from  God  to  perform 
many  wonderful  things,  in  order  to  induce  Pharaoh  to  let  the  He- 
brews depart  out  of  Egypt.  Ten  great  plagues  were  inflicted  on  the 
Egyptians;  and  these  were  so  terrible,  that  at  last  Pharaoh  gave  the 
Hebrews  leave  to  go. 


Cm.  XIII. — 1.  What  of  Egypt?  Which  way  docs  it  lie  from  you?  How  far  is  it  from 
New-York  to  .Egypt?  Am  Nearly  six  thousand  miles.  Which  way  doe;  the  Nile  (low? 
In  which  ■•!  the  lour  quarter*  of  the  globe  i>  Egypt .'  In  which  part  of  Africa  is  Egypt  ? 
What  of  Egypt  in  the  time  of  Joseph  ?  2.  How  were  the  Hebrews  treated  after  the  death 
of  Joseph  r  What  of  the  pyramids?  How  high  i«  the  tallest  of  the  Egyptian  pyramids? 
Ads.  About  five  hundred  feet?  4.  What  cruelty  'li'l  Pharaoh  iuflicl  upi  n  the  Hebrews' 
G.  What  did  one  of  the  Hebrew  women  do  ?  7.  What  of  1'haroah's  daughter  ?  8.  What 
of  Moses:  9.  What  did  he  resolve  to  do  ?  10.  What  of  Moses  aud  Aaron ?  To  what 
did  Pharaoh  consent? 


28  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

11.  But  scarcely  were  they  gone,  when  the  King  was  sorry  that  he 
had  not  still  kept  them  in  Egypt,  that  he  might  oppress  them,  and 
compel  them  to  labor  for  him  as  before.  He  therefore  mustered  his 
warriors,  and  rode  swiftly  after  the  fugitives. 

12.  When  he  came  in  sight  of  them,  they  were  crossing  the  Red 
Sea,  which  lies  between  Egypt  and  Arabia.  The  Lord  had  caused 
the  waters  to  roll  back,  and  form  a  wall  on  each  side.  Thus  there 
was  a  path  of  glistening  sand  for  the  Hebrews  through  the  very 
depths  of  the  sea. 

13.  Pharaoh  and  his  army  rode  onward,  and  by  the  time  that  the 
fugitives  had  reached  the  opposite  shore,  the  Egyptians  were  in  the 
midst  of  this  wonderful  passage. 

14.  As  the  Hebrews  fled,  they  looked  behind  them.  There  was 
the  proud  array  of  the  Egyptian  king,  with  his  chariots  and  horse- 
men, and  all  his  innumerable  army,  and  Pharaoh  himself  riding 
haughtily  in  the  midst. 

15.  The  affrighted  Hebrews  looked  behind  them  again,  and,  lo ! 
the  two  walls  of  water  had  rolled  together.  They  were  dashing 
against  the  chariots,  and  sweeping  the  soldiers  off  their  feet.  The 
waves  were  crested  with  foam,  and  came  roaring  against  the  proud 
and  wicked  king.  In  a  little  time  the  sea  rolled  calmly  over  Pharaoh 
and  his  host,  and  thus  they  all  perished,  leaving  the  Jews  to  proceed 
on  their  journey. 

16.  This  was  a  terrible  event,  but  Pharaoh  had  been  very  cruel ; 
he  therefore  deserved  his  fate.  This  story  may  teach  us,  that  not 
only  wicked  rulers,  but  those  who  follow  them,  have  reason  to  fear 
the  judgments  of.  Heaven* 


CHAPTER  XIV.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

About  the  Wanderings  of  the  Israelites  in  the  Wilder- 
ness. 

1.  It  was  now  two  hundred  and  fifteen  years  since  Jacob  had  come 
to  settle  in  Egypt.  His  descendants  had  multiplied  so  rapidly,  that, 
at  the  time  of  their  departure,  the  Hebrew  nation  are  supposed  to 
have  amounted  to  at  least  two  millions  of  people.  Moses,  their  lea- 
i  der,  was  eighty  years  old,  but  his  step  was  steady ;  and,  though  of 
meek  and  humble  manners,  he  was  a  man  of  great  wisdom  and  firm- 
ness of  character. 

11.  Did  he  change  his  mind?  What  did  he  do  ?  WTiieh  way  was  the  Red  Sea  from 
Egypt-3  !-■  What  miracle  did  God  perform?  How  did  the  Hebrews  cross  the  Red 
Sear  15.  What  became  of  Pharaoh  and  his  army'1  Ch.  XIV. —  1.  How  long  was  it 
from  the  time  Jacob  settled  in  Egypt  to  the  oepartu.'e  of  the  Israelites?  Wbat  was  the 
number  of  the  Israelites  at  this  time?  How  old  wa9  Moses?  What  was  his  charac- 
ter!1 


THE    HEBREWS. 


29 


2.  The  Hebrews  intended  to  go  directly  from  Egypt  to  the  land  of 
Canaan.  This  latter  country  is  now  called  Palestine.  Before  reach- 
ing it  the  children  of  Israel  were  to  pass  through  a  part  of  Arabia. 


Killing  Quails  in  the  Wilderness. 

3.  In  order  that  they  might  not  go  astray,  a  vast  pillar  of  mist,  or 
cloud,  moved  before  them  all  day  long;  and  at  night  the  pillar  of 
cloud  was  changed  to  a  pillar  of  lire,  which  threw  a  radiance  over  the 
regions  through  which  they  journeyed. 

4.  The  country  was  desolate  and  barren,  and  often  destitute  of  wa- 
ter, but  the  Lord  fed  the  people  with  manna  and  with  quails;  and 
when  they  were  thirsty,  Moses  smote  upon  a  rock,  and  the  water 
gushed  out  abundantly.  This  was  a  great  relief,  for  the  climate 
there  Avas  exceedingly  hot.  Beside  all  this,  the  Hebrews  received 
divine  assistance  against  the  Amalekites,  and  were  enabled  to  conquer 
them  in  battle. 

5.  But,  in  spite  of  these  various  mercies,  the  Israelites  were  an  un- 
grateful and  rebellious  people.  They  often  turned  from  the  worship 
of  the  true  God,  and  became  idolaters. 

6.  At  the  very  time  when  the  Lord  was  revealing  himself  to  Moses 
on  the  summit  of  Mount  Sinai,  the  people  compelled  Aaron  to  make 
a  golden  calf.  They  worshipped  this  poor  image  instead  of  Jehovah, 
who  had  brought  them  out  of  Egvpt. 

7.  On  account  of  their  numerous  sins  the  Lord  often  inflicted  severe 
punishments  upon  them.     Many  were  slain  by  pestilence,  and  some 


2.  In  which  direction  is  Canaan  from  Egypt?  What  country  lies  between  Canaan  and 
Egvpt .'  In  what  country  did  the  Hebrews  wander?  3.  IIow  were  the  Hebrews  guided? 
4.  What  jort  „f  country  did  they  travel  through  ?  IIow  were  they  fed  ?  When  they  could 
find  no  spring  or  river,  how  were  they  supplied  with  water  ?  Why  was  this  supply  of  wa- 
ter necessary  '  What  other  divine  assistance  was  rendered  to  the  Hebrews'  5.  Were 
the  Hebrews  grateful  for  all  the  mercies  bestowed  upon  them  i  G.  What  did  they  do  when 
Moses  was  on  Mount  Sinai  '  Were  not  the  Hebrews  very  foolish  and  wicked  to  worship 
the  iuiagu  of  a  calf  rather  than  to  worship  God?  When  children  disobey  their  parents 
ind  *cek  their  own  pleasure,  rather  than  do  their  duty,  are  they  noi  like  the  Hebrews  iu 
tlis  instance  ?     7.  What  cviJ  resulted  from  th"  disobedience  of  the  Hebrewa  :     JJo  you  not 


30  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

were  swallowed  up  in  the  earth.  The  remainder  were  compelled  tc 
wander  forty  years  in  the  deserts  of  Arabia,  though  the  whole  dis- 
tance in  a  direct  line  from  Egypt  to  Canaan  was  but  two  hundred  and 
fifty  miles. 

8.  Before  they  came  to  the  land  of  Canaan,  most  of  those  who  had 
fled  out  of  Egypt  were  dead.  Their  children  inherited  the  promised 
land,  but  they  themselves  were  buried  in  the  sands  of  the  desert. 
Even  Moses  was  permitted  merely  to  gaze  at  the  land  of  Canaan 
from  the  top  of  Mount  Pisgah.  Here  he  died,  at  the  age  of  one  hun- 
dred and  twenty  years. 

9.  After  the  death  of  Moses,  Joshua,  the  son  of  Nun,  became  lea- 
der of  the  Israelites.  Under  his  guidance  they  entered  the  promised 
land,  and  subdued  the  people  who  inhabited  it.  The  territory  of 
Canaan  was  then  divided  among  the  twelve  tribes  of  Israel. 


CHAPTER  XV.-ASIA  CONTINUED. 
Overthrow  of  the  Midianites.     Samson,  Judge  of  Israel. 

1.  After  their  settlement  in  Canaan  the  Israelites  lived  under  the 
authority  of  judges.  These  were  their  rulers  in  time  of  peace,  and 
their  generals  in  war.  Some  of  them  were  very  remarkable  person- 
ages, and  did  many  things  worthy  of  remembrance. 

2.  The  name  of  one  of  the  judges  was  Gideon.  While  he  ruled 
Israel,  an  army  of  Midianites  invaded  the  country,  and  oppressed  the 
people  for  seven  years.  But  the  Lord  instructed  Gideon  how  to  res- 
cue the  Israelites  from  their  power. 

3.  Gideon  chose  three  hundred  men,  and  caused  each  of  them  to 
take  an  earthen  pitcher,  and  put  a  lamp  within  it.  With  this  small 
band  he  entered  the  camp  of  the  Midianites  by  night.  There  was 
an  immense  army  of  them,  sleeping  in  their  tents,  Avithout  apprehend- 
ing any  danger  from  the  conquered  Israelites. 

4.  But  their  destruction  was  at  hand.  Gideon  gave  a  signal,  and  all 
his  three  hundred  men  broke  their  pitchers,  at  the  same  time  blow- 
ing a  loud  blast  upon  trumpets  Avhich  they  had  brought.  This  terri- 
ble clamor  startled  the  Midianites  from  their  sleep. 

5.  Amid  the  clangor  of  the  trumpets  they  heard  the  Israelites 
shouting,  "The  sword  of  the  Lord  and  of  Gideon."  A  great  panic 
seized  upon  the  Midianites.  They  doubtless  imagined  that  all  the 
Hebrew  army  had  broken  into  their  camp. 

6.  Each  man  mistook  his  neighbor  for  an  enemy;  so  that  more  of 


know  that  evil  always  follows  disobedience  ?  How  long  did  the  Hebrews  wander  ?  What 
is  the  distance  in  a  straight  line  from  Egypt  to  Canaan  ?  S.  Did  most  of  the  Hebrews  ivlio 
left  Egypt  reach  Canaan  ?  What  of  Moses  ?  Where  is  Mount  Pisgah .'  9.  Who  became 
leader  after  the  death  of  Moses  :  How  was  the  land  of  Canaan  divided?  Ch.  XV. — l. 
How  were  the  Hebrews  governed  after  their  settlement  in  Canaan?  What  of  the  Judges  ? 
1.   What  of  Gideon.     3.   Tell  how  Gideon  contrived  to  overcome  the  Midianites? 


THE      HEBREWS. 

Map  of  Palestine. 


31 


3C 


ANCIENT 
PALESTINE 


sxiu-A-  i? i\.or Jan. 


*& 


?«*.   v 


fr/i 


GATJXOXlTIiyftV 


6 


/ 


siJ 

.lMolwnais^  ^=Uci,tV:,   ,Wa  „i-  Galilee      2%j 
Ja^reeV      •...-■ 

■  S  ALMA^l  I_ 

4 (^•--•^•^^i^p1trj»j^ggr:..riii, 

y        «   A..:'::.?.-1.J.x../-^.j{cika-. "'t  ^ 


Ariinathca 


Asc.;i\ 


1W, 


I  \    llelfl on 


^^i^   JJetrsJicha     ^  ,  " 


Z>e*« 


rV->; 


^e- 


.'l  T>  r.im.  K.ii.st  from    (iri-rnwirl 


flap  The  teacher  will  put  such  questions  here  as  he  deems  necessary. 


32 


SCHOOL    HISTORY, 


the  Midianites  were  slain  by  their  own  swords,  than  by  the  swords  of 
the  men  of  Israel.  Thus  God  wrought  a  great  deliveiance  for  his 
people. 

7.  The  most  famous  of  all  the  judges  of  Israel  was  named  Samson. 
He  was  the  strongest  man  in  the  world ;  and  it  was  a  wonderful  cir- 
cumstance, that  his  great  strength  depended  upon  the  hair  of  his 
head. 

8.  While  he  continued  to  wear  his  hair  long,  and  curling  down 
Lis  neck,  he  had  more  strength  than  a  hundred  men  put  together. 
Hut  if  his  hair  were  to  be  cut  off,  he  would  be  no  stronger  than  any 
single  man. 

9.  In  the  days  of  Samson,  the  Philistines  had  conquered  the  Is- 
raelites. Samson  disliked  them  on  account  of  the  injuries  which 
they  inflicted  upon  his  countrymen.  He  made  use  of  his  great 
strength  to  do  them  all  the  harm  in  his  power. 


CHAPTER  XVI.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Samson's  Exploits  and  Death. 


1.  On  one  occasion  Samson  slew  a  thousand  of  the  Philistines, 
although  he  had  no  better  weapon  than  the  jaw-bone  of  an  ass.  A 
another  time,  when  they  had  shut  him  up  in  the  city  of  Gaza,  he  took 
the  gates  of  the  city  upon  his  shoulders,  and  carried  them  to  the  top 
of  a  distant  hill. 

7.  What  of  Samson?  In  what  did  his  strength  lie  ?  9.  What  of  the  Philistines  ?  Why 
did  Samsou  dislike  them?  Ch.  XVI — 1.  With  what  weapon  did  Samson  kill  a  thousand 
Philistines  ?     What  of  the  gates  of  Gaza  > 


THE   HEBREWS.  33 

2.  But,  though  Samson  hated  the  Philistines,  and  was  always 
doing  them  mischief,  there  was  a  woman  among  them  whom  he 
loved.  Her  name  was,Delilah.  She  pretended  to  love  Samson  in 
return;  but  her  only  object  was  to  ruin  him. 

3.  This  woman  used  many  persuasioos  to  induce  Samson  to  tell 
her  what  it  was  that  made  him  so  much  stronger  than  other  men. 
At  first  Samson  deceived  her.  He  said,  that  if  he  were  bound  with 
seven  green  withs,  his  strength  would  depart ;  or  that,  if  he  were 
tied  with  new  ropes,  he  should  be  as  weak  as  an  ordinary  man. 

4.  So  Delilah  bound  him  first  with  seven  green  withs,  and  after- 
wards with  new  ropes.  But  Samson  snapped  the  withs  like  burnt 
tow,  and  the  ropes  like  thread.  At  length,  however,  Delilah  pre- 
vailed upon  him  to  tell  her  the  real  cause  of  his  great  strength. 

5.  When  she  had  found  out  the  secret,  she  cut  off  the  hair  of  his 
head  while  he  was  sleeping,  and  then  delivered  him  to  her  country- 
men, the  Philistines.  These  put  out  his  eyes,  and  bound  him  with 
fetters  of  brass,  and  he  was  forced  to  labor  like  a  brute  beast  in  the 
prison. 

6.  Samson  was  able  to  work  very  hard ;  for  pretty  soon  his  hair 
began  to  grow,  and  so  his  wonderful  vigor  returned.  Thus  he  became 
the  strongest  man  in  the  world  again. 

7.  One  day  the  Philistines  were  offering  a  great  sacrifice  to  their 
idol,  whose  name  was  Dagon.  They  feasted,  and  their  hearts  were 
merry.  When  their  mirth  was  at  its  height,  they  sent  for  poor  blind 
Samson,  that  he  might  amuse  them  by  showing  specimens  of  his 
wonderful  strength. 

8.  Samson  was  accordingly  brought  from  prison  and  led  into 
Dagon's  temple.  His  brazen  fetters  clanked  at  every  step.  He  was 
a  woful  object  with  his  blinded  eyes.  But  his  hair  had  grown  again, 
and  was  curling  upon  his  brawny  shoulders. 

9.  When  Samson  had  done  many  wonderful  feats  of  strength,  he 
asked  leave  to  rest  himself  against  the  two  main  pillars  of  the  tem- 
ple. The  floor  and  galleries  were  all  crowded  with  Philistines. 
They  gazed  upon  this  man  of  mighty  strength,  and  they  triumphed 
and  rejoiced,  because  they  imagined  he  could  do  them  no  more  harm. 

10.  But  while  they  gazed,  the  strong  man  threw  his  arms  round 
the  two  pillars  of  the  temple.  The  edifice  trembled  as  with  an 
earthquake.  Then  Samson  bowed  himself  with  all  his  might,  and 
down  came  the  temple  with  a  crash  like  thunder,  overwhelming  the 
whole  multitude  of  the  Philistines  in  its  ruins. 

11.  Samson  was  likewise  crushed,  but  in  his  death  it  appears  that 
he  triumphed  over  his  enemies,  and  lay  buried  beneath  the  dead 
bodies  of  lords  and  mighty  men. 

2.  What  o'  Delilah?  3.  How  did  Samson  deceive  heft?  5.  How  did  Delilah  deprive 
Simson  of  hi  I  strength?     What    did   the    Philistine!  do  to  Samson?     6.   What  happened 

When  Samson's  hair  grew  again?     7.  Tell  how  Samson  destroyed  the  Philistine  temple. 


34  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  XVII.-ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Beginning  of  the  Meig?i  of  Saul. 

1.  Many  other  judges  ruled  over  Israel,  in  the  space  of  about  foul 
hundred  years  from  the  time  that  Moses  led  the  Hebrews  out  of 
Egypt.  But  at  length  they  became  dissatisfied  with  this  mode  of 
government,  and  demanded' that  a  king  should  be  placed  over  them. 

2.  Samuel  was  then  the  judge  of  Israel.  He  was  an  old  man,  and 
a  wise  one;  and,  besides  the  wisdom  that  he  had  collected  in  the 
course  of  a  long  life,  he"  possessed  wisdom  from  on  high. 

3.  When  the  people  demanded  a  king,  Samuel  endeavored  to  con- 
vince them,  that  they  were  much  better  off  without  one.  He  de- 
scribed the  tyrannical  acts  which  kings  have  always  been  in  the  habit 
of  committing,  whenever  they  have  had  the  power  to  do  so. 

4.  But  the  Israelites  would  not  hearken  to  this  wise  and  good  old" 
man.  They  still  wished  for  a  king.  They  imagined  that  none  but 
a  king  would  govern  them  well  hi  time  of  peace,  or  fight  success- 
fully against  their  enemies  in  war. 

5.  Samuel  therefore  consulted  the  Lord,  and  was  directed  to  find 
out  a  king  for  the  Israelites.  The  person  who  was  fixed  upon  was 
a  young  man  named  Saul,  the  son  of  Kish.  He  possessed  great 
beauty,  and  was  a  head  taller  than  any  other  man  among  the  Israel- 
ites. Samuel  anointed  his  head  with  oil,  and  gave  him  to  the 
Israelites  as  their  king. 

6.  For  a  considerable  time  king  Saul  behaved  like  a  wise  and 
righteous  monarch.  But  at  length  he  began  to  disobey  the  Lord,  and 
seldom  took  the  advice  of  Samuel,  although  that  good  old  priest 
would  have  been  willing  to  direct  him  in  every  action  of  his  life. 

7.  In  the  course  of  Saul's  reign,  the  Israelites  were  often  at  war 
with  the  neighboring  nations.  At  one  time,  when  the  Philistines 
had  invaded  the  country,  there  was  a  great  giant  in  their  host,  whose 
name  Avas  Goliath,  of  Gath. 

S.  He  was  at  least  ten  or  twelve  feet  high,  and  was  clothed  from 
head  to  foot  in  brazen  armor.  He  carried  an  enormous  spear,  the 
iron  head  of  which  weighed  as  many  as  thirty  pounds. 

9.  Every  day  did  this  frightful  giant  stride  forth  from  the  camp  of 
the  Philistines,  and  defy  the  Israelites  to  produce  a  champion  who 
would  stand  against  him  in  single  combat.  But,  instead  of  doing 
this,  the  whole  host  of  Israel  stood  aloof  from  him,  as  a  flock  of 
shucp  fr(  m  a  lion. 

Ch.  XVII. — 1.  For  how  long  a  time  were  the  Hebrews  governed  by  judg«s  ?  2.  Whal 
of  Samuel?  3.  What  did  he  do  when  the  people  demanded  a  king?  4.  What  did  the 
Israelites  think  ?     5.  What  of  Saul  ?     (j.  What  did  Saul  do?     7.  What  of  Goliath  ? 


THE   HEBREWS.  35 

CHAPTER  XVIII.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Combat  of  David  and  Goliath. 

1.  At  last  a  young  shepherd,  by  the  name  of  David,  happened  to 
come  to  the  camp  of  the  Israelites,  and  heard  the  terrible  voice  of 
Goliath  as  he  thundered  forth  his  challenge. 

2  Young  as  he  was,  David  had  already  slain  a  lion  and  a  hear; 
and,  with  the  help  of  the  Lord,  he  thougnt  himself  able  to  slay  this 
gigantic  Philistine.  He  therefore  obtained  #leave  of  king  Saul  to 
accept  the  challenge. 

3.  But,  instead  of  wearing  the  king's  armor,  which  Saul  would 
willingly  have  lent  him,  David  went  to  the  battle  in  his  shepherd's 
garb.     He  did  not  even  buckle  on  a  sword. 

4.  When  the  two  combatants  came  into  the  field,  there  was  the 
youthful  David  on  the  side  of  the  Israelites,  with  a  staff  in  one  hand, 
and  a  sling  in  the  other,  carrying  five  smooth  stones  in  a  shepherd's 
scrip  or  pouch.       ->. 

5.  On  the  side  of  the  Philistines,  forth  strode  the  mighty  Goliath. 
He  glistened  in  his  brazen  armor,  and  brandished  his  great  iron- 
headed  spear  till  it  quivered  like  a  reed.  When  the  giant  spoke,  his 
voice  growled  almost  like  thunder  rolling  overhead. 

6.  He  looked  scornfully  at  David,  and  hardly  thought  it  worth  his 
while  to  lift  up  his  spear  against  him.  "  Come  hither,"  quoth  the 
giant,  "and  I  will  feed  the  fowls  with  your  flesh  !" 

7.  But  little  David  was  not  at  all  abashed.  He  made  a  bold  an- 
swer, and  told  Goliath  that  he  would  cut  off  his  head,  and  give  his 
enormous  carcass  to  the  beasts  of  the  field.  This  threat  so  enraged 
the  giant,  that  he  put  himself  in  motion  to  slay  David. 

8.  The  young  man  ran  forward  to  meet  Goliath,  and,  as  he  ran,  he 
took  a  smooth  stone  from  his  scrip,  and  placed  it  in  his  sling.  When 
at  a  proper  distance,  he  whirled  the  sling,  and  let  drive  the  stone.  It 
went  Avhizzing  through  the  air,  and  hit  Goliath  right  in  the  centre  of 
the  forehead. 

9.  The  stone  penetrated  to  the  brain;  and  down  the  giant  fell  at 
full  length  upon  the  field,  with  his  brazen  armor  clanging  around 
him.  David  then  cut  off  Goliath's  head  with  his  own  sword.  The 
Philistines  were  affrighted  at  their  champion's  overthrow,  and  fled. 

10.  The  men  of  Israel  pursued  them,  and  made  a  prodigious  slaugh- 
ter. David  returned  from  the  battle  carrying  the  grim  and  grisly 
head  of  Goliath  by  the  hair.  The  Hebrew  women  came  forth  to 
meet  him,  danced  around  him,  and  sung  triumphant  anthems  in  his 
praise. 

Ch.  XVIII  — 1.  Who  was  David?  What  <li<l  he  do?  -i.  Wliat  hail  David  done  ?  What 
did  In-  think?  3.  Tell  the  rtory  ..I'  Davie  and  Goliath.  0.  Whal  effect  had  the  death  o/ 
Goliath  opou  the  Philistines?     10.  What  hoDors  were  paid"  to  David  ? 


36  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  XIX.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

The  Reign  of  David.      Wisdom  of  Solomon. 

1.  David  had  won  so  much  renown  by  his  victory  over  Goliath, 
that  Saul  became  envious  of  him,  and  often  endeavored  to  kill  him 
But  Jonathan,  the  son  of  Saul,  loved  David  better  than  a  brother. 

2.  During  the  lifetime  of  Saul,  David  was  forced  to  live  in  exile. 
But,  after  a  reign  of  about  twenty-four  years,  king  Saul  was  slain  on 
the  mountains  of  Gilboa,  in  a  disastrous  battle  Avith  the  Philistines. 
Jonathan  was  likewise  killed. 

3.  When  David  heard  of  these  sad  events,  he  expressed  his  sorrow 
by  weeping,  and  rending  his  garments.  Yet  he  gained  a  kingdom  by 
the  death  of  Saul  and  Jonathan ;  for  the  men  of  Judah  first  elected 
him  to  reign  over  them,  and  afterwards  the  whole  people  of  Israel 
chose  him  for  their  king. 

4.  A  great  part  of  David's  life  was  spent  in  war.  He  gained  many 
victories,  and  enjoyed  high  renown  as  a  gallant  leader.  He  conquer- 
ed many  of  the  surrounding  nations,  and  raised  his  kingdom  to  a 
higher  pitch  of  power  than  it  ever  enjoyed  before -or  afterwards.  But 
he  also  won  a  peaceful  kind  of  fame,  which  will  last  while  the  world 
endures,  and  be  remembered  through  eternity. 

5.  He  won  it  by  his  heavenly  poesy ;  for  king  David  was  the  sweet 
Psalmist  of  Israel;  and  in  all  the  ages  since  he  lived,  his  psalms  have 
been  sung  to  the  praise  of  the  Lord.  It  is  now  about  three  thousand 
years  since  David  died;  yet  to  this  hour  every  pious  heart  loves  to 
commune  with  God  in  the  beautiful  words  of  this  inspired  man. 

6.  In  the  latter  part  of  his  life,  David  was  much  grieved  by  the  re- 
bellious conduct  of  his  son  Absalom.  But  it  grieved  him  more  when 
Absalom  was  slain  by  Joab,  who  found  him  hanging  by  his  long  hair 
on  the  branches  of  an  oak,  and  pierced  his  body  with  three  darts. 

7.  When  David  had  reigned  forty  years,  and  was  grown  a  very  old 
man,  he  died  in  his  palace  at  Jerusalem.  The  kingdom  was  inherited 
by  his  son  Solomon.  This  prince  was  very  young  when  he  ascended 
the  throne,  but  he  was  wiser  in  his  youth  than  in  his  riper  years. 

S.  Not  long  after  he  became  king,  two  women  came  into  his  pres- 
ence bringing  a  little  child.  Each  of  the  women  claimed  the  child 
as  her  own,  and  they  quarrelled  violently,  as  if  they  would  have  torn 
the  poor  babe  asunder.  It  seemed  impossible  to  find  out  whose  the 
child  really  was. 

9.  "Bring  hither  a  sword,"  said  king  Solomon;    and  immediately 

Ch.  XIX.— 1.  Why  was  Saul  envious  of  David  ?  What  did  Saul  do?  What  of  Jona- 
than ?  2.  How  was  David  obliged  to  live  ?  What  of  Saul  ?  Jonathan  ?  3.  What  ef- 
fect had  these  events  upon  David  ?  Who  became  king  of  Israel  after  the  death  of  Saul  ? 
4.  How  was  a  great  part  of  David's  life  spent ?  To  what  condition  did  he  bring  the  He- 
brew nation  ?  What  better  fame  did  he  acquire  than  that  of  a  conqueror?  5.  Who  was 
'.he  author  of  the  Psalms?  What  ran  you  sny  of  the  Psalms?  How  long  since  David  liv- 
ed? G.  What  of  Absalom  ?  7.  How  long  did  David  reign ?  Who  succeeded  him?  What 
uf  Solomon  ?     S.  Tell  the  story  ,,f  tl  =  child. 


THE    HEBREWS.  37 

one  of  the  attendants  brought  a  sharp  sword.  "  Now,"  continued 
Solomon,  "  that  I  may  not  wrong  either  of  these  women,  the  thing  in 
dispute  shall  be  equally  divided  between  them.  Cut  the  child"  in 
twain,  and  let  each  take  half." 

10.  But  when  the  real  mother  saw  the  keen  sword  glittering  over 
her  poor  babe,  she  gave  a  scream  of  agony.  "  Do  not  slay  the  child  !" 
she  cried.  "  Give  it  to  this  wicked  woman.  Only  let  it  live,  and 
she  may  be  its  mother  !" 

11.  But  the  other  woman  showed  no  pity  for  the  child.  "  I  ask  no 
more  than  my  just  rights,"  she  said.  "  Cut  the  child  in  two  !  I  will 
be  content  with  half."  Now  Solomon  had  watched  the  conduct  of  the 
two  women,  and  he  knew  the  true  mother  by  her  tenderness  for  the 
poor  babe.  "  Give  the  child  alive  to  her  who  would  not  have  it 
slain,"  he  said.     "  She  is  its  mother." 


CHAPTER  XX.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

The  Building  of  the   Temple.      Visit  of  the  Queen  of 
Sheba. 

1.  King  David,  as  I  before  told  you,  had  increased  the  power  and 
wealth  of  the  Hebrew  nation,  so  that  it  was  now  a  great  kingdom. 
Silver  and  gold  were  very  abundant  in  the  country,  and  king  David 
had  made  preparation  for  the  building  of  a  splendid  temple,  to  be  ded- 
icated to  the  worship  of  the  true  God. 

2.  The  chief  event  of  Solomon's  life  was  the  building  of  this  tem- 
ple. This  was  done  by  the  special  command  of  the  Lord.  It  was  now 
four  hundred  and  eighty  years  since  the  Israelites  had  come  out  of 
Egypt;  and  in  all  that  time  there  had  been  no  edifice  erected  to  the 
worship  of  God. 

3.  Solomon  made  an  agreement  with  Hiram,  King  of  Tyre,  that  he 
would  give  him  a  yearly  supply  of  wheat  and  oil,  in  exchange  for  ce- 
dar and  fir.  Tyre  was  a  great  commercial  city  on  the  coast  of  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  to  the  northward  of  Jerusalem.  It  belonged  to 
Phoenicia,  a  country  which  has  the  credit  of  having  first  engaged  in 
commerce. 

4.  With  the  timber  which  he  procured  from  Tyre,  and  with  a 
lanre  quantity  of  hewn  stone,  Solomon  began  to  build  the  temple. 
The  front  of  this  building  was  one  hundred  and  twenty  feet  long, 
thirty-five  feet  broad,  and  forty-five  feet  high,  with  a  porch  or  entrance 

Ch.  XX'. — 1.  What  had  David  done?  What  of  silver  and  gold  among  the  Hebrews? 
2.  What  was  tin:  chief  event  of  Solomon's  reign  ?  13y  whose  command  was  the  temple 
built?  3.  What  agreement  did  Solomon  make  with  Hiram,  king  of  Tyre  ?  What  of 
Phoenicia?  In  what  part  of  Canaan  was  Jerusalem?  How  far  from  the  Mediterranean 
6ea?  Ans.  About  forty-live  miles.  Where  wa-s  Tyre?  In  which  direction  from  Jeru- 
§al«--m  '  What  of  Tyre  ?  In  which  direction  is  .Jerusalem  from  Babylon  ?  From  Egypt? 
4.  With  what  did  Solomon  begin  to  build  the  'i-inple  ?  Where  was  the  temple  of  Sol- 
omon built?     Ans.     On  a  hill   in  Jerusalem  called  Mount  Moriah.     Describe    the    extent 

4 


3S  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

of  much  greater  height.  It  extended  around  a  large  square,  and,  with 
the  various  buildings  attached  to  it,  covered  twenty  acres  of  ground. 

5.  But  no  pen  can  describe  the  richness  and  admirable  splendor  of 
this  sacred  edifice.  The  interior  was  constructed  of  the  most  costly 
kinds  of  woodland  the  walls  were  carved  with  figures  of  cherubim, 
and  other  beautiful  devices.  The  walls  and  floors  were  partly  over- 
laid Avith  gold. 

6.  The  temple  was  furnished  with  altars,  and 'tables,  and  candle- 
sticks, and  innumerable  other  articles,  all  of  the  purest  gold.  The 
whole  edifice  must  have  shone  almost  as  if  it  had  been  built  entirely 
of  that  precious  metal.  • 

7.  Seven  years  were  employed  in  building  this  temple.  It  was 
just  about  three  thousand  years  from  the  creation  that  it  was  finished, 
and  one  thousand  years  before  the  birth  of  Christ.  When  it  was 
finished,  Solomon  assembled  all  the  chiefs,  and  elders,  and  great  men 
of  Israel,  in  order  to  dedicate  it.  The  priests  brought  the  ark,  con- 
taining the  two  tables  of  stone  which  God  had  given  to  Moses  more 
than  four  centuries  before. 

S.  The  ark  was  now  placed  in  the  holiest  part  of  the  temple.  It 
rested  beneath  the  broad  wings  of  two  cherubim  that  were  overlaid 
with  gold.  No  sooner  was  the  ark  set  in  its  place  than  a  cloud  issued 
forth  and  filled  the  temple.     This  was  a  token  that  the  Lord  was  there. 

9.  After  the  building  of  the  temple,  Solomon  became  so  renowned 
for  his  wisdom  and  magnificence,  that  the  queen  of  Sheba  came  from 
her  own  dominions  to  visit  him.  -  Her  country  is  supposed  to  have 
been  in  Africa,  to  the  southward  of  Egypt. 

10.  She  travelled  with  a  great  multitude  of  attendants ;  and  she 
had  likewise  a  train  of  camels,  laden  with  gold  and  precious  stones, 
and  abundance  of  spices.  The  sweet  perfume  of  the  spices  scented 
the  deserts  through  which  she  passed. 

11.  When  she  came  to  Jerusalem,  she  beheld  Solomon  seated  on 
a  great  throne  of  ivory  overlaid  with  pure  gold.  His  feet  rested  on  a 
golden  footstool.  There  were  lions  of  gold  about  the  throne.  The 
king  had  a  majestic  look,  and  the  queen  of  Sheba  Avas  astonished  at 
his  grandeur;  but,  when  they  had  talked  together,  she  admired  his 
wisdom  even  more  than  his  magnificence.  She  acknowledged  that 
the  half  of  his  greatness  had  not  been  told  her. 

12.  If  the  queen  of  Sheba  could  have  seen  Solomon  a  feAV  years 
afterAvards,  she  Avould  have  beheld  a  lamentable  change.  He  turned 
from  the  true  God,  and  became  an  idolator.  This  Avise  and  righteous 
king,  Avho  had  built  the  sacred  temple,  noAV  grew  so  wicked  that  he 
built  high  places  for  the  Avorship  of  heathen  deities. 

13.  For  this  reason  God  determined  to  take  aAvay  the  chief  part  of 
the  kingdom  from  his  descendants.  Accordingly,  Avhen  Solomon  Avas 
dead,  ten  of  the  tribes  of  Israel  revolted  against  his  son  B-ehoboam. 

of  the  temple.  5.  Describe  the  interior  of  the  temple.  6.  With  what  was  the  temple 
furnished  ?  7.  How  long  were  they  in  building  the  temple  ?  How  long  after  the  crea- 
tion was  the  temple  finished?  How  long  before  Christ?  How  long  ago?  Describe  the 
dedication  of  the  temple  9.  What  of  the  Queen  of  Sheba  ?  Where  is  it  supposed  she 
came  from?  10.  Describe  her  visit  to  Solomon.  12.  What  change  took  olace  in  Solo- 
mon ?     13.  What  evil  followed  the  idolatry  of  Solomon  ? 


THE    HEBREWS.  39 

CHAPTER  XXL— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

The  Decline  of  the  Jeivish  Nation. 

1 .  In  consequence  of  the  revolt  of  the  ten  tribes,  Rehoboam  reigned 
only  over  the  two  tribes  of  Judah  and  Benjamin,  these  being  called 
the  kingdom  of  Judah.  Beside  the  loss  of  so  large  a  part  of  his 
kingdom,  he  suffered  other  misfortunes.  Shishak,  king  of  Egypt, 
made  war  against  him,  and  took  Jerusalem.  He  carried  away  the 
treasures  of  the  temple  and  of  the  palace. 

2.  The  other  ten  tribes  of  Israel,  which  had  revolted  from  Reho- 
boam, were  thenceforward  governed  by  kings  of  their  own,  the  coun- 
try being  called  the  kingdom  of  Israel.  Most  of  these  kings  were 
wicked  men,  and  idolators.  Their  palace  and  seat  of  government 
was  in  the  city  of  Samaria. 

3.  When  the  kingdom  of  Israel  had  been  separated  from  that  of 
Judah  about  two  huudred  and  fifty  years,  it  was  conquered  by  Sal- 
maneser,  king  of  Assyria.  He  made  slaves  of  the  Israelites,  and 
carried  them  to  his  own  country,  and  most  of  them  never  returned  to 
the  land  of  Canaan. 

4.  The  people  of  the  two  tribes  of  Judah  and  Benjamin  continued 
to  reside  in  Canaan.  They  were  now  called  Jews:  The  royal  palace 
and  seat  of  government  was  at  Jerusalem.  Some  of  the  Jewish 
kin^s  were  pious  men,  but  most  of  them  offended  God  by  their  sin- 
fulness and  idolatry. 

5.  The  whole  nation  of  the  Jews  were  perverse,  and  underwent 
many  severe  inflictions  from  the  wrath  of  God.  In  the  year  606 
B.  C,  Nebuchadnezzar,  king  of  Babylon,  took  Jerusalem.  He  de- 
stroyed the  temple,  and  carried  the  principal  people  captive  to 
Babylon. 

6.  Afterwards,  when  Zedekiah  was  king,  Jerusalem  was  again  be- 
sieged and  taken  by  Nebuzaradan,  a  general  under  Nebuchadnezzar. 
He  broke  down  the  walls  of  the  city,  and  left  nothing  standing  that 
could  be  destroyed.  The  Jews  remained  captive  in  Babylon  seventy 
years. 

7.  When  Babylon  was  taken  by  Cyrus,  king  of  Persia,  th'e  Jews 
were  permitted  to  return  to  their  own  country.  They  rebuilt  the 
temple,  and  resumed  their  ancient  manner  of  worship.  Till  the  time 
of  Alexander  the  Great,  about  330  B.  C,  the  nation  was  dependent 
on  the  kings  of  Persia. 

Ch.  XXI. — 1.  Who  was  Rehoboam  ?  Into  what  two  kingdoms  was  the  Hebrew  natic  a 
divided  daring  his  reign  ?  What  name  was  given  to  the  two  tribes  .'  What-of  Shishak.' 
2.  What  name  was  given  to  the  ten  tribes  which  revolted?  How  was  the  kingdom  of  Is- 
rael governed  ?  In  which  part  of  Canaan  were  the  ten  tribes .'  In  which  part  was  the 
kingdom  of  Judah?  What  of  the  kings  of  Israel  ?  Where  did  these  kings  dwell? 
Where  was  Samaria?  How  far  from  Jerusalem?  Ans.  Forty  miles.  3.  What  of  Sal- 
manescr?  4.  What  were  the  people  of  Judah  now  called?  Where  was  the  seat  of 
government?  What  of  the  kings  of  Judah  ?  5.  What  of  the  Jewish  nation?  What  of 
Nebuchadnezzar?  6.  What  of  Nebuzaradan  ?  How  long  did  the  Jews  remain  captive 
in  Babylon?  7.  What  of  Cyrus?  What  did  the  Jews  do  on  their  return  from  captivity. 
How  long  id  the  nation  dspendenl  upon  Persia  ? 


40  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

8-  It  is  said,  that  Alexander  the  Great  intended  to  take  Jerusalem. 
But,  as  he  advanced  with  his  army,  the  high  priest  came  forth  to 
meet  him,  in  his  robes  of  office,  at  the  head  of  a  long  train  of  Levites 
and  people.  Alexander  was  so  struck  with  their  appearance,  that 
he  agreed  to  spare  the  city. 

9.  In  the  course  of  the  two  next  centuries  the  Egyptians  invaded 
the  Jewish  kingdom,  and  afterwards  the  Syrians  reduced  the  inhabit- 
ants to  bondage.  They  suffered  great  calamities  from  the  tyranny 
of  these  conquerors. 

10.  But,  in  the  year  166  before  the  Christian  era,  Judas  Macca- 
beus, a  valiant  Jewish  leader,  drove  the  Syrians  out  of  the  country. 
When  the  king  of  Syria  heard  of  it,  he  took  an  oath,  that  he  would 
destroy  the  whole  Jewish  nation.  But,  as  he  was  hastening  to  Je- 
rusalem, he  was  killed  by  a  fall  from  his  chariot. 

11.  The  descendants  of  Judas  Maccabams  afterwards  assumed  royal 
authority,  and  became  kings  of  the  Jews.  In  less  than  a  century, 
however,  the  country  was  subdued  by  Pompey,  a  celebrated  Roman 
general.  He  conferred  the  government  on  Antipater,  a  native  of 
Edom. 

12.  In  the  year  37  before  the  Christian  era,  the  Roman  senate  de- 
creed that  Herod,  the  son  of  Antipater,  should  be  king  of  the  Jews. 
It  was  this  Herod  who  commanded  that  all,  the  young  children  of 
Bethlehem  should  be  slain,  in  order  that  the  infant  Jesus  might  not 
survive.     The  period  of  that  blessed  infant's  birth  was  now  at  hand. 


CHAPTER  XXII.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

The  Hebrew  Prophets. 

1.  I  must  now  glance  backward,  and  say  a  few  words  respecting 
a  class  of  men  who  had  appeared  at  various  times  among  the  He- 
brews. These  men  were  called  prophets.  They  held  intercourse 
with  God,  and  he  gave  them  the  knowledge  of  things  that  were  to 
happen  in  future  years. 

2.  One  of  the  most  remarkable  of  the  prophets  Avas  named  Elijah. 
Many  wonderful  things  are  told  of  him.  While  he  was  dwelling  in 
a  solitary  place,  the  ravens  brought  him  food.  He  restored  the  son 
of  a  poor  widow  from  death  to  life. 

3.  He  denounced  God's  vengeance  against  the  wicked  king  Ahab, 
and  foretold  that  the  dogs  should  eat  the  painted  Jezebel,  his  queen. 
And  all  this  was  so.  He  caused  fire  to  comedown  from  heaven,  and 
consume  two  captains,  with  their  soldiers.  He  divided  the  river 
Jordan  by  smiting  it  with  his  mantle,  and  passed  over  on  dry  ground. 

8.  What  of  Alexander  the  Great  ?  9.  What  happened  after  the  time  of  Alexander  ? 
10.  What  of  Judas  Maccabaeus  ?  What  of  the  kinu;  of  Syria  ?  In  which  direction  was 
Syria  from  Canaan  ?  11.  What  of  the  descendants  of  Judas  Maccabaeus  ?  What  of  Pom- 
pey? Whom  did  he  appoint  to  govern  Judah  ?  12.  When  did  the-  Roman  senate  appoint 
Herod  king  of  the  Jews?  What  of  Herod?  Ch.  XXII. — 1.  What  of  the  prophets? 
2.  What  is  told  of  Elijah  ' 


THE    HEBREWS.  41 

4.  Ai  last,  when  his  mission  on  earth  was  ended,  there  came  a 
chariot  of  fire,  and  horses  of  fire,  and  carried  Elijah  by  a  whirlwind 
up  to  heaven. 

5.  Elijah's  mantle  fell  from  the  fiery  chariot.  It  was  caught  up 
by  a  person  named  Elisha,  and  he  likewise  became  a  very  celebrated 
prophet.  He  cursed  some  little  children  because  they  laughed  at  his 
bald  head ;  and  soon  afterwards  two  she-bears  tore  forty  and  two  of 
them  in  pieces. 

6.  When  Elisha  was  dead,  and  had  lain  many  months  in  his  sepul- 
chre, another  dead  man  happened  to  be  let  down  into  the  same  dark- 
some place.  But,  when  the  corpse  touched  the  hallowed  bones  of 
the  prophet  Elisha  it  immediately  revived,  and  became  a  living  man 
again. 

7.  Jonah  Avas  another  prophet.  A  whale  swallowed  him,  and  kept 
him  three  days  in  the  depths  of  ocean,  and  then  vomited  him  safely 
on  dry  land.  Isaiah  was  also  a  prophet.  He  foretold  many  terrible 
calamities  that  were  to  befall  Israel  and  Judah,  and  the  surrounding 
nations.  Jeremiah  bewailed  in  plaintive  accents  the  sins  and  misfor- 
tunes of  God's  people. 

8.  The  prophet  Daniel  foretold  the  downfall  of  Belshazzar,  king  of 
Babylon.  He  was  afterwards  cast  into  a  den  of  lions  in  Babylon,  at 
the  command  of  king  Darius.  The  next  morning  the  king  looked 
down  into  the  den,  and  there  was  Daniel,  alive  and  well! 

9.  King  Darius  then  ordered  Daniel  to  be  drawn  out  of  the  den, 
and  his  false  accusers  to  be  thrown  into  it.  The  moment  that  these 
wicked  persons  touched  the  bottom,  the  lions  sprang  forward  and 
tore  them  limb  from  limb. 

10.  Many  other  prophets  appeared  at  various  times,  and  most  of 
them  performed  such  wonderful  works  that  there  could  be  no  doubt 
oftheir  possessing  power  from  on  high.  Now  it  was  remarked  that 
all  these  prophets,  or  nearly  all,  spoke  of  a  King,  or  Ruler,  or  other 
illustrious  Personage,  who  was  to  appear  among  the  Jews. 

11.  Although  they  foretold  the  most  dreadful  calamities  to  the 
people,  still  there  was  this  one  thing  to  comfort  them.  A  descendant 
of  king  David  was  to  renew  the  glory  of  the  Jewish  race,  and  estab- 
lish his  sway  over  the  whole  world. 

12.  This  great  event  was  expected  to  happen  in  about  fifteen  hun- 
dred years  after  Moses  led  the  Israelites  out  of  Egypt.  And  it  did 
then  happen.  When  the  appointed  period  had  elapsed,  there  ap- 
peared a  star  in  a  certain  cpaarter  of  the  heavens. 

13.  Three  wise  men  from  the  east  beheld  the  star,  and  were  guid- 
ed by  it  to  a  stable  in  the  little  village  of  Bethlehem.  It  was  about 
five  miles  from  Jerusalem.     There,  in  a  manger,  lay  the  infant  Jesus! 

J .  What  of  Elisha .'  7.  What  of  Jonah  ?  Isaiah?  Jeremiah?  8.  What  of  Daniel  ? 
10.  What  can  you  say  of  the  prophet*?  Of  what  did  the  prophets  all  speak?  11.  What 
cheering  prospect  did  the  prophets  hold  out  to  the  Jews?  12,  About  how  long  after  Moses 
did  Christ  appear?  What  of  a  star  in  ttie  east  ?  13.  What  of  Bethlehem  ?  Whom  ilj.4 
lh*  wise  tneu  find  in  a  stable  ? 

4* 


42 


SCHOOL    HISTORY 


CHAPTER  XXIII.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Crucifixion  of  the  Saviour.     Destruction  of  Jerusalem. 


1.  The  greatest  event,  not  only  in  the  history  of  the  Jews,  hut  in 
the  history  of  the  world,  had  now  taken  place.  This  was  the  coming 
of  the  Saviour.  But  my  readers  must  not  expect  me  to  relate  the 
whole  story  of  this  divii\e  Personage  in  the  little  book  Avhich  I  am 
now  writing. 

2.  The  Jews  rejected  him.  They  had  been  looking  for  an  earthly 
potentate;  and,  when  they  beheld  the  meek  and  lowly  Jesus,  they 
despised  and  hated  him.  From  the  time  that  he  proclaimed  himself 
the  Messiah,  they  sought  to  take  his  life. 

3.  They  brought  him  before  the  judgment-seat  of  Pontius  Pilate, 
who  was  then  the  Roman  governor  of  Judea.  Pilate  sentenced  him 
to  death,  and  the  Saviour  of  the  world  was  crucified  between  two 
thieves.  He  however  rose  from  the  dead,  after  being  buried  three 
days,  and  ascended  into  heaven! 

4.  Such  is  the  brief  story  of  Jesus  Christ.  After  his  death,  his 
apostles  proceeded  to  preach  his  Gospel  throughout  the  land  of  Ca- 
naan and  other  countries.  Of  all  the  apostles,  Paul  was  the  most 
active  and  successful. 

5.  He  visited  various  parts  of  Palestine,  Syria,  Asia  Minor,  and 
Greece.  At  length  he  was  sent  as  a  prisoner  to  Rome,  to  be  tried  by 
the  emperor.  He  went  with  other  prisoners  in  a  small  vessel  nearly 
the  whole  length  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea. 

Ch.  XXIII. — 1.  What  is  the  greatest  event  that  has  has  occurred  on  the  globe  ?  How 
long  since  Christ  was  born?  How  long  after  the  creation  did  Christ  appear?  Ans.  Four 
thousand  and  four  years.  How  long  after  the  Hood  ?  2.  How  did  the  Jews  receive 
Christ  ?  3.  What  o'  Pilate  ?  The  crucifixion  ?  4.  What  did  Christ's  Apostles  do  after 
his  death?  What  of  Paul  ?  5.  What  countries  did  Paul  visit  ?  Where  was  he  at  length 
(pnt  ? 


THE    HEBREWS.  43 

G.  In  the  course  of  the  voyage,  the  vessel  Avas  wrecked  upon  the 
island  of  Malta,  during  a  terrible  gale.  After  this  the  vessel  proceed- 
ed on  its  voyage,  and  Paul  reached  Borne,  sixty-one  years  after  Christ. 
Here  he  remained  in  prison  a  long  time;  but  many  persons  came  to 
visit -him,  and  he  preached  to  them  all  the  doctrines  of  Christianity. 
Paul  was  at  length  released,  but  it  is  believed  that  he  was  beheaded 
by  order  of  the  emperor  Nero. 

7.  The  apostle  had  now  sown  the  seeds  of  the  Gospel  in  many 
countries,  and  the  fruits  began  to  appear.  Nearly  all  the  civilized 
world  were  worshippers  of  the  R.oman  gods,*  but  this  heathen  faith 
gradually  gave  way  before  the  Gospel,  and,  in  process  of  time,  Chris- 
tianity was  diffused  over  nearly  the  whole  of  Europe. 

S.  Long  before  the  crucifixion  of  Christ,  the  Jews  had  become 
completely  subject  to  the  Roman  power.  But,  about  forty  years  after 
his  death,  they  rebelled  against  their  masters. 

9.  Titus,  the  Roman  general,  immediately  marched  to  besiege  Je- 
rusalem. A  most  dreadful  war  ensued.  The  inhabitants  were  shut 
up  in  the  city,  and  soon  were  greatly  in  want  of  food.  Hunger  im- 
pelled one  of  the  Jewish  women  to  devour  her  own  child.  When 
Titus  heard  of  it,  he  was  so  shocked  that  he  vowed  the  destruction 
of  the  whole  Jewish  race,  and  more  than  a  hundred  thousand  per- 
sons perisned  during  this  frightful  siege  ! 

10.  At  length  the  city  was  taken  in  the  night-time,  and  set  on  fire. 
The  flames  caught  the  temple.  The  hills  on  which  Jerusalem  is  sit- 
uated were  all  blazing  like  so  many  volcanoes.  The  blood  of  the 
slaughtered  inhabitants  hissed  upon  the  burning  brands. 

1 1.  Ninety-seven  thousand  Jews  were  taken  prisoners.  Some  were 
sold  as  slaves.  The  conquerors  exposed  others  to  be  torn  in  pieces 
by  wild  beasts.  A  few  people  remained  in  Jerusalem,  and  partly  re- 
built the  city.  But  it  was  again  destroyed  by  a  Roman  emperor 
named  Adrian.  He  levelled  the  walls  and  houses  with  the  earth, 
and  sowed  the  ground  with  salt. 

12.  The  Jews  were  scattered  all  over  the  world.  This  catastrophe 
had  long  been  prophesied.  There  are  now  between  three  and  lour 
millions  of  them  in  different  parts  of  the  earth.  They  still  keep  their 
religion,  and  many  of  their  old  customs.  Jerusalem  has  been  par- 
tially restored,  but  it  is  now  very  different  from  what  it  was  in  the 
time  of  our  Saviour. 

C.  Where  was  Paul's  vessel  wrecked?  When  did  he  arrive  at  Rome?  To  whom  did 
lie  preach  Christianity  ?  What  is  supposed  to  have  been  his  fate  ?  7.  What  had  the  apos- 
tles done?  What  of  the  worship  ol  heathen  deities?  What  of  Christianity  ?  9.  To 
whom  had  the  .lews  been  long  subject?  What  occurred  forty  years  after  the  death  of 
Christ?  9.  What  of  Titus?  Describe  the  siege  of  Jerusalem.  11.  What  of  Adrian? 
12.  What  became  of  the  Jews?  What  event  had  been  foretold  by  the  prophets?  Win 
of  Jerusalem? 


44  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  XXIV.-ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Cyrus  conquers  Babylon.     His  death. 

1.  In  a  former  part  of  this  book  I  have  told  the  story  of  Assyria, 
the  first  great  empire  of  ancient  times.  It  was  situated,  as  you  re- 
member, on  the  borders  of  the  rivers  Tigris  and  Euphrates.  In.  thia 
region  the  climate  is  warm,  and  the  soil  exceedingly  fruitful. 
Here  the  human  race  seemed  to  multiply  in  the  most  wonderful 
manner. 

2.  Thus  many  nations  soon  sprung  up  and  increased,  till  the  whole 
surrounding  country  was  filled  with  multitudes  of  people.  Assyria, 
at  one  time,  extended  its  dominion  over  most  of  trfese  nations ;  but 
at  length  Persia  became  a  powerful  monarchy,  and  not  only  Assyria, 
but  a  great  many  other  nations,  became  subject  to  it. 

3.  The  first  inhabitants  of  Persia  were  descended  from  Elam,  the 
eldest  son  of  Shem.  They  were  therefore  called  Elamites.  Very 
little  is  known  of  their  history  till  about  eighteen  centuries  after  the 
deluge.  Cyrus,  a  great  conqueror,  then  ascended  the  throne  of  Per- 
sia. Some  historians  have  spoken  of  Cyrus  as  a  wise  and  excellent 
monarch,  but  it  appears  probable  that  he  was  no  better  than  most 
other  conquerors. 

4.  Cyrus  continued  to  extend  his  empire  in  all  directions.  Media, 
Parthia,  Mesopotamia,  Armenia,  Syria,  Canaan,  and  parts  of  Arabia 
were  subdued,  and  made  portions  of  his  kingdom.  One  of  his  chief 
exploits  was  the  taking  of  the  city  of  Babylon,  the  capital  of  Babylonia. 
The  walls  of  this  great  city  were  so  thick  and  high,  that  it  would 
have  been  impossible  for  an  enemy  either  to  break  them  down,  or  to 
climb  over  them,  it  was  therefore  a  very  difficult  matter  to  take 
this  strong  place. 

5.  Now  the  channel  of  the  river  Euphrates  ran  directly  through 
the  centre  of  Babylon.  Cyrus  caused  deep  ditches  to  be  dug  around 
the  city,  so  that  he  could  draw  off  all  the  water  of  the  river,  and 
leave  the  channel  dry.  When  the  ditches  were  completed,  he  waited 
for  a  proper  time  to  draw  off'  the  river. 

6.  On  a  certain  night,  Belshazzar,  king  of  Babylon,  made  a  great 
festival.  His  guards,  and  nearly  all  the  inhabitants,  were  eating  and 
drinking,  thoughtless  of  the  enemy  on  the  outside  of  their  walls. 
The  Persians  seized  this  opportunity  to  throw  open  the  dams  of  the 
ditches. 

7.  The  whole  water  of  the  Euphrates  imrr  ediately  flowed  into 

Ch.  XXIV. — 1.  What  was  the  first  great  empire  ?  Where  was  Assyria  situated?  Cli- 
mate of  this  region  ?  Soil  ?  The  human  race  ?  2.  Increase  of  mankind  ?  What  of  As- 
syria? Persia?  Which  way  was  Persia  from  Canaan?  Arabia?  Caspian  Sea  ?  What 
gulf  lies  south  of  Persia  ?  3.  What  of  the  first  inhabitants  of  Persia  ?  At  what  time  did 
Cyrus  ascend  the  throne  of  Persia  ?  What  of  Persia  before  the  time  of  Cyrus  ?  Charac- 
ter of  Cyrus  ?  4.  What  were  some  of  the  countries  conquered  by  Cyrus?  In  whicli  direc- 
tion from  Persia  was  Media?  Parthia?  Mesopotamia?  Armenia?  Syria?  Canaan 
Arabia  i*     Describe  the  taking  of  Babylon. 


THE    HEBREWS.  45 

them.  Cyrus  put  himself  at  the  head  of  the  Persian  army;  and 
where  the  mighty  river  had  so  lately  rushed  along,  there  were  now 
the  trampling  footsteps  of  an  innumerable  host.  Thus  the  Persian 
troops  entered  the  city. 

S.  The  guards  of  the  royal  palace  were  surprised  and  slain.  Bel- 
shazzar  heard  the  clash  of  arms,  and  the  shrieks  of  dying  men,  as  he 
sat  with  his  nobles  in  the  banquet-hall.  But  it  was  too  late  to  escape. 
They  were  all  slaughtered,  and  their  blood  was  mingled  with  the 
vine  of  the  festival.  Thus  Babylon  was  taken,  and  Babylonia  becam 
a  part  of  Persia. 

9.  Cyrus  afterwards  marched  against  the  Scythians,  a  brave  nation 
who  dwelt  to  the  north-east  of  the  Caspian  Sea.  But  Tomyris,  their 
queen,  collected  an  army,  and  fought  a  bloody  battle  with  the  Per- 
sians. Cyrus  was  defeated,  and  taken  prisoner.  The  son  of  the 
Scythian  queen  had  been  killed  in  the  battle,  and  she  resolved  to 
avenge  his  death.  She  ordered  her  attendants  to  kill  Cyrus,  which 
was  done  in  a  horrible  manner. 


CHAPTER  XXV.-ASIA  CONTINUED. 

m 

Reign  of  Cambyses. 

1.  Cambyses,  the  son  of  Cyrus,  seems  to  have  been  a  worse  man 
than  his  father.  He  was  addicted  to  drinking  wine ;  and  Prexaspes, 
a  favorite  courtier,  hinted  to  him  that  he  injured  his  health  and 
faculties  by  this  practice.  When  Prexaspes  had  done  speaking, 
Cambyses  called  for  wine,  and  drank  off  several  large  goblets.  "  JNow 
we  shall  see,"  said  he,  "  whether  the  wine  has  dimmed  my  sight,  or 
rendered  my  hand  unsteady  !" 

2.  He  then  called  for  a  bow  and  arrow,  and  ordered  the  son  of 
Prexaspes  to  stand  at  the  farther  end  of  the  hall.  The  boy  did  so  , 
and  while  his  father  looked  on,  the  cruel  Cambyses  took  aim  at  the 
poor  child,  and  shot  an  arrow  directly  through  his  heart. 

3.  I  am  very  sorry,  my  dear  young  reader,  to  tell  you  such  horrible 
stories  as  these.  I  would  not  tell  them  but  that  they  are  true,  and 
they  may  teach  us  good  and  useful  lessons.  They  may  show  us  how 
wricked  and  miserable  even  kings  may  be. 

4.  Thev  may  also  make  us  rejoice  that  we  live  in  an  age  when 
such  things  do  not  happen.  You  must  recollect  that  I  am  telling 
you  of  what  took  place  many  ages  since.  The  people  were  then 
thought  to  be  merely  the  playthings  of  their  kings,  and  only  made 
to  serve  them.     Since  that  time,  Christ  has  come  and  told  us  that  il 

9.  What  event  terminated  the  Assyrian  empire*?  9.  Where  did  (lie  Scythians  live' 
Their  Character  ?  What  ofCynw?  Ch.  XXV. — 1.  WBat  of  Cambysei ?  What  story 
can  you  tell  of  him  ?  3.  What  lessens  may  we  learn  from  these  painful  tales  of  ancient 
kiinjs?  4.  What  was  thought  of  the  people  in  these  ancient  times?  What  has  Christ  sinco 
told  us? 


40  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

is  the  will  of  God  that  each  man  should  do  to  another  as  he  would 
be  done  by. 

5.  It  is  true  that  in  many  countries,  particularly  in  Asia,  the  divine 
laws  of  Christ  are  not  known ;  but  in"  most  places  the  kings  are 
better  than  they  were  in  the  time  of  Cambyses.  In  our  happy  coun- 
try we  have  no  kings,  and  therefore  the  stories  I  am  telling  you  about 
the  cruelties  of  the  ancient  monarchs  of  Asia  appear  very  shocking. 

6.  But  I  must  go  on  with  my  story.  Cambyses  made  war  against 
he  Egyptians.  At  the  siege  of  one  of  their  cities,  he  contrived  a 
ery  cunning  method  to  take  the  place.     The  Egyptians  believed 

that  cats  and  dogs  were  sacred,  and  they  worshipped  them  as  gods. 
This  foolish  superstition  induced  Cambyses  to  collect  all  the  cats  and 
dogs  in  the  country,  and  place  them  in  front  of  his  army. 

7.  The  Egyptians  were  afraid  to  discharge  their  arrows,  lest  they 
should  kill  some  of  these  divine  animals.  The  Persians  therefore 
marched  onward,  with  the  dogs  barking  and  the  cats  mewing  before 
them,  and  the  city  was  taken  without  the  slightest  resistance.  . 

S.  The  chief  deity  of  the  Egyptians  was  a  great  bull,  to  whom 
they  had  given  the  name  of  Apis.  Cambyses  killed  this  holy  bull, 
and  bestowed  the  flesh  on  some  of  his  soldiers  for  dinner.  Soon 
afterwards,  to  the  great  joy  of  the  Egyptians,  he  killed  himself  acci- 
dentally with  his  own  sword. 


CHAPTER  XXVI.-ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Expedition  of  Xerxes  into  Greece. 

1.  Another  king  of  the  Persians  was  named  Darius.  He  was 
likewise  a  cruel  tyrant.  When  he  was  going  on  an  expedition 
against  the  Scythians,  he  compelled  an  old_  man's  three  sons  to  join 
his  army.  These  were  all  the  children  the  old  man  had.  He  came 
into  the  king's  presence,  and  earnestly  entreated  that  one  of  his  sons 
might  be  left  at  home. 

2.  "  I  am  very  poor  and  infirm,"  said  the  old  man.  "  I  am  unable 
to  work.  If  you  take  away  all  my  three  children,  I  shall  starve  to 
death."  "Indeed,"  answered  king  Darius  in  a  very  compassionate 
tone,  "  then  they  shall  all  three  remain  with  you  !"  Immediately 
he  ordered  the  three  young  men  to  be  slain,  and  gave  their  dead 
bjdies  to  their  poor  old  father. 

3.  While  Darius  was  preparing  to  make  war  on  Greece  he  fell 
sick  and  died.  His  successor  was  his  son  Xerxes.  This  monarch 
invaded  Greece  with  nearly  two  millions  of  men  on  land,  and  more 
than  half  a  million  on  board  his  fleet. 


5.  Where  are  Ijie  laws  of  Christ  not  known  ?  What  of  kings  now  ?  6.  How  did  Cam- 
byses capture  an  Egyptian  city  ?  S.  What  of  the  Egyptian  god  Apis?  How  was  Cambyses 
slain?  Ch.  XXVI.— 1.  What  of  Darius?  Tell  a  story  of  his  cruelty.  3.  Who  was  to 
success^-  of  Darius?  How  large  was  the  army  of  Xerxes  when  lie  invaded  Greece? 
Where  is  Greece  '  Ans.  In  Europe.  How  far  from  Persia  ?  Ans.  About  fifteen  hundred 
miles.     In  which  direction  from  Persia  ?     Ans.  N>  rth-west. 


PERSIA.  47 

4.  You  may  well  believe,  that  a  king,  who  could  collect  so  large 
an  army,  had  great  wealth  and  power.  At  this  time  the  Persian 
empire  was  of  vast  extent,  but  still  Xerxes  wished  to  conquer  other 
nations.  His  capital  was  Persepolis,  one  of  the  most  splendid  cities 
that  ever  existed. 

5.  Here  Xerxes  had  magnificent  palaces ;  he  had  gold  and  silver 
in  abundance,  he  had  precious  stones  more  than  he  could  count;  he 
was  indeed  surrounded  with  pomp  and  magnificence  ;  but  all  these 
could  not  bring  contentment.  He  was  still  desirous  of  conquering 
other  nations;  and  for  this  purpose  he  collected  the  greatest  army  of 
which  history  gives  us  any  account. 

6.  When  Xerxes  arrived  in  Greece,  it  so  happened  that  a  great 
mountain,  called  Mount  Athos,  stood  directly  in  the  way  that  he 
wished  his  ships  to  sail.  He  therefore  wrote  a  letter  to  the  moun- 
tain, commanding  it  to  get  out  of  his  way;  but  Mount  Athos  would 
not  stir  one  step. 

7.  In  order  to  bring  his  land-forces  from  Asia  into  Greece,  Xerxes 
built  a  bridge  of  boats  across  a  part  of  the  sea  called  the  Hellespont. 
But  the  waves  broke  the  bridge  to  pieces,  and  Xerxes  commanded 
the  sea  to  be  whipped  for  its  disrespectful  conduct. 

8.  The  greater  part  of  the  cities  of  Greece  submitted  to  Xerxes; 
but  Sparta  and  Athens  made  a  stubborn  resistance.  Though  they 
could  muster  but  few  soldiers,  these  were  far  more  valiant  than  the 
Persians. 

9.  At  Thermopylae,  Xerxes  wished  to  lead  his  army  through  a 
narrow  passage  between  a  mountain  and  the  sea.  Leonidas,  king 
of  Spana,  opposed  him  with  six  thousand  men.  Seventy  thousand 
Persians  were  slaiR  in  the  attempt  to  break  through  the  pass. 

10.  At  last,  Leonidas  found  that  the  Persians  would  not  be  kept 
back,  any  longer.  He  therefore  sent  away  all  but  three  hundred  men, 
and  with  these  he  remained  at  the  pass  of  Thermopylae.  The  im- 
mense host  of  the  Persians  came  onward  like  a  flood ;  and  only  one 
suldier  of  the  three  hundred  escaped  to  Sparta  to  tell  that  the  rest 
were  slain. 

11.  But  Xerxes  did  not  long  continue  to  triumph  in  Greece.  His 
fleet  was  defeated  at  Salamis,  and  his  army  at  Platsoa.  In  escaping, 
he  was  forced  to  cross  the  Hellespont  in  a  little  fishing-vessel ;  lor 
the  sea,  in  spite  of  its  being  whipped,  had  again  broken  his  bridge 
of  boats. 

12.  Not  long  after  his  return  to  Persia,  the  proud  Xerxes  was 
murdered  in  his  bed.  This  event  happened  about  the  year  465  before 
Christ.     His  son,  Artaxerxes,  made  peace  with  the  Greeks. 

13.  The  story  of  Xerxes  may  teacli  us  the  folly  of  ambition.  Had 
he  been  content  with  staying  at  home  and  governing  his  people  so 

4.  What  of  the  Persian  empire  in  the  time  of  Xerxes?  What  of  Persepolis  ?  In  which 
direction  was  it  from  Babylon  ?  Jerusalem?  5.  What  of -the  wealth  and  magnificence  of 
Xerxes?  What  was  the  greatest  army  ever  known  ?,  G.  What  of  Mount  Athos?  7.  What 
of  i  hi;  Hellespont  ?  8.  What  of  Greece  ?  9.  What  of  Thermopylae?  10.  What  of  Leoni- 
das? 11.  What  of  Salamis?  Plalaea?  How  did  Xerxes  return ?  12.  Death  of  Xerxes? 
When  did  this  event  happen  ?  Who  succeeded  Xerxes?  13.  What  may  the  story  of  Xi  rxei 
teach  us?     How  might  he  have  been  happy? 


4S  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

as  to  make  them  happy,  he  might  have  been  happy  himself.  But, 
having  too  much,  he  still  strove  to  acquire  more,  and  thus  brought 
misery  upon  himself  and  millions  of  his  fellow-men. 

14.  Let  us  be  content  in  more  humble  situations,  for  we  see  that 
happiness  is  not  always  associated  with  Avealth  and  power.  Let  us 
remember,  too,  that  pride  and  vanity  made  even  Xerxes  ridiculous 
with  all  his  magnificence. 


CHAPTER  XXVIL— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Affairs  of  Persia  till  the  Saracen  Conquest. 

1.  Between  one  and  two  centuries  after  the  death  of  Xerxes,  that 
is,  about  330  years  before  Christ,  Persia  was  invaded  by  Alexander 
the  Great,  king  of  Macedon.  Darius  the  Third  was  then  king  of 
Persia.  Being  defeated  by  Alexander,  two  of  his  own  subjects  bound 
him  with  golden  chains,  and  put  him  in  a  covered  cart. 

2.  They  intended  to  murder  Darius,  and  get  possession  of  the  king- 
dom. But  Alexander  came  suddenly  upon  the  conspirators,  and 
forced  them  to  take  flight.  As  they  rode  away,  they  discharged 
their  darts  at  Darius,  and  slew  him. 

3.  After  this  time,  Persia  became  subject  to  the  Parthians,  whose 
country  had  formerly  been  a  province  of  the  Persian  empire.  It  con- 
tinued under  the  government  of  the  Parthian  kings  nearly  five  hun- 
dred years.  About  the  year  230  after  the  Christian  era,  a  Persian, 
named  Artaxerxes,  excited  a  rebellion  and  made  himself  king. 

4.  His  descendants  occupied  the  throne  for  many  generations. 
Cne  of  the  most  distinguished  was  Chosroes  the  Great,  who  lived 
about  six  hundred  years  after  Christ.  He  made  war  against  the  Ro- 
mans, and  ravaged  their  provinces  in  Asia. 

5.  One  of  his  successors  was  likewise  named  Chosroes.  This 
hateful  monster  caused  his  own  father  to  be  beaten  to  death.  But 
Heaven  punished  him  by  the  wickedness  of  his  eldest  son,  whose 
name  was  Siroes.  He  dethroned  his  father,  and  murdered  all  his 
brothers  in  his  presence. 

6.  Siroes  then  ordered  his  father  to  be  thrown  into  a  dungeon. 
Here,  instead  of  killing  the  old  king  at  once,  he  tormented  him  for  a 
long  time  by  pricking  him  with  the  points  of  arrows  !  Chosroes  died 
at  last,  in  great  agony. 

How  did  lie  bring  misery  upon  himself  and  others?  14.  Why  should  we  be  content? 
What  should  we  remember?  Ch.  XXVII. — 1.  When  was  Persia  invaded  by  Ale  .ander 
the  Great  ?  Who  was  then  king  of  Persia  ?  What  happened  to  Darius  ?  2.  How  was  he 
killed?  3.  To  whom  did  Persia  become  subject  after  the  death  of  Darius?  How  long  did 
it  oontinue  under  the  government  of  Parthia  ?  Which  way  is  Parthia  from  Persia  ?  When 
did  Artaxerxes  make  himself  king?  4.  What  of  his  descendants?  Chosroes  the  Great' 
When  did  he  live?  What  did  he  do?  5.  What  of  the  successor  of  Chosroes  the  Great? 
Wliai  wickedness  did  Siroes  commit? 


PERSIA.  49 

7.  These  things  may  seem  too  shocking  to  tell;  but  it  is  perhaps 
necessary,  that  my  young  readers  should  know  how  very  cruel  men 
may  become  when  given  up  to  the  influence  of  passion.  Let  us  be 
thankful  that  the  religion  of  Christ  has  taught  us  to  look  upon  such 
crimes  as  were  often  practised  by  the  Persian  kings  with  horror  and 
disgust. 

S.  Isdigertes,  who  ascended  the  throne  in  the  year  630  of  the  Chris- 
tian era,  was  the  last  of  this  dynasty  of  Persian  kings.  During  his 
ieign,  the  Saracens,  a  warlike  people  of  Arabia,  invaded  Persia,  and 
conquered  it.     Isdigertes  Avas  killed  in  battle. 

9.  Persia  then  became  a  "part  of  the  Saracen  empire.  It  was  ruled 
by  the  caliphs  who  resided  at  Bagdad,  a  splendid  city  which  they 
built  on  the  river  Tigris. 

10.  This  celebrated  place  was  founded  in  672,  and  once  contained 
'two  millions  of  inhabitants.  It  was  then  filled  with  costly  buildings, 
but  it  is  now  in  ruins.  The  modern  city  is  poorly  built,  and  compar- 
atively insignificant. 


CHAPTER  XXVIII.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Modem  History  of  Persia. 

1.  In  the  year  1258  of  the  Christian  era,  the  empire  of  the  Sara- 
cens was  subverted  by  the  Tartars.  Persia  was  governed  by  them  for 
a  considerable  time.  It  was  afterwards  ruled  by  monarchs  called 
Sophis,  or  Shahs.  The  first  of  these  was  named  Ismael,  a  man  of 
Saracen  descent.  He  took  possession  of  the  throne  by  violence,  and 
reigned  twenty-three  years. 

2.  The  greatest  of  these  monarchs  was  named  Shah  Abbas.  He 
ascended  the  throne  in  15S9.  Abbas  fought  against  the  Turks,  and 
gained  many  splendid  victories.  He  also  deprived  the  Portuguese  of 
their  possessions  in  the  East. 

3.  But  the  best  of  all  the  kings  of  this  family  was  Shah  Husseyn; 
and  he  was  also  the  last,  and  most  unfortunate.  He  began  to  reign  in 
the  year  1694.  Husseyn  and  his  subjects  met  with  many  disasters; 
and  he  was,  at  length,  compelled  to  surrender  his  throne  to  a  rival. 

4.  But  before  he  took  off  the  crown  from  his  head,  Huyssen  went 
on  fuot  through  the  principal  streets  of  Ispahan,  which  was  then  the 
capital.     The  people  thronged  around  him  with  tears  and  lamenta 


7.  How  may  men  become  very  cruel ?  For  what  should  we  he  thankful  ?  8.  When 
i!i. I  Isdigertes  ascend  the  throne ?  What  of  him?  What  did  the  Saracens  do  during  his 
p-ign.'  How  was  Isdigertes  killed  ?  9.  Of  what  empire  did  Persia  become  a part?  How 
was  it  ruled?  Where  did  the  caliphs  live  ?  10.  What  of  Bagdad  ?  Cm.  XXVIII.— 1. 
What  of  the  empire  of  the  Saracens  in  the  year  1258  ?  How  was  Persia,  governed  ?  Whaf 
of  Ismael  ?  '2.  Who  was  Shah  Abbas?  When  did  he  ascend  the  throne?  What  did  he 
d.i?  3.  What  of  Shah  Husseyn?  4.  Describe  the  manner  in  which  he  surrendered  his 
crowu- 


50  '     S  C  H-  0  O'L    HISTORY 

tions.     The  excellent  and  kind-hearted  monarch  endeavored  to  eoiw 
fort  them. 

5.  He  told  them  that  the  new  king,  whose  name  was  Mahmoud, 
would  not  love  them  better  than  he  himself  had,  but  that  he  would 
know  better  how  to  govern  them,  and  how  to  conquer  their  enemies. 
So  the  good  Husseyn  took  off  his  crown,  which  had  been  only  a 
a  trouble  to  him,  and  bade  his  people  farewell. 

6.  In  1730,  Kouli  Khan  took  possession  of  the  throne  of  Persia.  He 
called  himself  Nadir  Shah.  He  was  a  famous'  conqueror  and  tyrant, 
and  was  assassinated  in  his  tent  after  a  reign  of  about  seventeen 
years. 

7.  Since  his  death,  there  has  been  much  bloodshed  id"  Persia. 
Ambitious  men  have  often  aspired  to  the  throne,  and  involved  the 
country  in  civil  war.  The  late  sovereign  was  better  than  most  of  his 
predecessors;  the  present  king  is  named  Mohammed,  and  he  bears 
the  title  of  Shah. 

S.  The  king  generally  resides  in  the  city  of  Teheran.  But  he  has 
a  beautiful  palace  at  Ispahan,  called  the  Palace  of  Forty  Pillars. 
Each  of  the  forty  pillars  is  supported  by  four  lions,  of  white  marble. 
The  whole  edifice  looks  as  if  it  were  built  of  pearl,  and  silver,  and 
gold,  and  precious  stones. 

9.  I  have  now  done  with  the  story  of  Persia.  Like  that  of  most 
other  eastern  countries,  it  abounds  in  tales  of  cruelty,  battle,  and 
bloodshed.  In  ancient  times,  the  people  worshipped  the  sun,  and 
bowed  down  to  idols.  But,  for  more  than  a  thousand  years,  they 
have  been  believers  in  a  false  prophet,  called  Mahomet. 

10.  They  have  never  become  acquainted  with  the  religion  of  Jesus 
Christ,  which  teaches  us  to  be  gentle  and  forgiving  one  to  another; 
and  thus  cruelty  has  ever  been  common  among  them. 

11.  The  climate  of  Persia  is  mild,  and  the  country  abounds  in  beau- 
tiful and  fragrant  trees,  shrubs,  and  flowers.  The  people  are  less 
warlike  than  in  former  times.  The  rich  live  in  splendid  palaces,  and 
the  poor  in  mud  huts.  The  kingdom  is  small,  compared  with  the 
vast  empire  of  Xerxes.  Persepolis,  the  ancient  capital,  is  now  a  heap 
of  ruins.  Teheran  and  Ispahan,  the  two  principal  cities,  are  of  com- 
paratively modern  date. 

12.  From  what  I  have  told  you,  you  will  not  like  the  Persian  char- 
acter; yet  it  is  not  altogether  bad.  The  people  are  very  fond  of  read- 
ing, and  telling  instructive  stories ;  many  of  these  were  written  ages 
since,  and  are  exceedingly  beautiful.  The  people  also  have  a  taste 
for  poetry,  and  they  appear  to  be  fond  of  the  beauties  of  nature,  and 
to  have  a  love  of  virtue. 


6;  When  did  Kouli  Khan  come  to  the  throne?  What  other  name  had  he?  What  of 
him  ?  7.  What  of  Persia  since  the  death  of  Kouli  Khan  ?  What  is  said  of  the  present 
ruler?  8.  Where  does  he  reside?  Describe  the  palace  of  the  emperor.  9.  What  of  the 
story  of  Persia?  What  was  the  worship  of  the  ancient  Persians?  What  is  now  the  re- 
ligion of  the  people?  10.  What  has  always  been  common  among  them?  II.  What  of 
the  climate  of  Persia?  The  soil?  People?  Plow  does  the  extent  of  the  country  can- 
pare  with  what  it  was  in  the  time  of  Xerxes  '  What  of  Persepolis?  Teheran  ?  Ispahan  ? 
12.  What  of  the  Persian  character? 


PERSIA. 


51 


CHAPTER  XXIX.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Early  History  of  China. 


1.  The  territory  of  the  Chinese  empire  is  nearly  the  same  at  the 
present  day  that  it  has  been  from  the  earliest  records.  It  is  bounded 
on  he  north  by  Asiatic  Russia,  on  the  east  by  the  Pacific  Ocean,  and 
on  the  south  by  the  Chinese  Sea  and  Farther  India.  On  the  west, 
there  are  mountains  and  sandy  deserts,  which  divide  it  from  Thibet 
and  Tartary. 

2.  This  empire  is  very  ancient,  and  has  continued  longer  than  any 
other  that  has  ever  existed.  Its  history  goes  back  four  thousand 
years  from  the  present  time.  The  name  of  its  founder  was  Fohi, 
whom  some  writers  suppose  to  have  been  the  same  as  Noah. 

3.  There  have  been  twenty- two  dynasties,  or  separate  familes  of 
emperors,  who  have  successively  ruled  over  China.  If  their  history 
were  to  be  particularly  related,  it  would  fill  at  least  twenty-two  great 
books.  Yet  few  of  the  emperors  did  any  thing  that  was  worthy  of 
remembrance. 

4.  Before  the  time  of  Fohi,  the  Chinese  believe  that  men  liveo 
pretty  much  like  brutes;  that  they  had  no  settled  homes,  but  wan- 
dered up  and  down  in  the  forests,  seeking  for  food;  and  when  they 
caught  anv  animals  or  birds,  that  they  drank  the  blood,  and  devoured 
even  the  hair  and  feathers. 


Ch.  XXIX. — 1.  What  of  the  Chinese  empire?  Boundaries?  What  divides  it  from 
Thibet  and  Tartary?  Which  way  is  China  from  Persia?  Hindustan?  Siberia?  The 
Uirman  Empire  ?  2.  What  of  the  antiquity  and  duration  of  the  Chinese  empire  ?  How 
far  back  does  its  history  extend  ?  Who  was  its  founder  ?  What  do  some  writers  suppose  ? 
3.  What  of  the  dynasties  or  families  that  have  ruled  over  China?  4.  What  do  the  Lhintso 
•uppo«e  was  the  state  of  China  before  the  time  of  Fohi  ? 


52  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

5.  We  find  nothing  very  remarkable  about  the  Chinese  emperora 
till  the  reign  of  Chaus,  who  lived  about  a  thousand  years  before  the 
Christian  era.  He  was  extremely  fond  of  hunting,  and  used  to  gal- 
lop into  the  midst  of  the  rice-fields  in  pursuit  of  game.  In  this  man- 
ner he  did  so  much  mischief,  that  his  subjects  resolved  to  destroy  him. 

6.  There  was  a  large  river,  which  the  emperor  was  often  in  the 
habit  of  crossing.  On  the  shore  of  this  river  the  people  placed  a 
boat,  as  if  for  the  accommodation  of  Chaus.  The  next  time  that  the 
emperor  returned  from  hunting,  he  and  his  attendants  got  on  board 
the  boat,  and  set  sail  for  the  opposite  shore. 

7.  But  the  boat  had  been  contrived  on  purpose  for  his  destruction. 
In  the  middle  of  the  river  it  fell  to  pieces,  and  all  on  board  were 
drowned.  Thus  to  the  great  joy  of  his  subjects,  the  emperoi4  Chaus 
went  down  among  the  fishes,  and  never  again  came  a-hunting  in  the 
rice-fields. 

8.  The  emperor  Ching,  who  reigned  about  two  thousand  years  ago, 
built  a  great  wall,  in  order  to  protect  his  dominions  against  the  Tar- 
tars. It  was  forty-five  feet  high,  and  eighteen  feet  thick,  and  it  ex- 
tended over  mountains  and  valleys,  a  distance  of  fifteen  hundred 
miles.     This  wall  still  remains. 

9.  When  Chins:  had  completed  the  Avail,  he  thought  himself  so 
very  great  an  emperor,  that  none  of  his  predecessors  were  worth 
remembering.  He  therefore  ordered  all  the  historical  writings  and 
public  records  to  be  burnt.  He  also  caused  four  hundred  learned 
men,  who  were  addicted  to  writing  histories,  to  be  buried  alive. 

10.  If  the  emperor  Ching  could  have  caught  poor  old  Peter  Parley, 
he  certainly  would  have  buried  him  likewise,  with  his  four  hundred 
learned  brethren;  and  so  the  world  would  have  lost  this  Universal 
History  ! 


CHAPTER  XXX.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Anecdotes  of  the  Chinese  Emperors. 

1.  The  emperor  Vati  lived  about  the  time  of  the  Christian  era. 
This  emperor  was  desirous  of  reigning  till  the  world  should  come  to 
an  end,  and  perhaps  longer.  He  therefore  spent  his  time  in  endeav- 
oring to  brew  a  liquor  that  would  make  him  immortal.  But,  unfor 
tunately,  before  the  liquor  was  fit  to  drink,  the  emperor  died. 

2.  Another  emperor  instead  of  attending  to  the  affairs  of  the  nation 
applied  himself  Avholly  to  study.  His  prime  minister  took  advantage 
of  his  negligence,  and  raised  a  rebellion  against  him.     When  the 

5.  When  did  Chaus  live  ?  What  of  him  ?  6.  Relate  the  manner  in  which  the  people 
destroyed  him.  8.  When  did  the  emperor  Ching  live?  Describe  the  great  wall.  Doea 
it  still  remain  ?  9.  What  orders  did  he  give  respecting  historical  books,  records,  and 
learned  men?  Ch.  XXX.— 1.  What  of  the  emperor  Vati?  How  did  he  spend  hu 
time?     2.  Tell  the  story  of  a  very  learned  emperor. 


CHINA  53 

emperor  heard  the  shouts  of  the  rebels,  he  shut  his  hook,  and  put  on 
his  armor.  But,  on  ascending  the  ramparts  of  the  city,  he  saw  that 
it  was  too  late  to  resist.  He  then  returned  to  his  library,  which  con- 
tained one  hundred  and  forty  thousand  volumes. 

3.  The  emperor  knew  that  these,  books  had  been  the  means  of  his 
losing  the  vast  empire  of  China,  by  withdrawing  his  attention  from 
the  government.  He  therefore  set  fire  to  them  with  his  own  hands, 
and  the  whole  library  was  consumed.  The  rebels  afterwards  put 
him  to  death. 

4.  The  emperor  Si-given  began  to  reign  in  the  year  617  after  the 
Christian  era.  He  dwelt  in  a  magnificent  palace.  After  the  empe- 
ror's death,  his  son  came  to  the  palace,  and  was  astonished  at  its 
splendor  and  beauty.  "  Such  a  residence  is  good  for  nothing  but  to 
corrupt  a  monarch,  and  render  him  proud,"  exclaimed  he.  Accord- 
ingly he  commanded  this  great  and  costly  edifice  to  be  burnt  to  the 
ground. 

5.  Chwang-tsong  who  had  been  a  brave  soldier,  was  made  emperor 
about  eight  hundred  years  ago.  He  was  a  person  of  very  frugal 
habits.  It  was  one  of  his  singularities,  that  he  never  slept  in  a  bed, 
but  always  on  the  bare  ground,  with  a  bell  fastened  to  his  neck.  If 
he  turned  over  in  his  sleep,  the  ringing  of  the  bell  would  awaken 
him  ;  and  he  then  considered  it  time  to  get  up. 

6.  In  the  year  1209,  Genius  Khan  invaded  China  with  an  immense 
army  of  Tartars.  He  and  his  descendants  conquered  the  whole  em- 
pire, and  governed  it  during  many  years. 

7.  The  emperor  Ching-tsa  ascended  the  throne  three  or  four  cen- 
turies ago.  A  mine  was  discovered  during  his  reign,  and  precious 
stones  of  great  value  were  dug  out  of  it.  Some  of  them  were 
brought  to  the  emperor,  but  he  looked  scornfully  at  them. 

S.  "  Do  you  call  these  precious  stones?"  cried  he.  "What  are 
ihey  good  for  ?  They  can  neither  clothe  the  people,  nor  satisfy  their 
hunger."  So  saying,  he  ordered  the  mine  to  be  closed  up,  and  the 
miners  to  be  employed  in  some  more  useful  kind  of  labor. 

9.  About  a  hundred  years  ago,  in  the  reign  of  Yong-tch;ng,  there 
was  the  most  terrible  earthquake  that  had  ever  been  known.  It 
shook  down  nearly  all  the  houses  in  the  city  of  Pekin,  and  bured  one 
hundred  thousand  people.  A  still  greater  number  perished  in  the 
surrounding  country. 

10.  Nothing  very  remarkable  has  lately  happened  in  the  histo-y  of 
China,  except  that  in  ]84U  the  English  government  sent  an  expedition 
against  them,  which  took  Canton,  and  several  other  places.  The 
war  continued  till  LS42,  when  peace  was  made.  We  may  also  add  that 
a  revolution  began  in  1852,  which  threatens  to  overturn  the  present 
dynasty. 

•I.  When  did  Si-given  begin  to  reign  ?  Where  «J  i  <J  he  dwell.3  WThal  did  his  sou  do? 
5.  What  of  Chwang-tsong?  What  curious  fact  is  related  of  •him?  G.  When  did  Genghis 
Khan  invade  China  r    What  of  him  and  his  descendants  ?    7.   /"^at  of  the  emperor  Chmg- 

Ua?  Relate  the  story  cf  the  mine.  What  happened  in  the  it.sn  of  Yong-tching  ? 
10.  What  of  the  English  government  ?  What  is  the  name  of  the  present  emperor  ?  Wijcu 
did  he  come  to  the  throne  ? 

5* 


54  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  XXXI.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Cities  of  China.     Manners  of  the  Chinese. 

1.  I  must  now  give  you  a  short  account  of  the  cities  and  pec  pie  of 
China  as  they  are  at  this  da}'.  Nankin  was  formerly  the  capital  of 
China.  Pekin,  which  contains  two  millions  of  inhabitants,  is  now 
the  capital.  The  emperor's  palace  stands  in  a  part  of  Pekin  called 
the  Tartar  city. 

2.  The  walls  of  Pekin  are  built  of  brick,  and  are  nearly  one  hun- 
dred feet  high,  so  that  they  hide  the  whole  city.  They  are  so  thick 
that  sentinels  on  horseback  ride  round  the  city  on  the  top  of  the  wall. 
There  are  nine  gates,  which  have  marble  arches,  and  are  prodigiously 
high. 

3.  The  people  of  China  have  an  olive  complexion,  with  black  hair, 
•and  small  black  eyes.  The  chief  part  of  their  dress, is  a  long  loose 
robe,  which  is  fastened  round  the  body  with  a  silken  girdle.  In  this 
girdle  they  carry  a  knife,  and  two  sticks  for  eating  instead  of  a  knife 
and  fork. 

4.  The  Chinese  are  great  fibbers,  and  are  very  much  addicted  to 
cheating.  There  are  some  horrible  customs  among  them.  For 
instance,  if  parents  have  a  greater  number  of  children  than  they  can 
conveniently  support,  they  are  permitted  to  throw  them  into  a  river  ! 

5.  The  people  are  not  nice  about  what  they  eat.  Dead  puppy-dogs 
are  publicly  sold  in  the  streets  for  food.  Rats  and  mice  are  frequently 
eaten.  There  is  a  sort  of  bird's  nest  which  is  made  into  a  jelly,  and 
is  considered  a  great  delicacy. 

6.  The  Chinese  ladies  are  chiefly  remarkable  for  their  little  feet. 
A  grown  woman  in  China  is  able  to  wear  smaller  shoes  than  a  young 
child  in  America.  But  their  feet  are  kept  merely  for  show,  and  are 
almost  good  for  nothing  to  walk  with. 

7.  Religion  among  the  Chinese  is  in  a  very  sad  condition.  The 
people  are  given  up  to  idolatry.  Almost  all  religions  are  tolerated, 
although  but  little  reverence  is  paid  to  any.  There  are  more  temples 
than  can  be  easily  numbered. 

8.  When  a  Chinese  wishes  to  be  married,  he  buys  a  Avife  of  her 
parents,  but  he  is  not  permitted  to  see  her  till  she  is  sent  home.  The 
young  lady  is  brought  to  her  husband's  door  in  a  palankeen.  He  puts 
aside  the  curtains  of  the  palankeen,  and  peeps  in  at  his  new  wife 
If  he  does  not  like  her  looks,  he  sends  her  back  again. 

9.  In  China  there  are  some  very  singular  punishments.  Sometimes 
a  wooden  frame,  weighing  two  hundred  pounds,  is  put  round  a  man's 
neck.      He  is  compelled  to  carry  it  about  with  him  wherever  he 

Ch.  XXXI.— 1.  What  was  formerly  the  capital  of  China  ?  What  is  now  ?  How  many 
inhabitants  does  Pekin  contain?  Wliere  is  the  emperor's  palace  ?  1.  What  of  the  walla 
of  Pekin?  The  gates  ?  3.  What  of  the  people  of  China  ?  Their  dress  ?  4.  What  of 
the  character  of  the  Chinese?  Their  customs?  5.  What  of  food  ?  6.  What  of  the 
Chinese  ladies?  7.  What  of  religion  ill  China?  Temples?  8.  What  is  done  when  a 
man  wishes  to  be  married  ?      9.  What  of  punishments  in  China  ? 


CHINA.  55 

goes;  and,  so  long  as  he  wears  it,  he  can  neither  feed  himself,  nor 
lie  down. 

10.  One  of  the  most  curious  customs  of  China  was  that  of  excluding 
foreigners  from  the  country.  A  few  American  (and  European 
merchants  were  .permitted  to  reside  at  Canton,  but  they  were  obliged 
to  leave  their  wives  at  Macao.  No  other  strangers  were  permitted 
in  the  kingdom.  The  people  think  that  their  manners  and  customs 
are  the  best  in  the  world,  and  they  do  not  wish  foreigners  to  come 
and  introduce  new  notions.  By  the  treaty  of  peace  with  Great 
Britain  in  1842,  rive  ports  are  now  open  to  strangers. 

11.  China  has  a  great  man}'  large  cities,  and  these  are  filled  with 
countless  numbers  of  inhabitants.  They  have  many  ingenious  arts 
and  manufactures,  they  till  the  earth  with  great  skill,  and  their  gar- 
dens are  managed  with  special  care. 

12.  Tea  is  brought  to  us  from  this  country,  with  a  great  variety  of 
other  articles.  You  will  not  be  surprised  that  we  get  so  many  things 
from  China,  when  you  know  that  the  country  contains  three  hundred 
and  sixty  millions  of  people,  that  is,  five  times  as  many  as  there  are 
in  all  America. 


CHAPTER  XXXIL— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Origin  of  the  Arabs.     Rise  of  Mahomet. 

1.  The  Arabs  are  descended  from  Ishmael,  a  son  of  Abraham.  It 
was  foretold  of  him,  that  "his  hand  should  be  against  every  man, 
and  every  man's  hand  against  him.""  In  all  ages  this  prophecy  has 
been  fulfilled  among  his  posterity  ;  for  they  appear  to  have  been 
enemies  to  the  rest  of  mankind,  and  mankind  enemies  to  them. 

2.  Arabia  consists  of  several  separate  states  or  nations.  The  whole 
country  is  bounded  on  the  north  by  Palestine,  Mesopotamia,  6cc.  ;  on 
the  east  by  the  Persian  Gulf  and  the  Gulf  of  Ormuz,  on  the  south  by 
the  Indian  Ocean,  and  west  by  the  Red  Sea. 

3.  The  Arabs  have  always  been  wandering  tribes,  and  have  dwelt 
in  tents,  amid  the  trackless  deserts  Avhich  cover  a  large  portion  of 
their  country.  Their  early  history  is  very  imperfectly  known.  The 
first  event  that  is  worth  recording,  was  the  birth  of  Mahomet.  This 
took  place  at  Mecca,  a  city  on  the  borders  of  the  Red  Sea,  in  the 
year  570  of  the  Christian  era. 

4.  Till  the  age  of  twenty-five,  Mahomet  was  a  camel-driver  in  the 
desert.      He  afterwards  spent  much   of  his  time  in  solitude.      His 

10.  What  custom  is  there  respecting  foreigners?  Where  do  the  wives  of  merchant! 
re»ide?  Why  do  not  the  Chinese  wish  foreigners  to  come  amongst  them?  Which  is  the 
oldest  empire  in  the  world  ?  II.  What  of  the  cities  of  China  ?  Manufactures?  Do  (he 
people  understand  agriculture  ?  13.  Where  do  we  get  our  tea  ?  What  is  the  population 
of  China  ?  Cm.  XXXII.— 1.  From  whom  are  the  Arabs  descended?  What  was  prophe- 
sied of  Ishmael  ?  Has  the  prophecy  been  fulfilled  ?  2.  Of  what  does  Arabia  consist?  II'>w 
is  it  bounded?  3.  How  hare  tne  Aral>«  always  lived!  What  of  their  early  history?  When 
and  where  was  Mahomet  born?     4.  Of  what  profession  was  Mahomet? 


56 


SCHOOL    HISTORY. 


dwelling  was  a  lonesome  cave,  where  he  pretended  to  be  employed 
in  prayer  and  meditation.  When  he  was  forty  years  old,  he  set  uj> 
for  a  prophet. 


Pilgrims  of  Arabia,  going  to  the  tomb  of  Mahomet. 

5.  He  publicly  proclaimed,  that  God  had  sent  him  to  convert  the 
world  to  a  new  religion.  The  people  of  Mecca  would  not  at  first 
believe  Mahomet.  He  was  bom  among  them,  and  they  knew  that 
he  had  been  a  camel-driver,  and  was  no  holier  than  themselves. 
Beside,  he  pretended  that  he  had  ridden  up  to  heaven  on  an  ass.  in 
company  with  the  angel  Gabriel;  and  many  of  his  stories  were  as 
ridiculous  as  this. 

6.  So  the  men  of  Mecca  threatened  to  slay  Mahomet,  and  he  was 
therefore  forced  to  flee  to  Medina,  another  city  of  Arabia.  There,  in 
the  course  of  two  or  three  years,  he  made  a  great  number  of  con- 
verts. Pie  told  his  disciples  that  they  must  compel  others  to  adopt 
his  religion  by  force,  if  they  refused  to  do  so  by  fair  means. 

7.  This  conduct  brought  on  a  war  between  the  disciples  of  Ma- 
homet and  all  the  other  Arabians.  Mahomet  won  many  victories, 
and  soon  made  himself  master  of  the  whole  country,  and  of  Syria 
besides. 

8.  Mahomet  was  now  not  only  a  pretended  prophet,  but  a  rea£ 
king.  He  was  a  very  terrible  man,  even  to  his  oavii  followers  ;  for 
whenever  he  was  angry,  a  vein  between  his  eyebrows  used  to  swell 
and  turn  black.     This  gave  him  a  grim  and  frightful  aspect. 

9.  His  power  continued  to  increase;  but  he  died  suddenly,  at  the 


How  did  he  live  before  lie  was  forty  years  old?  5.  Wliat  did  he  then  do  ?  What  of  the 
neoplo  of  Mecca  ?  What  did  Mahomet  pretend  ?  6.  Why  did  Mahomet  flee  to  Medina? 
What  was  the  flight  of  Mahomet  called  by  the  Arabs?  What  means  did  he  take  to  make 
converts  in  Medina  ?  7.  What  was  the  effect  of  Ibis  conduct?  What  victories  did  Maho 
■net  win  ?     &.   Describe  Mahomet.     0.   When  did  he  die  ? 


SARACENS.  57 

age  of  sixty-three.  He  was  buried  at  Medina.  It  is  said,  that  his 
cothn  may  be  seen  there  in  a  mosque  to  this  day,'  and  that  it  is  sus- 
pended in  the  air  by  a  loadstone.  "Many  pilgrims  go  every  year  to 
visit  the  place. 


The  Flight  of  Mahomet,  called  the  Hcgira. 

10.  The  religion  of  Mahomet  was  diffused  over  nearly  all  Asia  and 
Africa,  and  is  still  believed  by  many  millions  of  people.  Its  precepts 
are  contained  in  a  book  called  the  Koran.  Mahomet  affirmed  that 
the  angel  Gabriel  brought  him  the  doctrines  contained  in  this  book 
from  heaven. 


CHAPTER  XXXIIL— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Sequel  of  the  History  of  the  Saracens. 

1.  Those  of  the  Arabians  who  followed  Mahomet  were  called  Sar- 
acens. After  their  leader's  death,  they  conquered  the  whole  of  Tur- 
key in  Asia,  and  many  other  countries.  The  capital  of  their  empire 
was  the  city  of  Bagdad,  on  the  river  Tigris,  which  I  have  already 
mentioned. 

2.  One  of  the  successors  of  Mahomet  was  Ali,  his  son-in-law.  He 
was  opposed  by  Ayesha,  Mahomet's  widow.  This  woman  was  sus- 
pected of  having  murdered  her  husband. 

3.  She  raised  an  army,  and  led  them  to  battle  against  Ali.     During 
the  conflict,  Ayesha  sat  in  a  sort  of  a  cage  or  litter,  on  the  back  of  a 
camel.     The  camel's  rein  was  held  by  one  of  her  soldiers;  and  it  is 
said  that  seventy  soldiers  were  killed,  one  after  another,  while  hold- 
Where  was  he  tinned?     What  is  said  of  his  coffin  ?     10.  Where  is  the  the  religion  of 

Mahomet  followed.'    What  is  the  Koran?    What' did  Mahomet  affirm ?    AVI, ere  is  Mec- 
ca ?    Medina?    Ch.  XXXIII. — I .  Who  were  the  Saracens  ?    What  of  them?    What  was 
Hi'-  capital  of  their  empire  ?    Who  was  Ali?     Who  opposed  him?    Who  was  Ayesha? 
Describe  the  conllict  between  Ali  and  Ayesha  ?     Who  was  victorious ? 


58  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

ing  the  rein.  Finally,  Ali  was  victorious,  and  confirmed  his  sway 
over  all  the  disciples  of  Mahomet,  and  over  the  countries  which  they 
had  won.  ,  . 

4.  The  Saracen  empire  was  thus  established.  The  kings  were 
called  Caliphs.  They  reigned  at  Bagdad  for  the  space  of  six  hundred 
and  twenty  years.  One  of  the  most  distinguished  of  them  was  iVkih- 
mud  Gazui.  He  was  a  great  conqueror,  and  added  a  part  of  India 
to  his  dominions. 

5.  A  poor  man  once  complained  to  Mahmud  Gazui  that  ap soldier 
had  turned  him  and  his  family  out  of  doors,  and  had  kept  possession 
of  his  house  all  night.  When  the  caliph,  Mahmud  Gazui,  heard  this, 
he  suspected  that  the  soldier  was  his  own  son.  "If  he  ill-treats  you 
again,  let  me  know,"  said  he. 

6.  Accordingly,  a  few  nights  afterwards,  the  poor  man  told  the  ca- 
liph that  the  same  soldier  had  turned  him  out  of  his  house  again. 
The  caliph  took  his  cimeter  and  went  to  the  house;  but  before  enter- 
ing, he  caused  all  the  lights  to  be  extinguished,  so  that  his  heart 
might  not  be  softened  by  the  sight  of  the  offender. 

7.  When  all  was  darkness,  he  entered  the  house,  and  struck  the 
soldier  dead  with  his  cimeter.  "  Now  bring  a  light,"  cried  the  caliph. 
His  attendants  did  so.  Mahmud  Gazui  held  a  torch  over  the  bloody 
corpse  of  the  soldier,  and  iound  that  his  suspicions  were  correct.  He 
had  killed  his  own  son ! 

8.  The  last  of  the  caliphs  was  named  Mostasem.  He  was  so  proud 
and  vainglorious  that  he  considered  his  subjects  unworthy  to  behold 
his  face.  He  therefore  never  appeared  in  public  without  wearing  a 
veil  of  golden  tissue.  Whenever  he  rode  through  the  streets,  thou- 
sands would  flock  to  get  a  glimpse  of  his  golden  veil. 

9.  But  at  length  Hulaki,  chief  of  the  Tartars,  took  the  city  of  Bag- 
dad. He  stripped  off  the  golden  veil  of  the  caliph  Mostasem,  and 
put  him  alive  into  a  leathern  bag.  The  bag,  with  the  poor  caliph  in 
it,  was  dragged  by  horses  through  the  same  streets  where  he  had  for- 
merly ridden  in  triumph. 

10.  Thus  perished  the  caliph  Mostasem,  being  bruised  to  death  on 
the  pavements.  With  him  ended  the  empire  of  the  Saracens,  in  the 
year  1258  of  the  Christian  era. 

11.  But  the  termination  of  this  empire  did  not  put  an  end  to  the 
religion  of  Mahomei.  This  continued  to  flourish,  and  finally  extend- 
ed over  nearly  all  the  countries  of  Asia  and  Africa. 

4.  Who  were  the  caliphs  ?  Where  did  they  reign  ?  What  of  Mahmud  Gazui  ?  5.  Re- 
late the  story  of  the  poor  man  and  Mahmud  Gazui.  S.  Who  was  Mostasem?  What  can 
you  say  of  him  ?  9.  How  did  he  die  ?  10.  When  did  the  empire  of  the  Saracen*  end.' 
11.  What  of  the  religion  of  Mahomet? 


THE   SARACENS, 


59 


CHAPTER  XXXIV.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

About  Syria,  Phce?iicia,  and  Asia  Minor. 


Ruins  of  Balbcc. 

1.  I  will  now  give  you  a  short  account  of  Syria,  which  lay  to  the 
north  of  Palestine.  It  was  bounded  north  by  Asia  Minor,  on  the  east 
by  the  river  Euphrates  and  Arabia,  on  the  south  by' Palestine  and  a 
part  of  Arabia,  and  west  by  the  Mediterranean  Sea. 

2.  Syria  is  frequently  mentioned  in  the  Bible.  The  people  were 
enirarred  in  almost  constant  wars  with  the  Jews,  from  the  time  of 
David,  nearly  to  the  time  of  Christ,  when  it  became  a  Roman  prov- 
ince. 

3.  At  this  period  its  capital  was  Antioch,  which  was  one  of  the 
most  splendid  cities  in  the  world.  This  was  the  native  place  of  St. 
Luke,  and  here  both  St.  Peter  and  St.  Paul  lived  for  some  time. 
Here,  too,  the  followers  of  Christ  were  first  called  Christians. 

4.  Damascus,  another  city  of  Syria,  one  hundred  and  thirty-six 
miles  northward  of  Jerusalem,  appears  to  have  been  known  ever 
since  the  time  of  Abraham.  It  is  frequently  mentioned  in  the  Bible, 
and  bere  St.  Paul  was  miraculously  converted  to  the  Christian  faith. 

5.  This  city  was  famous  in  later  times  fur  making  the  best  swords 
sabres,  and  other  cutlery  ;  but  the  art  which  the  people  once  possess- 
ed is  now  lost.  The  inhabitants  of  this  city  were  also  celebrated  fur 
manufacturing  beautiful  silks,  to  which  the  name  of  damask  was  giv- 
en, from  the  place  where  they  were  made. 

Ch.  XXXIV. — I.  Where  was  Syrin  situated?  How  was  it  bounded  ?  2.  What  of  the 
people  of  Syria  ?  3.  Capital  of  Syria?  What  great  events  took  place  at  Antioch  ?  4.  What 
of  Damascus?  What  took  place  there  ?  5.  What  was  Damascus  celebrated  for  in  ancieut 
times? 


(50  SCHOOL    HISTORY 

6.  Another  place  in  Syria  mentioned  in  the  Bible,  was  Tadinor, 
sometimes  called  "  T/admor  in  the  desert;"  this  was  built  by  Solo- 
mon for  the  convenience  of  his  traders;  it'was  ten  miles  in  extent, 
but  it  is  now  in  ruins.  The  splendid  remains  of  this  place,  consisting 
of  columns  and  other  things  beautifully  sculptured  in  stone,  show 
that,  it  must  have  been  a  rich  and  powerful  city.  In  modern  times  it 
is  called  Palmyra. 

7.  At  the  distance  of  thirty-seven  miles  north-Avest  of  Damascus 
are  the  remains  of  Balbec,  a  very  splendid  city  in  the  time  of  the  apos- 
tlrs,:and  then  called  Heliopolis.  It  is  now  in  ruins,  and  contains 
scarcely  more  than  a  thousand  inhabitants. 

S.  I  must  not  forget  to  mention  Phcenice,  or  Phoenicia,  which  lay 
along  the  border  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea;  it  contained  the  cities  of 
Tyre,  Sidon,  Ptolemais,  and  other  celebrated  places.  In  very  early 
times,  the  Phoenicians  were  famous  Tor  taking  the  lead  in  commerce, 
navigation,  and  other  arts.  They-were  then  an  independent  nation, 
but  in  after  limes  their  country  became  a  province  of  Syria. 

9.  Syria  is  at  the  present  day  gdvemed  by  the  Turks,  and,  like  ev- 
ery other  country  under  their  sway,  is  stamped  with  an  aspect  of  des- 
olation and  decay.  The  term  Syria  is  now  applied,  not-  only  to  what 
anciently  bore  that  name,  but  to  PaLestiue  also. 

10.  Asia  Minor,  or  Natolia,  as  it  is  now  called,  lies  at  the  north- 
eastern corner  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea;  it  is  a  kind  of  peninsula, 
bounded  on  the  north  by  the  Euxine  or  Black  Sea;  on  the  west  by 
theiEgean  Sea;  and  on  the  east  by  Syria,  Mesopotamia,  and  Arme- 
nia. 

11.  It  is  about  six  hundred  miles  in  length,  from  east  to  west,  and 
four  hundred  in  breadth.  It  is  at  present  under  the  government  of 
Turkey,  and  its  inhabitants  are  mostly  believers  in  Mahomet!-  The 
chief  city  now  is  Smyrna,  to  which  many  vessels  go  from  this  country, 
and  bring  back  figs,  dates,  and  other  things. 

12.  Asia  Minor  appears  to  have  been  settled  in  very  early  times. 
Several  kingdoms  have  arisen  and  nourished  here  at  different  periods, 
but  it  has  never  been  the  seat  of  any  great  empire.  The  kingdom  of 
Lydia,  in  Asia  Minor,  existed  as  early  as  eight  hundred  years  before 
Christ.  Ardysus,  who  reigned  seven  hundred  and  ninety-seven  years 
B.  C,  appears  to  have  been  one  of  its  earliest  kings. 

13.  The  last  king  of  Lydia  Avas  Croesus,  Avho  was  so  famous  for  his 
great  riches,  that  to  this  day  Ave  say,  "As  rich  as  Crcesus."  But,  in 
spite  of  his  Avealth,  he  Avas  conquered  by  Cyrus,  king  of  Persia,  543 
B.  C. 

14.  From  this  period,  Lydia,  Avith  a  great  part  of  Asia  Minor,  con- 
inued  subject  to  the  Persian  empire  till  the  time  of  Alexander,  about 

SJU  B.  C,  when  it  Avas  conquered  by  that  famous  leader. 


6.  Whatof  Tadmor?  7.  What  of  the  ruins  of  Balbcc  ?  8.  AVhat  of  Phoenicia  ?  What 
did  it  contain?  What  of  the  Phoenicians ?  9.  What  of  Syria  ?  To  what  is  this  name 
now  applied  ?  10.  Situation  and  boundaries  of  Asia  Minor?  11.  lis  extent?  Govern- 
ment? Inhabitants?  What  of  Smyrna  ?  12.  What  of  Asia . Minor ?  What  of  Lydia ? 
Ardysus?  13.  What  can  you  tell  of  Crcesus'?  14.  What  of  Lydia  ?  By  whom  was  it 
conquered ? 


THE    SCYTHIANS.  6] 

]  5.  Three  hundred  years  before  Christ,  Pontus,  which  had  once 
been  a  part  of  Lydia,  became  an  independent  country.  It  continued 
to  flourish  for  many  years,  and  Mithridates  VII. -successfully  main- 
tained a  war  with  the  Romans  for  a  long  time. 

16.  By  his  skill  and  courage,  he  batHed  the  best  generals  of  the  em- 
pire. But  at  length,  in  the  year  64  B.  C,  he  was  conquered,  and  his 
kingdom,  with  the  rest  of  Asia  Minor,  was  subjected  to  the  Roman 
dominion. 

17.  Notwithstanding  the  wars  in  Asia  Minor,  the  country  became 
filled  with  people,  and  superb  cities  rose  up  in  various  parts  of  it. 
Ephesus,  situated  in  Lydia,  was  a  splendid  place,  and  it  had  a  temple 
so  magnificent,  that  it  was  called  one  of  the  seven  wonders  of  the 
world. 

.  18.'  This  temple  was  one  hundred  and  twenty  years  in  building; 
but  a  man  named  Erostratus,  wishing  to  make  himself  remembered, 
set  it  on  fire,  and  it  was  burnt  to  the  ground. 

19.  There  were  also  many  other  fine  cities  in  Asia  Minor,  several 
of  which  are  mentioned  in  the  New  Testament.  Among  these  was 
Tarsus,  the  birth-place  of  Paul;  also,  Pergamos,  Thyatira,  Sardis, 
Philadelphia,  and  Laodicea,  which  are  spoken  of  in  the  book  of  Rev- 
elation. 

20.  Through  the  labors  of  Paul,  Barnabas,  Silas,  Timothy,  Luke, 
and  perhaps  others,  Christianity  was  early  planted  in  nearly  all  the 
divisions  of  Asia  Minor. 


CHAPTER  XXXV.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

A  Brief  View  of  Several  Nations. 

1.  I  have  now  related  the  history  of  the  most  celebrated  countries 
of  Asia.  But  there  are  several  other  territories,  and  some  of  them 
very  extensive,  of  which  I  can  say  only  a  few  words  in  this  little  book. 

2.  In  ancient  times,  the  Scythians  inhabited  the  northern  parts  of 
Asia.  They  were  a  warlike-and  savage  people,  and  very  expert  with 
the  bow  and  arrow.  Many  of  the  Asiatic  and  European  kings  en- 
deavored to  subdue  them,  but  were  generally  defeated. 

3.  At  different  times,  vast  numbers  of  the  Scythians  used  to  over- 
run the  more  civilized  countries  that  lay  south  of  them.  A  tribe  of 
Scythians  founded  the  powerful  empire  of  Parthia,  which  afterwards 
extended  its  sway  over  Persia  and  other  countries.  This  empire  be- 
gan in  the  year  250  B.  C,  and  continued  five  hundred  years. 

4.  In  more  modern   limes,  the  regions  inhabited  by  the  Scythians 

15.  What  of  I'onius?  Mithridatea  VII.  ?  1G.  By  whom  wa=  Mithridates  conquered? 
17.  What  of  Epheras?  18.  Temple  of  Diana?  How  was  it  destroyed  ?  19.  What  other 
<  itics  were  the  e  in  Asia  Minor.'  20.  Win)  planted  Christianity  in  Asia  Minoi .'  L'h. 
XXXV.— 2.  What  el  the  Scythiam?    Where  did  they  lire ?    J.  Whatol  Parthia ; 


62  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

have  been  called  Tartary,  and  the  people  Tartars.  The  people  tire 
not  much  more  civilized,  than  they  formerly  were.  More  than  one 
celebrated  conqueror  has  arisen  among  the  Tartars.        .   ' 

5.  India,  which  we  call  the  East  Indies,  was  very  little  known  to 
the  people  who  lived  westward  of  it  in  ancient  times.     Semiramis- 
invaded  it,  and  likewise  Alexander  the  Great,  and  several  other  con- 
querors.    The  Hindoos  of  the  present  day  are  an  interesting  people, 
but  addicted  to  idolatry.      i 

6.  India  consists  of  Hindostan,  and  of  an  extensive  region  to  the 
eastward  of  it.  Within,  the  last  hundred  years,  the  English  have 
gained  great  power  in  this  part  of  the  world.  They  made  war 
against  the  native  rulers,  and  reduced  them  to  subjection. 

7.  The  Turks,  or  Ottomans,  are  a  people  who  had  their  origin  in 
Asia.  But,  as  they  have  been  settled  in  Europe  during  several  cen- 
turies, it  will  be  more  proper  and  convenient  to  speak  of  them  in  the 
history  of  that  quarter  of  the  globe. 

8.  Japan  is  an  extensive  empire  containing  twenty-six  millions  of 
inhabitants.  These  live  to  the  east  of  China,  upon  several  islands, 
of  which  Niphon  is  the  largest.  The  people  live  crowded  together 
in  large  cities,  and  resemble  the  Chinese  in  their  religion,  manners, 
and  customs. 

9.  It  is  uncertain  whether  the  ancient  nations  knew  any  thing  of 
this  empire,  and  its  early  history  is  quite  unknown.  It  is  probable  it 
has  remained  with  little  change  for  thousands  of  years.  Its  exis- 
tence was  first  ascertained  by  the  Europeans  about  the  year  1400 ;  but 
as  strangers  are  not  permitted  to  travel  in  the  country,  very  little  is 
found  out  concerning  it.     The  people  are  idolaters. 

10.  There  are  several  other  kingdoms  of  Asia,  of  which  the  histo- 
ry is  little  known,  or  quite  uninteresting.  Among  these  are  Siam, 
Cochin  China,  the  Birman  empire,  Cabul,  Beloochistan,  and  some 
others.  Besides  these,  the  northern  portions  of  Asia  are  occupied  by 
various  tribes  of  Tartars,  who  appear  to  have  wandered  over  these 
regions  for  ages,  leaving  no  story  behind  them.  The  emperor  of  Rus- 
sia rules  over  these  vast  dominions. 


CHAPTER  XXXVL— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Review  of  the  History  of  Asia. 

1.  Let  us  now  go  back  and  review  the  history  of  Asia.  In  this 
quarter  of  the  globe,  the  most  wonderful  events  in  the  history  of 
mankind  have  happened.     Here  Adam  and  Eve  were  created;  and 

4.  What  is  the  name  given  to  the  countries  formerly  inhabited  by  the  Scythians,  Par 
thians.  Sic.  ?  Do  the  Tartars  remain  nearly  the  same  as  the  ancient  Scythians,  Parthians. 
&.C.?  G.  What  of  India  or  Hindostan  ?  How  is  it  bounded  ?  Which  way  is  it  from  (J  hi 
na?  Prom  Persia?  From  Palestine?  What  of  the  English  in  Hisdostan  ?  7.  What  of 
the  Turks  or  Ottomans:"  S.  What  of  Japan?  Direction  of 'the  Japanese  isles  from  Hin 
dostan?  Persia?  Palestine?  10.  What  other  nations  of  Asia  are  there,  of  which  the 
history  is  little  known  ?     What  of  the  northern  portions  of  Asia? 


ASIA.  03 

on  the  banks  of  the  Euphrates  all  the  people  dwelt  who  lived  before 
the  flood. 

2.  It  was  in  Asia,  that  the  ark  of  Noah  rested;  and  here  again 
the  people  began  to  build  cities,  andestablish  nations.  Here  the  first 
great  empire  arose.  Here  the  Jewish  nation  had  its  origin;  and 
nearly  ail  the  events  related  in  the  Old  Testament  took  place  here. 

3.  It  was  in  Asia,  that  the  religion  which  teaches  us  that  there  is 
one  only  living  and  true  God,  had  its  origin;  and  here  Jesus  Christ 

ppeared,  to  establish  this  religion,  and  seal  the  truth  of  revelation 
with  his  blood. 

4.  It  was  in  Asia,  that  Mahomet  commenced  and  established  his 
religion,  which  is  now  believed  by  more  than  half  the  human  race. 
Several  other  religions  had  their  origin  in  Asia. 

5.  In  Asia,  some  of  the  greatest  empires  have  existed,  of  which 
history  gives  us  any  account.  The  Assyrian  empire,  as  I  have  before 
said,  is  the  first  on  record.  This  was  followed  by  the  Persian  em- 
pire, which  seemed  to  swallow  up  all  the  surrounding  nations.  Chi- 
na, the  most  populous  empire  on  the  globe,  has  endured  longer  than 
any  other. 

67  The  Saracens,  who  extended  their  dominion  over  many  coun- 
tries, had  their  origin  in  Asia.  The  Turks,  who  have  reigned  over 
Palestine,  Mesopotamia,  Syria,  Asia  Minor,  a  part  of  Europe,  and  a 
part  of  Africa,  for  nearly  eight  hundred  years,  had  their  origin  in 
Asia. 

7.  There  is  one  portion  of  Asia  which  is,  perhaps,  more  full  of  his- 
torical interest  than  any  other  on  the  face  of  the  globe.  It  is  that 
which  lies  between  the  Mediterranean  on  the  west,  Armenia  oh  the 
north,  Persia  on  the  east,  and  Arabia  on  the  south.  Here  is  the  spot 
on  which  the  first  inhabitants  dwelt;  here  was  the  place  where  the 
first  nations  were  formed;  here  the  miracles  recorded  in  the  Bible 
took  place;  here  the  prophets  dwelt;  here  Jesus  Christ  lived,  preach- 
ed, and  died. 

8.  But,  although  Asia  was  peopled  before  any  other  part  of  the 
world,  and  though  the  inhabitants  have  been  favored  by  miracles, 
and  the  presence  of  a  divine  teacher,  they  are  far  behind  the  nations 
of  Europe  and  America  in  the  knowledge  of  religion,  and  the  various 
arts  which  make  life  comfortable  and  happy. 

9.  In  all  parts  of  Asia,  there  are  many  people  who  are  full  of  su- 
perstition, and  there  are  very  few  who  worship  God  in  sincerity  and 
truth.  Jesus  Christ  is  hardly  known  among  the  many  millions  of  peo- 
ple in  Asia;  and  though  some  of  the  rich  men,  kings,  and  princes 
live  in  gorgeous  palaces,  and  are  decked  with  gold  and  jewels,  yet  the 
mass  of  the  people  live  as  they  have  done  for  ages,  ignorant,  poor, 
and  degraded. 

Cm.  XXXVI. — 1.  2.  3.  4.  What  remarkable  events  have  occurred  in  Asia?  5.  What  la 
the  first  empire  recorded  in  history?  What  of  the  Persian  empire?  What  of  China?  G. 
What  of  the  Saracens?  What  of  the  Turks  ?  7.  What  portion  of  Asia  is  the  most  inter- 
filing on  the  globe?  Why  u  this  portion  of  country  thus  interesting?  6.  How  has  A?i» 
been  particularly  favored?  fa  what  respects  are  the  inhabitants  of  Asia  behind  those  of 
Europe  and  America?     9.  What  is  the  state  of  the  people  in  Asia? 


04 


SCHOOL    HISTOR  Y. 


10.  The  most  remarkable  feature  in  the  history  of  Asia  is,  that, 
while  the  country  has  seen  many  revolutions  and  changes,  the  con- 
dition of  the  people  remains  nearly  the  same.  In  our  couutry  and  in 
Europe,  t  lie  re  is  a  constant  improvement.  Every  year  brings  some 
new  art,  invention,  or  institution  for  the  benefit  of  society, 

11.  But  in  Asia  it  is  not  so.  Whoever  is  king,  the  people  are  but 
slaves.  Education  makes  no  progress,  liberty  is  unknown,  truth  is 
little  valued,  virtue  is  not  prized,  and  that  thing  which  we  call  com- 
fort, and  which  makes  our  homes  so  dear  to  us,  is  not-to  he  found  in 
this  vast  country,  so  favored  by  Providence,  and  so  richly  endowed 
by  nature. 

12.  It  would  seem  that  the  real  difficulty  in  Asia  is,  that,  while 
they  are  destitute  of  the  knowledge  of  the  Gospel,  they  have  many 
false  religions.  Mahometanism  prevails  over  a  great  part  of  this 
portion  of  the  globe  ;  and  it  is  remarkable  that  no  country,  the  people 
of  which  believed  in  this  false  religion,  has  ever  been  happy  or  well- 
governed. 

13.  The  Hindoos  believe  in  Brahmanism,  which  teaches  them  that 
there  is  one  principal  deity,  called  Brahma,  and  several  other  in- 
ferior deities,  called  Vishnu,  Siva,  &c.  They  make  strange  •  images 
of  these,  and  worship  them.  The  priests  are  called  Brahmins,  and 
instruct  the  people  in  many  idle  ceremonies  and  cruel  superstitions. 


Brahma,  Vishnu. 

14.  Beside  these  religions,  there  is  the  worship  of  the  Grand  Lama, 
to  whom  a  temple  is  erected  in  Tartary.  The  Chinese  believe  in 
Boodh,  and  other  nations  believe  in  other  deities. 

10.  What  is  remarkable  in  the  history  of  Asia  ?  What  is  saiil  of  this  country  and  of 
Europe  ?  11.  How  does  Asia,  differ  from  Europe  and  America  ?  12.  What  is  the  condi- 
tion of  Asia  ?  What  of  Mahometanism  ?  What  is  a  remarkable  fact  ?  ID.  In  what  re- 
tisjion  do  the  Hindoos  believe  ?  What  does  Brahmanism  teach  ?  What  of  Ihc  Brahmins  ? 
14.  Where  is  the  temple  of  the  Grand  Lama?     In   what  deity  do  the  Chinese  beliere? 


ASIA.  65 

15.  Thus  nearly  the  whole  of  Asia  is  involved  in  darkness  as  to 
the  character  of  God,  and  the  destiny  of  man  ;  and  thus  we  see,  that 
the  conduct  of  mankind  is  such  as  might  be  expected,  where  such 
ignorance  and  such  error  prevail. 


CHAPTER  XXXVII.— ASIA  CONTINUED. 

Chronology  of  Asia. 

1.  Chronology  is  a  record  of  the  dates  when  historical  events  hap- 
pened. By  studying  chronology,  you  therefore  learn  the  time  at 
which  the  creation  took  place,  when  Abraham  went  from  Chaldea  to 
Canaan,  when  Christ  was  born,  and  other  things. 

2.  Now  in  order  to  have  a  clear  view  of  the  progress  of  history, 
it  is  very  important  to  place  before  us  a  table  of  chronology  ;  and  if 
we  wish  to  remember  history  for  a  long  time,  it  is  well  to  fix  this 
table  in  the  memory. 

3.  I  will  now  give  you  a  brief  view  of  the  chronology  of  Asia.  By 
this  you  will  notice  some  curious  things.  You  will  see  that  Solomon 
and  Chaus  of  China  lived  at  the  same  time;  that  Solomon  began  the 
temple  exactly  three  thousand  years  after  the  creation,  &c. 

Before  Christ. 

Creation  of  the  world        4004 

Deluge        2348 

Confusion  of  tongues 2247 

Ashur  founds  the  empire  of  Assyria 2229 

Ninias,  king  of  Assyria  began  to  reign 2000 

Abraham  born 1996 

Abraham  sets  out  from  Chaldea  to  go  to  Canaan 1921 

Jacob  removes  with  his  family  to  Egypt 1705 

Death  of  Jacob ' ]6S9 

Death  of  Joseph 1635 

Moses  born • 1570 

Departure  of  the  Israelites  from  Egypt 1491 

Death  of  Moses 1447 

Death  of  Joshua 14Lo 

Saul  proclaimed  king  of  Israel 1100 

King  David  born       1085 

Solomon  began  to  reign 1015 

15.  In  what  error  is  nearly  the  whole  of  Asia  involved?  What  do  we  see  as  respec  i 
the  conduct  of  mankind  ? 

|T_y  It  might  be  well  for  the  teacher  now  to  require  the  pvpil  to  go  over  the  history 
of  .isia  a  second  time,  or  at  least  to  so  back  arid  see  that  he  is  able  to  answer  the  most 
material  questions  of  the  preceding  chapters. 

Ch.  XXXVII. — 1.  What  is  chronology?  Its  use  ?  2.  What  henefit  can  we  gain  by 
placing  before  us  a  chronological  table  '.  What  Is  the  advantage  of  fixing  a  chronological 
table  in  the  memory  ?  4.  \V  hut  curious  things  do  we  learu  from  a  chronological  view  of 
Aria  ? 

«;• 


66  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

Temple  of  Solomon  built 100-1 

Chaus,  emperor  of  China,  began  to  reign        1000 

Death  of  Sarclanapalus,  first  Assyrian  empire  overthrown    .     .  888 

Jonah  the  prophet  sent  to  preach  to  the  Ninevites 806 

Ardysus,  first  king  of  Lydia,  in  Asia  Minor 797 

Shalmaneser  conquered  the  kingdom  of  Israel,  and  carried  the 

chief  inhabitants  into  captivity 720 

Isdigertes  made  king  of  Persia 630 

Second  Assyrian  empire  overthrown 606 

Lydia  conquered  by  Cyrus,  king  of  Persia 548 

Babylonian  empire  overthrown .  538 

Jews  return  from  Babylon 536 

Persian  empire  established  by  Cyrus  the  Great 536 

Death  of  Cyrus 529 

Cambyses  succeeds  his  father  Cyrus 529 

Darius  began  to  reign 522 

Xerxes  defeats  Leonidas  at  Thermopylae 4S0 

Death  of  Xerxes 465 

Alexander  invades  Persia        330 

Kingdom  of  Syria  founded  by  Seleucus        312 

Pontus  becomes  independent  under  Mithridates  II 300 

Empire  of  Parthia  founded 250 

Artaxares  made  king  of  Persia        230 

Judas  Maccabseus  drives  the  Syrians  out  of  the  Jewish  kingdom  166 

Chang,  emperor  of  China 67 

Pontus,  with  other  parts  of  Asia  Minor,  conquered  by  the  Ro- 
mans         64 

Syria  and  Canaan  conquered  by  the  Romans 61 

Herod,  king  of  the  Jews        37 

Vati,  emperor  of  China 33 

Jesus  Christ  was  born  4004  years  after  the  creation  :  this  period  if 
called  the  Christian  era.  It  is  the  custom  in  all  Christian  countries 
to  date  from  the  birth  of  Christ.  B.  C.  means  before  Christ;  A.  C. 
means  after  Christ ;  A.  D.  stands  for  Anno  Domini,  that  is,  in  the 
year  of  our  Lord.  Thus  we  say  A.  D.  1S37,  by  which  we  mean  in 
the  year  of  our  Lord,  or  from  the  birth  of  Christ,  1837  years. 

A.  D. 

Jesus  Christ  born 0 

Christ  crucified 33 

Paul  arrives  at  Piome 61 

Destruction  of  Jerusalem  by  Titus       70 

Birth  of  Mahomet 570 

Mahomet  obliged  to  fly  from  his  enemies 622 

This  is  called  the  Hegira,  and  is  the  era  from  which  the  Turks 
date,  as  we  do  from  the  birth  of  Christ. 

Death  of  Mahomet        632 

Saracen  empire  established 638 


68 


AFRICA 


Map  of  Africa. 


p&"  The  teacher  will  here  put  such  questions  as  he  deems  necessary. 


AFRICA 


69 


Bagdad,  the  seat  of  the  caliphs,  founded     ........  672 

Chosroes  the  Great,  king  of  Persia,  began  to  reign       ....  660 

Si-g\ven,  emperor  of  China,  began  to  reign 617 

Chwang-tsong  "             "           "             "         1037 

Genghis  Khan  invaded  China 1209 

Saracen  empire  overturned  by  the  Turks  ...         ....  1258 

Japan  discovered  by  Europeans 1400 

Shah  Abbas  ascended  the  throne  of  Persia 1589 

Shah  Husseyn     "                    "              "          1694 

Kouli  Khan  made  king  of  Persia 1730 

Yong-tching  came  to  the  throne  of  China 1737 

Taou-kwang  ascended  the  throne  of  China 1820 

British  Expedition  against  China 1S40 

Canton  taken    .     . ' 1841 

N.  B. — The  teacher  may  now  proceed  to  ask  such  questions  as  he  deems  proper,  in  re- 
gard to  the  several  events  noticed  in  the  table  ;  it  may  be  well  to  turn  to  the  pages  where 
the  details  are  given  respecting  the  events,  and  interrogate  the  pujnl  upon  them. 

Questions  like  the  following  may  be  useful :  How  long  from  the  birth  of  Abraham  to 
that  of  Moses  7  From  that  of  Moses  to  thai  of  David  1  From  the  beginning  to  the  end 
of  the  Saracen  empire  1   Ifc. 


CHAPTER  XXXVIII.— AFRICA. 

About  the  Geography  of  Africa.     The  Inhabitants. 


1.  Africa  is  one  of  the  four  quarters  of  the  globe.  It  is  an  im- 
mense extent  of  country,  and  includes  nearly  one  fourth  of  all  the 
land  on  the  earth.     It  is  separated  from  America  by  the  Atlantic 


Ch.  XXXVIII. — 1.  What  of  Afrioa?     How  i«  it  ieparated  from  America? 


70  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

Ocean  ,  the  nearest  part  is  about  three  thousand  miles  from  New 
York  or  Boston. 

2.  It  is  separated  from  Europe  by  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  and  from 
Asia  by  the  Red  Sea.  It  is,  however,  attached  to  Asia  by  a  narrow 
neck  of  land,  called  the  Isthmus  of  Suez. 

3.  Africa  is  less  known  than  any  other  portion  of  the  globe.  Many 
parts  of  the  interior  have  never  been  visited  by  Europeans.  The 
greater  part  of  the  inhabitants  are  negroes,  of  which  there  are  many 
tribes.  Some  of  these  are  intelligent,  and  live  tolerably  well,  but  tha 
greater  part  are  either  in  a  savage  or  a  barbarous  state. 

4.  The  climate  being  warm,  they  need  little  shelter  or  clothing. 
Their  houses  are  therefore  poor  mud  huts,  or  slight  tenements,  made 
of  leaves  or  branches  of  trees.  Their  dress  is  often  but  a  single  piece 
of  cloth  tied  around  the  waist.  They  are  however  a  cheerful  race, 
and  spend  much  of  their  time  in  various  amusements. 

5.  Beside  the  negroes,  there  are  several  other  races  of  Africans. 
The  inhabitants  from  Egypt  to  Abyssinia  appear  to  consist  of  the 
original  Egyptian  people,  mixed  with  Turks,  Arabs,  and  others.  The 
people  of  the  Barbary  States  are  the  descendants  of  the  ancient  Car- 
thaginians, mingled  with  the  Saracens  who  conquered  the  country, 
together  with  Turks  and  Arabs. 

6.  The  immense  desert  of  Sahara,  with  all  the  adjacent  regions, 
appears  to  be  occupied  by  wandering  tribes  of  Arabs,  who  move  from 
place  to  place  with  their  horses  and  camels,  like  the  people  of 
Arabia,  for  pasturage  or  plunder. 

7.  Africa  may  be  considered  as,  on  the  whole,  the  least  civilized 
portion  of  the  earth.  The  people  are  mostly  Mahometans,  and  one 
half  of  them  are  nearly  in  a  savage  state.  The  rest  are  in  a  bar- 
barous condition. 

8.  The  central  parts  of  Africa  abound  in  wild  animals,  such  as 
lions,  panthers,  leopards,  elephants,  rhinoceroses,  zebras,  and  quaggas. 
The  woods  are  filled  with  chattering  monkeys,  the  thickets  are  in- 
fested with  monstrous  serpents,  ostriches  roam  over  the  deserts,  va- 
rious kinds  of  antelopes  and  deer,  in  vast  herds,  graze  upon  the  plains, 
hippopotami  are  seen  in  the  lakes  and  rivers,  and  crocodiles  abound 
in  the  stagnant  waters.  Wild  birds  of  every  hue  meet  the  eye  of  the 
traveller  in  nearly  all  parts  of  the  country. 

How  far  is  the  nearest  point  from  New-York  or  Boston?     2.  How  is  it  separated  from 
Europe?     Asia?     What  neck  of  land  joins  it  to  Asia?     3.  Is  Africa  well  known?     WhaJ 
of  the  inhabitants  ?    4.  What  of  the  climate  ?     Houses?     Dress?     What  of  the  negroes 
A.  What  of  other  races  ?     Describe  them.     7.  How  may  Africa  be  considered  ?    State  of 
the  people  i     8.  What  of  animals  in  Central  Africa? 


EGYPT. 


71 


CHAPTER  XXXIX.— AFRICA  CONTINUED. 

Early  Sovereigns  of  Egypt. 


Jin  Egyptian  Temple,  dedicated  to  the  god  Isis. 

1.  The  natives  of  Africa  are  supposed  to  be  descended  from  Noah's 
Bon  Ham,  who  went  thither  and  settled  in  Egypt  after  the  building 
of  the  tower  of  Babel,  this  country  being  near  the  land  of  Shinar. 
The  kingdom  of  Egypt  is  very  ancient,  and  was  founded  by  Menes, 
one  of  the  children  of  Ham,  2188  B.  C.  In  the  Bible  he  is  called 
Misraim. 

2.  Egypt  is  bounded  north  by  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  east  by  the 
Red  Sea,  south  by  Nubia,  and  west  by  the  desert.  The  Nile  runs 
through  the  midst  of  Egypt,  from  the  south  to  the  north.  This  river 
overflows  once  a  year,  and  thus  fertilizes  the  country,  for  it  very 
seldom  rains  in  Egypt. 

3.  Menes,  or  Misraim,  the  first  king  of  Egypt,  turned  aside  the 
Nile  from  its  original  channel,  and  built  the  city  of  Memphis  where 
the  river  had  formerly  flowed.  He  was  so  great  a  monarch  that  the 
people  worshipped  him  as  a  god  after  his  death. 

4.  The  history  of  Egypt  is  very  obscure  during  a  considerable  time 
after  the  reign  of  Menes.  From  the  year  2084  to  the  year  1825  be- 
fore the  Christian  era,  it  was  governed  by  rulers  Avho  led  the  lives  of 
shepherds,  and  were  therefore  called  shepherd  kings.  These  kings 
xere  afterwards  driven  from  Egypt.  An  Ethiopian  woman,  named 
Nitocris,  became  queen  of  this  country,  in  the  year  1678  before  the 


Ch.  XXXIX. — 1.  From  wliom  are  the  natives  of  Africa  descended?  By  whom  and 
whur  was  Egypt  founded?  What  of  Menes  ?  Q.  How  is  Egypt  bounded?  What  of  the 
Nile.'  Does  it  often  rain  in  Egypt  ?  3.  Where  and  by  whom  was  Memphis  built  ?  What 
was  thought  of  Menei  ?  4.  What  of  the  history  of  Egypt  ?  What  of  the  shepherd  king*  ? 
What  of  Nitocrii? 


72 


SCHOOL    HISTORY 


Christian  era.     Her  brother  had  been  murdered  by  the  Egyptians, 
and  she  resolved  to  avenge  him. 

5.  For  this  purpose  queen  Nitocris  built  a  palace  under  ground,  and 
invited  the  murderers  of  her  brother  to  a  banquet.  The  subter- 
ranean hall,  where  the  banquet  was  prepared,  was  brilliantly  illumi- 
nated with  torches.  The  guests  were  the  principal  men  in  the 
kingdom. 

6.  The  scene  was  magnificent,  as  they  sat  feasting  along  the  table. 
But  suddenly  a  rushing  and  roaring  sound  was  heard  overhead,  and 
a  deluge  of  water  burst  into  the  hall.  Queen  Nitocris  had  caused  a 
river  to  flow  through  a^ecret  passage,  and  it  extinguished  the  torches, 
and  drowned  all  the  company  at  the  banquet. 


7.  The  most  renowned  monarch  that  ever  reigned  over  Egypt  was 
Sesostris.  The  date  of  his  reign  is  not  precisely  known,  but  there  is 
a  carving  in  stone,  lately  found  in  Egypt  among  the  ruins  of  an  ancient 
city,  which  is  more  than  three  thousand  years  old,  and  supposed  to 
be  a  portrait  of  him.  It  is  doubtless  the  oldest  portrait  in  existence. 
This  king  formed  the  design  of  conquering  the  world,  and  set  out 
from  Egypt  with  more  than  half  a  million  of  foot  soldiers,  twenty- 
four  thousand  horsemen,  and  twenty-seven  thousand  armed  chariots. 

8.  His  ambitious  projects  were  partially  successful.  He  made  great 
conquests,  and  wherever  he  went  he  caused  marble  pillars  to  be  erect- 
ed, and  inscriptions  to  be  engraved  on  them,  so  that  future  ages  might 
not  forsret  his  renown. 

9.  The  following  was  the  inscription  on  most  of  the  pillars: — Se- 
sostris, KING   OF  KINGS,  HAS   CONQUERED  THIS   TERRITORY  BY  HIS   ARMS. 

But  the  marble  pillars  have  long  ago  crumbled  into  dust,  or  been  bu- 
ried under  the  earth;  and  the  history  of  Sesostris  is  so  obscure,  that 
some  writers  have  even  doubted  whether  he  ever  made  any  conquests 
at  all. 

10.  But  other  writers  assure  us  that  he  returned  to  Egypt  after  his 

5.  How  (lid  she  revenge  her  brother's  death?    7.  What  can  you  tell  of  Sesostris  ?    What 
of  his  army?     9.  What  inscription  was  engraved  on  the  marble  pillars  raised  by  Sesostris 
Are  the  pillars  still  standing  ?     What  do  some  writers  doubt ' 


EGYPT. 


wars,  brining  with  him  a  multitude  of  captives,  and  long  trains  oi 
camels,  laden  with  treasure,  and  that  he  then  built  magnificent  tem- 
ples, and  constructed  canals  and  causeways. 

11.  When  Sesostris  went  to  worship  in  the  temple,  he  rode  in  a 
chariot  which  was  drawn  by  captive  kings.  They  were  harnessed 
like  horses,  four  abreast ;  and  their  royal  robes  trailed  in  the  dust  as 
they  tugged  the  heavy  chariot  along.  But  at  length  the  proud  Sesos- 
tris grew  old  and  blind.  He  could  no  longer  look  around  him,  and 
,see  captive  kings  drawing  his  chariot,  or  kneeling  at  his  footstool. 
He  then  became  utterly  miserable,  and  committed  suicide. 


CHAPTER  XL.— AFRICA  CONTINUED.  " 

Egyptian  Architecture  and  Sculpture. 

1.  The  ancient  history  of  Egypt  is  so  obscure,  and  yet  so  full  of 
wonderful  tales,  that  we  might  doubt  it  altogether,  and  believe  it  but 
the  marvellous  invention  of  fanciful  story-tellers,  were  it  not  for  the 
vast  ruins  and  stupendous  monuments  still  to  be  found  in  different 
parts  of  the  country.  These  show  that  many  ages  since,  between 
three  and  four  thousand  years  ago,  this  country  was  filled  with  mil- 
lions of  people,  and  that  there  were  cities  here  of  the  most  wonder- 
ful magnificence. 


Ruins  of  Thebes. 

2.  Thebes  appears  to  have  been  more  magnificent  than  any  other 
city,  either  in  ancient  or  modern  times.  It  was  called  the  city  of  a 
hundred  gates;  and  such  was  the  immense  population,  that  through 
each  of  these  gates,  in  time  of  war,  marched  two  hundred  armed 
chariots,  and  two  thousand  soldiers. 


10.  What  do  others  say?  II.  How  was  the  chariot  of  Sesostris  drawn?  What  was  the 
fate  of  this  despotic  king?  Cii.  XL.  — 1.  What  of  the  ancient  history  of  Egypt ?  What 
of  ruin?  and  monuments?     What  do  they  prove?    2.  What  of  Thebes? 

7 


74 


SCHOOL    HISTORY. 


3.  Thebes  was  ruined  in  the  time  of  Cambyses,  kins:  of  Persia 
who  lived  about  twenty-four  hundred  years  ago.  Yet  the  remains  of 
the  city  are  still  visible,  scattered  over  a  space  of  twenty-seven  miles 
on  each  side  of  the  Nile.  Some  of  the  pillars  of  the  temples  are 
eleven  feet  in  diameter. 

4.  One  of  the  Egyptian  kings  caused  his  subjects  to  dig  a  great 
lake,  forty-five  miles  in  circumference,  and  almost  as  deep  as  the 
ocean.  Another  king  constructed  a  labyrinth  of  marble,  containing 
three  thousand  chambers,  fifteen  hundred  of  which  were  underground. 

5.  In  the  upper  chambers  of  this  labyrinth  were  kept  the  sacred 
crocodiles,  and  all  the  other  animals  which  the  Egyptians  worship- 
ped.    In  the  subterranean  chambers  lay  the  dead  kings  of  Egypt. 

6.  The  catacombs  are  likewise  very  wonderful.  They  are  galleries 
hewn  out  of  the  rock,  and  extend  a  great  way  beneath  the  ground. 
The  dead  bodies  of  persons  who  died'  thousands  of  years  ago  are 
found  in  these  catacombs,  and  they  are  nearly  as  well  preserved  now 
as  when  they  were  first  buried.  These  are  called  mummies ;  and 
some,  supposed  to  be  three  thousand  years  old,  have  been  brought  to 
this  country. 

7.  Every  body  has  heard  of  the  pyramids  of  Egypt.  These  immense 
edifices  are  still  standing  on  the  banks  of  the  Nile.  The  largest  is 
five  hundred  feet  high,  and  covers  eleven  acres  of  ground. 


8.  The  pyramids  are  so  old  that  it  is  impossible  to  tell  when  they 
were  erected,  or  by  whom.  It  is  generally  supposed  that  the  ancient 
kings  of  Egypt  intended  them  as^heir  sepulchres,  thinking  that  thus 
they  should  be  famous  for  ever.  But  though  the  pyramids  have  not 
decayed,  the  names  of  those  kings  are  forgotten. 

9.  On  a  plain  near  Thebes  are  two  enormous  stone  statues,  some- 


what about  the  population  of  Thebes?  3.  Who  destroyed  Thebes?  Remains?  Pil- 
lars ?  4.  Describe  the  works  of  some  of  the  Icings.  What  of  the  labyrinth  ?  5.  What 
were  kept  in,  the  labyrinth  ?  6.  Describe  the  catacombs.  What  are  mummies  ?  8.  What 
of  the  pyramids  ?     What  was  the  probable  cause  of  their  erection  ? 


EGYPT. 


75 


what  like  a  man  and  woman.    These  are  fifty  feet  high.    No  one 
can  look  upon  them  but  with  wonder. 

10.  The  sphynx  is  one  of  the  most  curious  among  the  Egyptian 
antiquities.  It  was  originally  the  gigantic  head  of  a  woman,  on  the 
body  of  a  lion ;  but  the  lower  part  is  now  buried  in  the  sand.  The  part 
which  remains  above  ground  is  the  head  and  neck.  These  are  twen- 
ty-seven feet  high,  and  are  made  of  solid  rock.  At  a  distance,  it 
looks  as  if  a  great  flat-nosed  woman  were  rising  out  of  the  sand. 


11.  The  ruins  of  the  temple  of  Luxor,  and  forming  a  part  of  an- 
cient Thebes,  are  so  grand  as  to  strike  the  beholder  with  awe.  The 
remains  of  one  of  the  temples  are  perhaps  the  most  remarkable  relics 
of  antiquity. 


Image  of  Osirit. 


Image  of  Isit. 


9.  What  of  statuei  near  Thebei  ?     10.  Deicribe  the  sphyni.     11.  What  of  the  rotai  of 
Luror? 


76  SCHOOL    HISTORY 

12.  At  the  time  when  they  constructed  these  marvellous  works, 
the  ancient  Egyptians  possessed  more  learning  and  science  than  any 
other  people.  Their  superior  knowledge  caused  them  to  be  looked 
upon  as  magicians  by  the  people  of  other  countries. 

13.  Still  the  Egyptians  had  many  absurd  superstitions.  Their 
chief  god  was  Isis,  and  another  deity  was  Osiris.  Of  these  they 
made  strange  images,  and  worshipped  them.  Isis  was  greatly  rever- 
enced, and  the  people  dedicated  many  splendid  temples  to  its  wor- 
ship.   A  picture  of  one  of  these  temples  may  be  seen  at  page  71. 


CHAPTER  XLL— AFRICA  CONTINUED. 

The  Ptolemies  and  Queen  Cleopatra. 

1.  In  the  history  of  the  Jews  I  have  told  of  their  bondage  in  Egypt, 
and  of  their  miraculous  escape.  A  long  while  afterwards,  an  Egyp- 
tian king,  named  Shishak,  took  Jerusalem,  and  robbed  Solomon's 
temple  of  its  treasures. 

2.  A  very  famous  king  of  Egypt  was  named  Amenophis.  He  is 
supposed  to  be  the  same  with  Memnon,  in  honor  of  whom  a  temple 
with  a  gigantic  statue  was  erected,  of  which  some  remains  are  still 
to  be  seen  at  Thebes.  This  statue  was  said  to  utter  a  joyful  sound 
at  sunrise,  and  a  mournful  sound  when  the  sun  set.  Some  modem 
travellers  imagine  that  they  have  heard  it.    This,  however,  is  absurd. 

3.  In  the  year  525  before  the  Christian  era,  Egypt  was  conquered 
by  Cambyses,  king  of  Persia.  He  compelled  Psammenitus,  who  was 
then  king  of  Egypt,  to  drink  bulls'  blood.  It  operated  as  a  poison, 
and  caused  his  death. 

4.  Three  hundred  and  thirty-two  years  before  the  Christian  era, 
Egypt  was  conquered  by  Alexander  the  Great,  king  of  Macedon. 
Here  he  built  a  famous  city,  called  Alexandria,  which  was  for  many 
centuries  one  of  the  most  splendid  places  in  the  world.  But  the 
ancient  city  is  in  ruins,  and  modern  Alexandria  is  far  inferior  to  it. 

5.  Alexander  was  buried  at  Alexandria,  in  a  tomb  cut  out  of  one 
vast  stone  ;  this  has  been  carried  to  London  within  a  few  years,  and 
may  now  be  seen  there. 

6.  He  appointed  Ptolemy,  one  of  his  generals,  to  be  ruler  of  the 
country.  From  Ptolemy  were  descended  a  race  of  kings,  all  of  whom 
were  likewise  called  Ptolemy.  They  reigned  over  Egypt  two  hundred 
and  ninety-four  years.  The  last  of  these  kings  was  Ptolemy  Dion- 
ysius,  whose  own  wife  made  war  against  him.    A  battle  was  fought, 

12.  What  of  the  Egyptians  at  the  time  we  are  speaking  of?  How  were  they  looked  upon 
by  people  of  other  countries  ?  13.  What  of  the  superstitions  of  the  Egyptians  ?  Isis  and 
Osiris?  Ch.  XLI. —  1.  Who  was  Shiskak  ?  What  did  he  do  ?  3.  Who  was  Amencphis  ? 
What  of  the  statue  of  Memnon."'  3.  When  and  by  whom  was  Egypt  conquered  ?  Fate  of 
Psammenitus?  4.  When  did  Alexander  conquer  Egypt?  What  of  Alexandria?  6.  What 
of  Ptolemy  and  his  descendants  ?  How  long  did  they  reign  in  Egypt  ?  Who  was  Ptolemy 
Dionysius :    His  wife  ' 


EGYPT.  77 

in  which  Ptolemy  Dionysius  was  defeated.  He  attempted  to  escape, 
but  was  drowned  in  the  Nile.  His  wife,  whose  name  was  Cleopatra, 
then  became  sole  ruler  of  Egypt. 

7.  She  was  one  of  the  most  beautiful  women  that  ever  lived,  and 
her  talents  and  accomplishments  were  equal  to  her  personal  beauty. 
But  she  was  very  wicked.  Among  other  horrid  crimes,  Cleopatra 
poisoned  her  brother,  who  was  only  eleven  years  old.  Yet,  though 
all  the  world  knew  what  an  abandoned  wretch  she  was,  the  greatest 
heroes  could  not  or  would  not  resist  the  enticements  of  her  beauty. 

8.  When  Mark  Antony,  a  Roman  general,  had  defeated  Brutus  and 
Cassius,  at  Philippi,  in  Greece,  he  summoned  Cleopatra  to  come  to 
Cilicia,  on  the  northeastern  coast  of  the  Mediterranean.  He  intended 
to  punish  her  for  having  assisted  Brutus. 

9.  As  soon  as  Cleopatra  received  the  summons,  she  hastened  to 
obey.  She  went  on  board  a  splendid  vessel,  which  was  richly  adorned 
with  gold.  The  sails  were  made  of  the  costliest  silk.  Instead  oi 
rough,  sunburnt  sailors,  the  crew  consisted  of  lovely  girls,  who  rowed 
with  silver  oars  ;  and  their  strokes  kept  time  to  melodious  music. 

10.  Queen  Cleopatra  reclined  on  the  deck,  beneath  a  silken  awn- 
ing. In  this  manner  she  went  sailing  along  the  river  Cydnus.  Her 
vessel  was  so  magnificent,  and  she  herself  so  lovely,  that  the  whole 
spectacle  appeared  like  a  vision. 

1 1.  Mark  Antony  was  first  warned  of  her  approach  by  the  smell 
of  delicious  perfumes,  which  the  wind  wafted  from  the  silken  sails 
of  the  vessel.  He  next  heard  the  distant  strains  of  music,  aud  saw 
the  gleaming  of  the  silver  oars. 

12.  But  when  he  beheld  the  beauty  of  the  Egyptian  queen,  he 
thought  of  nothing  else.  Till  Mark  Antony  met  Cleopatra,  he  had 
been  an  ambitious  man  and  a  valiant  warrior.  But  from  that  day 
forward,  he  was  nothing  but  her  slave. 

13.  Owing  to  Cleopatra's  misconduct  and  his  own,  Antony  was 
defeated  by  Octavius,  another  Roman  general,  at  Actium,  in  Greece. 
He  then  killed  himself,  by  falling  on  his  sword.  Cleopatra  knew 
that  if  Octavius  took  her  alive,  he  would  carry  her  to  Rome,  and 
expose  her  to  the  derision  of  the  populace. 

14.  She  resolved  not  to  endure  this  ignominy.  Now  in  Egypt  there 
is  a  venomous  reptile,  called  an  asp,  the  bite  of  which  is  mortal,  but 
not  painful.  Cleopatra  applied  one  of  these  reptiles  to  her  bosom. 
In  a  little  while  her  body  grew  benumbed,  and  her  heart  ceased  to 
beat;  and  thus  died  the  beautiful  and  wicked  queen  of  Egypt.  This 
event  occurred  thirty  years  before  Christ. 

15.  The  story  of  queen  Cleopatra  is  very  instructive.  It  shows 
that  a  person  on  whom  Heaven  has  bestowed  the  richest  gifts  may 
use  them  to  cause  mischief  and  misery  to  all  around,  and  to  bring 
ruin  on  himself. 

7.  What  of  Cleopatra  ?  What  cruelty  did  she  commit?  What  made  Cleopatra  irresisti- 
ble? 8.  Who  was  Mark  Antony  ?  Why  did  he  wish  to  punish  Cleopatra  ?  Give  an  account 
of  the  arrival  oi  Cleopatra  at  Cilicia.  12.  What  was  the  character  of  Antony  till  he  mat 
Cleopatra?  13  Where  was  Antony  defeated  ?  Who  was  Octavius  ?  Fate  of  Antony  ?  Why 
did  Cleopatra  determine  to  kill  herself '  14.  What  caused  aer  death  '  How  long  wa<  thll 
before  Chrisi  ? 


78  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  XLIL— AFRICA  CONTINUED. 

Sequel  of  the  Egyptian  History. 

1.  After  the  death  of  Cleopatra,  Egypt  became  a  province  of  the 
Roman  empire ;  and  it  continued  to  belong  to  that,  and  the  portion  of 
it  called  the  Eastern  empire,  till  the  year  640  after  the  Christian  era. 
It  was  then  conquered  by  the  Saracens.  It  remained  under  their 
government  upAvards  of  six  centuries. 

2.  The  Saracen  sovereigns  were  dethroned  by  the  Mamelukes, 
whom  they  had  trained  up  to  be  their  guards.  The  Mamelukes  ruled 
Egypt  till  the  year  1517,  when  they  were  conquered  by  the  Turks. 
They  kept  possession  of  Egypt  till  the  year  1798.  It  was  then  invaded 
by  Napoleon  Bonaparte,  with  an  army  of  forty  thousand  Frenchmen. 

3.  The  Turks,  ever  since  their  conquest  of  Egypt  had  kept  a  body 
of  Mamelukes  in  their  service ;  these  made  a  desperate  resistance. 
A  battle  was  fought  near  the  pyramids,  in  which  many  of  them  were 
slain,  and  others  were  drowned  in  the  Nile.  Not  long  after  this  vic- 
tory, Bonaparte  went  back  to  France,  and  left  general  Kleber  in  com- 
mand of  the  French  army. 

4.  General  Kleber  was  a  brave  man,  but  a  severe  one,  and  his  se- 
verity cost  him  his  life.  He  had  ordered  an  old  Mussulman,  named 
the  Sheik  Sada,  to  be  bastinadoed  on  the  soles  of  his  feet.  Shortly 
afterwards,  when  the  general  was  in  a  mosque,  a  fierce  Arab  rushed 
upon  him,  and  killed  him  with  a  dagger. 

5.  In  1801,  the  English  sent  Sir  Ralph  Abercrombie  with  an  army 
to  drive  the  French  out  of  Egypt.  General  Menou  was  then  the 
French  commander.  Sir  Ralph  Abercrombie  beat  him  at  the  battle 
of  Aboukir,  but  was  himself  mortally  wounded. 

6.  In  the  course  of  the  same  year  the  French  army  sailed  from 
Egypt  back  to  France.  The  inhabitants  lamented  their  departure, 
for  the  French  generals  had  ruled  them  with  more  justice  and  mod- 
eration than  their  old  masters,  the  Turks.  Egypt  is  now  governed  by 
a  successor  of  Mehernet  Ali,  who  bears  the  title  of  pacha,  but  the 
country  is  no  longer  a  part  of  the  Turkish  empire. 

7.  The  present  capital  of  Egypt  is  Grand  Cairo.  It  is  much  infe- 
rior to  what  it  was  in  former  times,  but  still  contains  about  three 
hundred  thousand  inhabitants.  Alexandria,  built  by  Alexander  the 
Great,  as  I  have  before  said,  is  now  much  reduced,  but  the  ruins 
around  it  show  that  it  was  once  a  splendid  city.  There  is  no  part  of  the 
world  that  seems  more  gloomy  to  a  traveller  than  Egypt.  The  present 
aspect  of  the  towns  and  cities  is  that  of  poverty  in  the  midst  of  ruins, 
which  speak  of  wealth  and  splendor  that  have  long  since  departed. 

Ch.  XLII. — 1.  What  was  the  state  of  Egypt  from  Cleopatra's  death  to  its  subjugation  by 
the  Mamelukes  ?  2.  How  long  did  the  Mamelukes  govern  Egypt  ?  When  and  how  long 
did  the  Turks  govern  Egypt  ?  What  happened  in  179S  ?  3.  What  battle  was  fought  ?  What 
of  Bonaparte  after  the  victory?  4.  What  of  General  Kleber?  5.  What  took  place  in  1S01  ? 
6.  What  happened  in  the  same  year  ?  Why  were  the  Egyptians  sorry  to  have  the  French 
leave  them?  How  is  Egypt  now  governed  ?  How  is  the  country  considered?  7.  What 
is  the  capital  of  Egypt?  What  of  Grand  Cairo  ?  Population?  What  of  Alexandria  ?  How 
does  Egypt  appear  to  a  traveller  ? 


.ETHIOPIA.  79 

CHAPTER  XLIIL— AFRICA  CONTINUED. 

Summary  of  ^Ethiopian  Matters. 

1.  All  the  interior  parts  of  Africa  were  anciently  called  iEthiopia. 
But,  properly  speaking,  iEthiopia  comprised  only  the  countries  now 
called  Nubia  and  Abyssinia.  This  region  lies  south  of  Egypt,  and 
extends  along  the  shore  of  the  Red  Sea.  The  first  inhabitants  of 
iEthiopia  are  supposed  to  have  emigrated  from  Arabia  the  Happy,  a 
part  of  Arabia.     Their  early  history  is  almost  unknown. 

2.  iEthiopia,  or  at  least  a  portion  of  it,  was  formerly  called  Sheba, 
and  from  thence  it  is  supposed  that  the  queen  of  Sheba  went  to  visit 
Solomon.  About  thirty  years  ago,  it  is  said  that  one  of  her  descend- 
ants was  king  of  Abyssinia. 

3.  It  used  to  be  the  custom  to  confine  the  iEthiopian  princes  on  a 
high  mountain,  which  was  named  Geshen.  It  was  very  high  and 
steep,  and  looked  like  an  enormous  castle  of  stone.  No  person  could 
ascend  this  mountain,  or  come  down  from  it,  unless  he  were  raised  or 
lowered  by  means  of  ropes. 

4.  The  princes  lived  on  the  summit  of  the  mountain,  in  miserable 
huts.  The  greater  part  of  them  never  came  down  till  their  dying 
day.  But  whenever  the  king  died,  one  of  the  princes  was  summoned 
to  the  throne.  Perhaps,  however,  he  found  himself  no  happier  in  the 
royal  palace,  than  in  his  hut  on  the  summit  of  Mount  Geshen. 

5.  The  ^Ethiopians  were  believers  in  the  Jewish  religion  till  the 
middle  of  the  fourth  century  after  the  Christian  era.  Candace,  the 
queen  of  the  country,  was  then  converted  to  Christianity,  and  her  sub- 
jects followed  her  example. 

6.  The  inhabitants  of  iEthiopia,  or  Abyssinia,  are  still  called  Chris- 
tians, but  their  mode  of  worship  is  mixed  up  with  many  Jewish  prac- 
tices. They  also  worship  the  Virgin  Mary  and  the  saints,  like  the 
Roman  Catholics. 

7.  The  people  of  this  part  of  Africa  are  not  generally  negroes. 
They  are  of  an  olive  complexion,  and  have  long  hair  and  agreeable 
features.  But  in  the  northeastern  part  of  Abyssinia,  there  is  a  race 
of  negroes  called  Shangallas. 

8.  These  negroes  have  been  described  as  having  faces  resembling 
apes,  and  as  being  little  more  intelligent  than  the  monkey  tribe. 
They  have  no  houses,  but  sleep  under  the  trees,  and  sometimes  bur- 

ow  in  caves.      The  Abyssinians  hunt  them  as  they  would  wild 
easts. 

Ch.  XLIII. — 1.  What  was  anciently  called  .Ethiopia  ?  In  which  direction  is  it  from 
Egypt .'  Where  was  .(Ethiopia  properly  speaking  situated  ?  Who  were  the  first  inhabit- 
ants, of  Ethiopia?  2.  What  was  .Ethiopia  formerly  called?  What  of  the  queen  of 
Sheba?  3.  What  was  once  the  custom  ?  4.  How  did  the  princes  live?  What  happened 
when  the  king  died  ?  8.  Till  what  time  did  the  ^Ethiopians  believe  in  the  Jewish  reli- 
gion ?  What  of  Candace  ?  6.  What  of  the  worship  of  the  people  of  ^Ethiopia  at  the  pre- 
senttime?  7.  What  of  their  personal  appearance  .'  What  of  the  Shangellas .'  8.  Describa 
them. 


80  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 


CHAPTER  XLIV.— AFRICA  CONTINUED. 

Origin  of  the  Barbary  States  and  their  Piracies  on  the 
Christians. 

1.  The  Barbary  states  are  Morocco,  Algiers,  Tunis,  and  Tripoli.. 
They  are  bounded  north  by  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  east  and  south  by 
the  desert,  and  west  by  tlie  Atlantic  Ocean.  These  countries  were 
inhabited  in  the  time  of  the  Romans.  Morocco  was  called  Maurita- 
nia ;  and  Algiers  Numidia.  These  regions  were  first  settled  by  colo- 
nies from  Phoenicia,  Greece,  and  other  countries. 

2.  In  this  region  stood  the  celebrated  city  of  Carthage  in  ancient 
times.  Its  site  was  about  ten  miles  northeast  of  the  city  of  Tunis. 
It  was  founded  by  some  Phoenicians,  eight  hundred  and  sixty-nine 
years  before  the  Christian  era.  The  Phoenicians,  as  I  have  told  you, 
were  the  first  people  who  engaged  in  commerce,  and  founded  colo- 
nies for  the  purpose  of  carrying  on  trade. 

3.  In  the  history  of  Rome  I  shall  tell  you  how  Carthage  was  de- 
stroyed. The  Romans  erected  a  new  city  where  it  had  formerly 
stood.  This  was  conquered  and  destroyed  by  the  Saracens,  who 
then  built  the  city  of  Tunis.  In  the  year  1574,  Tunis  was  seized  by 
the  Turks. 

4.  The  city  of  Algiers  was  built  by  the  Saracens,  in  the  year  944. 
The  government,  called  the  regency  of  Algiers,  was  founded  in  1518, 
by  two  Turks,  named  Horuc  and  Hagradin.  They  were  brothers, 
and  both  bore  the  name  of  Barbarossa,  or  Red-Beard. 

5.  The  country  now  called  Morocco  was  conquered  by  the  Sara- 
cens about  the  same  time  with  the  other  Barbary  states.  So  also 
was  Tripoli.  All  these  states,  except  Morocco,  afterwards  fell  into 
the  hands  of  the  Turks. 

6.  During  a  long  period,  the  Barbary  states  were  in  the  habit  of 
fitting  out  vessels  to  cruise  against  the  ships  of  every  nation.  Their 
prisoners  were  sold  as  slaves,  and  never  returned  to  their  own  coun- 
try, unless  a  high  ransom  were  paid  for  them. 

7.  The  Americans  were  the  first  who  made  any  considerable  resis- 
tance to  these  outrages.  In  the  year  1S03,  commodore  Preble  sailed 
to  the  Mediterranean  Sea  with  a  small  American  fleet.  He  intended 
to  attack  Tripoli ;  but  one  of  his  frigates,  the  Philadelphia,  got  aground 
in  the  harbor. 

8.  The  Turks  took  possession  of  the  Philadelphia.  But  one  night, 
lieutenant  Decatur  entered  the  harbor  of  Tripoli,  and  rowed  toward 
the  captured  vessel,  with  only  twenty  men.     He  leaped  on  board, 

Ch.  XLIV.— 1.  What  are  the  Barbary  states  ?  How  are  they  bounded  ?  2.  Where  did 
ancient  Carthage  stand  ?  Who  founded  it  ?  3.  Who  erected  a  new  city  ?  What  did  the  Sa- 
racens do  ?  When  was  Tunis  seized  hy  the  Turks?  4.  When  and  by  whom  was  Algiers 
built?  What  was  done  in  1518?  Who  were  called  Barbarossa?  5.  What  of  Morocco  and 
Tripoli?  Which  of  the  Barbary  stales  fell  afterwards  into  the  hands  of  the  Turks?  0, 
What  were  these  states  in  the  habit  of  doing  ?  7.  What  was  done  in  1803  ?  What  of  com- 
modore Preble  ?     8.  What  of  the  Philadelphia  f  What  did  Decatur  do  ? 


BARBARYSTATES.  81 

followed  by  his  crew,  and  killed  all  the  Turks,  or  drove  them  over- 
board.    The  Philadelphia  was  then  set  on  fire. 

9.  After  this  exploit,  commodore  Preble  obtained  some  gun-boats 
from  the  king  of  Naples,  and  with  these  and  the  American  vessels,  he 
made  an  attack  on  the  fortifications  of  Tripoli.  The  bashaw  of  Tri- 
poli was  forced  to  give  up  his  prisoners. 

10.  In  the  year  1815,  commodore  Decatur  (the  same  who  had 
burnt  the  Philadelphia)  was  sent  with  a  fleet  against  Algiers.  He 
captured  their  largest  vessels,  and  compelled  the  Algerines,  and  the 
Tripolitans  also,  to  agree  never  more  to  make  slaves  of  Americans. 

11.  In  1S16,  Algiers  was  battered  by  an  English  fleet  under  the 
command  of  lord  Exmouth.  This  was  the  severest  chastisement  that 
the  Algerines  had  ever  received  at  that  period.  But  in  1830,  the 
French  sent  a  large  naval  and  military  force  against  Algiers,  com- 
manded by  Marshal  Beaumont.  The  war  continued  for  seventeen 
years.  At  length  the  country  was  conquered,  and  Algiers,  under  the 
name  of  Algeria,  is  now  a  province  of  France. 


CHAPTER  XLV.-AFRICA  CONTINUED. 

Fables  and  Facts  about  Africa. 

1.  Most  of  the  other  regions  of  Africa  can  hardly  be  said  to  have 
any  history.  The  inhabitants  possess  no  written  records,  and  cannot 
tell  what  events  have  happened  to  their  forefathers. 

2.  The  ancie'nts  had  very  curious  notions  about  Africa  ;  for  they 
had  visited  only  the  northern  parts,  and  contented  themselves  with 
telling  incredible  stories  about  the  remainder.  '  They  supposed  that 
towards  the  eastern  shore  of  the  continent,  there  were  people  without 
noses,  and  others  who  had  three  or  four  eyes  apiece. 

3.  In  other  parts  of  Africa  there  were  said  to  be  men  without 
heads,  but  who  had  eyes  in  their  breasts.  Old  writers  speak  also  of 
a  nation  whose  king  had  a  head  like  a  dog.  There  was  likewise  said 
to  be  a  race  of  giants,  twice  as  tall  as  common  men  and  women. 

4.  But  the  prettiest  of  all  these  fables  is  the  story  of  the  Pigmies. 
These  little  people  were  said  tc  be  about  a  foot  high,  and  were  be- 
lieved to  dwell  near  the  source  of  the  river  Nile.  Their  houses  were 
built  something  like  birds'  nests,  and  their  building  materials  were 
clay,  feathers,  and  esrg-shells. 

5.  The-e  Pigmies  used  to  wage  terrible  wars  with  the  cranes.  An 
immense  army  of  them  would  set  out  on  an  expedition,  some  mounted 
on  rams  and  goats,  and  others  on  foot. 

6.  When  an  army  of  the  Pigmies  encountred  an  army  of  the  cranes, 


9.  What  attack  was  made  upon  Tripoli?  What  of  the  bashaw?  10.  What  was  done  in 
[lie  year  1815?  What  agreement  did  the  Tripolitans  and  Algerines  make  ?  11.  When 
\u.  Algiers  battered .'  What  took  place  in  1830 ?  What  of  Algiers  now?  Ch.  XLV.— 
1.  What  of  the  inhabitants  of  most  parts  of  Africa  ?  2.  What  were  the  ideas  of  the  an- 
cients concerning  Africa  ?  A.  What  is  the  prettiest  of  all  these  fabulous  stories'  Giy« 
tome  accouut  of  the  Pigmies. 


82  SCHOOL  HISTORY. 

great  valor  was  displayed  on  both  sides.  The  cranes  would  rush  for* 
ward  to  the  charge  flapping  their  wings,  and  sometimes  one  of  them 
would  snatch  up  a  Pigmy  in  his  beak,  and  carry  him  away  captive. 

7.  But  the  Pigmies  brandished  their  little  swords  and  spears,  and 
generally  succeeded  in  putting  the  enemy  to  flight.  Whenever  they 
had  a  chance,  they  would  break  the  eggs  of  the  cranes,  and  kill  the 
unfledged  young  ones  without  mercy. 

S.  Until  within  a  few  years,  the  moderns  have  not  known  much 
more  about  the  interior  of  Africa  than  the  ancients  did.  They  have 
now  acquired  considerable  knowledge  respecting  it;  but  the  subject 
belongs  rather  to  geography  than  history.  Nearly  the  whole  of  the 
central  part  of  Africa,  through  which  the  river  Niger  flows,  is  called 
Nigritia,  or  Negro-land.     It  is  inhabited  by  several  different  nations 

9.  The  principal  city  of  Nigritia  is  called  Timbuctoo.  No  white 
people  have  ever  visited  it,  except  one  American,  one  Englishman, 
and  one  Frenchman.  The  name  of  the  latter  was  M.  Caillie.  He 
was  there  in  1827,  and  describes  the  city  as  built  in  the  shape  of  a 
triangle,  and  situated  eight  miles  from  the  Niger. 

10.  The  houses  are  only  one  story  high,  and  are  built  of  round 
bricks  baked  in  the  sun.  The  poor  people  and  slaves  dwell  in  huts 
of  straw,  shaped  something  like  bee-hives.  All  around  the  city,  there 
is  an  immense  ^ilain  of  yellowish  white  sand. 

11.  There  are  English  and  French  settlements  on  the  western  coast 
of  Africa.  There  was  formerly  a  Dutch  settlement  at  the  southern 
extremity  of  the  continent,  but  the  English  have  had  possession  of  it 
since  the  year  1806.  This  is  called  Cape  Town,  and  is  situated  at 
the  cape  of  Good  Hope. 


CHAPTER  XLVI.-AFRICA  CONTINUED. 

History  of  the  Slave-Trade. 

1.  The  most  painful  part  of  the  history  of  Africa  is  that  which  be- 
longs to  the  slave-trade.  From  the  earliest  ages,  when  human  soci- 
ety was  yet  in  a  rude  state,  it  was  the  custom  to  make  slaves  of  those 
who  were  taken  in  war.  This  practice  was  continued  in  after  times, 
and  thus,  for  thousands  of  years,  slavery  was  established  in  nearly  all 
the  nations  of  the  earth. 

2.  But  in  those  countries  where  the  Christian  religion  prevailed, 
slavery  came  into  general  disuse.  In  14S2,  however,  the  Portuguese 
began  the  horrid  traffic  of  the  slave-trade,  and  the  English  folioAved 


What 
M 


8.  What  knowledge  have  the  moderns  of  the  interior  of  Africa  ?     Where   is  Nigritia  ? 

7hat  of  the  inhabitants?  9.  What  of  Timbuctoo  ?  Who  have  visited  it?  What  does 
j.vi.  Caillie  say  of  it  ?  Describe  it.  11.  What  of  settlements  ?  What  of  Cape  Town? 
How  long  have  the  English  had  possession  of  it.  Ch.  XLVI. — 1.  What  is  painful  in  the 
history  of  Africa  ?  What  was  the  custom  in  the  earliest  ages  ?  How  was  slavery  estab- 
lished? 2.  What  effect  had  the  Christian  religion  upon  slavery  ?  When  did  the  Portuguesi 
engage  in  the  slave  trade  ?     The  English  ?     What  has  hapoeued  till  the  present  time  i 


A  F  R  I  CA .  $3 

in  1563.  From  that  time,  it  has  continued  to  the  present  day, 
though  most  nations  have  made  laws  against  it,  and  it  has  now  nearly 
ceased. 

3.  For  at  least  two  hundred  years,  this  traffic  was  carried  on  to  a 
great  extent.  The  custom  was  for  vessels  to  go  to  the  western  coast 
of  Africa,  and  purchase  of  the  African  princes  such  prisoners  as  they 
had  for  sale.  Sometimes,  however,  the  captains  of  the  vessels  would 
rob  the  people  of  their  children,  or  they  would  go  on  shore  with  a 
body  of  armed  men,  and  carry  away  the  inhabitants  of  a  whole 
village. 

4.  The  poor  negroes  thus  taken  from  their  homes,  and  separated 
forever  from  all  they  held  dear,  were  crowded  into  the  vessels,  where 
they  were  often  half-starved,  and  Avhere  they  sometimes  suffered  from 
disease,  or  unkind  treatment.  Such  was  frequently  their  distress, 
that  they  would  jump  into  the  sea,  or  beat  out  their  own  brains  in 
despair. 

5.  Millions  of  these  poor  negroes  have  been  taken  from  their  homes, 
and  probably  more  than  half  of  those  who  entered  the  ships,  from  the 
beginning  of  the  trade  to  this  day,  have  perished  before  they  reached 
the  countries  to  which  they  were  bound.  It  is  by  this  cruel  trade, 
that  slavery  has  been  introduced  into  various  parts  of  America,  and 
the  West  Indies. 


CHAPTER  XLVII.-AFMCA  CONTINUED. 

Chronology  of  Africa. 

1.  The  following  table  exhibits  the  dates  of  the  most  remarkable 
events  in  the  history  of  Africa.  It  may  be  well  to  compare  this  with 
the  chronology  of  Asia,  by  which  you  may  see  what  was  doing  in 
that  quarter,  while  these  events  were  happening  in  Africa. 

B.  C. 

Egypt  settled  by  Misraim 21 88 

JNitocris  reigned  queen  of  Egypt 1678 

Departure  of  the  Israelites  from  Egypt 1491 

Cambyses  conquers  Egypt 525 

"         destroys  Thebes 520 

Alexander  conquers  Egypt 332 

Death  of  Cleopatra 30 

A.  D. 

Eivpt  conquered  by  the  Saracens 670 

Algiers   built 944 

Mamelukes  came  into  power 1250 

The  Portuguese  besjin  to  traffic  in  slaves 1482 

Egypt  conquered  by  the  Turks 1517 

3.  How  long  was  the  traffic  carried  on  ?  What  was  the  custom  ?  What  was  done  by 
captains  of  vessels?  4.  Describe  the  state  of  the  poor  negroes.  6.  How  has  slavery  been 
introduced  into  America  and  the  West  Indies? 


84 


SCHOOL    HISTORY. 


A  government  founded  at  Algiers,  called  the  regency  of  Algiers  1518 

The  English  begin  to  traffic  in  slaves 1563 

Tunis  seized  by  the  Turks 1574 

Napoleon  invades  Egypt 1798 

Sir  Ralph  Abercrombie  drives  the  French  out  of  Egypt     .     .     .  1801 

Tripoli  attacked  by  commodore  Preble 1S03 

The  English  take  Cape  Town  from  the  Dutch 1806 

Commodore  Decatur  batters  Algiers 1815 

Lord  Exmouth  attacks  Algiers 1SI6 

Caillie,  a  Frenchman,  goes  to  Timbuctoo 1S27 

Algiers  taken  by  marshal  Beaumont 1830 


CHAPTER  XLVIIL— EUROPE. 

Introductory  Remarks  on  its  Geography  and  other 

Matters. 


1.  Europe  is  considered  the  third  quarter  of  the  globe.  It  is  the 
smallest  in  extent,  being  about  one  quarter  as  large  as  Asia,  one 
third  as  large  as  Africa,  and  about  one  third  larger  than  the  whole 
United  States.  It  is  a  part  of  the  eastern  continent,  and  is  only  sepa- 
rated from  Asia  by  the  Ural  Mountains.  It  is  separated  from  Africa 
by  the  Mediterranean  Sea.  At  the  straits  of  Gibraltar,  the  distance 
from  Europe  to  Africa  is  but  twenty-one  miles. 

2.  But  although  Europe  is  the  smallest  of  the  four  quarters  of  the 
globe,  it  has  nearly  three  hundred  millions  of  inhabitants,  and  is  much 
superior  to  Asia,  Africa,  and  most  parts  of  America,  in  civilization. 
It  abounds;  in  fine  cities,  fine  roads,  good  houses,  useful  manufactures, 


Ch.  XL VII. — The  teacher  will  here  put  such  questions  on  the  Chronology  as  he  deemi 
proper.     Ch.  XLVIIL — 1.  Which    is   the  third  quarter   of  the    globe?     The    smallest? 


EUROPE. 


85 


Map  of  Europe,. 


.60 


pna 

STOUA" 

r<o",5  ^#^  fe*  iS  HlfT 


.'.<-.  ) 


•r^  f^->*^5j^v^i    --.'/.,  r'-^M   '"/;\ii  3   -d.     ■»    y  t">i..^'\\    ^^-^ 


U'M 


30K 


"<£» 


Tripoli 
iflY-ELB' A  II I Y 

jlongiti/cfr E.ft-om  Crpeiiuicti 


Questions  on  the  Map. — Tell  the  direction  of  the  following  places  from 
London— France;  Austria;  Asia  Minor;  Moscow;  Finland;  Turkey;  Ita- 
ly; Norway;  Warsaw;  Caspian  Sea:  Asia;  Paris:  Ireland. 


86  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

and  most  other  things  that  are  necessary  to  the  comfort  and  happi- 
ness of  mankind. 

3.  In  all  parts  of  Europe  except  Turkey,  the  religion  of  Jesus 
Christ  prevails.  If  you  were  to  travel  in  Asia  or  Africa,  you  would 
meet  Avith  no  churches,  or  only  now  and  then  one,  where  the  true 
God  is  worshipped.  But  you  would  see  a  great  many  mosques  dedi- 
cated to  the  false  religion  of  Mahomet,  and  a  great  many  temples 
where  the  people  bow  down  to  idols  of  wood,  stone,  or  metal. 

4.  But  in  Europe,  the  traveller  everywhere  meets  with  churches 
and  these  show  that  the  people  are  Christians.  In  Europe,  also, 
there  are  many  colleges,  academies,  and  schools,  which  prove  that 
the  people  set  a  high  value  upon  education.  It  is  a  fact  which  I 
wish  you  to  remember,  that  in  all  parts  of  the  world  where  you  find 
churches,  you  find  that  the  people  are  more  or  less  advanced  in  civi- 
lization and  the  arts  which  render  mankind  happy. 

5.  This  may  show  to  us  that  the  Christian  religion  tends  to  make 
people  wiser  and  happier  ;  and  this  is  rendered  still  more  clear  by 
the  fact  that  in  all  those  countries  where  the  Christian  religion  is  un- 
known, the  greater  part  of  the  people  are  ignorant,  degraded,  and 
miserable.  All  false  religions  tend  to  injure  mankind ;  the  true  reli- 
gion tends  to  the  improvement  of  mankind.  How  important  is  it, 
then,  that  every  individual  should  be  a  real  Christian. 

6.  As  Europe  is  the  smallest  of  the  four  quarters  of  the  earth,  so 
it  was  behind  Asia  and  Africa  in  being  settled  and  civilized.  Long 
after  the  Assyrian  empire  had  risen  to  great  power  and  splendor,  long 
after  Babylon  and  Nineveh  had  flourished  on  the  banks  of  the  Eu- 
phrates, long  after  Egypt  had  become  a  mighty  kingdom,  long  after 
Thebes,  Memphis,  and  other  magnificent  cities  had  risen  upon  the 
borders  of  the  Nile,  Europe  continued  to  be  inhabited  only  by  wan- 
dering tribes  of  savages. 

7.  Greece  was  the  first  portion  of  Europe  that  was  settled.  About 
the  time  that  Moses  led  the  Israelites  out  of  Egypt,  the  Greeks  began 
to  build  houses,  found  cities,  and  emerge  from  the  savage  into  a  more 
civilized  state.  By  degrees  they  advanced  in  knowledge  and  refine- 
ment, and  at  length  became  the  most  polished  people  in   the  world. 

S.  Afterwards  Rome,  situated  in  Italy,  became  a  mighty  city,  and 
the  Roman  people  extended  their  empire  over  the  greater  part  of 
Europe,  and  the  most  civilized  portions  of  Asia  and  Africa.  Carthage, 
Egypt,  Greece,  Asia  Minor,  Palestine,  Svria  and  other  Asiatic  coun- 
tries, bowed  to  the  Roman  yoke. 

How  Urge  is  Europe  compared  with  Asia  ?  Africa  ?  The  United  States  ?  How  is  it  scpa 
rated  from  Asia  ?  From  Africa  ?  How  far  is  the  nearest  point  of  Europe  from  Africa 
2.  What  of  Europe  ?  In  what  does  it  abound?  3.  What  of  religion  in  Europe?  What 
of  Asia  and  Africa?  What  of  churches?  Mosques?  Temples?  4.  What  does  the  tra- 
veller meet  in  Europe  ?  What  do  churches  show  ?  What  do  colleges,  schools,  &c.  show  ? 
What  do  you  find  where  there  are  churches?  5.  What  effect  has  the  Christian  religion? 
What  of  countries  where  the  Christian  religion  is  unknown  ?  What  effect  have  false  reli- 
gions? What  of  the  true  religion  ?  Why  should  every  person  be  a  real  Christian  ?  6. 
What  of  Europe  ?  WThat  was  the  condition  of  Europe  until  after  the  empires  of  Asia  and 
Egypt  had  long  flourished  ?  7.  What  part  of  Europe  was  first  inhabited  ?  About  what 
lime  did  the  Greeks  begin  to  emerge  from  the  savage  to  civilized  state  ?  Progress  of  th« 
Greeks?     9.  What  of  Rome  ?    What  countries  became  subject  to  Rome  ? 


EUROPE.  87 

9.  Rome  was  the  most  splendid  empire  that  the  world  has  ever 
seen.  But  as  it  crushed  other  kingdoms  beneath  its  foot,  so,  iu  turn, 
imperial  Borne  was  itself  trampled  down  by  the  northern  nations  of 
Europe.  Great  ignorance  followed  this  event,  and  the  different 
nations  and  tribes  of  Europe  seemed  like  broken  and  crushed  limbs 
and  members  of  the  great  empire,  almost  without  life. 

10.  But  these  separate  fragments  of  the  human  family  grew  up  in 
due  time  to  be  separate  nations,  and  these  advanced  in  knowledga 
until  they  reached  the  condition  in  which  we  now  find  them. 

11.  Europe  may  be  divided  into  two  parts,  the  northern  and  south- 
ern. In  the  former,  the  climate  is  about  as  cold  as  it  is  in  our 
middle  and  eastern  States.  In  the  latter,  it  is  about  as  warm  as  in 
the  southern  States.  The  principal  kingdoms  in  the  northern  sec- 
tion of  Europe  are  Russia,  Norway,  Sweden,  Prussia,  several  German 
states,  Denmark,  Holland,  Belgium,  Switzerland,  France,  and  Great 
Britain. 

12.  Among  the  southern  kingdoms  of  Europe  are  Portugal,  Spain, 
Italy,  Gretce,  and  Turkey.  In  these  latter  countries  the  soil  is  gene- 
rally fertile,  and  here  grapes,  olives,  oranges,  lemons,  melons,  and 
other  delicious  fruits,  are  abundant. 

13.  Here,  too,  all  the  wants  of  man  for  food  are  easily  supplied, 
and  so  warm  and  gentle  is  the  climate,  that  the  people  do  not  lind  it 
necessary  to  build  tight  houses,  and  put  on  thick  clothing,  and  pro- 
vide stores  against  the  winter  ;  yet  it  is  remarkable,  that  where  nature 
has  done  so  much,  the  people  think  it  hardly  necessary  to  do  anything, 
and  consequently  they  are  less  industrious,  less  comfortable,  and  less 
happy,  than  in  more  cold  and  severe  climates. 

14.  In  the  northern  parts  of  Europe,  the  people  find  it  necessary  to 
cultivate  the  soil  with  care,  and  lay  up  in  summer  a  store  of  provi- 
sions against  the  long,  cold  winter.  They  build  themselves  good 
houses,  they  furnish  them  with  many  convenient  articles,  and  thus,  by 
their  industry  and  care,  they  live  more  happily  than  those  who  inha- 
bit the  gentler  climes  of  the  south. 

15.  The  wild  animals  of  Europe  resemble  those  of  this  country, 
though  they  are  in  some  respects  different.  The  trees,  plants,  shrubs, 
and  flowers,  are  similar  to  those  we  find  here,  though  not  exactly  the 
same. 

16.  If  you  were  to  go  to  Europe,  you  would  everywhere  feel  that 
you  were  in  a  strange  land,  but  still  many  things  would  remind  you 
of  your  own  dear  home  in  America.  But  if  you  were  to  go  to  Asia 
or  Africa,  the  houses,  the  fields,  the  dress  of  the  people,  and  all  their 
manners  and  customs,  would  impress  you  with  the  idea  that  you 
were  in  a  strange  land,  far,  very  iar,  from  your  native  country. 


9.  What  was  Rome  ?  What  happened  to  the  empire  ?  What  followed  the  destruction 
of  the  Roman  empire  ?  10.  What  of  the  several  nations  of  Europe  ?  11.  How  may  Kw- 
rype  be  divided  I  Climate  in  northern  Europe?  Southern  Europe?  Principal  nations 
a.uonhern  Europe  ?  Direction  of  each  of  these  from  England  ?  1:2.  The  southern  king- 
doms of  Enrope  ?    Direction  of  each  of  these   from  England?     13.  Climate   in  southern 

Europe  ?  Ell'ect  of  the  climate  upon  the  people  ?  14.  What  of  the  northern  parts  of  Eu- 
rope .'  Condition  of  the  people  ?  15.  Wild  animals  of  Europe?  Vegetation?  16 
W  hat  if  you  were  to  go  to  Europe  ?     Asia  ?     Africa  ? 


88  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  XLIX.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About   Greece  ;  where  it  is  situated  ;  Appearatice  of  the 
Country  ;  Climate. 

1.  Greece  is  a  small  strip  of  land  extending  into  the  Mediterra- 
nean Sea.  It  lies  almost  exactly  east  of  New  York,  at  the  distance 
of  about  five  thousand  miles.  It  is  nearly  at  an  equal  distance  from 
Asia  Minor  on  the  east,  and  Italy  on  the  west. 

2.  Greece  is  bounded  on  the  north  by  Macedonia,  which  is  now  a 
part  of  Turkev ;  on  every  other  side  it  is  bounded  by  the  sea.  To 
the  south  and  east  of  it  are  a  great  number  of  islands,  some  of  which 
are  extremely  beautiful. 

3.  Several  of  them  have  towns  and  cities  upon  them,  and  one, 
called  Antiparos,  is  remarkable  for  a  grotto  beneath  the  earth,  which 
appears  like  a  beautiful  palace.  When  lighted  up  with  lamps,  it 
seems  a  vast  hall,  with  a  thousand  pillars  and  ornaments  of  silver. 

4.  Some  of  the  islands  of  Greece  have  been  thrown  up  from  the 
sea,  and  others  which  formerly  existed  have  disappeared.  These 
strange  things  have  been  caused  by  volcanic  fires  under  the  sea. 
Nothing  can  be  more  wonderful  than  the  scenes  which  have  some- 
times been  exhibited  by  these  convulsions  of  nature. 

5.  In  the  southern  part  of  Greece,  and  among  the  islands,  the  cli- 
mate is  as  mild  as  in  Virginia,  and  here  the  country  abounds  in  all 
sorts  of  delicious  fruits.  In  the  northern  part,  the  climate  is  some- 
what colder. 

6.  If  you  were  to  travel  through  Greece,  you  would  discover  that  it 
is  naturally  very  beautiful.  Along  the  shores,  you  would  meet  with 
many  little  bays  and  harbors,  and  you  would  easily  believe  that  the 
people  living  there  would  be  tempted  by  the  placid  water  to  become 
seamen.  You  would  accordingly  find  a  large  portion  of  the  inhabit- 
ants to  be  seafaring  people. 

7.  In  the  interior  of  the  country  you  would  meet  with  lofty  moun- 
tains, whose  tops  in  winter  are  covered  with  snow.  You  would  meet 
with  smiling  valleys,  bright,  rapid  streams,  and  steep  hill-sides  cov- 
ered with  olive-groves,  vineyards,  and  fig-trees. 

S.  You  would  discover  that  the  people  of  the  present  day  live  in 
miserable  villages  or  towns,  all  wearing  an  aspect  of  poverty  and 
decay.  But  you  would  often  meet  with  the  ruins  of  temples  and  other 
edifices,  built  by  the  ancient  Greeks  two  or  three  thousand  years  ago. 

9.  These  would  show  you,  that,  though  the  modern  Greeks  appear 
to  be  a  degraded  people,  yet  the  former  inhabitants  of  this  country 
were  among  the  most  remarkable  people  that  ever  lived.  It  is  of 
these  I  am  now  going  to  tell  you. 

Ch.  XLIX. — 1.  What  is  Greece  ?  Direction  and  distance  from  New  York  ?  In  what 
direction  is  it  from  Asia  Minor?  From  Italy?  2,  How  is  Greece  bounded  on  the  north? 
East?  South?  West?  What  of  the  islands  ?  3  What  of  Antiparos  ?  4.  What  of  volca- 
nic islands  ?  5.  Climate  in  the  southern  part  of  Greece?  Northern?  6.  What  of  the 
shores  of  Greece  ?  To  what  pursuits  are  many  of  the  present  Greeks  devoted?  7.  What 
t>f  the  itileriur  of  Greece  '.  8.  What  of  the  present  inhabitants  of  Greece?  What  of  ruiru 
of  temples,  Icel!     9.  What  would  these  ruins  prove? 


90  SCHOOL  HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  L.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Extent  of  Greece.    First  Settlement  of  the  Country. 

1.  Though  Greece  is  one  of  the  most  famous  countries  on  the  face 
of  the  globe,  it  is  not  very  extensive;  its  boundaries  varied  at  differ- 
ent times,  but  it  never  exceeded  four  hundred  miles  in  length,  and 
about  one  hundred  and  fifty  in  width.  That  portion  to  which  the 
name  of  Greece  is  properly  applied,  was  not  much  larger  than  the 
State  of  New  York. 

2.  I  must  now  carry  you  back  to  the  first  settlement  of  this  coun- 
try, which  took  place  more  than  four  thousand  years  ago.  When 
the  human  race  was  scattered  from  the  tower  of  Babel,  it  is  supposed 
that  the  family  of  Japheth,  Noah's  youngest  son,  travelled  from  Asia 
into  Europe.  As  Greece  lay  nearer  to  the  land  of  Shinar  than  the 
other  parts  of  Europe,  it  was  probably  settled  first. 

3.  The  Greeks  themselves  believed  that  their  ancestors  had  sprung 
up  out  of  the  earth.  The  first  inhabitants  were  mere  savages.  They 
dwelt  in  wretched  huts,  and  fed  on  acorns.  Their  garments  were  the 
skins  of  wild  beasts. 

4.  There  are  so  many  fables  about  the  early  history  of  Greece,  that 
I  shall  pass  very  briefly  over  the  first  three  or  four  centuries.  Ce- 
crops,  an  Egyptian,  seems  to  have  been  the  first  who  introduced 
civilization  among  the  Greeks.  He  came  with  a  number  of  his  coun- 
trymen, and  founded  the  city  of  Athens.  This  event  took  place  about 
fifteen  hundred  and  fifty-six  years  before  the  Christian  era. 

5.  Thirty  or  forty  years  afterwards,  Cadmus  came  from  Phoenicia 
and  built  the  city  of  Thebes.  He  was  one  of  the  greatest  benefac- 
tors of  the  Greeks,  for  he  taught  them  the  cultivation  of  the  vine,  the 
manufacture  of  metals,  and  the  use  of  the  alphabet. 

6.  Other  parts  of  Greece  were  also  settled  by  colonies  from  foreign 
nations.  The  country  then  consisted  of  a  number  of  small  kingdoms, 
which  had  little  or  no  connection  with  one  anothor.  These  were  fre- 
quently at  war  among  themselves. 

7.  Twelve  of  these  little  kingdoms,  or  states,  soon  united  them- 
selves into  a  confederacy.  Their  deputies  held  a  meeting  twice  a 
year,  in  order  to  consult  respecting  the  welfare  of  the  country.  They 
were  called  the  council  of  the  Amphyctions.  By  means  of  this  coun- 
cil, the  different  states  were  kept  at  peace  with  each  other,  and  were 
united  against  foreign  enemies. 

Ch.  L. — 1.  What  of  the  extent  of  Greece  ?  Its  greatest  length?  Width?  2.  How 
long  since  Greece  was  first  settled?  Who  are  supposed  to  have  been  the  first  inhabitants 
of  Greece  ?  In  which  direction  was  Greece  from  the  land  of  Shinar  ?  From  Egypt  ? 
3.  What  did  the  Greeks  believe  of  Hieir  ancestors?  What  of  the  first  inhabitants  of 
Greece  ?  4.  Who  first  introduced  civilization  among  the  Greeks  ?  What  city  was  founded 
by  Cecrops  ?  When  did  this  take  place  ?  In  what  part  of  Greece  was  Athens  ?  Doe* 
Alliens  still  exist?  Ans.  Yes ;  but  the  modern  town  is  very  mean,  compared  with  ancient 
Athens.  The  ruins  around  it  are  very  splendid  5.  What  of  Cadmus?  In  which  directhi* 
u-as  Thebes  from  Athens?  N.  li.  You  must  remember  that  there  was  a  famous  city  in 
Egypt  named  Thebes  b'.  How  were  other  parts  of  Greece  settled?  What  of  Greece  at 
this  time  !  7.  What  did  twelve  of  the  Grecian  states  do  ?  What  of  the  Ainpbyctionic  coun 
oil  ?   What  etfect  had  this  council  ? 


GREECE.  91 

8.  One  of  the  famous  events  of  Grecian  history  was  the  Argonautic 
expedition.  It  is  said  that  a  prince  named  Jason,  with  a  compaay  of 
his  friends,  sailed  to  Colchis,  which  lay  eastward  of  the  Black  Sea. 
Their  object  was  to  find  a  wonderful  ram  with  a  fleece  of  gold;  but 
the  whole  story  is  supposed  by  some  to  be  a  fable. 

9.  The  Trojan  war  was  still  more  famous  than  the  expedition,  in 
search  of  the  golden  fleece.  Troy  was  a  large  city  on  the  Asiatic 
side  of  the  Hellespont,  which  is  now  called  the  Dardanelles.  Paris, 
the  son  of  the  Trojan  king,  had  stolen  away  the  wife  of  Menelaus,  a 
Greek  prince. 

10.  All  the  Grecian  kings  combined  together  to  punish  this  offence. 
They  sailed  to  Troy  in  twelve  hundred  vessels,  and  took  the  city  after 
a  seige  of  ten  years.  This  event  is  supposed  to  have  occurred  eleveii 
hundred  and  ninety-three  years  before  the  Christian  era. 

11.  But  most  historians  are  of  opinion  that  the  Trojan  war  was  a 
much  less  important  affair  than  Homer  has  represented  it  to  be. 
Poets  do  not  always  tell  the  truth;  and  Homer  was  the  father  and 
chief  of  poets.  He  was  a  blind  old  man  and  used  to  wander  about 
the  country,  reciting  his  verses. 


CHAPTER  LI.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Grecian  haw  givers. 

1 .  One  of  the  principal  states  of  Greece  was  called  Sparta  or  Lace- 
daemon.  It  was  founded  byLelex,  1516,  B.  C.  It  received  a  code  of 
laws  from  Lycurgus,  who  lived  nearly  nine  centuries  before  Christ. 
He  was  strict  and  severe,  but  wise  and  upright. 

2.  Lycurgus  ordered  that  all  the  Spartans  should  eat  together  at 
public  tables.  The  reason  of  this  law  was,  that  the  rich  citizens 
might  not  feast  luxuriously  at  home,  but  that  rich  and  poor  should 
fare  alike.  As  for  the  children,  they  were  not  allowed  any  thing  to 
eat,  unless  they  could  steal  it.  This  wicked  custom  was  adopted 
with  the  idea  that  it  would  train  up  the  young  Spartans  to  be  cun- 
ning in  war. 

3.  In  order  that  the  people  might  not  be  avaricious,  Lycurgus  for- 
bade any  gold  or  silver  to  be  coined  into  money.  AH  the  money  was 
made  of  iron.  It  could  not  very  easily  be  carried  in  the  pocket,  for  a 
Spartan  dollar  weighed  as  much  as  fifty  pounds. 

4.  The  children  were  all  brought  up  at  the  public  expense.  They 
were  allowed  to  stand  near  the  dinner-tables  and  listen  to  the  wise 
conversation  of  their  parents.  The  Spartans  were  very  anxious  that 
their  children  should  abhor  drunkenness. 


8.  What  of  the  Argonautic  expedition?  9.  What  of  the  Tmjnn  war  ?  11.  WliatofHo- 
mer?  Ch.  LI. —  1.  What  of  Sparta?  Laws?  When  did  Lycurgus  live  ?  What  was  his  charac- 
ter J  2.  Why  did  Lycurgus  wish  the  .Spartans  to  eat  in  public?  What  of  the  children  ? 
Why  were  they  encouraged  to  steal  ?  3.  What  laws  were  mad*  respecting  ineney  ?  What 
of  a  Spartan  dollar  ?     J.   How  were  children  brought  up  ? 


92  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

5.  They  showed  them  the  disgusting-  effects  of  this  pernicious  vice, 
by  causing-  their  slaves  to  drink  intoxicating  liquors.  When  the  chil- 
dren had  witnessed  the  ridiculous  conduct  of  the  drunken  slaves,  they 
were  careful  never  to  reduce  themselves  to  so  degraded  a  condition. 

6.  When  Lycurgus  had  completed  his  code  of  laws,  he  left  Sparta. 
Previous  to  his  departure,  he  made  the  people  swear  that  they  would 
violate  none  of  the  laws  till  he  should  return.  But  he  was  resolved 
never  to  return. 

7.  He  committed  suicide  by  starving  himself  to  death ;  and  his 
ashes  were  thrown  into  the  sea  by  his  command,  so  that  the  Spar- 
tans might  not  bring  back  his  dead  body.  Thus,  as  Lycurgus  never 
could  return,  the  Spartans  were  bound  by  their  oath  to  keep  his  laws 
for  ever. 

8.  They  did  keep  them  during  five  hundred  years ;  and,  all  that 
time,  the  Spartans  were  a  brave,  patriotic,  and  powerful  people. 
Many  of  their  customs,  however,  belonged  rather  to  a  savage  than  a 
civilized  nation. 

9.  Athens,  had  two  celebrated  lawgivers,  Draco  and  Solon.  The 
laws  of  Draco  were  so  extremely  severe  that  they  were  said  to  be 
written  with  blood,  instead  of  ink.  He  punished  even  the  smallest 
offences  with  death.     His  code  was  soon  abolished. 

10.  Solon's  laws  were  much  milder.  Almost  all  of  them  were  wise 
and  good  laws,  and  would  have  been  advantageous  to  the  people. 
But  the  Athenians  had  so  much  fickleness  and  levity,  that  they  were 
continually  proposing  alterations  in  them. 

11.  Athens  was  at  this  time  a  republic;  which  is,  you  know,  a 
government  carried  on  by  persons  chosen  by  the  people ;  but  soon 
after  Solon  had  made  his  laws,  the  supreme  power  was  usurped  by 
Pisistratus,  an  ambitious  citizen.  He  and  his  sons  ruled  Athens  fifty 
years. 


CHAPTER  LII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED, 

War  with  Persia. 

1.  About  five  centuries  before  the  Christian  era,  Darius,  king  of 
Persia,  made  war  against  Greece.  His  generals  invaded  the  country 
with  a  fleet  of  six  hundred  vessels,  and  half  a  million  of  men.  There 
were  scarcely  any  troops  to  oppose  them,  except  ten  thousand  Athe- 
nians. 

2.  Darius  felt  so  certain  of  conquering  Greece,  that  he  had  sent 
great  quantities  of  marble  with  his  army.    He  intended  that  it  should 

5.  How  were  they  taught  to  abhor  drunkenness  ?  C.  What  did  Lycurgus  make  the  Spar- 
tans swear  before  he  went  away?  7.  What  was  the  fate  of  the  Spartan  lawgiver? 
8.  How  long  did  the  Spartans  keep  his  laws  ?  9.  What  of  Draco  and  Solon  ?  The  laws  of 
Draco?  10.  What  of  Solon's  laws  ?  The  Athenians  ?  11.  What  was  the  government  of 
Athens?  Who  usurped  the  supreme  power?  What  of  the  government  of  Athens  I'or  fifty 
years?  Ch.  LIT. — 1.  When  did  Darius  make  war  against  Greece?  What  of  the  Persian 
force  ?    The  Athenian?     '2.  What  of  marble  ?    What  did  Darius  command  ? 


EUROPE.  93 

be  carved  into  pillars  and  triumphal  arches,  and  other  trophies  of  vic- 
tory. He  had  also  commanded  his  generals  to  send  all  the  Athenians 
to  Persia  in  chains. 

3.  The  Athenian  general  was  named  Miltiades.  He  led  his  little 
army  against  the  immense  host  of  the  Persians,  and  encountered  them 
at  Marathon.  This  was  a  small  town  on  the  seashore,  about  fifteen 
miles  northeast  of  Athens. 

4.  While  their  countrymen  were  fighting,  the  aged  people,  the 
women,  and  children  remained  at  Athens  in  the  utmost  anxiety.  If 
Miltiades  were  to  lose  the  battle,  they  knew  that  the  Persians  would 
chase  his  routed  army  into  the  city,  and  burn  it  to  ashes. 

5.  Suddenly  a  soldier,  covered  with  blood,  ran  into  the  market- 
place of  the  city.  He  was  sorely  wounded ;  but  he  had  come  all  the 
way  from  the  army  to  bring  the  news.  He  was  ghastly  pale,  and 
the  people  feared  that  the  Persians  had  won  the  day,  and  that  the 
soldier  was  a  fugitive. 

6.  They  gathered  round  him,  eagerly  asking  about  Miltiades  and 
the  army.  The  soldier  leaned  heavily  upon  his  spear.  He  seemed 
too  much  exhausted  to  give  utterance  to  the  news  he  had  brought. 

7.  But,  exerting  all  his  strength,  he  cried  out,  "  Rejoice  my  coun- 
trymen !  The  victory  is  ours  !"  And,  with  that  exulting  shout,  he  fell 
down  dead. 

S.  The  Athenians  showed  themselves  ungrateful  to  the  brave  Mil- 
tiades. All  that  he  demanded  as  a  reward  for  rescuing  his  native 
land  from  slavery,  was  a  crown  of  olive  leaves,  which  was  esteemed 
a  mark  of  honor  among  the  Greeks.  But  they  refused  to  give  him 
one;  and  he  was  afterwards  condemned,  on  some  frivolous  pretence, 
to  pay  a  fine  of  fifty  talents.  As  Miltiades  had  not  so  much  money  in 
the  world,  he  perished  in  prison. 

9.  After  the  battle  of  Marathon,  the  Persians  were  driven  out  of 
Greece,  and  Darius  died  while  he  was  preparing  to  invade  the  coun- 
try again.  His  son  Xerxes  renewed  the  war.  In  the  history  of  Per- 
sia, I  have  already  told  of  the  invasion  of  Greece  by  Xerxes  with  two 
millions  of  men,  and  of  the  misfortunes  which  befell  him  there. 


CHAPTER  LIII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Affairs  of  Athens. 

1.  After  the  Persian  war,  Cimon,  Aristides,  and  Pericles  were  the 
three  principal  men  of  Athens.  Pericles  at  length  became  the  chief 
person  in  the  republic.  Athens  was  never  more  flourishing  than 
while  he  was  at  the  head  of  the  government. 

2.  Who  was  the  Athenian  general  ?  Where  was  Marathon  ?  4.  What  of  those  who  re- 
mained at  Athens?  5.  What  messenger  was  sent  from  Marathon  ?  Which  way  is  Mara- 
thon from  Athens  ?  From  Sparta  ?  7.  What  news  did  the  messenger  bring?  8.  How  did 
the  Atheniaiu  treat  Miltiades?  His  fate  ?  0.  What  of  the  Persians  after  the  battle  of 
Marathon?  What  of  Darius?  Xerxes?  What  may  you  read  in  the  history  of  Persia? 
Ch.  LIII. — 1.  Who  were  the  three  principal  men  of  Athens?     What  of  Pericles? 


94  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

2.  He  adorned  the  city  with  magnificent  edifices  &vd  rendered  it 
famous  for  learning,  poetry,  and  beautiful  works  of  art,  such  as  tem- 
ples, statues,  and  paintings.  But  the  Athenians  were  fickle,  and  gen- 
erally ungrateful  to  their  public  benefactors;  and  they  sometimes  ill 
treated  Pericles. 

3.  In  the  latter  part  of  his  administration,  a  terrible  plague  broke 
out  in  Athens.  Many  of  the  citizens  fell  down  and  died,  while  pass- 
ing through  the  streets.    Dead  bodies  lay  in  heaps,  one  upon  another 

4.  The  illustrious  Pericles  was  one  of  the  victims  of  this  pestilence 
"When  he  lay  at  the  point  of  death,  his  friends-  praised  him  for  the 
glorious  deeds  which  he  had  achieved.  "  It  is  my  greatest  glory," 
replied  Pericles,  "  that  none  of  my  acts  have  caused  a  citizen  of 
Athens  to  put  on  mourning." 

5.  Three  years  before  the  death  of  Pericles,  a  Avar  had  commenced 
between  Athens  and  Sparta.  These  were  now  the  two  principal 
states  of  Greece,  and  they  had  become  jealous  of  each  other's  great- 
ness. A  fierce  war  followed,  in  which  all  the  states  of  that  part  of 
Greece  called  Peloponnesus  were  engaged.  This  bloody  strife  lasted 
twenty-eight  years. 

6.  In  the  course  of  this  war,  Alcibiades  made  a  conspicuous  figure 
among  the  Athenians.  He  was  the  handsomest  and  most  agreeable 
man  in  Athens.  At  one  period  he  was  greatly  beloved  by  the  people, 
and  possessed  almost  unlimited  power.  But  he  was  ambitious  and 
destitute  of  principle. 

7.  He  was  the  cause  of  much  trouble,  not  only  in  his  native  city, 
but  all  over  Greece.  At  last,  when  he  had  lost  the  good-will  of 
every-body,  he  retired  to  a  small  village  in  Phrygia,  in  Asia  Minor, 
and  dwelt  there  with  a  woman  named  Timandra. 

8.  His  enemies  sent  a  party  of  assassins  to  murder  him.  These  set 
fire  to  the  house  in  which  he  lived.  Alcibiades  was  a  brave  man, 
and  he  rushed  out,  sword  in  hand,  to  fight  the  assassins.  But  they 
stood  at  a  distance,  and  pierced  him  through  with  javelins.  They 
then  went  away,  leaving  Timandra 'to  bury  him. 

9.  The  Peloponnesian  war  brought  great  misfortunes  upon  the 
Athenians.  The  Spartans  conquered  them,  and  burnt  the  city ;  and 
while  this  work  of  destruction  was  going  forward,  the  victors  caused 
gay  tunes  of  music  to  be  played. 

10.  The  Athenians  were  now  placed  under  the  government  of 
thirty  Spartan  captains.  These  were  called  the  Thirty  Tyrants  of 
Athens ;  but  they  held  their  power  only  three  years.  Thrasybulus, 
a  patriotic  Athenian,  then  incited  his  countrymen  to  regain  their 
freedom. 

11.  The  thirty  tyrants  were  expelled;  and  Thrasybulus  was  re- 

2.  What  did  he  do  for  Athene?  What  was  the  general  character  of  the  Athenians? 
8.  What  of  the  plague  ?  4.  What  did  Pericles  say  on  his  death-bed  ?  5.  What  was  begun 
three  years  before  the  death  of  Pericles  ?  What  of  Athens  and  Sparta  ?  How  long  did  the 
Peloponnesian  war  last  ?  What  part  of  Greece  was  called  Peloponnesus?  What  states 
were  included  in  the  Peloponnesian?  Ans.  Arcadia,  Laconia,  Messenia,  Elis,  Argolis, 
Achaia,  Sicyon,  and  Corinth.  6.  What  of  Alcibiades  ?  7.  What  happened  to  him  ? 
8.  How  did  he  die  ?  9.  What  of  the  Peloponnesian  war  ?  Sparta  ?  10.  What  of  the  thirty 
tyrants?  Thrasybulus?  11.  How  was  he  rewarded  for  expelling  the  thirty  tyrants' 
What  took  place  403  B.  C.  ? 


GREECE. 


95 


warded  with  a  wreath  made  of  two  twigs  of  an  olive  tree,  which,  as 
I  have  before  said,  was  esteemed  a  great  mark  of  honor.  Athens  again 
became  prosperous,  and  its  former  government  was  restored  in  the 
year  403  before  the  Christian  era. 


CHAPTER  LIV.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Beginning  of  the  Theban  War. 


Greek  warriors,  with  spears,  javelins,  shields,  slings,  and  bows  and  arrows. 

1.  Not  long  after  this  period,  Thebes  became  the  most  distinguish- 
ed city  of  Greece.  It  was  the  capital  of  the  kingdom  of  Bceoiia.  A 
war  between  Thebes  and  Sparta  originated  in  the  following  manner. 
Pheebidas,  a  Spartan  general,  had  wrongfully  taken  possession  of 
Cadmaca,  a  fortress  belonging  to  Thebes.  The  Thebans  demanded 
that  it  should  be  given  up  ;  but  the  Spartans  garrisoned  it  strongly, 
and  resolved  to  hold  it  as  their  own. 

2.  A  brave  and  patriotic  younir  man  of  Thebes,  named  Pelopidas, 
contrived  a  scheme  to  get  back  the  fortress.  He  and  eleven  compan- 
ions put  on  their  breastplates,  and  girded  their  swords  around  them, 
but  clothed  themselves  in  women's  garments  over  their  armor.  In 
this  garb,  they  went  to  the  gate  of  Cadmsea,  and  were  admitted. 

Ch.  LIV. — 1.  What  of  Thebes?  In  what  part  of  Greece  was  Bceotia  ?  How  <H<1  tha 
war  between  Thebes  and  Spaita  originate  ■     2.  What  of  Pelopidas  ? 


96  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

3.  The  magistrates  and  Spartan  officers  were  assembled  at  a  splen- 
did festival.  Archias,  the  Spartan  commander,  sat  at  the  head  of  the 
table.  He  and  his  friends  were  wholly  occupied  with  the  enjoyment 
of  the  banquet.  They  took  scarcely  any  notice  when  the  twelve 
figures  in  female  attire  entered  the  hall. 

4.  At  the  moment  when  the  mirth  and  festivity  of  the  Spartans 
was  at  its  height,  the  strangers  tore  off  their  female  garb.  Instead 
of  twelve  women,  there  stood  twelve  young  warriors.  The  light  of 
the  festal  torches  flashed  back  from  their  bright  breastplates.  Their 
naked  swords  were  in  their  hands. 

5.  Pelopidas  and  his  eleven  companions  immediately  attacked  the 
Spartan  banqueters.  Their  surprise  hindered  the  Spartans  from  ma- 
king any  effectual  resistance.  Archias  and  many  others  were  struck 
dead,  almost  before  they  could  rise  from  the  table. 

6.  Thus  the  Thebans  gained  possession  of  the  fortress.  But  Sparta 
immediately  began  a  war  against  Thebes.  Many  of  the  other  states 
of  Greece  lent  their  assistance  to  the  Spartans.  It  appeared  probable 
that  the  Thebpns  would  be  conquered  and  entirely  ruined. 

7.  But  they  had  a  brave  and  skilful  generab„  named  Epaminondas. 
With  only  six  thousand  Thebans,  he  encountered  twenty-five  thou- 
sand Spartans,  commanded  by  Cleombrotus,  their  king.  The  battle 
was  fought  at  Leuctra.  The  Thebans  gained  a  complete  victory,  and 
killed  Cleombrotus  and  fourteen  hundred  of  his  men. 


CHAPTER  LV.-EtfROPE  CONTINUED. 

Sequel  of  the  Theban  War. 

1.  Epaminondas,  the  Theban  general,  was  one  of  the  best  men 
that  lived  in  ancient  times.     His  private  virtues  were  equal  to  his 

Eatriotism  and  valor.     It  is  said  of  him,  that  a  falsehood  was  never 
nown  to  come  from  his  lips ;  one  of  the  highest  praises  that  can  be 
bestowed  on  any  man. 

2.  It  might  be  supposed  that  the  Thebans  would  have  felt  the  ut- 
most gratitude  towards  Epaminondas,  whose  valor  had  saved  his 
country  ;  and  it  is  true  that  the  most  virtuous  part  of  the  people  hon- 
ored him  according  to  his  merits ;  but  I  am  sorry  to  tell  you  that  a 
great  and  good  man  is  very  apt  to  have  enemies. 

3.  His  virtues  and  his  greatness  are  a  reproach  to  the  vicious  and 
Ike  mean,  and  therefore  they  hate  him,  and  seek  to  destroy  him.  So 
it  happened  with  Epaminondas,  and  so  it  has  happened  in  all  ages. 

4.  Epaminondas  had  many  enemies  among  the  Thebans.  They 
at  first  attempted  to  have  him  sentenced  to  death  because  he  had 

Describe  the  scheme  of  Pelopidas  and  his  companions.  S.  Did  this  hold  undertaking  suc- 
ceed? 6.  What  state  made  war  upon  Thebes  ?  Other  states  ?  7.  What  of  Epaminondas' 
His  army?  The  Spartan  force?  Who  was  the  Sparlan  leader?  Did  the  Thebans  gain  the 
victory?  Ch.  LV. — 1.  Character  of  Epaminondas  ?  2.  Were  the  Thebans  grateful  to 
hiin  ?  S.  Why  do  the  wicked  hate  a  great  and  good  man  ?  4.  What  did  the  ThebaD»alr 
tempt  ? 


GREECE.  07 

kept  the  command  of  the  army  longer  than  the  law  permitted.  But 
as  his  only  motive  had  been  to  preserve  Thebes  from  ruin,  his  judges 
concluded  to  let  him  live. 

5.  Nevertheless,  in  order  to  disgrace  him  as  much  as  possible,  he 
was  appointed  to  clean  the  streets  of  Thebes.  Epaminondas  was 
not  mortified;  for  he  knew  that  the  Thebans  might  disgrace  them- 
selves by  such  ingratitude,  but  could  not  disgrace  him.  He  therefore 
set  about  discharging  the  duties  of  his  new  office,  and  this  great  and 
victorious  general  Avas  accordingly  seen  cleaning  away  the  filth  from 
the  streets. 

6.  But  the  war  was  not  yet  at  an  end;  and  the  Thebans  soon 
found  that  they  could  not  do  without  Epaminondas.     They  made 

■  him  throw  away  his  broom,  and  take  the  sword  again.  He  was 
placed  at  the  head  of  the  army,  with  greater  power  than  he  had  pos- 
sessed before. 

7.  So  long  as  Epaminondas  was  their  general,  the  Thebans  were 
the  most  powerful  people  of  Greece.  The  last  victory  that  he  gained 
was  at  Mantinea.  But  it  cost  the  Thebans  dear;  for  while  Epami- 
nondas was  fighting  in  the  thickest  of  the  battle,  a  Spartan  soldier 
thrust  a  javelin  into  his  breast. 

S.  The  Thebans  and  Spartans  fought  around  the  wounded  Epami- 
nondas, the  latter  wishing  to  put  an  end  to  his  life,  and  the  former  to 
bear  him  from  the  field.  The  Spartans  were  driven  back,  and  some 
of  his  soldiers  carried  Epaminondas  in  their  arms  to  his  tent. 

9.  The  javelin  remained  sticking  in  the  wound,  for  the  surgeons 
declared  that  he  would  die  the  moment  that  it  should  be  drawn  out. 
Epaminondas  lay  in  great  pain ;  but  he  thought  little  of  his  own 
agony,  and  was  anxious  only  for  the  success  of  his  countrymen. 

10.  At  last  a  messenger  came  from  the  battle-field,  and  told  him 
that  the  Spartans  were  flying,  and  that  Thebes  had  won  a  glorious 
victory.  "  Then  all  is  well !"  said  Epaminondas.  As  he  spoke,  he 
drew  the  javelin  out  of  his  wound,  and  instantly  expired. 

11.  This  event  took  place  in  the  year  363  before  the  Christian  era. 
After  the  death  of  Epaminondas,  the  Thebans  were  no  longer  form- 
idable to  the  rest  of  the  Greeks. 


CHAPTER  LVI.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Grecian  Religion  or  Mythology. 

1.  My  history  has  now  readied  the  period  when  the  glory  of 
Greece  was  at  its  height ;  and  I  shall  soon  have  to  speak  of  its  de- 
cline. Before  doing  so,  I  think  it  proper  to  give  a  slight  account  of 
the  religion  of  the  Greeks,  and  some  other  interesting  particulars. 

5.  How  dill  they  attempt  to  disgrace  Epaminondas  i  Was  he  mortified  ?  What  did 
he  do?  .6.  What  did  the  Thebans  find  .'  What  did  they  do  ?  7.  What  of  Thebes  while 
Epaminondas  was  general  ?  What  was  his  last  victory  r  How  was  he  wounded  ■  H.  By 
whom  was  he  carried  from  the  field  ?  What  of  the  javelin  ?  9.  Describe  the  death  ofEpa- 
Dtini  n<bs.  10.  When  did  this  happen?  What  of  the  Thebans  after  the  death  of  Epami 
Boodaii .;     LVI.— 1.   At  what  period  was  the  jrlory  of  Greece  at  its  height  ? 

9 


98 


SCHOOL    HISTORY, 


2.  The  Greeks  believed  that  there  were  three  classes  of  deities,  the 
Celestial,  the  Marine,  and  the  Infernal.  The  first,  as  they  fancied, 
dwelt  in  the  sky,  the  second  in  the  sea,  and  the  third  in  the  dreary  re- 
gions under  the  earth.  Besides  these,  there  were  inferior  kinds  of 
deities,  who  haunted  the  woods,  or  lived  in  fountains  and  streams. 


Jlpotlo. 


Jupiter. 


3.  The  deities  whose  home  was  in  the  sky,  were  Jupiter,  Apollo, 
Mars,  Mercury,  Bacchus,  Vulcan,  Juno,  Minerva,  Venus,  Diana, 
Ceres,  and  Vesta.  The  greatest  of  all  the  gods  was  Jupiter.  "When 
it  thundered  and  lightened,  the  Greeks  supposed  that  Jupiter  was 
angry,  and  was  flinging  his  thunderbolts  about. 

4.  The  Olympic  games  were  instituted  by  the  Greeks,  in  honor  of 
Jupiter.  These  games  were  celebrated  every  four  years.  They  con- 
sisted of  races  on  foot  and  on  horseback,  and  in  chariots,  and  of  leap- 
ing, wrestling,  and  boxing.  It  was  considered  a  very  great  honor  for 
a  person  to  gain  a  prize  at  the  Olympic  games. 

5.  Apollo  was  the  son  of  Jupiter,  He  was  supposed  to  be  the 
driver  of  the  sun,  which  had  four  horses  harnessed  to  it,  and  went 
round  the  world  every  day.  It  was  pretty  much  like  a  modem 
stagecoach,  except  that  it  carried  no  passengers. 

6.  Besides  being  the  coachman  of  the  sun,  Apollo  was  likewise  the 
god  of  music  and  poetry,  and  of  medicine,  and  all  the  fine  arts.  He 
also  presided  over  the  famous  oracle  at  Delphos,  whither  people  used 
to  come  from  all  parts  of  the  world  to  find  out  the  events  of  futurity. 

7.  Mars  was  the  god  of  war,  and  Mercury  the  god  of  thieves,  and 
Bacchus  the  god  of  drunkards,  and  Vulcan  the  god  of  blacksmiths. 
Vulcan  seems  to  have  been  one  of  the  best  and  most  useful  of  the 

2.  In  what  deities  did  the  Greeks  believe  ?  What  were  the  three  classes?  Where  did 
each  of  them  dwell  ?  What  of  inferior  deities?  3  Who  were  the  celestial  deities?  What 
of  Jupiter?  4.  What  of  the  Olympic  games  ?  What  of  Apollo?  His  chariot  ?  6.  What 
more  cao  you  tell  of  Apollo?    7.  What  of  Mars?  Mercury  ?  Bacchus?  Vulcan. 


GREECE, 


99 


heathen  deities,  for  he  was  an  excellent  blacksmith,  and  worked  hard 
at  his  anvil. 

8.  Venus  was  the  goddess  of  beauty.  Her  statues  were  made  in 
the  form  of  a  beautiful  woman.  She  had  a  son  named  Cupid,  who 
was  a  mischievious  little  deity,  and  used  to  shoot  at  people  with  a 
bow  and  arrow. 

9.  Neptune  was  the  chief  of  the  marine  deities.  It  was  supposed 
diat  he  had  a  huge  scallop-shell  for  a  chariot,  and  that  his  horses  had 


Mars.  Mercury. 

the  tails  of  fishes.    "Whenever  he  rode  over  the  waves,  a  tribe  of  sea* 

monsters  surrounded  his  chariot. 


Vulcan. 


8.  What  of  Venu»?    Cupid  ?    9.  What  of  Neptune  ?    Where  did  he  dwell?    How  u  ha 
represented  ? 


100  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

10.  Pluto  was  the  deity  who  presided  in  the  infernal  regions.  He 
used  to  sit  on  a  throne  of  brimstone,  looking  very  stern  and  awful. 
In  one  hand  he  held  a  sceptre,  and  in  the  other  two  keys.  Besides 
these  gods,  the  Greeks  believed  in  heroes,  who  were  half  gods  and 
half  men.  Of  these,  Hercules  was  very  famous  for  his  wonderful 
feats  of  strength. 

11.  Unless  I  were  to  write  a  large  book  on  this  one  subject,  it 
would  be  impossible  for  me  to  tell  you  all  about  the  fanciful  gods  of 


Hercules.  Neptune. 

ancient  Greece,  and  the  strange,  foolish  things  they  are  said  to  have 
done  by  the  Greek  poets.  The  only  use  of  such  a  book  would  be,  to 
show  how  necessary  it  was  that  the  true  God  should  reveal  himself 
•  to  men,  since  they  could  contrive  no  better  religion  than  these  absurd, 
though  sometimes  amusing  fables. 

12.  Ridiculous  as  their  deities  were,  the  Greeks  honored  them  with 
magnificent  temples.  No  other  edifices  ever  built  by  mortal  hands 
have  been  so  beautiful.  Some  of  the  churches  in  our  own  country 
are  now  built  on  the  plan  of  the  old  Grecian  temples. 

13.  The  Grecian  sculptors  carved  marble  statues  of  their  deities. 
These  images  were  so  grand,  and  beautiful,  and  dignified,  that  it 
seems  as  if  the  artists  must  have  seen  such  heavenly  creatures  some- 
where, or  else  they  never  could  have  carved  their  likenesses. 

10.  Who  was  Pluto?  Where  did  he  dwell  ?  What  of  him?  12.  How  did  the  Greeka 
honor  their  false  gods?  What  of  Temples?  13.  What  can  you  say  of  the  Gieciia 
fUtuei  ? 


EUROPE.  101 

CHAPTER  LVII.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Grecian  Philosophers. 

1.  The  Greek  philosophers  were  men  who  pretended  to  be  wiser 
than  mankind  in  general.  There  were  a  great  many  of  them,  who 
lived  in  various  ages.  I  shall  speak  of  some  of  the  most  remarkable, 
in  this  and  the  following  chapters. 

2.  The  philosopher  Thales  was  born  between  six  and  seven  hun- 
dred years  before  the  Christian  era.  In  his  time  there  were  seven 
philosophers,  who  were  called  the  Seven  Wise  men  of  Greece ;  and 
Thales  was  considered  the  wisest  of  them  all. 

3.  One  night,  while  this  great  philosopher  was  taking  a  walk,  he 
looked  upward  to  contemplate  the  stars.  Being  much  interested  in 
this  occupation,  he  strayed  out  of  his  path,  and  tumbled  into  a  ditch. 
An  old  woman  who  lived  in  his  family  ran  and  helped  him  out,  all 
covered  with  mud.  "  For  the  future,  Thales,"  said  she,  "I  advise 
you  not  to  have  your  head  among  the  stars,  while  your  feet  are  on 
the  earth  !"  Some  people  think  that  the  old  woman  was  the  wiser 
philosopher  of  the  two. 

4.  Another  philosopher  was  named  Pittacus.  He  was  the  first 
temperance  man  on  record  ;  for,  though  there  were  many  sorts  of  de- 
licious wines  in  his  country,  he  never  drank  any  thing  but  water. 

5.  The  philosopher  Bias  lived  in  the  year  617  B.  C.  Some  fisher- 
men once  found  a  golden  vase  in  the  belly  of  a  large  fish.  On  the 
vase  were  engraved  these  Avords, — "  To  the  wisest."  It  was  there- 
fore sent  to  Bias,  who  was  thought  to  be  at  least  as  wise  as  anybody. 

6.  But  Bias  did  not  care  for  gold  or  riches.  When  his  native  city 
was  taken  by  the  enemy,  all  the  other  inhabitants  endeavored  to  hide 
their  most  valuable  property.  Bias  alone  gave  himself  no  trouble. 
"Riches  are  but  playthings,"  said  he.  "  My  only  real  treasures  are 
my  own  thoughts." 

7.  Epimenides  was  a  very  wonderful  philosopher.  My  readers 
must  not  put  too  much  faith  in  the  story  which  I  am  going  to  tell 
them.  It  is  as  follows  : — One  day,  when  Epimenides  was  young,  his 
father  sent  him  in  search  of  a  sheep  that  was  lost.  After  rinding  the 
sheep,  Epimenides  entered  a  cave  by  the  wayside,  and  sat  down,  for 
he  was  tired,  and  the  sun  was  very  hot.  In  this  cave  he  fell  asleep, 
and  slept  a  good  deal  longer  than  he  intended. 

8.  It  was  no  less  than  fifty-seven  years  before  he  awoke.  When 
he  closed  his  eyes  he  was  a  young  man,  but  he  was  old  and  gray 
when  he  opened  them  again.  He  left  the  cave  and  went  back  to  the 
town  where  he  had  formerly  lived. 

9.  But  his  father  was  long  ago  dead  ;  his  brother,  who  had  been  a 


Ch.  LVII. — 1.  Who  were  tlie  Greek  philosophers?  2.  Who  was  Thales?  Where 
was  he  horn  ?  What  of  Ihe  seven  wise  men?  How  was  Thales  considered  ?  3.  Relate 
hn  anecdote  of  him.  4.  What  of  Pittacus?  5.  When  did  Bins  live  ?  Teil  (he  story  of  the 
rase.    C.  What  did  Bias  thiuk  of  richi.ii :    7.  Tell  the  story  of  Epimenides. 

:,  * 


102  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

child  when  he  went  away,  was  an  old  man  now ;  and  the  town  was 
full  of  houses  and  people  that  he  had  never  seen  before.  These 
were  certainly  very  wonderful  changes,  considering  that  they  had  all 
happened  while  Epimenides  was  taking  a  nap. 


CHAPTER  LVIII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Grecian  Philosophers  continued. 

1.  The  philosopher  Pythagoras  believed  that  when  people  died, 
their  souls  migrated  into  the  bodies  of  animals  or  birds.  He  affirmed 
that  his  own  soul  bad  once  lived  in  the  body  of  a  peacock. 

2.  Heraclitus  of  Ephesus  was  called  the  dark  philosopher,  because 
all  his  sayings  were  like  riddles.  He  thought  that  nothing  was  wis- 
dom which  could  be  understood  by  common  people. 

3.  This  wise  man  considered  the  world  as  such  a  wretched  place, 
that  he  never  could  look  at  anybody  without  shedding  tears.  And  at 
last  he  retired  to  a  cave  among  the  mountains,  where  he  lived  on 
herbs  and  roots,  and  was  as  miserable  as  his  heart  could  wish. 

4.  Democritus,  who  lived  not  long  after  Heraclitus,  was  quite  a 
different  sort  of  philosopher.  Instead  of  shedding  tears,  he  laughed 
so  continually  that  his  townsmen  thought  him  mad.  And,  to  say  the 
truth,  I  think  so  too. 

5.  The  philosopher  Anaxagoras  believed  that  the  sky  was  made  of 
stones,  and  that  the  sun  was  a  great  mass  of  red-hot  iron.  This  may 
seem  very  strange ;  but  in  these  ancient  times  the  people  did  not 
know  the  shape  of  the  earth. 

6.  The  philosopher  Empedocles  went  and  lived  near  Mount  iEtna, 
in  Sicily.  He  was  a  man  of  very  grave  and  majestic  appearance,  and 
everybody  knew  him,  because  he  used  to  wear  a  crown  of  laurel  on 
his  bead.  People  generally  acknowledged  him  to  be  a  very  wise 
man;  but,  not  content  with  this,  he  wanted  to  be  thought  a  god. 

7.  One  day,  after  he  had  prepared  a  great  festival,  Empedocles  dis- 
appeared, and  was  never  seen  again.  The  people  took  it  for  granted 
that  he  had  ascended  to  heaven.  But  shortly  afterwards,  there  was 
an  eruption  of  Mount  iEtna,  and  an  old  shoe  was  thrown  out  of  the 
crater.  On  examination,  it  was  found  out  that  this  shoe  had  belong- 
ed to  Empedocles.  It  was  now  easy  to  guess  at  the  fate  of  the  foolish 
old  man.  He  had  thrown  himself  into  the  crater  of  the  blazing  vol- 
cano, in  order  that  people  might  think  him  a  god  and  that  he  had 
gone  to  heaven. 

8.  Socrates  was  one  of  the  wisest  and  best  philosophers  of  Greece. 
Indeed  he  was  so  wise  and  good,  that  the  profligate  Athenians  could 
not  suffer  him  to  live.    They  therefore  compelled  him  to  drink  poison. 

Ch.LVIII.—I.  What  did  Pythagoras  believe?  2.  What  of  Heraclitus  ?  4.  What  of  De 
Uiocritus  ?  How  did  he  differ  from  Heraclitus?  5.  What  did  Anaxagoras  believe.' 
6  Where  did  Empedocles  live  ?  What  did  he  wish  to  be  thought  ?  7.  What  means  did  ha 
la  ke  to  make  the  people  think  him  a  god  ?     8.  What  of  Socrates  ?   His  death  ? 


EUROPE.  103 

9.  Diogenes  was  the  queerest  philosopher  of  all.  He  was  called 
Diogenes  the  dog, — either  because  he  lived  like  a  dog,  or  because  he 
had  a  currish  habit  of  snarling  at  everybody. 

10.  His  doctrine  was,  that  the  fewer  enjoyments  a  man  had,  the 
happier  he  was  likely  to  be.  This  Philosopher  went  about  barefoot, 
dressed  in  very  shabby  clothes,  and  carrying  a  bag,  a  jug,  and  a  staff. 
He  afterwards  got  a  great  tub,  which  he  used  to  lug  about  with  him 
all  day  long,  and  sleep  in  it  at  night. 

11.  One  day,  Alexander  the  Great  came  to  see  Diogenes,  and  found 
him  mending  his  tub.  It  happened  that  Alexander  stood  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  shade  Diogenes  from  the  sun,  and  he  felt  cold.  "  Dio- 
genes," said  Alexander,  "  you  must  have  a  very  hard  time  of  it,  living 
in  a  tub.  Can  I  do  anything  to  better  your  condition?  "  "  Nothing, 
except  to  get  out  of  my  sunshine,"  replied  Diogenes,  who  disdained 
to  accept  any  other  favor  from  the  greatest  monarch  in  the  world. 


CHAPTER  LIX.  EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Something  more  about  Philosophers.     About  the   Greek 

Poets. 

1.  I  could  tell  you  much  more  about  the  Grecian  philosophers, 
but  I  have  not  room.  I  must  not  forget,  however,  to  mention  Plato, 
who  was  born  429  years  B.  C,  and  was  for  eight  years  the  pupil  of 
Socrates. 

2.  This  great  man,  like  many  other  Grecian  philosophers,  was  a 
sort  of  schoolmaster,  and  many  young  men  came  to  be  taught  by 
him.  He  delivered  his  lectures  in  a  grove  near  Athens,  called  Acade- 
mus,  from  which  circumstance  the  word  academy  has  since  been  ap- 
plied to  schools. 

3.  So  great  was  his  reputation,  that  the  first  young  men  from  vari- 
ous parts  of  the  world  came  to  be  his  pupils.  He  had  very  sublime 
ideas  of  religion,  virtue,  and  truth;  and  he  delivered  these  with  so 
much  sweetness  and  eloquence,  that  his  listeners  were  enchanted. 
The  Greeks  spoke  of  him  as  Plato  the  Divine. 

4.  There  were  other  celebrated  philosophers  in  Greece,  but  I  must 
leave  them  now,  and  tell  you  of  the  poets.  Homer,  the  best  poet  of 
ancient  times,  perhaps  the  best  that  ever  lived,  I  have  already  men- 
tioned. When  this  great  man  was  born,  how  he  lived,  or  where  he 
died,  are  matters  of  uncertainty. 

5.  The  general  opinion  is,  that  he  lived  about  the  year  900  B.  C, 
arid  was  a  wandering  minstrel,  who  went  about  from  place  to  place 
reciting  and  singing  his  verses.    The  Iliad  and  Odyssey,  his  two  great 

9.  What  of  Diogenes  ?  IJ  is  doctrine?  ?  How  did  he  live?  11.  Tell  an  anecdote  of 
Diogenes.  C'h.  LIX. —  1. When  was  Plato  borr.  ?  Whose  pupil  was  he  ?  2.  What  else  of 
Plato?  3.  What  of  his  ideas,  and  his  mode  of  expressing  them?  4.  What  of  Homer? 
6.  When  is  it  supposed  Houier  lived  '.     How  did  he  live?     What  of  his  poems? 


104  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

poems,  were  composed  in  separate  parts,  and,  but  for  the  care  of  Ly- 
curgus,  who  had  them  collected,  would  doubtless  have  been  lost. 
They  celebrate  the  actions  of  heroes  and  imaginary  gods,  and  are  full' 
of  the  deepest  interest. 

6.  There  were  a  multitude  of  other  poets  in  Greece,  some  of  whom 
acquired  great  celebrity.  '  Among  these  was  Anacreon,  who  wrote 
about  love;  Pindar,  who  composed  sublime  odes;  and  Theocritus, 
who  sang  about  shepherds  and  shepherdesses,  who  lived  in  the  coun- 
try.    There  were  also  many  poets  who  wrote  pieces  for  the  stage. 

7.  You  already  know  that  the  Greeks  were  in  many  respects  very 
ignorant,  and  entertained  many  absurd  notions.'  They  did  not  know 
that  the  earth  is  a  great  globe  or  ball,  that  it  turns  round  every  day, 
and  that  the  sun,  moon,  and  stars  are  also  great  worlds  moving  about 
in  the  >sky. 

8.  You  would  not  therefore  expect  in  their  poetry  to  find  any  useful 
information  about  geography  or  astronomy.  Yet  they  lived  in  a  beau- 
tiful country,  and  their  mountains,  streams,  and  valleys  were  often 
the  subject  of  their  songs. 

9.  Their  religion,  too,  though  full  of  absurdity,  furnished  materals 
for  the  poets.  They  described  the  gods  and  goddesses  as  dwelling 
upon  the  mountains,  or  skipping  aleng  the  valleys,  or  gliding  amidst 
the  waters.  Thus  every  object  of  nature  derived  a  new  interest 
from  the  vivid  fancy  of  the  poets. 

10.  To  this  day  the  verses  of  these  poets  are  remembered,  and  the 
places  mentioned  by  them  are  often  visited  by  travellers,  who  look 
upon  them  with  emotion,  on  account  of  the  beautiful  fictions  they 
inspired  more  than  two  thousand  years  ago. 


CHAPTER  LX.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  the  Mode  of  Life  among  the  Ancient  Greeks. 

1.  But  we  must  now  leave  poets  and  philosophers,  and  take  a  view 
of  the  private  life  of  the  ancient  Greeks.  The  men  wore  an  inner 
garment  called  a  tunic,  over  which  they  threw  a  mantle;  their  shoes 
or  sandals  were  bound  under  their  feet  with  thongs  or  ropes.  In  an- 
cient times  the  Greeks  went  with  their  heads  uncovered,  but  after- 
wards they  used  hats  which  were  tied  under  the  chin. 
•  2.  The  women  always  covered  their  heads  with  a  veil,  which  came 
down  upon  the  shoulders.  They  wore  in  their  hair  golden  grasshop- 
pers, and  ear-rings  were  suspended  from  their  ears.    The  rest  of  their 

C.  What  of  Anacreon?  Pindar?  Theocritus?  Other  poets?  7.  What  (lid  the  Greeks 
not  know?  8.  What  of  the  poetry  of  the  ancient  Greeks.  9.  What  use  did  the  Grecian 
poets  make  of  their  mythology  ?  What  effect  had  the  poems  of  the  ancient  Greeks  ?  Aro 
the  poems  of  the  ancient  Greeks  still  rememhered  ?  10.  Are  the  places  mentioned  iu 
these  poems  rendered  more  interesting  to  travellers  of  the  present  time  who  visit  them? 
<  H.  LX. — 1.  WThat  did  the  men  wear  among  the  ancient  Greeks  ?  Their  shoes  ?  Head- 
dress ?  3.  Headdress  of  the  women  ?  What  ornaments  did  they  wear?  The  rest  of 
•heir  d'fu  ? 


GREECE. 


105 


dress  consisted  of  a  white  tunic  fastened  with  a  broad  sash,  and  de- 
scending in  folds  down  to  their  heels. 

3.  The  Greeks  usually  made  four  meals  a  day  ;  the  morning  meal, 
which  was  taken  at  the  rising  of  the  sun  ;  the  next  at  mid-day;  the 
afternoon  repast,  and  the  supper,  which  was  the  principal  meal,  as  it 
was  taken  after  the  business  of  the  day.  Below  I  give  you  pictures 
of  some  of  their  vessels  for  water,  which  will  show  you  that  some 
articles  of  their  furniture  were  very  beautiful. 


Vases  used  by  the  Greeks  for  water. 


4.  In  the  early  ages,  the  food  of  the  Greeks  was  the  fruits  of  the 
earth,  and  their  drink  water ;  the  flesh  of  animals  was  introduced  at 
a  later  period.  This  brought  on  the  luxuries  of  the  table,  and  some 
of  the  cities  of  Greece  became  renowned  for  producing  excellent 
cooks.  The  Spartans;  as  we  have  before  mentioned,  ate  at  public 
tables.     Their  chief  food  consisted  of  black  broth. 

5.  The  poor  sometimes  fed  on  grasshoppers,  and  the  extremities  of 
leaves.  In  general,  the  Greeks  were  very  fond  of  flesh.  Their  usual 
drink  was  water,  either  hot  or  cold,  but  most  commonly  the  latter, 
which  was  sometimes  cooled  with  ice.  Wines  were  very  generally 
used,  and  even  perfumed  wines  were  introduced  at  the  tables  of  the 
rich. 

6.  Before  the  Greeks  went  to  an  entertainment,  they  washed  and 
anointed  themselves;  when  they  arrived,  the  entertainer  took  them 

y  the  hand,  or  kissed  their  lips,  hands,  knees,  or  feet,  as  they  de- 
served more  or  less  respect.  It  must  be  observed  concerning  the 
guests,  that  men  and  women  were  never  invited  together. 

7.  They  sat  at  meat  either  quite  upright,  or  leaning  a  little  back- 

3.  The  meals  of  the  Greeks?  4.  What  was  the  food  of  the  Greeks  in  early  ages? 
What  of  flesh  ?  Luxuries  of  the  table  ?  What  of  the  Spartans?  5.  What  of  the  poor? 
Were  the  Greek*  fond  of  meat  for  food  ?  What  of  their  drink  ?  Wine?  6.  What  of  en- 
tertainments ?  Men  and  women  ?  7.  How  did  Ihey  sit  at  table  ?  How  do  the  people  of 
Asia  sit  at  table?  Did  the  Greeks  adopt  this  Asiatic  custom  ?  What  was  done  before  bo 
ginning  to  eat? 


106  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

ward  ;  but  in  more  degenerate  ages,  they  adopted  the  eastern  custom 
of  reclining  on  beds  or  couches.  As  soon  as  the  provisions  were  set 
on  the  table,  and  before  the  guests  began  to  eat,  a  part  was  offered 
as  a  sort  of  first-fruits  to  the  gods. 

8.  They  had  a  custom,  similar  to  ours,  of  drinking  healths,  not 
only  to  those  present,  but  to  their  absent  friends  ;  and  at  every  name 
they  poured  a  little  wine  on  the  ground,  which  was  called  a  libation. 

9.  Tbe  entertainment  being  ended,  a  hymn  was  sung  to  the  gods. 
After  this,  the  company  was  amused  with  music,  dancing,  and  mim- 
icry, or  whatever  could  tend  to  excite  mirth  or  cheerfulness. 

10.  The  houses  of  the  rich  were  built  of  stone,  and  many  of  them 
were  highly  ornamented.  A  large  part  of  the  people,  however  lived 
in  huts  made  of  rough  stone  laid  in  clay. 

11.  In  war,  the  Greeks  fought  with  various  weapons.  Some  of 
the  soldiers  had  bows  and  arrows ;  some  had  javelins  or  spears, 
which  they  hurled  with  great  force  and  precision  of  aim,  and  some 
had  slings,  with  which  they  threw  stones.  They  usually  carried 
shields  for  warding  off  the  weapons  of  their  enemies. 

12.  You  must  recollect  that  in  these  ancient  times,  gun-powder 
was  not  known,  and  muskets  and  cannon  were  therefore  not  in  use. 
In  battle,  the  warriors  often  engaged  in  close  conflict,  foot  to  foot,  and 
breast  to  breast.  The  strife  was  therefore  very  exciting,  and  the  men 
usually  fought  with  furious  courage. 

13.  As  mankind  were  very  much  given  to  making  war  upon  one 
another,  it  was  the  custom  in  all  countries  to  surround  the  cities  with 
high  walls  for  defence.  This  practice,  indeed,  continued  for  many 
ages,  and  if  you  ever  go  to  Europe,  you  will  see  that  the  principal 
cities  of  France,  Germany,  and  many  other  countries,  are  still  secured 
in  this  way. 

14.  In  modern  times,  when  an  army  attacks  a  city  it  batters  down 
the  walls  with  cannon  shot,  or  by  undermining  them,  placing  gun- 
powder beneath,  and  then  setting  it  on  fire.  But  in  the  olden  times 
of  Greece,  the  warriors  used  battering  rams,  consisting  of  heavy 
beams  with  ponderous  stones  at  one  end.  These  were  driven  by  main 
strength  against  the  walls,  and  thus,  after  many  efforts,  they  were 
demolished. 


CHAPTER  LXL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Philip  of  Macedon  conquers  Greece. 

1.  1  shall  now  resume  the  history  of  Greece,  at  the  point  where  1 
left  off.  The  reader  will  recollect  that  I  had  just  finished  speaking 
of  the  Theban  war. 

8.  Drinking  healths?  Libation  ?  9.  What  followed  the  eating?  10.  What  of  the 
habitations  of  the  rich  ?  Of  the  poor?  11.  What  weapons  were  used  by  the  Greeks  in 
war?  13.  What  of  gunpowder?  How  did  the  warriors  cDgage  one  another  in  conflict? 
13.  What  was  the  custom  regarding  cities?  What  are  to  he  seen  in  Europe?  14.  How 
•Jo  the  moderns  attack  a  walled  city  ?     How  did  the  ancients  destroy  the  walls  of  a  city? 


GREECE.  107 

2.  Not  long  after  the  close  of  that  war,  the  states  of  Greece  became 
iwolved  in  another,  which  was  generally  called  the  Sacred  War 
The  people  of  Phocis  had  been  sentenced,  by  the  Amphyctionic  coun- 
cil, to  pay  a  heavy  fine  for  ploughing  a  field  which  belonged  to  the 
temple  of  Apollo,  at  Delphos. 

3.  Rather  than  pay  the  fine,  the  Phocians  resolved  to  go  to  war. 
The  people  of  Athens,  Sparta,  and  Achaia  assisted  the  Phocians. 
The  Thebans,  Locrians,  and  Thessalians  took  the  part  of  the  Am- 
phyctionic council,  and  Philip,  king  of  Macedon,  was  solicited  to  figlu 
on  the  same  side. 

4.  The  kingdom  of  Macedon  is  numbered  by  some  histoviacs 
among  the  states  of  Greece  ;  but  others  consider  it  a  separate  coun- 
try. Although  it  was  founded  about  five  hundred  years  before  this 
period,  it  had  never  been  very  powerful  till  Philip  mounted  the 
throne. 

5.  Philip  was  ambitious  and  warlike.  No  sooner  had  he  marched 
his  army  into  Greece,  than  he  determined  to  make  himself  ruler  of 
the  whole  country.  The  Greeks  were  not  now  so  valiant  as  they 
had  been ;  and  there  were  no  such  men  as  Leonidas,  Miltiades,  or 
Epaminondas,  to  lead  them  to  victory. 

6.  The  man  that  gave  Philip  more  trouble  than  any  other,  was 
Demosthenes,  an  Athenian.  He  was  one  of  the  most  eloquent  ora- 
tors that  ever  lived;  and  he  uttered  such  terrible  orations  against 
Philip,  that  the  Athenians  were  incited  to  resist  him  in  battle.  It  is 
from  these  orations  against  the  Macedonian  king  that  severe  speeches 
have  since  been  called  -philippics. 

7.  But  the  Athenians  were  beaten  at  Cheronea,  in  the  year  338 
before  the  Christian  era.  Thenceforward,  Philip  controlled  the  af- 
fairs of  Greece,  till  his  death.  Perhaps,  after  all,  he  was  a  better 
ruler  than  the  Greeks  could  have  found  among  themselves. 

8.  But  he  had  many  vices,  and  among  the  rest,  that  of  drinking  to 
excess.  One  day,  just  after  he  had  risen  from  a  banquet,  he  decided 
a  certain  law-case  unjustly.  The  losing  person  cried  out,  "  I  appeal 
from  Philip  drunk,  to  Philip  sober !"  And,  sure  enough,  when  Philip 
got  sober,  he  decided  the  other  way. 

9.  A  poor  woman,  who  had  some  business  with  Philip,  tried  in 
vain  to  obtain  an  audience.  He  put  her  off  from  one  day  to  another, 
saying  that  he  had  no  leisure  to  attend  to  her.  "  If  you  have  no  leisure 
to  do  justice,  you  have  no  right  to  be  king  !"  said  the  woman.  Philip 
was  struck  with  the  truth  of  what  the  woman  said,  and  he  became 
more  attentive  to  the  duties  of  a  king. 

10.  He  lived  only  about  two  years  after  he  had  conquered  the 
Greaks.     There  was  a  young  nobleman  named  Pausanias,  a  captain 

Ch.  I.XI. — 2.  What  of  the  Sacred  war?  Cause  of  it?  3.  What  states  fought  on  the 
»iae  of  the  Phocians?  What  on  the  side  of  the  Amphyctionic  council?  On  which 
lide  did  Philip,  king  of  Macedon,  fight  ?  4.  What  of  Macedon  ?  Where  was  it  situated  ? 
When  was  it  founded  ?  Which  way  did  Philip's  army  march  from  Macedon  to  Greece  ? 
What  of  Philip?  (in  what  did  he  determine?  What  of  the  Greeks  at  this  time  ?  6. 
?rhat  of  Demosthenes  ?  What  effect  had  his  oratory  on  the  Athenians  ?  What  is  the  ori- 
gin of  the  word  philippic!  7.  Where  were  they  beaten?  When  did  the  battle  taka 
place?  Where  \y  I  heronea?  Direction  from  Thebes?  Athens?  Sparta?  How  long 
did  Philip  rule  Greece  ?    8.  What  of  Philip  ?     Relate  some  anecdotes  of  him  ? 


1C8 


SCHOOL   HISTORY. 


of  the  guard,  who  had  been  injured  by  one  of  Philip's  relations.  Aa 
Philip  would  not  punish  the  offender,  Pausanias  resolved  that  he  him- 
self should  die. 

11.  On  the  day  of  the  marriage  of  Philip's  daughter,  the  king  was 
entering  the  public  theatre,  where  the  nuptial  festivities  were  to  be 
celebrated.  At  this  moment  Pausanias  rushed  forth,  with  his  sword 
drawn,  and  stabbed  him  to  the  heart. 

12.  The  Athenians  greatly  rejoiced  at  the  news  of  Philip's  death. 
They  publicly  voted  that  a  golden  crown  should  be  given  to  Pausa- 
nias, as  a  reward  for  having  murdered  him.  All  the  other  states  of 
Greece  likewise  revolted  against  the  power  of  Macedon. 


CHAPTER  LXII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Conquests  of  Alexander  the   Great. 


1.  But  the  new  king  of  Macedon,  though  only  twenty  years  old, 
was  well  worthy  to  sifon  his  father's  throne.  He  was  Alexander, 
afterwards  surnamed  the  Great.  Young  as  he  was,  he  had  already 
given  proofs  of  the  valor  which  so  soon  made  him  conqueror  of  the 
world. 

2.  Alexander  subdued  the  Grecian  states  in  the  course  of  one  cam- 
paign.    He  was  then  declared  generalissimo  of  the  Greeks,  and  un- 


to. What  of  Pausanias  ?  Describe  the  death  of  Philip  ?  12.  What  did  the  Athenians  do  ? 
Other  states  ?  Ch.  LXIL— 1.  Who  was  the  new  king  of  Macedon?  Of  what  had  he  riven 
prools?  2.  After  what  exploit  was  Alexander  declared  generalissimo  of  the  Greeks?  What 
ol  the  army  which  he  led  against  Persia  ?     Which  way  is  Persia  from  Macedon  ? 


GREECE.  109 

rfertook  a  war  aarains'.  Persia.     The  army  which  he  led  against  that 
country  consisted  of  thirty-five  thousand  men. 

3.  He  crossed  the  Hellespont,  and  marched  through  Asia  Minor 
towards  Persia.  Before  reaching  its  borders,  he  was  met  by  the  Per- 
sian king,  Darius,  who  had  collected  an  immense  army.  Alexander 
defeated  him,  and  killed  a  hundred  and  ten  thousand  of  his  soldiers. 

4.  Darius  soon  assembled  a  mightier  army  than  before.  He  had 
now  half  a  million  of  men.  He  advanced  to  battle  in  the  midst  of  his 
troops,  seated  on  a  lofty  chariot,  which  resembled  a  moving  throne. 
Around  him  we?e  his  life-guards,  all  in  splendid  armor. 

5.  But  when  the  Persians  saw  how  boldly  the  Macedonian  horse- 
men advanced,  they  took  to  flight.  Poor  king  Darius  was  left  almost 
alone  on  his  lofty  chariot.  He  had  but  just  time  to  get  on  horseback, 
and  gallop  away  from  the  battle.  Shortly  afterwards,  he  was  slain  by 
two  of  his  own  subjects,  as  I  have  told  you  in  the  history  of  Persia. 

6.  After  the  victory,  Alexander  marched  to  Persepolis,  which  was 
then  the  capital  of  Persia.  It  was  a  rich  and  magnificent  city.  In 
the  royal  palace,  there  was  a  gigantic  statue  of  Xerxes,  but  the  Ma- 
cedonian soldiers  overthrew  it,  and  tumbled  it  upon  the  ground. 

7.  While  he  remained  at  Persepolis,  Alexander  gave  himself  up  to 
drunkenness  and  licentious  pleasures.  One  night,  at  a  splendid  ban- 
quet, an  Athenian  lady  persuaded  the  conqueror  to  set  fire  to  the  city. 
It  was  accordingly  burnt  to  the  ground. 

S.  When  Persia  was  completely  subdued,  Alexander  invaded  In- 
dia, now  Hindostan.  One  of  the  kings  of  that  country  was  named 
Porus.  He  is  said  to  have  been  seven  feet  and  a  half  in  height.  This 
gigantic  king  led  a  great  army  against  Alexander. 

9.  Porus  was  well  provided  with  elephants,  which  had  been 
trained  to  rush  upon  the  enemy,  and  trample  them  down.  Alexan- 
der had  no  elephants,  but  his  usual  good  fortune  did  not  desert  him. 
The  army  of  Porus  was  routed,  and  he  himself  was  taken  prisoner, 
and  loaded  with  chains. 

10.  In  this  degraded  condition,  the  Indian  king  was  brought  into 
the  victor's  tent.  Alexander  gazed  with  wonder  at  the  enormous 
stature  of  Porus.  Although  so  great  a  conqueror,  he  was  himself 
only  of  middle  size.  "How  shall  I  treat  you?"  asked  Alexandex 
of  his  prisoner.  "  Like  a  king !"  said  Porus.  This  answer  led  Alex- 
ander to  reflect  how  he  himself  should  like  to  be  treated,  had  he  been 
in  a  similar  situation;  and  he  was  induced  to  behave  generously  to 
Torus. 

3.  What  sea  and  cour.tr)'  did  the  army  cross  to  reach  Persia  ?  Who  opposed  Alexander? 
How  many  of  Darius's  army  were  killed  ?  4.  Describe  the  march  of  Darius  and  his  half 
million  of  troops.  5.  What  became  of  Darius?  G  Where  did  Alexander  go  alter  lu's  vic- 
tory? Where  was  Perjepolis?  Direction  from  Athens  ?  What  of  the  statue  of  Xerxes? 
7.  What  happened  at  Persepolis  ?  8.  What  country  did  Alexander  next  invade?  Direc- 
tion of  India  from  Greece  ?  Persia?  What  of  Porus?  9.  What  animals  had  Porus  in 
his  army.*  Who  conouered?  What  became  of  Porus?  10.  Describe  the  meeting  be- 
tween Alexander  and  Porus. 

10 


HO  SCHOOL  HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  LXIII.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Sequel  of  Alexander's  career. 

1.  In  the  early  part  of  his  career,  Alexander  had  shown  many  ex« 
cellent  and  noble  traits  of  character.  But  he  met  with  such  great 
and  continual  success  in  all  his  undertakings,  that  his  disposition  was 
ruined  by  it.     He  began  to  consider  himself  the  equal  of  the  gods. 

2.  Yet  so  far  was  Alexander  from  being  a  god,  that  some  of  his 
actions  were  unworthy  of  a  man.  One  of  his  worst  deeds  was  the 
murder  of  Clitus,  an  old  officer  who  had  fought  under  king  Philip. 
He  had  once  saved  Alexander's  life  in  battle;  and  on  this  account  he 
was  allowed  to  speak  very  freely  to  him. 

3.  One  night,  after  drinking  too  much  wine,  Alexander  began  to 
speak  of  his  own  exploits ;  and  he  spoke  more  highly  of  them  than 
old  Clitus  thought  they  deserved.  Accordingly,  he  told  Alexander 
that  his  father  Philip  had  done  much  greater  things  than  ever  he  had 
done. 

4.  The  monarch  was  so  enraged,  that  he  snatched  a  spear  from  one 
of  his  attendants,  and  gave  Clitus  a  mortal  wound.  But  when  he 
saw  the  old  man's  bloody  corpse  extended  on  the  floor,  he  was  seized 
with  horror.     He  had  murdered  the  preserver  of  his  own  life  ! 

5.  Alexander's  remorse,  however,  did  not  last  long.  He  still  in- 
sisted on  being  a  god,  the  son  of  Jupiter  Ammon  ;  and  he  was  mor- 
tally offended  with  a  philosopher  named  Callisthenes,  because  he  re- 
"used  to  worship  him.  For  no  other  crime,  Callisthenes  was  put  into 
an  iron  cage,  and  tormented,  till  he  killed  himself  in  despair. 

6.  After  Alexander's  return  from  India  to  Persia,  he  met  with  a 
great  misfortune.  It  was  the  loss  of  his  dearest  friend,  Hephestion, 
who  died  of  a  disease  which  he  had  contracted  by  excessive  drink- 
ing. For  three  days  afterwards,  Alexander  lay  prostrate  on  the 
ground,  and  would  take  no  food. 

7.  He  erected  a  funeral  pile  of  spices  and  other  precious  materials, 
so  that  it  was  as  costly  as  a  palace  would  have  been.  The  lifeless 
body  of  Hephestion  was  placed  on  the  summit.  Alexander  then  set 
fire  to  the  pile,  and  stood  mournfully  looking  on  while  the  corpse  of 
his  friend  was  consumed  to  ashes. 

8.  It  would  have  been  well  if  he  had  taken  warning  by  the  fate  of 
Hephestion.  But  Alexander  the  Great  was  destined  to  owe  his  de- 
struction to  the  wine-cup.  While  drinking  at  a  banquet  in  Babylon, 
he  was  suddenly  taken  sick ;  and  death  soon  conquered  the  con- 
queror. 

9.  As  to  the  merits  of  Alexander,  I  pretty  much  agree  with  a  cer- 

Ch.  LXIII. — 1.  What  of  Alexander?  What  ruined  his  disposition  ?  How  did  he  con- 
sider himself  ?  2.  What  of  the  actions  of  Alexander  ?  Who  was  Clitus?  3.4.  Give  an 
account  of  the  murder  of  Clitus.  5.  What  did  Alexander  insist  upon  being  called?  What 
of  Calistlienes  ?  6.  What  of  Hephestion  ?  What  was  the  cause  of  his  death  ?  7.  What 
did  Alexander  do  with  the  body  of  Hephestion?  8.  What  caused  Alexander's  death? 
Where  did  he  die?  Where  is  Babylon?  Direction  from  Macedon?  India?  9.  Tell 
the  story  of  the  pirate. 


GREECE.  HI 

tain  pirate,  whom  the  Macedonian  soldiers  once  took  prisoner.  Al- 
exander demanded  of  this  man  by  what  right  he  committed  his 
robberies.  "lama  robber  by  the  same  right  that  you  are  a  con- 
queror,'1 was  the  reply.  "  The  only  difference  between  us  is,  that  I 
have  but  a  few  men,  and  can  do  but  little  mischief;  while  you  have  a 
large  army,  and  cau  do  a  great  deal  !" 

10.  It  must  be  confessed  that  this  is  the  chief  difference  between 
conquerors  and  robbers.  Yet,  when  Alexander  died,  his  body  was 
deposited  in  a  splendid  coffin,  at  Alexandria,  in  Egypt,  and  the  Egyp- 
tians paid  him  divine  honors,  as  if  he  had  been  the  greatest  possible 
benefactor  to  the  world. 


CHAPTER  LXIV.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Greece  invaded  by  the  Gauls. 

1.  "When  Alexander  lay  on  his  death-bed,  his  attendants  asked  to 
whom  he  would  bequeath  the  empire,  which  now  extended  from 
Greece  to  India,  including  a  great  many  nations.  His  answer  was, 
"  To  the  most  worthy." 

2.  But  there  appears  to  have  been  no  very  worthy  man  among 
those  whom  he  left  behind  him ;  and  even  if  there  had  been,  the 
unworthy  ones  would  not  have  consented  to  yield  him  the  whole 
power.  Alexander's  empire  was  therefore  divided  among  thirty- 
three  of  his  chief  officers.  

3.  But  the  most  powerful  of  these  officers  were  determined  to  have 
more  than  their  share ;  and  in  the  year  312,  before  Christ,  four  of 
them  had  got  possession  of  the  whole.  Alexander  had  then  been 
dead  eleven  years.  All  his  children  and  relatives  had  been  destroyed 
by  his  ambitious  officers.  ■ 

4.  The  Greeks,  when  they  heard  of  Alexander's  death,  had  at- 
tempted to  regain  their  liberty.  But  their  struggles  were  unsuccess- 
ful;  and  the  country  was  reduced  to  subjection  by  Cassander,  who 
had  been  general  of  Alexander's  cavalry.  Cassander  died  in  a  few 
years.  Thenceforward,  the  history  of  Greece  tells  of  nothing  but 
crimes  and  revolutions,  and  misfortunes. 

5.  In  the  year  278  before  the  Christian  era,  the  Gauls  invaded 
Greece.  They  were  a  barbarous  people,  who  inhabited  the  country 
now  called  France.  Their  general's  name  wasBrennus;  and  their 
numbers  are  said  to  have  been  a  hundred  and  sixty-five  thousand  men. 

6.  Brennus  met  with  hardly  any  opposition.  He  marched  to  Del- 
phos,  intending  to  steal  the  treasures  that  were  contained  in  the  fa- 

10.  Wliat  was  done  when  Alexander  died  ?  Ch.  LXIV. — 1.  What  was  asked  Alexander 
on  li  is  death-bed  ?  His  reply?  2.  How  was  the  empire  divided  ?  3.  What  took  place  in 
the  year  812  B.  C?  What  of  Alexander's  children  and  relatives?  4.  Who  put  Greece 
under  subjection  ?  Who  was  Cassander?  What  of  the  history  of  Greece  after  his  death  ? 
6.  When  did  the  Gauls  invade  Greece  ?  Who  was  their  general  ?  What  of  their  army  ? 
6.  Where  was  Delphos?  Direction  from  Athens?  Sparta?  Thebes?  What  famous  torn 
pie  wan  at  Delphoi  ? 


SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

mous  temple  of  Apollo.  "  A  deity,  like  Apollo,  does  not  warn  these 
treasures,"  said  Brennus.  "  I  am  only  a  man,  and  have  great  need 
of  them." 

7.  Accordingly,  he  led  his  barbarians  towards  the  temple.  The 
stately  marble  front  of  the  edifice  was  seen  at  a  short  distance  before 
them.  It  was  considered  the  holiest  spot  in  Greece.  Here  was  the 
mysterious  oracle,  from  which  so  many  wonderful  prophecies  had 
issued. 

S.  A  wild  shout  burst  from  the  army  of  the  Gauls,  and  they  wef 
on  the  point  of  rushing  forward  to  the  temple.     But  suddenly  a  vio- 
lent storm  arose.     The  thunder  roared,  and  the  wind  blew  furiously. 
At  the  same  moment  a  terrible  earthquake  shook  the  ground  beneath 
the  affrighted  Gauls. 

9.  A  band  of  Greeks  had  assembled,  to  fight  in  defence  of  the  tem- 
ple. When  they  saw  the  disorder  of  the  barbarians,  they  attacked 
them,  sword  in  hand.  It  had  grown  so  dark  that  the  Gauls  could 
not  distinguish  friends  from  foes.  They  killed  one  another,  and  the 
whole  army  was  destroyed. 

10.  Such  is  the  story  Avhich  the  old  historians  tell  about  this  bat- 
tle ;  it  is  doubtless  much  exaggerated,  for  some  of  the  particulars  ap- 
pear hardly  credible.  But,  at  any  rate,  this  was  the  last  great  victory 
that  the  ancient  Greeks  ever  achieved  over  their  enemies. 


CHAPTER  LXV.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

End  of  Grecian  Independence. 

1.  The  Greeks  had  now  almost  entirely  lost  their  love  of  liberty, 
as  well  as  the  other  virtues  which  had  formerly  distinguished  them. 
In  proof  of  this,  I  will  relate  the  story  of  Agis,  the  young  king  of 
Sparta. 

2.  King  Agis  was  anxious  for  the  welfare  of  Sparta,  and  he  greatly 
desired  to  restore  the  ancient  laws  which  Lycurgus  had  enacted.  But 
the  Spartans  were  now  vicious  and  cowardly.  They  hated  the  very 
name  of  Lycurgus,  and  resolved  not  to  be  governed  by  his  severe 
laws. 

3.  They  therefore  seized  the  virtuous  young  king,  and  dragged  him 
to  prison.  He  was  condemned  to  death.  The  executioner  shed  tears 
at  the  moment  when  he  was  going  to  kill  him.  "  Do  not  weep  for 
me,"  said  Agis;  "  I  am  happier  than  my  murderers." 

4.  A  little  while  after  A^is  was  killed,  his  mother  and  grandmother 
came  to  the  prison  to  see  him,  for  they  had  not  heard  of  his  death. 
They  were  led  into  his  dungeon  ;  and  the  murderers  of  Agis  immedi- 
ately strangled  them  both,  and  threw  their  dead  bodies  upon  his. 

7.  Describe  the  march  towards  the  temple.  8.  What  affrighted  the  Gauls?  9.  What 
of  the  Greeks?  How  were  the  Gauls  destroyed?  10.  What  may  be  said  of  this  victory 
over  the  Gauls  ?  Ch.  LXV. —  1.  What  of  the  Greeks  ?  2.  Who  was  Agis  ?  What  did  ha 
desire?  What  of  the  Spartans?  3.  What  did  they  do  to  Agis?  Describe  his  death, 
4.  What  of  the  mother  and  grandmother  of  Agis  ? 


GREECE.  113 

5.  Some  time  after  this  horrible  event,  the  Spartans  had  a  king 
called  Nabis.  He  was  such  a  cruel  monster,  that  Heaven  seemed  to 
have  made  him  a  king  only  for  the  punishment  of  the  people's  wick- 
edness. Nabis  had  an  image  in  his  palace.  It  resembled  his  own 
wife,  and  was  very  beautiful;  it  was  likewise  clothed  with  magnifi- 
cent garments,  such  as  were  proper  for  the  queen  to  wear.  But  the 
breast  and  arms  of  the  image  were  stuck  full  of  sharp  iron  spikes. 

6.  These,  however,  were  hidden  by  the  rich  clothes.  When  king 
Nabis  wished  to  extort  money  from  any  person,  he  invited  him  to  his 
palace,  and  led  him  up  to  the  image.  No  sooner  was  the  stranger 
within  reach,  than  the  image  put  out  its  arms  and  squeezed  him 
close  to  its  breast. 

7.  This  was  done  by  means  of  machinery.  The  poor  man  might 
strugsle  as  hard  as  he  pleased  ;  but  he  could  not  possibly  get  away 
from  the  cruel  embrace  of  the  statue.  There  he  remained,  with  the 
iron  spikes  sticking  into  his  flesh,  until  his  agony  compelled1  him  to 
give  Nabis  as  much  money  as  he  asked  for. 

8.  When  such  enormities  were  committed  by  the  kings  of  Greece, 
it  was  time  that  the  country  should  be  governed  hy  other  masters. 
My  readers  will  not  be  sorry  to  hear  that  this  soon  happened.  One 
hundred  and  forty-six  years  before  the  Christian  era,  Greece  submit- 
ted to  the  authority  of  Rome. 

9.  Thus  I  have  given  you  a  very  brief  account  of  ancient  Greece. 
Its  history  is  full  of  interest,  and  full  of  instruction.  I  hope  you  will 
hereafter  read  the  whole  story,  in  some  larger  work  than  mine. 


CHAPTER  LXVL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Modem  History  of  Greece. 

1.  From  this  time  forward,  the  history  of  Greece  is  connected  with 
that  of  other  nations.  The  Greeks  had  no  longer  any  power,  even 
in  their  own  native  country.  But  they  were  still  respected,  on  ac- 
count of  the  poets,  and  historians,  and  sculptors,  who  appeared 
amon^  them. 

2.  But,  in  course  of  time,  the  genius  of  the  Greeks  seemed  to  have 
deserted  them,  as  well  as  their  ancient  valor.  They  were  then 
wholly  despised.  I  have  not  space  to  relate  any  of  the  events  that 
occurred  to  them  while  they  were  governed  by  the  Romans. 

3.  Between  three  and  four  hundred  years  after  the  Christian  era, 
the  Roman  dominions  were  divided  into  the  Eastern  and  Western 
empires.  The  capital  of  the  Eastern  empire  was  Constantinople. 
The  territory  of  ancient  Greece  was  included  under  this  government, 
and  it  was  sometimes  called  the  Greek  empire. 

6.  What  of  Nabis?   Describe  the  image.     U.   What  did  Nabis  do.  when  he  wanted  to  ex. 
tort  money  out  of  any  one  ?    9.  When  was  Greece  conquered  by  the  Romans  ?    Cm.  LXVI 
1.  What  of  the   Greeks?    Why  were  they  rcsnecledf     2.  What  happened  in  course  of 
time  ?     3.  When  were  the  Roman  dominions  divided? 
1U* 


114  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

4.  Above  a  thousand  years  elapsed,  and  nothing  happened  of  such 
importance  that  it  need  be  told  in  this  brief  history.  Hut,  about  the 
year  1450,  the  Turks  invaded  the  Eastern  empire  of  the  Romans. 
Greece  then  fell  beneath  their  power.  During  almost  four  centuries, 
the  Greeks  were  treated  by  the  Turks  like  slaves. 

5.  At  last,  in  the  year  1821,  they  rebelled  against  the  tyranny  of 
the  Turks.  A  war  immediately  broke  out.  It  continued  a  long  time, 
and  was  carried  on  with  the  most  shockinp;  cruelty  on  both  sides. 

6.  Many  people  from  other  countries  went  to  assist  the  Greeks. 
The  ancient  renown  of  Greece  made  friends  of  all  who  were  ac- 
quainted with  her  history.  Lord  Byron,  the  illustrious  English  poet, 
lost  his  life  in  Greece,_for  the  sake  of  this  famous  land. 

7.  The  Turks  are  a  fierce  people,  and  they  resolved  not  to  give  up 
the  country./'The  Greeks,  on  the  other  hand,  determined  either  to 
drive  away^their  oppressors,  or  to  die.  But  they  would  not  have  suc- 
ceeded^ff  England,  France,  and  Russia  had  not  taken  their  part. 

8.  The  fleets  of  these  three  nations  formed  a  junction  off  the  coast 
of  Greece.  They  were  all  under  the  command  of  the  English  admi- 
ral Sir  Edward  Codrington.  In  October,  1827,  they  attacked  a  Tur- 
kish fleet  of  more  than  two  hundred  vessels,  in  the  bay  of  Navarino. 

9.  The  Turks  were  entirely  beaten,  and  their  vessels  were  sunk  or 
burned.  In  consequence  of  their  losses  in  this  battle,  they  were  una- 
ble to  continue  the  war.  Greece  was  therefore  evacuated  by  the 
Turks. 

10.  But  as  the  Greeks  were  not  considered  entirely  fit  to  govern 
themselves,  a  king  was  selected  for  them,  by  England,  France,  and 
Russia.  The  new  king  was  a  young  man  of  eighteen,  named  Otho. 
He  was  placed  on  the  throne  in  the  year  1829.  This  is  the  latest  re- 
markable event  in  the  history  of  Greece. 


CHAPTER  LXVII.  -EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  Italy  as  it  now  is. 

1.  Italy  is  a  strip  of  land  on  the  south  of  Europe,  extending  into 
the  Mediterranean  Sea.  It  is  fancied  to  have  the  shape  of  a  boot, 
the  island  of  Sicily  lying  at  the  toe.  It  has  a  beautiful  climate,  the 
seasons  of  spring  and  summer  seeming  always  to  prevail. 

2.  If  you  were  to  go  to  this  country,  you  would  be  charmed  with 
the  beaut}'  of  the  sky,  and  the  balmy  softness  of  the  air.    You  would 

4.  What  happened  about  1450  ?  Into  whose  power  did  the  Greeks  then  fall  ?  How  were 
they  treated?  5.  What  took  place  in  1821?  6.  Who  assisted  the  Greeks?  Why  did 
Greece  find  so  many  friends?  What  of  Byron?  7.  What  of  the  Turks?  The  Greeks? 
Who  took  part  with  Greece  ?  8.  Who  commanded  the  combined  lleet  of  England,  France, 
»nd  Russia?  When  did  they  attack  the  Turks?  9.  Wiat  of  the  Turks'  Were  they 
obliged  [o  leave  Greece  ?  10.  Who  chose  a  king  for  the  Greeks?  What  is  his  name  ? 
Wlien  did  he  come  to  the  throne?  Ch.  LXVII. — I.  What  is  Italy'  Its  shape  ?  Where 
is  Sicily1  Climate  of  Italy?  i.  What  of  the  air  and  sky  in  Italy?  What  of  Grapes? 
Wine  . 


116. 


SCHOOL   HISTORY, 


find  grapes  so  abundant  that  you  could  buy  a  delicious  bunch,  as  largw 
as  you  could  eat,  for  a  cent ;  and  if  you  wished  for  wine,  you  could  get 
a  bottle  for  two  cents. 


Inhabitants  of  modern  Italy. 


3.  You  would  find,  in  short,  that  Italy  abounds  in  pleasant  fruits, 
and  in  every  species  of  production  required  for  the  comfort  of  man. 
You  Avould  find  the  people,  men,  women,  and  children,  living  a  great 
part  of  the  time  in  the  open  air,  often  singing,  and  sometimes  dancing 
in  groups  beneath  the  trees. 

4.  But,  in  the  midst  of  these  signs  of  cheerfulness,  you  would  ob- 
serve a  great  deal  of  poverty,  and  you  would  soon  discover  that  many 
of  the  people  are  indolent,  vicious,  and  degraded. 

5.  In  the  cities,  many  of  which  are  large,  and  filled  with  thousands 
of  people,  you  may  notice  costly  churches  and  splendid  palaces,  many 
of  them  built  of  marble.  But  still  every  tiling  around  you  would 
bear  an  aspect  of  decay,  and  impress  you  with  the  idea  that  Italy, 
with  all  its  splendor,  is  an  unhappy  country. 

6.  At  Florence,  Rome,  Naples,  and  other  large  cities,  you  would 
find  collections  of  pictures  and  statues,  which  surpass  in  beauty  every 
thing  of  the  kind  in  the  world.  These  pictures  are  the  works  of  fa- 
mous artists,  who  have  lived  in  Italy  within  the  last  five  hundred 
years. 

7.  The  statues  are  the  productions  of  sculptors,  who  have  lived  at 
various  periods  within  the  last  two  thousand  years.     Some  of  them, 

ndeed,  are  supposed  to  have  been  executed  by  Grecian  artists,  who 
ived  in  the  time  of  Pericles. 

8.  But  in  all  Italy  there  is  nothing  that  will  excite  so  much  inte- 
rest as  the  ruins  of  ancient  Rome,  many  of  which  are  still  to  be  seen 
in  the  modern  city.     These,  like  the  ancient  remains  of  Egypt  and 


3.  Fruits?  Other  productions  ?  The  people  ?  4.  What  would  you  discover  after  i:i- 
omining  the  people  of  Italy  carefully  ?  5.  What  of  the  cities?  6.  7.  What  ofpictuiet 
aad  statues  ?     8.  What  of  the  ruins  of  Rome  ? 


ITALY.  117 

Greece,  would  delight  you  with  their  beauty,  and  astonish  you  oy 
♦heir  grandeur  and  magnificence. 

9.  The  most  remarkable  edifice  of  modern  times  to  be  found  in 
Italy,  is  the  church  of  St.  Peter's  at  Rome,  the  height  of  which  is 
nearly  five  hundred  feet.     Near  this  is  the  Vatican,  a  famous  palace 

.  inhabited  by  the  pope,  who  reigns  over  Koine  and  the  country  around, 
j  like  a  king. 

10.  If  you  were  to  go  to  Naples,  you  would  see  at  the  distance  of  a 
few  miles  a  famous  mountain  called  Vesuvius,  from  which  smoke, 
name,  and  torrents  of  melted  lava  have  periodically  issued  for  ages. 
Sometimes  whole  towns  and  cities  in  the  neighborhood  have  been  bu- 
ried beneath  the  burning  masses. 

11.  If  you  were  to  go  to  Sicily,  you  would  find  another  volcanic 
mountain  called  Etna,  which  also  pours  out,  from  time  to  time,  im- 
mense volumes  of  smoke,  fire,  and  lava.  Yet  on  the  very  sides  of 
these  mountains  the  people  dwell  in  thickly  settled  villages,  and  here 
you  will  find  rich  vineyards,  beautiful  gardens,  and  groves  of  figs, 
oranges,  and  olives. 

12.  Having  visited  Italy,  you  will  return  to  America  with  many 
wonderful  tales  to  tell  of  this  famous  peninsula  that  lies  in  the  shape 
of  a  boot  in  the  Mediterranean  Sea;  but  you  will  still  be  contented 
and  happy  to  settle  down  in  your  native  country,  where  beggars  are 
seldom  seen,  where  poverty  and  wretchedness  are  rare,  and  where 
every  thing  speaks  of  prosperity. 

13.  You  may  remember  with  admiration  the  desolate  ruins  of 
Rome,  the  marble  palaces  of  Florence  and  Naples,  but  you  would 
not  wish  to  live  wrhere  even  these  splendid  edifices  oppress  the  heart 
with  gloom.  You  would  much  rather  live  among  the  more  cheerful 
and  thriving  villages  and  towns  of  our  own  country.  The  truth  is 
that  Italy  has  been  badly  governed  for  ages,  and  the  people  have  be- 
come indolent  and  vicious.  Let  us  hope  that  they  will  yet  become 
more  worthy  of  the  beautiful  country  they  inhabit. 


CHAPTER  LXVIII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Founding  of  Rome  by  Ronndus.     Its  early  State. 

1.  I  shall  now  proceed  to  tell  you  the  history  of  Rome,  the  most 
celebrated  empire  of  antiquity.  Like  the  history  of  all  ancient  coun- 
tries, it  abounds  in  tales  of  battle,  bloodshed,  injustice,  and  crime. 
Over  such  horrid  scenes  I  should  be  glad  to  draw  a  veil;  but  these 
things  have  really  happened,  and  it  is  the  duty  of  the  faithful  story- 
teller to  hide  nothing  which  is  necessary  to  give  a  true  picture  of 
what  he  undertakes  to  exhibit. 


9.  What  of  St.  Peter's?  The  Vatican?  The  pone?  10.  What  of  Vesuviu.-  ?  11. 
What  of  Etna  r  Where  is  the  island  of  Sicily?  li-  With  what  feelings  would  you  re- 
turn to  America  after  visiting  Italy?  Ch.  LXVIII. —  1.  What  of  the  empire  of  Rome  ' 
What  of  its  history  ? 


118 


SCHOOL    HI  STORY. 


Map  of  Italy. 


artivento\ 


•;±J.ra.s$aro 
8|5  ToTLJast  iVom.  -WashmjjioTL.  oil         '"""       9]3 


Questions  on  the  Map — Boundaries  of  Italy?  Tell  the  direction  of  the  following  places  from 
Rome:— Africa;  Sicily;  Sardinia;  Savoy;  Naples;  Tuscany;  Switzerland;  Malta;  Tunis;  Car- 
thago; Turin;  Austria. 


ROME.  no 

2.  The  famous  city  of  Rome  stands  on  the  river  Tiber,  in  Italy. 
Its  distance  from  the  sea  is  about  sixteen  miles.  It  is  supposed  to 
have  been  founded  by  Romulus,  in  the  year  752  B.  C.  Romulus  was 
the  captain  of  about  three  thousand  banditti,  or  outlaws.  These  men 
built  some  huts  on  a  hill  called  the  Palatine,  and  enclosed  them  with 
a  wall.  This  was  the  origin  of  the  most  famous  city  the  world  ever 
saw. 

3.  It  is  said  that  this  wall  was  so  low,  that  Remus,  the  brother  of 
Romulus,  leaped  over  it.  "  Do  you  call  this  the  wall  of  a  city  ?' 
cried  he,  contemptuously.  Romulus  was  so  enraged,  that  he  struck 
his  brother  dead ;  and  this  was  the  first  blood  that  bedewed  the  walls 
of  Rome. 

4.  When  Romulus  and  his  fellow  robbers  were  comfortably  settled 
in  their  new  houses,  they  found  themselves  in  want  of  wives.  At 
this  time,  Italy  was  inhabited  by  many  rude  tribes.  Among  these 
were  the  Sabines,  who  lived  in  the  neighborhood  of  Rome.  These 
would  not  allow  their  young  women  to  marry  the  Romans;  but  Ro- 
mulus contrived  a  scheme  to  get  wives  by  force. 

5.  He  invited  the  whole  Sabine  people  to  witness  some  games  and 
sports.  Accordingly,  the  Sabines  came;  and,  as  they  suspected  no 
mischief,  they  brought  almost  all  the  marriageable  young  women 
in  the  country. 

6.  At  first,  the  Sabines  were  highly  delighted  with  the  feats  of 
strength  and  agility,  which  were  performed  by  the  Romans  to  enter- 
tain them.  But,  in  a  little  while,  Romulus  gave  a  signal ;  and  all 
his  men  drew  their  swords,  and  rushed  among  the  peaceable 
spectators. 

7.  The  Sabines  were  of  course  taken  by  surprise,  and  could  make 
no  resistance.  Each  of  the  Romans  caught  up  the  prettiest  young 
woman  he  could  find,  and  carried  her  away.  There  was  no  longer 
any  scarcity  of  wives  in  Rome. 

8.  This  outrageous  act  of  violence  caused  a  war  between  the  Ro- 
mans and  Sabines.  The  latter  mustered  a  large  army,  and  would 
probably  have  exterminated  Romulus  and  his  banditti.  But  when 
they  were  about  to  engage  in  battle,  the  young  wives  of  the  Romans 
rushed  into  the  field. 

9.  They  besought  the  two  hostile  parties  to  make  peace.  They 
said  that  whichever  side  might  gain  the  victory,  it  would  bring 
nothing  but  sorrow  to  them  ;  for,  if  the  Sabines  should  conquer,  their 
husbands  must  lose  their  lives ;  or  if  the  Romans  should  win  the  day, 
their  kindred  would  perish. 

10.  Both  parties  were  much  moved  by  these  entreaties.  The  Sa- 
bines saw  that  the  young  women  had  become  attached  to  their  hus- 
bands; and  therefore  it  would  be  a  pity  to  separate  them,  even  if  it 
could  be  done  without  bloodshed.     In  short,  the  matter  ended  peace- 

2.  On  what  river  is  Rome  ?  How  far  is  it  from  the  sea  ?  When  and  by  whom  was  it 
founded?  Who  was  Romulus?  What  did  the  outlaws  do  ?  What  is  the  origin  of  Rome? 
3.  What  happened  between  Romulus  and  Remus?  4.  Of  what  did  Romulus  and  hi>  men 
feel  the  want  ?  What  of  the  Sabines?  5.  Give  au  account  of  the  carrying  oil"  of  the 
Sabine  women.  8.  What  did  this  act  cause  ?  Hew  was  the  war  prevented?  9.  What  did 
the  young  wives  of  the  Romaas  say  ?     10.  What  effect  had  their  entreaties? 


120  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

ably,  and  an  alliance,  which  you  know  is  a  friendly  treaty,  was 
formed. 

]  1.  The  first  government  of  Rome  consisted  of  a  king  and  senate- 
Romulus  was  chosen  king,  and  reigned  thirty-seven  years.  There 
are  different  accounts  of  the  way  in  which  his  reign  terminated. 

12.  Some  historians  pretend  that,  while  Romulus  sat  in  the  senate, 
house  giving  wise  instructions  in  regard  to  matters  of  state,  the  hall 
was  suddenly  darkened  by  an  eclipse  of  the  sun.  When  the  sun 
shone  out  again,  the  chair  of  Romulus  was  perceived  to  be  empty  ; 
and  it  was  said  he  had  been  taken  up  into  heaven. 

13.  Others  say,  that  Romulus  attempted  to  make  himself  a  tyrant, 
and  that  therefore  the  senators  pulled  him  down  from  his  chair  of 
state  and  tore  him  in  pieces.  This  story  appears  more  probable  than 
the  former.  At  all  events,  king  Romulus  suddenly  disappeared,  and 
was  never  seen  again  in  the  city  which  he  had  founded. 


CHAPTER  LXIX.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Battle  of  Horatii  and  Curiatii. 

1.  The  second  tking  of  Rome  was  Numa  Pompilius.  He  was  a 
wise  and  good  king,  and  a  great  lover  of  peace.  He  spent  forty-three 
years  in  making  excellent  laws,  and  instructing  the  people  in  agricul- 
ture and  other  useful  arts. 

2.  The  peaceful  Numa  was  succeeded  by  Tullus  Hostilius.  He 
was  a  warlike  monarch.  During  his  reign  the  Romans  engaged  in 
hostilities  with  the  Albans,  who  inhabited  a  neighboring  city. 

3.  It  was  agreed  that  the  war  should  be  decided  by  a  battle  be- 
tween three  champions  on  each  side.  In  the  army  of  the  Albans 
there  were  three  brothers,  each  named  Curiatius;  and  in  the  Roman 
army  there  were  likewise  three  by  the  name  of  Horatius. 

4.  These  Horatii  and  Curiatii  were  fixed  upon  as  the  champions. 
They  fought  in  an  open  plain ;  and  on  each  side  stood  the  ranks  of 
armed  warriors,  with  their  swords  sheathed,  anxiously  watching  the 
combat. 

5.  At  first  it  seemed  as  if  the  Curiatii  were  going  to  win  the  vic- 
tory. It  is  true  they  were  all  three  wounded ;  but  two  of  the  Horatii 
lay  dead  upon  the  field.  The  other  Horatius  was  still  unhurt.  He 
appeared  determined  not  to  perish  like  his  two  brothers;  for  he  was 
seen  to  turn  and  flee.  At  the  flight  of  their  champion,  the  Romans 
groaned  with  shame  and  despair;  for  if  he  should  lose  the  battle, 
they  were  all  to  be  made  slaves. 

6.  The  three  Curiatii  pursued  the  fugitive.     But  their  wounds  had 

11.  What  of  the  first  government  of  Rome  ?  Who  was  chosen  king,  and  how  long 
did  he  reign  ?  12.  What  do  some  historians  pretend?  13.  What  do  others  say?  Chap. 
LXIX.— 1.  Who  was  the  second  king  of  Rome  ?  What  of  him  ?  2.  What  of  Tullus  Hos- 
tilius f  3.  How  was  the  war  hetween  the  Romans  and  Albans  to  he  decided?  Who  were 
the  Horatii  and  Curiatii  ?  4.  o.  Describe  the  war  between  these  combatants.  Who  fletl 
Irom  the  battle  ?     6.  What  did  the  three  Curiatii  do  ?    What  of  Horatius  ? 


ROME.  121 

rendered  them  feeble.  They  staggered  along,  one  behind  the  other, 
so  that  they  were  separated  by  considerable  distances.  This  was 
what  Horatius  desired.  Though  he  could  not  have  beaten  all  three 
together,  he  was  more  than  a  match  for  them  singly. 

7.  He  now  turned  fiercely  upon  the  foremost,  and  slew  him.  Then 
he  encountered  the  second,  and  smote  him  dead  in  a  moment.  The 
third  met  with  the  same  fate.  The  Alban  army  now  turned  pale,, 
and  dropped  their  weapons  on  the  field ;  for  they  had  lost  their  free- 
dom. 

The  exulting  Romans  greeted  Horatius  with  shouts  of  triumph. 
He  returned  towards  Rome  amid  a  throng  of  his  countrymen,  all  of 
whom  hailed  him  as  their  benefactor.  But  as  he  entered  the  city,  he 
met  a  young  woman  wringing  her  hands  in  an  agony  of  grief.  This 
was  his  sister.  She  Avas  in  love  with  one  of  the  Curiatii,  and  when 
she  saw  Horatius,  she  shrieked  aloud,  and  reproached  him  bitterly  for 
having  slain  her  lover. 

9.  The  victor  still  held  the  bloody  sword  with  Avhich  he  had  killed 
the  three  Alban  champions.  His  heart  was  still  fierce  with  the 
frenzy  of  the  combat.  He  could  not  bear  that  his  sister  should  be- 
wail one  of  the  dead  enemies,  instead  of  her  two  dead  brothers;  noi 
that  she  should  darken  his  triumph  with  her  reproaches.  Accordingly, 
in  the  frenzy  of  the  moment,  he  stabbed  her  to  the  heart. 

10.  Horatius  was  condemned  to  die  for  this  dreadful  crime;  but  he 
was  afterwards  pardoned,  because  his  valor  had  won  for  Rome  such 
a  great  deliverance.  But  the  disgrace  of  his  guilt  was  far  more  than 
the  honor  of  his  victory. 


CHAPTER  LXX.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

From  the  Reign  of  Ancus  Martins,  till  the  Erpulsion  of 
the  Kings.  « 

1.  After  the  death  of  Tullus  Hostilius,  the  Romans  elected  Ancus 
Martius  to  be  king.  He  was  succeeded  by  Tarquin  the  Elder,  whose 
father  had  been  a  rich  mercbant.  The  next  king  was  Servius  Tul- 
lius.  When  Servius  had  reigned  forty-four  years,  he  was  murdered 
by  Tarquin,  his  son-in-law,  who  was  ambitious  of  being  king. 

2.  Tullia,  the  wife  of  Tarquin  and  daughter  of  Servius,  rejoiced  at 
her  father's  death,  for  she  wished  to  be  queen.  She  rode  out  in  her 
chariot  in  order  to  congratulate  her  wicked  husband.  In  one  of  the 
streets  through  which  the  chariot  was  to  pass,  lay  the  dead  body  of 
the  poor  old  king.  The  coachman  saw  it,  and  was  desirous  of  turn- 
ing back.     "  Drive  on  !"  cried  the  wicked  Tullia. 

7.  What  was  tlie  fate  of  the  Curiatii?  8.  How  was  Horatius  greeted  ?  What  of  hi* 
iister?  9.  Whydid  Horatius  kill  her  ?  10.  What  of  Horatius?  Why  was  lie  pardoned? 
Ch  LXX.— 1.  Who  was  king  after  Tullus  Hostilius?  Who  next?  Who  killed  Ser- 
vius Tullus?     2.  3.  What  of  Tullia  ?    Describe  her  wicked  act. 

11 


122  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

3.  The  coachman  did  so;  and  as  the  street  was  too  narrow  to  per* 
mit  him  to  turn  out,  the  chariot  passed  directly  over  the  murdered 
king.  But  Tullia  rode  on  without  remorse,  although  the  wheels 
were  stained  with  her  father's  blood. 

4.  Her  husband  now  ascended  the  throne,  and  was  called  Tarquin 
the  Proud.  The  Ptomans  abhorred  him,  for  he  was  a  hateful  tyrant. 
Several  almost  incredible  stories  are  told  respecting  his  reign. 

5.  One  day,  it  is  said,  that  a  woman  of  singular  aspect  entered  the 
king's  presence,  bringing  nine  large  books  in  her  arms.  No  one  knew 
whence  she  came,  nor  what  was  contained  in  her  books.  She  re- 
quested the  king  to  buy  them.  But  the  price  was  so  high,  that  Tar- 
quin refused ;  especially  as  he  did  not  know  what  the  books  were 
about. 

6.  The  unknown  woman  went  away  and  burnt  three  of  her  books. 
She  then  came  back,  and  again  offered  the  remaining  ones  to  Tar- 
quin. But  she  demanded  as  much  money  for  the  six  as  she  had  be- 
fore asked  for  the  whole  nine  ;  and  Tarquin  of  course  refused  to  buy 
tlhem. 

7.  The  woman  went  away  a  second  time.  But  shortly  afterwards 
she  was  again  seen  entering  the  palace.  She  had  now  only  three 
volumes  left ;  and  these  she  offered  to  the  king  at  the  same  price 
which  she  had  before  asked  for  the  whole  nine. 

8.  There  was  something  so  strange  and  mysterious  in  all  this,  that 
Tarquin  concluded  to  give  the  woman  her  price.  She  put  the  three 
volumes  into  his  hands,  and  immediately  disappeared. 

9.  The  books  were  found  to  be  the  oracles  of  a  sibyl,  or  prophetess. 
They  were  therefore  looked  upon  with  superstitious  reverence,  and 
were  preserved  in  Rome  during  many  ages;  and  in  all  difficult  and 
perplexing  cases,  the  rulers  looked  into  these  old  volumes,  and  read, 
as  they  supposed,  the  secrets  of  their  country's  fate 

10.  The  above  story  is  probably  a  fable.  So  also  is  that  of  the  dis- 
covery of  a  man's  head,  while  the  workmen  were  digging  the  foun- 
dation of  the  temple  of  Jupiter.  Yet  the  Romans  firmly  believed 
that  a  human  head  was  found  there  under  the  earth,  and  that  it 
looked  as  fresh  as  if  just  cut  off. 

11.  When  Tarquin  the  Proud  had  reigned  more  than  twenty  years, 
he  and  his  family  were  driven  out  of  Rome  by  the  people.  This 
event  was  brought  about  by  the  wickedness  of  his  son  Sextus,  whose 
conduct  had  caused  a  noble  Roman  lady  to  commit  suicide.  Her 
name  was  Lucretia. 

12.  The  expulsion  of  the  Tarquins  took  place  in  the  year  509  be- 
fore the  Christian  era.  The  Romans  never  had  another  king.  Be- 
sides the  senate,  the  government  now  consisted  of  two  magistrates 
called  consuls,  who  were  chosen  every  year.  Brutus  and  Collatinus 
were  the  first. 

13.  Brutus  gave  a  terrible  example  of  his  justice  and  patriotism. 

4.  What  was  Tarquin  called  ?  What  of  him  ?  5.  6.  7.  8.  9.  What  strange  story  can 
you  (ell  of  him/  10.  What  of  a  man's  head  ?  11.  How  long  did  Tarquin  reign  ?  What 
of  him  and  his  family  ?  What  of  Sextus  ?  12.  What  took  place  509  B.  C.  ?  How  long 
from  the  founding  of  Rome  to  the  dealh  of  her  last  king?  What  of  the  government  of 
Rome  after  the  Tarquins  i   Who  were  the  first  consuls  ?     13.  What  act  did  Brutus  perform ' 


ROME.  123 

His  two  sons  had  engaged  in  a  conspiracy  to  make  Tarquin  king 
again.  Brutus,  who  was  a  judge  when  they  were  brought  to  trial, 
condemned  them  both  to  death,  and  had  them  executed  in  his 
presence. 


CHAPTER  LXXI.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Story  of  Coriolanus. 

1.  Acts  of  heroism  were  common  among  the  Romans,  in  those 
days.  A  young  man,  named  Mutius'Scsevola,  gained  great  credit  for 
his  fortitude.  He  had  been  taken  prisoner  by  the  troops  of  the  king 
of  Etruria,  or  Tuscany,  who  was  at  war  with  Rome.  Porsenna 
threatened  to  torture  him,  unless  he  would  betray  the  plans  of  the 
Roman  general. 

2.  A  tire  was  burning  close  beside  the  prisoner.  He  immediately 
put  his  hand  into  the  midst  of  the  flames,  and  held  it  there  till  it  was 
burnt  off.  By  this  act,  he  showed  Porsenna  that  no  tortures  could 
induce  him  to  turn  traitor. 

3.  Almost  from  the  first  foundation  of  Rome,  the  inhabitants  had 
been  divided  into  two  classes;  one  called  patricians,  and  the  other 
plebeians.  The  senate  and  most  of  the  rich  men  were  included 
among  the  patricians.     The  consuls  were  also  chosen  from  this  class. 

4.  Thus  the  patricians  had  nearly  all  the  power  in  their  hands. 
This  caused  frequent  quarrels  between  them  and  the  common  people, 
or  plebeians.  But  at  length  it  was  ordained  that  five  magistrates, 
called  tribunes,  should  be  annually  chosen  by  the  plebeians. 

5.  These  tribunes  took  away  a  great  deal  of  power  from  the  patri- 
cians, and  were  therefore  hated  by  them.  Coriolanus,  a  valiant,  but 
proud  patrician,  endeavored  to  have  the  office  of  the  tribunes  abolish- 
ed. But  they  were  more  powerful  than  he,  and  succeeded  in  procur- 
ing his  banishment. 

6.  Coriolanus  left  the  city,  and  went  to  the  territories  of  the  Volsci, 
who  were  bitter  enemies  of  the  Romans.  There  he  gathered  a  large 
army,  and  advanced  to  besiege  Rome.  His  countrymen  were  greatly 
alarmed  when  they  heard  that  the  banished  Coriolanus  was  return- 
ing so  soon,  and  in  so  terrible  a  manner. 

7.  They  therefore  sent  an  embassy  to  meet  him,  consisting  of  the 
oldest  senators.  But  these  venerable  men  could  make  no  impression 
on  Coriolanus.  Next  came  an  embassy  of  priests ;  but  they  met  with 
no  better  success. 

8.  Coriolanus  still  marched  onward,  and  pitched  his  tent  within  a 
short  distance  of  the  Roman  walls.    He  was  gazing  towards  the  city, 

Ch.  LXXI. — 1.  2.  Relate  the  anecdote  of  Muiius  Scaevola.  3.  What  two  classes  were 
there  in  Rome?  What  of  the  class  of  the  patricians?  Who  were  the  plebeians?  4. 
What  caused  uuarrela  between  the  patricians  and  plebeians  ?  From  which  class  were  the 
tribunes  chosen?     5.  What  of  the  tribunes  ? 

11 


124  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

and  planning  an  attack  for  the  next  day,  when  a  third  embassy  ap- 
peared.    It  was  a  mournful  procession  of  Roman  ladies. 

9.  At  their  head  walked  Veturia,  who  was  the  mother  of  Coriola- 
nus;  and  Vergilia,  his  wife,  was  also  there,  leading  his  children  by 
the  hand.  When  they  drew  near,  his  mother  knelt  down  at  hisfeet, 
and  besought  him  not  to  be  the  ruin  of  his  native  city. 

10.  Coriolanus  strove  to  resist  her  entreaties,  as  he  had  resisted 
thos-;  of  the  senators  and  priests.  But  though  his  heart  had  been 
proud  and  stubborn  against  them,  it  was  not  so  against  his  mother. 

11.  "Mother,"  cried  he,  "I  yield!  You  have  saved  Rome,  but 
you  have  destroyed  your  son !"  And  so  it  proved ;  for  the  Volsci 
were  enraged  at  his  retreat  from  Rome,  and  they  murdered  him  at 
Antium. 


CHAPTER  LXXII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Rome  invaded  by  the   Gauls.      The  first  Punic   War. 

1.  In  process  of  time,  the  Roman  government  underwent  various 
changes.  The  will  of  the  plebeians  had  far  greater  influence  than  the 
will  of  the  patricians.  The  consequence  was,  that  the  prosperity  of 
Rome  increased  at  home  and  abroad. 

2.  But  in  the  year  3S5  before  Christ,  a  great  calamity  befell  the 
city.  It  was  taken  by  an  army  of  Gauls,  inhabitants  of  the  country 
now  called  France.  When  Brennus,  their  general,  had  entered  R,ome, 
he  marched  with  his  soldiers  to  the  senate-house. 

3.  There  he  beheld  an  assemblage  of  gray-bearded  senators,  seated 
in  a  noble  hall,  in  chairs  of  ivory.  Each  held  an  ivory  staff  in  his 
hand.  These  brave  old  men,  though  they  could  make  no  resistance, 
considered  it  beneath  their  dignity  to  run  away  from  the  invaders. 

4.  The  Gauls  were  awe-struck  by  their  venerable  aspect.  But 
finally,  one  of  the  soldiers,  being  ruder  than  his  companions,  took 
hold  of  the  long  gray  beard  of  an  aged  senator,  and  pulled  it.  The 
old  gentleman,  whose  name  was  Papyrius,  was  so  offended  at  this 
insult,  that  he  uplifted  his  ivory  staff,  and  hit  the  soldier  a  blow  on 
the  head. 

5.  But  that  blow  cost  Rome  dear.  The  Gauls  immediately  mas- 
sacred Papyrius  and  the  other  senators,  and  set  fire  to  the  city;  and 
almost  the  whole  of  it  was  reduced  to  ashes.  You  must  bear  in  mind 
that,  at  this  time,  Rome  had  become  an  immense  city.  It  contained 
many  magnificent  edifices;  the  most  splendid  of  these  was  called  the 
capitol  ;  this  was  not  taken  by  the  Gauls. 

6.  All  the  bravest  of  the  Romans  assembled  there,  and  resolved  to 
defend  it  to  the  last.     Yet  the  enemy  had  nearly  got  possession  of  it 

6.  7.  8.  9.   10.  Tell  the  story  of  Coriolanus.     11.  What  was  his  fate?     Ch.  LXXII 

1.  Of  what  was  the  prosperity  of  Rome  the  consequence?  2.  What  hefell  the  city  384 
B.C.?  What  of  Brcmius  ?  3.  4.  What  happened  in  the  senate-house  ?  5.  Whatoftfie 
iize  of  Rome  at  this  time  ?     What  of  the  capitol  ?     6.  How  was  the  capitol  saved  ? 


ROME.  125 

in  the  night.  But  as  they  were  creeping  towards  the  gate,  they 
awoke  a  large  flock  of  geese ;  and  their  cackling  alarmed  the 
sentinels. 

7.  In  consequence  of  this  fortunate  event,  a  goose  was  thenceforth 
considered  a  very  praiseworthy  and  honorable  fowl  by  the  Romans 
I  am  not  sure  but  what  they  thought  it  a  sin  to  have  roast  goose  for 
dinner. 

8.  The  Gauls  were  driven  out  of  Rome,  and  were  soon  vanquished 
by  Camillus,  a  brave  and  patriotic  Roman.  It  is  said  that  not  a  sin- 
gle man  of  them  got  back  to  their  own  country,  to  tell  the  fate  of  his 
companions. 

9.  The  Romans  were  almost  continually  at  war.  Their  valor  and 
discipline  generally  rendered  them  successful ;  but  sometimes  they 
met  with  misfortunes.  In  a  war  with  the  Samnites,  a  Roman  army 
was  captured,  and  forced  to  pass  under  the  yoke,  which  was  a  sign 
of  subjection.     This  was  the  highest  possible  ignominy. 

10.  But  at  length  all  the  other  states  and  kingdoms  of  Italy  were 
reduced  under  the  Roman  power.  Afterwards,  the  most  formidable 
enemy  of  B.ome  was  Carthage.  This  was  a  powerful  city  on  the 
African  coast,  near  where  Tunis  now  stands.  It  was  situated  nearly 
south  of  Rome,  across  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  at  the  distance  of 
about  four  hundred  miles. 

1 1.  The  wars  between  Rome  and  Carthage  were  called  Punic  wars. 
The  first  began  in  the  year  264  before  Christ,  and  lasted  twenty-three 
years.     Many  battles  were  fought  on  land,  and  some  by  sea. 

12.  The  Carthaginians  were  a  cruel  people.  Whenever  their  gene- 
rals lost  a  battle,  they  were  crucified.  Regulus,  a  Roman  general 
was  taken  by  them,  and  underwent  horrible  torments.  They  cut  off 
his  eyelids,  and  then  exposed  his  naked  eyes  to  the  burning  sun.  He 
was  afterwards  put  into  a  barrel,  the  inner  sides  of  which  were  set 
with  iron  spikes. 

13.  A  peace  was  at  last  concluded  between  Rome  and  Carthage. 
The  doors  of  the  temple  of  Janus,  at  Rome,  had  not  been  shut  for 
five  hundred  years ;  for  they  always  stood  open  while  the  Romans 
were  at  war.  But  now  they  were  closed  and  barred  ;  for  Rome  was 
at  peace  with  all  the  world. 

8.  Who  conquered  the  Gauls?  9.  What  of  the  Romans?  What  of  the  war  with  the 
Samnites  ?  10.  What  of  the  kingdoms  of  Italy  ?  Where  was  Carthage  ?  How  far  was  it 
from  Rome?  11.  When  did  the  first  Punic  war  begin?  How  long  did  it  last?  12.  What 
of  the  Carthaginians  ?  What  of  Regulus  ?  13.  What  of  the  temple  of  Janus  ?  How  long 
had  the  doors  been  open?  Why  were  they  now  closed  ?  When  was  the  temple  of  Jarnu 
oteu  ?     Wheu  shut  ? 


11* 


12G 


SCHOOL  HISTORY. 


CHAPTER  LXXIIL— EUROPE  CONTINUED 

Second  and  third  Punic    Wars. 


Hannibal  and  his  army  crossing  the  Jllps. 

1.  The  doors  of  the  temple  of  Janus  were  soon  flung  wide  open 
again ;  for  a  war  broke  out  between  the  Romans  and  a  tribe  of  Gauls. 
It  ended  in  the  conquest  of  the  latter. 

2.  In  the  year  218  before  the  Christian  era,  another  war  with  Car- 
tnage  began.  This  was  called  the  second  Punic  war.  The  Cartha- 
ginians were  commanded  by  Hannibal,  who  proved  himself  one  of 
the  greatest  generals  that  ever  lived. 

3.  Hannibal  transported  his  army  across  the  Mediterranean  Sea  to 
Spain,  and  thence  marched  toward  Italy.  In  his  progress  it  was  ne- 
cessary that  he  should  cross  the  Alps.  The  summits  of  these  moun- 
tains are  many  thousand  feet  in  height,  and  were  covered  with  ice  and 
snow;  in  some  places  Hannibal  had  to  cut  a  passage  through  the 
solid  rock. 

4.  After  crossing  these  mountains,  several  battles  were  won  hy  the 
Carthaginians.  At  length  the  two  Roman  consuls,  with  a  large  army, 
encountered  Hannibal  and  his  soldiers  at  Cannae.  Here  the  Romans 
were  defeated  with  dreadful  slaughter.  One  of  the  consuls  fled  ;  the 
other  was  slain,  and  forty  thousand  men  were  left  dead  on  the  field. 

5.  Rome  had  now  no  army  to  protect  it.  If  Hannibal  had  marched 
thither  immediately,  it  is  probable  that  he  might  have  taken  the  city. 
But  he  delayed  too  long,  and  the  Romans  made  preparation  to  defend 
themselves. 

Ch.  LXXIII. —  1.  What  war  now  broke  out?  Which  side  was  victorious.''  2.  Wheq 
diil  the  second  Punic  war  begin  ?  Who  led  the  Carthaginians?  3.  What  did  Hannibal  do  ' 
Haw  did  his  army  cross  the  Alps?  4.  Describe  the  battle  of  Cannae.  6.  WhatofRome.it 
this  time  ' 


ROME.  127 

6.  Haanibal  never  won  such  another  victory  as  that  at  Cannae,  for 
the  Romans  soon  enlisted  new  armies,  and  fought  more  successfully 
than  before.  Scipio,  their  best  general,  sailed  over  to  Africa,  in  order 
to  attack  Carthage.     Hannibal  immediately  followed  him. 

7.  A  battle  was  fought  between  him  and  Scipio  at  Zama.  The 
Carthaginians  had  a  multitude  of  elephants.  These  animals  were 
wounded  by  the  Roman  darts,  and  the  pain  made  them  rush  through 
the  field,  trampling  down  whole  ranks  of  Hannibal's  army. 

8.  The  Carthaginians  were  entirely  defeated,  and  Hannibal  himself 
barely  escaped  amid  the  rout  and  confusion.  This  battle  put  an  end 
to  the  second  Punic  war. 

9.  But  a  third  war  between  Rome  and  Carthage  broke  out  in  about 
fifty  years.  The  Romans  were  commanded  by  another  Scipio,  who> 
was  as  valiant  as  his  namesake,  but  the  Carthaginians  had  no  longer 
a  Hannibal. 

10.  This  third  Punic  war  ended  in  the  destruction  of  Carthage. 
The  city  was  set  on  fire,  and  continued  to  burn  during  seventeen  days. 
Many  of  the  citizens  threw  themselves  into  the  flames,  and  perished. 
This  happened  in  the  year  137  before  the  Christain  era. 

1 1.  Scipio  returned  to  Rome,  and  was  rewarded  with  a  triumph. 
As  this  was  the  highest  honor  that  a  Roman  general  could  attain,  and 
as  such  triumphs  were  often  given  to  successful  commanders,  I  will 
tell  my  readers,  in  the  next  chapter,  what  Scipio's  triumph  was. 


CHAPTER  LXXIV.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Scipio's   Triumph. 

1.  Scipio,  on  his  return  from  Carthage,  stopped  at  the  Campus 
Martius,  which  was  a  plain  on  the  outside  of  Rome.  From  thence 
he  was  escorted  into  the  city  by  a  grand  procession. 

2.  First  came  a  band  of  musicians,  playing  their  loudest  strains  on 
all  sorts  of  instruments.  Then  followed  a  drove  of  oxen,  which  were 
to  be  sacrificed  in  the  temples  of  the  gods.  Their  horns  were  gilded,, 
and  garlands  were  wreathed  around  their  heads. 

3.  Next  came  a  train  of  cars,  heavily  laden  with  the  rich  spoils  that 
had  been  taken  at  Carthage.  There  was  gold  and  silver  in  abun- 
dance, and  statues,  pictures,  and  magnificent  garments.  The  brilliant 
armor  of  the  vanquished  army  was  likewise  piled  upon  the  cars. 

4.  Then  were  seen  some  elephants,  treading  along  like  moving" 
hills.  These  huge  animals  were  trained  to  war,  and  were  able  to 
carry  a  whole  company  of  soldiers  on  their  backs. 

6.  What  of  Scipio?  Who  followed  him  ?  7.  Where  was  a  battle  fought?  Whatof  ele- 
phant? -i.  Which  side  were  defeated  ?  What  of  Hannibal?  9.  Who  led  the  Romans  in 
the  third  Funic  war?  Whatof  the  Carthaginians?  JO.  When  was  Carthage  burnt?  11. 
How  Scipio  rewarded  ?  Ch.  LYXIV. — 1.  Where  was  the  Campus  Martius?  What  of 
the  procession?  2.  What  came  first  ?  What  was  done  with  the  oxen  ?  3.  With  what 
were  the  cars  laden?     4.  What  of  elephants? 

II* 


128  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

5.  Next  appeared  a  melancholy  troop  of  the  vanquished  Cartha- 
ginians. Their  chains  clanked  as  they  walked  heavily  onward. 
Among  them  were  all  the  principal  men  of  Carthage,  and  thry  droop- 
ed their  heads  in  shame  and  sorrow,  regretting  that  they  had  not 
perished  in  the  flames  of  their  city. 

6.  Behind  the  sad  troop  came  another  loud  band  of  music  drown- 
ing the  groans  of  the  captives  with  the  uproar  of  a  hundred  instru- 
ments. There  were  likewise  dancers,  whose  garb  made  them  appear 
like  monsters,  neither  beasts  nor  men.     These  wore  crowns  of  gold. 

7.  Then  came  a  splendid  chariot,  adorned  with  ivory,  and  drawn 
by  four  white  horses  all  abreast.  In  this  chariot  stood  the  triumphant 
Scipio,  dressed  in  a  purple  robe,  which  was  covered  with  gold  em- 
broidery. His  face  was  painted  with  vermilion,  and  he  had  a  crown 
of  laurel  on  his  head. 

8.  A  golden  ball  hung  at  his  breast ;  and  in  his  right  hand  he  held 
an  ivory  sceptre,  with  a  golden  eagle  at  the  top.  But  in  the  same 
chariot  stood  a  slave,  who  kept  whispering  to  Scipio,  "  Remember 
that  thou  art  but  a  man !  "  And  these  words  seemed  to  sadden  Sci- 
pio's  triumph. 

9.  Around  the  chariot  was  a  great  throng  of  Scipio's  relatives,  and 
other  citizens,  all  clothed  in  white.  Next  came  the  consuls  and  all 
the  members  of  the  Roman  senate,  in  their  robes  of  ceremony. 

10.  Last  in  the  procession  marched  the  victorious  army.  Their 
helmets  were  wreathed  with  laurel.  The  standard-bearers  carried 
eagles  of  gold  and  silver,  instead  of  banners.  As  they  moved  onward, 
they  sang  hymns  in  praise  of  Scipio's  valor,  and  all  the  Roman  citi- 
zens joined  their  voices  in  the  chorus.  In  this  manner,  the  processiop 
passed  through  the  streets  of  Rome  and  entered  the  doors  of  the 
capitol. 


CHAPTER  LXXV.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Sylla  and  Marius. 

1.  The  Romans  still  continued  to  make  conquests.  Not  longaftei 
the  ruin  of  Carthage,  the  whole  of  Spain  became  a  province  of  Rome. 
There  was  likewise  a  war  with  Numidia,  a  country  of  Africa,  now 
called  Algiers.  Jugurtha,  the  Numidian  king,  was  brought  prisoner 
to  Rome,  and  starved  to  death  in  a  dungeon. 

2.  There  was  afterwards  a  Social  war,  beginning  in  the  year 
91  before  Christ.  This  war  was  called  Social,  because  it  was 
between    the  Romans  and   the    neighboring  states  of  Italy,  who 

5.  Describe  the  appearance  of  the  captive  Carthaginians.  In  what  battle  were  they 
taken  prisoners  ?  G.  Wliat  of  Musicians  and  dancers?  7.  How  did  Scipio  appear?  What 
did  the  slave  whisper  in  his  ear  ?  What  was  the  effect  of  what  he  said  ?  9.  What  fol- 
lowed the  chariot  ?  10.  Describe  the  victorious  army.  Where  did  the  procession  stop  ? 
Ch.  LXXV.— 1.  What  of  the  Romans  ?  What  of  Spain  ?  Where  was  Numidia  ?  Direc- 
tion from  Rome  ?  Carthage?  Whatofit?  Its  king  ?  3  When  did  t  lie  social  war  begin  ? 
How  many  men  were  killed  in  this  war?     Who  was  Mithridates  ?     Where  was  Poutus? 


ROME.  129 

had  been  their  friends  and  allies.  Three  hundred  thousand  men 
were  killed  on  both  sides.  Then  there  was  a  war  with  Mithridates, 
the  powerful  king  of  Pontus,  in  Asia  Minor.  He  was  not  entirely 
vanquished  till  forty  years  afterwards. 

3.  In  the  course  of  all  this  fighting,  two  Roman  commanders  ac- 
quired great  renown.  One  was  named  Marius,  and  the  other  Sylla. 
Maria's  was  a  rude  and  daring  soldier,  knowing  nothing  but  how  to 
fight.  Sylla  was  likewise  a  good  soldier,  but  also  a  person  of  great 
elegance  and  polished  manners- 

4.  These  two  generals  became  so  great  and  powerful,  that  each 
was  envious  of  the  other.  They  therefore  began  a  civil  war,  in 
which  Romans  fought  against  Romans.  I  will  relate  an  incident  in 
order  to  show  the  horrors  of  this  war. 

5.  One  of  Sylla's  soldiers  had  killed  another  that  fought  for  Ma- 
rius. He  began  to  strip  him  of  his  armor ;  but  on  taking  off  the 
helmet  which  had  concealed  the  dead  man's  face,  he  saw  that  it  was 
his  own  brother.  The  wretched  survivor  placed  the  body  on  a  fu- 
neral pile,  and  then  killed  himself. 

6.  In  the  outset  of  the  struggle  with  Sylla,  Marius  was  beaten; 
but  he  afterwards  gained  possession  of  Rome.  He  now  resolved  to 
put  to  death  every  person  that  was  not  friendly  to  his  cause.  Sena- 
tors and  other  distinguished  men  were  publicly  murdered.  Dead  bo- 
dies were  seen  everywhere  about  the  streets. 

7.  But  Marius  could  not  escape  the  misery  which  his  wickedness 
deserved.  He  was  so  tortured  by  remorse,  that  he  contracted  a  habit 
of  drinking  immoderately.    This  brought  on  a  fever,  of  which  he  died. 

8.  After  the  death  of  this  wicked  man,  Sylla  returned  to  Rome  at 
the  head  of  a  large  army.  He  declared  himself  dictator;  and  his 
word  then  became  the  sole  law  of  Rome.  Like  Marius,  he  deter- 
mined to  massacre  all  his  enemies.  As  fast  as  they  were  killed,  their 
bloody  heads  Avere  brought  to  them. 

9.  When  Sylla  had  shed  as  much  blood  as  he  desired,  he  suddenly 
resigned  his  power.  Everybody  was  surprised  at  this,  but  nobody 
lamented  it;  nor  were  there  any  mourners  when  this  cruel  and  wick- 
ed man  died,  which  happened  soon  after. 


CHAPTER  LXXVL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Cneius  Pompey  and  Julius  Ccesar. 

1.  If  the  Roman  people  had  loved  liberty  as  well  as  they  once  did, 
they  never  would  have  borne  the  tyranny  of  Sylla  and  Marius.  But 
they  had  become  addicted  to  luxury,  by  the  riches  which  they  had 
acquired  from  their  conquests  in  alt  parts  of  the  world. 

3.  What  of  the  Roman  commanders  ?  Marius?  Sylla?  4.  What  war  broke  out  ill 
Rome?  5.  Relate  a  horrid  incident  in  this  war.  6.  What  did  .Marius  do  ?  7.  What  w.ie 
hufate?  8.  What  did  Sylla  do  ?  Give  an  account  of  his  proceedings.  0.  Wnat  act  of 
Syria's  surprised  everybody .'     L'ii.  LXXVI. — I    What  of  the  Roman  people  ? 


130  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

2.  Owing  to  their  continual  wars,  they  had  also  accustomed  them- 
selves to  consider  successful  warriors  as  the  greatest  men  on  earth. 
Soldiers  must  obey  their  leaders,  without  asking  why  or  wherefore 
and  all  the  Roman  people  felt  like  soldiers.  Thus  the  very  same 
causes  which  rendered  the  Romans  so  invincible  to  their  enemies, 
made  them  liable  to  be  enslaved  by  any  great  general  who  should  be 
ambitious  of  enslaving  them.     And  such  a  general  soon  appeared. 

3.  After  the  death  of  Sylla  and  Marius,  the  two  most  valiant  and 
distinguished  warriors  were  Pompey  and  Caesar.  Poinpey  was  tht 
'eldest.  He  had  grown  famous  by  vanquishing  Mithridates,  and  by 
many  other  victories.  He  had  conquered  fifteen  kingdoms,  and  takeik 
eight  hundred  cities. 

4.  The  name  of  this  illustrious  leader's  rival  was  Julius  Caesar.  He 
was  the  most  beautiful  person  in  Rome.  He  had  fought  in  Gaul, 
Germany,  and  Britain,  and  had  overcome  three  millions  of  men,  and 
killed  one  million.     His  soldiers  idolized  him. 

5.  At  last,  like  Sylla  and  Marius,  these  two  generals  became  so 
great  and  powerful,  that  the  world  was  no  longer  wide  enough  for 
them  both.  They  each  collected  great  armies,  in  which  all  the  Ro- 
man soldiers  were  enlisted,  on  one  side  or  the  other. 

6.  They  encountered  each  other  at  Pharsalia,  in  Macedon.  The 
best  part  of  Pompey's  army  consisted  of  a  multitude  of  the  young 
Roman  nobility.  These  youths  had  very  handsome  faces;  and  it 
was  chiefly  owing  to  this  circumstance  that  Pompey  lost  the  victory. 

7.  Caesar  ordered  his  rough  and  weather-beaten  soldiers  to  aim 
their  blows  right  at  the  faces  of  their  enemies.  The  latter  were  so 
afraid  that  their  beauty  would  be  spoiled,  that  they  immediately 
turned  and  fled.     A  complete  victory  was  gained  by  Caesar. 

8.  Pompey  made  his  escape  into  Egypt,  but  was  there  murdered. 
His  head  was  cut  off  and  brought  to  Caesar,  who  turned  aside  his 
eyes,  from  the  bloody  spectacle,  and  wept  to  think  that  so  mighty  a 
warrior  had  met  with  so  sad  a  fate. 


CHAPTER  LXXVII.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Ceesar  usurps  the  Supreme  Poxoer. 

1.  When  the  Roman  senate  heard  of  Caesar's  victory,  they  pro- 
claimed a  solemn  thanksgiving  to  the  gods.  Supreme  power  was 
granted  him  for  life,  with  the  title  of  dictator.  His  person  was  de- 
clared sacred  and  inviolable. 

2.  His  statue  was  placed  among  those  of  gods  and  heroes,  in  the 

2.  What  was  the  consequence  of  continual  war?  3.  What  generals  appeared  after  Ma- 
rius and  Sylla?  What  had  Pompey  done  ?  4.  What  of  Pompey's  rival,  Julius  Caesar: 
6.  What  did  these  great  generals  do?  6.  Where  was  a  hattle  fought?  What  of  Pom- 
iiey's  army?  7.  Bv  what  means  did  Caesar  vanquish  the  followers  of  Pompey?  8.  What 
become  of  Pompey?  Why  did  Caesar  woep  at  his  death.  Ch.  LXXVII.— 1  What  di<? 
the  Romans  do  alter  CaesaT's  victory  ?     0.    What  of  Caesar's  statue  ? 


ROME.  131 

capitol.  It  stood  next  to  that  of  Jupiter,  and  bore  this  impious  in- 
scription,— "  The  statue  of  C^sar  the  demi-god."  This  proves  mat 
the  Romans  were  already  slaves,  when  they  thus  deified  a  mortal  man. 

3.  Caesar  had  now  but  one  other  wish  to  gratify.  He  desired  to  beai 
the  name  of  king.  He  endeavored  to  gain  the  good-will  of  the  sol- 
diers and  people,  in  order  that  they  might  gratify  his  ambition.  For 
this  purpose  he  spent  immense  sums  in  entertainments  and  magnifi- 
cent spectacles. 

4.  On  one  occasion,  he  made  a  feast  for  the  whole  Roman  people. 
Twenty-two  thousand  tables  were  set  out  in  the  streets  of  Rome. 
All  sorts  of  delicious  food  and  drink  were  heaped  upon  them.  The 
meanest  beggar  was  at  liberty  to  sit  down  and  eat  his  fill. 

5.  Most  of  the  Romans  had  now  lost  the  noble  spirit  which  had 
animated  their  forefathers.  They  were  willing  to  be  governed  by  any 
man  who  would  feed  them  with  delicacies,  and  amuse  them  with 
splendid  shows,  as  Caesar  did.  It  must  be  owned,  also,  that  Caesar 
had  many  noble  and  amiable  qualities. 

6.  The  people  therefore  had  a  fondness  for  their  tyrant.  They 
loved  to  behold  him,  at  the  public  spectacles  and  entertainments,  sit- 
ting in  a  gilded  chair  of  state,  with  a  golden  crown  upon  his  head. 
Had  he  asked  it,  they  were  even  ready  to  fall  down  and  worship  him. 

7.  But  there  were  a  few  Romans  of  the  old  stamp  who  loved  lib- 
erty for  its  own  sake.  There  were  others,  also,  who  hated  Caesar 
because  he  had  wronged  them,  or  because  he  was  more  powerful 
than  they.  These  two  sorts  of  persons  formed  a  conspiracy  to  kill  him. 

8.  The  two  chief  conspirators  were  Brutus  and  Cassius.  Brutus 
was  a  dear  lover  of  liberty,  and  a  true  friend  of  Rome.  He  also  loved 
Caesar,  and  was  beloved  by  him.  But  he  resolved  to  assist  in  slay- 
ing him  in  order  that  his  country  might  be  free. 

9.  Cassius  formed  the  same  resolution ;  but  it  was  chiefly  because 
he  hated  Caesar.  Sixty  other  senators  were  engaged  in  the  plot. 
Most  conspirators  endeavor  to  do  their  work  in  secrecy  and  at  mid- 
night. But  the  blood  of  Caesar  was  to  be  shed  in  broad  daylight,  and 
in  the  great  hall  of  the  senate-house. 


CHAPTER  LXXVIII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Assassination  of  Julius  Casar. 

1.  On  the  fatal  morning,  Caesar  set  forth  from  his  mansion.  There 
»vasa  great  throng  of  flatterers  and  false  friends  around  him.  As  he 
'came  down  the  steps  of  tbe  portal,  a  gray-bearded  philosopher  pressed 
through  the  crowd  and  put  a  paper  into  his  hand.     It  contained  an 

3.  What  did  this  great  conqueror  now  desire?  What  did  he  Jo  to  obtain  his  wilh? 
4.  Describe  the  feart?    5.  State  of  the  Romans  ?    6.  Wh,  "*     ogee?    7.  Who 

formed  a  conspiracy  to  kill  Caesar  ?  S.  Who  were  Brutus  and  <  assius .'  Why  did  they 
each  determine  to  kill  Caisar  ?  9.  How  was  the  conspiracy  carried  on  ?  Cn.  LXXVIII. 
—I.  Describe  Caesar's  departure  from  his  house  '  What  happened  as  he  came  down  the 
itepo' 


132  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

account  of  the  whole  plot.  If  Caesar  had  read  it,  it  would  have  costf 
all  the  conspirators  their  lives,  and  have  saved  his  own  life.  But  he 
gave  it  to  one  of  his  secretaries,  and  walked  onward. 

2.  As  Caesar  passed  through  the  streets  of  Rome,  he  looked  round 
at  the  crowd  of  obsequious  senators,  and  listened  to  the  shouts  of  the 
multitude.  He  felt  that  he  was  the  most  exalted  man  in  all  the 
world.  But  his  heart  was  "not  at  ease;  for  he  also  felt  that  he  had 
enslaved  his  country. 

3  The  proud  procession  ascended  the  steps  of  the  senate  house 
and  passed  into  the  hall.  Along  the  sides  of  this  hall  were  ranged 
statues  of  many  famous  Romans,  and  among  them  stood  the  marble 
image  of  Pompey,  whose  bloody  head  had  been  brought  to  Caesar. 
Just  as  Caesar  was  passing  in  front  of  Pompey's  statue,  Metellus 
Cimber,  one  of  the  conspirators,  knelt  down  and  took  hold  of  his  robe. 
This  was  the  signal  for  the  attack. 

4.  Casca,  who  was  behind  Caesar,  drew  a  dagger  and  stabbed  him 
in  the  shoulder.  "  Wretch !  what  doest  thou  ?"  cried  Caesar, 
snatching  the  weapon.  The  other  conspirators  now  rushed  upon 
him.  But  he  defended  himself  with  the  valor  he  had  shown  in  a 
hundred  battles. 

5.  At  length  Brutus  pressed  forward  and  struck  him  with  his 
dagger.  When  Caesar  saw  that  the  hand  of  his  dear  friend  was 
raised  against  his  life,  he  made  no  more  resistance.  "  And  thou  too 
Brutus  !"  he  said,  with  one  reproachful  look. 

6.  Then  covering  his  head  with  his  mantle,  that  his  enemies 
might  not  behold  the  death-pang  in  his  face,  he  fell  down  at  the 
pedestal  of  Pompey's  statue.  The  marble  countenance  of  the  statue 
seemed  to  look  down  upon  him,  and  Pompey  was  avenged. 

7.  The  conspirators  dipped  their  weapons  in  the  blood  that  flowed 
upon  the  pavement.  Brutus  raised  his  dagger  aloft,  and  called  to 
Cicero,  the  illustrious  orator  and  patriot.  "  R.ejoice,  father  of  our 
country !"  he  exclaimed,  pointing  to  the  prostrate  form  of  Caesar,  "  for 
Rome  is  free !" 

8.  But  alas !  when  the  souls  of  a  whole  people  are  enslaved,  it  is 
not  the  death  of  any  single  man  that  can  set  them  free.  And  thus,  as 
my  readers  will  perceive,  the  mighty  victim  died  in  vain. 


CHAPTER  LXXIX.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Consequences  of  Ccesar's  Death. 

1.  The  death  of  Caesar  took  place  forty-three  years  before  the 
Christian  era.     The  affairs  of  Ptome  were  thrown  into  great  confusion 

2.  What  did  he  see  on  looking  around  him  ?  How  did  he  feel  ?  3.  Where  did  the  jto- 
cession  march?  What  were  ranged  around  the  hall?  What  happened  as  Caesar  was 
passing  the  statue        "  Who  first  stabbed  him?     How  did  he  defend  himself? 

6.  Who  gave  Caesai  uio  seconu  mow?     How  did  he  receive  it?     6.  Describe   his   death  ? 

7.  What  did  Brutus  and  the  conspirators  now  do  ?  8.  Why  did  Ca;sar  die  in  vain?  Ch. 
LXXIX. — 1.  When  did  Cajsar's  death  take  place?  What  of  Rome?  The  friends  of 
Csesar  ? 


ROME.  133 

by  it.     Caesar's  friends  found  no  great  difficulty  in  persuading  the 
people  that  he  had  been  unjustly  murdered. 

2.  Brutus,  Cassius,  and  the  other  conspirators  were  compelled  to 
flee  from  the  city.  Three  men  then  usurped  the  government,  and 
were  called  triumvirs,  or  a  triumvirate.  Their  names  were  Mark 
Antony,  Lepidus,  and  Octavius.  The  latter  was  Caesar's  nephew, 
and  had  been  his  adopted  son. 

3.  The  triumvirate  resolved  to  secure  themselves  in  power  by 
murdering  all  who  were  opposed  to  them.  They  made  a  list  of  three 
hundred  senators  and  more  than  two  thousand  knights,  and  offered 
rewards  for  killing  them.  They  exulted  when  the  heads  of  their 
victims  were  laid  at  their  feet. 

4.  One  of  these  wicked  triumvirs  presented  the  head  of  his  own 
brother  to  his  colleagues.  Another  brought  his  uncle's  head.  No 
friend,  nor  relative,  nor  patriot  was  spared  if  he  was  suspected  of 
being  opposed  to  the  triumvirate. 

5.  In  the  mean  time,  Brutus  and  Cassius  were  in  Greece.  They 
had  collected  an  army  of  a  hundred  thousand  men  ;  Mark  Antony  and 
Octavius  marched  against  them;  and  a  battle  was  fought  atPhillippi. 
Brutus  and  Cassius  being  defeated,  they  both  committed  suicide. 

6.  The  triumvirate  had  now  got  all  the  power  into  their  own 
hands.  But  they  soon  quarrelled  among  themselves.  Lepidus  was 
turned  out  of  office,  and  banished.  Mark  Antony  and  Octavius  then 
made  war  upon  one  another,  like  Marius  and  Sylla,  and  like  Pompey 
and  Caesar. 

7.  The  good  fortune  of  Octavius  gave  him  the  victory,  and  Antony 
killed  himself  with  his  own  sword,  as  I  have  related  in  the  history  of 
Egypt.  Octavius  had  no  longer  any  rivals,  and  was  now  sole  master 
of  Rome  and  its  dominions.  He  was  afraid  to  assume  the  title  of 
king,  but  called  himself  emperor,  and  Augustus  Caesar. 

8.  In  addition  to  several  other  titles,  the  senate  gave  him  that  o 
Pater  Patriae,  or  Father  of  his  Country.  This  was  merely  a  piece  C 
flattery.  Yet  there  were  now  so  few  good  men  in  Rome,  that  perhaps 
Octavius  made  a  better  use  of  his  power  than  any  other  would  have 
done. 

9.  His  reign  from  this  time  was  peaceful  and  quiet,  and  offers  few 
events  that  need  to  be  recorded  in  this  brief  history.  Nearly  the 
whole  world  was  under  his  sway,  and  therefore  he  had  no  occasion 
to  increase  his  dominions  by  going  to  war.  The  greatest  glory  of  his 
times  consists  in  the  works  of  poets  and  other  men  of  genius. 

in.  Octavius,  or,  as  he  is  always  called,  Augustus  Caesar,  reigned 
orty-one  years,  and  died  at  the  age  of  seventy-six,  in  the  year  14 
after  the  birth  of  Christ.  You  will  observe  that  it  was  during  his 
reign  that  Christ  appeared  in  Palestine. 

2.  Who  were  obliged  to  fly  from  the  city?  Who  now  governed  Rome?  Who  wn 
Octavius?  3.  What  did  the  triumvirate  do  ?  4.  What  acts  of  cruelty  did  they  perform  ? 
6.  Where  now  were  Brutus  and  Cassius  ?  Who  opposed  them?  Where  was  the  battle 
fought?  Fate  of  Brutus  and  Cassius?  6.  What  of  the  triumvirate?  7.  Which  of  the 
triumvirs  triumphed?  What  became  of  Antmiy?  What  did  Octavius  call  himself  ?  S. 
What  other  name  did  the  senate  give  him?  9-  Describe  the  reigu  of  Augustus.  10.  How 
long  did  he  reign  ?     When  did  he  die  ? 

12 


134  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 


CHAPTER  LXXX.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  the  great  Power  and  Extent  of  the  Roman  Empire 
in  the  Time  of  Augustus. 

1.  As  Rome  was  now  at  its  greatest  height  of  wealth  and  splendor 
I  shall  try  to  give  you  some  idea  of  the  extent  and  power  of  this  vas 
empire,  and  then,  having  told  you  a  little  more  of  its  history,  I  shall 
say  something  about  the  manners  and  customs  of  the  ancient  Roman 
people. 

2.  In  the  time  of  Augustus,  the  Roman  empire  embraced  all  the 
nations  of  Europe,  except  a  few  northern  tribes,  who  maintained 
their  independence.  It  included  England,  France,  Spain,  Germany, 
all  the  States  of  Italy,  Greece,  the  country  now  occupied  by  Turkey 
in  Europe,  beside  many  other  nations. 

3.  In  Asia,  it  embraced  all  the  kingdoms  from  Asia  Minor  on  the 
west,  to  India  on  the  east.  Of  course,  it  included  Asia  Minor,  Syria, 
Palestine,  Arabia,  Persia,  Parthia,  and  many  other  countries. 

4.  It  included  the  whole  northern  portion  of  Africa,  from  Mauri- 
tania, now  Morocco,  on  the  west,  to  Ethiopia  on  the  east.  This  was 
the  whole  of  Africa  then  known ;  the  interior  being  only  inhabited 
by  scattered  bands  of  negroes. 

5.  It  seems  wonderful  that  one  country  could  govern  so  many 
nations.  This  was  done,  however,  by  placing  Roman  governors  over 
these  various  kingdoms ;  the  governors  being  sustained  by  a  multi- 
tude of  Roman  soldiers. 

6.  During  this  period,  the  people  of  Rome  had  great  skill  in  archi- 
tecture, sculpture,  painting,  and  many  other  arts.  These  arts  were 
extended  to  all  parts  of  the  empire. 

'  7.  Thus  a  multitude  of  cities  in  various  parts  of  Europe,  Africa, 
and  Asia,  were  filled  with  costly  temples  and  palaces  of  marble,  with 
beautiful  statues  and  valuable  paintings.  The  splendor  and  magnifi- 
cence of  many  of  these  cities,  at  this  period,  was  indeed  wonderful. 

8.  Nor  was  this  all ;  the  Romans  built  many  public  works  of  great 
utility;  they  constructed  roads  paved  with  stone ;  they  built  durable 
bridges,  and  made  aqueducts  for  supplying  the  cities  with  water. 
So  numerous  and  so  permanent  were  these  vast  works,  that  the 
remains  of  them  are  still  to  be  found  in  most  of  those  countries  over 
which  the  Roman  dominion  was  then  established,  though  they  were 
executed  nearly  two  thousand  years  ago. 

9.  But  of  ail  the  cities  in  the  world,  Rome  was  itself  the  most 
wonderful.  In  the  time  of  Augustus,  it  was  fifty  miles  in  circuit, 
and  contained  four  millions  of  inhabitants. 

Ch.  LXXX.— 2.  What  of  Rome  during  the  reign  of  Augustus  ?  What  did  it  include  in 
Europe?  3.  In  Asia?  4.  In  Africa?  What  parts  of  Africa  were  then  known  ?  Tell  the 
direction  of  each  of  the  countries  named  from  Rome.  5.  How  did  Rome  govern  all  these 
nations  ?  6.  What  of  the  people  of  Rome  ?  7.  With  what  were  many  cities  filled?  8. 
What  of  Public  Works  ?    What  of  aqueducts  ? 


ROME.  135 

10.  Like  all  ancient  cities,  it  was  surrounded  by  high,  strong  walls 
of  stone ;  for  in  those  warlike  times,  as  I  have  before  said,  walls 
were  a  necessary  protection  against  the  attacks  of  an  enemy.  The 
walls  of  Rome  were  entered  by  thirty-seven  gates. 

11.  The  interior  of  this  wonderful  city  surpassed  all  description. 
The  various  generals  who  had  conquered  other  countries,  had  robbed 
them  of  their  choicest  treasures,  and  these  had  been  brought  to  Rome 
to  decorate  and  enrich  the  capital. 

12.  There  were  beautiful  statues  from  Greece,  obelisks  and  col- 
umns from  Egypt,  and  a  great  variety  of  curious  and  costly  manufac- 
tures from  Asia.  Gold,  silver,  and  precious  stones  had  been  gathered 
from  every  part  of  the  earth. 

13.  The  city  was  embellished  with  temples,  many  of  them  of 
marble,  and  beautifully  sculptured  ;  there  were  also  theatres,  amphi- 
theatres, porticos,  public  baths,  triumphal  arches,  and  aqueducts. 

14.  In  short,  the  city  of  Rome  was  enriched  with  the  spoils  of  the 
whole  world,  and  had  that  air  of  pomp  and  magnificence  which  suited 
the  capital  of  the  greatest  empire  that  the  world  ever  saw. 


CHAPTER  LXXXL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Means  by  which  Rome  acquired  its  Power. 

1.  I  trust  you  have  now  some  faint  idea  of  the  extent,  wealth, 
and  power  of  the  Roman  empire.  We  cannot  look  back  upon  it  but 
with  feelings  of  admiration ;  yet  when  we  look  at  the  means  which 
had  been  employed  to  establish  this  dominion ;  when  we  look  at  the 
condition  of  mankind  during  that  age,  and  consider  that  this  vast  do- 
minion soon  crumbled  into  atoms;  we  cannot  but  feel  the  strongest 
emotions  of  pain. 

2.  In  the  first  place,  the  means  used  to  aggrandize  Rome  were 
those  of  conquest.  The  Roman  generals  went  abroad  to  subdue  other 
countries,  for  no  other  purpose  than  to  acquire  fame  and  spoils  for 
themselves,  and  power  for  Rome. 

3.  They  slaughtered  the  inhabitants  without  mercy ;  they  robbed 
them  without  scruple,  and  they  subjected  them  to  the  Roman  yoke 
without  the  slightest  regard  to  the  rights  of  mankind. 

4.  Such  were  the  means  by  which  the  fabric  of  Roman  power  was 
erected.  And  what  must  have  been  the  condition  of  mankind  during 
the  seven  hundred  years  that  Rome  was  carrying  on  its  wars  for  no 
other  purpose  than  to  enslave  the  world  ? 

5.  It  is  true  that  a  few  men,  generals,  senators,  consuls,  and  govern- 
ors, might  have  lived  in  splendor,  and  enjoyed  wealth   and  fame. 

9.  Describe  the  city  of  Rome.  11.  How  was  the  capital  decorated?  13.  What  of 
lemples  ?  Other  buildings  ?  14.  What  of  the  cily  ?  Ch.  LXXXI.— 1.  What  must  we  feel 
upon  reading  the  history  of  Rome  ?  2.  By  what  means  did  Rome  rise  to  sucli  a  high  pilch 
of  renown?  What  of  the  Roman  general*?  4.  How  many  years  was  Rome  at  war  with 
other  nations?  5.  What  classes  may  have  been  benefitted  by  these  wars  ?  Who  suffered 
from  them  ? 


13G  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

Some  of  the  Roman  soldiers,  too,  might  have  led  lives  of  adventure, 
gratifying  to  hold  and  restless  spirits. 

6.  But  how  much  suffering,  sorrow,  and  despair  must  there  have 
been  among  the  millions  of  wounded  men  ;  among  the  millions  who 
were  bereaved  of  their  friends;  among  the  millions  who  were  strip- 
ped of  their  fortunes;  among  the  millions  who  were  reduced  to 
slavery. 

7.  The  simple  truth  is,  that  the  policy  of  Rome  was  wholly  selfish. 
The  Roman  people,  like  the  Greeks,  Persians,  Egyptians,  and  other 
ancient  nations,  had  some  notions  of  virtue,  and  occasionally  displayed 
noble  and  generous  qualities. 

8.  Yet,  like  all  these  nations,  they  were  destitute  of  true  morality  ; 
that  morality  which  Christ  has  taught  in  a  single  sentence ;  Do  to 
another  as  you  would  have  another  do  to  you.  Like  most  other  an- 
cient nations,  R.ome  was  destitute  of  that  true  religion  which  teaches 
mankind,  that  all  power  founded  in  injustice  must  perish. 

9.  Splendid  as  the  Roman  empire  was,  it  was  destitute  of  real 
glory.  Its  splendor  was  acquired  by  robbery,  and  its  fame,  though  it 
might  dazzle  a  heathen,  will  be  regarded  as  a  false  renown  by  the 
Christian. 

10.  In  closing  this  chapter,  it  is  proper  to  state  a  remarkable  fact, 
that  no  heathen  nation  or  country  has  ever  existed,  where  the  people 
were  generally  lovers  of  justice,  truth,  and  charity.  Public  opinion 
in  all  heathen  countries,  ancient  and  modern,  has  been  found  to  be 
an  unsafe  guide  ;  it  is  only  in  Christian  countries,  where  the  laws  of 
truth  and  morality  are  established  on  the  basis  of  the  Bible,  that  the 
national  faith  can  be  trusted. 

11.  Such  as  it  was,  the  power  of  Rome  was  destined  to  speedy  de- 
cay. For  a  time  after  Augustus,  the  empire  maintained  its  sway,  and 
the  magnificence  of  Rome  continued.  The  luxury  of  the  wealthy 
citizens  even  increased,  and  refinement  in  many  respects  was  carried 
to  a  higher  pitch  than  ever. 

12.  But  the  whole  fabric  was  based  upon  a  false  foundation;  and 
in  a  few  centuries  imperial  Rome  was  divided  among  a  host  of  ruth- 
less invaders. 


CHAPTER  LXXXII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Rome  under  the  Emperors. 

1.  The  Roman  empire  had  now  reached  the  height  of  its  power, 
pomp  and  splendor  ;  but  its  decline  had  already  commenced,  because 
the  people  and  their  rulers  were  alike  corrupt.  It  was  like  a  great 
tree  with  wide-spreading  branches,  but  rotten  at  its  trunk. 

7.  What  of  Rome  and  her  citizens  ?  8.  Were  the  people  either  truly  moral  or  reli- 
gious? 9.  What  of  the  splendor  of  Rome  ?  10.  What  may  be  said  of  heathen  nations? 
Christian  nations  ?  11.  State  of  Rome  after  the  death  of  Augustus  ?  12.  What  was  the 
final  fate  of  Rome  ?     Ch.  LXXXII. —  1.  To  what  can  you  compare  the  Roman  empire  ? 


ROME.  137 

2.  la  the  course  of  about  three  hundred  and  fifty  years  after  the 
death  of  Augustus  Caesar,  there  were  thirty-six  emperors  of  Rome ; 
but  I  can  mention  only  a  few  of  them.  They  lived  in  great  luxury 
and  splendor,  but  they  were  generally  such  wicked  persons  that  it 
would  have  been  better  for  the  world  if  they  had  never  lived. 

3.  The  next  emperor  to  Augustus  Caesar  was  Tiberius.  He  was  a 
frightful  looking  object,  being  bald  and  covered  with  sores,  and  his 
disposition  was  far  more  hideous  than  his  aspect.  This  gloomy  tyrant 
suspected  everybody  of  plotting  against  his  life. 

4.  He  put  so  many  people  to  death,  that  their  dead  bodies  were 
piled  in  heaps  in  the  public  places.  He  once  sentenced  a  poor  woman 
to  die,  merely  for  lamenting  the  death  of  her  son.  At  last,  he  fell 
into  a  swoon,  and  his  guards  smothered  him  with  his  bed-clothes. 

5.  His  successor  was  Caligula,  who  wished  that  the  whole  Roman 
people  had  but  one  head,  that  he  might  chop  it  off  at  a  single  blow. 
He  also  was  murdered  by  his  guards,  and  was  succeeded  by  Claudius, 
an  idiot.     Claudius  was  poisoned  bv  his  own  wife. 

6.  Nero  was  the  next  emperor.  His  whole  reign  was  a  scene  of 
bloodshed.  He  murdered  his  mother  and  his  wife.  He  set  Rome  on 
hre,  merely  for  the  pleasure  of  seeing  it  blaze.  While  the  city  was 
in  flames,  he  sat  on  the  top  of  a  lofty  tower,  playing  on  a  harp.  Fi- 
nally, he  was  dethroned,  and  condemned  to  be  beaten  to  death  with 
rods.     To  escape  this  torture,  he  killed  himself. 

7.  The  two  next  emperors  were  Galba  and  Otho.  The  first  was 
killed  by  his  soldiers,  and  the  second  committed  suicide.  The  next 
was  Vitellius.  This  monster  delighted  in  visiting  fields  of  battle,  and. 
snuffing  up  the  smell  of  the  dead  bodies. 

8.  When  the  Romans  grew  weary  of  Vitellius,  they  put  a  rope 
round  his  neck  and  dragged  him  into  the  most  public  part  of  the  city. 
There  they  bespattered  him  with  mud,  and  then  killed  him  in  a  most 
cruel  manner.  His  head  was  put  on  a  lance,  and  his  body  thrown 
into  the  Tiber. 

9.  But  I  am  weary,  my  dear  young  readers  !  My  old  heart  grows  sick 
and  sad,  while  1  speak  to  you  of  these  evil  and  miserable  men.  For- 
get what  I  have  told  you.  Forget  that  such  monsters  have  ever 
existed  in  the  world. 

10.  Or,  if  you  must  remember  them,  remember  too  that  their  fright- 
ful crimes  resulted  from  the  possession  of  more  power  than  mortal 
man  ought  to  possess.  And,  above  all,  remember,  that  if  these 
tyrants  were  the  scourges  of  their  people,  it  was  because  the  people 
had  not  virtue  enough  to  be  free. 

2.  How  ma  ay  emperors  reigned  after  Augustus  ?  What  of  them?  3.  Give  an  account 
of  Tiberius.  5.  Describe  Caligula.  6.  What  of  Nero  ?  7.  What  of  Galba  and  Otho?  Vi- 
telliu»?     10.  What  may  you  remember  of  the  reigns  of  these  monsters? 

12* 


138  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  LXXXIIL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Fall  of  the  Western  Empire  of  the  Romans. 

1.  Yet  there  were  some  good  men  among  the  Roman  emperors. 
Such  were  Vespasian,  Titus,  Antoninus,  Marcus  Aurelius,  Alexander 
Severus,  Aurelian,  and  Diocletian.  But  these  good  men  would  doubt- 
less have  been  better,  if  their  evil  fortunes  had  not  made  them 
emperors. 

2.  The  first  emperor  who  became  a  convert  to  Christianity  was 
Constantine  the  Great.  He  began  to  reign  in  the  year  306  after  the 
Christian  era.  By  him  the  seat  of  government  was  transferred  from 
Rome  to  Constantinople. 

3.  The  religion  of  Christ  was  planted  in  various  parts  of  the 
Roman  empire  by  the  apostles,  but  the  first  Christians  were  much 
persecuted.  Some  were  whipped,  many  were  imprisoned,  and 
thousands  were  murdered. 

4.  Still  their  numbers  increased.  At  length  the  emperor  Constan- 
tine ordered  that  the  persecutions  should  cease,  and  he  himself  be- 
came a  convert  to  Christianity.     This  took  place  in  311. 

5.  It  is  said  that  Constantine  was  one  day  riding  at  the  head  of  his 
army,  when  he  saw  a  splendid  cross  in  the  heavens,  upon  which  was 
written,  "  Conquer  by  this  sign."  It  is  supposed  that  this  vision  per- 
suaded the  emperor  of  the  truth  of  the  Christian  religion,  and  induced 
him  to  adopt  it  as  the  religion  of  the  state. 

6.  From  this  period,  Christianity  flourished  for  a  considerable  time. 
The  mythology  of  Greece  and  Rome,  which  had  been  extended 
throughout  the  Roman  empire,  gave  way  before  it.  Many  of  the 
temples  were  converted  into  churches,  and  the  people  who  had  been 
accustomed  to  bow  down  before  the  statues  of  Jupiter  and  other 
imaginary  gods,  knelt  in  humiliation  at  the  foot  of  the  cross. 

7.  In  the  year  364  after  the  birth  of  Christ,  the  Roman  dominions 
were  divided  into  the  Eastern  and  Western  empires.  The  capital  of 
the  Eastern  empire  was  Constantinople,  formerly  Byzantium.  The 
fate  of  this  will  be  briefly  related  in  the  history  of  the  Turks. 

8.  The  capital  of  the  Western  empire  was  Rome.  But  this  impe- 
rial city  was  no  longer  powerful  enough  to  defend  itself  against  the 
nations  which  it  had  formerly  conquered.  It  was  ravaged  by  hordes 
of  barbarians  from  the  north  of  Europe,  consisting  of  Huns,  Goths, 
Vandals,  &c. 

Ch.  LXXXIII. — 1.  What  good  emperors  were  there  ?  2.  What  of  Constantine  ?  When 
did  he  begin  to  reign  ?  Where  was  the  seat  of  government  placed  by  Constantine  ?  What 
was  the  former  name  of  Constantinople  ?  3.  What  of  the  religion  of  Christ  ?  First  Chris 
tians  ?  Persecutions?  4.  What  did  Constantine  do  ?  5.  What  is  said  to  have  happened 
to  Constantine  ?  6.  What  of  Christianity  from  this  period?  Mythology  of  Greece  and 
■Rome?  Temples?  People?  7.  What  took  place  364  A.  C?  What  was  the  capital  of 
ihe  Eastern  Empire  of  Rome?  S.  The  Western  empire  ?  How  was  it  ravaged  and  laid 
waste  ? 


ROME.  139 

9.  Of  these  rude  tribes  I  shall  speak  more  particularly  hereafter. 
It  is  sufficient  for  the  present  to  say  that  they  were  bold  warriors,  and 
chose  rather  to  obtain  wealth  by  plundering  the  rich  inhabitants  of 
Italy,  than  by  the  cultivation  of  their  own  more  sterile  soil. 

10.  One  of  the  first  and  fiercest  of  these  northern  invaders  was 
Alaric,  king  of  the  Goths,  who  led  a  large  army  against  Rome,  and 

l threatened  the  destruction  of  the  city.  The  inhabitants  were  very 
■different  from  the  ancient  Romans,  and  being  overawed  by  the  daring 
freebooter,  promised  him  large  sums  of  money.  But  this  promise  not 
being  fulfilled,  Alaric  took  the  city  and  gave  it  up  to  plunder. 

11.  For  six  days,  imperial  Rome  was  a  scene  of  pillage  and  mur- 
der. Thousands  of  the  citizens  were  slain,  and  a  large  portion  of  the 
place  was  reduced  to  ashes.     This  occurred  in  the  year  410. 

12.  After  a  while,  Alaric  retired ;  but  about  the  year  445,  Attila, 
leader  of  the  Huns,  threatened  to  follow  the  example  which  Alaric 
had  set.  But  in  the  midst  of  his  projects  he  died ;  and  Rome,  for  a 
time,  was  saved. 

13.  In  the  year  476,  the  whole  Western  empire,  with  Rome  itself, 
was  entirely  subjugated  by  Odoacer,  the  leader  of  another  northern 
tribe,  called  the  Heruli ;  and  it  remained  under  this  dominion  for 
many  years. 

14.  In  the  year  537,  these  barbarians  were  driven  from  Rome. 
This  triumph  was  effected  by  Belisarius,  an  illustrious  commander  in 
the  service  of  the  emperor  of  the  East.  The  Eastern  and  Western 
empires  were  then  re-united,  but  only  for  a  short  period.  Italy,  as 
well  as  Rome,  from  this  time  frequently  changed  hands,  being  some- 
times under  the  sway  of  northern  kings,  and  sometimes  under  the 
Greek  emperors. 


CHAPTER  LXXXIV.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Progress  of  the  Decline  of  Rome. 

1.  In  the  tenth  century,  the  emperor  of  Germany  claimed  Italy  as 
part  of  his  dominions.  Several  cities  resisted  his  authority.  When 
the  emperor,  whose  name  was  Otho,  heard  of  it,  he  invaded  Italy, 
and  went  to  Rome. 

2.  He  took  possession  of  the  palace,  and  prepared  a  magnificent 
feast.  All  the  great  men  of  Rome  were  invited.  The  emperor  sat 
at  the  head  of  the  table,  on  a  splendid  throne.  The  guests  seated 
themselves,  expecting  to  be  feasted  with  luxuries. 

3.  But  before  they  had  eaten  a  mouthful,  Otho  made  a  sign,  im- 
mediately the  hall  was  filled  with  armed  men.     The  emperor  ordered 

9.  What  of  the  northern  barbarians  .'  10.  What  of  Alaric?  What  occurred  in  410? 
12.  What  happened  about  the  Year  446  ?  13.  What  of  Odoacer?  14.  What  happened  in 
537?  Who  was  Belisarius?  What  did  he  do?  What  of  the  Eastern  and  Western  Em- 
pires?    What  of  Italy?     Rome?     (Jh.  LXXXIV.—l.  What  of  the  emperor  of  Germany  .' 


140  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

the  guests  neither  to  move  nor  speak,  on  pain  of  death,  whatevet 
might  take  place.  They  trembled,  and  wished  themselves  away 
from  the  banquet. 

4.  One  of  the  emperor's  officers  stood  up  and  read  aloud  the  names 
of  all  who  had  opposed  his  authority.  These  unfortunate  men  had 
been  invited  to  the  feast,  and  were  now  sitting  at  the  table.  The 
emperor  commanded  them  to  be  dragged  into  the  middle  of  the  hall 
and  put  to  death.  The  executioner  was  in  readiness,  with  a  broad 
and  heavy  sword.  One  after  another,  the  heads  of  the  condemned 
persons  rolled  upon  the  floor  of  the  hall.  No  mercy  was  shown  to 
any  of  them. 

5.  When  this  dreadful  scene  was  over,  the  emperor  turned  his  at- 
tention to  the  banquet.  His  stern  and  wrathful  aspect  became  mild 
and  pleasing.  He  endeavored  to  make  the  other  guests  enjoy  them- 
selves; but  probably  their  appetites  were  not  increased  by  the  sight 
of  dead  bodies  on  the  bloody  floor.  This  is  a  horrible  story,  and  I 
(3nly  tell  it  to  show  you  the  barbarous  and  cruel  character  of  the  men 
of  those  times. 

6.  In  the  course  of  years,  Italy  was  divided  into  several  separate 
states,  or  sovereignties.  The  principal  of  these  were  Naples,  Tus- 
cany, Parma,  Lombardy,  Genoa,  and  Venice.  Rome,  with  other  ter- 
ritories, was  given  to  the  pope.  Of  these  I  shall  give  you  a  brief 
account ;  but  before  I  proceed  farther  with  the  history  of  Rome,  I 
will  tell  you  something  of  the  manners  and  customs  of  the  ancient 
Romans. 

7.  Let  me  remark,  however,  that  Rome  was  now  totally  changed 
from  what  it  was  in  the  days  of  Augustus.  Not  only  was  the  em- 
pire broken  in  pieces,  but  the  proud  city  of  Rome  itself  had  lost  its 
former  glory. 

8.  The  number  of  its  inhabitants  had  greatly  diminished ;  many 
of  its  most  splendid  edifices  were  falling  into  ruins,  and  the  people, 
having  been  long  mixed  with  barbarians,  had  lost  their  former  polish, 
and  become  partially  barbarous  themselves. 

9.  Even  the  language  of  Rome  and  of  all  Italy  gradually  became 
changed.  The  people  had  formerly  spoken  the  Latin  language  ;  but 
this  became  mingled  with  the  languages  of  the  northern  invaders, 
and  thus  the  modem  Italian  was  gradually  formed.  Such  were  the 
wonderful  changes  in  Rome  and  Italy  ! 


2.  3.  4.  5.  What  did  he  do  ?  Describe  the  banquet?  6.  How  did  Italy  become  divided  ? 
7.  What  of  the  changes  ia  Rome .'  8.  What  of  the  inhabitants,  edifices,  &c?  9.  The 
language  of  Rome  ? 


ROME, 


141 


CHAPTER  LXXXV.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Manners  and  Customs  of  the  Ancient  Romans. 

1.  I  am  now  going  to  give  you  an  account  of  the  manners  and 
customs  of  the  great  people  whose  history  you  have  just  read.  I  shall 
tell  you  about  their  domestic  habits,  and  about  their  public  observ- 
ances ;  about  their  state  of  society,  agriculture,  shows,  dresses,  reli- 
gion, marriage  ceremonies,  funeral  rites,  military  institutions,  and 
public  edifices. 


Senator.  Emperor. 

2.  The  people  of  Rome,  as  you  know,  were  at  first  divided  into 
two  classes,  the  patricians  and  plebeians.  It  was  to  the  struggles  for 
power  between  these  ranks  that  most  of  the  difficulties  in  the  state 
were  owing.  To  these  ranks  a  third  was  afterwards  added,  called 
equites,  or  knights;  the  custom  of  making  slaves  of  the  subjects  of 
conquered  nations,  introduced  a  fourth  division. 

3.  You  have  seen  that  the  government  of  Rome  was  subject  to 
very  numerous  changes.  At  one  time  it  was  under  a  kinjr,  at  others 
under  consuls,  dictators,  emperors,  &c.  The  other  officers  of  the  state 
were  numerous,  and  invested  with  very  different  degrees  of  power. 

4.  The  ministers  of  religion  among  the  Romans  did  not  form  a 
distinct  order  of  citizens,  but  were  chosen  from  the  most  virtuous 
and  honorable  men  of  the  state.  These  attended  to  the  sacrifices  of 
beasts  to  the  gods,  and  other  religious  rites.  The  superstitions  of  the 
time  gave  rise  to  the  establishment  of  a   college   of  augurs,  whose 


Ch.  LXXXV. — 2.  Into  what  four  ranks  or  classes  were  the  Roman  citizens  divided  ? 
8.  Wlrit  of  the  government  ?  Officers  of  state  ?  4.  Ministers  of  religion?  Superstitions' 
How  did  the  augurs  proceed  ? 


142  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

business  it  was  to  explain  dreams,  oracles,  and  prodigies,  and  to  fore- 
tell future  exents. 


Leading  a  bull  to  be  sacrificed  at  one  of  the  temples, 

5.  They  drew  their  auguries  or  presages  concerning  futurity,  from 
the  appearance  of  the  heavens,  and  inspection  of  the  entrails  of  birds 
and  beasts.  Of  course  they  could  no  more  divine  the  future,  than 
the  old  women  you  may  sometimes  meet  with  in  our  villages,  who 
pretend  to  "  tell  you  your  fortune,"  by  examining  the  grounds  of 
coffee  cups. 

6.  The  weakest  and  most  ignorant  are  now  too  well  informed  to 
give  credit  to  these  pretences.  From  this  fact  you  can  form  some 
opinion  as  to  the  general  intelligence  of  the  Romans  compared  with 
that  of  our  own  countrymen. 

7.  The  augurs  at  Rome  interpreted  the  will  of  the  gods  in  the 
affairs  of  making  war  and  peace,  and  none  dared  to  dispute  their 
authority.  No  business  of  importance  could  be  proceeded  in,  without 
first  consulting  them  ;  and  their  advice,  whatever  it  might  be,  was,  by 
a  decree  of  the  senate,  to  be  strictly  observed. 

8.  The  office  of  an  augur  was  important  and  honorable,  and  was 
sought  after  by  many  of  the  principal  families  in  the  Roman  senate. 
Cato,  the  censor,  was  a  member  of  their  college,  and  Cicero  also ; 
though  they  both  appear  to  have  been  fully  sensible  of  the  extrava- 
gance and  folly  of  the  art  they  practised.  A  remark  is  attributed  to 
Cato,  that  he  wondered  how  one  augur  could  look  in  the  face  of 
another  without  laughing. 


CHAPTER  LXXXVI.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  Religion.     Deities.     Temples.     Marriage. 

1.  The  religion  of  the  Romans  was  borrowed  from  the  Greeks,  and 
included  the  worship  of  Jupiter,  and  a  multitude  of  other  deities. 
Every  virtue  and  vice  of  the  human  heart,  every  faculty  of  the  mind 

6.  Wliat  is  said  of  these  superstitions?     7.  The  augurs?     8.  The  office  of  an  augur? 
Cato  and  Cicero?     Remark  of  Cato  ?     Ch.   LXXXVf. — 1    What  of  religion  ? 


ROME.  143 

and  body,  every  property  of  the  real  and  imaginary  world,  was  pre- 
sided over  by  its  peculiar  god.  Every  grove  and  mountain  and 
stream  had  its  nymph  or  naiad,  and  every  hero  and  sage  of  the 
country  was  elevated  to  the  rank  of  a  divinity. 

2.  Every  religious  sect  was  tolerated  at  Rome  except  the  Jews  and 
the  Christians.  These  were  persecuted  with  unrelenting  cruelty, 
until  the  mild  precepts  of  the  true  religion  triumphed  over  super- 
stition and  ignorance.  Christianity  at  length  prevailed  over  con- 
flicting opinions,  and  was  adopted  as  the  religion  of  the  state 
A.  D.  311. 

3.  The  number  of  deities  whom  the  Romans  worshipped  occasioned 
the  erection  of  a  great  multitude  of  temples.  Many  of  these  were 
very  splendid  edifices,  adorned  with  all  the  arts  of  sculpture,  and 
filled  with  offerings  and  sacrifices.  The  priests  attended  at  the 
temples,  and  sacrificed  sheep,  bulls,  oxen,  and  other  animals. 

4.  Those  temples  erected  to  the  inferior  deities  were  of  less  magni- 
ficence and  grandeur,  and  were  merely  styled  sacred  houses.  In  the 
dwelling  of  every  wealthy  family  there  was  a  private  chapel,  in 
which  they  worshipped  their  household  gods.  Ancient  Rome  is  said 
to  have  contained  four  hundred  and  twenty  temples,  dedicated  to 
different  deities. 

5.  Marriage  was  very  much  favored  by  the  laws  of  Rome,  and 
severe  penalties  were  inflicted  on  those  who  remained  single.  At 
one  period,  the  censors  obliged  all  the  young  bachelors  to  make  oath 
that  they  would  marry  within  a  certain  tinse.  Augustus  increased 
the  penalties  on  bachelors,  and  bestowed  rewards  on  those  who  were 
parents  of  a  numerous  offspring. 

6.  The  parties  were  betrothed  some  time  before  the  actual  cele- 
bration of  the  marriage.  This  was  attended  with  many  ceremonies, 
at  which  the  priests  and  augurs  assisted.  The  contract  of  marriage 
was  drawn  up  in  the  presence  of  witnesses,  and  confirmed  by  the 
breaking  of  a  straw  between  the  engaged  pair. 

7.  The  bridegroom  then  presented  his  bride  with  the  wedding 
ring,  and  the  father  of  the  bride  gave  a  great  entertainment.  The 
wedding  ring  was  worn  on  the  third  finger  of  the  left  hand,  from  a 
notion  that  a  nerve  of  that  finger  communicated  directly  with  the 
heart. 

8.  In  dressing  the  bride,  they  never  failed  to  divide  her  locks  with 
the  point  of  a  spear,  to  signify  that  she  was  about  to  become  the  wife 
of  a  warrior.  They  then  crowned  her  with  achaplet  of  flowers,  and 
put  on  her  a  veil  proper  for  the  occasion. 

9.  Her  toilet  being  completed,  she  was  led  in  the  evening  towards 
the  bridegroom's  house,  by  three  boys,  whose  parents  were  still  alive. 
Five  torches  were  carried  before  her,  and  also  a  distaff  and  spindle. 
Having  come  to  the  door,  she  herself  bound  the  posts  with  wreaths 
of  wool,  washed  over  with  melted  tallow,  to  keep  out  witchcraft. 

10.  In  going  into  the  house,  she  was  by  no  means  to  touch  the 
threshold,  but  was  to  be  lifted  over  by  main  strength.     When  she 

2.  Toleration?  Christianity?  8.  What  is  said  of  (lie  Roman  deities  ?  Their  temples  1 
Housohold  gods?     5.  Marriage?     Penalties?     G.  Describe  the  marriage  ceremonies' 


144  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

had  entered,  the  hridegroom  presented  her  with  the  keys,  and  with 
two  vessels  containing  fire  and  water. 

11.  The  bridegroom  then  gave  a  grand  supper  to  all  the  company. 
The  festival  was  accompanied  with  music  and  dancing,  and  the 
guests  sang  verses  in  praise  of  the  new-married  couple. 


CHAPTER  LXXXVII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  Funeral  Pales  and  Ceremonies. 

1.  The  funeral  rites  of  the  Romans  present  a  very  interesting 
subject.  Burning  the  dead,  though  practised  by  the  Greeks  from  very 
early  times,  was  not  adopted  in  Rome  till  the  later  ages  of  the  re- 
public. It  afterwards  became  universal,  and  was  continued  without 
interruption  till  the  introduction  of  Christianity.  It  then  gradually 
fell  into  disuse. 

2.  Among  the  Romans,  the  bed  of  the  sick  was  never  abandoned 
to  hired  nurses  and  servants.  It  was  attended  by  the  relatives  and 
intimates,  who  waited  till  the  last  hour,  and  bade  a  last  farewell  to 
their  dying  friend. 

3.  The  body  of  the  dead  was  bathed  in  perfumes,  dressed  in  rich 
garments,  and  laid  out  on  a  couch  strewed  with  flowers.  The 
outer  door  of  the  house  was  shaded  with  branches  of  cypress.  Ac- 
cording to  the  heathen  mythology,  Charon  would  not  convey  the  de- 
parted spirit  across  the  Styx,  without  payment  of  a  fixed  toll.  A 
small  coin  was  therefore  placed  in  the  mouth  of  the  deceased  to 
meet  this  demand. 

4.  The  funeral  took  place  by  torchlight.  The  body  was  borne  by 
near  friends  and  relatives,  on  an  open  bier  covered  with  the  richest 
cloth.  Lictors  dressed  in  black  regulated  the  procession.  If  the 
deceased  had  been  a  soldier,  the  badges  of  his  rank  were  displayed, 
and  the  corps  to  which  he  belonged  marched  with  their  arms  re- 
versed. 

5.  Before  the  corpse  were  carried  images  of  the  deceased  and  his 
ancestors.  Then  followed  musicians,  and  mourning  women,  who 
were  hired  to  sing  his  praises,  and  dancers  and  buffoons,  one  of  whom 
attempted  to  represent  the  character  of  the  dead  man,  and  imitate 
his  manner  when  alive. 

6.  The  family  of  the  deceased  followed  the  bier  in  deep  mourning; 
the  sons  with  their  heads  covered,  and  the  daughters  unveiled  and 
with  their  hair  dishevelled.  Magistrates  and  patricians  attended 
without  their  badges  or  ornaments,  and  the  procession  was  closed  by 
the  freed  men  of  the  deceased,  with  the  cap  of  liberty  on  their 
heads. 

7    The  funeral  ceremonies  of  a  man  of  rank  were  distinguished  by 

Ch.  LXXXVII.— 1.  What  is  said  of  burning  the  dead?  2.  The  bed  of  the  dying  ?  3. 
body  of  the  dead?  Notion  in  regard  to  Charon?  4.  5.  6.  Describe  the  funeral?  7 
Oration  ? 


ROME.  145 

an  oration  in  his  honor,  pronounced  over  the  hody  hy  a  friend.  The 
scene  of  this  display  was  the  capitol,  and  in  the  later  ages  of  the  re- 
public it  became  very  common.  While  the  practice  of  burial  pre- 
vailed, the  body  was  either  interred  without  a  coffin,  or  placed  in  a 
kind  sf  deep  chest  called  a  sarcophagus. 

S.  On  the  termination  of  the  rites,  the  sepulchre  was  strewed  with 
flowers,  and  the  mourners  took  a  farewell  of  the  remains  of  their 
friend.  The  attendants  were  then  sprinkled  with  water  by  the 
priests,  and  all  were  dismissed. 

\Sf.  When  the  custom  of  burning  the  body  was  introduced,  a  funeral 
pile  was  raised  in  the  form  of  an  altar,  and  the  bier  was  placed  upon  it. 
The  procession  then  moved  slowly  about,  to  the  sound  of  solemn  mu- 
sic, when  the  nearest  relative  advanced  from  the  train  with  a  lighted 
torch,  and  set  fire  to  the  pile. 

10.  Perfumes  and  spices  were  then  thrown  into  the  blaze,  and  the 
embers  were  quenched  with  wine.  The  ashes  were  collected  and 
placed  in  a  costly  urn,  which  was  deposited  in  the  family  sepulchre. 
In  the  funeral  solemnities  of  a  soldier,  his  arms,  and  the  spoils  he  had 
won  from  the  enemy,  were  sometimes  added  to  the  funeral  pile. 

11.  It  was  a  horrid  belief  of  the  heathen  nations,  that  the  spirits  of 
the  dead  were  pleased  with  blood.  It  was  their  custom  to  sacrifice 
on  the  tomb  of  the  deceased  those  animals  to  which  he  was  most  at- 
tached during  his  life.  In  the  more  remote  and  barbarous  ages,  men 
were  often  the  victims;  so  also  were  domestic  slaves  and  captives 
taken  in  war ;  and  sometimes  friends  gave  themselves  to  be  sacrificed 
from  feelings  of  affection. 

12.  No  burial  was  allowed  within  the  walls  of  the  city,  except  to 
the  vestal  virgins,  and  some  families  of  high  distinction.  The  tombs 
of  military  men  were  usually  raised  in  the  field  of  Mars,  and  those  of 
private  citizens  in  the  gardens  of  their  villas,  or  by  the  side  of  the 
public  roads. 

13.  Many  of  these  monuments  are  still  standing.  The  sepulchres 
of  the  great  and  wealthy  are  engraven  with  long  and  pompous  lists 
of  their  titles,  honors,  and  achievements.  The  tombs  of  the  humble 
bear  but  a  simple  lesson  to  the  reader,  and  some  beautiful  and  touch- 
ing expressions  of  sorrow  or  hope  for  the  departed. 

14.  How  much  more  affecting  and  impressive  are  the  simple  rights 
of  Christian  burial,  than  the  pomp  and  splendor  of  the  Roman  !  There 
is  nothing  that  speaks  more  strongly  to  the  heart  than  a  funeral  cere- 
mony in  a  New  England  village. 

15.  Every  thing  is  so  still,  and  simple,  and  unaffected,  that  the 
mind  rests  only  on  the  solemnity  of  death,  without  bein?  distracted 
by  display  arid  splendor.  Prayers  are  said  at  the  house  of  the  deceas- 
ed, the  friends  and  relatives  follow  the  body  in  silent  procession,  and 
enter  with  it  into  the  unadorned  grave-yard  where  the  generations  of 
the  family  are  sleeping. 

16.  The  body  is  consigned  to  the  earth  whence  it  came,  dust  to 
dust.     Prayers  are  again  said,  and  the  mourners  are  dismissed  to  their 

8.  Conclusion  of  the  ceremonies?  9.  Ceremony  of  burning  the  body'  12.  What  it 
•aid  u/  the  burial  places  ?     13.  Monument*  ?     14.  Christian  rites  ? 

13 


140  SCHOOLHISTORY. 

sad  homes,  cheered,  however,  with  the  blessed  consolations  which 
their  religion  promises.  \ 


CHAPTER  LXXXVIIL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Roman  Farms.  Mode  of  Ploughing-.  Farm-houses 
Grain.  Cattle.  Superstitions  of  the  Farmers.  Gar 
dens.     Vines.  n 

1.  I  am  now  going  to  tell  you  about  the  farms  and  gardens  of  the 
Romans.  In  the  early  and  more  virtuous  ages  of  the  state,  the  culti- 
vation of  the  fields,  and  a  few  rude  trades  connected  with  it,  were  the 
only  occupations. 

2.  He  who  was  the  best  husbandman  was  the  most  honored  ;  and 
many  of  the  most  ancient  families  received  their  names  from  their 
success  in  the  cultivation  of  plants  or  the  rearing  of  cattle. 

3.  It  is  probable  that  at  this  period  the  ground  was  broken  up  only 
by  the  spade.  Afterwards,  when  the  farms  were  enlarged,  more  ex- 
peditious means  were  discovered.  Some  of  the  Roman  modes  of 
ploughing  are  still  in  use.  They  always  ploughed  with  oxen,  a  sin- 
gle pair,  or  sometimes  three  abreast,  yoked  by  the  neck  and  horns. 

4.  The  farm-houses  were  at  first  little  huts,  but  they  were  soon  en- 
larged to  suit  the  increasing  possessions  of  the  owners.  We  read,  at 
a  later  period,  of  large  store-houses  and  granaries,  cellars  for  wine  and 
oil,  barns,  together  with  separate  buildings  for  the  care  and  rearing  of 
every  species  of  domestic  animal.. 

5.  The  kinds  of  grain  in  common  cultivation  were  the  same  as 
those  known  in  Europe,  with  the  exception  of  maize,  or  Indian  corn, 
which  was  first  found  in  this  country.  The  ancient  mode  of  convert- 
ing grain  into  meal  was  by  pounding  it,  with  an  instrument  something 
like  the  pestle  and  mortar.  Mills  moved  by  cattle,  and  by  water,  are 
later  inventions. 

6.  Much  care  was  paid  by  the  Romans  to  the  rearing  of  cattle. 
Sheep  were  secured  under  cover  during  the  winter,  notwithstanding 
the  mildness  of  the  Italian  climate.  Shearing  time  was  a  season  of 
general  festivity. 

7.  Goats  were  made  as  profitable  to  the  farmer  as  sheep.  Theii 
hair  was  clipped  every  year  and  woven  into  a  kind  of  coarse  stuff',  and 
their  milk  was  the  chief  supply  of  the  dairy. 

8.  The  Roman  farmers  were  very  superstitious.  They  refrained 
from  all  labor  on  the  fifth  day  of  the  new  moon  ;  on  the  seventh  and 
tenth  they  planted  vines,  and  harnessed  young  oxen  to  the  yoke;  on 
the  ninth  they  commenced  a  journey. 

9.  The  skeleton  of  an  ass's  head  was  hung  up  at  the  boundary  of 

Ch.  LXXXVIII. — 1.  What  were  the  early  occupations  of  the  Romans  ?  3.  What  is  said 
of  their  mode  of  ploughing  ?  4.  Their  farm-houses  ?  Other  buildings?  5.  What  kinds 
of  gmin  were  cultivated  "     6.  What  is  said  of  cattle  ?     8.  Superstitious  of  the  farmers? 


ROME.  147 

the  farm,  to  enrich  the  soil  and  drive  away  the  effects  of  blight.  The 
same  figure  carved  in  brass,  and  crowned  with  vines,  was  affixed  as 
an  ornament  to  their  couches. 

10.  In  the  remote  ages,  the  gardens  of  the  Romans  contained  only 
a  few  of  the  most  common  pot-herbs  and  orchard  trees.  The  more 
delicious  fruits,  and  more  beautiful  flowers,  were  introduced  at  a  much 
later  period  from  Persia  and  other  parts  of  Asia. 

11.  The  style  of  ornamental  gardening  was  heavy  and  formal,  pro- 
ducing a  gloomy  shade,  rather  than  displaying  beautiful  scenery.  It 
was  the  fashion  to  fill  the  gardens  with  dark  walks  shaded  with  ever- 
greens, loaded  with  statues,  and  bounded  by  high  clipped  hedges. 

12.  It  is  supposed  that  the  Romans  obtained  a  knowledge  of  the 
cultivation  of  the  grape,  and  of  the  art  of  making  wine,  from  Greece. 
They  took  great  care  of  their  vineyards,  and  labored  in  cultivating 
the  plants,  with  much  art  and  industry. 

13.  The  mode  of  gathering  and  pressing  the  grape  was  the  same 
that  is  now  practised.  The  vintage  was  a  time  of  festival,  and  the 
rustics  made  merry  with  the  performance  of  a  rude  kind  of  comedy, 
and  pouring  out  libations  of  new  wine  to  Jupiter  and  Venus. 

14.  The  wine  appears  to  have  differed  from  that  of  modern  times; 
it  was  kept  in  jars  formed  like  urns,  some  of  which  are  said  to  have 
been  so  lar^e  as  to  have  made,  when  filled,  a  load  for  a  yoke  of  oxen. 
They  were  commonly  ranged  in  cellars,  but  were  sometimes  buried 
in  the  earth,  or  even  bedded  in  solid  masonry.  The  wine  was  usu- 
ally kept  to  a  great  age.  It  was  held  in  less  favor  than  the  wine  of 
Greece,  and  was  much  cheaper. 


CHAPTER  LXXXIX.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Country  Houses.    Description  of  Pliny' 's  Villa.     Ague- 
ducts. 

1.  I  am  now  going  to  describe  the  Roman  villas,  or  country  seats. 
Originally,  they  were  nothing  more  than  very  humble  farm-houses; 
but,  with  the  progress  of  wealth  and  luxury,  they  were  made  by  de- 
grees more  extensive  and  costly. 

2.  Some  of  them  were  surrounded  with  large  parks,  in  which  deer 
and  various  foreign  wild  animals  were  kept.  Large  fish-ponds  were 
also  not  unfrequently  attached  to  them,  and  were  stocked  at  great 
expense.  Generally,  however,  the  villas  were  merely  surrounded  by 
gardens,  and  in  size  and  appearance  resembled  those  of  modern  Italy. 

3.  The  philosopher,  Pliny  the  younger,  was  a  nobleman  and  man 
of  fortune,  and  the  owner  of  four  magnificent  villas.     Of  two  of  these 

10.  Produce  of  the  gardens?  From  what  countries  did  the  Romans  introduce  the  finer 
fruits  and  (lowers  ?  1 1.  Ornamental  gardening  ?  12.  What  is  said  of  the  grape  ?  Wine  ? 
The  vintage?  14.  Wine  jars  ?  Ch.  LXXXIX.— 1.  What  of  the  Roman  villas?  3. 
Pliny  the  younger? 


148  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

he  has  left  minute  descriptions.  One  of  them  I  will  now  tell  you 
about.  It  was  seated  on  a  rising  ground,  facing  the  south,  with  the 
Apennine  mountains  raising  their  tall  cliffs  in  the  distant  background. 

4.  A  portico  fronted  the  house,  with  a  terrace  before  it,  adorned 
with  various  figures,  and  bounded  by  a  hedge  of  box.  Hence  you 
passed  by  an  easy  descent  into  a  lawn  surrounded  by  walks,  and 
adorned  with  box  cut  into  the  shapes  of  various  animals. 

5.  Beyond  this  lawn  you  entered  a  ground  for  exercise,  laid  out  in 
the  form  of  a  circus,  ornamented  with  well  trimmed  box  and  other 
shrubs,  and  fenced  with  a  wall  covered  by  box.  On  the  outside  of 
the  wall  was  a  meadow,  and  beyond  were  other  meadows,  fields,  and 
thickets. 

6.  Opposite  the  portico  stood  a  square  edifice  which  encompassed 
a  small  area  or  space,  shaded  by  four  plane  trees,  with  a  fountain  in 
the  midst,  refreshing  the  surrounding  verdure.  This  apartment  con- 
sisted of  a  bed-chamber  and  a  dining-room.  A  second  portico  looked 
out  upon  this  little  area. 

7.  Another  room  situated  by  the  nearest  plane  tree,  enjoyed  con- 
stant greenness  and  shade.  In  the  same  building  were  dressing-rooms, 
porticos,  baths,  and  rooms  for  playing  different  games.  The  sides  of 
one  room  were  encrusted  half  way  with  carved  marble;  thence,  to 
the  ceiling,  branches  of  trees  were  painted,  with  birds  intermixed 
with  the  foliage. 

8.  In  front  of  these  buildings  and  porticos  was  a  spacious  circus, 
surrounded  by  plane  trees  covered  with  ivy.     Between  these  were 

filanted  box  and  bay  trees,  mingling  their  shade.  The  inward  circu- 
ar  walks  were  perfumed  with  roses. 

9.  A  thousand  different  and  fantastic  shapes  were  given  to  the  box 
that  bordered  the  straight  and  winding  alleys  that  crossed  the  grounds. 
At  the  end  of  one  of  these  walks  was  an  alcove  of  white  marble, 
shaded  with  vines  and  supported  by  four  pillars. 

10.  A  fountain  here  emptied  itself  into  a  marble  basin  contrived 
with  so  much  art  as  to  be  always  full  without  overflowing.  Some- 
times Pliny  supped  here  with  his  friends,  and  then  the  basin  served 
for  a  table,  the  larger  vessels  bein°;  placed  about  the  margin,  and  the 
smaller  ones  swimming  about  in  the  form  of  little  boats  and  water- 
fowl. 

11.  In  front  of  the  alcove  stood  a  summer-house,  of  exquisite  mar- 
ble, with  projecting  doors  which  opened  into  a  green  inclosure.  Next 
to  this  was  a  private  recess,  furnished  with  a  couch,  and  shaded  by  a 
spreading  vine  which  reached  to  the  top.  Here,  also,  a  fountain  al- 
ternately rose  and  disapperred.  In  different  parts  of  the  walks  were 
several  marble  seats,  and  throughout  the  whole  circus  were  small 
rills  refreshing  the  grass  and  other  plants. 

12.  Such  is  the  description  which  Pliny  the  younger  has  given  us 
of  one  of  his  villas.  You  will  see  that  it  was  very  magnificent;  and 
there  were  many  others  throughout  Italy  of  equal  splendor.     You 

4.  Describe  his  villa.  5.  Ground  for  exercise  ?  6.  Edifice  opposite  the  portico  ?  Roomi 
of  this  building  ?  8.  Circus?  10.  Fountain?  Basin?  11.  Summer-house  ?  Other  orna- 
ments ? 


ROME.  149 

will  perceive  by  this,  that  the  wealthy  Romans  lived  in  a  style  of 
great  luxury  in  the  time  of  the  emperors. 

13.  It  was  not  till  the  year  441  after  its  foundation  that  Rome  ob- 
tained its  supplies  of  water  by  means  of  aqueducts.  They  afterwards 
became  so  numerous  that  it  has  been  calculated  they  furnished  the 
city  about  five  hundred  thousand  hogsheads  every  day.  They  were 
built  of  brick,  and  were  sometimes  thirty,  forty,  or  even  sixty  miles 

n  length. 

14.  The  water  was  conveyed  to  reservoirs,  and  thence  distributed 
through  metal  pipes  over  the  town  in  great  abundance.  Only  three 
aqueducts  now  remain  for  modern  Rome  ;  yet  so  pure  are  the  sources 
from  which  they  draw  their  supplies,  that  few  cities  can  boast  of  such 
clear  and  healthful  water.  • 

15.  Great  attention  was  paid  to  ornament  in  the  erection  of  the 
aqueducts.  One  built  by  Agrippa,  when  sedile  under  Augustus,  con- 
tained one  hundred  and  thirty  reservoirs,  and  five  hundred  fountains, 
adorned  with  statues  and  columns.  Remains  of  many  of  these  great 
works  at  this  day  bear  witness  to  their  beauty  and  convenience. 


CHAPTER  XC.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Military  Affairs  of  the  Romans.  Division  of  the  Army. 
The  Imperial  Eagle.  Music.  Arms.  Dress.  Mili- 
tary Ptewards.     Crowns.      The  Triumph. 

1.  You  know  that  the  Romans  were  almost  continually  engaged  in 
wars.  Their  military  affairs,  therefore,  occupied  the  attention  of  the 
most  distinguished  citizens.  According  to  the  Roman  laws,  every 
freeborn  citizen  was  a  soldier,  and  bound  to  serve  in  the  army  at  any 
period  from  the  age  of  seventeen  to  that  of  forty-six. 

2.  The  Roman  forces  were  divided  into  legions,  each  of  which  con- 
sisted of  three  thousand  foot  soldiers,  and  three  hundred  horsemen. 
The  standard  of  the  legion  was  the  imperial  eagle. 

3.  This  was  made  of  gilt  metal,  was  borne  on  a  spear  by  an  officer 
of  rank,  and  was  regarded  by  the  soldiers  with  a  reverence  which  ap- 
proached to  devotion.  The  cavalry  carried  pennons,  on  which  the 
initials  of  the  emperor  or  of  the  legion  were  embroidered  in  letters 
of  gold. 

4.  The  only  instrument  of  martial  music  among  the  Romans  was 
the  brazen  trumpet.  Some  of  the  soldiers  were  armed  with  light 
javelins,  and  others  with  a  heavier  weapon  of  a  similar  description. 
All  however  carried  shields  and  short  swords,  which  they  wore  on 
the  ri^ht  side. 


13.  Aqueducts?  Quantity  of  water  carried  daily  to  tbe  city?  Describe  tliem.  15.  Aque- 
duct built  by  Agrippa?  Lh  XC. —  1.  What  is  said  of  the  military  afTairs?  1.  Diiisions 
of  the  army?    J.  Standard?    I'cuiiuiis?    4.  Instruments  of  martial  music  ?    Weapon*? 

13  - 


150  SCHOOL   HISTORY.  . 

5.  They  were  dressed  in  a  metal  cuirass,  with  an  under  covering 
of  cloth,  which  was  generally  red,  and  hung  loose  to  the  knee.  On 
the  head  they  wore  brazen  helmets  ornamented  with  flowing  tufts  of 
horsehair.     The  uniform  of  the  generals  was  an  open  scarlet  mantle. 

6.  The  cavalry  wore  a  coat  of  mail,  of  brazen  or  steel  scales,  or  of 
chain-work,  sometimes  plated  with  gold.  Under  this  they  wore  a 
close  garment  which  reached  to  their  buskins.  They  rode  without 
stirrups,  and  their  saddles  were  merely  cloths  folded  to  suit  the  con- 
venience of  the  rider.  The  discipline  of  the  army  was  maintained 
with  great  strictness  and  severity. 

7.  Rewards  of  various  kinds  were  held  out  to  those  who  dis- 
tinguished themselves  by  an  extraordinary  exploit.  A  particular 
kind  of  crown  was  presented  to  him  who,  in  the  assault,  first  scaled 
the  ramparts  of  a  town. 

8.  A  soldier  who  saved  his  comrade's  life  in  battle  was  entitled  to 
the  civic  crown,  which  was  thought  a  distinction  of  the  highest  honor. 
The  general  who  conquered  in  a  battle  was  decorated  with  the  laurel 
leaf. 

9*  But  the  highest  ambition  of  every  Roman  commander  was  to 
obtain  a  triumph.  This  was  the  gift  of  the  senate,  and  was  only 
granted  on  occasions  of  splendid  victory.  When  decreed,  the  general 
returned  to  Rome,  and  was  appointed  to  the  supreme  command  of 
the  city  on  the  day  of  his  entry. 

10.  A  sculptured  arch  was  erected,  under  which  the  procession  was 
to  pass,  and  scaffoldings  were  raised  for  spectators  in  all  the  public 
squares  and  streets.  The  procession  moved  at  daylight  from  beyond 
the  walls  of  the  city. 

11.  A  band  of  cavalry,  with  military  music,  took  the  lead.  They 
were  followed  by  a  train  of  priests  in  their  sacred  robes,  with  attend- 
ants leading  to  sacrifice  a  hecatomb  or  hundred  of  the  whitest  oxen. 
Next  came  chariots  laden  with  spoils,  the  arms  and  standard  of  the 
conquered,  followed  by  long  trains  of  the  captives  conducted  by  lictors. 

12.  Loud  notes  on  the  trumpet  then  announced  the  approach  of  the 
victor,  dressed  in  a  robe  of  purple,  crowned  with  laurels,  and  bearing 
a  sceptre  of  ivory.  He  rode  in  a  splendid  car  drawn  by  four  horses, 
preceded  by  the  Roman  eagle,  guarded  by  a  troop  of  cavalry. 

13.  The  most  distinguished  officers  of  the  army,  in  their  richest 
dress  and  trappings,  surrounded  him ;  a  band  of  children  clothed  in 
white  followed,  flinging  clouds  of  perfumes  and  flowers  on  the  air, 
and  singing  hymns  of  praise  to  the  conqueror. 

14.  Last  of  all  came  the  victorious  "army,  their  weapons  wreathed 
with  laurel,  and  their  burnished  armor  gleaming  in  the  sunshine 
Countless  multitudes  of  the  citizens  lined  the  streets,  and  every  win- 
dow and  every  scaffolding  shone  with  beauty.  The  procession  was 
greeted  on  all  sides  by  loud  acclamations ;  joy  and  revelry  reigned  in 
the  city,  and  a  scene  was  displayed  of  a  magnificence  and  gorgeous- 
ness  not  to  be  paralleled  in  modern  times. 

5.  Dress  of  the  soldiers?  Generals?  6.  Dress  of  the  cavalry  ?  7.  Rewards  of  the  army  ? 
Crowns?     9.   Describe  the  triumph  of  a  victorious  general. 


ROME. 


151 


CHAPTER  XCL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  Naval  Affairs.     The   War  Galley.     Commerce. 
Shoivs  of  Wild  Beasts.     Exhibitions  of  Gladiators. 

1.  The  first  vessel  of  the  Roman  navy  is  said  to  have  been  built 
after  the  model  of  a  Carthaginian  galley,  taken  in  war.  Their  ships 
were  roughly  and  slightly  constructed,  and,  though  very  large,  unfit  to 
contend  with  boisterous  and  tempestuous  weather. 

2.  They  were  clumsy  and  ill-fashioned,  with  a  high  stern  and 
sides,  and  rowed  with  two  or  three  tiers  of  oars  on  different  decks. 
The  prows  of  the  ship  were  armed  with  iron,  usually  carved  into  the 
shape  of  some  animal's  head  ;  the  upper  deck  was  surmounted  with  a 
movable  turret,  from  which  the  soldiers  could  throw  their  weapons 
with  advantage. 

3.  The  merchant  ships  of  the  Romans  were  of  a  size  corresponding 
with  the  purposes  for  which  they  were  intended.  Before  the  dis- 
covery of  the  magnet,  by  which  the  mariner  can  now  direct  his 
course  in  safety  over  the  pathless  waves,  navigation  was  necessarily 
confined  to  the  coast.  These  coasting  vessels  were  considered  large 
if  they  reached  the  burden  of  fifty  tons. 


Roman  Coasting  Vessel. 

4.  Rome  was  long  supplied  with  the  products  of  the  East  by  the 
merchants  of  the  maritime  states  of  the  Mediterranean.  It  was  not 
till  the  conquest  of  Ecrpt  by  Augustus,  that  the  trade  became 
exclusively  her  own.     Of  this  commerce  Alexandria  was  the  centre. 

5.  The  principal  exports  into  Italy  from  India  consisted  of  drugs 
and  spices  ;  of  cotton  cloths  and  muslins,  from  the  coasts  of  Coroman- 
del  and  Malabar;  of  silk  from  China,  and  of  large  quantities  of 
diamonds  and  pearls  from  Bengal,  and  the  pearl  fisheries  near  Cape 

Ch.  XCI.—  1.  First  vessel  of  the  Roman  navy?  S.  Describe  Hie  war  galley.  3.  What 
is  mid  of  the  Roman  merchant  ships?  Navigation?  Coasting  ves9«ls?  4.  How  was 
Rome  supplied  with  the  products  of  the  East?     5.  What  were  the   principal  imports  into 


iraly 


13* 


152  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

Comorin.     From  Persia  and  Arabia  they  procured  the  richest  carpets, 
silks,  and  embroidered  stuffs,  together  with  rice  and  sugar. 

6.  The  first  ampbitheatre  erected  in  Rome,  for  the  sbows  of  wild 
beasts  and  gladiators,  was  a  mere  temporary  building  of  wood,  pro- 
bably erected  by  Julius  Cirsar.  The  Flavian  amphitheatre,  better 
known  by  the  name  of  Colisceum,  was  commenced  in  the  reign  of 
Vespasian,  and  is  supposed  to  have  been  large  enough  to  contain 
upwards  of  eighty  thousand  persons. 

7.  The  wild  beasts  were  secured  in  dens  round  the  arena  in 
the  centre,  which  was  strongly  fenced,  and  surrounded  by  a  canal,  to 
guard  the  spectators  against  their  attacks.  A  vast  number  of  wild 
beasts  were  made  to  destroy  each  other  in  these  very  cruel  exhibi- 
tions. 

8.  Eleven  thousand  are  said  to  have  been  slain  during  four  months 
of  triumph  in  honor  of  a  conquest  over  the  Dacians ;  and  five  hundred 
lions  were  killed  in  a  feAV  days  on  another  similar  occasion. 

9.  The  first  public  combats  of  gladiators  took  place  at  Rome  in  the 
close  of  the  fifth  century  from  the  foundation  of  the  city.  They 
were  exhibited  at  a  funeral.  From  that  period  they  became  frequent 
on  such  occasions  and  afterwards  on  days  of  public  festival  were 
considered  a  material  part  of  the  ceremonies. 

10.  Five  hundred  pairs  of  these  wretched  beings  have  frequently 
been  led  to  the  public  games  to  sacrifice  each  other  for  the  amuse- 
ment of  barbarous  spectators.  They  were  at  first  taken  from  captives 
in  war,  or  malefactors ;  afterwards  from  slaves  trained  to  the  pro- 
fession. 

11.  They  fought  with  various  weapons,  some  in  complete  armor, 
others  with  only  a  trident  and  a  net,  in  which  they  endeavored  to 
entangle  their  adversary  and  thus  slay  him. 

12.  It  is  needless  to  give  a  minute  account  of  these  inhuman  cus- 
toms. They  were  conducted  with  the  most  bloody  and  savage 
spirit,  and  are  sufficient  proofs  of  the  degraded  and  brutalized  condi- 
tion of  the  period  in  which  they  were  tolerated. 


CHAPTER  XCIL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Sports.  Chariot  Racing-.  The  Circus.  Carriages. 
Private  Entertainments.  Supper  Rooms.  Convivial 
Parties.     Luxuries. 

1.  I  will  now  change  the  picture,  and  give  you  an  account  of 
some  of  the  less  barbarous  amusements  of  the  Romans.  Among 
these  were  several  games  of  ball,  played  as  among  us,  both  with  the 
hand  and  foot.     The  young  men  chiefly  engaged  in  sports  in  the  open 

C.  What  is  said  of  the  first  amphitheatre  ?  7.  Destruction  of  wild  beasts  ?  9.  Gladiloria] 
combats?  11.  Weapons  of  tbe  Gladiators?  What  is  said  of  these  exhibition.-?  L'h. 
""'-'I — 1.  Games  of  the  Roman  youths? 


ROME.  153 

air  that  would  make  them  more  active  and  vigorous.  Boxing, 
wrestling,  and  throwing  the  quoit  formed  a  prominent  part  of  these 
amusements;  but  chariot  driving  took  the  lead  of  all  others. 

2.  For  the  better  enjoyment  of  horse  and  chariot  races,  there  was 
an  enclosed  course  immediately  adjoining  the  city,  called  the  circus. 
It  was  rather  more  than  a  mile  in  circumference,  and  was  surrounded 
with  seats  and  three  tiers  of  galleries. 

3.  In  the  centre,  was  a  barrier  of  twelve  feet  in  breadth,  and  four 
eet  high,  around  which  the  race  was  performed  ;  and  at  one  end  was 

a  triumphal  arch,  through  which  the  successful  charioteer  drove, 
followed  by  the  shouts  and  applause  of  the  assembly. 

4.  Four  chariots  usually  started  together,  the  drivers  of  which 
were  distinguished  by  dresses  of  different  colors.  Each  color  had  its 
particular  partizans,  who  betted  largely  on  the  success  of  their 
favorite.  These  sports  were  exceedingly  popular,  and  repeated  in 
endless  succession. 

5.  Of  the  form  of  carriages  in  use  among  the  Romans,  Ave  have  no 
precise  description.  They  were  of  various  kinds,  open  and  covered, 
chairs  and  couches,  borne  on  poles  by  slaves  in  livery.  The  couch 
was  furnished  with  pillows  and  a  mattress,  and  with  feet  of  silver  or 
gold  to  support  it  when  set  down.  There  were  also  close  litters, 
drawn  by  mules,  and  carriages  on  two  and  four  wheels,  paiuted  of 
various  colors,  and  highly  ornamented. 

6.  The  horses  were  yoked  to  the  carriage  by  means  of  a  curved 
cross-bar  passing  over  their  necks,  and  were  directed  by  bridles  aud 
reins,  which  were  sometimes  of  embroidered  silk  with  gold  bits. 

7.  Besides  mules  and  horses,  many  other  animals  were  occasionally 
used  in  carriages,  such  as  dogs,  goats,  and  deer,  and  even  bears, 
leopards,  lions,  and  tigers.  But  this  of  course  was  merely  for  a 
whimsical  amusement,  and  not  for  real  service. 

8.  When  the  Romans  were  poor  and  simple,  they  lived  chiefly  on 
milk  and  vegetables,  with  a  coarse  kind  of  pudding  made  of  Hour  and 
water.  But  as  they  began  to  grow  powerful,  and  to  conquer  the 
neighboring  nations,  they  became  acquainted  with  the  luxuries  of 
the  people  they  subdued,  and  introduced  them  into  their  own  stale. 

9.  As  they  found  in  Greece  models  of  the  fine  arts,  so  Asia  fur- 
nished them  with  new  and  numerous  sources  of  pleasure  in  the 
gratification  of  their  senses.  In  the  later  days  of  the  republic,  great 
attention  was  paid  to  the  arts  of  the  cook,  and  various  apart ments 
were  constructed  in  the  houses  of  the  rich  lor  the  entertainment  of 
company. 

10.  The  supper  rooms  of  some  of  the  emperors  were  hung  with 
cloths  of  gold  and  silver,  enriched  with  jewels.  Tables  were  made 
for  them  of  line  gold,  and  couches  with  frames  of  massive  silver. 
The  Romans  always  reclined  on  couches  to  take  their  meals. 

11.  At  great  entertainments  the  supper  room  was  hung  with 
flowers,  and  the  guests  were  crowned  with  garlands.     The  floor  was 

2.  The  circus?  4.  The  c  hariots  ?  Their  drivers?  5.  What  is  said  of  the  form  of  the 
Carriages?  0.  How  were  the  hor«es  harnessed  aud  managed?  7.  What  other  animals 
were  sometimes  used?  8.  Early  living  of  the  Ruinaus  i  Introduction  of  luxurir»?  9 
Arts  of  cookery  ?      10.  supper  rooms  .' 


154  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

generally  bare,  though  richly  ornamented,  and  the  ceiling  was  inlaid 
with  a  fret-work  of  gold  and  ivory.  Scented  oil  was  used  for  lighting 
the  apartments,  and  massive  carved  lamps  of  figured  bronze  reflected 
their  brilliancy  on  the  gay  and  beautiful  scene. 

12.  Some  of  the  more  voluptuous  and  degraded  of  the  Roman 
emperors,  in  the  decay  of  the  republic,  were  most  extravagant  and 
ridiculous  in  providing  rare  dishes  for  their  table.  The  livers  and 
brains  of  small  birds,  the  heads  of  parrots  and  pheasants,  and  the 
tongues  of  peacocks  and  nightingales,  formed  a  part  of  their  daily- 
food. 

13.  But  the  most  luxurious  dish  that  graced  the  table  of  the  Ro- 
mans was  an  entire  boar,  roasted  and  stuffed  with  game  and  poultry. 
How  miserable  must  have  been  the  condition  of  the  people  whose 
masters  could  lavish  their  wealth  in  such  wanton  and  disgraceful  in- 
dulgence of  the  commonest  appetite  ! 

14.  On  one  occasion,  the  senate  was  assembled  to  consult  on  the 
best  mode  of  dressing  an  immense  turbot  which  had  been  presented 
to  the  emperor.  In  our  time,  a  council  of  cooks  might  have  been 
called  on  an  affair  of  so  much  importance,  but  it  would  hardly  have 
been  a  subject  to  bring  before  the  rulers  of  the  people. 

15.  The  Romans,  however,  would  have  been  less  rapidly  enslaved 
and  degraded,  if  their  emperor  and  senate  had  always  been  employed 
as  innocently  as  in  discussing  the  most  desirable  manner  of  dressing 
«  fish. 


CHAPTER  XCIII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  Theatres.     Clocks  and  Watches.     The  Fine  Arts. 
Boohs  and  Writing.     Costume.     Conclusion. 

1.  Theatrical  entertainments  were  first  introduced  into  Rome  in 
the  year  of  the  city  391.  They  were  originally  little  more  than  dan- 
ces to* the  sound  of  the  flute.  It  was  more  than  a  hundred  years  be- 
fore the  drama  attained  to  much  dignity  or  excellence. 

2.  Actors  were  always  held  in  contempt,  but  were  enabled  from 
the  patronage  they  received  to  accumulate  large  fortunes.  Theatres 
were  at  first  built  in  the  villages  in  the  vicinity;  the  first  permanent 
edifice  of  this  kind  in  the  city  was  built  of  stone,  and  calculated  to 
contain  forty  thousand  spectators. 

3.  The  use  of  such  clocks  and  watches  as  we  have  at  present  wa 
unknown  to  the  Romans.     The  sundial  was  introduced  440  years  af- 
ter the  building'   of  the  city.     About  a  century  afterwards,  a  kind  of 
water-clock  was  introduced,  which  was  contrived  with  much  inge- 
nuity, and  answered  all  purposes  for  the  measurement  of  time. 

11.  Ornaments  of  the  supper  room  ?  12.  Costly  dishes  of  the  Roman  emperors?  14, 
Describe  consultations  held  upon  dishes.  15.  What  of  the  Romans  ?  On.  XCIII. — 1.  When 
were  theatrical  exhibitions  introduced  at  Rome  ?  What  is  said  of  them  ?  '2.  Actors.'  The- 
atres?    3.   Clucks  ami  watches  ?     Sundials?     Water-cluck  ? 


ROME.  155 

4.  The  fine  arts  were  unknown  in  Rome  till  after  the  sixth  centu- 
ry of  her  existence,  when  they  were  introduced  by  the  successful  cap- 
tains of  her  armies,  from  the  nations  they  had  conquered.  After  a 
taste  for  the  fine  arts  had  been  thus  formed,  large  enclosed  galleries 
were  built  around  the  mansions  of  the  rich,  and  were  adorned  with 
the  finest  specimens  of  painting  and  sculpture. 

5.  In  the  dwellings  of  the  most  affluent  patricians,  these  galleries 
also  contained  splendid  libraries,  which  were  open  to  the  inspection 
of  the  learned  and  the  curious.  Collections  of  books  were  then  of 
course  very  rare,  on  account  of  the  great  expense  and  difficulty  of 
transcribing  them. 

6.  They  were  sometimes  written  on  parchment,  but  more  frequent- 
ly on  a  paper  made  from  the  leaves  of  a  plant  called  papyrus.  The 
leaves  were  pasted  together  at  the  ends,  and  then  made  up  into  a 
roll,  which  was  enclosed  in  a  covering  of  skin  or  silk,  fastened  with 
strings  or  clasps. 

7.  Writing  was  performed  with  a  reed,  split  and  pointed  like  our 
pen,  and  dipped  in  ink.  Matters  not  intended  for  preservation  were 
usually  written  with  a  p6inted  instrument  on  tables  spread  with  wax. 
When  letters  were  sent  forward  for  delivery,  they  were  perfumed, 
and  tied  with  a  silkea  thread,  the  ends  of  which  were  sealed  with 
common  wax. 

8.  The  usual  garments  of  the  Romans  were  the  toga  and  the  tu- 
nic ;  the  former  was  a  loose  woollen  robe,  of  a  semicircular  form,  and 
without  sleeves;  the  latter,  a  close  white  garment,  worn  when 
abroad  under  the  toga,  but  alone  in  the  house.  The  men  usually 
went  bareheaded. 

9.  For  the  feet,  the  usual  coverings  were  the  buskin  and  the  san- 
dal. The  buskin  reached  about  halfway  up  to  the  leg;  the  sandal 
was  a  mere  sole,  fastened  to  the  foot  by  straps  and  buckles. 


CHAPTER  XCIV.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Rome  under  the  Popes. 

1.  I  will  now  proceed  to  finish  the  history  of  Rome.  I  have  al- 
ready had  occasion  to  speak  of  the  pope.  This  title  was  given  to  the 
bishops,  at  a  very  early  period  of  the  Christian  church.  At  first,  the 
pope  of  Rome  was  only  one  of  the  superior  dignitaries  of  the  church  ' 
but  in  the  course  of  years  he  became  the  head  of  it,  and  both  claimed 
and  exercised  an  authority  superior  to  that  of  any  king  or  emperor. 

2.  For  a  long  time,  the  popes  of  Rome  had  authority  only  in  mat- 
ters of  religion;  but  Gregory  the  Third,  about  the  year  731,  resisted 
the  Greek  emperor,  who  ruled  over  Italy,  and  established  the  title  of 

4.  Wlial is  sai'1  of  tiio  fine  arts  ?  5.  Libraries?  Books  ?  Paper?  7.  Writing?  Let- 
ters? 8.  Usual  garments  of  the  Romans?  <  H.  XCIV. —  1.  What  of  the  popes  111  early 
times?  3.  What  of  Gregory  III  ?  Whenvai  the  pope's  title  to  rule  over  Rome  cstaU- 
'■sliuJ  ?    Whal  of  popea  in  the  year  700?    Their  pride  and  power? 


156 


SCHOOL     HISTORY. 


the  pope  to  reign  over  Rome  in  matters  of  state.  From  this  time 
forward,  the  popes  rapidly  acquired  power,  and  in  the  year  760,  they 
had  extensive  possessions  and  immense  wealth. 


View  of  modern  Rome. 

3.  The  popes  claimed  the  authority  of  God's  agents  or  viceroys  on 
earth.  They  called  themselves  the  successors  of  St.  Peter,  and  claim- 
ed that  the  keys  of  heaven  and  hell  were  given  into  their  custody. 
No  other  dominion  had  ever  been  like  theirs,  for  they  ruled  over  the 
souls  of  men. 

4.  Other  potentates  have  been  content  with  wearing  a  single 
crown;  but  the  popes  crowned  themselves  with  three,  rising  one 
above  the  other.  They  assumed  the  title  of  Holiness;  but  some  of 
them  were  unholy  men,  being,  as  we  have  reason  to  believe,  full  of 
earthlv  ambition,  and  stained  with  many  sins. 

5.  When  their  power  was  at  its  height,  they  showed  themselves 
to  be  very  haughty.  Few  persons  were  allowed  to  enter  their  pres- 
ence without  kneeling  down  to  kiss  their  toes.  When  they  mounted 
on  horseback,  they  caused  kings  and  emperors  to  hold  their  stirrups. 

6.  They  took  away  kingdoms  from  the  rightful  sovereigns,  and 
gave  them  to  others.  A  pope  by  the  name  of  Clement  declared  that 
God  had  given  him  all  the  kingdoms  of  heaven  and  earth.  If  a.  per- 
son denied  the  pope's  authority,  he  was  sometimes  burnt  alive  ! 

7.  In  1077,  pope  Gregory  obliged  Henry  the  Fourth,  emperor  of 
Germany,  to  stand  three  days,  in  the  depth  of  winter,  barefooted,  at 
his  castle  gate,  to  implore  his  pardon.  In  1191,  another  pope  kicked 
another  emperor's  crown  off  his  head,  while  he  was  kneeling1  before 
him,  to  show  that  the  pope  could  make  and  unmake  kings  at  his 
pleasure. 


S.  What  did  the  popes  claim  ?  What  did  they  call  themselves?  What  of  their  tyranny  ? 
4.  What  of  the  crowns  of  the  popes?  What  title  did  they  assume  ?  5.  How  did  their 
pride  manifest  itself?  0.  What  of  pope  Clxment  ?  What  was  done  to  those  who  resisted 
the  pope?     7.  What  did  pope  Gregory  do  in  1077  ?     What  of  another  pope  in  1191  : 


ROME.  157 

8.  It  was  near  the  year  1100,  that  one  of  the  popes  of  Rome  or- 
dained that  the  title  of  pope  should  be  given  only  to  the  bishop  of 
Rome.  It  was  about  this  period  that  the  power  of  the  pope  was  at 
its  highest  pitch.  For  nearly  four  hundred  years,  this  potentate  con- 
tinued to  exercise  an  almost  undisputed  sway  over  the  people,  and 
even  the  kings  and  princes  of  the  Christian  world. 

9.  During  this  age,  great  darkness  prevailed  throughout  Europe, 
Asia,  and  Africa  ;  and  though  Rome  was  the  seat  of  the  popes,  now 
more  powerful  than  any  sovereign,  the  people  were  generally  in  a 
state  of  ignorance  aud  degradation. 

10.  But  in  the  year  1517,  the  Reformation  was  commenced  by  a 
man  called  Martin  Luther.  He  preached  against  the  power  of  the 
popes,  and  all  Europe  was  shaken  with  the  convulsion  which  follow- 
ed. The  result  was,  that  the  authority  of  the  popes  was  generally 
thrown  off  by  the  governments  throughout  Christendom,  though  it  is 
supposed  that  fifty  millions  of  people  were  killed  in  the  wars  that 
took  place  during  this  period  of  agitation. 

11.  The  pope  still  governs  Rome  and  other  adjacent  territories  in 
the  centre  of  Italy.  His  dominions  are  bounded  north  bv  Lombardy, 
and  in  other  directions  by  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  and  the  Adriatic, 
and  by  the  kingdom  of  Naples,  Modena,  and  Tuscany.  He  is  the 
spiritual  head  of  the  Catholic  church  throughout  the  world. 

12.  The  present  pope  (1848)  is  Pius  IX.,  who  came  to  the  papacy  in 
1847.  He  showed  a  desire  to  improve  the  political  condition  of  his  peo- 
ple, and  hence  acquired  great  credit,  not  onlyin  Italy,  but  other  countries. 

13.  His  efforts,  however,  had  a  different  effect  from  what  he  in- 
tended. They  awaked  a  spirit  of  liberty,  which,  being  aided  by  the 
great  movements  in  the  rest  of  Europe,  caused  a  rebellion  in  Rome.  A 
republic  was  established,  and  the  pope  fled  to  the  kingdom  of  Naples. 
The  republic  was,  however,  overthrown  by  the  French  army,  and  the 
pope  restored  to  his  dominions. 

14.  His  efforts,  however,  have  probably  had  a  different  effect  from 
what  he  intended.  They  have  awaked  a  spirit  of  liberty,  which, 
being  aided  by  the  great  movements  in  the  rest  of  Europe,  has 
caused  the  pope  much  disturbance,  and  threatens  finally  to  frustrate 
the  papal  government,  so  far  as  it  relates  to  temporal  atiairs. 

15,  Travellers  are  wonder-struck  by  these  tokens  of  the  antique 
Roman  greatness.  But  instead  of  the  mighty  warriors  of  old  Rome, 
they  find  only  a  degraded  people.  Their  spirit  has  been  crushed  by 
ases  of  servitude  and  superstition. 

"16.  But  these  ruins  and  relics  are  not  the  only  remains  of  ancient 
Rome.  There  are  many  works  still  existing,  written  by  the  old  Ro- 
man authors.  These  are  in  the  Latin  language,  which,  as  I  have 
before  said,  was  spoken  by  the  Romans.  Many  of  them  are  very  in- 
teresting, and  from  these,  modern  nations  have  derived  a  large  part  of 
their  most  valuable  laws  and  institutions. 

8.  What  of  the  power  of  the  pope  about  the  year  1100?  When  was  it  at  its  highest  pi  tch? 
How  long  did  its  sway  continue.'  9.  What  was  the  state  of  the  world  at  this  time?  Of 
Rome?  10.  What  took  place  in  1517?  What  of  Martin  Luther  ?  What  was  the  result 
of  the  Reformation  ?  11.  What  of  the  pope  at  the  present  day  ?  Where  are  his  domin- 
ions? Of  what  church  is  he  the  head?  13.  What  of  the  present  city  of  Rome  ?  13.  How 
»re  travellers  afTected  in  Rome  ?  What  of  the  people  ?  How  has  their  spirit  been  crush- 
ed ?  14.  What  of  old  Roman  works?  In  what  language  are  they  written ?  What  hav« 
the  moderns  derived  from  these  work*  '      _  . 

14 


158 


SCHOOL    HISTORY. 


CHAPTER  XCV.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  several  other  Italian  States. 


View  in  Venice. 

1.  You  know  that  Italy  is  now'  divided  into  several  distinct  king- 
doms or  states.  Each  of  these  has  its  history,  and  at  some  future  day 
it  will  be  well  for  you  to  read  the  story  of  these  celebrated  countries. 
In  this  little  book  I  can  only  give  you  a  very  brief  account  of  two  or 
three  of  them. 

2.  The  kingdom  of  Naples,  or  the  kingdom  of  the  two  Sicilies,  in- 
cludes the  island  of  Sicily  and  the  southern  extremity  of  the  penin- 
sula of  Italy.  It  embraces  the  foot  of  the  figure  of  the  boot,  which  I 
have  before  mentioned.  This  kingdom  has  a  population  of  eight  mil- 
lions five  hundred  thousand. 

3.  The  history  of  Naples,  after  it  was  separated  from  the  Eoman 
empire,  possesses  very  little  interest.  It  passed  first  into  the  hands 
of  one  tribe  of  northern  invaders,  then  into  the  hands  of  another,  and 
then  into  the  hands  of  another.  After  this  it  was  subject  to  Spain 
and  other  countries,  until  at  length  it  became  an  independent  country, 
under  the  government  of  its  present  race  of  kings. 

4.  The  history  of  Venice  is  more  interesting.  When  the  northern 
barbarians  invaded  Italy  in  452,  the  inhabitants  living  in  the  vicinity 
of  the  present  city  of  Venice  settled  in  the  marshes  along  the  border 
of  the  sea,  and  supported  themselves  by  fishing,  making  salt,  and  by 
commerce. 

5.  In  the  year  S09,  they  commenced  building  the  city  of  Venice  on 

Ch.  XCV. — 1.-  How  i9  Italy  now  divided  ?  2.  What  does  the  kingdom  of  Naples  in 
elude?  Population?  Direction  from  Rome  ?  3.  Its  history?  4.  What  of  the  history  o. 
Venice  ?     6.  When  and  where  was  Venice  built?    What  did  it  become? 


TURKEY.  159 

a  little  island  called  Rialto.  To  this  place  they  transported  their 
riches,  and  soon  the  new  city  became  the  capital  of  the  Republic  of 
Venice.  The  city  and  state  increased,  until  at  length  Venice  was  one 
of  the  most  powerful  states  in  the  world. 

6.  The  inhabitants  paid  great  attention  to  commerce,  and  such  was 
the  number  of  their  ships,  that  in  the  eleventh  century,  Venice  sent  a 
fleet  of  two  hundred  sail  to  assist  in  the  first  crusade.  It  was  on  ac- 
count of  the  interest  which  this  state  had  in  maritime  matters  that 
the  Doge,  who  was  the  chief  officer,  used  to  be  wedded  to  the  sea 
with  pompous  ceremonies. 

7.  The  power  of  Venice  continued  to  increase,  and  in  process  of 
time,  the  proud  city  of  Constantinople  was  captured  by  its  armies, 
aided  by  the  crusaders.  The  spoils  of  the  captured  city,  consisting  of 
gems  and  jewelry,  books,  marbles,  pictures,  statues,  obelisks,  and 
other  costly  treasures,  were  chiefly  carried  to  Venice. 

S.  The  republic  prospered  for  many  years,  and  its  wealth  and  power 
increased,  though  the  people  were  often  governed  in  the  most  cruel 
and  oppressive  manner.  But  I  have  only  room  to  add,  that  toward 
the  close  of  the  last  century,  it  fell  a  victim'  to  the  power  of  France, 
and  since  the  year  1798,  it  has  been  attached  to  the  empire  of  Austria. 

9.  I  could  fill  a  book  with  tales  about  Genoa;  it  was  at  one  time 
the  rival  of  Venice ;  about  Tuscany,  which  is  considered  the  most 
beautiful  portion  of  Italy,  and  about  the  kingdom  of  Sardinia,  which 
lies  in  the  northern  part  of  Italy.  But  as  it  is  impossible  to  get  a  long 
story  into  a  little  book,  I  must  let  these  things  pass. 


CHAPTER  XCVI.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  the  Ottoman  Empire.  Turkey  in  Europe.  Tur- 
key in  Asia.  About  the  Climate,  People,  and  other 
Things. 

1.  The  Turkish  or  Ottoman  empire  is  divided  into  two  parts,  called 
Turkey  in  Europe,  and  Turkey  in  Asia.  It  was  formerly  much  more 
extensive  than  at  present.  It  now  embraces  -a  large  region  of  terri- 
tory in  Europe,  lying  between  Greece  on  the  south,  and  Russia  and 
Germany  on  the  north  ;  this  portion  is  called  Turkey  in  Europe. 
_  2.  Turkey  in  Asia  includes  Asia  Minor  and  Armenia,  Syria,  Pales- 
tine, Mesopotamia,  &c.  Egypt  and  the  Barbary  states  in  Africa  were 
also  subject  to  Turkey,  till  within  a  few  years. 

6.  What  of  the  commerce  of  Venice  ?  Fleet  ?  The  Doge  ?  7  Power  of  Venice  ? 
What  city  was  Uken  by  Venice  and  the  crusaders  ?  What  oi  the  spoils  of  Constantinople  ' 
8.  What  of  Ihe  republic  of  Venice  for  many  years  ?  What  oi  France?  What  of  Venice 
lincelTOS?  9.  What  of  Genoa  ?  Tuscany?  Sardinia?  Ch.  XCVI.— 1.  What  other 
name  lias  the  Turkish  empire  ?  How  is  the  Ottoman  empire  divided  ?  Where  is  Turkey 
in  Europe?  2.  What  docs  Turkey  in  Asia  now  include  ?  What  other  countries  form'i  ly 
belonged  to  the  Turkish  empire  ?     How  i»  Asia  Minor  separated  from  Turkey  in  Europe  > 


ioa 


SCHOOL    HISTORY. 


3.  The  latter  countries,  together  with  Greece,  have  become  wholly 
or  partially  independent  of  the  Turkish  dominion.  The  capital  of 
this  empire  is  Constantinople,  which  I  have  often  mentioned  before, 
and  which  at  this  day  is  one  of  the  greatest  cities  in  the  world. 


4.  The  chief  ruler  or  king  of  the  Turks  is  called  the  Sultan.  He 
lives  at  Constantinople,  in  a  splendid  palace.  Like  most  eastern 
princes,  he  has  two  or  three  hundred  wives,  which  he  keeps  shut  up 
in  a  place  called  the  harem. 

5.  The  Turks  have  long  beards,  wear  turbans  on  their  heads,  and 
a  loose  flowing  robe  over  their  under  dress.  They  sit  on  cushions 
instead  of  chairs,  and  take  their  food  with  their  fingers,  instead  of 
forks.     They  are  fond  of  smoking  very  long  pipes. 

6.  The  Sultan  rules  over  his  country,  not  according  to  certain 
established  laws,  but  according  to  his  own  will.  The  people  gen- 
erally do  exactly  what  he  requires ;  if  they  refuse  to  obey  him,  they 
may  lose  their  property  and  their  heads. 

7.  If  you  were  to  go  to  Turkey,  you  would  discover  that  the 
climate  is  warm,  and  the  country  naturally  fertile;  you  would  also 
see  that  the  people  are  indolent  and  cruel.  You  would  see  that  they 
have  not  many  manufactures,  and  but  little  commerce.  You  would 
see  that  the  lands  are  poorly  cultivated,  and  that  many  tracts  natu- 
rally fruitful  are  barren  and  desolate  for  want  of  tillage. 

8.  You  would  discover  that  the  people  dislike  the  Christians,  and 
worship  according  to  the  faith  of  Mahomet.  You  would  discover 
that  they  have  mosques  instead  of  churches.  At  Constantinople 
there  is  a  very  splendid  edifice,  called  St.  Sophia.  This  was  formerly 
a  Greek  church,  but  it  is  now  converted  into  a  Mahometan  mosque. 

3.  What  of  the  countries  that  formerly  belonged  to  the  Ottoman  empire  ?  Capital  of 
Turkey  ?  What  of  Constantinople  ?  4.  What  of  the  sultan  ?  5.  Describe  the  Turks. 
6.  How  does  the  sultan  rule  the  Turks?  What  of  the  people?  7.  Soil  and  climate  of 
Turkey  The  people  ?  Manufactures  ?  Commerce  ?  Lands  ?  8.  Religou  of  the 
Turkj  ?     What  are  their  places  of  worship  called  ?     St.  Sophia  ? 


ROME.  161 

!  I 

CHAPTER  XCVIL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  the  Saracens.  How  the  Turks  overturned  the 
Saracen  Empire.  How  the  Ottoman  Turks  founded 
the  Ottoman  Empire.  About  Bajazet,  Timour,  and 
others. 

1.  In  the  history  of  Asia,  I  have  given  you  some  account  of  the 
Saracens.  These  you  will  remember  were  Arabs,  among  whom 
Mahomet  and  bis  successors  established  an  empire  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  seventh  century. 

2.  The  kings  or  rulers  of  the  Saracen  empire  were  called  caliphs, 
and  resided  at  Bagdad,  a  splendid  city  which  they  built  near  the 
river  Tigris  in  Mesopotamia.  I  have  told  you  how  these  caliphs  ex- 
tended their  empire  over  a  considerable  part  of  Asia  and  Africa,  and 
iome  portions  of  Europe. 

3.  To  the  north  of  Mesopotamia,  there  were  several  tribes  of 
Tartars,  among  which  were  some  called  Turks.  These  were  daring 
warriors,  and  such  was  their  fame,  that  the  caliphs  induced  many  of 
them  to  come  to  Bagdad  and  serve  as  soldiers. 

4.  In  process  of  time,  the  Turks  acquired  great  influence  at  Bag- 
dad, and  finally  overturned  the  Saracen  empire,  made  themselves 
masters  of  nearly  all  the  Saracen  possessions,  and  adopted  the  Maho- 
medan  religion.  Thus  the  Turkish  empire  became  the  successor  of 
the  Saracen  empire,  and  included  in  its  dominion  Asia  Minor,  Syria, 
Palestine,  and  other  Asiatic  countries,  which  the  Saracens  had  con- 
quered from  the  Greek  empire. 

5.  After  a  while,  the  Turkish  empire,  which  had  been  thus  estab- 
lished, was  overturned  by  another  tribe  of  Turks,  who  called  them- 
selves Ottomans.  These  came  from  the  country  east  of  the  Caspian 
Sea,  and  laid  the  foundation  of  the  present  Ottoman  empire.  This 
took  place  in  the  year  1299 ;  the  founder  of  the  empire  being  Othman' 
the  First. 

6.  The  Greek  empire  had  formerly  included  Asia  Minor,  but  this 
had  been  taken  by  the  Saracens,  and  afterwards  by  the  Turks.  At 
the  time  of  the  Ottoman  invasion,  it  included  little  more  than  what 
is  at  present  called  Turkey  in  Europe,  with  Greece. 

7.  Constantinople,  the  present  capital  of  Turkey,  was  called  Byzan 
tium,  from  Byzas,  who  founded  it  in  715,  B.  C.  It  was  a  flourishing 
city  in  the  time  of  the  early  Greeks.  The  neighboring  country  was 
settled  by  colonies  from  Greece,  and  by  other  tribes.     It  was  con- 


Ch.  Xf'VII. — 1.  What  of  the  Saracens  ?  When  and  by  whom  was  the  Saracen  empire 
established?  2.  What  of  the  caliphs'  Dominion  of  the  caliphs?  2.  Where  were  the 
Turks?  Where  did  they  live  ?  Why  were  they  employed  by  the  caliphs  of  Bagdi id  ?  i. 
What  did  the  Turks  do?  What  of  the  Turkish  empire?  o.  By  whom  was  [he  first 
Turkish  dynasty  overturned  ?  When  was  the  Ottoman  empire  founded  ?  By  whom?  6, 
What   did  the  Greek   empire  formerly  include .'     What  did  it  include  in  Wj? 

■  14* 


1Q2  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

quered  by  the  Romans,  and  the  name  of  Byzantium  was  changed  to 
Constantinople,  by  the  emperor  Constantine,  in  329. 

S.  It  had  before  this  period  fallen  into  decay,  but  it  was  now  re- 
vived, and  Constantine  removed  thither  with  his  whole  court.  It 
thus  became  the  capital  of  the  R-oman  empire.  When  that  was 
divided  into  the  Eastern  and  Western  empires  in  395,  it  was  the 
capital  of  the  former,  which,  as  you  know,  was  often  called  the 
Greek  empire. 

9.  This  continued  with  various  changes,  to  subsist  as  a  distinct 
sovereignty,  till  the  period  of  which  I  am  now  treating.  It  was,  as  I 
have  said,  on  the  brink  of  ruin,  when  the  Ottomans,  who  had  already 
established  themselves  in  Asia  Minor,  and  swallowed  up  the  countries 
formerly  belonging  to  the  Saracen  dominions,  began  to  cast  longing 
eyes  upon  the  Greek  empire  in  Europe. 

10.  The  sultan,  at  this  time,  was  Bajazet.  He  began  to  reign  in 
13S9,  and  was  so  famous  for  his  conquests,  that  the  Turks  called  him 
the  Thunderbolt. 

11.  He  was  preparing  to  attack  Constantinople,  when  a  greater 
warrior  than  he  came  from  Tartary,  and  subdued  him.  This  was 
Tamerlane,  otherwise  called  Timour  the  Tartar,  and  sometimes 
Timour  the  lame  man.  He  defeated  Bajazet  in  a  great  battle,  in 
which  three  hundred  thousand  men  were  slain. 

12.  It  is  said  that  when  Timour  the  lame  man  had  got  Bajazet  the 
Thunderbolt  into  his  power,  he  put  him  into  an  iron  cage,  and  carried 
him  about  for  a  show,  like  a  wild  beast.  Most  conquerors  have  a 
resemblance  to  wild  beasts,  and  it  would  be  well  if  they  could  always 
be  kept  in  iron  cages. 

13.  The  misfortunes  of  Bajazet  prevented  the  Turks  from  conquer- 
ing the  Eastern  empire  of  the  Romans,  for  a  considerable  time.  But 
in  1453,  when  Mahomet  the  Great  was  sultan,  they  took  Constantino- 
ple. The  emperor,  whose  name  was  Constantine,  was  killed.  From 
this  time  forward,  the  Turks  were  securely  established  in  Europe, 
and  the  country  which  they  inhabited  was  called  Turkey. 


CHAPTER  XCVIIL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Sequel  of  the  Turkish  History. 

1.  The  reigns  of  most  of  the  Turkish  sultans  have  been  full  of 
crime  and  bloodshed.     Sultan  Selim,  who  began  to  reign  in  1512,  in- 

7.  What  of  Constantinople  ?  Who  founded  it,  and  when  ?  What  of  it  in  the  time  of  the 
early  Greeks?  When  was  its  name  changed  ?  When  and  by  whom  was  Byzantium  called 
Constantinople?  8.  What  became  of  the  capital  of  the  Roman  empire  ?  What  took  place 
in  395  ?  What  was  called  the  Greek  empire  '  What  countries  did  the  Eastern  empire  of 
the  Romans  include  ?  Ans.  Greece,  Macedon,  what  is  now  called  Turkey  in  Europe,  Asia 
Minor,  and  other  adjacent  countries.  9.  What  of  the  Ottomans  ?  10.  Who  was  Bajazet  ? 
When  did  he  begin  to  reign  ?  What  did  the  Turks  call  him  ?  What  of  Tamerlane  ?  12. 
How  did  Timour  treat  Bajazet  ?  What  of  conquerors  ?  13.  What  happened  in  1453.  I  H. 
XCVIII. — 1.  What  of  the  reigns  of  seme  of  the  Turkish  sultans?  What  of  Sultan  Selim  ' 
What  of  the  Mamelukes? 


SFAIN.  163 

vaded  Egypt,  and  conquered  it.  The  Egyptian  soldiers  were  called 
Mamelukes,  of  whom  I  have  told  you  in  the  history  of  Egypt. 
Thousands  of  them  were  taken  prisoners. 

2.  After  the  victory,  the  sultan  ordered  a  splendid  throne  to  be 
erected  on  the  banks  of  the  river  Nile,  near  the  gates  of  Cairo. 
Sitting  on  this  throne,  he  caused  all  the  Mamelukes  to  be  massacred 
in  his  sight,  and  their  bodies  to  be  thrown  into  the  river. 

3.  Mohammed  the  Third,  who  ascended  the  throne  in  1596,  had 
nineteen  brothers.  All  these  he  caused  to  be  strangled,  so  that  they 
might  not  attempt  to  rob  him  of  his  power. 

4.  Amurath  the  Fourth  became  sultan  in  1621.  This  monster 
caused  fourteen  thousand  men  to  be  murdered.  The  sport  that 
pleased  him  best,  was  to  run  about  the  streets  at  night,  with  a  drawn 
sword,  cutting  and  slashing  at  everybody  whom  he  met. 

5.  These  facts  will  show  the  reader  what  kind  of  government  the 
Turks  have  lived  under.  The  late  sultan,  whose  name  was  Mahmoud 
the  Second,  ascended  the  throne  in  1S08.  He  was  more  enlightened 
than  his  predecessors. 

6.  But  he  was  compelled  to  act  with  great  severity.  This  was  par- 
ticularly the  case  in  regard  to  the  janizaries.  These  were  a  large  body 
of  troops,  established  by  Mahomet  the  Second  in  1300,  and  who  con- 
tinued to  be  a  very  powerful  body  of  soldiers  for  several  centuries. 
Though  called  the  sultan's  guards,  they  became  more  dangerous  than 
all  the  other  subjects  of  the  empire. 

7.  Sultan  Mahmoud  therefore  determined  to  free  himself  from 
their  power.  Accordingly,  in  the  year  1826,  he  ordered  the  rest  of 
his  troops  to  surround  the  janizaries.  This  was  done,  and  they  were 
shot  down  and  massacred  without  mercy.  The  sultan  afterwards 
endeavored  to  reform  the  manners  of  the  Turks,  and  to  make  them 
adopt  the  customs  of  other  European  nations.  In  this  he  had  some 
success,  but  his  progress  was  very  slow.  The  present  sultan,  son  of 
the  preceeding,  is  very  young. 


CHAPTER  XCIX.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Early  History  of  Spain.     The  Moorish  Conquest. 

1.  The  kingdom  of  Spain  is  separated  from  France  by  the  range  cf 
mountains  called  the  Pyrenees.  It  has  Portugal  on  the  west;  its 
other  boundaries  are  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  the  Bay  of  Biscay,  and  the 
Mediterranean  Sea.     The  whole  country  forms  a  large  peninsula. 

2.  Spain  is  a  very  remarkable  country;  it  is  full  of  wild,  rocky 
mountains,  with  beautiful  valleys  between.     The  climate  is  warm 

2.  What  did  the  sultan  order?  3.  When  did  Mohammed  III.  ascend  the  throne  ?  What 
crime  did  he  commit  ?  4.  Who  became  sultan  in  1G>1  ?  What  of  Amurath ?  5.  What  of 
Mahmoud  the  Second  ?  When  did  he  ascend  the  throne  ?  6.  What  of  him?  Who  were 
the  janizaries?  When  were  they  established?  7.  What  was  done  in  1826  ?  What  has 
the  sultan  since  done  ?  Who  is  the  present  sultau  ?  C'h.  XVIX. — How  is  .Spain  separated 
from  France  ?     Boundaries  of  .Spain? 


164  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

and  delightful.     The  country  produces  ahundance  of  grapes,  olives, 
lemons,  almonds,  figs,  citrons,  and  pomegranates. 

3.  Spain  is  celebrated  for  a  very  fine  breed  of  horses.  It  is  also  the 
country  from  which  the  merino  sheep  were  first  brought.  There  are 
many  of  these  now  in  this  country,  and  you  know  they  produce  the 
finest  wool  in  the  world. 

4.  Spain  has  about  as  many  inhabitants  as  the  United  States.  The 
people  are  generally  ignorant  and  superstitious,  but  they  seem  to  be 
very  honest,  ceremonious,  and  polite.  They  are  fond  of  gay  dances 
in  the  open  air.     Madrid,  the  capital  of  Spain,  is  a  very  splendid  city. 

5.  Spain  abounds  in  castles,  churches,  and  palaces,  built  by  the 
Moors,  of  whom  I  shall  soon  tell  you  the  story.  These  edifices  are 
some  of  the  most  wonderful  buildings  in  the  world.  They  are  totally 
unlike  those  of  ancient  Greece  and  Rome.  They  bear  some  resem- 
blance to  what  is  called  the  Gothic  architecture,  specimens  of  which 
are  to  be  found  in  some  of  our  cities. 

6.  If  I  had  time  and  room,  I  should  like  very  much  to  tell  you  a 
long  story  about  Spain  ;  but  I  shall  be  obliged  to  say  very  little  of  it, 
and  leave  you  afterwards  to  pursue  the  subject  in  some  larger  book. 

7.  Little  is  known  about  the  history  of  Spain  till  the  Phoenicians 
made  voyages  thither.  They  came  from  Phoenicia,  which  you  know 
was  close  to  the  land  of  Canaan,  a  distance  of  two  thousand  miles, 
and  built  two  columns  at  the  Straits  of  Gibraltar.  These  columns 
were  called  the  pillars  of  Hercules.  The  ancients  did  not  dare  to  sail 
beyond  them,  into  the  broad  Atlantic  Ocean. 

S.  The  Greeks  founded  several  cities  in  Spain.  Afterwards,  the 
Carthaginians  acquired  possession  of  the  country;  but  it  was  taken 
by  the  Romans  in  134  B.  C,  who  kept  it  till  the  year  406  after  the 
Christian  era.  Spain  was  then  invaded  by  barbarians  from  the  north, 
called  the  Suevi,  the  Alans,  and  the  Vandals. 

9.  Some  of  these  people  continued  in  the  country  more  than  a  hun- 
dred years.  They  were  then  driven  out  by  another  set  of  barbarians, 
called  Goths,  or  Visigoths,  who  overran  the  whole  of  Spain.  These 
became  established  in  the  country,  and  finally  founded  a  kingdom  there. 

10.  After  the  Goths  had  been  in  Spain  about  two  hundred  years,  a 
king  mounted  the  throne  whose  name  was  Roderick.  This  king 
grievously  injured  count  Julian,  who  was  one  of'  the  most  powerful 
of  the  Spanish  or  Gothic  nobles.  In  order  to  avenge  himself,  Julian 
took  steps  which  resulted  in  the  ruin  of  his  country. 

11.  In  Mauritania,  which  I  have  already  mentioned,  on  the  north- 
ern coast  of  Africa,  and  not  far  from  Spain,  there  was  a  nation  of  Sa 

2.  What  sort  of  a  country  is  Spain  ?  Climate?  Productions?  Should  you  not  like  to  go 
to  Spain  and  eat  some  of  the  fine  fruits?  3.  What  of  the  horses  of  Spain  ?  Merino  sheep  ? 
4.  Population?  What  of  the  people  ?  Capital?  What  of  Madrid  ?  Which  way  is  Ma- 
drid from  you  ?  From  London  r  Paris  ?  Rome  ?  Algiers  ?  5.  What  of  the  Moorish 
buildings  in  Spain  ?  7.  What  of  tlie  early  history  of  Spain  ?  Where  was  Phoenicia  ?  How 
far  from  Spain  ?  What  did  the  Phoenicians  do  in  Spain  ?  Where  were  the  pillars  of  Hercules 
built  ?  How  far  did  the  ancients  venture  to  go  in  their  vessels?  8.  What  of  the  Greeks? 
The  Carthaginians?  The  Romans?  What  barbarians  conquered  Spain  ?  About  what 
time  did  they  conquer  Spain?  '.).  How  long  did  the  Suevi  and  other  barbarians  remain  in 
Spain  ?  Who  drove  out  the  Suevi  and  oilier  barbarians  ?  What  of  the  Goths  ?  10.  What 
of  Roderick  ?     Count  Julian  ?     What,  did  he  do  ? 


SPAIN.  165 

racens.  They  were  called  Mauri,  or  Moors,  from  the  country  which 
they  inhabited.  Count  Julian  invited  them  to  cross  the  sea,  and  in- 
vade Spain. 

12.  Accordingly,  a  great  number  of  these  infidels  landed  on  the 
Spanish  shores,  under  the  command  of  a  general  named  Tariff.  King 
Roderick  the  Goih  gathered  an  army,  and  encountered  them  at 
Xerxes,  in  the  south  of  Spain.     Here  a  great  battle  was  fought. 

13.  The  Moors  were  completely  victorious.  The  fate  of  Roderick 
was  never  known.  His  horse,  and  his  sword,  helmet,  shield,  and 
breastplate,  were  found  by  the  side  of  a  river,  near  the  field  of  battle; 
but  his  body  was  nowhere  to  be  seen.  These  events  occurred  about 
712  A.  D. 

14.  The  Spaniards  long  believed  that  king  Roderick  was  alive,  and 
that,  at  some  future  day,  he  would  again  lead  an  army  to  battle 
against  the  Moors.  But  his  war-shout  was  heard  no  more ;  and  as 
the  Gothic  monarchy  was  ruined  by  his  fall,  he  is  called  Roderick  the 
last  of  the  Goths. 

15.  Pelagio,  a  prince  of  the  blood-royal,  took  command  of  all  the 
Gothic  Spaniards  who  had  not  been  slain  by  the  Moors.  He  led  them 
into  the  mountainous  region  of  Asturias  and  Burgos,  and  there  found- 
ed a  little  kingdom.  This  was  the  only  part  of  Spain  which  the 
Moors  never  conquered. 

16.  The  successors  of  Pelagio  enlarged  the  boundaries  of  his  king- 
dom.   But,  fer  a  long  time,  the  Moors  possessed  three-fourths  of  Spain. 


CHAPTER  C— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Wars  between  the  Moors  and  the  Spaniards. 

1.  The  Moors  were  a  wild  people  when  they  first  conquered  Spain ; 
but  they  soon  became  civilized  and  polished.  There  was  more  learn- 
ing amongst  them  than  in  any  other  part  of  Europe. 

2.  In  the  city  of  Cordova,  there  was  a  library  of  six  hundred  thou- 
sand volumes.  There  were  likewise  seventy  public  libraries  in  other 
parts  of  the  Moorish  territories  in  Spain.  The  Moors  were  great 
lovers  of  poetry  and  music. 

3.  They  built  many  noble  edifices  in  Spain.  The  Alhambra,  in  the 
city  of  Granada,  was  the  palace  of  the  Moorish  sovereigns.  It  was 
of  marble,  and  ornamented  with  beautiful  sculpture.  The  sultry  at- 
mosphere was  cooled  by  fountains,  which  spouted  continually  in  the 
chambers  and  halls.  Beneath  the  Alhambra  were  vaults,  which  the 
Moorish  kings  had  caused  to  be  dusr,  that  they  might  be  buried  there ; 

11.  What  of  Mauritania  !  Its  direction  from  Spain  ?  What  of  the  Moors  ?  Count  Ju- 
lian ?  12.  What  did  the  Moors  do?  What  followed  ?  13.  Fate  of  king  Roderick  ?  How 
long  ago  did  this  happen?  14.  What  did  the  Spaniards  believe?  Why  was  Roderick 
called  the  last  of  the  Goths?  15.  What  of  Pelagio?  What  was  the  only  part  of  Spain  not 
conquered  by  the  Moors?  10.  What  of  the  successors  of  Pelagio  ?  What  portion  of  Spain 
did  the  Moors  long  possess?  Ch.  C. — 1.  What  can  you  say  of  the  Moors?  2.  What  olf 
libraries  iu  Cordova?     In  other  cities?     What  did  tho  Moors  love  ? 


166  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

for  they  loved  the  Alhamhra  so  well,  that  they  used  it  both  as  their 
palace  and  sepulchre. 

4.  But  the  Spaniards  hated  the  Moors,  and  seldom  were  at  peace 
with  them.  In  their  continual  wars,  the  victory  sometimes  fell  to 
one  party,  and  sometimes  to  the  other.  Eighty  thousand  Moors  were 
once  slain  in  a  single  battle. 

5.  On  the  other  hand,  a  Moorish  hero,  by  the  name  of  Almanzor, 
is  said  to  have  vanquished  the  Spaniards  in  more  than  fifty  battles 
He  took  the  city  of  Compostella,  and  compelled  his  captives  to  carry 
the  gates  of  a  large  edifice  from  thence  to  Cordova,  on  their  shoulders. 

6.  The  most  famous  warrior  that  appeared  on  either  side,  was  Don 
Rodrigo  de  Bivaz,  surnamed  the  Cid  Campeador,  or  the  Incomparable 
Lord.  He  gained  so  many  battles  against  the  Moors,  that  at  last  the 
Spaniards  considered  the  victory  certain  whenever  the  Cid  Campea- 
dor was  at  their  head. 

7.  When  the  Incomparable  Lord  was  dead,  the  courage  of  the 
Moors  revived.  They  boldly  attacked  the  Spaniards,  and  besieged  the 
city  where  the  Cid  Campeador  lay  buried.  The  Spaniards  Avent  forth 
to  meet  them,  and  at  their  head  rode  an  armed  warrior,  with  a  coun- 
tenance like  death. 

8.  The  Moors  recognized  his  features,  and  fled  ;  for  it  was  the  Cid 
Campeador !  The  Spaniards  had  taken  him  from  the  tomb,  and  seated 
him  on  the  war-horse  which  he  had  rode  in  his  lifetime.  And  thus 
the  dead  warrior  won  another  victory. 

9.  Many  other  wonderful  stories  are  told  about  the  Moorish  and 
Spanish  wars.  Sometimes,  it  is  said,  a  saint  came  down  from  hea- 
ven, to  lead  the  Spaniards  to  battle.  Sometimes  the  sun  stood  still, 
that  they  might  have  time  to  kill  their  enemies.  Sometimes  they 
were  encouraged  by  the  appearance  of  a  blazing  cross  in  the  sky. 

10.  But  these  are  fables.  It  is  certain,  however,  that  the  Moors 
gradually  lost  their  Spanish  territories,  till  nothing  remained  to  them 
except  Granada.  And  in  the  reign  of  Ferdinand  and  Isabella,  they 
were  wholly  driven  out  of  Spain.  This  event  took  place  in  1492, 
nearly  eight  centuries  after  the  overthrow  of  king  Roderick  the  Goth. 


CHAPTER  CI.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Spanish  Inquisition. 

1.  The  reign  of  Ferdinand  and  Isabella  was  disgraced  by  the  estab 
lishment  of  the  Inquisition  in  Spain.  The  design  of  this  horrible 
institution  was  to  prevent  the  people  from  adopting  any  but  the 

3.  What  did  they  build  in  Spain  ?  Describe  the  Alhambra.  What  were  beneath  the  Al- 
hambra  ?  4.  How  did  the  Spaniards  feel  toward  the  Moors?  What  of  their  wars? 
6.  What  of  Almanzor  ?  What  city  did  he  take  ?  6.  What  famous  warrior  can  you  men- 
lion  ?  What  of  him  ?  7.  What  of  the  Moors  after  his  death  ?  Who  rode  at  the  head  of 
the  Spaniards  ?  8.  How  were  the  Moors  affected  byseeihg  the  dead  body  of  the  Cid  Cam- 
peador ?  9.  What  stories  are  told  of  the  Moorish  and  Spanish  wars  ?  10.  What  at  last 
remained  to  the  Moors  ?     When  were  the  Moors  driven  out  of  Spain  ? 


SPAIN.  167 

Catholic  religion ;  it  being  believed,  in  those  dark  days,  that  it  was 
right  to  do  so. 

2.  Persons  who  were  suspected  of  being  heretics  were  thrown  into 
damp  and  dismal  dungeons.  They  were  then  brought  before  the  in- 
quisitors, who  sat  completely  covered  with  long  robes  and  hoods  of 
sackcloth.  Their  faces  were  invisible  ;  but  they  looked  at  the  pris- 
oners through  two  holes  in  their  sackcloth  hoods. 

3.  If  the  accused  persons  would  not  plead  guilty,  they  were  tor- 
tured in  various  ways.  Sometimes  they  were  drawn  up  to  the  loof 
of  the  chamber  by  a  rope,  and  after  hanging  a  considerable  time,  the 
rope  was  loosened,  so  that  they  fell  almost  to  the  floor. 

4.  The  rope  was  then  suddenly  tightened  again,  and  the  prisoner's 
limbs  were  put  out  of  joint  by  the  shock.  If  he  still  refused  to  con- 
fess, the  inquisitors  rubbed  his  feet  with  lard,  and  roasted  them  before 
a  fire.     In  short,  their  cruelties  were  too  dreadful  to  be  told. 

5.  When  the  inquisitors  had  satisfied  themselves  with  torturing 
their  prisoners,  they  prepared  to  burn  them.  The  condemned  persons 
walked  in  a  procession,  dressed  in  garments  which  were  painted  with 
flames.  On  their  breasts  they  wore  their  own  likenesses,  in  the  act 
of  being  devoured  by  serpents  and  wild  beasts. 

6.  When  they  reached  the  place  of  execution,  the  victims  were 
fastened  to  a  stake  with  iron  chains,  and  roasted  to  death  by  a  slow 
fire.  They  sometimes  suffered  the  agony  of  this  torment  for  two  or 
three  hours,  before  death  relieved  them. 

7.  Such  were  the  horrors  of  the  Inquisition ;  yet  it  had  been  intro- 
duced into  Italy  before  it  was  adopted  in  Spain,  and  in  after  times  it 
spread  into  other  Catholic  countries,  and  continued  in  operation  for 
nearly  three  hundred  years.  Between  thirty  and  forty  thousand  were 
burnt  alive,  before  the  Inquisition  was  abolished. 

8.  The  remembrance  of  the  Inquisition  will  ever  cause  a  stain  to 
rest  upon  the  reign  of  Ferdinand  and  Isabella,  for  in  Spain  it  was  a 
more  horrid  institution  than  in  any  other  country.  It  was  the  great- 
est glory  of  this  king  and  queen,  that  they  gave  Christopher  Colum- 
bus the  means  of  discovering  America.  But  Columbus  was  thrown 
into  a  dungeon,  as  the  reward  of  his  discovery ! 

9.  The  Spaniards  made  great  conquests  in  America.  The  riches 
of  the  country  were  in  this  way  much  increased ;  and  there  was 
more  silver  and  gold  in  Spain  than  in  all  the  rest  of  Europe.  But  it 
is  doubtful  whether  Spain  ever  derived  any  real  benefit  from  her 
American  colonies;  for  instead  of  staying  at  home  to  cultivate  the 
soil,  the  inhabitants  crossed  the  ocean  in  search  of  gold  and  silver. 

Ch.  CI. — 1.  When  was  the  Inquisition  established?  What  was  its  design?  2.  How 
were  suspected  persons  treated  ?  Describe  the  inquisitors.  3.  How  were  the  accused 
persons  tortured?  5.  Describe  the  burning  of  the  prisoners?  6.  How  long  did  the  Inqui- 
sition continue  in  operation  ?  7.  What  of  the  reign  of  Ferdinand  and  Isabella?  What 
was  the  glory  of  their  reign?  What  was  the  fate  of  Columbus  ?  8.  What  of  the  Spaniards  ' 
What  of  the  riches  of  Spain  ?     9.  Were  the  American  colonies  aDy  benefit  to  Spain  ? 


168  SCHOOL   HISTORY, 


CHAPTER  CIL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Invincible  Armada.     Curious  Death  of  a   Spanish 
King-.     Piecent  Affairs  of  Spain. 

1.  One  of  the  most  powerful  monarchs  of  Spain  was  Philip  the 
Second.  He  was  not  only  king  of  Spain,  but  he  obtained  the  crown 
of  Portugal  also,  in  1580 ;  but  Portugal  afterwards  became  a  separate 
kingdom  again.  It  had  first  been  declared  independent  of  Spain  at  the 
beginning  of  the  twelfth  century. 

2.  Philip  intended  to  conquer  England,  and  prepared  a  fleet  of  eighfy 
ships  for  that  purpose.  This  fleet  was  called  the  Invincible  Armada. 
But  it  was  conquered  even  without  a  battle,  for  a  storm  scattered  it, 
and  drove  many  of  the  ships  on  the  British  coast. 

3.  The  son  of  Philip  was  a  weak  minded  man.  The  manner  of 
his  death  was  very  singular.  He  was  sitting,  one  day,  in  the  coun- 
cil chamber,  which  was  warmed  by  a  large  stove.  The  heat  and 
vapor  of  the  stove  affected  his  head. 

4.  He  ordered  the  attendants  to  quench  the  fire.  But  the  person 
whose  duty  it  was  to  do  this  happened  not  to  be  in  the  chamber,  and 
the  rules  of  the  Spanish  court  were  so  strict,  that  it  would  have  been 
unlawful  for  any  other  person  to  touch  the  fire. 

5.  Moreover,  it  would  have  been  beneath  the  king's  dignity  tu 
leave  the  chamber,  or  even  to  move  his  chair  back  from  the  stove. 
So  the  fire  continued  to  grow  hotter,  and  the  poor  king  grew  sicker 
and  sicker,  till  at  last  it  was  impossible  to  cure  him.  And  thus  lie 
died,  by  a  kind  of  death  that  could  have  befallen  nobody  but  a  Span- 
ish king. 

6.  In  the  year  1700,  Charles  the  Second  of  Spain  died  without 
children.  He  was  succeeded  by  a  young  French  prince,  named  Phil- 
ip, duke  of  Anjou,  the  grandson  of  Louis  the  Fourteenth.  The  kings 
of  this  family  are  called  the  Spanish  Bourbons. 

7.  This  event  caused  a  long  war  in  Europe.     Charles,  archduke  of 
Austria,  claimed  the  crown  of  Spain,  and  he  and  Philip  of  Anjou  al- 
ternately drove  each  other  out  of  Madrid.    But  Philip  finally  kept  his . 
seat  on  the  throne. 

S.  Spain  has  often  been  at  war  with  England.  She  united  with 
France  against  that  country  during  the  American  Revolution;  but 
peace  was  concluded  in  1783.  Another  war,  however,  began  between 
England  and  France  in  about  ten  years  afterwards. 

9.  In  1S08,  when  the  emperor  Napoleon  was  at  the  height  of  his 
power,  he  compelled  the  Spanish  king  to  abdicate  his  throne.  The 
name  of  this  king  was  Ferdinand  the  Seventh.     Napoleon  then  placed 

Ch.  CIL— What  of  Philip  II.  ?  What  of  Portugal  ?  2.  What  of  the  Invincible  Arma- 
da? 3.  Describe  the  death  of  Philip's  sun.  G.  What  happened  in  the  year  1700  ?  Who 
succeeded  Charles  II.  ?  Who  were  the  Spanish  Bourbons?  7.  Why  did  Charles  and 
Philip  go  to  war?  Who  triumphed  ?  8.  W hat  of  Spain?  When  was  peace  concluded 
between  France  and  England.  9.  What  did  Napoleon  compel  the  Spanish  king  to  do  in 
180S  ?     Who  was  Ferdinand  VII.  ? 


SPAIN.  169 

the  crown  of  Spain  upon  the  head  of  his  own  brother,  Joseph  Bona- 
parte. 

10.  But  most  of  the  Spaniards  refused  to  acknowledge  king  Joseph 
as  their  sovereign.  A  bloody  war  ensued.  The  English  government 
sent  armies  into  Spain  and  Pprtugal;  and  it  was  there  that  Lord 
Wellington  gained  his  first  victories  over  the  French. 

11.  Ferdinand,  the  old  Spanish  king,  was  replaced  upon  the  throne 
in  1814.  He  was,  however,  a  tyrant  and  a  bigot,  and  his  reign  was 
mischievous  to  the  country.     His  death  took  place  in  1S33. 

12.  Since  that  event,  Spain  has  been  ravaged  by  a  civil  war  be- 
tween Don  Carlos  and  the  young  queen  Maria  Isabella.  Three  or 
four  hundred  thousand  persons  where  supposed  to  have  been  killed  in 
this  war  which  is  now  terminated,  by  the  establishment  of  the  claims 
of  Maria  Isabella. 


CHAPTER  CIII.-EXJROPE  CONTINUED. 

A  short  Story  about  Portugal. 

1.  Portugal  lies  to  the  west  of  Spain,  and  is  bounded  on  the  west 
by  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  The  population  of  the  country  is  nearly  four 
millions.  The  capital  is  Lisbon.  This  is  a  large  city,  and  many  of 
our  vessels  visit  it  for  the  purpose  of  getting  wines,  grapes,  oranges, 
and  lemons. 

2.  The  climate  of  Portugal  is  similar  to  that  of  Spain.  The  people 
also  resemble  the  Spaniards,  but  speak  a  language  somewhat  differ- 
ent. The  Portuguese  are  very  ignorant,  and  as  they  seldom  read, 
they  have  plenty  of  time  for  dancing. 

3.  Portugal  was  originally  considered  a  part  of  Spain,  and  shared 
in  the  events  of  that  country.  In  the  twelfth  century,  it  became  in- 
dependent. Since  that  time  it  has  been  considered  a  separate  king- 
dom, though  it  has  been  subject  to  Spain  for  a  poriion  of  this  period. 

4.  The  history  of  Portugal  is  of  little  interest,  till  about  the  year 
1400,  when  the  Portuguese  took  the  lead  in  navigating  the  Atlantic 
Ocean.  At  this  time,  this  great  sea  was  little  known,  and  nobody 
had  gone  across  it  to  America,  nor  had  any  one  dared  to  sail  around 
Africa. 

•5.  But  the  little  Portuguese  vessels  ventured  out  farther  and  far- 
ther, and  finally  one  of  them  reached  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope.  Af- 
ter this,  a  Portuguese  fleet  passed  entirely  around  Africa,  crossed  the 
Indian  Ocean,  and  reached  India. 


Whom  dill  Napoleon  make  kirn;  of  Spain  ?  10.  What  of  (he  Spaniards?  What  of  the 
English  gover ml  ?  What  of  Lord  H  ellington  ?  II.  When  was  Ferdinand  replaced  up- 
on the  throne  ;  What  of  him  ?  When  did  he  die?  12.  What  of  a  civil  war  in  Spain  .' 
Cm.  CIII. — Boundaries  of  Portugal .'  Population?  Capital?  What  of  Lisbon?  2.  Cli- 
mate of  Portugal  ?  The  people.'  Language?  3.  What  of  Portugal  ?  When  did  it  be- 
come independent?  What  of  Portugal  since  the  twelfth  century?  4.  What  of  the  Por- 
luguene  aftci  ibnul  WOO?  What  onfie  Atlantic  at  this  lime?  5.  What  of  the  Portuguese 
tfcmui*?     Their  discoveries  ? 

15 


170  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

6.  These  wonderful  adventures  and  discoveries  excited  other  na- 
tions, and  in  a  few  years  Christopher  Columbus  discovered  America. 
Thus  the  Portuguese  may  be  considered  as  having  led  the  way  to  the 
discovery  of  this  vast  continent  on  which  we  live,  and  which  was  un- 
known to  the  people  of  Europe,  Asia,  and  Africa  till  the  year  1492. 

7.  I  need  not  tell  you  of  what  happened  in  Portugal  from  this  time 
till  the  year  1755.  At  that  date,  an  earthquake  took  place,  which 
shook  down  nearly  the  whole  city  of  Lisbon.  Houses,  churches,  and 
palaces  were  suddenly  tumbled  into  heaps  of  ruins.  Large  chasms 
were  opened  in  the  earth,  and  hundreds  of  houses  were  plunged  into 
them.  The  sea  at  first  rolled  back  from  the  land,  and  then  returned, 
sweeping  every  thing  before  it.  In  this  awful  calamity,  ten  thousand 
persons  Tost  their  lives. 

8.  The  Portuguese  founded  a  good  many  colonies  in  different  parts 
of  the  world.  One  of  these  was  in  Brazil,  in  South  America.  To 
this  place  the  king  of  Portugal  retired  with  his  family  in  1S07,  and 
established  his  court  at  Rio  Janeiro,  the  capital  of  the  country.  This 
was  done  because  Portugal  had  been  invaded  by  the  French. 

9.  The  French  being  driven  out  in  1808,  the  king  returned  in  a  few 
years.  After  his  death  there  was  a  struggle  for  the  crown,  but  it 
was  finally  settled  upon  Donna  Maria,  the  present  queen. 


CHAPTER  CIV. -EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Description  of  France.     Its  Climate.     Cities.     Manu- 
factures.    Manners  and  Customs  of  the  People. 

1.  France  lies  in  the  western  part  of  Europe,  and  contains  about 
Jhirty-two  millions  of  inhabitants.  Paris,  the  capital,  is  a  very  large 
jity,  surrounded  with  -walls  of  stone.  It  is  full  of  fine  houses,  beau- 
tiful public  gardens,  pleasant  walks,  handsome  streets,  and  interesting 
places  of  amusement.  To  a  stranger,  it  is  the  most  agreeable  city 
in  the  world. 

2.  Besides  Paris,  there  are  a  great  many  other  large  and  handsome 
cities  in  France.  Among  these  are  Rouen,  where  the  people  manu- 
facture a  great  deal  of  handsome  jewelry  ;  Lyons,  where  they  make 
beautiful  silks;  Marseilles,  where  the  people  deal  in  wines;  and 
Bordeaux,  in  the  midst  of  a  country  which  produces  fine  grapes,  and 
other  delicious  fruits. 

3.  The  climate  of  France  is  about  the  same  as  that  of  Pennsylvania, 
Maryland,  and  Virginia.  The  soil  is  fruitful,  and  yields  abundance  of 
food  for  the  numerous  inhabitants.     The   country  produces  many 

6.  What  consequences  followed  the  Portuguese  discoveries?  What  of  America  till 
1492?  7.  What  happened  in  1755?  Describe  the  earthquake?  8.  Colonies  of  Portu 
gal  ?  Wha*  of  the  king  of  Portugal  ?  When  and  why  did  he  remove  to  Brazil  ?  9.  What 
followed?  Ch.  CIV.— 1.  Population  of  France  ?  Describe  Paris?  2.  What  of  Rouen? 
What  of  Lyons  ?     What  of  Marseilles  ?     What  of  Bordeaux  ? 


FRANCE. 


171 


kinds  of  fruits  in  great  perfection,  such  as  cherries,  pears,  plums, 
peaches,  and  figs.  It  also  yields  immense  quantities  of  grapes,  from 
which  many  kinds  of  choice  wines  are  produced. 

4.  The  people  of  France  are  very  gay  and  cheerful.  They  live  a 
great  deal  in  the  open  air,  and  it  is  common  in  all  parts  of  the 
country  to  see  both  men  and  women  at  work  in  the  fields.  They  do 
not  labor  very  hard,  and  during  the  holidays,  of  which  they  have  a 
:  great  many,  they  walk  about  the  streets,  and  dance  in  the  public 
gardens,  or  squares. 


One  of  the  entrances  of  Paris. 

5.  The  French  seem  to  enjoy  themselves  better  than  most  other 
nations.  They  are  fond  of  music,  and  delight  to  get  together,  and 
talk  about  all  sorts  of  things.  They  are  very  polite,  and  always  treat 
strangers  with  particular  civility.  The  gentlemen  are  courteous  to 
the  ladies,  and  the  ladies  in  return  take  every  means  in  their  power 
to  make  their  society  agreeable  to  the  gentlemen. 

6.  The  manufactures  of  France  are  numerous  and  valuable.  The 
people  have  an  excellent  fancy  in  making  jewelry,  silks,  clocks, 
watches,  and  many  other  ornamental  things.  These  are  sent  to  all 
parts  of  the  world,  and  though  they  may  not  be  considered  very 
necessary,  yet  they  give  a  great  deal  of  pleasure,  and  thus  have  their 
u-e. 

7.  The  French  people  are  fond  of  dress,  and  the  dressmakers  of 
Paris  set  the  fashions  for  the  rest  of  the  world.  The  milliners  and 
rnantua-makers  of  this  city  have  more  followers  than  any  king  that 

3.  Climate  of  France  ?  Soil?  Production?  4.  Character  and  manners  of  the  French 
people?  5.  What  of  the  gentlemen  ?  The  ladies?  G.  Manufactures  of  France  '  What 
is  the  use  of  the  fancy  articles  manufactured  in  France  ? 


172  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

ever  lived  ;  for  the  gowns  and  bonnets  of  the  ladies  of  Europe  and 
America  are  made  according  to  their  direction. 

8.  The  French  nation,  on  the  whole,  are  a  very  interesting  and 
wonderful  people.  Though  they  might  seem  to  be  frivolous  and 
thoughtless,  yet  France  has  produced  many  great  men,  and  the 
history  of  the  country  displays  many  great  and  glorious  actions. 

9.  They  have  been  represented  as  a  nation  of  fiddlers,  dress-makers, 
and  dancing  masters ;  but  if  you  look  into  their  character,  and  read 
their  story  with  attention,  you  will  see  that  this  is  not  just ;  they  are 
in  truth  the  most  warlike  nation  in  Europe ;  they  take  the  lead  in 
many  arts  and  sciences;  and  if  the  people  at  large  spend  much  of 
their  time  in  amusement,  it  is  not  because  they  are  deficient  in  genius 
for  the  highest  pursuits  of  the  mind. 


CHAPTER  CV.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  the  Gauls  and  other  Tribes  of  Barbarians.  How 
the  Southern  Parts  of  Europe  were  first  settled,  and 
how  the  Northern  Parts  were  settled  afterwards. 

1.  In  the  course  of  this  history,  I  have  had  frequent  occasion  to 
mention  various  northern  tribes  of  Europe,  called  barbarians,  and 
perhaps  I  shall  not  find  a  better  opportunity  than  the  present  to  give 
you  some  account  of  them.  You  remember  that  Greece  was  settled 
before  any  other  part  of  Europe.  The  first  inhabitants  were  the 
descendents  of  Japheth.  The  descendents  of  these  spread  themselves 
over  Greece,  and  probably  other  parts  of  Europe. 

2.  As  the  people  increased  along  the  shores  of  Asia  and  Africa, 
they  sent  colonies  to  different  places  along  the  shores  of  the  Mediter- 
ranean. Some  settled  in  Greece,  some  in  Italy,  some  in  Spain. 
These  countries  being  warm,  pleasant,  and  fruitful,  were  soon  filled 
with  inhabitants.  Living  upon  the  coast,  they  had  a  great  many 
ships,  and  carried  on  commerce  with  different  countries. 

3.  In  this  way,  after  many  years,  they  grew  rich,  and  built  large 
cities,  with  fine  houses,  temples,  and  palaces.  Such  was  the  course 
of  events  in  regard  to  all  southern  Europe,  of  which  I  have  been 
telling  you  the  story.  But,  while  these  things  were  going  on,  various 
tribes  were  emigrating  into  the  more  northern  portions  of  Europe. 

4.  Here  the  climate  was  colder,  and  the  soil  less  fruitful.  Still  the 
woods  were  full  of  elks,  rein-deer,  fallow-deer,  and  the  roe-buck,  wild 
bulls,  wild  boars,  and  many  other  animals.  These  supplied  food  for 
the  inhabitants,  and  the  chase  furnished  excellent  sport  to  the  ad 
venturous  men  of  those  days. 

7.  What  of  the  French,  as  to  dress  ?  Milliners  and  mantua-makers  ?  8.  What  might 
seem  to  be  the  character  of  the  French?  What  does  their  history  display?  9.  What  of 
their  talent  for -war  ?  Their  genius  for  other  things  ?  Cjj.  CV.— 1.  What  of  Greece  ?  2. 
How  were  the  shores  of  the  Meditarranean  settled  ?  What  of  the  people  in  these  conn 
tries?  3.  How  were  the  northern  portions  of  Europe  settled'  4.  Climate  and  6oil  of 
northern  Europe  ?     What  furnished  subsistence  to  the  inhabitants  ? 


FRANCE.  173 

5.  Beside  all  this,  in  these  regions  unoccupied  by  man  the  land  was 
very  cheap,  and  whoever  would  come  and  take  it  might  have  it 
These  circumstances  invited  the  people  to  leave  the  soft,  sunny  re- 
gions of  Greece,  Italy,  Spain,  and  also  of  Asia,  for  the  colder  and 
wilder  realms  of  northern  Europe. 

6.  Thus  tribe  followed  tribe,  and  nation  followed  nation,  until  the 
whole  country  was  occupied,  from  the  Mediterranean  on  the  south,  to 
the  Arctic  Sea  on  the  north.  It  was,  in  fact,  very  much  such  a  course 
of  events  as  you  may  have  seen  going  on  in  our  country. 

7.  Those  portions  of  America  first  settled  by  the  Europeans  were 
along  the  Atlantic  seaboard.  Here  they  first  built  houses,  and  founded 
cities.  After  a  while,  they  went  into  the  farther  interior,  in  search  of 
wild  game  and  new  lands.  Thus  they  continued  to  push  farther  and 
farther  into  the  country,  and  even  now  they  are  still  advancing  to- 
ward the  far  west. 


CHAPTER  CVL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Story  of  the  Barbarians  continued. 

1.  I  have  now  shown  you  how  the  north  of  Europe  was  gradually 
settled  by  tribes  that  emigrated  from  the  south  of  Europe,  and  from 
Asia.  These  might  be  compared  to  a  vast  stream  that  continued  to 
flow  on,  growing  wider  and  advancing  farther,  until  at  length  the 
whole  country  was  peopled. 

2.  Bui  you  must  remark  one  thing,  that  these  emigrants  were  sav- 
ages, and  of  a  warlike  character;  they  therefore  did  not  mingle  into 
one  great  nation,  but  each  tribe  remained  distinct.  As  they  increased 
in  numbers,  they  increased  in  power. 

3.  After  a  while,  something  would  happen  to  bring  two  tribes  liv- 
ing near  each  other  into  a  state  of  war.  Fierce  battles  would  follow, 
and  a  great  many  would  be  killed.  Sometimes  one  tribe  would  be 
vanquished,  and  they  would  all  be  slaughtered,  reduced  to  a  state  of 
slavery,  or  driven  out  of  their  country. 

4.  It  was,  in  short,  a  state  of  things  very  much  like  that  of  our 
American  Indians,  when  this  country  was  first  settled  by  the  white 
people.  There  was  this  difference,  however,  that  the  northern  bar- 
barians of  Europe  carried  with  them  the  knowledge  of  many  arts. 
Their  weapons  of  war,  therefore,  were  not  merely  the  bow  and  ar- 
row, but  they  had  swords,  spears,  and  shields. 

5.  They  also  built  better  houses  than  the  wigwams  of  our  Indians. 
Still  they  were  a  fierce  people,  and  in  many  respects  were  as  savage 
as  the  wild  boars  and  wild  bears  which  they  pursued  in  the  chase. 

5.  What  of  the  land  ?  What  induced  the  people  to  settle  in  northern  Europe  ?  6.  How 
does  the  settlement  of  America  compare  with  that  of  Europe  ?  Ch.  C'VI. — 1.  How  was 
the  north  of  Europe  settled?  To  what  may  the  emigration  of  the  tribes  be  compared? 
3.  What  of  these  emigrants?  3.  What  of  their  wars  ?  4.  What  did  the  state  of  these  bar- 
barians resemble  ?     5.  What  of  them  ? 

15* 


174  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

6.  Among  the  most  remarkable  of  these  northern  tribes  were  the 
Gauls,  who  were  the  first  known  inhabitants  of  France,  and  who 
came  from  Asia  several  hundred  years  before  Christ ;  the  Franks  and 
Suevi,  who  inhabited  Germany  ;  the  Goths  and  the  Vandals,  who  in- 
habited Norway,  Sweden,  and  Lapland,  and  afterwards  established 
themselves  in  Germany ;  and  the  Huns,  who  lived  in  Hungary. 
There  were  still  many  other  tribes,  but  it  is  not  necessary  to  mention 
them  here. 

7.  Well,  you  must  now  imagine  all  the  north  of  Europe  inhabited 
by  these  wrfd  tribes.  Spending  their  time  chiefly  in  the  chase,  or  in 
war,  or  other  hardy  pursuits,  they  became  bold,  daring,  and  adventu- 
rous. Their  numbers  also  increased,  and  some  of  them  became  pow- 
erful nations. 

8.  They  were,  however,  generally  restless,  and,  like  beasts  of  prey, 
were  constantly  looking  out  for  some  object  upon  which  they  might 
fall  and  devour  it.  So  things  went  on,  till  at  length  these  barbarians 
fixed  their  attention  upon  the  rich  cities,  the  fertile  plains,  and  vine- 
clad  hills  of  the  south  of  Europe. 

9.  The  Roman  empire  was  now  tottering  to  decay,  and  the  Roman 
armies  were  no  longer  the  dread  of  these  tribes.  About  the  year  400, 
they  began  to  pour  down  their  armies  upon  the  plains  of  Italy.  Ala- 
ric  king  of  the  Goths,  laid  Rome  under  contribution,  and  less  than 
fifty  years  after,  Attila,  king  of  the  Huns,  threatened  the  same  city 
with  destruction. 

10.  After  this  period,  these  restless  invaders  continued  from  time  to 
time  to  attack  the  southern  regions  of  Europe,  till  they  made  them- 
selves masters  of  its  finest  portions. 

11.  As  the  northern  barbarians  of  whom  I  have  been  speaking  had 
no  books,  and  wrote  no  histories,  their  early  story  is  little  known. 
After  getting  possession  of  Rome,  Spain,  and  other  southern  portions 
of  Europe,  they  settled  in  these  countries. 

12.  For  a  time,  literature  and  learning,  the  arts  of  poetry,  painting, 
sculpture,  and  music,  which  had  been  cultivated  by  the  Romans, 
were  unknown  in  the  countries  where  they  once  flourished.  But  by 
degrees,  the  new  inhabitants  became  civilized  and  polished,  and  the 
modern  nations  which  now  occupy  these  regions  may  be  considered 
as  in  part  their  descendants.  It  is  now  time  to  proceed  with  the  his- 
tory of  France. 

6.  Which  were  the  most  remarkable  of  the  northern  tribes  ?  7.  Describe  their  mode 
ofllfe.  8.  What  at  length  attracted  their  attention  ?  9.  What  of  the  Roman  empire? 
When  did  the  barbarians  attack  Italy?  What  of  Alaric  and  Attila?  10.  What  did  the 
barbarians  continue  to  do?  11.  Where  did  the  northern  barbarians  settle  ?  12.  What  of 
them  for  a  time  ?  What  happened  at  length  ?  What  of  the  modern  nations  of  the  south  of 
Europe  ? 


FRANCE. 


175 


CHAPTER  CVII.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Gauls.     Origin  of  the  French  Nation.    Little  King 

Pepin. 


Meroveus. 


Clodion. 


1.  The  ancient  name  of  France  was  Gaul,  and  the  inhabitants  were 
called  Gauls.  These  were  one  of  those  warlike  tribes  of  which  I  have 
just  been  speaking.  At  a  very  early  date,  they  appear  to  have  been 
numerous  and  powerful.  In  the  year  390,  B.  C,  they  invaded  Rome 
under  Brennus,  and  took  that  city,  but  were  expelled  by  Camillus. 

2.  Under  another  Brennus,  they  invaded  Greece,  as  I  have  told  you. 
In  the  time  of  Julius  Caesar,  the  Gauls  had  made  some  little  progress 
towards  civilization  ;  but  they  were  still  a  barbarous  people,  and  re- 
tained many  practices  that  belong  only  to  savages.  They  had,  how- 
ever, a  good  many  cities,  and  these  were  defended  with  strong  walls. 

3.  When  Caesar  entered  the  country,  he  found  the  Gauls  sorely 
pressed  by  some  of  the  German  tribes.  At  first,  he  affected  to  be  the 
deliverer  of  the  Gauls  from  these  troublesome  enemies. 

4.  But  the  people  soon  discovered  that  Caesar's  real  design  was  to 
conquer  them.     They  then  began  to  resist,  and  for  nine  long  years 

Ch.  CVII. — 1.  What  was  the  ancierit  name  of  France?  Of  the  people  ?  What  did  they 
do  under  Brennus?  i.  When  did  they  invade  Greece  ?  What  of  them  in  the  time  oX  Ju- 
lius taesar?     What  of  thuir  cities  ?     3.  What  did  Ciesar  find  on  entering  the  country? 


X76  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

they  fought  Caesar  and  his  armies  with  admirable  skill  and  spirit. 
But  the  Romans  were  better  versed  in  the  art  of  war  than  the  G-auls. 
Their  soldiers  were  better  trained,  and  their  implements  of  war  were 
superior  to  those  of  the  Gauls. 

5.  Notwithstanding  all  this,  so  brave  and  obstinate  were  the  Gauls 
in  the  defence  of  their  country,  that  it  required  all  the  genius  of  Julius 
Caosar  one  of  the  greatest  leaders  that  ever  lived,  aided  by  the  im- 
mense power  of  Rome,  to  subdue  them. 

6.  Caesar  was  occupied  no  less  than  nine  years  in  conquering  the 
Gauls,  and  it  is  supposed  a  million  of  men  were  slain  in  the  bloody 
struggle.  From  the  time  of  Caesar's  conquest,  about  50  years  B.  C, 
Gaul  was  a  Roman  province,  and  the  people  gradually  adopted  the 
manners  and  customs  of  the  Romans.  Even  their  language  became 
changed,  and  assumed  a  resemblance  to  the  Latin.  But  between  the 
third  and  fourth  century,  the  Franks,  a  German  tribe  whom  I  have 
mentioned,  got  possession  of  the  greater  part  of  Gaul. 

7.  It  is  said,  that  the  Franks  who  first  established  themselves  in 
Gaul  were  led  by  Pharamond.  He  died  in  428,  and  was  succeeded 
by  his  son  Clodion,  who  was  celebrated  for  the  beauty  of  his  hair. 
Clodion  died  in  448,  and  was  succeeded  by  Meroveus  ;  Meroveus  died 
in  45S,  and  was  succeeded  by  Childeric.  Very  little  is  known  of  these 
kings,  except  the  last. 


CHAPTER  CVIII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED, 

About  Clovis  and  little  King-  Pepin. 

1.  Childeric  is  considered  the  founder  of  the  French  monarchy. 
He  was  succeeded  by  his  son  Clovis.  When  Clovis  was  only  nine- 
teen years  old,  he  drove  the  Romans  out  of  France.  He  afterwards 
gained  a  great  victory  over  the  Germans. 

2.  As  Clovis  had  married  a  Christian  princess,  he  attributed  his  suc- 
cess to  the  God  whom  she  worshipped.  He  therefore  determined  to 
Become  a  Christian  himself,  and  he  was  baptized,  with  three  thousand 
of  his  subjects,  on  Christmas  day,  in  the  year  496.  After  the  death 
of  Clovis,  France  was  divided  among  several  petty  kings.  They 
quarrelled  among  themselves,  and  caused  great  trouble  to  the  nation. 
The  wife  of  one  of  them  was  accused  of  murdering  ten  kings,  or  child- 
ren of  kings. 

3.  Little  king  Pepin,  otherwise  called  Pepin  the  short,  thrust  all 
the  other  kings  from  their  thrones,  and  made  himself  sole  ruler  of 

4.  What  did  the  people  soon  discover  ?  What  did  they  do?  What  of  the  Romans  ?  5. 
What  of  the  Gauls  ?  What  was  required  to  subdue  them?  6.  What  was  the  consequence 
of  this  struggle  between  the  Gauls  and  Romans  ?  What  of  Gaul  from  this  time  ?  What 
of  the  Franks  :  7. Pharamond?  Clodion?  Meroveus?  What  of  these  kings?  Ch.  CVIII.— 
1.  Who  was  Childeric  ?  What  cf  Clovis?  '2.  Why  did  Clovis  determine  to  he  a  Christian 
Wiicn  was  he  baptized?     What  of  Prance  after  his  death?     What  of  the  lungs  ? 


FRANCE. 

France.     He  was  a  very  small  man,   being  only  four  feet  and  a  hall 
high;  but  he  had  a  mighty  spirit  in  that  little  body. 


Childeric. 


Clovis  I. 


Clotilda,  wife  of  Clovis. 


4.  Moreover,  he  had  an  enormous  deal  of  strength.  Knowing  that 
fome  of  his  courtiers  made  fun  of  his  little  size,  he  resolved  to  show 
them,  that  there  was  as  much  manhood  in  him  as  there  could  possibly 
be  in  a  giant.  He  therefore  invited  them  to  see  a  fight  between  a  lion 
and  a  bull. 

5.  The  lion  gave  a  tremendous  roar,  and  leaped  upon  the  bull's 
back,  sticking:  his  claws  deep  into  the  flesh.  The  bull  also  roared 
with  pain  and  terror,  as  well  he  might.  Then  little  king  Pepin  stood 
on  tiptoe  on  his  throne,  to  make  himself  as  tall  as  he  could  ;  and  he 
roared  out  to  his  courtiers,  full  as  loud  as  either  the  bull  or  the  lion  : — 

6.  "Which  of  you  all,"  cried  he,  "will  make  that  lion  let  go  his 
hold  ?"  The  courtiers  all  stood  silent  and  abashed  ;  for  they  had  no 
notion  of  venturing  within  reach  of  the  lion's  claws.  "Then  I  '11  do 
it  myself!"  said  king  Pepin  the  Short.  So  the  valiant  little  king 
leaped  down  from  his  throne,  and  drew  a  sword  almost  as  long:  as 
himself.  Brandishing  it  in  the  air,  he  ran  up  to  the  lion,  who  was 
still  clinging  to  the  mad  bull's  back. 

7.  When  the  lion  beheld  this  terrible  small  champion,  he  opened 
his  enormous  jaws,  as  if  lie  meant  to  snap  him  up  at  a  single  mouth- 
ful. But  little  king  Pepin  aimed  a  blow  at  him  with  his  sword,  and 
hit  him  fair  upon  the  neck. 

8.  Down  feil  the  lion's  head  on  one  side  of  the  bull,  and  down  fell 
his  body  on  the  other !     And  from  that  time  forward,  the  courtiers 

3.  4.  Describe  little  kiri£  Pepin.  What  did  he  invite  his  people  to  see?  5.  6.7.  Eelat* 
king  Pepin'»  encounter  with  the  lion.     S.  How  did  his  bravery  affect  hii  courtiert? 


<r* 


178 


SCHOOL    HISTORY. 


would  sooner  have  taken  a  roaring  lion  by  the  mane,  than  have  laugh- 
ed at  little  king  Pepin. 


CHAPTER  CIX.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Reign  of  Charlemagne. 


Pepin, 


Bertha,  wife  of  Pepin. 


Charlemagne. 


1.  King  Pepin  the  Little  had  a  son  who  was  called  Charlemagne, 
or  Charles  the  Great.  The  epithet  was  given  him  because  he  was  a 
mighty  king  and  conqueror,  but  he  also  deserved  it  on  account  of  his 
height,  which  was  not  an  inch  less  than  seven  feet. 

2.  Charlemagne  used  to  wear  a  sheepskin  cloak.  Whenever  he 
saw  his  courtiers  richly  dressed,  he  invited  them  to  go  a-hunting  with 
him.  Charlemagne  took  care  to  lead  the  Avay  through  all  the  thorns 
and  bushes  he  could  find,  on  purpose  that  his  courtiers  might  tear 
their  fine  clothes  in  following  him. 

3.  This  king  was  continually  at  war.  He  subjugated  the  Saxons, 
and  other  tribes  who  lived  in  Germany.  He  likewise  made  conquests 
in  Spain  and  Italy.  At  length,  ruling  over  France,  Germany,  and 
other  countries,  he  wished  for  the  title  of  Emperor  of  the  West. 

4.  Accordingly,  he  went"  to  Rome,  and  knelt  down  at  the  high 

Ch.  CIX.— 1.  Who  was  Charlemagne  ?  2.  What  of  his  dress  ?  That  of  his  courtiers?  >. 
What  of  Charlemagne  ?    Over  what  countries  did  he  reign  ?     What  did  he  wish  ? 


FRANCE.  179 

altar  of  the  church  as  if  to  say  his  prayers.  There  was  a  large  con-, 
gregation  in  the  church,  and  they  were  much  edified  by  the  devout 
behavior  of  Charlemange.  But  while  he  was  kneeling,  the  pope 
stole  softly  behind  him,  and  placed  the  imperial  crown  upon  his 
head. 

5.  This  was  the  crown  which  all  the  old  emperors  of  Rome  had 
worn,  and  when  the  people  beheld  it  on  the  head  of  Charlemagne, 
they  shouted  "  Long  live  the  emperor  !"  Charlemagne  pretended  to 
be  surprised  and  angry ;  but  he  took  care  to  keep  the  imperial  crown 
upon  his  head. 

6.  Charlemagne  died  in  the  year  814,  when  he  was  quite  an  old 
man.  While  he  was  alive,  as  I  have  mentioned,  he  wore  a  sheep- 
skin cloak.  But  after  he  was  dead,  his  attendants  dressed  him  in 
robes  of  imperial  purple. 

7.  They  placed  a  throne  of  gold  in  his  sepulchre,  and  set  the  dead 
body  of  the  gray-bearded  old  emperor  upon  it.  A  sword  was  girded 
about  his  waist.  He  had  a  golden  crown  upon  his  head,  a  golden 
sceptre  and  shield  at  his  feet,  a  golden  chalice  in  his  hand,  and  a 
Bible  upon  his  knees. 

8.  Over  the  sepulchre,  there  was  a  magnificent  triumphal  arch, 
with  an  inscription  to  the  memory  of  the  mighty  Charlemagne. 
And  having  wasted  all  this  splendor  upon  the  senseless  corpse,  the 
attendants  shut  up  the  tomb,  and  went  to  pay  their  court  to  Charle- 
magne's successor. 

9.  This  was  his  son,  entitled  Louis  the  Mild.  I  know  not  where- 
fore he  was  called  the  Mild,  for  one  of  the  acts  of  his  reign  was  to 
put  out  the  eyes  of  another  king,  whom  he  had  taken  prisoner. 
When  Louis  died,  he  left  his  dominions  to  his  three  sons.  They  im- 
mediately went  to  war  with  each  other.  It  is  said  that  a  hundred 
thousand  men  were  slain  in  one  of  their  battles. 

10.  Some  of  the  succeeding  kings  of  France  were  Charles  the 
Bald,  Louis  the  Stammerer,  Charles  the  Fat,  Charles  the  simple, 
Louis  the  Foreigner,  and  Hugh  Capet.  These  sovereigns  performed 
no  actions  that  need  be  recorded  in  my  book. 


CHAPTER  CX.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  the  Crusades  or  Holy  Wars. 

1.  I  must  now  give  you  some  account  of  the  Crusades  or  Holy 
Wars,  undertaken  by  the  European  nations  for  the  recovery  of  Jeru- 
salem, which  was  in  the  hands  of  tlie  Turks.  The  Christians  had  a 
great  reverence  for  this  city,  for  here  Christ  preached,  here  he  per- 

4.  5.  What  did  he  do?  Describe  his  coronation.  6.  When  did  Charlemagne  die' 
How  was  his  body  dressed  for  his  burial  ?  S.  What  was  put  over  the  sepulchre  ?  9.  Who 
was  Louis  the  Mild?  Whatofhiin?  Waat  of  his  three  sons  ?  10.  Who  were  some  of  the 
•ucceeding  king*  of  France  ? 


180 


SCHOOL    HISTORY. 


formed  many  miracles,  here  he  was  crucified,  and  here  he  rose  from 
the  dead. 

2.  On  account  of  the  pious  reverence  entertained  for  what  they 
called  the  Holy  City,  many  Christian  pilgrims  went  on  foot  to  visit 
it.  It  was  very  common  for  the  Roman  Catholic  priests  to  impose 
this  pilgrimage  on  persons  who  had  committed  some  sin,  and  they 
were  made  to  believe,  that  in  this  way  alone  they  could  receive  pardon 
>f  God. 


Battle  between  a  Crusader  and  a  Saracen. 


3.  Now  the  pilgrims  to  Jerusalem  were  often  treated  ivith  cruelty 
and  scorn  by  the  Turks,  who  held  possession  of  Jerusalem  and  the 
country  around  it.  The  pilgrims  returned  to  Europe,  and  gave  an 
account  of  the  treatment  they  received.  This  excited  the  indignation 
of  the  Christians,  and  they  were  easily  induced  to  unite  in  a  great 
effort  for  taking  the  Holy  Land  from  the  infidel  Turks. 

4.  The  pope  of  Rome  at  this  time  had  vast  influence,  and  he 
wished  to  acquire  more.  When  this  project  was  proposed,  therefore, 
he  gave  it  his  sanction,  thinking  that  he  should  extend  his  dominion 
over  Palestine,  if  the  country  should  be  taken. 

5.  Peter  the  Hermit  was  the  principal  agent  in  exciting  the  people 
to  the  first  crusade.  He  was  a  half-starved  monk,  and  went  about 
bareheaded,  with  a  rope  round  his  waist,  and  wearing  a  garment  of 
coarse  cloth.  This  was  so  short  that  it  barely  covered  his  body, 
leaving  his  arms  and  legs  naked. 

6.  It  might  seem  that  such  a  scarecrow  as  this  would  rather  have 
excited  ridicule  than  reverence.     But  Peter  had  been  in  Palestine,  and 

Ch.  CX. — 1.  What  were  the  crusades  ?  Why  were  they  undertaken  ?  Why  did  the 
Christians  reverence  Jerusalem  ?  2.  What  of  pilgrimages  to  Jerusalem?  3.  How  were  ^he 
pilgrims  treated?  What  did  they  do  ?  What  was  the  consequence  of  their  represents 
tion»  ,     4.  What  of  the  pope  of  Rome  ?     6.  Describe  Peter  the  Hermit  ? 


FRANCE.  181 

had  experienced  the  insults  of  the  Turks.  He  therefore  spoke  of 
things  he  had  seen,  and  the  people  listened  with  a  willing  sympathy. 

7.  Thus  Peter  went  from  city  to  city,  and  everywhere  crowds 
came  to  hear  him.  There  was  soon  such  a  state  of  excitement,  that 
the  princes  assembled,  and  armies  were  speedily  gathered  for  the 
enterprise.  Thus  in  the  year  1096,  Peter  set  out  with  two  hundred 
thousand  men  at  his  heels.  He  carried  a  ponderous  cross  upon  his 
shoulders,  and  his  followers  wore  crosses  of  red  cloth  sewed  upon 
their  clothes. 

S.  But  scarcely  had  his  army  landed  in  Asia,  when  sultan  Solyman 
attacked  them,  and  made  a  terrible  slaughter.  As  a  trophy  of  his 
victory  over  the  poor  wretches,  he  built  a  pyramid  of  their  bones. 
Other  armies  of  crusaders  met  with  similar  misfortunes. 

9.  It  is  computed,  that  ei^ht  hundred  and  fifty  thousand  Christians 
lost  their  lives  in  the  course  of  the  first  crusade.  And  all  this 
slaughter  took  place  before  they  had  even  come  in  sight  of  Jerusalem. 

10.  There  was  another  army,  however,  belonging  to  the  first 
crusade,  that  had  better  suceess.  This  consisted  of  eighty  thousand 
men,  and  was  led  by  a  French  prince  called  Godfrey  of  Bologne.  He 
proceeded  through  Asia  Minor,  took  several  cities,  and  captured 
Jerusalem  in  1099.  From  this  period  till  the  year  1187,  the  Holy 
City  remained  in  the  hands  of  the  Christians,  when  it  was  again 
captured  by  the  Turks,  in  whose  hands  it  has  since  remained. 

11.  No  less  than  five  other  crusades  took  place;  the  last  being 
commenced  in  1248.  This,  with  most  of  the  others  proved  unsuc- 
cessful. The  whole  number  of  men  who  lost  their  lives  in  these 
wild  expeditions  was  not  less  than  two  millions. 

12.  It  appears,  that  many  of  the  crusaders  were  good  men,  and 
some,  perhaps,  were  wise  ones.  Several  of  the  leaders  were  brave 
knights,  and  they  went  forth  clad  in  bright  steel  armor,  and  mounted 
upon  fine  horses.  But  a  large  portion  of  the  armies  were  of  a  different 
character.  Some  were  half  crazy  people,  filled  with  religious  zeal, 
and  a  larger  portion  were  thieves  and  robbers,  who  joined  the  expedi- 
tions that  they  might  share  in  the  plunder  of  cities  that  should  be 
taken. 

13.  But  although  the  motives  of  many  of  the  crusaders  were 
selfish,  though  the  great  object  of  these  expeditions  was  not  very 
important,  and  though  much  slaughter  and  bloodshed  flowed  from 
them  ;  still  the  half  barbarous  inhabitants  of  Europe  brought  from 
the  East  many  arts  that  tended  to  refine  and  civilize  the  people.  In 
this,  and  other  ways,  the  crusades  produced  some  good  results. 

6.  Whatofhim?  7.  What  effect  had  his  preaching  ?  What  took  place  iu  1096  ?  8. 
Who  attacked  the  army  in  Asia  ?  What.  dljBke  sultan  do?  What  of  other  crusaders?  9. 
Whatofthe  hr.-l  crusade.'  10.  What  .d'  I  hoTjUOny  under  (lodfroy  of  Bologne  ?  What  city 
did  he  take?  When  did  the  Turks  retakemWwsalem ?  11.  How  many  crusades  were 
there?  When  was  the  first  crusade  hegun  ?  ^Bjle  last  ?  How  many  men  lost  their  lives  i» 
the  crusades?  12,  What  appears  concerning  many  of  the  crusaders?  Their  leaders? 
Whit  of  a  large  portion  of  the  armies?     13.   What  good  results  did  the  crusades   produce? 

16 


182 


SCHOOL   HISTORY. 


CHAPTER  CXI.  -EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  the  Feudal  System. 


Ruins  of  an  ancient  feudal  castle. 

1.  I  suppose  you  think  it  is  now  time  to  proceed  with  the  history  of 
France  ;  but  do  not  be  impatient.  It  is  not  right  for  one  who  under- 
takes to  tell  the  history  of  mankind,  to  speak  only  of  kings  and  the 
great  battles  which  they  fight.  We  must  not  forget  to  consider  how 
the  people  lived,  and  what  they  were  about  while  their  rulers  were 
thus  engaged. 

2.  If  I  were  only  to  speak  of  little  king  Pepin  and  Charlemagne, 
and  the  popes  and  other  rulers,  and  tell  you  what  they  did,  you  might 
still  be  ignorant  of  what  their  subjects  were  doing.  You  might  not 
know  whether  they  were  happy  or  unhappy,  whether  they  were  in  a 
state  of  poverty  or  plenty,  whether  they  were  in  the  enjoyment  of 
freedom,  or  suffering  the  miseries  of  despotism. 

3.  I  trust  you  will  therefore  excuse  me  for  talking  a  little  about  the 
Feudal  System,  Chivalry,  and  a  few  other  big  words,  which  it  is 
proper  you  should  understand.  I  have  told  you  that  the  northern 
tribes  of  Europe  were  fond  of  war,  and  of  a  restless,  roving  character. 
War  was  indeed  the  chief  business  of  the  men.  A  few  of  them  wete 
engaged  in  agriculture ;  but  a  large  portion  of  them  led  the  lives  of 
soldiers,  either  wholly,  or  at  such  times  as  their  services  were  re- 
quired. 

4.  A  few  were  devoted  to  the  building  of  houses,  to  the  manufac- 
ture of  armor,  aud  such  other  articles  as  the  simple  manners  of  the 

Ch.  CXI. — 1.  What  must  not  be  forgotten  .'  2.  Why  must  the  history  of  the  people  ujt 
be  neglected  ?     3.  What  of  the  northern  tribes  of  Europe  ?     What  of  the  men  ? 


FRANCE.  183 

people  rendered  necessary.  But  even  these  artisans  occasionally  bore 
arms,  and  went  with  their  countrymen  to  the  field  of  battle  if  they 
were  needed. 

5.  But,  as  I  have  said  before,  the  great  business  of  society  in  these 
times  was  war;  either  for  defence  against  the  attacks  of  other  tribes, 
or  for  the  purpose  of  conquering  other  tribes.  The  chiefs,  or  leaders, 
were  generally  the  bravest  and  strongest  men,  those  who  would  be 
most  likely  in  a  battle  of  hard  blows  to  insure  victory. 

6.  When  a  country  was  conquered,  the  lands,  towns,  cities,  gold, 
silver,  merchandise,  horses,  cattle,  and  all  other  property  belonging 
to  the  conquered  people,  were  considered  the  spoils  of  the  victors. 
The  people  who  were  defeated,  were  either  killed,  driven  away,  or 
reduced  to  a  state  of  servitude. 

7.  Strange  as  it  may  seem,  this  making  of  war  and  robbing  people 
of  their  lands  and  possessions,  was  not  only  considered  lawful,  but  it 
was  reckoned  grand  sport.  It  is  true,  that  the  soldiers  had  often  hard 
fare  and  hard  knocks;  occasionally  they  were  wounded,  and  many  of 
them  were  slain.  But  when  the  battle  was  over,  those  who  survived 
celebrated  their  victory  with  feasting  and  drinking,  and  other  amuse- 
ments suited  to  the  tastes  of  barbarous  men. 

8.  Between  the  intervals  of  fighting,  they  had  mimic  battles  among 
themselves,  or  two  stout  fellows  would  fight  with  swords  in  the  pre- 
sence of  the  whole  people.  At  other  times,  during  a  wet  day,  or  a 
dull  night,  they  would  prolong  their  festivities  by  telling  stories  of  the 
great  deeds  they  had  done,  or  seen,  or  heard  of,  or  by  singing  ballads 
of  bloodshed  and  battle. 

9.  It  frequently  happened  that  some  person  in  the  camp  had  a 
great  talent  for  singing  and  story-telling;  he  therefore  would  be  often 
called  upon  to  exercise  his  gift.  So  he  would  amuse  the  company 
with  wild  legends  of  the  chase,  in  which  a  king  or  prince  had  a  terri- 
ble battle  with  a  fierce  boar  or  a  rough  bear. 

10.  Or  he  would  tell  of  some  chief  who  had  performed  wonderful 
deeds,  or  perhaps  he  would  weave  some  superstitious  tale  of  ghosts 
that  walked  abroad  by  moonlight,  or  of  some  murdered  prince  whose 
spirit  often  came  at  night  to  haunt  the  castle  where  he  once  dwelt. 

11.  Such  were  some  of  the  amusements  which  repaid  these  barba- 
rians for  the  toils  of  war.  But  these  were  by  no  means  all.  The 
real  object  of  most  of  the  wars  among  these  people  was  plunder. 
War  took  the  place  of  trade  and  commerce  among  them,  and  the  prin- 
cipal inducement  to  carry  it  on  was  to  obtain  the  lands  and  the  goods 
of  other  nations.  It  was,  in  short,  a  system  of  plunder,  and  the  sev- 
eral tribes  might  be  considered  as  so  many  bands  of  robbers. 

12.  When  a  country  was  conquered,  the  spoils  were  distributed 
among  the  victors  according  to  their  rank.  The  king,  or  chief,  had  a 
lar^e  share,  the  inferior  chiefs  had  a  smaller  share,  and  the  common 
soldiers  had  still  less.     The  lands  were  divided  in  this  way ;  but  it 

f>.  What  was  the  great  business  of  society  in  these  times?  What  of  the  chiefs  ?  6  What 
of  a  conquered  country  ?  The  people?  7.  How  were  war  and  robbery  considered  ?  Tha 
foldiers  ?  The  -urvivors?  8.  What  was  done  in  the  intervals  of  fighting  ?  9.  What  of 
•lory  telling?  II.  What  was  the  real  object  of  war  among  these  ancient  nations  ?  Whit 
of  war?     How  might  the  tribes  be  considered  ? 

16 


184  SCHOOL  HISTORY. 

was  always  understood,  that  those  who  received  the  land  were  after* 
wards  bound  to  go  and  fight  whenever  called  upon  by  their  chiefs. 

13.  The  lands  were  not  held  in  those  times  as  they  are  now  among 
us;  each  individual  did  not  own  a  piece  of  land  and  build  upon  it,  or 
cultivate  it  as  he  liked.  But  a  large  tract  might  belong  to  the  king, 
and  a  smaller  tract  might  belong  to  the  inferior  chiefs  or  barons. 

14.  The  king  or  baron  built  upon  his  land  an  immense  strong  castle 
of  stone  ;  around  it,  the  people,  who  were  called  his  vassals  or  slaves; 
built  their  little  huts.  These  tilled  the  land,  taking  what  was  neces- 
sary for  their  own  support,  but  giving  the  best  of  every  thing  to  their 
liege  lord. 

15.  Now  what  is  meant  by  the  Feudal  System  is  this;  that  the 
vassals  of  a  baron  who  lived  upon  his  land  were  bound  to  do  military 
service  whenever  the  baron  required  it.  So  also  the  barons,  under 
the  Feudal  System,  were  required  to  do  military  service,  bringing  into 
the  field  all  the  men  they  could  muster,  whenever  their  king  re- 
quired it. 

16.  In  return  for  these  services,  the  lord  of  the  manor,  or  owner  of 
the  land,  was  expected  to  protect  his  people  intime  of  war;  and  as 
the  castle  was  usually  large  and  strong  the  people  fled  to  it,  when- 
ever an  enemy  appeared  in  sight. 

17.  Here  in  the  castle  they  would  make  the  best  defence  in  their 
power.  Sometimes  they  would  be  besieged  for  months;  but  so  long 
as  the  wines  lasted,  and  the  stores  of  provisions  held  out,  the  besieged 
inmates  of  the  castle  would  hold  their  revels,  tell  their  stories,  and 
sinfr  their  sonsrs. 


CHAPTER  CXIL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  Chivalry,  or  Knight- Errantry. 

1.  I  hope  you  now  understand  how  matters  and  things  went  on 
among  the  rude  tribes  of  France,  Germany,  and  most  other  northern 
countries  of  Europe,  in  early  times.  I  hope  also  you  understand  what 
is  meant  by  the  Feudal  System. 

2.  If  you  will  reflect  a  moment  you  will  perceive  that  Europe  at 
this  time  was  divided  among  a  great  number  of  warlike  tribes  or  na- 
tions; each  tribe  having  a  king,  each  king  having  under  him  several 
powerful  barons,  and  each  baron  having  a  good  many  vassals. 

3.  You  will  remember,  that  the  kings  and  barons  dwelt  in  strong 
stone  castles,  and  if  you  should  ever  go  to  Europe,  you  will  see  many 
of  these  still  in  existence,  some  of  which  were  built  more  than  a 
thousand  years  ago.     Most  of  them  are  in  ruins,  but  they  are  interest- 

12.  What  of  the  division  of  spoils?  What  of  lands?  13.  How  were  the  lands  held  in 
these  times?  14.  What  of  a  king  or  baron  ?  The  people  or  vassals?  15.  What  was  the 
Feudal  System?  What  were  the  vassals  and  barons  required  to  do  ?  10.  What  was  ex- 
pected of  the  lord  of  the  manor  ?  17.  What  of  a  besieged  castle  ?  Ch.  CXIL— 2.  What 
<san  you  say  of  Europe  in  feudal  limes  ? 


FRANCE. 


185 


ing  on  account  of  the  tales  and  legends  of  the  olden  times  which  are 
connected  with  them. 

4.  It  is  not  certain  when  the  Feudal  System  commenced,  but  it  ap- 
pears to  have  been  first  in  use  among  the  German  tribes,  and  was  in- 
troduced into  France  by  the  Franks,  who  entered  that  country  420 
A.  D.,  and  who  laid  the  foundation  of  the  French  monarchy,  about 
486  years  after  Christ.  It  continued  in  full  force  in  the  time  of  Char- 
lemagne, and,  for  some  centuries  after,  it  formed  the  basis  of  all  the 
political  systems  of  Europe. 

5.  Now  I  must  tell  you,  that  among  the  rough  kings  and  barons 
of  the  feudal  times,  it  often  happened  that  private  acts  of  violence 
and  injustice  took  place.  Sometimes  a  powerful  baron  would  come 
suddenly  upon  a  weaker  one,  seize  his  castle,  and  either  murder  him 
or  shut  him  up  in  a  dungeon.  Sometimes  one  of  these  barons  would 
carry  off  the  beautiful  daughter  of  another  king  or  baron,  and  take 
her  home  to  his  castle. 


A  Knight-errant  in  complete  Armor. 

6.  Even  in  these  rude  times,  such  things  were  considered  wrong, 
and  sometimes  a  brave  warrior,  called  a  knight,  would  lake  it  upon 
himself  to  redress  these  grievances.  He  would  perhaps  go  and  chal- 
lenge the  baron,  who  had  been  guilty  of  injustice,  to  come  out  and 
fight  with  him,  or  in  some  other  way  would  endeavor  to  repair  the 
injury  done. 

7.  The  people  applauded  these  knights,  and  cheered  them  on  to 
acts  of  daring,  in  the  cause  of  justice  and  benevolence.  Thus,  by  de- 
grees, their  numbers  increased,  and  about  the  time  of  the  crusades, 
there  appear  to  have  been  a  good  many  of  them. 

3.  What  must  you  remember?     4.  What  of  the  feudal  system  ?     Who  introduced  it  into 
France?     When?     When  was  the   foundation  of  the  French  monarchy  laid  ?     How  Ijng 
did  the  feudal  system  continue  ?     Of  what  did  it  firm  the  basis  ?     5.  What  happened  in  feu- 
dal times  ?     C.  How  were  such  things  considered  ?     What  would   a  knight  sometimes  Jo  ? 
.  What  of  the  people  ?     Knights  ? 

10* 


186  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

8.  The  crusades  themselves  seemed  to  establish  knight-errantry  aa 
a  regular  profession,  and  from  the  period  1100  after  Christ,  we  may 
consider  it  as  one  of  the  most  remarkable  institutions  in  Europe. 

9.  When  knight-errantry,  or  chivalry,  had  become  thus  established, 
those  who  belonged  to  the  profession  were  considered  as  under  a  re- 
ligious vow  to  devote  themselves  to  the  cause  of  justice  and  humani- 
ty. If  any  person  had  suffered  an  act  of  injustice,  they  considered 
themselves  bound  to  set  the  matter  right.  If  any  person  was  in  dis- 
tress, they  were  under  obligation  to  peril  their  lives  for  his  relief. 

10.  Besides  this,  the  knights  were  required  always  to  tell  the  truth, 
and  always  to  perform  their  promises;  they  were  expected  to  be  full 
of  generosity  and  courage,  and  never  to  be  guilty  of  any  act  of  mean- 
ness. They  were,  in  short,  expected  to  devote  themselves  to  the 
cause  of  humanity,  and  remedy,  as  far  as  in  their  power,  the  injustice 
and  violence  which  belonged  to  the  age  in  which  they  lived. 

11.  Many  of  these  knights  spent  their  whole  time  in  riding  about 
the  country  in  search  of  adventures.  These  were  called  knights- 
errant.  If,  in  the  course  of  their  travels,  they  heard  of  any  body  in 
distress,  they  would  offer  their  services  for  relief. 

12.  They  were  particularly  devoted  to  the  cause  of  ladies  who  had 
been  stolen  away,  and  shut  up  in  castles.  In  behalf  of  these,  they  of- 
ten performed  wonderful  feats  of  strength  and  valor.  Sometimes,  it  is 
true,  the  knights  acted  wickedly,  but  in  so  doing  they  violated  their 
vows. 


CHAPTER  CXIII.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

More  About  Chivalry. 

1.  If  one  knight-errant  chanced  to  meet  another,  they  usually  went 
to  fighting,  either  for  sport  or  renown.  Some  of  them  acquired  great 
fame,  and  a  multitude  of  songs  and  ballads  were  composed  in  celebra- 
tion of  their  deeds. 

2.  The  knights  were  very  particular  to  ride  fine,  strong  horses. 
Some  of  these  are  almost  as  famous  in  the  legends  of  chivalry,  as  their 
riders.  The  knight  was  powerfully  armed,  his  chief  weapon  being  a 
long  pointed  lance.  Beside  this,  he  had  a  sword,  dagger,  battle-axe, 
and  mace,  which  was  a  heavy  sort  of  club. 

3.  In  addition  to  these  weapons  for  attack,  he  had  a  defensive  armor, 
consisting  of  a  shield  of  metal,  a  helmet  of  steel  with  a  vizor  to  cover 
his  face,  a  body-harness  made  of  plates  of  steel,  and  sometimes  a  shirt 
of  mail  consisting  of  a  multitude  of  iron  links,  the  whole  fitting  close 

8.  What  of  the  crusades  ?  When  did  knight-errantry  hecome  a  regular  profession  ?  9. 
What  of  those  who  belonged  to  the  profession?  10.  What  was  required  and  expected  of 
the  kniehts?  11.  Who  were  knights-errant?  12.  What  did  they  perform  for  ladies? 
Uh.  ( !Xlfl. —  1.  What  happened  if  two  knights-errant  met?  What  was  done  in  celebration 
of  their  dctjds?     '■i-   What  of  tnuir  horses  ?     How  was  the  knight  armed  r 


FRANCE. 


187 


to  the  body.     Over  all  this,  the  knight  wore  a  long  flowing  robe,  which 
came  down  to  his  heels. 

4.  The  horse  also  was  carefully  defended  by  mail  or  steel  plates. 
His  head,  chest,  and  sides  were  usually  covered,  and  sometimes  the 
whole  body  was  shielded  by  glittering  steel.  Nothing  indeed  could 
exceed  the  care  and  preparation  usually  bestowed  by  the  knights  in 
training  their  horses,  in  selecting  their  armor,  in  having  it  carefully 
fitted,  and  in  keeping  it  bright. 


Ji  Tournament. 

5.  They  were  also  very  attentive  to  their  daily  exercise,  as  well  to 
preserve  their  health  and  acquire  strength,  as  to  keep  themselves  in 
perfect  practice. 

6.  A  knight  was  always  attended  by  a  squire,  and  sometimes  by 
several  squires.  These  attended  upon  their  masters,  and  were  con- 
sidered as  learning  to  become  knights  themselves.  As  the  institution 
of  chivalry  advanced,  it  became  a  matter  of  honor  to  be  a  kniirht;  and 
therefore  most  kings,  princes,  and  military  leaders,  took  upon  them- 
selves the  vows  of  knighthood.  The  celebrated  leaders  of  the  crusades, 
Richard  of  England,  Godfrey  of  France,  and  others  were  knights. 

7.  In  after  times,  therewere  several  orders  of  knights;  those  of  each 
order  taking  upon  themselves  peculiar  vows.  Such  were  the  Knights 
of  St.  John  of  Jerusalem,  the  Knights  of  Malta,  the  Knights  of  the 
Cross,  Knights  Templars,  &c.  i 

8.  When  society  had  became  somewhat  more  civilized,  it  was  the 
custom  in  different  parts  of  Europe  to  have  tilts  and  tournaments. 
These  were  occasions  of  great  ceremony,  and  multitudes  of  people 

4.  What,  of  the  horse's  caparison?  Knight's  armor?  5.  What  of  exercise?  G.  What 
of  squires?  How  was  the  profession  of  knighthood  considered  ?  Who  were  some  cele- 
brated knijhts  in  the  crusades  ?     7.  What  can  you  say  of  orders  of  knights  ? 


138  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

collected  together  to  witness  them.  They  were  often  splendid  beyond 
description.  Kings,  princes,  and  fair  ladies  delighted  in  these  exhibi- 
tions. 

9.  They  consisted  of  encounters  between  celebrated  knights,  clad 
"m  complete  armor.  They  took  place  in  some  open  plain,  surrounded 
with  tents  and  pavilions  filled  with  spectators.  The  victorious  knights 
were  honored  with  applause  from  the  people,  and  with  marks  of  favor 
even  from  kings  and  queens. 

]  0.  Such  was  the  institution  of  chivalry.  If  I  had  time,  I  could 
fill  a  book  with  stories  of  knights.  A  multitude  of  tales  called 
romances  were  written  in  the  age  of  chivalry.  These  recounted 
the  deeds,  or  pretended  deeds  of  celebrated  champions.  Some  of 
them  are  very  amusing,  but  they  are  nearly  all  filled  Avith  incredible 
fables. 

11.  Chivalry  was  at  its  height  from  the  year  1200  to  about  1400. 
From  this  latter  period  it  rapidly  declined,  and  in  the  time  of  Eliza- 
beth of  England,  that  is,  about  1600,  it  had  ceased.  If  there  were  a 
few  tilts  and  tournaments  after  this,  they  were  only  as  relics  of  an 
age  that  had  passed. 

12.  Thus  I  have  told  you  about  the  Feudal  System,  the  Crusades, 
and  Chivalry;  and  I  have  told  you  of  these  things,  in  connexion  with 
the  history  of  France,  because  the  people  of  that  country  were  largely 
concerned  in  all  these  matters. 


CHAPTER  CXIV.  -EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

King  Philip  and  Pope  Boniface.      Wars  of  the  French 
and  English. 

1.  I  will  now  go  on  with  my  story  about  France.  After  Charles 
the  Fat,  Hugh  Capet,  and  the  other  kings  I  have  mentioned,  there 
were  many  sovereigns,  but  I  shall  pass  them  over  till  1  come  to 
Philip  the  Fair,  who  began  to  reign  in  12S5.  He  possessed  great 
personal  beauty,  but  had  many  bad  qualities  of  mind  and  heart.  The 
most  remarkable  event  of  his  reign  was  a  great  quarrel  with  pope 
Boniface. 

2.  This  potentate  was  one  of  the  haughtiest  popes  that  ever  wore 
triple  crown.     He  spoke  to  the  sovereigns  of  Europe  as  if  he  were 

sovereign  of  them  all,  and  king  of  kings.     But  Philip  the  Fair  refused 
to  acknowledge  his  authority.    Pope  Boniface  excommunicated  king 

8.  What  of  tilts  and  tournaments?  9.  Describe  them.  What  of  the  knights  ?  10.  What 
romances?  11.  When  was  chivalry  at  its  height?  What  of  it  after  1400?  When  did  it 
cease  ?  12.  Why  is  the  story  of  the  Feudal  System,  Chivalry,  &c,  told  in  connexion  with 
the  history  of  France  ?  C'h.  CXIV.— 1.  When  did  Philip  the  Fair  begin  to  reign  ?  What 
of  him  ? 


FRANCE. 


189 


Philip  for  his  disobedience,  and  king  Philip  called  pope  Boniface  ah 
the  bad  names  he  could  think  of. 

3.  One  day,  some  of  Philip's  friends  took  pope  Boniface  prisoner. 
They  put  him  on  a  horse,  without  saddle  or  bridle,  and  made  him 
ride  with  his  face  towards  the  horse's  tail.  Nobody  could  help 
laughing  to  see  what  a  ridiculous  figure  was  cut  by  his  Holiness. 
But  as  for  poor  pope  Boniface,  he  took  the  joke  so  much  to  heart, 
that,  together  with  the  loss  of  his  treasures,  it  actually  killed  him. 
Philip  the  Fair  survived  him  several  years. 


Philip  the  Fair.         Charles  V.,  called  the  Wise.        Jane,  wife  of  Charles  V. 

4.  The  French  have  always  been  a  warlike  people.  They  have 
been  so  often  at  war  with  England,  that  Frenchmen  and  Englishmen 
used  to  think  themselves  born  to  be  each  other's  enemies. 

5.  On  the  death  of  Charles  the  Fourth,  in  132S,  Philip  of  Valois 
became  king  of  France.  But  Edward  the  Third,  king  of  England, 
asserted,  that  he  himself  was  the  rightful  king  of  France,  because  his 
mother  was  the  daughter  of  Philip  the  Fair.  He  undertook  to  enforce 
his  claim  by  invading  France  with  an  English  army. 

6.  King  Edward  challenged  Philip  of  Valois  to  fight  him  in  single 
combat;  but  Philip  preferred  to  meet  him  with  an  army.  At  the 
bloody  battle  of  Cressy,  in  France,  in  1346,  the  French  lost  the 
bravest  of  their  nobles,  and  thirty  thousand  men. 

2.  What  of  pope  Boniface?  What  took  place  between  him  and  Philip  the  Fa'xf  3. 
What  di<)  Philip  do  to  poor  pope  Boniface  ?  What  affect  had  his  treatment  upon  the  pope  ? 
4.  What  of  the  French  ?  How  did  the  French  and  Englishmen  consider  themselves?  f>. 
When  did  Charles  IV.  die  ?  When  did  Philip  of  Valois  become  king?  What  did  Edward 
III.  claim  ?    6.  What  did  king  Edward  do  ?     What  of  the  battle  of  Cressy  ? 


190  SCHOOL  HISTORY. 

7.  In  1350,  John  the  Good,  son  of  Philip  of  Valois,  succeeded  to  the 
throne  of  France.  The  country  was  invaded  by  an  English  army 
under  the  eldest  son  of  Edward  the  Third.  He  was  called  the  Black 
Prince,  on  account  of  the  color  of  his  armor. 

8.  King  John  of  France,  with  sixty  thousand  men,  encountered  the 
Black  Prince  of  England,  near  Poictiers.  The  Black  Prince  had  only 
eight  thousand  soldiers.  But  the  English  archers  and  cross-bow  men, 
let  fly  their  arrows  at  the  French,  and  made  a  dreadful  havoc  among 
them.     King  John  was  taken  and  kept  prisoner  four  years  in  London. 

9.  John  the  Good,  was  succeeded  by  his  son,  Charles  the  Wise. 
King  Edward  of  England  had  now  grown  old,  and  his  son,  the  brave 
Black  Prince,  was  dead.  The  French  therefore  got  back  all  the 
territortes  which  the  English  had  won  of  them,  except  the  town  ot 
Calais. 

10.  But  when  Charles  the  Well-beloved  was  king  of  France,  the 
English  renewed  the  war.  Henry  the  Fifth,  now  king  of  England, 
invaded  France.  At  the  battle  of  Agincourt,  he  had  but  fifteen  thou- 
sand men,  while  the  French  had  nearly  a  hundred  thousand. 

11.  Yet  the  English  gained  a  glorious  victory,  with  the  loss  of  only 
forty  men.  On  the  side  of  the  French,  there  were  seven  princes,  the 
high  constable  of  France,  and  ten  thousand  gentlemen  killed,  besides 
many  prisoners.     In  1420,  the  English  king  entered  Paris  in  triumph. 

12.  But  Henry,  king  of  England,  died  soon  afterwards ;  and  then 
the  French  began  to  beat  the  English.  The  chief  leader  of  the 
French  at  this  time,  was  a  girl  of  eighteen,  named  Joan  of  Arc,  or 
the  Maid  of  Orleans.  She  was  very  beautiful.  The  French  believed 
that  Heaven  had  sent  her  to  rescue  their  country  from  the  English  in- 
vaders. The  English  believed  her  to  be  a  witch,  and  that  the  evil 
one  assisted  her  in  fighting  against  them. 

13.  For  a  considerable  time,  it  was  found  impossible  to  withstand 
holy  Joan,  the  Maid  of  Orleans.  She  was  clad  in  bright  steel  armor, 
and  rode  in  front  of  the  French  army,  on  a  snow-white  horse.  In  her 
hand,  she  carried  a  consecrated  banner,  on  which  was  painted  the 
image  of  our  Saviour.  But,  at  last,  she  was  wounded  and  taken 
prisoner.  The  English  condemned  her  to  be  burnt  alive  for  witch- 
craft. 

14.  She  was  accordingly  bound  to  a  stake,  in  the  marketplace  of 
Rouen.  The  English  army  looked  on,  rejoicing,  while  the  flames 
roared  and  whirled  around  her.  When  the  fire  had  burned  out, 
there  remained  nothing  but  ashes  and  whitened  bones  of  the  valiant 
Maid  of  Orleans. 

7.  Who  became  king  in  1350  ?  Who  was  the  Black  Prince  ?  8.  Who  encountered  the 
Black  Prince  ?  Describe  the  battle  of  Poictiers  ?  9.  Who  succeeded  John  the  Good  ? 
Why  were  the  French  able  to  win  back  their  territories  from  the  English  ?  10.  Who  was 
the  next  king-  of  France  ?  What  battle  was  fought  with  Henry  V.  ?  11.  Whicli  side  won 
the  victory  ?  What  was  the  loss  of  the  French  ?  What  took  place  in  1420  ?  12.  What 
happened  after  the  death  of  Henry  V.  ?  Describe  the  Maid  of  Orleans  ?  What  did  the 
French  and  English  think  of  her  ?  13.  How  did  she  appear  at  the  head  of  the  army  i  14 
What  was  her  sad  fate  ? 


FRANCE. 


191 


CHAPTER  CXV.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Reigns  of  several  French  Kings. 


Murder  of  Henry  IV. 

1.  But,  though  the  Maid  of  Orleans  was  no  longer  their  leader,  the 
French  were  still  successful.  The  English  lost  nearly  all  that  Henry 
the  Fifth  had  won.  The  French  monarch  was  called  Charles  the 
Victorious,  on  account  of  his  many  triumphs. 

2.  Yet  he  was  an  unhappy  king.  His  son  hated  him,  and  attempted 
to  kill  him  by  poison.  After  the  discovery  of  this  plot,  the  poor  old 
king  was  afraid  to  lake  food  enough  to  support  life,  lest  he  should 
take  poison  with  it.     So  he  wasted  away,  and  died  miserably. 

3.  His  son,  Louis  the  Eleventh,  succeeded  him  in  1461.  He  was  a 
crafty,  treacherous,  and  cruel  king.  Once,  when  a  nobleman  was  tc> 
be  beheaded,  Louis  ordered  his  infant  children  to  be  placed  under  the 
scaffold,  that  they  might  be  sprinkled  with  their  father's  blood. 

4.  One  of  the  most  famous  of  the  French  kings,  was  Francis  the 
First,  who  ascended  the  throne  in  1515.  He  fought  against  the 
Swiss,  and  against  the  emperor  of  Germany;  but  the  emperor  took 
him  prisoner  at  the  battle  of  Pavia. 

5.  There  was  no  war  with  England  during  the  reign  of  Francis  the 
First;  but  he  once  held  an  interview  with  the  English  king  near  Ca- 
lais. So  much  magnificence  was  displayed  on  both  sides,  that  the 
place  of  meeting  was  called  the  Field  of  the  Cloth  of  Gold. 

Ch.  CXV.— 1.  What  of  the  French  people?  The  English?  The  French  king?  2. 
What  of  Charles  the  Victorious  !  3.  What  of  Louis  XI.?  When  did  Francis  I.  ascend 
the  throne  .'     What  of  him  ?     Describe  the  interview  at  Calais  ? 


192  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

6.  In  1560,  Charles  the  Ninth  became  king  of  France.  He  was 
then  a  boy  of  ten  years  old.  His  reign  was  disgraced  by  one  of  the 
bloodiest  scenes  in  history.  It  is  called  the  Massacre  of  St.  Bartholo- 
mew. 

7.  The  Catholics  (those  who  were  attached  to  the  pope  of  Rome) 
had  conspired  to  murder  all  the  Protestants,  (those  who  did  not  like 
the  pope)  throughout  France.  On  the  night  of  Saint  Bartholomew's 
day,  their  wicked  project  was  put  in  execution.  Some  writers  affirm, 
that  a  hundred  thousand  Protestants  were  murdered. 

S.  The  king  himself  sat  at  one  of  his  palace  windows,  with  a  mus- 
ket in  his  hand,  and  shot  some  of  the  poor  wretches.  But  he  was 
soon  called  to  receive  the  recompense  of  his  crimes.  After  the  mas- 
sacre, he  was  afflicted  with  disease,  and  he  died  in  1574. 

9.  The  next  king,  but  one,  was  Henry  the  Fourth,  who  ascended 
the  throne  in  1589.  He  was  a  good  king,  a  brave  warrior,  and  a  gen- 
erous man.  His  subjects  loved  him,  and  the  French  have  always 
been  proud  of  Henry  the  Fourth. 

10.  Yet  the  affection  of  his  people  could  not  save  his  life.  One 
day  he  was  riding  through  the  streets  of  Paris  in  his  coach.  Seven 
courtiers  were  with  him.  Other  vehicles  were  in  the  way,  so  that 
the  coachman  was  compelled  to  stop  the  horses.  The  king  chose  to 
alight. 

11.  There  was  a  man  near  the  coach,  named  Ravaillac.  He  was 
waiting  for  a  chance  to  kill  the  king;  and  now,  seeing  him  about  to 
get  out  of  the  coach,  he  drew  a  poniard.  All  the  power  of  France 
could  not  now  be  of  any  avail.  The  first  blow  of  the  poniard  wounded 
the  king,  and  the  second  killed  him. 


CHAPTER  CXVI.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Reigns  of  Louis  the  Grand  and  his  Successor. 

1.  The  murdered  Henry  was  succeeded  by  his  son,  Louis  the  Thir- 
teenth. The  government  was  chiefly  directed  by  Cardinal  Richelieu, 
an  ambitious  priest.     He  grew  more  powerful  than  the  king  himself. 

2.  The  next  king  was  Louis  the  Fourteenth,  whom  the  French  call 
Louis  the  Grand.  He  was  a  very  proud  and  haughty  monarch.  He 
endeavored  to  make  France  the  greatest  country  on  earth;  not  that 
he  really  cared  for  the  welfare  of  his  subjects,  but  because  he  wished 
to  exalt  himself  above  all  other  kings. 

3.  He  had  a  peculiar  manner  of  walking,  which  would  have  been 
ridiculous  in  a  common  man,  but  was  thought  extremely  majestic  in 
a  king.     He  used  to  wear  a  large  curled  Avig,  and  nobody  ever  saw 

6.  When  did  Charles  IX.  come  to  the  throne  ?  Describe  the  massacre  of  St.  Bartholo- 
mew. S.  When  did  Charles  IX.  die?  9.  When  did  Henry  IV.  come  to  the  throne?  What 
of  him  ?  11.  How  did  he  lose  his  life?  Ch.  CXVI. — 1.  Who  succeeded  Henry  IV.  ? 
What  of  cardinal  Richelieu?  2.  Who  was  the  next  king  ?  What  can  you  say  of  Louis  le 
Grand? 


FRANCE. 


193 


mm  without  it.     He  would  never  pull  off  his  wig  till  he  had  got  into 
bed  and  closed  the  curtains. 

4.  This  king  began  to  reign  at  five  years  old,  and  reigned  no  less 
than  seventy-two  years.  He  was  continually  at  Avar.  Li  the  early 
part  of  his  reign,  his  armies  achieved  many  splendid  victories. 

5.  But,  in  the  king's  old  age,  the  English  duke  of  Marlborough 
wasted  his  troops,  and  reduced  his  kingdom  to  great  distress.  The 
French  people  now  grew  weary  of  their  grand  monarch. 

6.  And  well  they  might  be  weary  of  him,  for  he  had  taken  all  their 
money,  in  order  that  he  might  have  the  means  of  going  to  war.  He 
seemed  to  think  it  more  necessary  that  he  should  have  glory,  than 
that  they  should  have  bread. 


Louis  XIV,        Maria  Theresa,  wife  of  Louis  XIV.     Louis  XV, 


7.  At  last,  in  1715,  the  old  king  died.  As  he  had  been  so  grand  in 
*\is  lifetime,  his  courtiers  deemed  it  proper  that  he  should  carry  as 
much  grandeur  with  him  to  the  tomb  as  possible.  They  therefore 
prepared  a  magnificent  funeral. 

S.  But  wherever  the  procession  passed,  the  people  heaped  curses 
on  the  royal  corpse.  They  hissed  so  loudly,  that,  if  the  king  haJ  not 
been  stone  dead,  he  would  have  started  up  in  his  coffin.  Thus  ended 
the  glorious  reign  of  Louis  the  Grand. 

9.  All  the  sons  and  grandsons  of  old  Louis  the  Grand  had  died  be- 
fore him.  He  was  therefore  succeeded  by  his  ereat-grandson,  a  cnj|d 
of  five  years  old,  who  now  became  Louis  the  Fifteenth. 

4.  What  ofhis  ware  ?  5.  Whal  oflhe  Duke  of  Marlborough  ?  fi.  W'liat  oftlie  French 
people?  7.  When  did  Louis  le  Grand  die?  Describe  Ihefuueral?  9.  Who  succeeded 
Louis  XIV.  ? 

17 


194  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

10.  Until  the  little. king  should  become  of  age  to  take  the  sceptre 
inlo  his  own  hands,  the  duke  of  Orleans  was  declared  regent  of" 
France.  Pie  was  a  profligate  man.  Instead  of  teaching  the  young 
king  how  to  make  his  subjects  prosperous  and  happy,  he  set  him  ail 
example  of  all  sorts  of  wickedness. 

11.  And  Louis  the  Fifteenth  turned  out  just  such  a  king  as  mighl 
have  been  expected.  In  his  whole  reign,  of  fifty-nine  years,  he  seems 
to  have  thought  of  nothing  but  his  own  selfish  pleasures. 

12.  His  kingdom  was  almost  ruined  and  his  subjects  were  starv 
ing.  But  if  an  earthquake  had  swallowed  France  and  all  its  inhabit- 
ants, the  king  would  hardly  have  cared.  The  reign  of  this  odious 
monarch  prepared  the  French  to  hate  the  very  name  of  monarchy. 
He  died  in  1774,  and  was  succeeded  by  his  grandson,  Louis  the  Six- 
teenth, who  was  then  a  young  man  of  twenty. 

13.  Thus  by  the  extravagance  of  Louis  the  Fourteenth  and  the 
profligacy  of  Louis  the  Fifteenth,  a  foundation  was  laid  for  what  is 
called  the  French  Revolution,  of  which  I  shall  tell  you  in  the  next 
chapter. 

14.  I  should  be  very  glad  to  pass  by  the  story  of  that  awful  period, 
for  I  know  it  can  give  my  reader  no  pleasure  to  read  of  violence  and 
bloodshed.  But  it  is  necessary  to  read  the  dark  as  well  as  the  bright 
pages  of  history. 

15.  We  may  learn  from  the  French  revolution  how  much  evil  may 
be  brought  upon  a  country  by  bad  rulers,  and  as  some  of  my  young 
pupils  will  hereafter  be  men,  and  be  called  upon  to  assist  in  choosing 
rulers,  they  may  be  made  to  feel  the  duty  of  choosing  good  ones. 


CHAPTER  CXVIL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  French  Revolutio?i. 

1.  Loins  the  Sixteenth  had  no  talents  which  could  render  him  fit 
to  govern  a  nation.  But  he  was  a  man  of  good  heart,  kind  disposi- 
tion, and  upright  intentions.  With  all  his  defects,  there  has  seldom 
been  a  better  king ;  for,  if  he  was  unable  to  do  good,  he  was  unwill- 
ing to  do  harm. 

2.  The  king  was  married  to  an  Austrian  archduchess,  named  Ma- 
rie Antoinette.  She  had  great  beauty  and  accomplishments;  but  she 
was  never  a  favorite  of  the  French  people. 

3.  Not  long  after  this  kins  and  queen  were  crowned,  the  American 
revolution  broke  out.  The  United  States  declared  themselves  a  free 
and  independent  republic.  The  people  of  France  took  a  great  inter- 
est in  the  affairs  of  America;  and  they  began  to  think  that  a  repub- 
lic was^  better  kind  of  government  than  a  monarchy. 

10.  What  of  the  duke  of  Orleans  ?  11.  What,  of  Louis  XV.  ?  12.  Whou  did  he  die  ? 
What  of  the  French  Revolution  ?  Ch.  CXVII.— 1.  What  of  Louis  XVI.  ?  -2.  Wl.al  of 
Marie  Antoinette  ?  3.  When  did  the  American  revolution  begin?  What  of  the  French 
peopj,,  ? 


FRANCE, 


195 


4.  They  compared  the  tyranny  under  which  they  and  their  fore- 
fathers had  groaned  for  ages,  with  the  freedom  which  made  the 
Americans  so  prosperous  and  happy.  The  more  they  reflected  upon 
the  subject,  the  more  discontented  they  became  with  their  own  con- 
dition. 


Louis  XVI,     Marie  Antoinette,  wife  of  Louis  XVI.    Louis  XVIII. 

5.  The  French  are  a  people  whose  minds  are  easily  excited,  and 
whenever  any  thing' remarkable  is  going  on  among  them,  you  would 
think  that  the  whole  nation  was  almost  mad,  or  perhaps  had  been 
drinking  too  much  wine.  So  it  happened  in  this  case.  They  now 
began  to  rave  against  the  king,  queen,  and  nobles,  the  priests,  the 
gentlemen,  and  all  others  whom  they  formerly  respected.  They 
even  blasphemed  against  Heaven  itself. 

6.  In  1789,  the  mob  of  Paris  tore  down  the  Bastile.  This  was  an 
old  castle,  where  the  kings  of  France  had  been  accustomed  to  confine 
such  of  their  subjects  as  offended  them.  Many  a  poor  wretch  had 
been  thrown  into  the  dungeons  of  the  Bastile,  and  never  again  beheld 
the  sunshine. 

7.  The  destruction  of  the  Bastile  was  a  good  thinsf ;  and  so  like- 
wise were  many  other  of  the  first  movements  of  the  French  revolu- 
ti  m.  But  when  the  people  had  once  begun  to  change  then  ancient 
government,  they  knew  not  where  to  stop. 

8.  It  was  not  long  before  blood  began  to  flow.  No  man  nor  wo- 
man in  the  kingdom  was  now  safe,  unless  they  wore  a  red  cap  upon 
their  heads,  which  was  called  the  cap  of  liberty. 

5.  How  do  the  French  appear  when  any  tiling  remarkable  is  going  on  ?  0.  What  wai 
done  id  1689?  What  of  the  Bastile  ?  7.  What  of  the  destruction  of  this  old  cutle?  8. 
What  were  people  obliged  to  wear  upon  their  heads? 


196  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

9.  At  this  period,  it  was  no  uncommon  thing  to  see  a  mob  of  men 
and*  women  in  the  streets  of  Paris,  carrying  a  bloody  head  upon  a  pole. 
And  those  who  looked  at  the  features  would  perhaps  recognise  the 
countenance  of  some  great  nobleman  or  beautiful  princess. 

10.  In  a  little  while  longer,  there  were  so  many  heads  to  be  cut  off, 
that  the  work  could  not  be  done  fast  enough  in  the  ordinary  way.  Il 
was  therefore  necessary  to  do  it  by  machinery ;  and  a  horrible  instru- 
ment, called  the  guillotine,  was  invented  for  the  purpose. 

11.  This  infernal  contrivance  was  set  to  work  upon  the  proud  no 
bles,  and  the  holy  priesthood,  and  the  beautiful  ladies  of  France 
Hundreds  of  their  heads  fell  upon  the  pavement  of  Paris,  and  theii 
blood  run  like  a  river  through  the  streets. 

12.  When  many  of  the  loftiest  heads  in  the  kingdom  had  been  cut 
off,  the  people  fixed  their  eyes  on  the  head  that  wore  a  crown.  "  Off 
with  the  king's  head  too!"  cried  they.  So  they  dragged  the  poor, 
harmless  king  before  the  national  convention,  and  he  was  forthwith 
sentenced  to  the  guillotine. 

13.  As  the  poor  king  mounted  the  steps  of  the  scaffold,  he  gazed 
around  at  the  fierce  and  cruel  multitude.  It  seemed  all  like  a  dream, 
that  they,  his  born  subjects,  should  be  waiting  there  to  see  him  die. 
Then  he  looked  at  the  guillotine,  and  beheld  it  stained  with  the  blood 
of  the  thousand  victims  who  had  been  dragged  thither  before  him. 

14.  He  could  not  yet  believe  but  that  his  royal  blood  was  precious 
to  his  people.  He  lingered,  — he  was  loth  to  lay  down  his  head, — he 
shivered  with  the  agony  of  his  spirit.  There  stood  a  holy  priest  be- 
side him  on  the  scaffold.  Other  priests,  in  those  dreadful  times,  had 
abjured  their  God  ;  but  here  was  one  who  held  fast  his  faith.  Other 
subjects  had  betrayed  their  king;  but  here  was  one  who  revered  him 
most  upon  the  scaffold. 

15.  He  whispered  consolation  to  the  unhappy  king,  and  pointed 
heavenward.  The  victim  mustered  his  fainting  courage,  and  laid  his 
head  upon  the  block.  "Son  of  saint  Louis,"  said  the  priest,  "ascend 
to  heaven !" 

16.  Down  came  the  axe  of  the  guillotine,  and  the  head  that  had 
worn  a  crown  was  severed  from  the  body  !  The  blood  of  a  kingly 
race  gushed  out  upon  the  scaffold.  Thus  the  crimes  and  misused 
power  of  many  kings  had  brought  vengeance  on  their  innooent  de- 
scendant. 


CHAPTER  CXVIII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Fuse  of  Napoleon  Bonaparte. 

1.  The  day  of  the  king's  execution  was  the  21st  of  January,  1793. 
Not  many  months  afterwards,   the  queen  was  likewise  beheaded 

9    What  was  common  in  Paris  at  tin's  lime  ?     10.  Why  was  the  guillotiue  invented  ?     11. 
What  use  was  made  of  it  ?     13.  Describe  the  execution  olLouM  XVI. 


FRANCE.  197 

France  was  now  ruled  by  a  succession  of  bloody  monsters,  who,  one 
day,  were  sending  crowds  to  the  guillotine,  and,  the  next  day,  were 
sent  thither  themselves.  This  anarchy  was  what  the  French  called 
a  Republic. 

2.  In  the  mean  time,  war  was  breaking  out  on  all  sides.  Austria, 
Prussia,  England,  Holland,  Spain,  and  Russia  sent  armies  against 
France.  The  French  raised  a  million  of  men,  and  bade  defiance  to 
\11  Europe. 


3.  In  the  French  army,  there  was  a  young  lieutenant  of  artillery, 
uamed  Napoleon  Bonaparte.  When  the  war  began,  he  was  an  un- 
known and  friendless  youth.  But  he  distinguished  himself  in  every 
battle  and  every  siege,  till,  in  a  very  few  years,  the  whole  world  had 
heard  of  Bonaparte. 

4.  When  he  was  only  twenty-six  years  old,  he  conquered  Italy. 
The  next  year  he  compelled  the  emperor  of  Austria  to  make  peace. 
In  179S,  he  invaded  Egypt,  and  fought  many  battles  in  the  sandy 
deserts,  and  among  the  pyramids. 

5.  The  French  were  now  tired  of  being  governed  by  men  whose 
only  engine  of  government  was  the  guillotine.  They  wanted  a  ruler 
who  would  deserve  their  obedience  by  his  sagacity  and  energy,  and 
not  merely  compel  them  to  obedience  by  the  fear  of  having  their 
heads  cut  off. 

6.  Napoleon  Bonaparte  was  such  a  man.  He  was  not  a  good  man, 
nor  a  truly  wise  one.  He  was  a  selfish  and  ambitious  despot.  But, 
perhaps  he  was  a  more  suitable  ruler  for  such  a  people  as  the  French, 
than  if  he  had  been  a  different  man. 


Ch.  CXVIII. — 1.  When  was  Louis  XVI.  beheaded?  Describe  the  French  republic? 
2.  What  countries  now  went  to  war  witli  France  ?  3.  What  of  Napoleon  Bonaparte  ?  4. 
What  acts  did  Napoleon  perform  ?  G.  What  of  the  French  people  at  this  time  ?  6.  What 
of  Napoleon?  1h4 

17* 


198 


SCHOOL   HISTORY. 


7.  He  saw  that  the  French  were  now  so  excited,  that  it  would  be 
difficult,  perhaps  impossible,  to  restrain  them.  He  thought  it  better 
that  they  should  make  war  on  foreigners  than  slaughter  each  other, 
and  with  the  sword  rather  than  the  guillotine.  So,  partly  because 
he  could  not  help  it,  but  chiefly  because  he  was  ambitious,  Napoleon 
Bonaparte  became  a  mighty  conqueror. 


CHAPTER  CXIX.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Fall  of  Bonaparte. 


The  Burning  of  Moscow. 


1.  In  1802,  Bonaparte  was  elected  consul  of  the  French  republic, 
for  life.  Two  years  afterwards  he  was  proclaimed  emperor,  by  the 
name  of  Napoleon.  He  had  now  more  power  than  any  of  the  ancient 
kings. 

2.  I  cannot  follow  this  great  general  in  his  marches  all  over 
Europe,  nor  even  number  the  victories  which  he  won.  Wherever 
he  went,  monarchs  humbled  themselves  before  him.  He  drove  them 
from  their  thrones,  and  placed  his  own  brothers  and  chief  officers 
there  instead.  He  gave  away  royal  diadems  like  playthings.  He 
was  called  the  Man  of  Destiny,  because  fate  seemed  to  have  ordained 
that  he  should  always  be  victorious. 

3.  But,  in  1812,  the  spell  of  his  success  began  to  be  broken.  He 
invaded  Russia  with  a  vast  army,  and  penetrated  to  the  city  of  Mos- 

7.  What  were  his  thoughts  upon  the  French  ?  What  did  he  become  ?  Ch.  CXIX. — 
1.  What  were  the  titles  of  Napoleon?  2.  What  happened  wherever  he  went?  What 
was  he  called  ? 


"RANGE.         ^  199 

cow.     The  Russians  set  the  city  on  fire.     Winter  was  comicg  on, 
and  the  French  soldiers  had  nowhere  to  shelter  themselves. 

4.  They  retreated  towards  Poland.  On  their  way  thither,  they 
fought  many  battles  with  the 'Russians,  and  the  weather  was  so  bitter 
cold,  that  the  bodies  of  the  slain  were  frozen  stiff.     The  snow  was 

'  crimsoned  with  their  blood. 

5.  Before  they  reached  the  frontiers  of  Poland,  three-fourths  of  the 
army  were  destroyed.  The  emperor  Napoleon  fled  homeward  in  a 
sledge,  and  returned  to  Paris.  He  soon  raised  new  armies,  and  was 
ready  to  take  the  field  again. 

6.  But  all  the  nations  of  Europe  were  now  allied  against  him,  and, 
after  a  few  more  battles,  he  was  driven  from  Germany  into  France. 
The  enemy  followed  him.  They  compelled  him  to  surrender  the 
imperial  crown  of  France  in  exchange  for  the  sovereignty  of  the  little 
island  of  Elba,  in  the  Mediterranean. 

7.  Napoleon  went  to  Elba,  and  remained  there  almost  a  year.  But 
in  March,  1815,  he  suddenly  landed  again  on  the  French  coast.  He 
was  almost  alone  when  he  set  his  foot  on  the  shore.  But  there  were 
a  multitude  of  his  grim  old  veterans  throughout  the  country.  These 
shouted  for  joy,  and  trampled  on  the  white  flag  of  the  Bourbon  kings, 
who  had  succeeded  him.  In  a  few  days,  Napoleon's  banner  again 
waved  triumphant  all  over  France. 

S.  The  nations  of  Europe  now  mustered  their  armies  once  more. 
Thev  were  led  by  the  English  Duke  of  Wellington.  Napoleon 
marched  into  Flanders,  or  Belgium,  to  meet  them.  He  was  followed 
by  almost  every  young  Frenchman  that  could  shoulder  a  musket. 

9.  The  emperor  Napoleon's  last  battle  was  fought  at  Waterloo,  on 
the  18th  of  June,  1815.  There  he  was  utterly  overthrown,  and 
France  was  overthrown  with  him.  The  warlike  emperor  was  sent 
to  die  on  the  Island  of  St.  Helena,  and  the  Bourbon  king  was  again 
established  on  the  throne  of  Louis  the  Sixteenth. 

10.  But  a  strange  and  interesting  scene  has  lately  been  witnessed 
in  France  relating  to  Napoleon.  The  French  people  did  not  like  to 
think  that  the  remains  of  Napoleon  were  far  away  upon  the  rock  of 
St.  Helena.  So  in  1S40,  Louis  Philippe,  king  of  the  French,  sent  his 
son  in  a  national  ship,  and  he  brought  the  body  of  the  late  emperor 
back  to  France. 

11.  The  people  received  the  body  with  military  honors,  and  many 
of  Napoleon's  old  soldiers  and  officers,  rushed  to  the  side  of  the  coffin, 
and  wept  over  it  as  if  he  had  been  their  father.  With  vast  ceremony 
the  body  was  taken  to  Paris,  and  there  it  is  now  interred,  in  the 
famous  edifice  called  the  Hotel  of  Invalids. 

3.  What  happened  in  1S12?  What  of  the  French  army?  5.  What  of  Napoleon?  G. 
What  happened  to  him  ?  7.  How  long  did  Napoleon  remain  at  Elba  ?  What  of  him  in 
1815?  Describe  his  landing  in  France?  8.  Who  led  the  nations  of  Europe?  What  did 
Napoleon  do  ?  Who  followed  him  ?  9.  When  was  the  battle  of  Waterloo  fought  ?  Fate 
of  Napoleon?     10.  What  has  lately  been  witnessed  in  France  ? 


200  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  CXX.-EURQPE  CONTINUED. 

Recent  Affairs  of  France. 

1.  Loins  the  Eighteenth,  the  new  king  of  France,  was  a  fat,  quiet, 
respectable  sort  of  old  gentleman,  and  seems  to  have  been  chiefly 
distinguished  for  his  love  of  oysters.  He  died  in  1S24,  and  was  suc- 
ceeded by  his  brother,  Charles  the  Tenth. 

2.  It  was  said  of  all  the  Bourbon  family,  that  they  had  learnt 
nothing  during  their  exile  from  France,  nor  forgotten  anything.  And 
Charles  soon  proved  that  he  had  not  forgotten  that  his  ancestors  had 
exercised  absolute  power,  nor  learnt  that  such  power  is  very  danger- 
ous to  possess  or  exercise. 

3.  In  1830,  when  Charles  the  Tenth  had  sat  on  the  throne  about 
six  years,  he  forbade  the  printing  of  any  newspapers,  except  such  as 
praised  his  conduct  and  government. 

4.  The  mob  of  Paris  immediately  rose,  and  began  a  war  against 
the  royal  troops.  They  beat  out  the  brains  of  the  king's  soldiers  with 
paving  stones,  and  shot  them  from  the  windows  of  the  houses.  The 
old  king,  who  had  not  forgotten  the  days  of  the  revolution,  began  to 
tremble  for  his  head. 

5.  In  order  to  ke.ep  it  on  his  shoulders,  he  took  off  his  golden 
crown,  and  put  it  on  the  head  of  his  grandson.  But  the  French 
would  not  acknowledge  the  little  fellow  for  their  king.  They  raised 
large  armies,  and  drove  Charles  the  Tenth  and  his  family  out  of  the 
kingdom. 

6.  They  then  asked  the  good  and  glorious  La  Fayette,  (the  man 
who  came  and  fought  with  our  countrymen  in  the  time  of  the  Revo- 
lution,) what  sort  of  a  government  they  should  have.  He  would 
have  chosen  a  republic,  like  our  own;  but  he  knew  that  his  country- 
men were  not  like  us. 

7.  He  therefore  told  them,  that  the  government  must  be  a  limited 
monarchy,  and  that  Louis  Philippe,  the  Duke  of  Orleans,  must  be 
their  king.     Louis  Phillippe  was  accordingly  raised   to  the  throne. 

8.  He  went  on  prosperously  for  a  time,  and  was  considered  the 
most  successful  sovereign  of  the  age.  But  in  February  1848,  a 
revolution  broke  out  in  Paris,  which  extended  over  France. 

9.  In  December,  1848,  Louis  Napoleon  Bonaparte  (a  nephew  of  the 
emperor  Napoleon)  was  elected  President.  He  assumed  the  duties 
of  the  office  immediately,  thus  becoming  the  first  President  of  the 
Republic  of  France. 

10.  In  December,  1851,  Louis  Napoleon  suppressed  by  violence  the 
republic,  and  soon  after  was  declared  emperor,  under  the  name  of 
Napoleon  III. 

Ch.  CXX.— 1.  What  of  Louis  XVIII.  ?  When  did  he  die  ?  2.  What  was  said  of  the 
Bourbon  family?  What  did  Charles  prove  ?  3.  What  took  place  in  1S30  1  4.  What  of  the 
mob  of  Paris?  5.  What  did  the  old  king  do?  0.  What  did  the  French  ask  La  Fayette! 
7.  What  did  he  tell  them ?    Who  was  made  king?    What  has  since  occurred? 


GERMANY.  <201 

CHAPTER  CXXL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  Germany. 

1.  Germany  lies  to  the  east  of  France,  and  contains  no  less  than 
'hirty-six  different  kingdoms  and  states,  beside  Austria  and  Prussia, 
which  are  sometimes  considered  as  making  a  part  of  Germany,  and 
of  which  I  shall  tell  you  by  and  by.  These  thirty-six  states  and  king- 
doms contain  about  twelve  millions  of  inhabitants. 

2.  Some  of  the  principal  kingdoms  of  Germany  are  Bavaria,  Wur- 
temburg,  Hanover,  and  Saxony.  They  are  nearly  all  governed  by  a 
king,  or  grand  duke,  or  prince  of  some  kind  ;  yet  they  are  leagued  to- 
gether under  a  sort  of  congress,  called  a  diet,  which  meets  at  Frank- 
fort    To  this  diet  the  states  send  deputies. 

3.  There  are  a  great  many  large  towns  and  cities  in  Germany. 
Among  these,  the  principal  are  Hamburgh,  which  carries  on  a  good 
deal  of  commerce  with  this  country  ;  Munich,  which  is  a  very  splen- 
did city  ;  Carlesruhe,  which  has  its  streets  arranged  like  the  sticks  of 
an  open  fan  ;  Dresden,  which  is  famous  for  the  beautiful  country 
around  it,  and  Frankfort,  which  is  encircled  by  a  belt  of  fine  gardens 
and  public  walks. 

4.  I  could  easily  write  a  book  about  Germany,  for  it  is  full  of  curi- 
ous and  interesting  things.  In  the  cities  there  are  a  great  many 
churches,  in  the  Gothic  style,  which  excite  the  wonder  and  admira- 
tion of  a  traveller,  on  account  of  their  grandeur,  and  the  skill  with 
which  many  parts  of  them  are  carved. 

5.  In  many  of  the  towns  there  are  very  curious  manufactures,  par- 
ticularly of  musical  boxes,  toys  for  children,  and  clocks  of  all  kinds. 
The  Germans  are  very  ingenious  in  these  matters,  and  sometimes 
they  make  clocks  so  cunningly  contrived,  that  at  every  hour  a  little 
bird  will  come  out,  flutter  his  wings,  and  sing  a  song,  or  perhaps  tell 
you  the  time  of  day. 

6.  If  you  ever  travel  in  Germany,  you  will  find  that  the  people  are 
very  fond  of  music,  All  the  boys  and  girls  are  taught  music  as  a  part 
of  their  education.  Most  of  them  can  play  upon  some  instrument. 
The  flute  is  a  great  favorite,  and  is  called  the  German  flute,  either 
because  it  was  invented  in  Germany,  or  because  it  is  more  in  use 
amongst  the  Germans  than  elsewhere. 

7.  In  passing  through  Germany,  you  will  often  notice  the  ruins  of 
castles,  some  of  which  were  built  a  thousand  or  twelve  hundred  years 
ago.  These  belonged  to  the  barons  who  occupied  the  country  in  the 
old  feudal  times,  of  which  I  have  told  you  in  the  history  of  France. 

Ch.  CXXI. — 1.  Where  is  Germany  an<l  what  di.us  it  contain  ?  Pojiulation  of  the  thirty 
six  states  and  kingdoms?  2.  What  are  some  of  the  principal  kingdoms  of  Germany?  How 
•„n  they  governed  ?  How  are  they  united  ?  Where  does  the  diet  meet?  What  do  tha 
UmIi  -  -'  lid  I"  ihi*  diet?  3.  Deicribe  some  of  the  principal  cities  of  Germany.  4.  What 
of  churches?  ■"'•  What  are  some  of  the  manufactures  ?  6.  What  of  Music?  The  flute? 
".  What  of  old  castles? 


202  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

CHATTER  CXXIL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  the  ancient  Tribes  of  Germany,  Charlemagne,  Sfc. 

1.  In  ancient  days,  Germany,  as  I  have  told  you,  was  inhabited  by 
numerous  tribes  of  barbarians.  Among  these  were  the  Goths,  Visi- 
goths, Vandals,  Suevi,  Cimbri,  Teutones,  Heruli,  Alemanni,  and  many 
others.  As  there  was  no  Peter  Parley  among  them  to  write  their  his- 
tory in  early  times,  we  know  little  or  nothing  of  them  till  two  or  three 
hundred  years  before  Christ. 

2.  At  this  time  they  were  numerous,  but  they  were  mere  savages. 
They  were  clothed  in  the  skins  of  wild  beasts,  and  seemed  to  delight 
only  in  war  and  plunder.  In  the  time  of  Caesar,  they  were  very  pow- 
erful, but  that,  famous  conqueror  marched  against  them,  and,  after 
many  bloody  battles,  they  were  reduced  to  submission. 

3.  I  have  already  told  you  that  wherever  the  Romans  extended 
their  arms,  they  carried  their  arts.  Thus  the  rude  tribes  of  Germany 
became  partially  civilized;  many  of  the  people  exchanged  their  skins 
of  beasts  for  the  Roman  toga  or  gown.  They  also  learnt  how  to 
make  better  weapons  of  war,  how  to  build  better  houses,  and  how  to 
live  more  comfortably- 

4.  But  you  remember,  that  four  or  five  hundred  years  after  Csesar, 
poor  old  Rome  was  tottering  to  decay.  It  was  therefore  unable  to 
keep  these  restless  tribes  of  the  north  in  subjection ;  nay,  Rome  was 
now  incapable  even  of  defending  herself. 

5.  The  Germans  soon  discovered  how  matters  stood.  They  saw 
that  in  Spain,  Italy,  and  Greece,  there  were  a  great  many  rich  cities, 
and  pleasant  towns,  and  fruitful  valleys.  They  saw  that  in  these 
countries  the  Romans  had  collected  the  wealth  of  the  whole  world, 
and  these  shrewd  barbarians  thought  it  would  be  a  good  speculation 
to  go  to  these  countries  and  live  there. 

6.  They  thought  it  would  be  much  better  to  go  and  live  in  palaces 
and  fine  houses,  and  have  a  plenty  of  wine,  and  plenty  of  gold,  silver, 
and  jewels,  than  to  live  in  their  own  less  fruitful  country,  and  earn 
their  bread  by  toil,  or  by  plundering  each  other. 

7.  Accordingly,  some  of  them  set  out  under  their  daring  leaders, 
and  marched  into  Italy.  Others  soon  followed  ;  and  in  the  course  of 
a  few  years,  these  hordes  had  settled  like  swarms  of  bees  in  all  the 
southern  countries  of  Europe. 

8.  But  still  many  remained  behind  in  Germany,  and  thus  increased, 
so  that  in  the  time  of  Charlemagne  they  were  numerous  and  power- 
ful.    But  he  conquered  them,  as  I  have  said  in  the  history  of  France. 

Ch.  CXXII. — 1.  How  was  Germany  anciently  inhabited  ?  Mention  some  of  the  barba- 
rian tribes.  2.  What  of  them  in  ancient  times?  In  the  time  of  Caesar?  3.  What  of  the 
arts  of  the  Romans  ?  How  did  the  rude  tribes  become  partly  civilized  ?  What  did  (bey 
do?  4.  What  of  Rome  several  hundred  years  after  Caesar?  5.  What  did  the  Germain 
soon  discover  ?  6.  What  did  they  think  ?  7.  What  did  some  of  them  do  ?  What  hap- 
pened in  a  few  years  ? 


GERMANY.  203 

Thus,  having  made  himself  master  of  Germany,  he  became  its  empe- 
ror, and  resided  there.  You  will  recollect,  that  his  empire  included 
France,  Germany,  and  many  other  countries. 

9.  The  empire  of  Germany,  thus  established,  was,  however,  com- 
posed of  many  separate  sovereignties,  each  of  which  had  its  own 
ruler.    In  the  year  912,  it  became  the  custom  for  these  rulers  to  make 

i  choice  of  one  of  their  number,  and  declare  him  emperor.  He  then  pre- 
tided  over  the  whole  of  Germany.  Thus  Germany  was  what  is 
railed  an  elective  monarchy,  and  so  it  continued,  even  so  late  as  the 
year  1806. 

10.  In  1056,  Henry  the  Fourth  was  emperor.  He  had  a  sharp  quar- 
rel with  pope  Gregory  the  Seventh.  The  pope's  power  was  so  great, 
that  he  compelled  the  emperor  to  come  to  Italy  to  ask  his  pardon. 

11.  When  Henry  arrived  at  the  gate  of  the  pope's  palace,  the 
weather  was  exceedingly  cold,  and  there  was  snow  on  the  ground. 
Pope  Gregory  was  sitting  by  a  comfortable  fire.  He  sent  the  empe- 
ror word  that  he  would  have  nothing  to  say  to  him,  till  he  had  stood 
three  whole  days  barefooted  in  the  snow,  without  tasting  a  mouthful 
of  food. 

12.  This  penance  the  poor  emperor  was  compelled  to  undergo.  On 
the  fourth  day,  pope  Gregory  gave  him  absolution  for  his  sins,  and  al- 
lowed him  to  warm  himself  and  eat  his  dinner. 

13.  Another  emperor,  also  named  Henry,  who  reigned  about  a 
hundred  years  afterwards,  quarrelled  with  pope  Celestinus.  In  order 
to  make  peace,  he  was  persuaded  to  kneel  down  and  kiss  the  pope's 
toe.  But  no  sooner  had  his  lips  touched  the  toe,  than  pope  Celestinus 
drew  back  his  foot,  and  hit  the  emperor's  crown  a  kick,  which  sent 
it  halfway  across  the  room. 

14.  In  1273,  Rodolph  of  Hapsburgh,  a  native  of  Switzerland,  was 
elected  emperor  of  Germany.  He  was  the  ancestor  of  the  present 
sovereigns  of  Austria.  Most  of  the  German  emperors,  since  his  reign, 
have  been  his  descendants. 


CHAPTER  CXXIII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Affairs  of  Switzerland. 

1.  Until  the  year  1307,  Switzerland  was  under  the  government  of 
Germanv.  Switzerland,  as  you  know,  is  a  mountainous  little  coun- 
try, which  is  hemmed  in  between  Germany,  France,  and  Italy. 

2.  As  I  have  many  kind  wishes  for  my  young  readers,  1  hope  it  may 
be  their  pleasant  fortune  some  day  or  other  to  visit  Switzerland. 

8.  What  of  the  barbarians  tliat  remained  in  Germany  ?  What  of  Charlemagne  ?  What 
did  his  empire  include  ?  9.  What  of  the  sovereignties  of  Germany?  What  was  the  cus- 
tom in  912?  What  of  the  emperor  ?  What  was  the  government  of  Germany  ?  10.  Wnen 
Was  Henry  IV.  emperor?  W  hat  of  the  pope  ?  11.  What  of  the  penance  laid  by  the  pope 
upon  the  king  ?  13.  Relate  the  anecdote  of  Henry  and  pope  Celestinus.  14.  Who  was 
king  of  Germany  in  1273?  What  of  him?  Ch.  CXXIII.—  1.  What  of  the  government  of 
Switzerland  ?     Where  is  Switzerland' 


204 


SCHOOL   HISTORY. 


When  you  go  tnere,  you  will  find  good  roads,  but  I  advise  you  to  tra- 
vel on  foot.  There  are  so  many  pleasant  things  to  see,  so  many  tall 
mountains  looking  like  white  clouds  up  in  the  sky,  so  many  little 
blue  lakes,  seeming  like  mirrors,  encircled  with  frames  made  of  hills, 
so  many  bright  green  valleys,  so  many  old  ruinous  castles,  in  short, 
so  many  interesting  things  to  see,  that  you  will- be  stopping  every 
moment,  and  a  carriage  would  therefore  be  a  great  trouble. 


Chamois. 

3.  I  have  been  over  this  country  myself,  and  I  went  on  foot.  Swit- 
zerland seemed  to  me  like  a  little  world  of  itself.  Every  thing  was 
strange,  but  still  interesting.  Among  such  wild  mountains,  you  would 
perhaps  expect  to  meet  with  a  Avild  and  fierce  people.  Yet  the  Swiss 
are  a  gentle  and  honest  race.  I  should  like  to  visit  the  country  again, 
but  my  old  limbs  will  never  more  toil  up  and  down  those  hills. 

4.  But  I  must  now  proceed  with  my  brief  account  of  the  history  of 
Switzerland.  When  Albert  the  First  became  Emperor,  in  129S,  he 
acted  like  a  tyrant  towards  Switzerland.  He  appointed*  governors 
who  were  worse  tyrants  than  himself.  One  of  them,  named  Gesler, 
set  his  cap  upon  a  pole,  and  ordered  all  the  people  to  bow  down  to  it. 

5.  The  famous  peasant,  William  Tell,  Avould  not  bow  down  to 
Gesler's  cap.  My  readers  have  heard  the  story,  how  Gesler  com 
manded  Tell  to  shoot  at  an  apple  on  his  own  son's  head,  and  how 
Tell  hit  the  apple  without  hurting  his  son. 

6.  When  the  Swiss  rebelled  against  the  emperor  of  Germany,  Tell 
wa>itheir  principal  leader.  After  sixty  pitched  battles  with  the  em- 
peror's troops,  the  liberty  of  Switzerland  was  established,  and  it  be- 
came a  free  and  independent  republic. 

2.  Describe  the  appearance  of  the  country  there.     3.  What  of  the  people  ?     4.  What  of 
Albert  I.3     What  of  Gesler  ?     5.  What  of  William  Tell  ?     6.  How  did  Swilzeiland  ob 
tain  her  liberty  ?  • 


GERMANY.  205 

7.  It  is  said,  that  some  of  the  Swiss  still  believe  that  William  Tell 
is  not  yet  dead,  though  it  is  nearly  five  hundred  years  since  he  was 
seen  on  earth.  They  suppose,  that  he  lies  asleep  in  a  cavern  near 
the  lake  of  Lucerne,  with  two  other  men  who  assisted  in  founding 
the  public. 


8.  These  three  slumberers  are  called  the  Men  of  Grutle.  If  ever 
Switzerland  shall  be  enslaved,  it  is  fancied  that  they  will  start  from 
their  sleep,  and  come  forth  with  their  ancient  garb  and  weapons,  and 
rouse  up  the  people  to  fight  for  their  freedom. 

9.  Since  the  time  of  William  Tell,  who  died  in  the  year  1534, 
Switzerland  has  generally  been  a  free  country.  But  during  the  French 
revolution  it  was  conquered  ;  it  has  since  been  restored  to  independ- 
ence, yet  the  people  are  overawed  by  the  kings  that  reign  in  the 
neighboring  countries. 

10.  Many  of  the  Swiss  leave  their  beautiful,  but  poor  country,  to 
seek  their  fortunes  in  other  lands.  Some  enter  foreign  armies  as  sol- 
diers, and  some  go  to  Paris  and  London,  to  sing  songs,  or  carry  about 
shows,  and  thus  get  a  little  money.  You  often  find  a  Swiss  boy  in 
the  streets  of  these  great  cities,  doing  what  he  can  to  get  a  living. 


CHAPTER  CXXIV.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Sequel  of  German  History. 

1.  I  will  now  proceed  with  the  history  of  Germany.  Charles  the 
Fiftl*  was  the  most  renowned  of  the  emperors  of  Germany.  He  was 
likewise  king  of  Spain,  and  ruler  of  the  Netherlands,  and  part  of  Italy. 

7.  What  ,cgend  have  the  Swiss  concerning  William  Tell  and  his  two  companions?  9 
When  did  Tell  'lie.'  What  of . Switzerland  since  the  time  of  Tell?  10.  What  of  the  Swiw 
people?     Ch.  CXXIV.— 1.  What  of  Charles  V.  ? 


206  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

2.  When  this  great  potentate  was  fifty-seven  years  old,  he  grew 
weary  of  pomp  and  power.  He  therefore  took  off  his  crown,  and 
gave  it  to  his  son  Philip,  and  went  to  live  in  a  monastery  in  Estra- 
madura,  in  Spain.  He  dressed  very  plainly,  and  busied  himself  in 
saying  his  prayers  and  working  in  a  garden. 

3.  One  day,  he  wrapped  himself  in  a  shroud  and  lay  down  in  a  cof- 
fin, stretching  himself  out  as  if  he  were  dead.  He  then  ordered  his 
attendants  to  carry  him  to  the  tomb.  The  reader  must  not  suppose 
that  the  emperor  meant  to  be  buried  alive.  He  merely  wished  to  re- 
mind himself  that  his  life  must  soon  close.  But  the  ceremony  has- 
tened his  end ;  for  it  brought  on  a  fever,  of  which  he  died,  in  1588. 

4.  Ferdinand  the  Second,  who  began  to  reign  in  1619,  was  called 
by  the  Catholics  the  Apostolic  emperor,  because  he  was  a  bitter  per- 
secutor of  the  Protestant  inhabitants  of  Germany.  His  cruelties 
forced  them  to  ask  the  aid  of  the  Swedish  king,  Gustavus  Adolphus, 
who  accordingly  invaded  Germany,  and  gained  many  victories. 

5.  The  subsequent  history  of  Germany  does  not  abound  with  the 
sort  of  events  which  my  young  readers  would  be  desirous  of  knowing. 
Few  or  none  of  the  later  emperors  performed  any  remarkable  actions. 
But  they  appear  to  have  been  better  than  most  sovereigns,  for  they 
cannot  be  accused  of  great  crimes. 

6.  The  emperor  of  Germany,  as  I  have  mentioned  above,  was  gen- 
erally a  prince  of  the  Hapsburgh  family.  The  kingdom  of  Austria 
was  enlarged  by  the  successive  emperors,  and  finally  became  great 
and  powerful. 

7.  It  was  now  able  to  carry  on  war  by  itself,  and  was  at  different 
times  engaged  in  struggles  with  Turkey,  with  France  and  Spain,  with 
Prussia,  and  sometimes  with  several  of  the  sovereign  states  of  Ger- 
many. 

8.  In  1792,  Francis  the  Second  became  emperor  of  Germany.  He 
undertook  a  war  against  Napoleon  Bonaparte,  but  his  armies  were 
routed,  and,  in  1S06,  he  was  compelled  to  resign  the  title  of  emperor 
of  Germany.  He  was  afterwards  called  emperor  of  Austria.  His 
empire  at  the  time  of  his  death,  which  took  place  in  1836,  was  one 
of  the  most  powerful  sovereignties  of  Europe,  and  deserves  a  seperate 
chapter. 

9.  There  is  now  no  German  emperor.  The  seperate  states  and 
kingdoms  and  governed  by  their  own  sovereigns  and  their -own  laws. 

After  the  revolution  in  France,  in  February,  1848,  great  agitation  took 
place  in  several  of  the  German  states.  The  general  diet  consisted  of 
members  chosen  by  general  suffrage ;  there  was  a  free  press  through 
out  Germany,  and  most  of  the  kings  were  compelled  to  give  charters 
to  the  people.  But  a  reaction  has  taken  place,  and  the  former  despot 
isms  are  restored. 

2.  Relate  an  anecdote  of  him.  3.  When  did  Charles  V.  die?  4.  When  did  Ferdinand  II. 
begin  to  reign  ?  What  of  him  ?  What  were  the  Protestants  forced  to  do  ?  5.  What  of 
the  late  emperors  of  Germany  ?  6.  What  of  the  emperor  of  Germany  ?  Kingdom  of  Aus- 
tria? 7.  With  what  countries  has  Austria  waged  war?  8.  Who  became  emperor  of  Ger> 
Biny  in  1792  ?     What  took  place  in  1806  ?     What  of  the  Austrian  Empire  ? 


AUSTRIA 


207 


CHAPTER  CXXV.-EXJROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  Austria,  Hungary,  Sfc. 


1.  Austria  is  an  extensive  and  powerful  empire,  lying  south  of 
Russia  and  Poland,  and  north  of  Turkey.  On  the  west  it  is  bounded 
by  the  German  States,  Switzerland,  and  Italy. 

2.  Austria  formerly  belonged  to  Germany,  and  is  still  considered  as 
belonging  to  it.  But  of  late  years  other  countries  have  been  added  to 
it  which  do  not  belong  to  Germany.  It  now  includes  Hungary,  Bo- 
hemia, a  part  of  Poland,  a  part  of  Italy,  and  many  other  states  which 
were  formerly  independent.  Its  present  population  is  about  thirty-two 
millions,  including  all  these  places. 

3.  Vienna  is  the  capital  of  the  German  part  of  Austria,  and  is  one 
of  the  most  splendid  cities  in  Europe.  It  is  situated  on  the  Danube, 
which  is  a  large  river.  In  winter,  this  is  frozen  over,  and  the  people 
amuse  themselves  by  sliding,  skating,  and  driving  upon  it  with  vari- 
ous kinds  of  sledges  or  sleighs.  The  scene  presented  at  such  a  lime 
is  very  gay  and  pleasant. 

4.  In  summer,  the  inhabitants  resort  to  the  public  gardens,  which 
are  extensive  and  beautiful.  Here  are  fine  walks,  where  you  may 
see  people  of  all  kinds.  There  are  ladies  and  gentlemen  taking  the 
air,  boys  and  girls  scampering  about,  men  with  monkeys  taught  to 
dance,  and  a  multitude  of  curious  sports.  The  gentlemen  of  Austria 
are  much  addicted  to  hunting  wild  boars,  which  are  common  in  that 
country. 

5.  In  the  German  part  of  Austria  which  is  the  eastern  portion,  the 
inbabitants  speak  the  German  language,  and  have  the  manners  and 


Ch.  (.'XXV. —  1.  Where  does  Austria  lie  ?  Its  boundaries?  ' 
belong  ?  What  does  it  now  include  ?  3.  What  of  Vieuua  ? 
Amusements  ?     4.  What  of  the  public  gardens  ? 

18 


.  To  what  does  Austria 
What   of  the  Danube? 


208  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

customs  of  Germany.  The  history  of  this  country  has  been  partly 
told.  In  early  times  it  was  occupied  by  tribes  of  barbarians.  At  a 
later  period  it  formed  one  of  the  states  of  the  German  empire. 

6.  At  this  time  it  was  called  an  archduchy,  and  was  governed  by 
an  archduke,  who  was,  however,  subject  to  the  emperor.  Rodolph  of 
Hapsburgh  succeeded  to  the  government  of  the  empire  in  1273,  as  I 
have  toi<f  you,  and  from  him  the  sovereigns  of  Austria  have  since  de- 
scended. After  his  time,  Austria  rapidly  increased  in  power,  and  iis 
archduke  was  at  length  considered  as  of  course  the  emperor  of  all 
Germany. 

7.  It  has  since  been  engaged  in  many  wars,  particularly  with  Swe- 
den, Turkey,  and  France.  In  1688,  the  Turks  pushed  their  arms  in- 
to the  heart  of  the  empire,  and  laid  siege  to  Vienna,  but  were  finally 
driven  back. 

8.  In  1S09,  Austria  was  involved  in  a  war  with  Bonaparte.  She 
had  well  trained  soldiers  and  able  generals,  but  the  French  emperor 
beat  them  in  several  pitched  battles,  and  finally  entered  Vienna.  Here 
he  made  peace  with  the  emperor,  but  took  from  him  a  large  portion 
of  his  dominions. 

9.  These,  however,  were  afterwards  restored,  and  at  the  present 
day,  Austria  may  be  considered  as  one  of  the  leading  kingdoms  of 
Europe.  It  is  a  curious  fact,  that  the  emperors  of  Austria  have  had 
a  great  many  beautiful  daughters.  Many  of  these  have  been  married 
to  the  kings  and  princes  of  Europe,  and  it  is  owing  to  this,  more  than 
to  success  in  war,  that  Austria  has  been  able  to  acquire  its  vast  pos- 
sessions, and  extensive  dominions. 


CHAPTER  CXXVL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  Hungary,  Bohemia,  the  Tyrol,  $fc. 

1.  I  must  now  give  you  a  very  brief  account  of  some  of  the  depend- 
encies of  Austria.  Hungary  is  an  extensive  country,  and  includes 
several  provinces.  Buda,  the  capital,  is  a  fine  city,  situated  upon  the 
Danube. 

2.  The  climate  of  Hungary  is  pleasant  and  the  soil  yields  very  fine 
grapes,  of  which  some  choice  wines  are  made.  The  moumains  af- 
ford considerable  quantities  of  gold  and  silver.  The  inhabitants  are 
divided  into  two  classes,  the  rich  and  the  poor.  The  former  live  in 
splendid  palaces,  and  the  latter  are  but  little  better  than  their  slaves. 

3.  The  original  inhabitants  of  Hungary  consisted  of  several  fierce 
tribes,  who  appear  to  have  come  from  Asia  into  Europe  at  a  very  early 


5.  What  of  the  German  part  of  Austria  ?  What  of  it  in  ancient  times  ?  At  a  later  period? 
6.  What  was  it  called  at  this  time?  Who  succeeded  to  the  crown  in  1273?  What  of 
Austria  and  its  archduke  ?  7.  What  of  the  wars  of  Austria  ?  What  happened  in  168S?  8. 
Wliat  happened  in  1809  ?  What  did  Bonaparte  do  ?  9.  How  may  Austria  be  considered 
at  the  present  day  ?  What  is  a  curious  fact?  Ch.  CXXVI. — 1.  What  of  Hungary  '  iu 
capital  '     2,   Climate  and  soil  of  Hungary  ?     Mountains?     Inhabitants? 


BOHEMIA. 


»09 


date,  by  crossing  the  Altai  Mountains.  They  probably  resembled 
those  Tartar  tribes,  called  Turks,  who  fell  upon  the  Saracen  empire, 
and  established  the  empire  of  Turkey. 


Bohemian  Gypscys. 

4.  Tne  principal  of  the  Hungarian  tribes  were  called  Huns.  An 
army  of  these,  you  will  recollect,  was  led  into  Italy  by  the  fierce  and 
Woody  Attila,  about  450.  He  had  already  fought  many  battles,  and 
made  the  Greek  empire  a  tributary.  He  now  crossed  the  Alps,  and 
pouring  down  upon  the  plains  of  Italy,  spread  terror  and  desolation 
among  the  inhabitants.  He  approached  the  city  of  Rome,  but  was 
compelled  to  retire.     He  died  in  4.51. 

5.  For  many  years  Hungary  was  the  scene  of  perpetual  wars.  Its 
rulers  did  not  acquire  the  title  of  king  till  the  time  of  Stephen,  who 
died  in  103S,  after  a  reign  of  forty-seven  years.  In  1563,  Hungary 
became  attached  to  the  Austrian  empire,  and  continues  so  to  the  pre- 
sent day. 

6.  Bohemia  is  a  country  surrounded  by  mountains,  containing  aboul 
four  millions  of  inhabitants.  It  is  rich  in  mines  of  silver,  tin,  and 
precious  stones.  Many  of  the  present  inhabitants  are  Jews.  There 
are  also  a  great  many  of  those  strange,  wandering  people,  called 
Gypseys. 

7.  This  country  derives  its  name  from  a  tribe  of  Celts  from  Asia, 
who  settled  there  about  600  years  B.  C.  About  450  after  Christ,  it 
appears,  that  the  Celts  had  been  driven  out,  for  the  people  at  that 
time  wore  Germans,  under  the  government  of  a  duke.  Charlemagne 
rendered  the  country  tributary,  but  it  afterwards  became  a  kingdom. 


3.  What  of  the  original  inhabitants?    Their  origin?    Whom  did  they  probably  resem 
Me?     4.  What  of  the  ilnns?     What  of  Attila  ?     Where  did  he  dl     " 
*y  for  many  years  ?     What  of  Stephen  ?    What  took  place  in  1663 
Population?     Jlincs?     Inhabitant*? 

18* 


ey  probably  resem 

5.  What  of  Hunga 

G.  What  of  Bohemia? 


210  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

In  1526,  it  was  attached  to  the  house  of  Austria,  and  has  continued 
so  from  that  day. 

S.  I  need  not  proceed  to  tell  you  more  about  the  provinces  belong- 
ing to  the  empire  of  Austria.  I  have  already  given  you  some  account 
of  Venice,  and  if  I  had  room,  I  could  tell  you  of  the  brave  Tyrolese, 
who  live  in  the  mountains  between  Italy  and  Germany,  and  many 
other  tribes  under  the  government  of  Austria. 

9.  But  can  only  add  that  great  political  agitation  has  lately  taken 
place  in  Austria,  and  it  is  probable  that  important  changes  will  soon 
take  place  in  the  empire. 


CHAPTER  CXXVIL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  Prussia. 

1.  There  are  five  great  powers  in  Europe.  Great  Britain,  France, 
Russia,  Austria,  and  Prussia.  Of  these  Prussia  is  the  smallest,  that 
is,  it  has  the  fewest  people,  the  least  wealth,  the  smallest  number  of 
soldiers,  and  therefore  the  least  power.  Yet  it  is  still  an  extensive 
country,  and  has  about  as  many  inhabitants  as  the  United  States. 

2.  The  kingdom  of  Prussia  censists  of  two  seperate  tracts  of  terri- 
tory. The  larger  of  the  two  is  bounded  north  by  the  Baltic,  east  by 
Russia,  south  by  Austria,  and  west  by  Germany.  The  smaller  por- 
tion is  a  part  of  Germany,  and  is  bounded  on  the  north  and  east  by  the 
Netherlands  and  Belgium. 

3.  The  capital  of  Prussia  is  Berlin,  situated  on  the  river  Spree,  a 
river,  by  the  way,  with  a  very  merry  name.  It  is,  however,  a  sober 
stream.  The  city  is  twelve  miles  in  circumference,  and  is  surrounded 
by  a  wall.  It  has  a  splendid  palace,  where  the  king  resides,  a  fine 
university,  where  a  great  many  young  men  are  educated,  and  several 
places  of  public  amusement.  It  is,  on  the  whole,  one  of  most  splen- 
did cities  in  Europe. 

4.  Beside  Berlin,  there  are  many  other  fine  cities  in  Prussia.  Among 
these  are  Potsdam,  where  there  is  a  royal  palace,  and  Dantzic,  a 
wealthy  town  and  the  chief  seaport  of  Prussia.  At  this  place,  there 
is  a  powerful  fortress,  with  immense  stone  walls  and  a  multitude  of 
cannon.  It  is  defended  by  a  large  number  of  soldiers,  who  always 
remain  in  it. 

5.  The  inhabitants  of  Prussia  are  chiefly  of  German  origin,  and 
speak  the  German  language.  These  are  industrious,  and  a  multitude 
of  schools  having  been  established  by  the  emperor  among  them,  they 

7.  What  of  a  tribe  of  Celts?  Who  occupied  the  country  in  450?  What  of  Charle- 
magne? What  took  place  in  1526?  8-  Where  do  the  Tyrolese  live  ?  Ch.  CXXVII.— 
1.  What  are  the  five  great  powers  of  Europe?  Which  is  the  smallest  ?  What  of  it?  Its 
inhabitants?  2.  How  is  the  kingdom  of  Prussia  divided?  Bound  the  two  portions  ?  3. 
Capital  of  Prussia?  River  Spree?  What  of  the  city  ?  4.  What  of  Potsdam  ?  Dantzic' 
What  of  the  fortress  ? 


PRUSSIA.  211 

are  tolerably   well  educated.    But  they  are  not  a  free  people ;  and 
without  freedom  even  education  cannot  make  a  nation  happy. 

6.  Beside  the  German  population,  Prussia  has  a  good  many  Jews. 
There  are  also  the  remains  of  tribes  that  settled  in  the  country  long 
ago,  who  speak  their  original  languages.  These  people  are  generally 
ignorant,  and  appear  unwilling  to  be  taught. 


CHAPTER  CXXVIII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

History  of  Prussia. 

1.  Prussia  did  not  become  a  kingdom  till  the  year  1701.  Previous 
to  that  time  it  was  governed  by  dukes.  Its  ancient  inhabitants  were 
called  Borussi,  from  whom  the  country  took  the  name  of  Prussia. 

2.  Frederic  William  the  First,  who  ascended  the  throne  in  1713, 
was  a  very  odd  sort  of  a  king.  He  used  to  wear  an  old  blue  coat, 
which  was  ornamented  with  rows  of  copper  buttons,  reaching  from 
his  chin  half-way  down  his  legs.  Whenever  he  got  a  new  coat,  he 
made  the  tailor  sew  on  these  same  old  copper  buttons. 

3.  He  prided  himself  greatly  on  a  regiment  of  his  guards,  which 
consisted  of  very  tall  men,  many  of  whom  were  seven  feet  high. 
These  gigantic  fellows  came  from  all  parts  of  Europe ;  and  if  they 
would  not  come  of  their  own  accord,  the  king  hired  people  to  bring 
them  by  force. 

"^4v  Frederic  William  was  in  the  habbit  of  walking  about  the  streets 
of  Berlin,  with  a  big  cane  in  his  hand,  and  if  he  happened  to  see  any 
idle  people,  he  would  give  them  a  sound  threshing.  He  beat  his  own 
son  oflener  than  anybody  else.  The  princess,  his  daughter,  got  like- 
wise a  good  many  hard  knocks. 

5.  When  this  ill-tempered  old  king  was  dead,  his  son  Frederic 
came  into  possession  of  an  enormous  quantity  of  treasure,  as  well  as 
an  army  of  sixty  thousand  men.  He  soon  found  uses  enough  for  his 
money  and  soldiers,  in  a  war  with  Austria,  Russia,  and  France. 

6.  The  war  between  Prussia  and  these  three  kingdoms  began  in 
1756,  and  was  called  the  Seven  Years'  War.  Saxony  and  Sweden 
joined  the  enemies  of  Frederic.  At  one  time,  he  seemed  on  the  point 
of  losing  all  his  dominions.  But  he  finally  brought  the  war  to  an 
honorable  close.  He  was  then  the  most  celebrated  sovereign  of  his 
time,  and  is  known  in  history  by  the  title  of  Frederic  the  Great. 

7.  He  was  almost  as  peculiar  in  his  dress  as  his  father  had  been. 
He  always  wore  a  uniform,  consisting  of  a  blue  coat  faced  with 
red.  and  a  yellow  waistcoat  and  breeches.      But  his  clothes  were 


6.  What  of  the  inhabitants  of  Prussia  ?  Schools?  Of  what  blessing  are  the  people  in 
want?  6.  What  of  the  Jews?  Ancient  tribes?  Ch.  CXXVIII.— 1.  When  did  Prussia 
become  a  kingdom  ?  How  was  it  previously  governed  ?  Its  ancient  inhabitants  ?  2.  What 
of  Frederic  William  I.?  When  did  he  ascend  the  throne?  Give  an  account  of  him  ?  5. 
Who  succeeded  him?  In  what  wars  did  he  engage  ?  6.  What  war  began  in  i756  ?  ^Uat 
kingdom! joined  the  enemies  of  Frederic?     What  was  he  called' 

18* 


212  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

often  torn,  and  generally  soiled  with  snuff.     On  his  head  was  a  very 
large  cocked  hat,  and  he  wore  a  long  cue  behind. 

8.  When  Frederic  the  great  was  grown  an  old  man,  he  used  to 
sit  in  an  easy  chair,  wrapped  in  a  large  cloak.  He  appeared  to 
take  no  pleasure  in  his  palace  nor  in  all  the  pomp  and  power  of"  his 
kingdom. 

9.  He  looked  very  sad  and  wobegone,  and  might  be  heard  mut- 
tering to  himself: — "  A  little  while  longer,  and  1  shall  be  gone  !" 
He  died  in  17S6,  at  the  age  of  seventy-five. 

10.  He  was  succeeded  by  his  nephew,  Frederic  William  the 
Second,  who  reigned  eleven  years.  The  next  king  was  Frederic 
William  the  Third.  He  had  a  large  army,  and  thought  himself 
powerful  enough  to  withstand  the  emperor  Napoleon. 

11.  But  at  the  battle  of  Jena,  in  1S06,  Napoleon  wasted  the 
Prussian  army,  and  killed  or  wounded  twenty  thousand  men.  About 
forty  thousand  were  taken  prisoners.  Frederic  William  was  then 
deprived  of  a  great  part  of  bis  territories. 

12.  After  the  battle  of  Waterloo,  and  the  final  defeat  of  Napoleon, 
the  losses  of  Prussia  were  repaired.  Frederic  William  has  shown 
himself  a  well-meaning  man.  He  declared,  that  there  should  be  a 
Bible  in  every  cottage  in  his  kingdom,  and  I  believe  he  has  tried  to 
keep  his  word. 

13.  He  has  taken  more  pains  than  any  other  king  that  ever  lived 
to  have  all  the  children  sent  to  school ;  and  the  good  state  of  educa- 
tion in  the  country  is  owing  to  his  efforts. 

14.  But  unhappily  the  government  was  despotic,  and  the  king 
refusing  to  give  liberty  to  his  people,  they  rebelled  in  1848,  and  much 
bloodshed  and  confusion  followed.  A  charter  and  free  press  were 
granted,  but  affairs  have  now  returned  to  their  former  condition. 


CHAPTER  CXXIX.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Description  of  Russia. 

1.  The  Russian  empire,  like  that  of  Turkey,  lies  partly  in  Europe 
and  partly  in  Asia.  The  whole  of  the  northern  part  of  Asia  belongs 
to  Russia.  This  is  thinly  scattered  over  with  a  great  number  of  differ- 
ent tribes,  who  chiefly  wander  about  from  place  to  place  in  search  of 
food  for  their  cattle. 

2.  Siberia  is  a  name  given  to  nearly  all  the  northern  part  of  Asia. 
It  is  a  bleak,  cold  region,  and  almost  makes  one  shiver  to  think  of  it. 
The  people  are  poor,  and  dress  in  the  skins  of  wild  animals,  and  for 
the  most  part  live  in  poor  huts.     It  is  to  this  country  of  Avinter  and 

7.  What  was  the  dress  of  Frederic  the  Great?  8.  What  of  him  when  he  had  grown 
old?  9.  When  did  he  die?  10.  What  two  kings  succeeded  him?  What  of  Frederic 
William  III.  ?  11.  What  took  place  at  the  hattle  of  Jena?  What  of  the  Prussian  king. 
12.  What  took  place  after  the  battle  of  Waterloo  ?  What  else  can  you  say  of  this  king' 
Ch.  CXXIX.— 1.  What  of  the  Russian  empire  ?     What  of  northern  Asia  ?     Tribes  ? 


RUSSIA 


213 


poverty,  that  the  Russian  emperor   banishes  those  of  his  subjects 
whom  he  does  not  like. 


3.  I  will  now  tell  you  of  that  part  of  Russia  which  lies  in  Europe. 
It  is  a  vast  territory,  about  equal  iu  extent  to  all  the  United  States, 
and  embraces  more  land  than  all  the  other  kingdoms  of  Europe.  The 
population  is  not  less  than  sixty  millions. 

4.  You  will  see  by  this,  that  the  emperor  of  Russia  is  a  very 
powerful  king.  He  reigns  over  his  subjects  pretty  much  as  he 
pleases,  there  being  no  law  superior  to  his  will.  He  is  not  only  a 
despot  in  his  own  country,  but  he  is  a  terror  to  all  Europe. 

5.  He  has  a  great  many  palaces  in  different  parts  of  his  kingdom, 
but  he  resides  chiefly  at  St.  Petersburg.  He  has  an  immense  army, 
and  is  always  surrounded  with  a  great  many  soldiers. 

6.  By  looking  on  a  map,  you  will  see  that  Russia  in  Europe  extends 
from  the  Northern  or  Frozen  Ocean  on  the  north,  to  the  Black  Sea  on 
the  south,  a  distance  of  nearly  two  thousand  miles.  On  the  east,  it  is 
separated  from  Asia  by  the  Ural  mountains;  on  the  west,  it  is  bounded 
by  the  Gulf  of  Finland,  the  Baltic  Sea,  Prussia,  Austria,  and  Turkey. 

7.  In  such  a  vast  territory  as  this,  you  may  well  suppose  that  the 
climate  is  various.  Along  the  borders  of  the  Frozen  Ocean,  the  lakes 
are  covered  with  ice  for  nine  months  in  the  year.  In  the  middle 
parts  of  Russia,  the  winter  is  about  as  severe  as  in  Canada;  in  the 
southern  parts,  the  climate  is  very  warm  and  pleasant.  Here,  grapes 
grow  in  abundance,  wiih  many  other  nice  fruits. 

8.  The  capital  of  Russia  is  St.  Petersburg,  situated  on  the  river 
Neva,  which  flows  into  the  Gulf  of  Finland.  It  is  a  splendid  city, 
and  contains  twice  as  many  inhabitants  as  New  York.  There  is  no 
place  in  the  world  where  you  would  see  more  strange  sights  than 
in  St.  Petersburg!!.     Here  are  a  great  many  palaces,  inhabited  by 


2  To  what  country  is  Hie  name  of  Siberia  given?  What  of  the  country  ?  People' 
Russian  emperor  ?  :i.  What  of  Russia  in  Europe;  Its  population  ?  4.  What  can  you  saj 
of  the  emperor  of  Russia  ?  6.  Whal  is  the  extent  of  Russia  in  Europe?  BouniJaiios :  7. 
I  limatt  of  Russia  in  ,'.  .  r   [  :        I'ro itns? 


214 


SCHOOL   HISTORY. 


people  so  rich,  that  some  of  them  keep  two  or  three  hundred  servants, 
or  slaves. 

9.  In  the  streets,  you  see  a  great  many  soldiers  gayly  dressed,  gih 
coaches,  drawn  by  three  or  four  horses,  beggars  covered  with  rags, 
and  people  dressed  in  all  the  strange  fashions  you  can  think  of. 


CHAPTER  CXXX.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Description  of  Russia  continued; 


Jl  Russian  Laplander. 

1.  Moscow  is  next  to  St.  Petersburg  in  size,  and  contains  about  as 
many  inhabitants  as  New  York.  It  is  a  famous  old  city,  where  the 
kings  of  Russia  used  to  live.  But  in  1812,  a  great  part  of  it  was 
burnt,  in  order  to  drive  out  Napoleon  and  his  soldiers,  pretty  much  as 
people  in  our  country  sometimes  set  fire  to  a  heap  of  brush  in  order 
to  drive  out  a  rabbit  or  a  woodchuck.  In  this  way,  Moscow  was 
nearly  destroyed,  but  it  has  since  been  rebuilt. 

2.  St.  Petersburg  carries  on  a  great  deal  of  commerce  by  sea,  and 
many  of  our  ships  go  there  to  get  hemp,  iron,  hides,  and  other  things. 
But  Moscow  is  situated  far  inland,  and  therefore  carries  on  no  trade 
by  sea. 

3.  There  is  no  king  in  the  world  who  reigns  over  so  many  kinds  of 
people  as  the  czar,  or  the  emperor  of  Russia.  In  his  European  do- 
minions, he  has  at  least  sixty  different  tribes  or  nations  under  his 
sway,  who  speak  different  languages,  and  have  different  modes  of  life. 
In  his  Asiatic  dominions  he  probably  has  as  many  more. 

4.  In  the  northern  part  of  European  Russia,  there  are  a  good  many 

8.  What  of  St.  Petersburg!)  ?  Palaces  ?  People  ?  9.  What  may  you  see  in  the 
streets?  Oh.  CXXX.—l.  What  of  Moscow  ?  What  was  done  in  1812?  2.  What  of  the 
commerce  of  St.  Petersburg!!  ?     That  of  Moscow  ?     3.  What  of  the  czar  of  Russia  ? 


Russia.  215 

bribes  of  short,  swarthy  people,  called  Laplanders,  Samoiedes,  &c. 
These  live  almost  in  a  savage  state.  Those  that  dwell  near  the  sea, 
live  so  much  upon  fish,  that  they  always  carry  about  with  them  a 
fishy  smell.  These  races  resemble  the  Esquimaux  Indians  that  oc- 
cupy the  northern  parts  of  our  continent. 

o.  It  would  seem,  that  these  people  would  have  a  very  dull  time 
of  it,  up  in  their  cold  country,  where  three  fourths  of  the  time  it  is 
winter,  and  where  the  nights  are  sometimes  six  months  long.  But 
they  appear  to  enjoy  themselves  pretty  well.  They  have  no  books, 
but  they  tell  long  stories,  and  crack  their  jokes,  as  well  as  other 
people. 

6.  They  have  no  history,  for  they  seem  to  keep  no  more  record  of 
what  passes  among  them  than  a  hive  of  bees.  One  generation  suc- 
ceeds another,  and  so  things  pass  from  age  to  age.  They  are  not 
warlike,  and  have  no  great  events  to  tell.  Thus  they  go  on,  living 
as  their  great-grandfathers  lived  before  them.  They  acknowledge 
the  authority  of  the  emperor;  but  the  country  is  so  cold  he  never 
comes  among  them,  so  they  do  pretty  much  as  they  please. 

7.  In  the  southern  and  western  portions  of  European  Russia,  there 
are  a  good  many  Taitars,  who  are  very  fond  of  riding  about  on  swift 
horses.  Along  the  river  Don,  there  is  a  race  of  Cossacks.  These  too 
are  fond  of  horses,  and  in  battles  fight  terribly  with  long  spears, 
which  they  hurl  to  the  distance  of  two  hundred  feet. 

S.  Besides  these  tribes,  there  are  many  Jews,  several  millions  of 
Poles,  a  good  many  Germans,  and  some  gypseys  in  Russia.  In  the 
cities,  the  people  generally  live  pretty  much  as  they  like,  each  man 
pursuing  what  occupation  he  pleases. 

9.  But  the  country  people,  who  till  the  land,  are  held  in  a  state  of 
bondage  similar  to  that  of  the  vassals  in  old  feudal  times.  These  are 
called  boors,  and  are  in  a  sad  state  of  ignorance  and  poverty.  They 
belong  either  to  the  emperor  or  the  rich  people. 

10.  Russia  has  made  astonishing  progress  in  civilization  within  the 
last  twenty  years.  Railroads  have  been  extensively  introduced,  and 
now  connect  the  great  cities.  Arts  and  manufactures  are  encouraged, 
and  a  general  state  of  improvement  exists  throughout  the  empire. 

11.  The  emperor  Nicholas  is  ambitious  of  extending  his  empire,  and 
his  armies  are  now  greater  than  those  of  any  other  European  power. 
(1853.) 

4.  What  tribes  live  in  European  Russia?  Whom  do  they  resemble?  5.  What  of  their 
employments?  Their  life?  7.  What  of  Tartars?  Cossacks?  8.  What  of  other  inhabit- 
ants? 9.  Who  are  the  boors?  What  of  them?  10.  What  of  the  progress  of  Russia ?  11. 
What  of  the  emperor  Nicholas  ? 


21G 


SCHOOL    HISTORY. 


CHAPTER  CXXXI.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Reign  of  Peter  the  Great. 

1.  Although  Russia  is  such  an  immense  empire,  its  history  wiL 
not  detaiu  us  long-.  ■  It  was  a  country  of  barbarians,  till  within  a  little 
more  than  a  hundred  years.  It  cannot  be  said  to  have  taken  a  rank 
among  civilized  nations,  till  Peter  the  Great  ascended  the  throne. 


House  where  Peter  the  Great  lived  while  in  Holland. 

2.  Peter  was  a  very  strange  man,  and  though  he  began  the  work 
of  civilizing  his  empire,  he  found  it  a  more  difficult  task  to  civilize 
himself.     In  fact,  he  was  somewhat  of  a  barbarian  all  his  life. 

3.  The  emperors  of  Russia  are  called  czars.  When  the  czar  Peter 
was  twenty-five  years  old,  he  left  his  throne,  and  travelled  over  Europe 
in  search  of  knowledge.  He  did  not  go  to  any  of  the  learned  univer- 
sities, nor  apply  himself  to  the  study  of  the  dead  languages. 

4.  That  was  not  the  sort  of  knowledge  which  Peter  wanted.  The 
first  thing  he  did  was  to  go  to  Holland,  and  put  himself  apprentice  to 
a  ship  carpenter.  The  house  is  still  standing  where  he  used  to  live 
while  there.  He  afterwards  went  to  England,  and  followed  the  same 
trade  as  in  Holland. 

5.  Besides  learning  the  business  of  ship-carpentry,  he  took  lessons 
in  other  branches  of  mechanics,  and  also  in  surgery.  In  short,  he  neg- 
lected no  kind  of  knowledge  which  he  thought  would  be  useful  to 
himself  or  his  subjects. 

6.  In  a  little  more  than  a  year,  he  heard  that  his  sister  was  en- 


Oh.  CXXXI.— 1.  What  of  Russia.'  Peter  (he  Gj-eat  ?  2.  What  can  you  say  of  Peter' 
3.  Who  are  called  czars  ?  Describe  the  maimer  in  which  the  czar  Peter  set  about  acqui- 
ring knowledge. 


RUSSIA.  217 

deavonng  to  make  herself  empress  of  Russia.  This  intelligence 
compelled  him  to  break  off  his  studies  and  labors,  and  hasten  back  to 
the  city  of  Moscow.  On  arriving  there,  he  put  some  of  the  conspi- 
rators to  death,  and  confined  his  sister  in  prison. 

7.  His  time  was  afterwards  so  much  occupied  in  war,  and  in  taking 
care  of  the  empire,  that  he  never  had  leisure  to  finish  his  education, 
fiut  he  had  already  learnt  a  great  deal,  and  the  effect  of  his  know- 
edge  was  soon  seen  in  ihe  improvement  of  Russia. 

8.  Peler  used  to  rise  at  five  in  the  morning,  and  busy  himself  all 
day  about  the  affairs  of  the  empire.  But  in  the  evening,  when  his 
work  was  over,  he  would  seat  himself  beside  a  big  round  bottle  of 
brandy,  and  drink  till  his  reason  was  quite  gone. 

9.  This  habit,  together  with  the  natural  violence  of  his  temper, 
rendered  him  almost  as  dangerous  to  his  friends  as  to  his  enemies. 
He  often  said,  that  he  had  corrected  the  faults  of  Russia,  but  that  he 
could  not  correct  his  own. 

10.  Peter  was  in  the  habit  of  beating  those  who  offended  him,  with 
his  cane.  The  highest  noblemen  in  Russia  often  underwent  this  pun- 
ishment. Even  the  empress  Catherine,  his  wife,  sometimes  got 
soundly  beaten  ;  but  perhaps  not  oftener  than  she  deserved  it. 

11.  It  is  supposed  that  the  czar  Peter  ordered  his  own  son  to  be 
put  to  death,  and  that  he  was  himself  privately  executed  in  prison. 
He  had  many  faults,  and  was  guilty  of  some  great  crimes,  but  his 
name  stands  high  on  the  list  of  sovereigns;  for  he  was  one  of  the  very 
few  who  have  labored  hard  for  the  welfare  of  their  subjects.  He  did 
more  for  the  good  of  Prussia  than  all  the  czars  who  went  before  and 
have  come  after  him. 


CHAPTER  CXXXII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Successors  of  Peter  the  Great. 

1.  Peter  died  in  1725,  at  the  age  of  fifty-three,  and  was  succeeded 
by  his  wife,  the  empress  Catherine.  She  had  been  a  country  girl,  and 
the  czar  Peter  had  married  her  for  the  sake  of  her  beauty.  In  some 
respects,  Catherine  was  a  good  sort  of  woman ;  but,  among  other 
faults,  she  was  rather  too  fond  of  wine. 

2.  She  reigned  only  about  two  years,  and  was  succeeded  by  hei 
husband's  grandson,  named  Peter  trie  Second.  He  died  in  1730,  and 
.eft  the  throne  to  Anne  Jwanowna,  his  niece.  The  empress  Anne 
was  a  good  sovereign,  and  performed  many  praiseworthy  acts.  None 
of  her  deeds,  however,  have  been  more  famous  than  the  building  of 
a  palace  of  ice. 

8.  In  what  vice  did  Peter  indulge  ?  10.  What  habit  had  he  ?  11.  What  is  supposed  to 
have  been  the  fate  of  Peter's  son  ?  His  own  fate?  The  character  of  the  czar  Peter? 
Ch.  CXXXII.— 1.  When  did  the  czar  Peter  die  ?  Who  succeeded  him  ?  What  of  the 
empress  Catherine  ?  Q.  How  long  did  she  reign ?  Who  succeeded  her?  When  did  Pe 
ter  II.  die  ?     Who  succeeded  him  ?     What  of  the  empress  Aune  ? 

19 


218  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

3.  This  stately  and  beautiful  structure  was  built  on  a  frozen  lake. 
Instead  of  wood  or  hewn  stone,  it  was  composed  entirely  of  blocks  of 
ice.  The  furniture  was  likewise  of  ice  ;  and  even  the  beds  were  of 
the  same  material.  When  it  was  illuminated  within,  the  whole  edi- 
fice glittered  and  sparkled  as  if  it  were  made  of  diamonds. 

4.  Bright  as  it  was,  however,  I  would  far  rather  dwell  in  the  mean- 
est mud-cottage,  than  in  so  cold  a  mansion.  Yet,  my  dear  readers, 
any  other  palace  is  almost  as  uncomfortable  as  the  empress  Anne's 
palace  of  ice.     There  is  little  in  them  but  cold  and  glittering  grandeur. 

5.  The  successor  of  Anne  was  the  princess  Elizabeth,  a  daughter  of 
Peter  the  Great.  She  mounted  the  throne  in  1740,  and  reigned  twen- 
ty-two years.  Her  successor  was  Peter  the  Third,  who  began  to 
reign  in  1762. 

6.  He,  like  Peter  the  Great,  had  a  wife  named  Catherine.  They 
had  not  long  sat  together  on  the  throne,  when  she  contrived  to  de- 
pose Peter,  and  made  herself  sole  ruler  of  Russia.  It  is  supposed  that 
she  afterwards  caused  him  to  be  murdered. 

7.  But  although  so  wicked  a  woman,  Catherine  was  endowed  with 
admirable  talents,  and  she  became  one  of  the  most  illustrious  sover- 
eigns in  the  world.  Some  people  called  her  Catherine  the  Great 
Man;  for  many  of  her  great  qualities  would  have  been  more  becom- 
ing in  a  man  than  a  woman. 

8.  In  1796,  when  she  died,  Catherine  was  on  the  point  of  driving 
the  Turks  from  their  territories.  If  she  had  succeeded  in  doing  so, 
she  would  have  governed  the  whole  of  the  vast  region  between  the 
Mediterranean  Sea  and  the  Arctic  Ocean. 

9.  But  death  hurried  the  great  empress  away,  to  answer  for  the 
murder  of  her  husband,  and  many  other  crimes.  She  was  succeeded 
by  her  sen  Paul,  who  was  then  forty-three  years  old. 

10.  The  czar  Paul  possessed  none  of  his  mother's  talents,  and  was 
of  a  very  siern  and  unamiable  disposition.  People  suspected  him  of 
being  insane.  His  conduct  grew  so  intolerable,  that  some  of  his  prin- 
cipal nobles  conspired  to  kill  him. 

11.  Paul  was  succeeded  by  Alexander,  his  eldest  son.  This  empe- 
ror reigned  from  1S01  till  1825.  He  was  engaged  in  war  with  the  em- 
peror Napoleon,  who  penetrated  with  his  army  to  the  city  of  Moscow. 
But  the  Prussians  burnt  that  ancient  capital  of  their  country;  and  its 
destruction  ruined  the  French  army. 

12.  The  present  czar  of  Russia  is  named  Nicholas.  He  succeeded 
bis  brother  Alexander  in  1825.  Though  Nicholas  has  too  much  pow- 
er, he  still  wishes  for  more.  His  tyranny  drove  his  Polish  subjects 
to  revolt,  a  few  years  since,  but  they  were  subdued.  Thousands  of 
them  fled  to  other  countries,  thousands  were  slain,  and  thousands 
were  imprisoned,  or  banished  to  Siberia. 

13.  Nicholas  has  an  immense  army,  and  usually  has  a  war  on  his 

3.  Describe  a  palace  of  ice?  5.  Who  succeeded  the  empress  Anne?  What  of  her? 
When  did  Peter  III.  begin  to  reign  ?  6.  What  of  his  wife  ?  What  can  you  say  of  her?  S. 
Whit  plan  had  Catherine  the  Great  before  her  death?  When  did  she  die  ?  9.  Who  suc- 
ceeded her?  10.  What  of  the  czar  Paul  ?  11.  Who  succeeded  him  ?  What  of  Alesan 
(ler  ?  How  was  the  French  army  ruined  ?  12.  Who  is  the  present  czar  of  Russia  ?  Wha* 
of  him  ? 


SWEDEN. 


219 


hands.  He  is  however  a  man  of  great  talent  and  is  rapidly  impro- 
ving the  condition  of  his  people,  and  at  the  same  time  increasing 
the  power  of  the  nation. 


CHAPTER  CXXXIIL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  Sweden. 


Swedish  people  celebrating  the  return  of  Spring. 

1.  The  Swedish  territories  at  present,  comprise  Sweden,  Norway, 
and  part  of  Lapland.  These  are  bounded  north  by  the  Arctic  Ocean; 
east  by  Lapland,  the  Gulf  of  Bothnia,  and  the  Baltic;  south  by  the 
Baltic,  the  Kattigat,  and  the  Stager  B.ack ;  and  west  by  the  Atlantic. 

2.  Sweden  is  a  cold  and  mountainous  country,  celebrated  for  its  iron, 
of  which  large  quantities  are  brought  to  this  country.  The  people 
are  industrious,  bold,  frank,  and  independent.  A  large  part  of  the 
inhabitants  live  upon  milk,  cheese,  and  fish.  In  winter  they  clothe 
themselves  in  furs  and  sheepskin. 

3.  The  Swedes  are  a  sensible  people,  and  are  disposed  to  make  the 
best  of  every  thing.  When  their  long  winter  goes  away,  they  cele- 
brate the  return  of  spring,  by  dancing  around  a  May-pole.  Thpy 
love  their  country,  and  insist  that  it  is  the  pleasantest  part  of  the 
world. 

4.  Though  they  dress  in  sheepskins,  and  live  in  a  homespun  sort 
of  a  way,  they  are  still  very  polite.  They  are,  in  short,  much  more 
amiable,  respectable,  and  well-behaved  than  many  of  the  kings  and 
princes  about  whom  I  have  been  telling  you. 

5.  1  may  not  have  a  better  opportunity  to  tell  you,  that  good  man- 
ners are  a  great  recommendation  to  everybody;  but  they  are  especial 

Ch.  'XXVnr.— 1.  What  do  the  Swedish  territories  comprise  ?  2.  What  of  Sweden. 
The  people?     3    What     f  thi   Swedes?     1    Thtirdrcss?     Manners: 


220  SCHOOL   HISTORY 

ly  necessary  to  people  who  are  not  rich.  Rich  people  are  sometimes 
haughty  and  proud.  This  is  very  wrong  and  very  silly,  and  though 
everybody  despises  such  people,  still  their  wealth  will  bring  flatterers 
around  them. 

6.  But  people  in  more  humble  circumstances,  cannot  afford  to 
throw  away  the  happiness,  respectability,  and  comfort  which  arise 
from  being  amiable,  gentle,  and  polite  to  everybody. 

7.  Not  much  is  known  about  the  early  history  of  Sweden.  In  an- 
cient times  it  was  under  the  government  of  Denmark.  A  Danish 
Queen,  called  Margaret,  ruled  over  Denmark,  Sweden,  and  Norway, 
in  13S7. 

8.  In  1518,  the  Danish  king  Christian  caused  ninety-four  Swedish 
senators  to  be  massacred  in  the  city  of  Stockholm.  Gustavus  Vasa, 
the  son  of  one  of  these  senators,  incited  the  Swedes  to  revolt  against 
Denmark. 

9.  The  king  of  Denmark  sent  an  army  to  put  down  the  rebels.  But 
the  ships  in  which  the  Danish  soldiers  had  embarked,  got  embedded 
in  the  ice,  on  the  coast  of  Sweden.  The  inhabitants  skated  off  from 
the  shore,  and  set  the  ships  on  fire. 

10.  Gustavus  Vasa  succeeded  in  freeing  his  country,  and  was  elect- 
ed king.  The  next  sovereign  of-  Sweden  who  is  worth  mentioning, 
was  Gustavus  Adolphus.  He  began  to  reign  in  1 61 1 ,  at  the  age  of 
eighteen. 

11.  This  king  was  a  great  warrior,  and  vanquished  the  best  gene- 
rals in  the  service  of  the  emperor  of  Germany.  In  1633,  he  won  the 
battle  of  Lutzen,  but  was  killed  at  the  moment  of  victory. 

12.  Gustavus  Adolphus  left  a  daughter  named  Christiana,  who 
was  then  only  six  years  old.  She  was  thought  to  possess  remarkable 
talents,  and  great  pains  were  taken  with  her  education.  But  she  was 
neither  a  good  woman  nor  a  good  queen. 

13.  After  reigning  a  considerable  time,  queen  Christiana  became 
weary  of  the  cares  of  government.  She  therefore  abdicated  the 
throne,  and  set  out  to  seek  a  residence  in  some  pleasanter  country 
than  Sweden. 

14.  But  her  conduct  was  so  bad,  that  all  the  kings  of  Europe  were 
ashamed  to  have  such  a  Avoman  in  their  dominions.  At  last,  she 
adopted  the  Catholic  religion,  and  the  pope  permitted  her  to  reside  in 
Rome. 

5.  What  of  good  manners?  What  of  the  rich  ?  6.  People  in  more  humhle  life  ?  7. 
History  of  Sweden?  Who  ruled  in  1387  ?  8.  What  was  done  in  1518  ?  What  of  Gusta- 
vus Vasa?  9.  What  of  the  king?  The  ships?  10.  What  of  Gustavus  Vasa  ?_  Who  was 
sing  of  Sweden  in  1611?  11.  What  of  Gustavus  Adolphus?  In  what  battle  did  he  die; 
12.  What  can  you  tell  of  queen  Christiana?     14.  Where  was  she  permitted  to  reside? 


SWEDEN.  221 

CHAPTER  CXXXIV.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Charles  the  Twelfth  and  his  Successors. 

1.  The  most  famous  sovereign  that  Sweden  ever  had,  and  one  of 
the  most  famous  in  the  world,  was  Charles  the  Twelfth.  But  my 
readers  will  long  ago  have  become  tired  of  hearing  about  conquerors; 
so  that  I  shall  speak  very  briefly  of  Charles. 

2.  He  began  to  reign  in  1697,  at  fifteen  years  of  age.  From  his 
youth  upward,  he  thought  of  nothing  but  being  a  soldier.  When  he 
was  only  about  seventeen  years  old,  the  czar  of  Russia,  and  the  kings 
of  Poland  and  Denmark,  made  war  upon  him. 

3.  Charles  beat  them  all  in  the  first  campaign.  When  he  heard 
the  bullets  whistling  by  his  ears,  he  showed  great  delight,  and  ex- 
claimed,— ■"  That  shall  be  my  music !"  And,  as  long  as  he  lived,  he 
never  wished  for  any  other  music. 

4.  But  it  is  a  sad  thing  for  a  people  when  their  king  loves  the 
whistling  of  bullets.  Charles  the  Twelfth  was  a  scourge  to  all  Eu- 
rope, and  to  his  own  kingdom  more  than  to  any  other.  He  delighted 
in  Avar  for  its  own  sake,  and  not  for  any  good  which  he  expected  to 
gain  by  it. 

5.  During  the  first  few  years  of  his  reign,  Charles  was  constantly 
successful ;  but  in  1709,  the  czar  of  Russia  gained  a  great  victory  over 
him,  at  Pultowa.     Charles  made  his  escape  into  Turkey. 

6.  He  continued  in  that  country  five  years,  although  he  might  safe- 
ly have  returned  home.  He  seemed  to  care  nothing  about  his  own 
dominions.  When  the  Swedes  sent  to  inquire  what  they  should  do 
in  his  absence,  Charles  answered,  that  he  would  send  one  of  his  old 
boots  to  govern  them. 

7.  At  last,  in  1714,  he  left  Turkey  and  returned  to  Sweden.  His 
first  business  was  to  make  war  again.  But  his  warfare  was  now 
drawing  to  a  close. 

8.  One  night,  while  besieging  a  fortress  in  Norway,  he  advanced 
in  front  of  his  troops  to  see  how  the  siege  was  going  on.  A  cannon- 
shot  struck  him  on  the  head,  and  killed  him.  He  was  found  gras- 
ping his  sword,  which  was  half  drawn  from  the  scabbard.  Historians 
seem  hardly  decided  whether  to  call  Charles  the  Twelfth  a  hero  or  a 
madman. 

9.  One  of  his  successors,  named  Gustavus  the  Third,  was  shot  at 
a  masquerade,  in  1792.  Gustavus  the  Fourth  behaved  in  such  a 
manner  that  his  subjects  were  compelled  to  dethrone  him.  This  took 
place  in  1809. 

Ch.  CXXXIV. — 1.  Who  was  the  most  famous  of  the  kings  of  Sweden?  '2.  Whi  n  did  he 
begin  to  reign  ?  What  did  he  principally  think  of  when  a  boy  ?  Who  made  v.  ar  upon 
him  :  3.  What  anecdote  can  you  tell  of  him?  4.  What  can  you  say  of  him?  5.  Wna 
of  Charles  XII.  for  (lie  first  few  years  of  his  reign?  When  was  the  battle  of  Pultowa 
Where  did  Charles  fly  ?  6.  How  long  did  lie  slay  in  Turkey  ?  What  answer  did  he  send 
to  a  message  from  the  Swedes?  7.  When  did  Charles  return  to  Sweden?  What  of  him 
when  there  ?  8.  How  did  he  meet  his  death  ?  What  dn  historians  think  of  Charles  XII.? 
9.  Who  »ucceeded  him  ?  When  did  Gustavus  III.  die  ?  When  was  Gustavus  IV.  dethroned} 

19* 


222  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

10.  The  next  king  was  Charles  the  Thirteenth.  The  emperor 
Napoleon  caused  a  French  general,  named  Bernadotte,  to  be  declared 
Crown-prince  of  Sweden,  and  heir  to  the  throne.  In  1818,  when 
Charles  the  Thirteenth  died,  Bernadotte  succeeded  him. 

11.  Though  he  had  originally  been  only  a  common  soldier,  Berna- 
dotte proved  to  be  a  better  king  than  most  of  the  other  European 
sovereigns,  whose  forefathers  had  worn  crowns  for  a  thousand  years. 


CHAPTER  CXXXV.-EUROPE-  CONTINUED. 

About  Lapland,  Norway,  and  Denmark. 


A  Laplander  travelling  in  a  Sledge. 

1.  Lapland  is  the  most  northern  country  of  Europe,  and  is  divided 
between  Russia  and  Sweden.  The  country  is  so  cold,  that  the  hot 
liquor  Ave  call  brandy  sometimes  freezes  there.  I  am  afraid,  however, 
that  the  Lapps  find  means  of  thawing  more  of  it  than  is  good  for  them. 

2.  I  have  already  told  you  something  about  the  Laplanders.  The 
men  are  about  four  feet  high,  and  the  women  not  much  taller  than  a 
cider-barrel.  The  people  have  a  great  many  reindeer,  whose  flesh 
supplies  food,  and  whose  skins  furnish  clothing.  They  also  take  the 
place  of  horses,  and  drag  the  people  over  the  snow  in  sledges,  at  a 
rapid  rate.  These  people  have  no  history  that  is  worthy  of  being 
related  here. 

3.  Norway  is  an  extensive  country,  bounded  on  the  west  by  the 
Atlantic  Ocean,  and  on  the  east  by  Sweden.     It  is  a  cold,  bleak,  and 

10.  Who  was  the  next  king?  What  of  Napoleon  ?  When  did  Bernodotte  succeed  to 
the  throne  of  Sweden?  11.  What  of  Bernadotte  ?  Ch.  CXXXV.—  l.  Where  is  Lapland? 
What  of  the  climate  ?    -2.  What  of  the  Laplanders?    Reindeer?    History? 


DENMARK.  223 

barren  region,  but  the  inhabitants  live  pretty  comfortably.  They 
have  very  fine  cows,  from  which  they  make  the  best  butter  in  the 
world. 

4.  Bergen  is  the  largest  city,  and  has  twenty  thousand  inhabitants. 
The  houses  are  small,  and  generally  built  of  wood.  Fires  sometimes 
do  great  damage,  and  therefore  there  are  a  good  many  watchmen 
who  walk  about  the  streets  at  night,  muffled  up  in  thick  great  coats. 
Everv  hour  they  cry  out,  "  God  preserve  our  good  city  of  Bergen  !" 

5.  Norway  was  early  inhabited  by  rough  tribes,  who  were  adven- 
turous seamen.  There  seems  to  have  been  now  and  then  a  pirate 
among  them,  for  in  860,  a  pirate,  named  Nadody,  discovered  Iceland, 
which  was  afterwards  settled  by  the  Norwegians. 

6.  Norway  was  conquered  by  Canute,  king  of  Denmark,  in  1030 ; 
but  six  years  after,  it  became  independent,  and  for  many  years  it  was 
governed  by  its  own  king.  In  1397,  it  was  incorporated  with  Den- 
mark, and  continued  a  part  of  that  kingdom  till  1S14,  when  it  was 
transferred  to  Sweden. 

7.  Denmark  is  a  little  kingdom  lying  between  Sweden  and  Ger- 
many. It  is  a  level  country,  nearly  surrounded  by  the  sea.  The 
people  have  light  complexions,  and  the  skin  of  the  ladies  is  said  to  be 
exceedingly  white.  The  people  have  a  great  many  cattle,  and  they 
seem  very  fond  of  tilling  the  soil.  Copenhagen,  the  capital,  has  one 
hundred  and  twenty  thousand  inhabitants.  The  whole  population  of 
the  kingdom  is  two  millions.  The  Danish  language  is  spoken  both 
in  Denmark  and  Norway. 

8.  The  three  kingdoms  of  Denmark,  Sweden,  and  Norway,  were 
anciently  called  Scandinavia.  In  very  early  times  these  were  occu- 
pied by  tribes  of  Fins  and  Germans  ;  afterwards,  the  Goths  conquered 
these  countries.  They  were  led  by  Odin,  of  whom  many  marvellous 
tales  are  told,  and  who  seems  to  have  been  worshipped  as  a  kind  of 
Jupiter,  among  these  northern  tribes.  Skiold,  the  son  of  Odin,  is  said 
to  have  been  the  first  king  of  Denmark. 

9.  All  that  Ave  really  know  of  Denmark  at  this  early  period,  is, 
that  the  people  were  composed  of  wild,  adventurous  warriors,  who 
were  generally  considered  by  the  more  southern  nations  of  Europe  as 
pirates.  About  the  time  that  the  Roman  empire  fell,  the  Danes, 
Swedes,  and  Norwegians  were  known  by  the  general  name  of 
Normans. 

10.  These  bold  freebooters  sallied  forth  in  their  little  vessels,  and 
made  conquests  in  different  countries.  Some  of  them  settled  in 
England,  some  in  that  part  of  France  called  Normandy,  and  some  of 
them  reached  Spain  and  Italy. 

3.  Where  is  Norway  ?  What  of  the  country?  The  people?  flutter  ?  4.  What  of 
Bergen?  Its  population  ?  What  of  the  houses  ?  Are  fires  frequent  ?  What  of  the  watch- 
men ?     5.  How  was  Norway  early  inhabited  ?   What  was  done  in  8ii0?     G.  When  was  Nor 


waj  and  Denmark;     8.   What  three  countries  were  called  Scandinavia  ?     Who  occupi 
it  ?     Who  led  these  tribes  ?     Who  was  the  first  king  of  Denmark  ?     9.  What  of  Denmark 
at  this  earl)  period  ?     What  people  were  called  Normans  ?     10.  What  of  these  freeboot- 
en  '     Where  did  they  settle  r 


224  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

11.  In  920,  the  several  Danish  tribes  appear  to  have  been  united 
under  one  government.  Canute  conquered  England  and  a  part  of 
Scotland  in  1016,  and  subdued  Norway  in  1030.  Since  his  time, 
Denmark  has  had  a  great  many  sovereigns,  and  been  engaged  in 
several  wars,  but  its  history  offers  but  little  that  is  interesting. 


CHAPTER  CXXXVL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Brief  Notices  of  several  Kingdoms  and  States. 

1.  There  are  several  countries  of  Europe,  of  which  my  limits  will 
not  permit  me  to  give  a  separate  history.  Some  of  them  have  been 
spoken  of  in  connexion  with  other  kingdoms.  The  rest  must  be 
briefly  noticed  in  one  chapter. 

2.  If  I  had  time,  I  could  make  a  long  story  about  Holland,  a  coun- 
try once  covered  by  the  sea,  but  which  is  now  walled  out  by  a  vast 
dyke.  The  people  of  Holland  are  called  Dutch,  and  are  known  all 
the  world  over  as  great  smokers.  They  are,  however,  an  industrious 
people,  and  I  know  of  nothing  more  comfortable  than  the  inside  of  a 
thrifty  Dutchman's  house  in  his  own  country.  Amsterdam,  the  capi- 
tal, contains  two  hundred  thousand  inhabitants. 

3.  In  Belgium,  the  people,  strange  as  it  may  seem,  appear  to  have 
a  mixture  of  Dutch  and  French  manners.  They  smoke  a  great  deal 
of  tobacco,  yet  speak  the  French  language.  The  country  is  pleasant, 
and  some  parts  are  beautiful.    Many  of  the  cities  are  very  interesting. 

4.  The  Netherlands,  or  Holland  and  Belgium,  were  formerly  one 
country.  The  whole  territory  is  bounded  on  the  north  by  the  North 
Sea,  east  by  Germany,  south  by  France,  and  west  by  the  British 
Channel  and  the  North  Sea.  These  territories  belonged  at  one  lime 
to  Rome,  afterwards  to  Germany,  and  finally  to  Spain. 

5.  In  1581,  the  seven  northern  provinces  revolted  against  Philip  of 
Spain,  and  formed  themselves  into  a  republic,  which  was  then  called 
Holland.  During  the  seventeenth  century,  it  was  a  very  powerful 
nation,  especially  by  sea.  At  this  time,  her  ships  often  disputed,  and 
sometimes  successfully,  with  the  British  fleets. 

6.  The  remaining  provinces  of  the  Netherlands  were  long  under 
the  government  of  Austria,  in  IS10,  the  whole  of  the  Netherlands 
were  united  to  France,  but  were  afterwards  formed  into  a  separate 
kingdom.  In  1S30,  there  was  a  revolution,  and  the  southern  prov- 
inces now  compose  the  kingdom  of  Belgium. 

7.  Poland  was  once  a  nation  of  Europe,  but  it  is  now  no  longer  so. 
It  was  bounded  north  and  east  by  the  Russian  dominions,  south  by 
the  river  Dniester,  and  west  by  Prussia.     In  1772,  the  sovereigns  of 

11  What  took  place  iu  0-20?  What  of  Canute  ?  History  of  Denmark  ?  Ch.  CXXXVL— 
2.  What  of  Holland?  The  people  ?  What  is  the  population  of  Amsterdam  ?  3.  What  of 
the  people  of  Belgium  ?  The  country  ?  The  cities?  4.  What  of  Holland  and  Belgium  ? 
How  is  the  territory  bounded  ?  To  whom  has  it  belonged  at  different  limes?  5.  What 
look  place  in  1581  ?  When  was  Holland  very  powerful  ?  tj.  What  of  the  remaining  pro- 
vinces of  the  Netherlands  ?  What  took  place  iu  1S10  ?  In  1830  ?  7.  What  of  Poland  ? 
Ita  boundaries  ? 


GREAT    BRITAIN.  225 

Russia,  Prussia,  and  Austria,  seized  upon  Poland,  and  divided  the 
greater  part  of  its  territories  among  themselves.  In  1795,  they  seized 
the  remainder.  The  inhabitants  have  struggled  bravely  for  their 
freedom,  but  in  vain.  They  have  been  cruelly  treated  by  the  empe- 
ror of  Russia,  who  has  sent  thousands  into  exile,  and  banished  thou- 
sands to  other  countries.  Some  of  the  Poles  have  fled  from  oppression 
1o  this  country. 

S.  I  have  already  given  you  a  short  account  of  the  states  of  Italy, 
[t  may  be  well,  however,  to  repeat  a  few  things  here.  The  republic 
of  Venice,  as  you  will  recollect,  was  founded  in  the  fifth  century.  It 
tit  first  comprehended  only  some  marshy  islands,  at  the  head  of  the 
Gulf  of  Venice.  Afterwards,  a  considerable  tract  of  territory  on  the 
mainland  was  annexed  to  its  government. 

9.  Venice  carried  on  an  extensive  commerce;  and,  in  the  thirteenth 
century,  the  republic  was  very  powerful.  It  was  customary  for  the 
Do^e  of  Venice,  who  was  the  chief  ruler,  to  espouse  the  sea  as  a  wife, 
with  pompous  ceremonies.  Venice  has  long  been  going  to  decay,  and 
is  now  under  the  government  of  Austria.  The  city  of  Venice  is,  how- 
ever, the  admiration  of  all  travellers. 

10.  Genoa,  on  the  northwestern  coast  of  Italy,  formerly  resembled 
Venice  in  its  government,  although  it  never  was  so  powerful.  In 
IS  15,  it  was  annexed  to  the  territories  of  Sardinia.  Sardinia  is  an 
island  in  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  and  has  been  a  kingdom  since  the 
year  1720.  Besides  Genoa,  it  has  the  territories  of  Piedmont  and 
Savoy  in  Italy. 

11.  The  kingdom  of  Naples  is  generally  called  the  kingdom  of  the 
two  Sicilies.  Its  territories  comprise  all  the  south  of  Italy,  besides* 
the  islands  of  Sicily,  and  some  small  islands  in  the  neighborhood. 
The  former  sovereigns  of  Naples  came  from  Spain. 

12.  In  1S0S,  the  emperor  Napoleon  gave  the  kingdom  of  Naples  to 
one  of  his  most  distinguished  generals,  named  Joachim  M-urat,  who 
was  the  son  of  a  pastry-cook.  King  Joachim  was  shot  in  1816,  and 
the  two  Sicilies  were  restored  to  the  former  kins. 


CHAPTER  CXXXVII.-EUPtOPE  CONTINUED. 

Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland. 

1.  I  have  now  come  to  the  most  interesting  country  in  Europe;  the 
country  where  there  is  more  comfort,  more  good  sense,  more  thorough 
civilization,  more  true  religion  than  in  any  other  place  in  Europe,  in 
Asia,  or  Africa. 

2.  The  kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland  embraces  England, 

What   took   place   in   177:2  ?     In   1795?     What  of  the   Poles?      8.  What  of  Venice? 

9.  When  was  it  powerful?     What  was  an  annual   ceremony?     What  of  Venice  now? 

10.  Wiiat  of  Genoa?  Sardinia  ?  Since  when  has  il  been  a  kingdom?  Whal  territories 
belong  to  it?  11.  What  is  the  kingdom  of  Naples  generafly  calh  d?  What  ofits  territo- 
ries? 12.  What  of  Napoleon  ?  King  Joachim  .'  King  Ferdinand?  C.H.  CXXXVIL— 
1.  Which  is  fhe  most  extraordinary  country  in  Europe? 


226  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

Wales,  Scotland,  and  Ireland.  The  three  first  countries  are  upon 
the  island  of  Great  Britain.  This  island  is  on  the  Avestern  coast  of 
Europe,  and  is  separated  by  the  British  Channel  from  France.  At 
the  narrowest  part,  this  channel  is  twenty-five  miles  wide.  Ireland 
lies  west  of  Great  Britain,  at  the  distance  of  about  sixty  miles. 

3.  These  two  islands  are  small  in  extent,  but.  they  contain  nearly 
twenty-five  millions  of  inhabitants.  Besides  this,  the  kingdom  has 
colonies  in  various  parts  of  America,  Africa,  and  Asia,  so  that  the 
king  rules  over  nearly  one  hundred  and  fifty  millions  of  people.  Great 
Britain  may  be  considered  the  richest  and  most  powerful  kingdom  on 
the  face  of  the  globe. 

4.  I  suppose  you  know  that  the  first  settlers  of  our  country  came 
from  England.  They  brought  with  them  the  manners  and  customs 
of  the  country  where  they  lived.  Thus  the  United  States  became 
very  much  like  England;  the  houses,  the  churches,  the  dress  of  the 
people  in  the  two  countries,  are  nearly  the  same.  Besides  this,  the 
people  speak  the  same  language. 

5.  But  you  must  remember  that  England  is  an  older  and  richer 
country  than  ours.  It  has  larger  cities,  more  splendid  churches,  more 
beautiful  roads,  finer  gardens,  and  many  other  things  superior  to  what 
can  be  found  in  this  country. 

6.  Beside  all  this,  England  has  a  king,  who  has  several  magnificent 
palaces,  England,  too,  has  a  great  many  noblemen,  who  live  in  costly 
country-seats.  These  ride  about  in  coaches,  some  of  which  cost  ten 
thousand  dollars.  Thus  there  is  a  great  deal  more  splendor  in  Eng- 
land than  we  find  here. 

7.  But,  as  an  offset  to  this,  there  is  more  poverty  there  than  in  our 
happier  country.  Beggars  throng  the  streets,  even  in  London,  and 
they  are  to  be  found  in  all  parts  of  the  kingdom.  Thousands  of  people, 
too,  who  are  not  beggars,  labor  very  hard,  and  yet  are  scarcely  able 
to  live.  Sometimes  a  great  many  people  die  for  want  of  food.  Thus 
England  is  a  country  which  is  wonderful  for  its  magnificence  and 
power,  yet,  with  all  its  wealth,  a  large  portion  of  the  people  suffer 
the  pangs  of  poverty. 


CHAPTER  CXXXVIIL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About   London   and  other    Cities   of  England,    Wales, 
Scotland,  and  Ireland. 

1.  London  is  the  largest  and  finest  city  in  Europe,  and.  contains 
about  three  millions   of  inhabitants.     The  Thames,  a  considerable 

2.  What  is  embraced  in  the  kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland  ?  What  of  the  island 
of  Great  Britain?  What  of  the  British  Channel  ?  Ireland?  3.  Population  of  Great  Brit- 
ain.' Ireland?  Colonies  of  Great  Britain  ?  4.  How  can  you  account  for  the  United  States 
resembling  England  ?  5.  How  does  the  latter  country  excel  the  former  ?  6.  What  of  the 
king?  Noblemen?  G.  What  of  poverty  in  England  ?  What  can  you  say  of  England? 
Where  is  London  ?  Direction  of  the  following  places  from  London  :— Manchester''?  Bir- 
ii.mgliam?     Sheffield?     Edinburgh?     Dublin'?     Wales? 


GREAT      BRITAIN, 


227 


IK'W 


3S3C 


GO 


Xong.  E.from  Washington. 


V, 


4 


H  E  B  RIDE  S^" 

OR    •.('■   JS-^A 

O  ^  ^  \ 

WE  STEEI5IS 

SlCifJ'al.K 


,|3>    lainVi/B^uf 


J^uy  |g 


Giantsztui 


_     ?"-      ,    ;  =    -    Londoudei 


Slioo      ^  Btfjg 

5       ■nrmPlnTTr.i  A'  ..  Mj 


jIitv 


Jhiiriic-^'  Tj'.i  B-^V' 


jGali^P1113 ^( 


Dornoch  Frith. 

I    W  0\R  T E 

■>\e>V    ~-l   ^.^V^XAterdeeix  | 
E  #f ;i  „t   -  i ■  ir -^^^a^ '  Andrews 

,rT>Giast3_ow^ 

.    *■&      V    - 

Dumfries  .'V*:   k      wN". Castle 


*»,     .£      fa  •t"!  J^1/  ^; .    ■     C       »^Dm-3iiir>i 

«y/t >   1  .E>  S. .  -  "Nrs^J/  -Carl  isle  ^ — ^  fc'XitrL  .*>__ 

l_,  ^Kiicastei-|(      iHl. 


^1  vBrnTrry' 


<JJIIS11    SEu\  ^  \r  ,Ke', 

S't.Gc oi't/e  ?v,  r^1  "S«*  \    i    ci^Vr   t  i        lT' -'V  ^ -. 

«*?    :      ■.SJieluclil         fe'.li'l y; 

Caerjiai-TOn-  — ^       /A  |jBpgB=g^s 

Cardigan  \  -  fc1  .^ *  "'-F'~/a^--J   -  */i    vr5^**'   ' 

-ffm/.-    ■  ki  few  l'    RirLniiir.liain    '  BcpjjHchj  *f 

Hfj^  -:•  -  1 S  'Mm  GiL  AIM 

J^Vaierf  ord  "  ,.#=,  ,'    ^  ;  2\j3ocU-o^xlV  ' 

Soxi.'.UcdJL       ■s^T^^'-'rJS,-  :_ 

•    -Prmii/oke  ^/fGlouces gr^         J> ■ 

clou 


JT        CaiuI)ri£loc5J-j; 
aces 


Brlslnl:  "         ■;  '»KHi^5\iadsor 
Channel.       ci^TiVcftoii    .  SaUsImi-^j      t^^f; 
ii  :,'>J£  \     "     Dorchester  J      T,"^f , 

8|ZOTy.  W.fnnWlmnnn  ■  ^        C  H  A  W  INT  E  lJ^/^? 

ntk'^ro      — i«T^g3 EBg?»ai         mm — 


SSBS 


MAP  OF  THE  BRITISH  ISLAND. 


228 


SCHOOL    HISTORY, 


river,  runs  through  it.  Across  this,  there  are  a  number  of  handsome 
stone  bridges.  London  has  no  wall  around  it  like  Paris,  Berlin,  and 
most  large  cities  of  the  continent;  but  it  is  encircled  by  a  beautiful 
.country,  dotted  with  villages,  villas,  and  country-seats. 

2.  London  seems  like  a  world  of  itself;  you  might  walk  about  for 
a  year,  and  go  into  some  new  street  every  day.  In  some  parts  of  the  city 
there  are  such  streams  of  people,  that  it  always  seems  there  like  the 
Fourth  of  July,  or  Election  day.  The  shops  are  filled  with  beautiful 
things,  and  the  streets  are  crowded  with  coaches  and  carriages  of  all 
sorts. 


Westminster  Jilibey  Lo7idon. 

3.  The  palace  of  St.  James  is  a  dark  old  building,  but  the  king  has 
lately  had  a  new  one  built  for  him,  which  is  very  hue.  Westminster 
Abbey  is  an  old  Gothic  church,  which  strikes  every  beholder  with  ad- 
miration and  wonder.  St.  Paul's  is  a  more  modern  church,  and  is 
very  handsome. 

4.  I  have  not  time  to  tell  you  of  the  other  wonderful  things  in 
London,  nor  can  I  tell  you  of  the  other  beautiful  towns  and  cities  in 
England.  You  must  read  about  them  in  some  larger  book,  or  come 
and  see  me  of  a  long  winter  ni^ht. 

5.  I  will  then  tell  you  of  Manchester,  where  they  make  beautiful 
ginghams,  calicoes,  and  other  goods  ;  of  Birmingham,  where  they 
make  guns,  pistols,  swords,  locks,  and  lamps;  of  Sheffield,  where  they 
make  knives,  forks,  and  scissors  ;  and  of  other  places,  where  they  make 
a  sjreat  variety  of  articles. 

6.  Wales  is  a  country  of  mountains,  lying  on  the  west  of  England. 
Most  of  the  people  talk  the  Welsh  language,  which  you  could  not 
understand.  They  are  very  industrious,  and  live  in  a  comfortable 
manner.  Their  mountains  are  celebrated  for  producing  coal,  tin,  iron, 
and  copper. 

Ch.  CXXXVIII.— 1.  Population  or London?  The  Thames?  Country  around  LondoD  ? 
2.  Describe  the  appearance  of  London.  3.  Palace  of  St.  James?  Westminster  Abbey  .' 
St.  Paul's  ?  5.  What  of  Manchester?  Birmingham?  Sheffield?  G.  Where  is  Wales. 
W  hat  of  the  people  ?     Mountains  ? 


ENGLAND.  229 

7.  Scotland  is  also  a  land  of  mountains.  In  the  southern  part,  the 
people  speak  the  Scotch  language,  which  perhaps  you  could  partly 
understand.  But  in  the  highlands  of  the  north,  the  inhabitants  speak 
Gaelic,  which  would  be  as  strange  to  you  as  the  language  of  an  Arab. 

8.  The  capital  of  Scotland  is  Edinburgh,  a  fine  smoky  old  city, 
with  an  immense  high  castle  in  the  midst  of  it.  Besides  this,  there 
are  many  fine  towns  in  Scotland.  Glasgow  is  a  large  place  and  cele- 
brated for  its  manufactures. 

9.  Ireland  is  a  bright,  green  island,  containing  seven  millions  of 
people.  It  is  the  native  land  of  those  cheerful,  witty  Irishmen,  who 
come  out  to  this  country  in  such  abundance.  If  their  country  were 
happily  governed,  they  would  not  come  here;  but  the  truth  is,  that 
Ireland  has  felt  the  miseries  of  bad  government  for  many  years,  and  a 
large  part  of  the  people  are  therefore  kept  in  a  state  of  distressing 
poverty. 

10.  The  Irish,  however,  are  a  very  interesting  people.  At  home 
or  abroad,  they  seem  to  be  full  of  wit  and  hospitality.  It  is  by  their 
lively  disposition  and  cheerful  turn  of  mind,  that  they  seem  to  soften 
the  evils  which  too  often  pursue  them. 

11.  Dublin  is  the  capital  of  Ireland;  and  seme  of  its  streets  are 
magnificent,  but  many  portions  of  it  are  tilled  with  inhabitants  who 
present  the  most  woful  aspect  of  raggedness  and  misery.  Beggary 
is  common  in  all  parts  of  the  kingdom. 


CHAPTER  CXXXIX.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Origin  of  the  British  Nation.      The  Druids. 

1.  It  is  supposed  that  Great  Britain  and  Ireland  were  originally 
settled  by  a  colony  from  Gaul.  These  were  called  Gaels,  or  Celts. 
Their  descendants  are  found,  at  this  day,  in  Ireland  and  Wales,  and 
the  highlands  of  Scotland.  Some  of  these  still  speak  the  ancient 
Gaelic  or  Celtic  language. 

2.  Very  little  is  known  about  these  islands  till  the  time  of  Julius 
Caesar.  He  invaded  England  in  the  year  55,  before  the  Christian  era. 
The  country  was  then  called  Britannia,  or  Britain.  It  was  inhabited 
by  barbarians,  some  of  whom  wore  the  skins  of  wild  beasts,  while 
others  were  entirely  naked.  They  were  painted  like  the  American 
Indians.  Their  weapons  were  clubs,  spears,  and  swords,  with  which 
they  fiercely  attacked  the  Roman  invaders. 

3.  The  ancient  Britons,  like  the  other  northern  nations  of  Europe 
were  idolaters.  Their  priests  were  called  Druids.  Their  places  of 
worship  were  in  the  open  air,  and  consisted  of  huge  stone  pillars, 


7.  What  of  Scotland?  Language?  8.  What  of  Edinburgh  ?  Glasgow?  9.  What  of 
Ireland?  Government?  10.  What  of  the  Irish  people?  11.  What  of  Dublin  ?  '.rt. 
CXXXIX.— 1.  What  of  the  Gaels  or  Celts?  2.  When  did  Ctesar  invade  England  ?  What 
was  Great  Britain  then  called  ?  What  of  the  people?  3.  Religion  of  the  ancient  Britons .' 
Who  were  the  Druids  ?     What  of  their  places  of  worship? 

20 


230 


SCHOOL    HISTORY. 


standing  in  a  circle.  A  large  stone  in  the  middle  was  used  as  an  al- 
tar, and  human  victims  were  sacrificed  upon  it.  The  ruins  of  one  of 
these  temples  still  remains  at  Stonehenge,  and  is  very  wonderful. 

4.  Tke  druids  considered  the  oak  a  sacred  tree.  They  set  a  great 
value  on  the  mistletoe,  a  sort  of  plant  which  sometimes  grows  on  the 
oak.  Wherever  they  found  the  mistletoe,  they  held  a  banquet  be- 
neath the  spreading  branches  of  the  oak  on  which  it  grew. 


Celtic  Inhabitants  of  Britain. 

5.  The  druids  incited  the  Britons  to  oppose  the  Roman  power. 
They  fought  fiercely,  and  the  country  was  not  entirely  subdued  till 
sixty  years  after  the  Christian  era.  Suetonius,  a  Roman  general, 
then  cut  down  the  sacred  groves  of  oak,  destroyed  the  temples,  and 
threw  the  druids  into  the  fires  which  they  had  themselves  kindled  to 
roast  the  Romans. 

6.  The  Scots,  who  inhabited  the  northern  part  of  the  island,  were  a 
fierce  people,  and  were  still  unconquered.  To  prevent  them  from 
making  incursions  into  Britain,  the  Romans  built  a  wall  from  the 
river  Tyne  to  the  Frith  of  Solway. 

7.  The  Britons  remained  quietly  under  the  government  of  Rome 
for  nearly  five  centuries  after  the  Christian  era ;  adopting  during  this 
period,  many  of  the  Roman  customs.  They  never  attempted  to  free 
themselves.  But,  at  last,  the  Roman  empire  became  so  weak,  that 
the  emperor  Valentinian  withdrew  his  troops  from  Britain. 

*  S.  The  inhabitants  had  grown  so  unwarlike,  that,  when  the  Roman 
soldiers  were  crone,  they  found  themselves  unable  to  resist  the  Scots. 
They  therefore  asked  the  assistance  of  two  tribes  of  people  from  Ger- 
many, called  Saxons,  and  Angles. 

4.  How  was  Ihe  oak  considered  by  the  Druids  ?  The  mistletoe  ?  5.  When  was  the  coun- 
try entirely  subdued  ?  What  of  Suetonius  ?  6.  What  of  the  Scots  ?  What  did  the  Ro- 
mans do  ?  7.  How  long  did  Rome  govern  Britain  ?  What  of  the  emperor  Valentinian? 
8.  Wnose  aid  did  the  Britons  ask  against  the  Scots? 


ENGLAND.  231 

9.  These  people  drove  back  the  Scots  into  their  own  part  of  the 
island.  Then,  instead  of  returning  to  Germany,  they  took  possession 
of  Britain  by  the  right  of  the  strongest.  It  was  divided  by  them  into 
seven  small  kingdoms,  called  the  Saxon  Heptarchy. 


CHAPTER  CXL.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Saxon  and  Danish  Kings  of  England. 

1.  In  the  year  S27  of  the  Christian  era,  all  the  seven  kingdoms  of 
the  Saxon  Heptarchy  were  united  into  one,  under  the  government  of 
Egbert.     He  was  therefore  the  first  king  of  England. 

2.  Egbert  was  a  native  of  England,  but  had  been  educated  in 
France,  at  the  court  of  Charlemagne.  He  was  therefore  more  pol- 
ished and  enlightened  than  most  of  the  Saxon  kings.  During  the 
reign  of  Egbert,  and  for  many  years  afterwards,  the  Danes  made  in- 
cursions into  England.     They  sometimes  overran  the  whole  country. 

3.  All  red,  who  ascended  the  throne  in  872,  fought  fifty-six  battles 
with  them,  by  sea  and  land.  On  one  occasion,  he  went  into  the  camp 
of  the  Danes  in  the  dissuise  of  a  harper.  He  took  notice  of  every 
thing,  and  planned  an  attack  upon  the  camp.  Returning  to  his  own 
men,  he  led  them  against  the  Danes,  whom  he  completely  routed. 

4.  This  king  was  called  Afred  the  Great ;  and  he  had  a  better 
right  to  the  epithet  of  Great  than  most  other  kings  who  have  borne 
it.  He  made  wise  laws,  and  instituted  the  custom  of  trial  by  jury. 
He  likewise  founded  the  university  of  Oxford.  Nearly  a  hundred 
years  after  his  death,  the  Danes  again  broke  into  England.  There 
was  now  no  Alfred  to  oppose  them.  They  were  accordingly  victo- 
rious, and  three  Danish  kings  governed  the  country  in  succession. 

5.  Canute  the  Great  was  one  of  them.  He  appears' to  have  been 
an  old  pirate,  or,  as  they  were  called  in  those  days,  a  sea-king.  One 
day,  when  he  and  his  courtiers  were  walking  on  the  shore,  they  called 
him  king  of  the  sea,  and  told  him  that  he  had  but  to  command,  and 
the  waves  would  obey  him. 

6.  Canute  desired  a  chair  of  state  to  be  brought  and  placed  on  the 
hard,  smooth  sand.  Then,  seating  himself  in  the  chair,  he  stretched 
out  his  sceptre  over  the  waves,  with  a  very  commanding  aspect. 

7.  "Roll  back  thy  waves,  thou  sea!"  cried  Canute.  "I  am  thy 
Icing  and  master  !  How  darest  thou  foam  and  thunder  in  my  pre- 
sence?" But  the  sea,  nowise  abashed,  came  roaring  and  whitening 
onward,  and  threw  a  sheet  of  spray  over  Canute  and  all  the  courtiers. 
The  giant  waves  rolled  upward  on  the  beach,  far  beyond  the  mon- 
arch's chair.  They  would  soon  have  swallowed  him  up,  together 
with  his  courtiers,  if  they  had  not  all  scampered  to  the  dry  land. 

9.  What  did  these  two  tribes  do  ?  How  was  Britain  then  i'w  idcd  ?  Ch.  CXL.— 1.  Win 
wus  the  first  king  of  England?  What  kingdoms  did  lie  govern?  2.  What  of  Egbert  f 
What  of  the  Danes?  3.  When  did  Alfred  ascend  the  throne  ?  Whnt  did  he  do  ?  4.  Why 
was  he  called  Alfred  the  Great?  What  of  the  Danes  after  his  death?  5.  6.  7.  Tell  a 
itory  of  Canute. 


232  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

8.  In  the  year  1041,  the  Danes  Avere  driven  out  of  England,  and 
another  Saxon  king,  called  Edward  the  Confessor,  was  placed 
upon  the  throne.  At  his  death  in  1066,  Harold,  who  was  also  a 
Saxon,  became  king. 

9.  But  he  was  the  last  of  the  Saxon  kings.  No  sooner  had  he 
mounted  the  throne,  than  William,  duke  of  Normandy  in  France,  in- 
vaded England,  at  the  head  of  sixty  thousand  men.* 

L0.  Harold  led  an  army  of  Saxons  against  the  Norman  invaders, 
and  fought  with  them  at  Hastings.  In  the  midst  of  the  battle,  an 
arrow  was  shot  through  his  steel  helmet,  and  penetrated  his  brain 
The  duke  of  Normandy  gained  the  victory,  and  became  king  of  Eng- 
lund. 


CHAPTER  CXLI.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Norman  Kings  of  England. 


William  the  Conqueror. 


Richard  of  the  Lion  Heart. 


1.  William  the  Conqueror  (as  the  duke  of  Normandy  was  no"W 
called)  reigned  about  twenty  years.  He  was  succeeded  by  his  second 
son,  William  Rufus,  or  the  Red,  who  was  so  named  from  the  color 
of  his  hair. 

2.  The  Red  kinjy  was  very  fond  of  hunting.  One  day,  while  he 
was  chasing  a  deer  in  the  forest,  a  gentleman  by  the  name  of  Walter 
Tyrrel  let  fly  an  arrow.  It  glanced  against  a  tree,  and  hit  the  king 
,n  the  breast ;  so  that  he  fell  from  his  horse  and  died. 

3.  This  took  place  in  the  year  1100,  and  William  Rufus  Avas  suc- 
ceeded by  his  brother  Henry.  This  king  was  called  Beauclerk,  or  Ex- 

8.  When  were  the  Dar.es  driven  out  of  England  ?  Who  was  then  placed  upon  the  throne  ? 
When  did  Harold  become  king.'  0.  Who  now  invaded  England:  10.  Where  was  the 
battle  fought  between  Harold  and  William  ?   Who  became  lung  of  England  ?    Ch.  CXLI 

1.  Who  succeeded  William  the  Conqueror?     2.  What  was  the  fate  of  William  Rufus? 


ENGLAND.  233 

cellent  Scholar,  because  he  was  able  to  write  his  name.  Kings  were 
not  expected  to  have  much iearning  in  those  days.  On  the  death  of 
king  Henry  Beauclerk,  in  1135,  the  throne  was  usurped  by  Stephen 
of  Blois.  But  he  died  in  1154,  and  was  succeeded  by  Henry  the  Se- 
cond, who  was  son  to  the  former  Henry. 

4.  This  monarch  had  a  violent. quarrel  with  Thomas  Becket,  arch- 
bishop of  Canterbury.  Hoping  to  please  the  king,  four  knights  Avent 
to  Canterbury,  and  murdered  Becket  at  the  foot  of  the  Altar.  But  this 
bloody  deed  was  a  cause  of  great  trouble  to  king  Henry ;  for  the  pope 
threatened  to  excommunicate  him. 

5.  In  order  to  pacify  his  holiness,  the  king  set  out  on  a  pilgrimage 
to  the  tomb  of  Becket.  When  he  entered  the  abbey  where  the  tomb 
was  situated,  the  whole  community  of  monks  assaulted  him  with 
rods.  The  king,  being  afraid  to  resist  them,  was  soundly  whipped ; 
and,  as  a  reward  for  his  patience,  he  received  the  pope's  pardon. 

6.  During  the  reign  of  this  king,  Ireland  was  concmered  and  annex- 
ed to  the  realm  of  England.  It  had  previously  been  divided  into  seve- 
ral separate  kingdoms. 

7.  Richard  the  Lion-hearted  was  crowned  king  of  England  in  11S9. 
He  was  a  valiant  man,  and  possessed  prodigious  strength;  and  he  de- 
lighted in  nothing  so  much  as  battle  and  slaughter.  After  gaining 
great  renown  in  Palestine,  he  was,  on  his  way  back,  taken  and  impris- 
oned for  two  years  by  the  duke  of  Austria. 

8.  The  English  obtained  Bichard's  release  by  paying  a  heavy  ran- 
som; but  soon  afterwards,  while  besieging  a  castle  in  Normandy,  he 
was  killed  by  an  arrow  from  a  cross-bow.  The  next  king  was  Rich- 
ard's brother  John,  surnamed  Lackland,  or  Loseland. 

9.  This  epithet  was  bestowed  on  John  because  he  lost  the  territo- 
ries which  the  English  kings  had  hitherto  possessed  in  France.  John 
was  one  of  the  worst  kings  that  ever  England  had.  Among  other 
crimes,  he  murdered  his  nephew,  Arthur  of  Bretagne,  who  was  right- 
ful heir  to  the  crown. 

10.  The  barons  of  England  were  so  disgusted  with  the  conduct  of 
John,  that  they  assembled  atRunnymede,  and  compelled  him  to  sign 
a  written  deed,  called  Magna  Charia.  This  famous  charter  was  da- 
ted the  19th  of  June,  1215.  It  is  considered  the  foundation  of  English 
liberty.  It  deprived  John,  and  all  his  successors,  of  the  despotic  pow- 
er which  former  kings  had  exercised. 

11.  King  John  died  in  1216,  and  left  the  crown  to  his  son,  who  was 
then  only  nine  years  old.  He  was  called  Henry  the  Third.  His  reign 
continued  fifty-five  years;  but,  though  he  was  a  well  meaning  man, 
he  had  not  sufficient  wisdom  and  firmness  for  a  ruler. 


3.  Wiicn  did  Henry  lieauclerk  begin  his  reign  ?  When  did  Stephen  succeed  to  the 
throne.'  When  did  he  die  ?  4.  Who  murdered  Thomas  Becket  ?  5.  What  happened  to 
Henry  II.?  6.  What  of  Ireland  ?  7.  When  was  Richard  made  king  of  England  ?  What 
of  him?  S.  How  \ias  he  killed?  9.  Why  was  John  called  Lackland?  What  of  him. 
His  crimes  ?  10.  Who  signed  Magna  Charta?  How  is  it  considered?  11.  When  did 
king  John  die  ?     What  of  Henry  III.  ? 

t  20* 


234 


SCHOOL    HISTORY. 


CHAPTER  CXLIL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 
English  Wars  and  Rebellions. 


m^mmi 


Henry  IV. 


1.  The  next  king,  Edward  the  First,  was  crowned  in  1272.  The 
people  gave  him  the  nickname  of  LongshankSj  because  his  legs  were 
of  unusual  length.  He  was  a  great  warrior,  and  fought  bravely  in 
Palestine,  and  in  the  civil  wars  of  England. 

2.  Edward  conquered  Wales,  which  had  hitherto  been  a  separate 
kingdom.  He  attempted  to  conquer  Scotland  likewise,  but  did  not 
entirely  succeed.  The  illustrious  William  Wallace  resisted  him,  and 
beat  the  English  troops  in  many  battles.  But,  at  last,  Wallace  was 
taken  prisoner  and  carried  in  chains  to  London,  and  there  executed. 

3.  Robert  Bruce  laid  claim  to  the  crown  of  Scotland,  and  renewed 
the  war  against  Edward.  But  old  Longshanks  was  determined  not 
to  let  go  his  hold  of  poor  Scotland.  He  mustered  an  immense  army, 
and  was  marching  northward,  when  a  sudden  sickness  put  an  end  to 
his  life- 

4.  His  son,  Edward  the  Second,  ascended  the  throne  in  1307.  He 
led  an  army  of  a  hundred  thousand  men  into  Scotland.  But  he  was 
not  such  a  warrior  as  old  kins:  Longshanks.  Robert  Bruce  encoun- 
tered him  at  Bannockburn,  with  only  thirty  thousand  men,  and  gain- 
ed a  glorious  victory.  By  this,  Scotland  was  set  free.  Edward  the 
Second  reigned  about  twenty  years.  He  was  a  foolish  and  misera- 
ble king.  His  own  wife  made  war  against,  him,  and  took  him  prison- 
er.    By  her  instigation,  he  was  cruelly  murdered  in  prison. 

Ch.  CXLII. — 1.  When  was  Edward  I.  crowned?  What  did  the  people  call  him? 
What  of  him  ?  2.  What  of  Wales?  Who  resisted  Edward  in  Scotland?  Fate  of  Wil 
liam  Wallace?  3.  What  of  Robert  Bruce  ?  Death  of  Edward  Longshanks  ?  4.Wliatol 
Edward  II.?  Battle  of  Bannockburn  ?  How  was  Scotland  set  free?  What  happened  to 
fcMwardH..' 


ENGLAND.  035 

5.  His  son,  Edward  the  Third,  began  to  reign  in  1327,  at  the  age 
of  eighteen.  He  had  not  long  been  on  the  throne,  before  he  showed 
himself  very  unlike  his  father.  He  beat  the  Scots  at  Halidown  Hill, 
and  afterwards  invaded  France.  I  have  spoken  of  his  French  wars,  in. 
the  history  of  France. 

6.  The  king's  son,  surnamed  the  Black  Prince,  was  even  more  va- 
liant than  his  father.  He  was  also  as  kind  and  generous  as  he  was 
brave.  He  conquered  king  John  of  France,  and  took  him  prisoner; 
but  he  did  not  exult  over  him.  When  they  entered  London  together, 
the  Black  Prince  rode  bareheaded  by  the  side  of  the  captive  monarch 
as  if  he  were  merely  an  attendant,  instead  of  a  conqueror. 

7.  This  brave  prince  died  in  1376,  and  his  father  lived  only  one 
year  longer.  The  next  king  was  Richard  the  Second,  a  boy  of  eleven 
years  old.  When  he  grew  up,  Richard  neglected  the  government, 
and  cared  for  nothing  but  his  own  pleasures. 

8.  During  his  reign  a  rebellion  was  headed  by  a  blacksmith,  named 
Wat  Tyler.  The  rebels  had  also  other  leaders,  nicknamed  Jack 
Straw  and  Hob  Carter.  They  marched  to  London  with  a  hundred 
thousand  followers,  and  did  a  great  deal  of  mischief. 

9.  The  king,  attended  by  a  few  of  his  nobles,  rode  out  to  hold  a 
conference  with  Wat  Tyler.  The  blacksmith  was  very  rude,  and 
treated  king  Richard  as  if  he  were  no  better  than  a  common  man,  or 
perhaps  not  quite  so  good.  He  even  threatened  the  king  with  a 
drawn  sword. 

10.  William  Walworth  the  lord  mayor  of  London,  was  standing 
near  the  king.  He  was  so  offended  at  Wat  Tyler's  insolence,  that  he 
uplifted  a  mace,  or  club,  and  smote  Wat  to  the  ground.  A  knight 
then  killed  him  with  a  sword. 

11.  When  the  rebels  saw  that  the  valiant  blacksmith  was  beat 
down  and  slain,  they  gave  an  ansry  shout,  and  were  rushing  forward 
to  attack  the  king's  party.  But  king  Richard  rode  boldly  to  meet 
them,  and  waved  his  hand  with  a  majestic  air. 

12.  "  Be  not  troubled  for  the  death  of  your  leader  !"  he  cried,  "  I, 
your  king,  will  be  a  better  leader  than  Wat  Tyler  !"  The  king's 
words  and  looks  made  such  an  impression,  that  the  rebels  imme- 
diately submitted,  and  Wat  Tyler's  murder  was  unavenged. 


CELYPTER  CXLIIL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Lancastrian  Kings  of  England. 

].  Notwithstanding  his  promise  to  the  rebels,  kin?  Richard  was 
not  half  so  cood  a  ruler  as  the  blacksmith  would  probably  have 
been.    His  subjects  grew  more  and  more  discontented,  and  his  cousin, 

5.  What  of  Edward  III.  ?  When  (lid  he  begin  to  reign  ?  6.  What  of  the  Black  Prince  ? 
How  did  he  treat  John  of  Fran,  e  :  7.  What  of  Richard  II.  ?  8.  9.  What  of  Wat  Tyler's 
rebellion?  10.  What  did  William  Walworth  do?  11.  What  of  the  rebels  when  Wat 
Tyler  was  killed  ?     What  did  Richard  do? 

20* 


236  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

the  Duke  of  Lancaster,  formed  the  project  of  making  himself  king. 
Richard  was  dethroned,  and  imprisoned  at  Pontefract  castle,  where 
he  was  either  killed  or  starved  to  death.  The  Duke  of  Lancaster 
began  to  reign  in  the  year  1400,  and  was  called  Henry  the  Fourth. 

2.  There  were  two  rebellions  against  this  king.  One  was  headed 
by  the  Earl  of  Northumberland,  and  the  other  by  the  Archbishop  of 
York  ;  for,  in  those  times,  bishops  often  put  on  armor  and  turned 
soldiers.  Henry  conquered  the  rebels  and  reigned  several  years  in 
peace. 

3.  As  long  as  his  father  lived,  the  king's  eldest  son  was  a  wild  and 
dissipated  young  man.  But  no  sooner  was  the  old  king  dead,  than 
his  character  underwent  a  complete  change.  He  now  threw  off  his 
dissipation  and  devoted  himself  carefully  to  the  business  of  governing 
his  kingdom.  He  was  crowned,  as  Henry  the  Fifth,  in  1413.  Two 
years  afterwards  he  invaded  France. 

4.  I  have  already  told,  in  the  history  of  France,  how  Henry  van- 
quished the  French  in  the  famous  battle  of  Agincourt,  and  how  he 
afterwards  became  master  of  the  whole  kingdom  of  France.  His 
death  took  place  in  1422,  in  the  midst  of  his  triumphs,  at  the  age  of 
thirty-four. 

5.  The  new  king  of  England,  Henry  the  Sixth,  was  a  baby,  only 
nine  months  old.  At  that  tender  age,  while  he  was  still  in  his  nurse's 
arms,  the  heavy  crowns  of  England  and  France  were  put  upon  his 
head.  The  ceremony  of  this  poor  child's  coronation  was  performed 
in  the  city  of  Paris.  He  soon  lost  the  crown  of  France.  But  the 
crown  of  England  continued  a  torment  to  him  as  long  as  he  lived,  and 
it  caused  his  death  at  last. 

6.  When  he  grew  up,  he  turned  out  to  be  a  mild,  quiet,  simple 
sort  of  man,  with  barely  sense  enough  to  get  along  respectably  as  a 
private  person.  As  a  king,  he  was  an  object  of  contempt.  His  wife 
had  far  more  manhood  than  himself,  and  she  governed  him  like  a 
child. 

7.  During  this  king's  reign  began  the  war  of  the  Roses.  The 
reader  will  recollect,  that  the  Duke  of  Lancaster  had  unlawfully 
taken  the  crown  from  Richard  the  Second.  But  he  and  his  son 
reigned  without  much  opposition,  because  they  were  warlike  men, 
and  could  have  defended  the  crown  with  their  swords. 

8.  Henry  the  Sixth,  on  the  contrary,  was  soft,  meek,  and  peaceable, 
without  spirit  enough  to  fight  for  the  crown  which  his  father  left  him. 
The  heirs  of  Richard  the  Second  therefore  thought  this  a  proper 
time  to  get  back  their  lawful  inheritance.  The  Duke  of  York  was 
the  nearest  heir. 

9.  He  began  a  war  in  1445.  If  there  had  been  nobody  but  Henry 
the  Sixth  to  resist  him,  he  might  have  got  the  croAvn  at  once.  But 
Henry's  wife,. whose  name  was  Margaret,  and  many  of  the  nobility, 

Ch.  CXLIII.— 1.  What  of  England  under  Richard?  Who  dethroned  him  ?  His  fate  ? 
Who  was  Henry  IV.?  When  did  lie  begin  to  reign  ?  ■!■  What  rebellions  were  there 
against  this  king?  3.  What  of  Henry  V.r  When  did  he  invade  France  ?  Who  fought 
the  battle  of  Agincourt  ?  When  did  Henry  V.  die  ?  5.  Describe  the  coronation  of  Henry 
VI.  6.  What  of  him  ?  His  queen  '  7.  What  of  the  Duke  of  Lancaster  ?  His  sou 
HeLry  V.     8.  What  did  the  heirs  of  Richard  II.  do  ? 


ENGLAND.     '  237 

took  up  arms  for  the  king.     Other  noblemen  lent  assistance  to  the 
Duke  of  York. 

10.  All  the  Yorkists,  or  partisans  of  the  Duke  of  York,  wore  white 
roses,  either  in  their  hats  or  at  their  breasts.  The  Lancastrians,  or 
those  of  the  king' s  party,  wore  a  red  rose  in  the  same  manner. 
Whenever  two  persons  happened  to  meet,  one  wearing  a  red  rose  and 
the  other  a  white,  they  drew  their  swords  and  fought. 

11.  Thus  the  people  of  England  were  divided  into  two  grea 
parties,  who  were  ready  to  cut  each  others  throats,  merely  for  the 
difference  between  a  white  and  red  rose. . 


CHAPTER  CXLIV.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Wars  of  the  Roses. 

1.  The  wars  of  the  roses  lasted  thirty  years.  Sometimes  the 
white  rose  was  uppermost,  and  sometimes  the  red.  The  most  cele- 
brated general  in  these  wars  was  the  Earl  of  Warwick.  It  was 
chiefly  by  his  means  that  the  soldiers  of  the  white  rose  gained  a 
decisive  victory  at  Tuwton,  in  which  thirty-six  thousand  of  the  red 
rose  men  were  killed.  The  young  Duke  of  York  was  then  proclaimed 
king,  under  the  name  of  Edward  the  Fourth. 

2.  This  was  in  1461.  But,  not  long  afterwards,  the  Earl  of  War- 
wick quarreled  with  king  Edward,  and  quitted  the  party  of  the 
Yorkists.  He  took  king  Henry  the  Sixth  out  of  prison,  and  placed 
him  on  the  throne  again,  and  Edward  was  compelled  to  flee  over  to 
France. 

3.  As  the  Earl  of  Warwick  showed  himself  so  powerful  in  pulling 
down  kings  and  setting  them  up  again,  he  gained  the  name  of  the 
King-maker.  But  he  was  finally  killed  in  battle,  while  fighting 
bravely  for  the  Lancastrians;  and  then  the  white  rose  flourished 
again. 

4.  Henry  the  Sixth  and  his  son  were  murdered  in  1464,  and 
Edward  the  Fourth  became  the  undisputed  king  of  England.  He 
had  fought  bravely  for  the  crown,  but  now  that  he  had  got  firm  pos- 
session of  it,  he  became  idle  and  voluptuous. 

5.  lie  was  a  cruel  tyrant,  too.  Having  resolved  to  put  one  of  his 
brothers  to  death,  he  gave  him  the  choice  of  dying  in  whatever 
manner  he  pleased.  His  brother,  who  was  a  great  lover  of  good 
liquor,  chose  to  be  drowned  in  a  hogshead  of  wine. 

6.  Edward  the  Fourth  died  in  14S3.  He  left  two  voung  children, 
the  eldest  of  whom  now  became  Edward  the  Fifth.  But  these  poor 
children  had  a  wicked  uncle  for  a  guardian.     He  was  called  Richard 


9.  When  did  the  Duke  of  York  uegin  the  war  ?  Who  took  up  arms  for  Henry  ?  10. 
What  did  the  followers  of  the  Duke  of  fork  wear?  Those  of  the  king?  What  often 
happened  ?  Ch.  CXLIV.— 1.  How  long  did  the  wars  of  the  rues  last?  What  of  the  Karl 
of  Warwick?    2.  When  was  Edward  IV.  made   king?    What  did  Warwick  do?    What 

was    he   called?     How   was    he   killed?     When  did  the  party  of  the  white  roses   flourish 
again?     1.  What  of  Edward  IV.  ?     :>.  How  did  lie  treat  hi»  [irother? 


238 


SCHOOL    HISTORY. 


Crookback,  Duke  of  Gloucester.  Most  historians  say,  that  he  was  a 
horrible  figure  to  look  at,  having  a  hump-back,  a  withered  arm,  and 
a  very  ugly  face.  This  frightful  personage  was  determined  to  make 
himself  king. 

7.  He  took  care  that  the  little  king  Edward  and  his  brother  should 
lodge  in  the  tower  of  London.  One  night,  while  the  two  children 
were  sound  asleep  in  each  other's  arms,  some  villains  came  and 
smothered  them  with  the  bolsters  of  the  bed.     They  were  buried 


at  the  foot  of  a  staircase.  So  Richard  Crookback,  the  murderer,  be- 
came king  of  England.  He  committed  a  thousand  crimes  for  the 
sake  of  getting  the  crown,  but  he  did  not  keep  it  long. 

8.  Henry  Tudor,  the  young  earl  of  Richmond,  was  now  the  only 
remaining  heir  of  king  Henry  the  Sixth.  The  French  supplied  him 
with  the  means  of  making  war  against  Richard  Crookback.  He 
landed  in  England,  and  gained  a  victory  at  Bosworth. 

9.  When  the  soldiers  of  Richmond  examined  the  dead  bodies  that 
lay  in  heaps  on  the  battle-field,  they  found  the  hump-backed  Richard 
among  them,  witb  the  golden  crown  upon  his  head.  They  put  it  on 
the  head  of  Richmond,  and  hailed  him  king  Henry  the  Seventh. 

10.  The  new  king  married  a  daughter  of  Edward  the  Fourth;  and 
at  their  wedding,  they  each  wore  a  red  rose  intertwined  with  a  white 
one  ;  for  the  wars  of  the  roses  were  now  over  at  last. 

6.  When  did  he  die  ?  What  children  did  he  leave  ?  Describe  Richard  Crookback?  7 
What  cruelty  did  he  commit  ?  Did  he  become  king?  8.  Who  gained  the  battle  of  Bos- 
worth ?  9.  Where  was  Richard  found  ?  10.  Who  did  Henry  VII.  marry  ?  Why  wer« 
the  wars  of  the  roses  now  at  an  end? 


ENGLAND.  239 

CHAPTER  CXLV.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Reig-ns  of  the  Tudor  Princes. 


Richard  Crookback. 


Henry  VIII. 


1.  Henry  the  Seventh  (the  former  earl  of  Richmond)  besan  his 
reign  in  14S5.  He  was  a  craftv  kin?,  and  cared  much  more"  for  his 
own  power  and  wealth  than  for  the  happiness  of  his  subjects.  But, 
for  his  own  sake,  he  desired  to  reign  peaceably,  without  foreign  wars 
or  civil  commotions. 

2.  During  his  reign,  two  impostors  appeared  in  England,  each  of 
whom  pretended  that  he  had  a  better  right  to  the  crown  than  Henry 
the  Seventh  had.  One  was  Lambert  Simnel,  the  son  of  a  baker;  but 
he  called  himself  a  nephew  of  Edward  the  Fourth.  The  other  was 
Perkin  Warbeck,  the  son  of  a  Flemish  butcher.  He  pretended  to  be 
one  of  the  little  princes  whom  Richard  Crookback  had  smothered  in 
the'  tower. 

3.  Many  knights  and  noblemen  of  England  were  led  into  rebellion 
by  each  of  these  impostors.  But  finallv'they  were  both  taken  prison- 
ers. Perkin  Warbeck  was  handed,  and  Lambert  Simnel  was  set  to 
washing  dishes  in  the  king's  kitchen. 

4.  Henry  the  Seventh  died  in  1509.  He  had  been  a  great  lover  of 
■money,  and  put  all  that  he  could  lay  his  hands  on  into  his  own  purse. 
A  sum  equal  to  fifty  millions  of  dollars  was  found  in  his  palace,  after 
his  death. 

5.  His  son,  Henry  the  Eighth,  began  to  reign  at  the  age  of  eighteen. 
He  was  a  haughty,  stem,  hard-hearted,  and  tyrannical  king.  When- 
ever he  got  angry,  and  that  was  not  seldom,  the  heads  of  some  of  his 
subjects  were  sure  to  be  cut  off.     This  royal  villain  had  six  wives. 

Ch.  CXLV — 1.  When  did  Henry  VII.  begin  to  reign  ?  What  of  him?  2.  What  of 
two  irnpustors  ?  Their  Dames?  Whom  did  they  pretend  to  he  ?  3.  What  became  of  them  * 
4.  What  of  the  riches  of  Henry  VII.  ?  6.  When  did  Henry  VIII.  begin  to  rei'u?  Whal 
of  him?     What  of  hi»  wives  ? 


240  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

One  died  a  natural  death;  he  was  divorced  from  two,  cut  off  the 
heads  of  two  others,  and  one  outlived  him. 

6.  The  reign  of  Henry  the  Eighth  was  chiefly  remarkable  on  ac- 
count of  the  Reformation  in  England.  By  this  term  is  meant  the 
substitution  of  the  Protestant  religion  for  the  Roman  Catholic.  Until 
this  period,  the  pope  of  Rome  had  claimed  authority  over  England. 

7.  But  Henry  the  Eighth  took  all  the  power  to  himself.  If  any  of 
his  subjects  dared  to  have  a  religion  unlike  the  king's,  they  were  eith- 
er beheaded  or  burnt.  The  king  was  so  proud  of  his  religious  char- 
acter, that  he  called  himself  Defender  of  the  Faith  !* 

8.  The  old  tyrant  died  in  1547,  at  the  age  of  fifty-six.  One  of  his 
last  acts  was  to  cause  the  earl  of  Surrey  to  be  beheaded,  although  he 
was  guilty  of  no  crime;  and  with  that  innocent  blood  upon  his  soul, 
king  Henry  the  Eighth  was  summoned  to  the  judgment-seat. 

9.  His  son,  Edward  the  Sixth,  was  but  nine  or  ten  years  old  when 
he  ascended  the  throne.  He  was  a  fine  and  promising  boy,  but  lived 
only  to  the  age  of  sixteen.     His  sister  Mary  succeeded  him  in  1553. 

10.  She  bears  the  dreadful  title  of  Bloody  Queen  Mary.  She  was 
blinded  by  the  errors  of  the  age,  and  being  a  Roman  Catholic,  she 
caused  persons  to  be  burnt  alive  who  denied  the  authority  of  the 
pope.     Many  bishops  and  godly  ministers  thus  perished  at  the  stake. 

11.  But,  even  in  the  midst  of  the  flames,  they  were  happier  than 
Queen  Mary.  It  seemed  as  if  a  fire  were  consuming  ber  miserable 
heart.  She  knew  that  everybody  hated  her,  and,  after  a  reign  of  only 
five  years,  she  died  of  mere  trouble  and  anguish  of  mind. 


CHAPTER  CXLVL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Reign  of  Elizabeth. 

1.  The  famous  Elizabeth,  sister  to  the  Bloody  Mary,  became  queen 
in  1558.  She  was  a  Protestant,  and  therefore  there  were  no  more 
martyrdoms  in  England.  She  was,  however,  very  hard  and  cruel  to 
those  who  held  a  different  faith  from  her  own. 

2.  Elizabeth,  however,  in  all  that  related  to  the  power  of  England 
was  truly  a  great  queen,  and  the  nation  was  never  more  respected 
than  while  this  mighty  woman  held  the  sceptre  in  her  hand.  But 
she  possessed  hardly  any  of  the  kindly  virtues  that  a  woman  ought 
to  have.     Yet  she  prided  herself  greatly  on  her  beauty. 

3.  Many  princes  and  great  men  desired  to  marry  Elizabeth  ;  but  she 
chose  to  remain  sole  mistress  of  her  person  and  her  kingdom.  And 
as  she  herself  refused  to  take  a  husband,  it  made  her  very  angry 
whenever  any  of  the  ladies  of  her  court  got  married. 

6  What  great  event  occurred  in  this  reign?  What  is  meant  by  the  Reformation  ?  Who 
had  claimed  authority  over  England?  7.  Why  was  the  king  called  Defender  of  the  Failh? 
8.  When  did  Henry  VIII.  die?  What  was  the  last  act  of  hia  reign?  9.  What  of  Edward 
VI.  :  When  did  Maiy  begin  to  reign  ?  10.  Why  is  she  cailed  Bloody  Mary?  11.  How 
Hi"  did  she  r«i«n  ?  Ch.  CXLVI. — 1.  When  did  Elizabeth  ascend  the  throne?  Whal 
Wither  religion?     2.  What  of  her?     3.  Why  did  she  iiul  marry:      What  made  her  angry  .' 


ENGLAND 


241 


4.  Philip  the  Second  of  Spain  asked  her  hand  in  marriage.  On  her 
refusal,  he  sent  his  Invincible  Armada  to  invade  England.  But  a  storm 
destroyed  part  of  the  ships,  and  the  English  fleet  conquered  the  re- 
mainder. 


Bloody    Mary. 


Elizabeth. 


5.  Some  of  the  actions  of  queen  Elizabeth  were  almost  as  bad  as 
those  of  old  Harry,  her  father.  When  Mary,  the  beautiful  queen  of 
Scots,  fled  into  England  for  protection,  she  caused  her  to  be  imprison- 
ed eighteeen  years.  And  after  those  long  and  weary  years,  the  poor 
queen  was  tried  and  condemned  to  die. 

6.  Elizabeth  was  resolved  upon  her  death,  but  she  was  loth  to  in- 
cur the  odium  of  such  a  crime.  She  therefore  endeavored  to  per- 
suade the  jailer  to  murder  her.  But,  as  he  steadfastly  refused,  Eliza- 
beth signed  the  death-warrant,  and  the  unfortunate  Mary  was  be- 
headed. 

7.  When  queen  Elizabeth  grew  old,  she  could  not  bear  to  look  at 
her  gray  hairs,  and  withered  and  wrinkled  visage,  in  a  glass.  Her 
maids  of  honor,  therefore,  had  all  the  trouble  of  dressing  her.  Part 
of  their  business  was  to  paint  her  face.  The  queen  of  course  expect- 
ed them  to  make  her  cheeks  look  red  and  rosy. 

S.  But,  instead  of  putting  the  red  paint  on  her  cheeks,  these  mis- 
chievous maids  of  honor  used  sometimes  to  put  it  all  upon  her  nose. 
So  they  set  this  great  queen  on  her  throne,  in  the  presence  of  her  court, 
with  her  nose  as  bright  as  if  it  had  caught  fire. 

9.  The  courtiers  often  made  a  fool  of  Elizabeth  by  pretending  to  be 
in  love  with  her,  even  when  she  was  old  enough  to  be  their  grand- 
mother. Among  others,  the  earl  of  Essex  paid  his  addresses  to  her, 
and  became  her  chief  favorite.  But,  at  last,  he  offended  her,  and  was 
sentenced  to  lose  his  head. 

4.  What  of  Philip  of  Spain  ?     What  of  the  Invincible  Armada  ?     6.  What  Was  one  of  the 

worn  actions  of  queen  Elizabeth?     What  was  the    fate   of  Mary   queen   of  Scots?     7.  .-^. 
What  trick  did  the  maid»  of  honer  put  upon  queen  Elizabeth  ?  9.  What  of  the  earl  of  E^s,  v  ' 


242  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

10.  When  the  earl  of  Essex  was  dead  and  gone,  queen  Elizabeth 
bitterly  repented  of  her.  cruelty.  She  was  now  very  old,  and  she 
knew  that  nobody  loved  her,  and  there  were  none  that  she  could  love. 
She  pined  away,  and  never  held  up  her  head  again ;  and  in  her  seven- 
tieth year  she  died. 

11.  The  bishops,  and  the  wise  and  learned  men  of  her  coutt,  came 
to  look  at  her  dead  body.  They  were  sad,  for  they  doubted  whether 
England  would  ever  be  so  prosperous  again,  as  while  it  was'  under  the 
government  of  this  mighty  queen.  And,  in  truth,  of  all  the  monarchs 
who  have  held  the  sceptre  since  that  day,  there  has  not  been  one  who 
could  sway  it  like  the  gray-haired  woman,  whose  spirit  had  now 
passed  into  eternity. 


CHAPTER  CXLVH.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Accession  of  the  House  of  Stuart. 


James  I. 


Charles  I. 


1.  Elizabeth  was  succeeded  by  James  Stuart,  king  of  Scotland. 
He  was  the  sixth  James  that  had  ruled  over  that  kino-dom,  but  was 
James  the  First  of  England.  He  began  to  reign  in  1603.  James  in- 
herited the  Eno-lish  crown,  because  he  was  the  grandson  of  a  daugh- 
ter of  Henry  the  Seventh.  His  mother  was  Mary,  queen  of  Scots, 
whom  Elizabeth  had  beheaded. 

2.  The  whole  island  of  Great  Britain  was  now  under  the  same 
government.  This  event  put  an  end  to  the  wars  which  had  raged 
between  England  and  Scotland  during  many  centuries.     But  it  was  a 

10.  How  did  Elizabeth  feel  after  his  death?  11.  How  did  the  great  men  of  the  court 
feel  when  they  saw  Elizabeth's  dead  body?  What  may  be  said  of  her  government? 
Ch.  CXLVII. — 1.  When  did  James  I.  begin  foreign?  Who  was  he?  2.  What  put  a* 
end  to  the  wars  between  England  and  Scotland  ? 


ENGLAND.  243 

iong  time  before  the  English   and  Scotch  could  live  together  like 
brethren. 

3.  As  for  king  James,  he  was  much  fitter  for  a  schoolmaster  than 
for  a  king.  He  had  a  good  deal  of  learning,  and  wrote  several  books. 
He  delighted  to  talk  Hebrew,  and  Greek,  and  Latin  ;  and  his  courtiers 
were  often  puzzled  to>  understand  him. 

4.  James  tbought  himself  as  wise  as  Solomon  ;  and  it  must  be  own- 
ed that  he  possessed  a  sort  of  cunning,  which  greatly  resembled  wis- 
dom.  This  was  seen  in  his  discovery  of  the  Gunpowder  Plot.  Some 
misguided  Catholics  had  laid  a  plan  to  blow  up  the  parliament  house, 
at  a  time  when  the  king,  the  lords,  and  all  the  members  of  parlia- 
ment, would  be  assembled  there.  If  it  had  succeeded,  the  whole 
government  of  England  would  have  been  destroyed. 

5.  But  king  James  smelled  out  the  plot.  He  set  people  on  the 
watch,  and  they  caught  a  man  by  the  name  of  Guy  Fawkes,  in  a  cel- 
lar, where  thirty-six  barrels  of  gunpowder  were  concealed.  Fawkes 
told  the  king  the  names  of  eighty  of  his  accomplices.  He  and  they 
were  all  put  to  death. 

b'.  James  had  one  good  quality  which  kings  have  not  very  often 
possessed.  He  hated  war.  His  reign  was  therefore  peaceable.  He 
died  in  1625,  and  was  succeeded  by  Charles  the  First,  his  son. 

7.  It  was  easy  to  foresee  that  this  king  would  have  a  more  trouble- 
some reisn  than  his  father.  There  were  now  many  Puritans  in  Eng- 
land. These  people  were  opposed  to  the  Church  of  England,  to  the 
bishops,  and  to  all  the  ceremonies  which  had  not  been  cast  off  when 
the  Roman  Catholic  faith  was  abolished. 

S.  They  likewise  thought  that  the  kings  of  England  had  too  much 
power.  They  were  determined  that,  thenceforward,  the  king  should 
not  reign  merely  for  his  own  pleasure  and  glory,  but  for  the  good  of 
the  people.  Charles,  on  the  other  hand,  seemed  to  think  that  the 
common  people  were  created  only  that  kings  might  have  subjects  to 
rule  over. 

9.  In  the  early  part  of  his  reign,  the  king  persecuted  the  Puritans. 
He  would  not  allow  the  Puritan  ministers  to  preach,  nor  the  people 
to  attend  their  meetings.  Their  sufferings  were  great,  although  the 
king  dared  not  burn  them,  as  the  bloody  queen  Mary  would  have 
done. 

10.  Many  of  them  crossed  the  ocean,  and  sought  religious  freedom 
in  New  England.  John  Hampden,  John  Pyne,  and  Oliver  Cromwell 
were  once  on  the  point  of  coming  to  this  country.  But  the  king  pre- 
vented them,  and  these  three  persons  afterwards  became  his  most 
powerful  enemies. 

3.  What  of  king  James?  4.  What  plot  had  the  Roman  Catholics  laid?  5.  How  did 
James  discover  the  plot?  What  of  Guy  Fawkes  ?  6.  What  good  quality  did  James  po«- 
«ess?  When  did  he  die?  Who  succeeded  him  ?  7.  What  of  the  Puritans?  8.  What  did 
they  think?  What  of  Charles?  9.  How  did  he  treat  the  Puritans?  10.  What  did  many 
of  them  do  ?     What  of  three  principal  enemies  of  Charles  ? 

21 


S44 


SCHOOL   HISTORY, 


CHAPTER  CXLVIII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Wars  of  the  King  and  Parliament. 


: j[ 

=^^^^~T^= 

^=s! 

— 

Iff  ^111 

- 

=       3 

m 

B  i^P 

H51^ 

1     ^^-^ 

jlb=E= 

s 

j 

1 

Oliver  Cromwell. 


diaries  II. 


1.  Till  the  reign  of  Charles  the  First,  the  English  parliament  had 
hardly  ever  dared  to  oppose  the  wishes  of  the  king.  But  now  there 
were  continual  disputes  between  the  king  and  parliament.  And  if 
Charles  dissolved  one  parliament,  the  next  was  sure  to  be  still  more 
obstinate. 

2.  Matters  went  on  in  this  way,  till  at  length  the  quarrel  grew  too 
violent  to  be  settled  by  mere  words.  Both  parties  then  betook  them- 
selves to  their  weapons.  The  king  was  supported  by  a  great  major- 
ity of  the  lords  and  gentlemen  of  England  and  Scotland,  and  by  all 
the  bishops  and  clergy  of  the  English  church.  All  the  gay  and  wild 
young  men  in  the  kingdom  likewise  drew  their  swords  for  the  crown. 
The  whole  of  king  Charles'  party  were  called  cavaliers. 

3.  Some  of  the  noblemen  and  sentry  look  the  side  of  the  parlia- 
ment. ;  but  its  adherents  were  chiefly  mechanics,  tradesmen,  and  com- 
mon people.  Because  their  hair  was  cropped  close  to  their  skulls, 
their  enemies  gave  them  the  nickname  of  roundheads.  The  cavaliers 
dressed  magnificently,  and  wore  long  hair,  hanging  in  love-locks  down 
their  temples.  They  drank  wine,  and  sang  songs,  and  rode  merrily 
to  the  battle-field. 

4.  The  roundheads  wore  steeple-crowned  hats  and  sadcolored  gar- 
ments. They  sang  nothing  but  psalms,  and  spent  much  of  their 
Jeasure  time  in  praying  and  hearing  sermons.  They  were  a  stern 
and  resolute  set  of  men,  and    when  once  they  had  made  up  their 

Ch.  CXLVIII. — 1.  What  of  the  parliaments  during  the  reign  of  Charles  I.  ?  2.  How 
was  the  king  supported?  What  were  the  lung's  party  called  ?  3.  Who  were  on  the  sidf 
ef  the  parliament?     Describe  the  cavaliers?     4.  What  of  the  roundheads? 


ENGLAND.  245 

minds  to  tear  down  the  throne,  it  must  be  done,  though  the  realm  of 
England  should  be  rent  asunder  in  the  struggle. 

5.  The  civil  war  between  the  cavaliers  and  roundheads  began  in 
1642.  Many  battles  were  fought,  and  rivers  of  English  blood  were 
shed  on  both  sides. 

6.  It  was.not  long  before  Oliver  Cromwell  began  to  be  a  famous 
leader,  on  the  side  of  the  parliament.  He  pretended  to  fight  only  for 
religion  and  the  good  of  the  people.  But  he  was  an  ambitious  man, 
and  meant  to  place  himself  in  the  king's  empty  seat. 

7.  Cromwell  gained  one  battle  after  another,  and  rose  from  step  to 
step,  till  there  was  no  man  so  powerful  and  renowned  as  he.-  .  Final- 
ly, in  1645,  he  defeated  the  king's  army  at  the  bloody  battle  of  Nase- 
by.  King  Charles  afterwards  surrendered  himself  to  the  Scots,  and 
they  delivered  him  to  the  parliament. 

8.  The  parliament  brought  the  king  to  trial  as  a  traitor.  The  court 
that  tried  him  consisted  of  a  hundred  and  thirty-three  persons.  They 
declared  him  guilty,  and  sentenced. him  to  lose  his  head.  When  the 
people  of  England  heard  the  sentence,  they  trembled. 

9.  For  it  was  a  great  and  terrible  thing,  that  their  anointed  sover- 
eign should  die  the  death  of  a  traitor.  Many  kings,  it  is  true,  had 
died  by  the  hands  of  their  enemies,  but  it  had  always  been  in  dark- 
ness and  secrecy.  But  king  Charles  was  tried  and  condemned  in  the 
face  of  all  the  world. 

10.  On  the  thirtieth  of  January,  1649,  they  brought  the  king  from 
his  palace  to  the  scaffold.  It  was  covered  with  black  cloth.  In  the 
centre  of  the  scaffold  stood  a  block,  and  by  the  block  stood  an  execu- 
tioner, with  an  axe  in  his  hand,  and  a  black  mask  over  his  face. 

11.  The  steel-clad  soldiers  of  Cromwell  surrounded  the  scaffold. 
But  the  king  walked  to  his  death  with  as  firm  a  step  as  when  he 
went  to  his  coronation.  "  They  have  taken  away  my  corruptible 
crown,"  said  he,  "  but  I  go  to  receive  an  incorruptible  one." 

12.  When  king  Charles  had  knelt  down  and  prayed,  he  cast  a 
pitying  glance  upon  the  people  round  the  scaffold;  for  he  feared  that 
direful  judgments  would  come  upon  the  land  which  was  now  to  be 
stained  with  its  monarch's  blood. 

13.  But,  as  he  saw  that  his  enemies  were  resolved  to  slay  him,  he 
calmly  laid  his  head  upon  the  block.  The  executioner  raised  his  axe, 
and  smote  off  the  king's  head  at  a  single  blow.  Then  lifting  it  in 
his  hand,  he  cried  aloud, — "  This  is  the  head  of  a  traitor  !"  But  the 
people  shuddered;  for  they  doubted  whether  it  was  the  head  of  a 
traitor,  and  they  knew  that  it  was  the  head  of  a  king. 

5.  What  war  began  in  1G42  ?  6.  What  of  Oliver  Cromwell  ?  7.  When  was  the  battle 
of  Naseby  fought?  8.  What  was  done  to  king  Charles?  How  did  the  people  feel  when 
he  was  sentenced  to  death?  10.  11.  12.  13.  Describe  the  execution  of  Charles  I.  In  whst 
year  did  it  take  place  ? 

21*  * 


246  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  CXLIX.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Protectorate  and  the  Restoration. 

1.  And  now  the  throne  of  England  was  empty.  The  king,  indeed, 
had  left  a  son,  but  if  he  had  shown  himself  in  London,  he  would 
soon  have  died  the  same  death  as  his  father.  The  young  prince  was 
defeated  in  battle,  and  compelled  to  flee.  At  one  time,  his  enemies 
pressed  him  so  hard,  that  he  climbed  up  among  the  thick  branches 
of  an  oak,  and  thus  saved  his  life. 

2.  The  government,  at  this  period,  was  called  a  republic.  There 
was  no  king,  no  lords,  no  bishops,  nothing  bat  the  House  of  Com- 
mons, or  the  lower  House  of  Parliament.  All  the  real  power  of  the 
kingdom  was  possessed  by  Oliver  Cromwell,  because  he  was  at  the 
head  of  the  army. 

3.  No  sooner  did  the  parliament  dare  to  oppose  Cromwell's  wishes, 
than  he  led  three  hundred  soldiers  into  the  hall  where  they  were 
sitting.  He  told  the  parliament  men  that  they  were  a  pack  of 
traitors,  and  bade  them  get  out  of  the  house.  When  they  were 
gone,  he  summoned  another  parliament.  The  principal  man  in  it 
was  called  Praise-God  Barebone.  This  name  sounded  so  well,  that 
it  was  bestowed  on  the  whole  parliament. 

4.  But  Praise-God  Barebone's  parliament  did  not  keep  together  a 
great  while.  At  the  end  of  five  months  they  besought  Cromwell  to 
send  them  about  their  business,  and  take  the  government  into  his 
own  hands.     This  was  just  what  Cromwell  wanted. 

5.  In  1654,  he  was  proclaimed  Lord  Protector  of  the  Common- 
wealth of  England.  He  held  this  high  office  four  years.  He  was  a 
sagacious  and  powerful  ruler,  and  made  himself  feared  and  respected, 
both  in  England  and  foreign  countries. 

6.  But  he  had  no  peace  nor  quiet  as  long  as  he  lived.  He  con- 
stantly wore  iron  armor  under  his  clothes,  dreading  that  some  of  his 
enemies  would  attempt  to  stab  him.  He  never  enjoyed  any  quiet 
sleep,  for  the  thought  always  haunted  him,  that  conspirators  might 
be  hidden  in  the  closet  or  under  the  bed. 

7.  Cromwell  was  released  from  this  miserable  way  of  life  by  a 
slow  fever,  of  which  he  died  in  1658,  at  the  age  of  fifty-nine.  His 
son  Richard  succeeded  him  in  the  office  of  Lord  Protector;  but  he  had 
not  ability  enough  to  keep  the  kingdom  in  subjection. 

S.  Richard  Cromwell  soon  resigned  his  office,  and  the  government 
then  became  unsettled.  The  people  began  to  think  that  England 
would  never  be  prosperous  again,  unless  the  hereditary  sovereigns 
were  re-established  on  the  throne. 

Ch.  CXLDj»-l.  What  of  king  Charles's  son  ?  2.  What  was  the  government  called  at 
this  time  ?  ^Bp  had  all  the  power  ?  3.  Describe  the  dispersing  of  the  parliament  by 
Cromwell?  What  parliament  was  then  called  ?  What  of  it  ?  5.  When  was  Cromwell 
proclaimed  Lsrd  Protector  ?  How  long  did  he  hold  the  office?  What  was  his  character? 
C.  What  fears  deprived  him  of  peace  ?  7.  When  did  he  die  ?  WTho  succeeded  him  ?  8. 
What  of  Richard  Cromwell  ? 


ENGLAND. 


247 


9.  The  man  who  had  most  influence  in  the  'army,  after  Olivet 
Cromwell's  death,  was  General  George  Monk.  He  invited  the  eldest 
son  of  Charles  the  First  to  return  to  England,  promising  that  the 
soldiers  would  assist  in  making  him  king. 

10.  The  banished  prince  had  been  living  in  different  parts  of 
Europe,  and  was  reduced  to  great  poverty.  He  lost  no  time  in  coming 
to  England,  and  entered  London  in  triumph.  At  sight  of  their  new 
king,  it  seemed  as  if  the*peoplp  were  mad  with  joy.  He  was 
crowned  in  1660,  by  the  title  of  Chanes  the  Second. 

11.  Many  of  the  persons  who  had  assisted  in  dethroning  and  be- 
heading the' king's  father  were  hanged.  The  body  of  Oliver  Crom- 
w.ell  was  taken  out  of  the  grave  and  hung  upon  the  gallows,  and 
afterwards  buried  beneath  it.  Yet  it  would  have  been  well  for 
England,  if  that  stern  but  valiant  ruler  could  have  come  to  life  as;ain. 


CHAPTER  CL.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The   Revolution    of  1688,    and   other   matters. 


James    II. 


Quee.n  Jinne. 


1.  Charles  the  Second  had  lived  a  careless  and  viscious  life  during 
his  banishment,  and  his  habits  did  not  improve  now  that  he  was  on 
the  ihrune.  He  spent  whole  days  and  nights  in  drinking  wine,  and 
in  all  sorts  of  profligate  pleasures. 

2.  In  the  year  1665,  there  was  a  great  plasrue  in  London,  of  which 
nearly  a  hundred  tbousand  persons  died.  The  next  year,  a  terrible 
fire  broke  out,  which  consumed  a  great  part  of  the  city.  But  neither 
of  these  calamities  made  any  impression  on  the  king. 

9.  What  did  General  Monk  do?  10.  Wliatuf  the  banished  prince  ?  When  was  Charlei 
II.  crowned?  U.  What  of  the  body  of  Cromwell?  Cm.  CL.— 1.  What  of  Charles  II. 
during  his  banishment  ?     2.  What  of  the  plague  ?     What  of  a  great  fire  ? 

21" 


248  SCHO.OL   HISTORY. 

3.  He  suffered  the  nation  to  be  ruled  by  unprincipled  and  wicked 
men.  It  was  safer  to  be  wicked,  in  those  days,  than  to  be  virtuous 
and  upright.  Virtue  and  religion  were  looked  upon  as  treason,  in 
the  reign  of  Charles  the  Second.  This  good-for-nothing  monarch 
died,  in  the  midst  of  his  drunkenness  and  debauchery,  in  the  year 
1685.     His  brother  succeed  him.,  and  was  called  James  the  Second. 

4.  James  was  a  Roman  Catholic;  and,  from  the  moment  that  he 
ascended  the  throne,  he  thought  of  nothiig  but  how  to  bring  Great 
Britain  again  under  the  power  of  the  pope  of  Ptome.  This  project 
rendered  him  hateful  to  his  subjects. 

5.  He  had  not  been  on  the  throne  more  than  three  years,  when 
some  of  the  greatest  men  in  England  determined  to  get  rid  of  him. 
They  invited  William,  Prjnce  of  Orange,  to  come  over  from  Holland 
and  be  their  king. 

6.  This  prince  had  no  title  to  the  crown,  except  that  he  married 
the  daughter  of  James  the  Second.  But  no  sooner  had  he  landed  in 
England,  than  all  the  courtiers  left  king  James,  and  hurried  to  pay 
obeisance  to  the  Prince  of  Orange.  He  and-his  wife  were  crowned 
in  1689,  as  king  William  and  queen  Mary.  James  had  made  his 
escape  into  France.  Some  of  his  adherents  endeavored  to  set  him  on 
the  throne  again,  but  without  success. 

7.  This  change  of  government  of  which  I  have  been  speaking,  is 
generally  called  the  glorious  revolution  of  168S.  Some  regulations 
were  now  adopted,  in  order  to  restrain  the  royal  power. 

8.  King  William  was  very  fond  of  hunting,  and  this  amusement 
hastened  his  death.  He  was  thrown  from  his  horse, in  the  year  1702, 
and  died  in  about  a  month.  His  queen  had  died  some  years  before 
him. 

9.  Anne,  another  daughter  of  the  banished  James,  now  ascended 
the  throne.  The  reign  of  this  queen  was  a  glorious  one  for  England. 
The  renowned  Duke  of  Marlborough  gained  many  splendid  victories 
over  the  French.  But  the  chief  glory  of  the  age  proceeded  from  the 
great  writers  who  lived  in  her  time. 

10.  Queen  Anne  reigned  twelve  years,  and  died  in  1714,  at  the  age 
of  forty-nine.  She  was  the  last  sovereign  of  England  who  belonged 
to  the  family  of  the  Stuarts,  which,  as  you  remember,  began  to  reign 
in  England  in  1603'. 

3.  What  was  the  state  of  morals  and  religion  during  this  reign  ?  When  did  he  die  ? 
Who  succeeded  him  ?  4.  What  did  James  wish  to  do  ?  5.  What  did  some  of  the  great 
men  do  ?  Whom  did  they  invite  from  Holland?  6.  What  title  had  William  to  the 
throne?  When  was  he  crowned?  What  of  king  James?  7.  What  of  the  revolution 
of  16SS?  8.  When  did  William  die?  9.  What  of  Anne?  Her  reign?  What  of  th« 
Duke  of  Marlborough  ?  What  was  the  chief  glory  of  Anne's  reign,  f  10.  When  did  Anna 
die  ?     Whtm  did  the  Stuarts  begin  to  reign  1 


ENGLAND. 


249 


CHAPTER  CLI.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Hanoverian  King's  of  Great  Britain. 


1.  The  old  banished  king  James  had  died  in  France,  in  the  year 
1701,  He  left  a  son,  whom  Louis  the  Fourteenth  caused  to  be  pro- 
claimed king  of  England.  But  tbe  English  people  called  him  the 
Pretender.  The'y  were  determined  not  to  have  a  Boman  Catholic 
king.  The  nearest  Protestant  heir  to  the  throne  was  the  elector  of 
Hanover,  a  German  prince,  whose  mother  was  a  granddaughter  of 
James  the  First.     He  was  now  about  fifty-five  years  old. 

2.  This  old  German  elector  was  proclaimed  king  of  England,  by 
the  title  of  George  the  First.  With  him  began  the  dynasty  of  the 
House  of  Hanover.  He  could  not  speak  a  word  of  English,  and  knew 
nothing  about  the  kingdom  which  he  was  to  govern. 

3.  He  spent  much  of  his  time  vu  his  native  country,  for  he  dearly 
loved  Hanover,  and  could  never  feel  at  home  in  the  palace  of  the 
English  kincrs.  He  died  in  1727,  and  was  succeeded  by  his  sou. 
George  the  Second,  who  was  likewise  a  native  of  Germany. 

4.  During  part  of  George  the  Second's  reign,  England  was  at  wai 
with  Spain  and  France.  The  king  commanded  his  army  in  person. 
The  English  were  victorious  in  the  battle  of  Dettingen,  but  they  lost 
the  battle  of  Fontenoye. 

o.  In  1745,  the  grandson  of  James  the  Second  attempted  to  win 
back  the  crown  of  his  ancestors.  He  landed  in  Scotland,  and  marched 
into  England  with  a  small  army  of  Scotch  mountaineers.     But  he 

Ch.  CLI. — 1.  When  and  where  had  James  II.  died  ?  What  did  the  English  call  James'i 
son?  Who  wa»  the  nearest  heir  to  the  throne  ?  2.  Who  was  George  I.  f  What  of  him? 
3.  When  did  George  II.  come  to  the  throne  ?  4.  With  what  countries  was  England  at  wai 
during  this  reign  .'     Whai  battle  did  the  English  gain  ?     What  did  they  lose  i 


250  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

was  at  last  defeated,  and  forced  to  fly ;  and  many  of  his  adherents 
were  beheaded  or  hanged. 

6.  In  1755,  another  war  began  between  the  French  and  English, 
and  some  of  their  principal  battles  were  fought  in  America.  The 
city  of  Quebec  and  the  Canadas  were  conquered  by  the  English 
during  this  war.  Shortly-after  this  event,  George  the  Second  died, 
at  the  age  of  seventy-seven. 

7.  His  grandson,  George  the  Third,  began  to  reign  in  1760,  when 
he  was  about  twenty-one  years  old.  No  king  ever  ascended  the 
throne  with  better  prospects.  Yet  so  many  misfortunes  befell  him, 
that  it  would  have  been  far  better  for  him  to  have  died  on  his  cor- 
onation day. 

8.  George  the  Third  vvas  a  man  ofrespectable  common  sense.  In 
his  private  conduct  he  was  much  better  than  the'generality  of  kings. 
But  he  was  very  obstinate,  and  often  would  not  take  the  advice  of 
men  wiser  than  himself.  Had  he  done  so,  it  is  probable  that  the 
American  Revolution  would  not  have  have  happened  ill  his  reign. 

9.  I  shall  speak  of  this  great  event  hereafter.  The  loss  of  America, 
together  with  many  other  troubles,  contributed  to  drive  George  the 
Third  to  madness.  His  first  fit  of  derangement  happened  in  1788, 
and  lasted  several  months. 

10.  In  1S05,  he  had  another  turn,  and  a  third  in  1810.  From  this 
latter  period,  he  continued  a  madman  till  his  dying  day.  While  the 
armies  of  England  were  gaining  glorious  victories,  and  grand  events 
were  continually  taking  place,  the  poor  old  crazy  king  knew  nothing 
of  the  matter.  Death  released  him  from  this  miserable  condition,  in 
the  eighty-second  year  of  his  age.  ' 

11.  The  son  of  the  old  king  was  very  wild  in  his  youth,  and  he 
never  became  a  really  good  man.  He  had  been  declared  Prince 
Regent  in  consequence  of  his  father's  insanity.  In  1820',  he  was 
crowned  as  king  George  the  Fourth. 

12.  Even  when  he  was  quite  an  old  man,  this  king  cared  as  much 
about  dress  as  any  young  coxcomb.  He  had  a  great  deal  of  taste  in 
such  matters,  and  it  is  a  pity  that  he  was  a  king,  because  he  might 
otherwise  have  been  an  excellent  tailor. 

13.  During  his  regency  and  reign,  England  combated  the  power  of 
Bonaparte.  With  her  gigantic  power,  and  aided  by  the  other  king- 
doms of  Europe,  that  famous  conqueror  was  finally  overthrown.  The 
other  events  of  king  George's  reign  are  so  recent,  that  they  scarcely 
yet  belong  to  history.  He  died  in  1830,  and  was  succeeded  by  his 
brother,  William  the  Fourth  ;  he  died  in  1S37,  and  was  succeeded  by 
Victoria,  the  present  queen. 

5.  What  took  place  in  1T45  ?  6.  What  of  the  war  in  1755?  What  of  Quebec  and  the 
Canailas  ?  7.  When  did  George  III.  begin  to  reign?  8.  Character  of  George  III.  ?  9. 
What  happened  to  him  ?  18.  What  of  his  insanity  ?  When  did  lie  die  ?  11.  When  was 
George  IV .  crowned  ?  \2 .  What  of  his  taste  in  dress  ?  13,  What  events  took  place  during 
his  reign  ?     When  did  he  die  ?     Who  succeeded  him  ? 


WALES.  251 

CHAPTER  CLII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

•    The  Story  of  Wales. 

1.  If  you  ever  go  to  Wales  and  mingle  with  the  people,  you  will 
hardly  believe  that  you  are  in  any  part  of  Great  Britain.  The  names 
of  the  inhabitants  are  very  different  from  "English  names.  What 
would  you  think  of  Mr.  Llewellyn  ap  'Griffith  ap  Jones,  and  Mrs. 
Catesby  ap  Catesby  ?     Yet  such  names  are  common  in  Wales. 

2.  Some  of  the  people  speak  English,  but  most  of  them  use  the 
same  language  that  was  spoken  by  their  ancestors.  It  is  nearly  the 
same  as  the  original  language  of  Ireland  and  the  Highlands  of  Scot- 
land. This  seems  to  show  that  the  people  are  of  the  same  stock  as 
the  Irish  and  the  Scotch  Higlanders. 

3.  The  early  history  of  Wales  is  involved  in  obscurity.  When  the 
Romans  came  to  Britain,  the  Welsh  mountains  were  inhabited  by  a 
rougli  set  of  people,  who  gave  terrible  blows  with  their  clubs.  They 
defended  their  mountains  so  fiercely,  that  the  Romans  never  got  pos- 
session of  the  country. 

4.  When  the  Saxons  came,  they  subdued  all  England,  and  a  small 
portion  of  Wales  ;  but  the  greater  part  heid  out  against  them  to  the 
last.  Thus  the  Welsh  princes  maintained  their  independence,  as 
well  against  the  Roman  as  the  Saxon  invaders.  These  princes  ap- 
pear to  have  lived  in  strong  stone  castles,  which,  in  time  of  war,  were 
defended  by  the  people  around  them.  The  ruins  of  some  of  these 
castles  are  still  to  be  ■seen. 

5.  In  these  ancient  limes  there  was  a  strange  set  of  men  in  Wales, 
called  bards.  These  sung  songs  and  told  stories  about  the  brave 
deeds  of  the  Welsh  princes  and  heroes.  The  people  loved  to  listen  to 
these  men,  for  their  tales  related  to  fierce  war  and  bloody  battles,  of 
which  such  rude  nations  are  ever  fond. 

6.  Some  of  these  bards  had  a  wonderful  gift  for  singing  and  story- 
telling. These  were  often  taken  into  the  castles  of  the  princes,  and 
here  they  led  a  merry  life,  between  singing  and  feasting.  In  order  to 
keep  up  their  influence  they  pretended  to  be  prophets,  and  both  the 
people  and  the  princes  believed  they  could  foretell  future  events. 
Perhaps,  too,  the  bards  believed  it  themselves,  for  nothing  is  more 
easy  than  self-decepiion.  At  all  events,  the  people  paid  them  the 
greatest  reverence. 

7.  There  is  nothing  so  troublesome  to  a  king  as  a  tribe  of  people 
maintaining  their  independence  in  his  neighborhood.  His  pride  is 
moriified,  his  indignation  roused,  by  seeing  people  thus  set  up  for 
themselves.  He  thinks  everybody  ought  to  bow  to  power,  and  feels 
toward  them  very  much  as  an  old  hunter  does  towards  a  family  of 

Ch.  CLII. — 1.  What  of  the  names  in  Wales  ?  2.  Their  language  ?  Of  what  stock  are 
Am  Welsh  people ?  3.  What  of  the  early  history  of  Wales?  The  ancient  inhabitants  ? 
4.  What  of  the  Saxons?     What  of  the  Welsh  princes?     5.  G.  What  of  the  bard;,? 


252  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

•wolves  or  foxes,  that  persist  in  living  among  the  rocks  near  him,  in 
spite  of  all  his  efforts  to  kill  them. 

8.  So  it  was  Avith  the  kings  of  England  with  regard  to  Wales. 
With  a  view  therefore  to  subdue  these  Welsh  wolves  and  foxes  of 
the  mountains,  they  sent  a  great  many  armies  against  them.  But 
the  mountaineers  were  too  cunning  to  be  caught,  until  about  the 
year  1285.  Edward  the  first  was  then  king  of  England,  and  Llewellyn 
prince  of  Wales. 

9.  The  bards  were  always  great  lovers  of  hard  fighting,  and  there- 
fore they  incited  the  Welsh  princes  to  the  boldest  deeds.  Llewellyn 
had  been  told  by  one  of  these  bards,  that  he  should  become  master  of 
the  whole  island  of  Britain. 

10.  Accordingly,  when  the  army  of  Edward  the  First  came  against 
him,  he  rashly  led  his  little  army  against  the  English,  and  was  de- 
feated and  slain.  He  was  succeeded  by  his  brother  David,  but  he 
too  was  taken  and  hung  on  a  gibbet,  for  the  crime  of  bravely  defend- 
ing his  country. 

11  King  Edward  was  very  angry  at  the  bards  for  stirring  up  the 
people  to  resist  his  arms.  He  therefore  caused  them  all  to  be  as- 
sembled and  put  to  death.  These  acts  did  not  make  the  king  a 
favorite,  but  the  next  king  was  born  in  Wales,  and  received  the  title 
of  Prince  of  Wales.  They  appear  to  have  liked  him  a  little  better. 
From  this  time,  the  eldest  son  of  the  king  of  England  has  been  called 
Prince  of  Wales. 

16.  Thus,  with  the  death  of  David,  ended  the  line  of  Welsh 
princes,  and  thus  ended  the  independence  of  Wales.  Since  that  time, 
the  Welsh  have  been  a  part  of  the  British  nation,  and  they  now 
weave  stockings  and  dig  coal  and  iron,  instead  of  fighting,  as' their 
fathers  did  in  the  times  of  Llewellyn. 


CHAPTER  CLIII.-EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

The  Story  of  Scotland. 

1.  The  first  inhabitants  of  Scotland  appear  to  have  been  Celts,  and 
probably  were  the  same  as  the  early  Britons,  Welsh,  and  Irish.  They 
defended  themselves  against  the  Romans,  who  could  never  subdue 
the  people  of  the  Highlands.  They  were  so  troublesome  that  the 
lloman  generals  caused  a  wall  to  he  built  from  the  Solway1  Frith  to 

he  river  Tyne. 

2.  Thus  the  Scots  were  shut  up  in  their  own  country,  like  a  herd 
of  unruly  cattle;  but  they  contrived'  to  get  over  the  wall  pretty  often. 

7.  What  is  very  troublesome  to  a  king?  8.  What  did  the  lungs  of  England  do  ?.  Who 
was  Prince  of  Wales  in  1235?  9.  What  did  the  hards  do?  What  did  one  of  them 
jell  Llewellyn  ?  10.  What  did  Llewellyn  do  ?  His  fate?  Who  defeated  him  ?  What 
of  his  brother  David?  11.  What  did  king  Edward  do  to  the  bards?  Where  was  the  next 
king  of  England  born  ?  12.  Since  when  have  the  Welsh  become  a  part  of  the  British 
nation?  What  of  the  Welsh  people  now?  Ch.  CLIII. — 1.  What  of  the  first  inhabitants 
of  Scotland  ?     What  did  the  Roman  generals  do  ? 


SCOTLAND. 


253 


Tn  three  or  four  hundred  years  after  Christ,  a  tribe  of  Goths,  called 
Picts,  came  over  from  the  continent,  and  settled  in  this  country. 
These  inhabited  the  Lowlands,  and  lived  by  agriculture.  The 
Scots  dwelt  in  the  mountains,  carrying  on  war,  and  subsisting  by  the 
chase. 


3.  Thus  the  nation  became  divided  into  Highlanders  and  Lowlan- 
ders,  and  thus,  to  some  extent,  the  people  remain  to  this  day.  They 
live  peaceably  now,  but  in  early  days,  they  quarrelled  very  fiercely,  I 
cannot  undertake  to  tell  you  of  their  battles,  and  indeed  we  know 
but  little  about  them. 

4.  In  839,  it  is  said  that  Kenneth  the  Second,  who  was  a  Highland 
leader,  subdued  the  Picts,  and  became  the  first  kins:  of  all  Scotland. 
From  his  time  to  Edward  the  First  of  England,  there  were  a  good 
many  sovereigns,  but  their  story  is  not  worth  repeating. 

5.  I  have  told  you  in  the  history  of  England,  how  Edward  Long- 
shanks,  the  same  that  subdued  Wales,  made  war  upon  the  Scotch, 
imprisoned  Wallace,  and  had  prepared  a  great  army  for  the  final 
subjugation  of  the  Scotland,  when  he  died.  I  have  told  you  how  his 
son,  Edwrrd  the  Second,  was  beaten  by  Robert  Bruce  at  the  glorious 
battle  of  Bannockburn.  This  event  occurred  in  1313,  and  secured 
the  freedom  of  Scotland,  which  had  been  threatened  by  the  English 
kings. 

6.  From  this  time  the  history  of  Scotland  tells  of  little  but  civil 
wars  and  bloody  battles  with  England,  till  the  time  of  James  the 
Fifth.  He  assumed  the  reins  of  government  in  1513,  at  the  age  ot 
thirteen  years.  He  lost  the  confidence  of  his  army,  and  they  deserted 
him  in  the  hour  of  need.  This  broke  his  heart,  and  he  starved  him- 
self to  death,  at  the  age  of  thirty-one. 

2.  What  of  the  Picts?  The  Scots?  3.  How  was  the  nation  divided  ?  How  did  they 
live  in  the  early  times  ?  4.  Who  was  king  of  Scotland  in  839  ?  5.  What  can  you  tell  ol 
Edward  Longshanks  ?  Of  Edward  II,?  When  was  the  battle  of  Bannockburn?  Iti 
effects?  6.  How  long  were  the  Scots  at  war  with  the  English  ?  When  did  James  V. 
begin  to  reign  ?     His  fate  ?  -_ 


254  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

7.  His  daughter  was  the  beautiful  and  unfortunate  Mary,  queen  oi 
Scots,  as  she  is  called,  and  whom  I  have  mentioned  in  the  history  or 
England.  She  was  educated  in  France,  and  was  not  only  very  hand- 
some, but  she  was  very  accomplished.  While  she  was  yet  a"  young 
lady,  she  was  taken  to  Scotland  and  became  queen. 

8.  But  beauty,  accomplishments,  and  power,  cannot  insure  happi- 
ness. Mary's  kingdom  was  in  a  state  of  great  trouble  ;  the  people 
were  divided  among  themselves,  and  Mary  found  it  impossible  to 
govern  them.  At  length,'  she  became  afraid  that  they  would  kill 
her,  and,  to  save  her  life,  she  set  out  for  England,  and  placed  herself 
under  the  protection  of  Elizabeth. 

9.  This  was  about  as  wjse  as  it  would  be  in  a  fly  to  seek  protection 
of  a  spider.  Elizabeth  treated  Mary  very  much  as  a  spider  would  a 
fly  who  falls  into  his  power.  She  caused  her  to  be  put  in  prison,  and 
finally  took  her  life. 

10.  The  son  of  Mary,  James  Sixth'  of  Scotland,  succeeded  his 
mother,  and  after  the  death  of  Elizabeth,  he  became  king  of  England 
also,  under  the  title  of  James  the  First.  Though  he  lived  in  Ens-land, 
he  did  not  forget  Scotland.  He  loved  learning,  and  caused  schools  to 
be  established  in  his  native  country,  where  all  the  boys  and  girls  might 
learn  to  read  and  write.  These  schools  are  continued  to  this  day, 
and  therefore  it  is  very  uncommon  to  meet  with  a  Scotchman  who  is 
not  a  fair  match  for  a  Yankee. 

11.  From  the  time  ofKing  James,  in  1603,  Scotland  has  been 
attached  to  the  British  crown.  She  has  sometimes  rebelled,  and  in 
the  cause  of  the  Stuarts  she  fought  a  good  many  battles.  But  for 
many  years,  Scotland  has  been  a  peaceful  portion  of  the  British 
kingdom. 


CHAPTER  CLIV.  -EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

About  Ireland. 

1.  The  history  of  Ireland,  or  "  Green  Erin,"  as  it  is  called,  is  fulJ 
of  interesting  matter,  and  I  am  sorry  that  I  can  only  bestow  upon 
it  one  brief  chapter.  The  first  inhabitants,  like  the  Britons,  were 
hard-fisted  Celts,  who  fought  with  clubs,  and  seemed  to  love  fighting 
better  than  feasting. 

2.  They  were  divided  into  many  tribes,  and  their  leaders  were 
called  kings.  These  were  constantly  quarrelling  with  each  other, 
and  thus  the  people  had  plenty  of  their  favorite  sport.  The  early 
Irish,  like  the  other  Celtic  tribes,  were  devoted  to  the  religion  of  the 
Druids,  but  about  the  year  430,  a  Christian  missionary  came  into  the 
country,  whose  name  was  Patrick. 

7.  9.  9.  Tel]  the  story  of  Mary  of  Scotland?  10.  Who  succeeded  Mary  ?  What  did 
James  do'  11.  What  of  Scotland  since  1603?  Ch.  CLIV.— 1.  What  is  Ireland  called  ? 
Who  were  its  first  inhabitants5  2.  What  of  the  Celts?  Religion  of  the  early  Irish? 
What  took  place  in  430  ? 


IRELAND.  255 

3.  He  seems  to  have  been  a  wise  and  good  man,  and  the  people 
liked  him  very  much.  la  thirty  yens  he  spread  Christianity  over  all 
Ireland,  and  under  its  influence  ilie  Irish  gradually  became  civilized. 
Patrick  lived  to  a  great  age,  but  at  length  he  was  buried  at  Doune. 

4.  When  he  was  gone,  the  people  told  pretty  large  stories  about 
nim,  and  finally  they  considered  him  more  holy  than  other  men,  and 
called  him  a  saint.  To  this  day,  they  regard  St.  Patrick  as  in  heaven, 
watching  over  the  interests  of  Ireland. 

o.  Among  the  curious  notions  still  entertained  by  the  Irish  with 
regard  to  St  Patrick,  is  this  In  Ireland  there  are  no  serpents  or 
venemous  reptiles,  and  the  people  firmly  believe  that  St.  Patrick  put 
an  end  to  them,  and  freed  the  island  from  them  all  for  ever  ! 

6.  In  the  time  of  jlenry  the  Second  of  England,  Ireland  was  con- 
quered,.and  since  that  period  has  been  under  the  English  kings.  It 
has,  however,  been  very"  ill  governed.  King  James  the  First  did 
something  towards  improving  the  condition  of  the  people,  but  neithei 
he  nor  any  subsequent  king  has  beeu  able  to  get  Si.  Patrick  out  of 
their  heads. 

7.  The  saint  was  a  Roman  Catholic,  and  the  greater  part  of  the 
people  are  Catholics  to  this  day.  They  are  dissatisfied  with  the  Eng- 
lish  government ;  and  well  they  may  be,  for  its  conduct  has  been  sel- 
fish, cruel,  and  unwise.  The  people  have  often  been  in  a  state  of  re- 
bellion, and  though  the  leaders  are  ever  crushed  by  the  power  of  the 
government,  still  others  rise  Up  to  head  the  people. 

8.  Thus  Ireland  has  been  for  years  in  an  almost  constant  state  of 
agitation.  Thousands  of  lives  have  been  lost  in  vain  attempts  to  obtain 
the  freedom  of  the  country.  In  1847,  it  was  visited  by  famine  and 
pestilence,  which  carried  off  a  million  of  the  inhabitants.  Since  that 
time  vast  emigrations  have  taken-  place;  and  the  country  seems  now 
slowly  rising  from  its  former  state  of  depression. 


CHAPTER  CLV.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Matters  and  Things. 

1.  I  have  now  told  you  something  about  England,  Wales,  Scotland, 
and  Ireland  ;  but  it  is  impossible  to  do  justice  to  so  great  a  subject,  in 
this  little  book.  I  have  told  you  something  about  the  kings,  and  the 
battles  that  have  been  fought. 

2.  But  there  are  a  great  many  interesting  stories  that  I  have  been 
obliged  to  omit.  If  I  had  time,  I  could  giv^you  a  more  particular 
account  of  the  Celtic  religion  taught  by  the  druids,  which  was  very 

3.  Whnt  of  Patrick?  What  influence  civilized  the  people  ?  4.  What  did  the  people 
think  of  Patrick?  How  do  they  consider  him?  How  do  they  honor  him?  5.  What 
cWious  notions  have  the  Irish  with  respect  to  St.  Patrick?  6.  When  was  Ireland  con 
qnered?  How  has  it  since  heen  governed  ?  What  of  king  James  I.  ?  7.  What  is  the  re- 
ligion of  Ireland.  Do  the  people  like  the  government  of  England?  What  excites  them  to 
rebellion  ?     S.  What  is  the  present  state  of  Ireland  ? 

22 


256 


SCHOOL   HISTORY. 


curious,  together  with  the  manners  of  these  Celts  in  other  respects, 
which  you  would  find  very  amusing.  "    • 

\l.  I  could  tell  you  of  Odin,  or  Woden,  the  Scandinavian  hero,  who 
established  a  strange  mythology,  which  pervaded  the  northern  nations 
of  Europe,  and  became,  for  a  time,  the  religion  of  some  of  the  inhabi- 
tants of  Britain.  I  could  tell  you  how  Christianity  was- introduced 
into  England,  sixty  years  after  Christ ;  and  how  at  first  the  people 
built  rude  churches  of  wood,  and  how  they  afterwards  constructed 
those  fine  Gothic  buildings  in  which  the  people  worship  now. 


Jin  English  church  in  very  early  times. 

4.  If  I  had  time,  I  could  tell  of  the  Gypseys,  a  strange  race  of 
people  to  be  found  in  most  countries  of  Europe,  but  particularly  in 
England,  Spain,  Hungary,  and  Bohemia ;  who  wander  from  place  ta 
place,  having  no  fixed  homes  ;  who  come  from  some  far  land,  but 
whether  from  Egypt  or  Asia,  none  can  tell ;  who  continue  from  age 
to  age  the  same,  while  the  nations,  among  which  they  wander,  rise 
and  fall,  flourish  and  decay. 

5.  If  I  had  time,  I  could  tell  you  some  curious  stories  about  a  fa- 
mous robber  by  the  name  of  Robin  Hood,  who  lived  in  the  woods,  and 
performed  strange  things.  I  could  also  tell  you  of  many  celebrated 
people  more  worthy  of  being  remembered  than  this  freebooter. 

6.  I  could  tell  you  of  Dr.  Watts,  who  wrote  that  beautiful  little 
book  entitled  Hymns  for  Infant  Minds;  a  work  which  has  given  more 
pleasure,  and  done  more  good,  than  all  the  battles  of  the  greatest 
conqueror  that  ever  lived. 

7.  I  could  tell  you  of  Hannah  More,  who  wrote  that  beautiful  story 
entitled  the  Shepherd  of  Salisbury  Plain  ;  of  Miss  Edgeworth,  who 
wrote  the  story  of  Frank;  and  Daniel  De  Foe,  who  made  up  that 
beautiful  fancy-story  called  Robinson  Crusoe. 

8.  It  would  be  very  pleasant  to  read  about  these  people  ;  they  seem 
like  friends  to  us,  and  we  should  like  to  know  Avhere  they  lived,  how 

Ch.  CLV. — 3.  Who  was  Woden  ?  What  did  his  mythology  become  .'  When  was  Chris- 
tianity introduced  into  England  !  4. .What  of  the  Gypseys?  Where  do  they  live  <  5.  Who 
was  Robin  Hood?  6.  What  of  Dr.  Watts  ?  7.  What  other  celebrated  writers  could  b« 
mentioned? 


EUROPE.  257 

they  looked,  and  what  adventures  they  met  with.  But  these  and 
other  matters  relating  to  the  history  of  that  beautiful  and  interesting 
country  from  which  our  forefathers  came,  I  must  leave  for  the  present. 

9.  I  have  then  only  to  add,  that  while  you  can  read  the  history  of 
the  British  nation  in  books,  you  can  best  study  the  character  and  man- 
ners of  the  people  at  home,  in  their  own  country.  An  Englishman  is 
very  agreeable  in  his  own  house ;  but  out  of  his  country,  he  is  too  of- 
ten disagreeable,  ill-mannered,  and  unreasonable. 

10.  The  Scotch  are  a  shrewd,  money-saving  race,  and  if  you  will 
go  to  their  wild  country,  and  pay  well  for  what  you  want,  you  will  be 
well  served.  If  a  Scotchman  leaves  his  own  country,  it  is  to  better 
his  fortune,  and  it  is  best  to  keep  out  of  his  way.  He  will  get  what 
he  can,  and  give  nothing.     He  will  then  go  home  and  laugh  at  you. 

11.  The  Irish  are  much  the  same,  wherever  they  may  be;  cheer- 
ful, witty,  and  generous.  They  live  for  to-day,  and  think  little  of  to- 
morrow. They  are  generally  without  education,  but  if  ignorant,  they 
are  better  than  most  other  ignorant  people.  Let  us  ever  treat  them 
kindly.  They  are  of  a  nation  possessing  fine  qualities,  but  injured  by 
ages  of  oppression.  Beside,  they  are  rapidly  improving  now,  and 
their  children  will  be  among  our  best  and  happiest  citizens. 


CHAPTER  CLVI.— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Review.      The  Dark  Ages.     Important  Inventions,  Sfc. 

1.  Such  is  my  brief  story  about  Europe.  I  hope  I  have  told  you 
enough  to  excite  your  curiosity,  and  lead  you  to  read  larger  works 
than  mine,  about  the  nations  I  have  mentioned.  You  will  find  the 
subject  very  interesting,  and  worthy  of  your  careful  study.  I  have 
room  now  only  to  mention  a  few  things  that  have  been  omitted  in  the 
progress  of  my  story. 

2.  You  will"  remember  that  Greece  "was  settled  before  any  other 
portion  of  Europe,  and  that  the  Greeks  became  a  polished  and  pow- 
erful people.  You  will  remember  thai  Rome  became  a  mighty  em- 
pire, and  extended  its  sway  over  nearly  all  parts  of  the  world  that 
were  then  known. 

3.  You  will  remember  that  four  or  five  hundred  years  after  Christ, 
the  Roman  empire  was  dismembered,  and  that  the  northern  tribes  cf 
Europe  spread  themselves  over  Spain,  Italy,  and  Greece.  Thus  the 
arts,  learning,  and  refinement,  which  had  been  cultivated  in  these 
countries,  were  for  a  time  extinguished,  and  all  Europe  was  reduced 
to  a  nearly  barbarous  state. 

4.  This  period  is  called  the  Dark  Ages,  because  the  nations  were 
generally  ignorant,  fierce,  and  barbarous.  So  things  continued,  till 
about  five  hundred  years  ago,  when  the  liijlit  of  learning  began  to  re- 

9.  WhrU  of  Englishmen?  10.  What  of  the  Scotch  ?  11.  What  of  the  Irish?  Ch.  CLVI 
—2.  Which  of  the  nations  of  Europe  was  first  settled?  What  of  Rome  ?  8.  What  hap 
pencd  four  or  five  hundred  years  after  Christ? 

O.J  * 


'258  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

turn.     Since  that  time,  society  has  advanced  in  civilization,  till  it  has 
reached  a  higher  state  of  improvement  than  was  ever  known  before. 

5.  The  history  of  the  church  of  Christ  is  a  subject  at  which  I  have 
been  able  only  to  take  an  occasional  glance.  After  our  Saviour's 
death,  in  the  year  33,  his  apostles  proceeded  to  spread  the  Gospel 
throughout  different  countries.  Paul  was  the  most  active  and  suc- 
cessful of  these  missionaries.  He  went  several  times  through  Asia 
Minor,  travelled  to  Greece,  and  finally  to  Rome  ;  everywhere  preach- 
ing the  tru  hs  of  the  Christian  religion.     He  died  at  Rome  A.  D.  61. 

6.  At  first,  the  Christians  were  persecuted  by  the  Roman  emperors, 
but  the  Gospel  continued  to  flourish,  until  it  pervaded  most  parts  of 
the  Ptoman  empire.  It  was  introduced  into  Britain  in  the  year  60, 
and  into  most  other  parts  of  Europe  at  an  early  period.  But  it  was 
not  till  the  year  306,  when  Constantine  adopted  it,  that  it  found  favor 
with  any  king  or  prince  in  Europe. 

7.  From  this  period  it  advanced  rapidly.  The  mythology  of 
Greece  and  Rome  gave  way  before  it.  .The  horrid  sacrifices  and 
gloomy  superstitions  of  the  druids  yielded  to  the  gentle  worship  of 
one  God,  and  the  mysterious  rites  of  Odin  were  forsaken  for  the  reli- 
gion of  the  Cross. 

S.  The  popes  of  Rome  succeeded  in  placing  themselves  at  the  head 
ri  the  christian  religion,  thereby  obtaining  a  controlling  influence  over 
mankind.  They  gradually  acquired  an  immense  power,  which,  mis- 
led by  the  spirit  of  the  time,  they  often  used  improperly. 

9.  In  process  of  time,  their  authority  was  lessened,  and  a  large  part 
i)f  the  people  of  Christendom  protested  against  their  authority,  and 
tvere  thence  called  Protestants.  At  the  present  day,  the  pope  of 
Rome  has  but  little  power,  and  the  catholic  church,  Which,  like  other 
religious  communities  in  the  dark  ages,  was  addicted  to  persecution, 
aas  ceased  thus  to  exercise  its  authority.  The  popes  of  modern  times 
nave  been  distinguished  for  their  piety. 

10.  I  have  mentioned  the  Inquisition,  in  the  history  of  Spain.  This 
was  a  secret  court,  whose  business  it  was  to  arrest  and  bring  to  trial 
those  who  were  suspected  of  not  being  true  followers  of  the  Catholic 
religion,  which  was  believed  to  be  tiie  only  sound  faith. 

11.  It  appears  that  this  institution  w,as  sanctioned  by  pope  Inno- 
cent III.,  in  the  year  1215.  From  that  time,  it  was  gradually  ex- 
tended, and  at  length  was  established  in  Spain,  1481.  Here  it  acquired 
great  power,  and  became  the  most  cruel  and  bloody  tribunal  on  earth. 

12.  It  was  for  many  years  a  favorite  instrument  by  which  the  pope 
of  Rome  carried  on  his  schemes  of  tyranny.  It  was  introduced  into 
inosi  countries  of  Europe  where  the  Catholic  religion  prevailed,  but 
in  no  country  did  it  exercise  its  terrible  power  with  such  cruel  despot- 
ism as  in  Spain.     It  was  not  finally  abolished  till  the  year  1820. 

4.  What  period  was  called  the  Dark  Ages  ?  How  long  is  it  since  learning  began  to  re- 
vive ?  5.  When  did  Christ  die  ?  What  of  the  Apostles?  Paul  ?  G.  How  did  the  Roniarai 
al  first  treat  the  Christians?  When  was  Christianity  introduced  into  Britain?  What  took 
place  in  308  ?  7.  What  of  the  progress  of  Christianity  ?  8.  What  of  the  popes?  9.  Whc 
were  called  Protestants?  What  of  the  pope  at  present ?  10  What  was  the  Inquisition  ? 
II  Bj  whom  sanctioned  ?  When?  When  established  in  Spain  ?  What  did  it  there  be 
'••line,  r      VI.   Where  was  it  introduced  ?    Where  was  its  power  most  cruelly  exercised  ' 


EUROPE.  259 

13.  I  have  not  had  an  opportunity  to  mention  the  abheys  and  mon' 
asteries  of  Europe.  These  curious  institutions,  however,  deserve  no- 
tice. It  appears  that  in  most  countries  there  have  ever  been  some 
people  who  retire  from  the  active  business  of  life,  and  shut  themselves 
up  for  religious  contemplation.  Such  has  been  the  case  in  Asia  ;  and 
among  the  worshippers  of  Brama,  Fo,  Lama,  and  Mahomet,  they  are 
still  found.  Such  was  also  the  case  among  the  idolaters  of  ancient 
Eijvpt,  Greece,  and  Rome.  Such  was  the  case  among  the  ancient 
Jews  and  such  has  been  the  case  among  the  believers  of  Christ,  from 
very  early  ages. 

14.  The  first  monastery  was  founded  by  St.  Anthony,  in  Upper 
Egypt,  A.  D.  305.  This  consisted  of  a  number  of  huts,  in  which  sev- 
eral hermits  dwelt,  devoting  themselves  to  penance  and  prayer. 
Another  monastery  was  established  in  France,  in  the  year  360,  by  St. 
Martin.  From  this  time,  these  institutions  were  multiplied,  and  be- 
came established  in  all  Catholic  countries.  From  the  eighth  to  the 
fifteenth  century,  they  received  great  encouragement,  and  many  splen- 
did edifices  were  erected  for  their  use. 

15.  Some  were  called  abbeys,  and  some  monasteries.  Many  of 
them  were  filled  with  monks  and  friars,  and  others  with  females, 
called  nuns.  The  splendid  remains  of  many  of  these  edifices  are  still 
to  be  found  in  England,  France,  Germany,  and  other  parts  of  Europe. 
At  first,  the  inhabitants  of  monasteries  lived  in  a  simple  manner,  and 
devoted  themselves  to  religious  contemplations.  But  in  after  times 
the  abbeys  and  monasteries  became  seats  of  voluptuousness.  None 
were  permitted  to  enter  them  but  the  monks  and  nuns ;  these,  there- 
fore, while  they  pretended  to  be  engaged  in  religious  duties,  screened 
from  the  eyes  of  the  world,  often  gave  themselves  up  to  luxurious 
pleasures.    • 

16.  These  institutions  were,  however,  greatly  encouraged  by  the 
popes;  and  it  was  not  until  the  corruptions  of  the  Catholic  religion 
brought  on  the  Reformation,  in  the  sixteenth  century,  that  monastic 
institutions  began  to  decline.  They  were  abolished  in  England  in 
1539,  and  in  France  in  1790.  In  several  other  countries  of  Europe 
they  have  ceased,  but  still  continue  in  Italy  and  Spain. 

17.  In  the  earlv  ages,  war  was  carried  on  without  guns  and  cannon. 
The  Greeks  and  Romans  were  armed  with  swords,  spears,  and  bat- 
tle-axes, and  they  carried  shields  for  defence.  The  troops  of  Egypt, 
Carthage,  and  Persia,  were  armed  in  a  similar  manner.  In  the  year 
1330,  gunpowder  was  invented,  and  cannon  be^an  to  be  used  about 
the  same  time.  They  were  first  employed  by  the  English  at  the  bat- 
tle of  Cressy,  in  1346.  On  that  occasion,  king  Edward  had  four  pieces 
of  cannon,  which  greatly  aided  in  gaining  the  victory. 

18.  From  this  time,  fire-arms  were  rapidly  introduced,  and  soon  the 

13.  What  appears  to  be  the  case  in  most  countries?  Mention  some  instances.  14.  Who 
f)unded  the  first  monastery  ?  When?  Of  what  did  it  consist?  When  and  by  whom  was  a 
monastery  established  in  r  ranee  ?  What  of  monasteries  from  this  time  ?  15.  Who  inhab- 
ited them?  How  did  the  monks  and  nuns  formerly  live  ?  How  in  later  times?  10.  By 
whom  were  these  institutions  encouraged  ?  When  did  monastic  Institutions  bepin  to  de- 
cline ?  When  were  they  abolished  in  England?  In  France?  Where  do  they  si  ill  exist? 
17.  What  of  war  in  early  times?  Arms?  When  was  gunpowder  invented  ?  When  wers 
cannon  6rst  used  by  the  English  ? 


200  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

whole  art  of  war  was  changed.  Bows  and  arrows,  spears  and  shields, 
were  thrown  aside,  and  contending  armies,  instead  of  coming  up 
close  to  each  other,  and  righting  face  to  face,  learned  to  shoot  each 
other  down  at  a  distance. 

19.  One  of  the  greatest  discoveries  of  modern  times  is  that  quality 
of  the  mariner's  compass  by  which  it  always  points  to  the  north  pole. 
This  useful  instrument,  which  enables  the  seaman  to  traverse  the 
trackless  deep,  appears  to  have  been  in  use  as  early  as  1180.. 

20.  But  a  still  more  important  invention  was  that  of  printing,  in 
1441.  Previous  to  that  time,  all  books  were  written  with  the  pen. 
A  copy  of  the  Bible  was  worth  as  much  in  ancient  times  as  a  good 
house  or  a  good  farm  is  now.  Of  course,  very  few  people  could  learn 
to  read  for  the  want  of  books.  If  Peter  Parley  had  lived  in  those 
times,  1  am  inclined  to  think  he  would  have  obtained  a  poor  living. 


CHAPTER  CLVIL— EUROPE  CONTINUED. 

Chronology  of  Europe. 

B.C. 

Greece  founded  by  Inachus 1856 

Athens  founded  by  Cecrops 1556 

Corinth  founded 1520 

Sparta  founded  by  Lelex 1516 

Thebes  founded  by  Cadmus 1500 

Argonautic  expedition 1263 

Twelve  States  of  Greece  unite 1257 

Siege  of  Troy 1193 

Phoenicians  trade  to  Spain,  about 900 

Homer  born  about 900 

Lycurgus  gives  laws  to  Sparta 884 

Building  of  Rome  by  Romulus 752 

Numa  Pompilius  made  king  of  Rome 715 

Tullus  Hostilius      "          "         "        672 

Solon  lawgiver  of  Athens 643 

Bias  the  Greek  philosopher  flourished 617 

The  Celts  settled  in  Bohemia 600 

Death  of  Tarquin,  and  his  family  expelled  from  Rome     .     .     .  509 

The  Carthaginians  make  conquests  in  Spain,  about   ....  500 

Tribunes  chosen  at  Rome 490 

Battle  of  Marathon 490 

Decemviri  chosen  at  Rome 451 

Peloponnesian  war  begins 446 


IS.  What  happened  from  this  time?  19.  What  is  a  great  discovery  of  modern  times  ? 
When  was  the  mariner's  compass  first  used  ?  .20.  When  was  printing  invented?  How  were 
hooks  formerly  made  ? 

Ch.  CL VII. — Let  the  teach  er  examine  the  pupil  carefully  in  the  Chronological  table  ; 
and  let  him  direct  the  pupil  to  tell  whut  events  trere  taking  place  in  Asia,  and  Africa, 
ivtiile  the  several  events  were  occurring  in  Europe, 


CHRONOLOGY.  261 

B.C. 

Censors  established  at  Rome 437 

Death  of  Pericles 429 

General  migration  of  Gauls  to  different  parts  of  Europe      .     .  397 

Italy  ravaged  by  the  Gauls  and  Rome  taken 396 

Battle  of  Leuctra 371 

Death  of  Epaminondas       363 

Theatres  established  in  Rome 361 

War  between  the  Romans  and  Samnites '343 

Battle  of  Cheronea - 338 

Death  of  Philip,  king  of  Macedon 336 

Death  of  Alexander,  king  of  Macedon 323 

Greece  subjected  by  Cassander 322 

Sundial  introduced  into  Rome 312 

Aqueducts  built  in  Rome 311 

The  Gauls  make  destructive  incursions  into  Macedon  and 

Greece 280  to  278 

Greece  invaded  by  the  Gauls 278 

All  Italy  submits  to  Rome 270 

First  Punic  war  begins 264 

Second  Punic  war  begins 218 

Spain  subjected  to  the  Roman  power 206 

A  colony  of  Belgae  settled  in  Gaul 200 

Greece  becomes  a  Roman  province      .........  146 

Carthage  destroyed 146 

Spain  becomes  a  province  of  Rome 134 

The  southern  part  of  Gaul  along  the  Mediterranean  conquered 

by  the  Romans 128  to  122 

Social  war  in  Greece  begins 91 

War  between  Marius  and  Sylla S8 

Pompey  defeats  Mithridates       63 

Triumvirate  formed  in  Rome 59 

France  invaded  by  Julius  Caesar 58 

Switzerland  subdued  by  Caesar 57 

Caesar  invades  Britain 55 

Battle  of  Pharsalia  and  death  of  Pompey 48 

Death  of  Caesar 44 

All  France  finally  conquered  by  the  B,omans ,  25 

Hungary,  anciently  Pannonia,  subject  to  the  Romans      «•    .    .  11 

A.D. 

Death  of  Augustus  Caesar,  emperor  of  Rome 14 

Tiberius  emperor  of  Rome  died 37 

Caligula  emperor  of  Rome  died 41 

England  finally  subdued  by  Claudius  a  Roman  general   ...  44 

Claudius  ascends  the  throne        54 

Nero  emperor  of  R.ome  died        54 

Christianity  introduced  into  England 60 

Hygenus,  first  bishop  of  Rome  who  took  the  title  of  pope    .     .  154 

Scotland  received  the  Christian  faith       203 

The  Romans  expelled  from  Germany       .........  290 


/ 


262  SCH.OOL    HISTORY. 

A.D. 

Constantine  began  to  reign 306 

Christianity  adopted  by  the  emperor  of  Rome       .     .     .     .     .  311 
Constantine  removes  the  seat  of  the  Roman  Empire  to  Con- 
stantinople       329 

Rome  divided  into  the  Eastern  and  Western  empire  by  Theodo- 

sius       395 

France  invaded  by  the  Goths  and  other  Germanic  tribes      .     .  400 

Rome  taken  by  Alaric 410 

Pharamond  a  Frank  becomes  first  king  of  France       ....  418 

Kingdom  of  the  Visigoths  founded  in  Spain 419 

Venice  founded 421 

Germany  conquered  by  the  Huns 432 

Hungary  possessed  by  the  Huns  under  Attila 433 

Italy  invaded  by  Attila 445 

The  Saxons  conquer  England 445 

Rome  taken  by  Odoacer 476 

Kingdom  of  Sweden  began 481 

Monarchy  of  France  established 486 

Goths  driven  from  Rome  by  Belisarius 537 

Patrick  visits  Ireland 550 

The  pope's  supremacy  over  the  Christian  church  established   .  607 

Custom  of  kissing  the  pope's  toe  introduced      ,     .     .     .     .     .  708 

Pi,oderick,  king  of  Spain,  defeated  by  the  Moors  \     .     .     .     .     .  712 

The  first  king  reigns  in  Denmark 714 

Gregory  III.,  founder  of  the  pope's  temporal  power,  became 

pope 731 

Pepin  the  Short,  first  of  ihe  Carlovingian  race  in  France     .     .  751 

The  pope's  temporal  power  established 755 

Charlemagne  began  to  reign  in  France 772 

Charlemagne  crowned  at  Rome 800 

Charlemagne  master  of  Germany 802 

Venice  becomes  an  independent  republic 803 

City  of  Venice  built 809 

Charlemagne  died 814 

Egbert  I.,  king  of  England 827 

Kenneth  II.,  first  king  of  Scotland 839 

Iceland  discovered  by  the  Norwegians 860 

Alfred  ascends  the  English  throne 872 

The  Danes  conquer  England 877 

Emperors  first  chosen  in  Germany 912 

Canute,  king  of  Denmark,  conquered  England 1016 

Danes  driven  out  of  England 1041 

Leo  IX.,  the  first  pope  that  kept  an  army 1054 

Henry  IV  ,  emperor  of  Germany 1056 

Harold  became  king  of  England 1066 

William  the  Conqueror  ascends  the  throne- of  England   .     .     .  1066 
Henry  IV.,  emperor  of  Germany,  obliged  to  stand  three  days  at 

the  pope's  gate 1077 

Pope's  authority  introduced  into  England 1079 


CHRONOLOGY.  263 

A.  D 

Peter  the  Hermit  heads  the  first  Crusade 1096 

Godfrey  of  Boulocne  takes  Jerusalem 1099 

Kingdom  of  Portugal  founded 1139 

Piichard  ascends  the  throne  of  England 1189 

Chivalry  at  its  height .* 1200 

Magna  Charta  granted  by  king  John 1215 

Last  Crusade  began 124S 

Oihman  first  emperor  of  Turkey 1268 

Rodolph  of  Hapsburg  governs  Austria 1273 

Wales  annexed  to  the  crown  of  England 1283 

Oth man  empire  founded 1299 

Residence  of  the  pope  removed  to  Avignon  in  France,  where  it 

remained  seventy  years 1308 

Battle  of  Bannockburn 1313 

Battle  of  Cressv 1346 

William  Tell  died 1354 

Battle  of  Poictiers 1356 

Norway  incorporated  with  Denmark 1397 

Battle  of  Agincourt 1420 

Joan  of  Arc  raises  the  siege  of  Orleans 142S 

The  Turks  conquer  the  Eastern  empire 1453 

Wars  of  York  and  Lancaster  began 1455 

The  Portuguese  discover  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope 14S1 

The  first  court  of  the  Inquisition  in  Spain 1481 

Richard  Crookback  king  of  England  died 1485 

America  discovered  by  Columbus 1492 

The  Moors  of  Granada  driven  out  of  Spain 1492 

The  Portuguese  discover  Brazil    ....         1501 

Reformation  commenced  by  Martin  Luther 1517 

Gustavus  Vasa  expelled  the  Danes  from  Sweden       ....  1525 

Rome  sacked  and  pope  Clement  imprisoned 1527 

Gustavus  Vasa  ascended  the  throne  of  Sweden 1528 

Pope's  residence  removed  a  second  time  to  Avignon  ....  1531 

Henry  VIII.  of  England  died 1547 

Bloody  Mary,  queen  of  England 1553 

The  first  czar  reigned  in  Russia 1553 

Elizabeth  ascended  the  throne  of  England 1558 

Masr-r^-re  of  the  Protestants  in  France 1572 

The  republic  of  Holland  founded 15S1 

Henry  the  IV.  ascended  the  throne  of  France 15S9 

James  I.  ascends  the  throne  of  England 1603 

Portugal  becomes  independent  of  Spain 1004 

Henry  IV.  of  France,  killed  by  Ravaillac,  a  Jesuit      ....  161f 

Gustavus  Adolphus  king  of  Sweden 161j 

The  Moors  finally  expelled  from  Spain 1620 

Charles  I.  ascends  the  throne  of  England 1625 

Battle  of  Luizen  and  death  of  Adolphus  Gustavus     ....  1633 
Civil  war  began  in  England  between  the  Cavaliers  and  Round- 
heads.   1642 


264  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

A.D. 

Charles  I.  beheaded 1649 

Cromwell  made  Lord  Protector  of  England 1654 

Charles  II.  king  of  England 1660 

Great  Plague  in  London 1665 

Great  Fire  in  London     ..* 1666 

The  Turks  lay  siege  to  Vienna 16S8 

William  and  Mary  crowned  in  England 16S9 

Peter  the  Great  begins  to  reign 1696 

Prussia  became  a  kingdom 1701 

Anne  ascended  the  throne  of  England 1702 

Peter  the  Great  defeats  Charles  XII.  at  Pultowa 1709 

Russia  becomes  an  empire 1721 

Peter  the  Great  died 1725 

Hungary  annexed  to  Germany 1739 

Lisbon  destroyed  by  an  earthquake 1755 

War  between  Austria,  Russia,  France,  and  Prussia    ....  1756 

George  III.  king  of  England 1760 

Partition  of  Poland 1772 

Kissing  the  pope's  toe  abolished 1773 

Political  influence  of  the  popes  ceased  in  Europe 17S7 

The  Bastile  at  Paris  destroyed 17S9 

Execution  of  Louis  XVI.,  king  of  France 1793 

Catherine  II.  of  Russia  died 1796 

Venice  attached  to  Austria 179S 

Switzerland  conquered  by  the  French 1798 

Napoleon  took  possession  of  E^ypt 1798 

Napoleon  gained  the  battle  of  Marengo    ........  1800 

Napoleon  created  emperor  of  France 1S04 

King  of  Portugal  removes  to  Brazil 1807 

Joachim  Murat  made  king  of  Sardinia 1808 

Napoleon  removes  Ferdinand  from  the  throne  of  Spain  .     .     .  1S03 

Austria  at  war  with  France 1809 

The  city  of  Moscow  burnt 1812 

Norway  transferred  to  Sweden 1814 

Inquisition  abolished  in  Portugal 1815 

Revolution  in  Portugal 1S20 

Inquisition  abolished  in  Spain 1S20 

George  IV.  made  king  of  England 1820 

Greece  rises  against  the  Turks 1821 

Death  of  Lord  Byron  at  Missilonghi 7  1824 

Alexander  emperor  of  Russia  dies 1S25 

Nicholas  ascends  the  throne  of  Russia       .     .     a     .     .     .     •     •  1825 

Massacre  of  the  Janizaries  in  Turkey 1826 

Battle  of  Navarino 1S27 

Accession  of  Otho  to  the  throne  of  Greece 1829 

William  IV.  ascended  the  throne  of  England 1S30 

Netherlands  divided  into  Holland  and  Belgium 1830 

Ferdinand  VII.,  king  of  Spain,  died           1833 

Revolution  in  France,       ...          .....       February  22d,  18-18 


AMERICA. 


267 


CHAPTER  CLVIIL— AMERICA. 

About  America.- 


1.  We  have  long  been  occupied  with  the  three  great  divisions  of 
Ae  eastern  continent,  Asia,  Africa,  and  Europe.  Let  us  now  leave 
these  countries,  cross  the  Atlantic,  and  come  to  our  continent  of 
Amtrica. 

2.  This  continent,  as  you  will  see  by  the  map,  consists  of  two 
parts,  North  and  South  America.  These  are  united  by  a  narrow 
strip  of  land  called  the  isthmus  of  Darien,  about  sixty  miles  in 
width;  at  the  narrowest  part  it  is  but  thirty-seven  miles.  This  vast 
continent  is  about  nine  thousand  miles  in  length,  and  is  nearly  equal 
in  extent  to  Asia.  The  whole  population  is  estimated  at  forty 
millions. 

3.  The  northern  part  of  America  is  excessively  cold.  Whether  it 
is  there  bounded  by  the  sea,  or  whether  it  extends  to  the  north  pole, 
we  cannot  tell.  Greenland,  the  coldest  inhabited  country  on  the 
globe,  was  formerly  considered  a  part  of  our  continent,  but  is  now 
thought  to  be  an  island. 

4.  The  countries  in  North  America,  are  the  island  of  Iceland, 
Greenland,  the  Polar  Regions,  inhabited  by  the  Esquimaux  and  other 
tribes  of  Indians,  British  America,  Russian  America,  the  United 
States,  Mexico,  and  Guatimala. 

5  Between  North  and  South  America  are  a  number  of  beautiful 
islands,  called  the  West  Indies.  South  America  is  divided  into 
Venezuela.  New  Grenada,  Equator.  Peru.  Bolivia,  Chili,  the  United 
Provinces,  Uruguay,  and  Paraguay.     These  are  republics.     Brazil  is 

Ch.  CLVIII. — -2.  What  does  the  continent  of  America  consist  of?     What  of  the  isthmui 
ofDarisn?     Extent  and  population  of  America  ?     3.  What  is  known  of  the  northern  part 
of  America?     What  of  Greenland  ?     4.   Countries   of  North   America?     5.   What   of  Ih 
West  Indies?     Divisions  of  Smith  America  ?     Brazil? 


2G8 


SCHOOL    HISTORY. 


a  province  of  Portugal ;  and  Patagonia,  at  the  southern  end  of  South 
America,  is  a  land  thinly  settled  by  uncivilized  tribes.  Guiana 
belongs  to  Great  Britain,  France,  and  Holland. 


View  in  the  Polar  Regions. 


6.  I  have  said  that  it  was  extremely  cold  at  the  northern  part  of 
North  America.  In  this  dreary  region,  no  trees  are  to  be  found,  no 
plants  flourish.  For  nine  months  in  the  year,  the  sea  is  frozen,  and 
scarcely  a  living  thing  is  able  to  dwell  there.  Even  in  summer, 
nothing  is  seen  but  now  and  then  a  lonely  white  bear,  or  a  solitary 
rein-deer  feeding  upon  moss. 

7.  As  you  proceed  south,  you  meet  with  a  few  willow  and  birch 
trees,  and  some  hardy  plants.  Still  farther  south,  the  vegetation  im- 
proves, wild  animals  become  abundant,  and  wild  birds  are  seen 
swimming  in  the  waters,  or  hovering  in  the  air. 

8.  Here  you  meet  with  tribes  of  Esquimaux  and  Chippewa  In- 
dians. When  you  get  to  Canada,  you  find  a  fruitful  country.  When 
you  get  as  far  south  as  the  United  States,  the  climate  becomes  pleas- 
ant. In  the  West  Indies,  around  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  and  throughout 
all  the  northern  parts  of  South  America,  the  climate  is  that  of  perpet- 
ual spring  or  summer. 

9.  As  you  go  farther  south,  it  grows  cold,  and  when  you  get  to 
Cape  Horn,  you  will  find  it  a  frozen  country,  where  winter  reigns 
three-fourths  of  the  year.  The  wild  animals  of  America  are  very 
numerous.  The  bison,  wild  goat,  wild  sheep,  antelope,  many  kinds 
of  deer,  several  kinds  of  bears,  wolves,  foxes,  and  many  smaller 
quadrupeds,  together  with  birds  of  many  kinds,  are  natives  of 
America. 

6.  What  of  the  northern  part  of  Norlh  America  ?  7.  What  of  vegetation  as  you  proceed 
louth  ?  8.  What  of  Indian  tribes  ?  What  of  the  climate  as  you  proceed  south  to  the  north 
uf  South  America?     9.  What  of  Cape  Horn  ?     Animals  of  America  ?     Birds? 


AMERICA.  269 

10.  Most  of  our  domestic  animals  were  not  found  here  when  the 
country  was  first  discovered.  It  is  said  that  the  Newfoundland  dog, 
and  one  or  two  other  species,  are  natives  of  this  country.  But  our 
domestic  cattle,  all  our  breeds  of  sheep,  our  horses,  asses,  mules, 
goats,  hens,  and  cats,  were  originally  brought  from  Europe.  The 
domestic  turkey,  goose,  and  duck,  are  native  birds. 

11.  The  people  of  America  may  be  divided  into  two  great  classes. 
First,  the  Indians,  who  were  found  scattered  throughout  the  American 
continent  when  it  was  first  discovered.  They  consisted  of  many 
tribes,  living  seperately,  and  speaking  different  languages.  And 
second,  the  descendants  of  the  Europeans  who  have  come  to  this 
country  at  various  times,  and  settled  here.  To  these  we  mi^ht  add 
several  millions  of  negroes,  who  have  been  brought  from  Africa  as 
slaves,  or  their  descendants. 

12.  America  is  remarkable  for  three  things:  it  has  the  largest 
lakes,  the  longest  rivers,  and  the  longest  chain  of  mountains  to  be 
found  in  the  world.  The  largest  lake  is  Lake  Superior,  the  longest 
river  is  the  Mississippi,  the  longest  chain  of  mountains  is  that  which 
extends  nearly  the  whole  length  of  the  continent,  being  called  the 
Andes  in  South  America,  the  Cordilleras  in  Gfuatilmala  and  Mexico, 
and  the  Rocky  Mountains  in  the  United  States. 


CHAPTER  CLIX. -AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

The  first  Inhabitants  of  America. 

1.  When  we  look  around  us,  and  see  such  fine  cities  as  Boston, 
New- York,  Philadelphia,  Baltimore,  New  Orleans,  Louisville,  and 
Cincinnati  ;  when  we  see  the  whole  country  dotted  all  over  with 
towns,  cities,  and  villages,  we  can  hardly  believe  that  three  hundreu 
and  fifty  years  ago,  our  whole  continent  of  America  was  unknown  to 
the  inhabitants  of  Europe,  Asia,  and  Africa. 

2.  Such,  however,  was  the  fact.  The  country  was  indeed  inhab- 
ited by  many  tribes  of  Indians,  but  these  people  had  no  books,  and 
knew  nothing  of  the  rest  of  the  world.  Where  they  came  from  or 
when  they  first  settled  in  America,  no  one  can  tell. 

3.  It  appears  that  the  northern  portions  of  North  America  are  in- 
habited by  a  race  of  people  called  Esquimaux.  These  differ  from 
all  the  other  Indians,  and  bear  a  close  resemblance  to  the  Laplanders. 
It  seems  likely,  therefore,  that  these  polar  regions  were  settled  by 
people  who  came  from  Europe  in  boats,  many  centuries  since. 

4.  That  such  a  thing  is  possible,  appears  from  the  fact  that  the 
Norwegians  are  known  to  have  discovered  Iceland,  in  the  eighth 
century,  and  that  they  actually  made  settlements  in  Greenland  in  the 

10.  What  animals  were  found  here?  What  of  cattle  ?  Native  Birds?  II.  Describe 
the  two  clashes  of  people  in  America?  12.  For  what  is  America  remarkable?  In, 
CLIX.— 1.  What  of  America  three  hundred  and  filly  years  ago?  2.  What  of  the  Indiaut? 
3.    The  Eanuimaux  ?     What  seems  probable  ? 

23  * 


270  SCHOOL    HISTORY 

ninth  century.  It  appears,  then,  that  portions  of  America  we*-} 
actually  visited  by  these  northern  Europeans,  who  possessed  no  other 
than  small  vessels,  and  little  knowledge  in  the  arts  of  navigation. 


Esquimaux  Indians. 

5.  But  how  did  the  other  Indians  get  to  this  country?  If  you  will 
look  on  a  map  of  the  Pacific  Ocean,  you  will  see,  at  the  northern 
part,  that  America  and  Asia  come  very  close  together.  They  are 
separated  only  by  Behring's  Straits,  which  are 'but  eighteen  miles 
wide. 

6.  Across  this  narrow  channel,  the  people  of  the  present  day, 
living  in  the  neighborhood,  are  accustomed  to  pass  in  their  little 
boats.  There  is  reason  to  believe,  then,  that  many  ages  since,  some 
of  the  Asiatic  tribes  of  Tartars  wandered  to  Behring's  Straits  and 
crossed  over  to  America.  These  may  have  been  numerous,  and  con- 
sisting of  different  tribes;  a  foundation  may  thus  have  been  laid  for 
the  peopling  of  the  American  continent. 

7.  That  such  was  the  fact,  there  is  little  reason  to  doubt.  There 
is  considerable  resemblance  between  the  American  Indians  and  some 
Asiatic  tribes,  and  they  appear  to  possess  some  singular  customs 
known  in  Asia.  Thus  it  would  seem  that  Asia,  which  furnished  the 
first  inhabitants  of  Africa  and  Europe,  also  supplied  this  continent 
with  the  first  human  beings  that  trod  its  shores. 

4.  What  of  the  Norwegians?  6.  What  straits  separate  Asia  and  America?  Thcif 
width  ?  G.  What  is  there  reason  to  believe  ?  7.  Whom  do  our  Indians  resemble  ?  How 
was  America  probably  first  peopled? 


AMERICA. 


271 


CHAPTER  CLX.-AMERICA  CONTINUED 

Discovery  of  America  by  Columbus. 


Picture  of  one  of  the  Vessels  of  Columbus. 

1.  It  has  been  conjectured  that  the  ancient  Carthaginians  discovered 
South  America,  and  made  settlements  there.  But  this  is  very  un- 
likely; if  it  was  the  case,  the  event  had  been  forgotten  for  two  or 
three  thousand  years.  It  appears  probable,  that  the  first  inhabitant 
of  the  Old  World,  who  gave  any  information  of  what  was  called  the 
New  World,  was  Christopher  Columbus.  He  may  therefore  fairly 
be  called  the  discoverer  of  America. 

2.  This  illustrious  person  was  born  at  Genoa,  in  Italy,  in  1442.  As 
he  grew  up,  he  paid  great  attention  to  the  study  of  geography.  The 
idea  entered  his  mind,  that  there  must  be  vast  tracts  of  undiscovered 
country,  somewhere  on  the  face  of  the  broad  ocean. 

3.  Columbus  was  poor,  and  had  not  the  means  of  sailing  in  search 
of  these  unknown  lands.  He  applied  for  assistance  to  the  rulers  of 
his  native  country;  but  they  refused  it.  He  next  went  to  Portugal , 
but  there  he  met  with  no  better  success. 

4.  At  last,  he  came  to  the  court  of  Spain.  Ferdinand  and  Isabella 
were  king  and  queen  of  that  country.  The  king,  like  almost  every- 
body else,  treated  Columbus  with  neglect  and  scorn. 

5.  But  the  queen  thought  so  favorably  of  his  project,  that  she  sold 
her  jewels  to  defray  the  expenses  of  the  voyage.  Three  small  vessels 
were  equipped  with  ninety  men,  and  with  provisions  for  one  year. 
Columbus  took  the  command,  and  sailed  from  Spain  on  the  3rd  of 
August,   1402. 


Ch  CLX. — 1.  What  has  been  conjectured?  What  of  Christophar  Columbus?  2. 
When  and  where  was  he  born?  Tell  the  story  of  Columbus  till  the  time  wlieu  he  set 
sail  f 


272  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

6.  He  first  held  his  course  southward,  and  touched  at  the  Canary 
Islands.  Thence  he  steered  straight  towards  the  west.  After  a  few 
weeks,  his  men  became  alarmed.  They  feared  they  should  never 
again  behold  their  native  country,  nor  any  land  whatever,  but  should 
perish  in  the  trackless  sea. 

7.  Columbus  did  his  utmost  to  encourage  them.  He  promised  to 
turn  back,  if  land  were  not  discovered  within  three  days.  On  the 
evening  of  the  last  day,  at  about  ten  o'clock,  he  looked  from  the  deck 
of  his  vessel,  and  beheld  a  light  gleaming  over  the  sea.  He  knew 
that  this  light  must  be  on  land.  '  In  the  morning  an  island  was  seen, 
to  which  Columbus  gave  the  name  of  St.  Salvador. 

S.  This  is  one  of  the  Bahama  Islands.  The  natives  thronged  to 
the  shore,  and  gazed  with  wonder  at  the  three  ships.  Perhaps  they 
mistook  them  for  living  monsters,  and  thought  that  their  white  sail's 
were  wings. 

9.  Columbus  clothed  himself  magnificently,  and  landed  with  a 
drawn  sword  in  his  hand.  His  first  act  was  to  knell  down  and  kiss 
the  shore.  He  then  erected  a  cross,  as  a  symbol  that  Christianity 
was  now  to  take  the  place  of  paganism.  He  declared  the  island  to 
be  the  property  of  queen  Isabella.  He  then  visited  other  islands, 
and  returned  to  Spain,  giving  an  account  of  the  wonderful  things  he 
had  seen.  He  made  a  second;  but  it  was  not  till  his  third  voyage 
that  he  discovered  the  continent  of  America. 

10.  No  sooner  had  Columbus  proved  that  there  really  was  a  new 
world  beyond  the  sea,  than  several  other  navigators  made  voyages 
thitherward.  Americus  Vespucius,  a  native  of  Florence,  came  here 
and  contrived  to  have  the  whole  continent  called  by  his  name. 

11.  By  degrees,  discoveries  were  made  along  the  whole  coast  of 
North  and  South  America.  People  came  from  various  nations  of 
Europe,  and  formed  settlements  there.  In  relating  the  history  of 
these  settlements,  I  shall  begin  with  the  most  northerly,  although 
the  earliest  colonies  were  planted  in  the  tropical  regions. 


CHAPTER  CLXI.-AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

A  feiv  words  about  Iceland  and  Greenland.     Settlements 
of  the  French  in  America. 

1.  I  have  already  told  you  that  the  island  of  Iceland  was  discovered 
by  a  Norwegian  pirate,  in  S60.  After  this,  the  Norwegians  sent 
people  to  settle  there.  It  is  a  cold,  dreary  country,  and  there  is  a 
terrible  mountain  in  the  island,  called  Hecla,  which  sometimes  sends 
out  fire,  smoke,  and  ashes,  and  shakes  the  whole  island  with  its 
frightful  rumblings. 

6.  Which  way  did  he  first  steer  his  course  ?  What  of  his  men  ?  7.  How  did  Colunhus 
encourage  them  ?  What  laud  was  first  discovered?  S.  What  of  the  people  ?  9.  What 
did  Columhus  now  do?  10.  What  of  Americus  Vespucius?  U.  What  of  other  discoveries  ? 
Cfl.   CLXI—  1.  Wheu  was  Iceland  discovered  ?     What  of  it  ?     Mt.  Hecla  ? 


AMERICA 


273 


2.  But  still  the  inhabitants  increased,  and  Christianity  was  intro- 
duced in  981.  From  that  time  to  the  present,  they  have  continued  a 
quiet,  honest  set  of  people.  Their  number  is  now  fifty  thousand,  and 
they  are  under  the  government  of  Denmark.  Greenland  was  dis- 
covered about  the  same  time  as  Iceland,  and  settled  soon  after. 


Hecla,  a  volcanic  mountain  in  Iceland. 

3.  The  colony  continued  to  flourish  till  the  year  140S.  At  this 
time,  the  winter  was  so  severe  as  to  block  up  the  sea,  and  since  that 
time  nothing  has  been  known  of  the  colony  of  settlers.  It  is  proba- 
ble they  all  perished  long  since.  This  settlement  was  on  the  northern, 
part  of  Greenland.  Another  colony  was  settled  in  the  southwestern 
part  of  Greenland  ;  this  continues  to  the  present  day,  but  the  inhab- 
itants are  few  in  number.  Most  of  them  are  native  Esquimaux  ;  the 
rest  are  the  descendants  of  the  Norwegian  settlers. 

4.  The  portion  of  America  which  is  now  under  the  government  of 
Great  Britain,  consists  of  Nova  Scotia,  New  Brunswick,  Newfound- 
land, Upper  and  Lower  Canada,  and  New  Britain. 

5.  All  these  provinces  together  compose  a  tract  of  country  equal  in 
extent  to  the  United  States.  They  are  bounded  north  by  the  Arctic 
Sea  and  Baffin's  Bay,  east  by  the  Atlantic,  south  by  the  United  States, 
and  west  by  Russian  America  and  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

6.  The  first  people  who  formed  settlements  in  America,  to  the 
northward  jof  the  present  limits  of  the  United  States,  were  the  French. 
Nearly  three  hundred  years  ago,  they  were  in  the  habit  of  sending 
fishing-vessels  to  this  coast. 

7.  In  1524,  a  Frenchman,  named  James  Cartier,  sailed  up  the  St. 
Lawrence  and  built  a  fort,  in  which  he  passed  the  winter.     Settle- 

2.  When  was  Christianity  introduced  into  Iceland?  People?  What  of  Greenland? 
Colony  at  Greenland?  When  was  i(  last  heard  of?  Colony  in  the  south  ?  The  puopie  ? 
4.  What  does  Briti>h  America  consist  of  ?  5.  How  large  is  it  ?  Boundaries?  6.  What 
of  the  French?    7    Whal  u  ■•-  done  hi  l-ril  ? 


274  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

ments  were  soon  after  formed  in  Canada  and  Nova  Scotia.  King 
Henry  the  Fourth  of  France  appointed  the  Marquis  de  la  Roche  to  be 
governor-general  of  Canada  and  the  neighboring  territories. 

8.  The  city  of  Quebec  was  founded  in  the  year  1608.  It  stands  on 
the  river  St.  Lawrence,  about  five  hundred  miles  from  the  sea.  Its 
foundation  is  on  a  rock  of  marble  and  slate. 

9.  The  French  settlers  were  on  very  friendly  terms  with  the  In- 
dians. They  purchased  the  furs  which  the  red  men  obtained  in  their 
hunting  expeditions.  These  were  sent  to  Europe,  and  sold  at  a  great 
profit.     Some  of  the  French  were  married  to  Indian  wives. 

10.  When  the  English  began  to  form  settlements  to  the  southward 
of  Canada,  the  French  incited  the  savages  to  make  war  upon  them. 
Parties  of  French  and  Indians  would  sometimes  come  from  Quebec 
or  Montreal,  and  burn  the  New  England  villages.  The  inhabitants 
were  killed,  or  carried  captive  to  Canada. 

11.  In  1629,  Sir  David  Keith,  a  British  officer,  took  Quebec  ;  but  it 
was  afterwards  restored  to  the  French.  The  people  of  New  England 
made  several  attempts  to  get  it  back  again. 

12.  In  1711,  the  British  government  sent  a  strong  fleet  up  the  St. 
Lawrence,  under  the  command  of  Admiral  Sir  Hovender  Walker. 
There  was  an  army  of  seven  thousand  men  on  board  the  ships. 

13.  If  they  had  landed  in  safety,  they  would  probably  have  suc- 
ceeded in  taking  Quebec.  But  when  they  were  entering  the  river, 
the  vessels  became  involved  in  a  fog.  A  strong  wind  began  to  blow, 
and  drove  eight  or  nine  of  them  upon  the  rocky  shore. 

14.  The  next  morning,  the  French  found  the  dead  bodies  of  a  thou- 
sand men  in  scarlet  coats,  heaped  among  the  rocks.  These  were  the 
drowned  English  soldiers.  This  sad  event  caused  the  English  to  give 
up  the  design  of  conquering  Canada. 


CHAPTER  CLXII.-AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

The  French  Colonies  conquered  by  the  English. 

1.  Whenever  tnere  was  a  war  between  France  and  Old  England, 
taere  was  likewise  a  war  between  New  England  and  the  French  pro- 
vinces in  America.  The  French  built  strong  fortresses,  and  the  Eng- 
lish, or  Americans  made  great  efforts  to  take  them. 

2.  The  French  had  carefully  fortified  the  city  of  Louisbourg,  on  the 
island  of  Cape  Breton.  In  1745,  the  New  England  people  formed  a 
project  of  taking  it.  They  raised  a  strong  army,  and  gave  the  com- 
mand to  a  Boston  merchant,  named  William  Pepperell. 

Who  was  appointed  governor  of  Canada  ?  8.  When  and  where  was  Quebec  founded? 
9.  What  of  the  French  and  Indians  ?  10.  In  what  way  were  the  English  treated  by  them? 
11.  When  and  by  whom  was  Quebec  taken  ?  12.  13.  14.  What  was  done  in  1711?  Give 
an  account  of  the  expedition.  What  was  the  object  of  it?  Ch.  CLXII. — 1.  What  waf 
the  consequence  of  a  war  between  France  and  England  ?  2.  Where  was  Louisbourg 
What  was  done  in  1745  ? 


AMERICA. 


175 


3.  The  army  sailed  under  the  escort  of  an  English  fleet  and  landed 
on  the  island  of  Cape  Breton.  General  Pepperell's  men  were  merely 
farmers  and  mechanics;  and  he  himself  knew  but  liule  about  taking 
fortresses. 

4.  But  if  the  New  Englanders  bad  no  skill,  they  had  plenty  of  cour- 
age. They  erected  batteries,  and  cannonaded  the  city  for  about  a  fort- 
night ;  and  then  the  French  commander  hauled  down  his  flag.  The 
conquest  of  Louisbourg  was  considered  a  very  brillant  exploit. 

5.  Louisbourg  was  restored  to  the  French,  at  the  close  of  the  war 
But  it  was  again  taken  by  general  Wolfe,  in  1758.  The  same  gen- 
eral soon  afterwards  led  an  army  against  Quebec. 

6.  This  city  was  so  strongly  fortified,  that  it  appeared  almost  im- 
possible to  take  it.  It  had  a  citadel,  which  was  built  upon  a  rock, 
several  hundred  feet  high  ;  and  there  were  strong  walls  all  round  the 
city.  And  besides  the  French  garrison  within  the  walls,  there  was  a 
large  French  army  on  the  outside. 

7.  But  general  Wolfe  was  determined  to  take  Quebec,  or  lose  his 
life  in  the  attempt.  After  trying  various  other  methods,  he  led  his 
army  from  the  shore  of  the  river  up  a  steep  precipice.  When  they 
reached  the  top,  they  were  on  a  level  with  the  walls  of  Quebec. 

8.  This  bold  movement  was  performed  in  the  night.  As  soon  as 
the  Marquis  de  Montcalm,  who  commanded  the  French  army,  heard 
of  it,  he  marched  to  meet  the  British.  A  battle  was  begun  imme- 
diately. 

9.  General  Wolfe  put  himself  at  the  head  of  his  troops,  and  led 
them  bravely  onward.  Though  he  had  received  two  wounds,  he  re- 
fused to  quit  the  field.  At  last,  a  ball  struck  him  in  the  body,  and 
stretched  him  on  the  ground. 

10.  A  few  of  his  soldiers  carried  him  to  the  rear.  But,  though  the 
hand  of  death  was  on  him,  general  Wolfe  thought  only  of  the  battle 
that  was  raging  around.  He  heard  a  voice  shouting,  "  They  flee  ! 
They  flee  !"  and  he  asked  who  it  was  that  fled. 

11.  "  It  is  the  French  !"  said  one  of  his  attendants.  "They  are 
beaten  !  The  victory  is  ours  !"  A  glad  smile  appeared  on  the  gen- 
eral's face.     "  Then  I  die  happy  !"  he  cried,  and  expired. 

12.  The  victory  was  complete.  The  Marquis  de  Montcalm  was 
mortally  wounded.  In  a  few  days  after  the  battle,  Quebec  was  sur- 
rendered. The  whole  province,  and  all  the  French  possessions  in  the 
nonh,  soon  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  British. 

13.  They  have  ever  since  continued  under  the  British  government. 
When  the  other  American  territories  of  Great  Britain  became  inde- 
pendent, these  old  French  colonies  continued  attached  to  the  crown 
of  Britain. 


De«cribe  the  capture  of  Louisbourg.  5.  When  was  it  restored  to  the  French  ?  Wh«n 
taken  by  general  Wolfe  ?  6.  Describe  the  capture  of  Quebec.  8.  Who  commanded  tin 
French  arrny  ?  9.  Describe  general  Wolfe's  death.  12.  Consequence  of  the  victoiy  ' 
French  po«se9si4  a».     13.  To  what  are  the  old  French  colonies  attached  ? 


276  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  CLXIII.-AMERICA  CONTINUED 

Description  of  the  United  States. 

1.  We  have  been  travelling  all  about  the  world,  but  we  have  now 
got  home  again.  We  have  been  reading  about  countries  where  there 
are  kings  and  emperors,  but  we  have  now  come  to  a  land  where  the 
people  govern  themselves  in  their  own  way,  and  get  along  very  well 
without  any  king  or  emperor. 

2.  We  have  been  listening  to  the  story  of  nations  who  are  governed 
by  despots  and  tyrants  ;  let  us  now  hear  what  can  be  said  about  a 
land  of  freedom.  Let  us,  in  the  first  place,  go  to  a  map;  for  the 
first  step  in  studying  the  history  of  a  country,  should  be  to  learn  its 
situation,  boundaries,  shape,  rivers,  mountains,  &c. 

3.  The  United  States,  then,  are  bounded  on  the  north  by  the  British 
possessions,  east  by  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  south  by  the  Gulf  of  Mexico 
and  the  states  of  Mexico,  and  west  by  the  Pacific  Ocean.  The  whole 
country  is  about  two  thirds  as  extensive  as  all  Europe,  and  contains 
about  fifteen  millions  of  inhabitants. 

4.  Not  more  than  half  of  this  vast  country  is  settled.  The  whole 
western  portion  is  unoccupied,  or  thinly  scattered  over  with  Indian 
tribes.  The  United  States  are  divided  into  thirty  states,  each 
having  a  governor,  and  a  legislature  to  make  laws.  The  whole  are 
united  under  a  national  government,  over  which  a  president  is  placed 
as  the  chief  ruler. 

5.  The  United  States  are  frequently  spoken  of  under  four  sections. 
The  Northern,  Eastern,  or  New  England  states,  are  Maine,  New 
Hampshire,  Vermont,  Massachusetts,  Rhode  Island,  and  Connecticut. 
The  Middle  states  are  New  York,  New  Jersey,  Pennsylvania,  Dela- 
ware, and  Maryland.  The  Southern  states  are  Virginia  North  Car- 
olina, South  Carolina.-  Florida.  Georgia,  Alabama,  Mississippi, 
Louisiana,  and  Texas.  The  Western  states  are  Arkansas,  Tennessee, 
Kentucky,  Missouri,  Illinois.  Indiana,  Ohio,  Michigan,  Iowa,  and 
Wisconsin,  to  which  we  must  nowr  add  California. 

6.  The  United  States  are  favored  by  a  great  many  fine  rivers,  flow- 
ing through  fertile  valleys.  There  are  many  mountains,  but  none  are 
so  lofty  as  the  Andes  of  South  America,  the  Alps  of  Europe,  or  the 
Himlaya  mountains  of  Asia.  The  climate  of  the  north  is  temperate, 
and  the  soil  yields  apples,  pears,  peaches,  and  other  fruits.  In  the 
isouth  it  is  warm,  and  oranges,  figs,  and  lemons  flourish. 

Ch.  CLXIII.— 1.  Whatof  the  people  of  the  United  States?  3.  Boundaries  of  the  Uni 
led  States  ?  Extent?  Population?  How  large  a  portion  is  settled?  What  of  the  go  r> 
eminent?  5.  Divisions  of  the  United  States?  6.  Face  of  the  country  ?  Climate?  Soi  * 
Productions  ? 


rt  3  t,    g i:h/sBj4        /W     ^ 


s-Hf-f    ^     -V'-ls  '-4+r  ■^-r"77 


24 


078  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  CLXIV.— AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

Settlement  and  Colonial  History  of  New  England. 

1.  Before  speaking  of  the  United  States  as  one  whole  country,  I 
must  give  a  brief  account  of  the  settlements  of  the  several  colonies 
I  shall  begin  with  New  England,  because  that  section  of  the  Union 
is  the  most  northerly,  though  not  first  settled. 

2.  New  England,  as  I  have  said,  contains  the  states  of  Maine,  New 
Hampshire,  Vermont,  Massachusetts,  Rhode  Island,  and  Connecticut. 
It  is  bounded  north  by  Lower  Canada,  east  by  New  Brunswick  and 
the  Atlantic  Ocean,  south  by  the  Atlantic  and  Long  Island  Sound, 
and  west  by  New  York. 

3.  In  the  year  1620,  a  ship  called  the  Mayflower  arrived  on  the 
coast  of  New  England.  On  board  of  this  vessel  were  a  number  of 
ministers,  and  pious  men  and  women.  They  had  brought  their  chil- 
dren with  them,  for  they  never  expected  to  return  to  their  native  land. 

4.  They  had  been  driven  from  England  by  persecution,  and  they 
had  come  to  this  dreary  wilderness,  in  order  to  worship  God  accor- 
ding to  their  own  consciences.  It  was  in  the  cold  wintry  month  of 
December,  when  the  Mayflower  anchored  in  the  harbour  of  Plymouth. 
The  people  went  on  shore,  and  the  rock  on  which  they  landed  has 
ever  since  been  considered  sacred. 

5.  They  went  to  work  and  built  themselves  some  poor  huts.  At 
first,  they  met  with  great  difficulties  and  hardships.  Many  of  them 
fell  sick  and  died.  The  survivors  were  often  in  want  of  food,  and 
were  forced  to  dig  for  shellfish  on  the  sea-shore. 

6.  In  addition  to  their  other  troubles,  the  wild  Indians  sometimes 
threatened  to  attack  them.  But  the  Pilgrims  were  as  brave  and  pa- 
tient as  they  were  pious.  They  put  their  trust  in  God,  and  steadily 
pursued  their  design  of  making  a  permanent  settlement  in  the  country. 

7.  Soon  after  this  settlement  at  Plymouth,  other  companies  of  reli- 
gious persons  came  to  different  parts  of  New  England.  ■  Some  settled 
at  Salem,  and  others  at  Boston.  Thus  a  good  many  English  people 
were  established  in  the  country.  In  the  year  1 635,  sixty  men,  women, 
and  children,  journeyed  from  Massachusetts  to  Connecticut,  to  make 
a  settlement  there. 

8.  They  went  through  the  woods  on  foot,  and  drove  their  cattle 
before  them.  At  night,  they  lay  down  to  sleep,  with  no  shelter  buv 
the  boughs  of  the  trees.  When  they  reached  the  Connecticut  river, 
they  began  to  build  Windsor,  Hartford,  and  other  towns.  These 
were  the  first  settlements  in  Connecticut. 

9.  In  1636,  a  pious  minister,  named  Roger  Williams,  was  banished 
from  Massachusetts.  He  went  to  Rhode  Island,  and  settled  at  Provi- 
dence. This  good  man  was  a  great  friend  of  the  Indians,  and  they 
had  a  strong  affection  for  him. 

Ch.  CLXIV.—  2.  What  of  New  England?  Boundaries?  3.  What  took  place  in  1G20! 
Describe  the  settlement  of  Plymouth  ?  7.  What  of  other  settlements?  What  took  plac« 
in  1G35  ?     9  When  and  by  whom  was  Providence  settled  ? 


AMERICA.  279 

10.  By  degrees,  villages  were  built  all  along  the  sea-coast  of  New 
England,  and  settlements  began  to  be  formed  on  the  inland  rivers. 
But  a  thick  and  dreary  forest  still  overshadowed  the  greater  part  of 
the  country,  and  bears  and  wolves  often  prowled  around  the  cottages. 


CHAPTER  CLXV.-AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

Affairs  of  New  England  continued. 

1.  The  settlers  of  New  England  were  good  and  pious  people;  but 
many  of  them  seemed  to  have  pretty  much  the  same  feelings  towards 
the  Indians  that  they  had  towards  the  bears  and  wolves.  They  con- 
sidered them  a  sort  of  wild  animal,  or  if  men,  very  wicked  ones. 

2.  The  best  friend  that  ever  the  red  men  had,  was  John  Eliot*  He 
considered  them  his  fellow-beings,  and  went  about  preaching  to  them; 
and  so  he  was  called  the  Apostle  of  the  Indians.  He  spent  a  great 
many  years  in  translating  the  Bible  into  their  language,  and  in  teach- 
ing the  Indians  to  read  it. 

3.  There  were,  however,  very  few  white  men  that  loved  the  In- 
dians; and  the  latter  looked  upon  the  settlers  as  their  enemies.  They 
were  afraid  that,  in  time,  they  would  cut  down  all  the  trees  of  the 
forest,  and  change  their  hunting  grounds  into  cultivated  fields. 

4.  The  settlers  had,  therefore,  many  wars  with  the  Indians ;  but 
the  most  terrible  one  broke  out  in  the  year  1675,  and  was  called  king 
Philip's  war.  King  Philip,  though  an  Indian,  was  a  man  of  great 
sagacity,  and  it  was  his  design  to  destroy  all  the  settlers,  and  make 
New  England  a  wilderness  again. 

5.  King  Philip  first  made  an  attack  on  the  people  of  Swanzey,  in 
Massachusetts,  as  they  were  coming  out  of  the  meetinghouse,  on  Fast 
day.  Eight  or  nine  persons  were  shot.  Many  others  were  killed  and 
scalped  in  different  parts  of  the  country,  and  many  houses  were  set 
on  fire. 

6.  Almost  every  man  in  New  England  now  shouldered  his  musket, 
and  went  out  to  fight  king  Philip.  Even  the  ministers,  instead  of 
teaching  the  Indians  to  read  the  Bible,  as  John  Eliot  did,  now  took 
their  guns  and  sent  bullets  at  them,  whenever  they  had  a  chance. 

7.  In  the  course  of  the  next  winter,  the  settlers  formed  themselves 
into  an  army  of  nearly  two  thousand  men,  and  drove  king  Philip  and 
the  other  Indians  into  a  strong  fort,  in  Rhode  Island.  It  stood  in  the 
midst  of  a  swamp,  and  contained  six  hundred  wigwams.  All  the 
Indian  women  and  children  had  taken  refuge  there. 

8.  Four  thousand  Indian  warriors  were  in  the  fort.  But  the  settlers 
boldly  attacked  them,  broke  into  the  fort,  and  set   the  wigwams  on 

10.  What  wa9  done  by  degree??  What  of  the  greater  part  of  New  England? 
Ch.  CLXV. —  1.  How  were  the  Indians  considered  by  the  settlers?  2.  What  of  Joim  P^li- 
ot?  &,  How  did  the  Indians  look  upon  the  white  men?  When  did  king  Philip's  war  be- 
gin? What  of  king  Philip?  5.  When  did  he  first  attack  the  Americans?  6.  What  did  th« 
people  do?     7.  What  did  they  do  the  next  winter?     What  of  the  fort? 


280  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

fire.     Many  of  the  old  and  infirm  Indians,  as  well  as  the  women  and 
poor  helpless  children,  were  burnt  alive. 

9.  A  thousand  Indian  warriors  were  killed  and  wounded,  and 
several  hundred  were  taken  prisoners.  The  remainder  fled.  The 
fort  presented  a  horrible  spectacle,  with  half-burnt  bodies  of  men, 
women,  and  children,  strewn  among  the  ashes  of  the  wigwams. 

10.  But  still  the  war  was  not  an  end,  for  king  Philip  was  alive. 
The  next  summer,  it  was  known  that  he  had  taken  refuge  at  Mount 
Hope,  in  Rhode  Island.  Captain  Church  pursued  him  thither  with  a 
small  party  of  men. 

11.  King  Philip  happened  to  come  towards  a  clump  of  bushes, 
where  an  Englishman  and  a  friendly  Indian  lay  concealed.  The 
Englishman  fired  at  him,  but  missed.  The  Indian  then  took  aim 
and  fired,  and  the  valiant  king  Philip  fell  dead. 

12.  After  this  war,  the  Indians  were  never  again  able  to  do  so 
much  mischief  to  the  New  England  people.  But,  for  many  years 
afteWvards,  they  would  sometimes  steal  out  of  the  woods  by  night, 
set  the  villages  on  fire,  and  slaughter  the  inhabitants.  The  New 
England  colonies,  however,  increased  rapidlv,  and  in  time,  the  country 
had  many  pleasant  towns  and  villages. 


CHAPTER  CLXVI.-AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

Early  History  of  Virginia. 

1.  The  colony  of  Virginia  was  settled  some  years  before  New  Eng- 
land. Jamestown,  on  James  river,  was  founded  by  captain  Christo- 
pher Newport,  in  1607.  The  first  settlers  of  Virginia  were  not  such 
pious  people  as  those  of  New  England.  They  had  riot  come  to 
America  for  the  sake  of  worshipping  God,  but  were  influenced  by 
more  worldly  motives. 

2.  Many  of  them  were  wild  young  men,  and  it  was  difficult  to 
keep  them  in  order.  Owing  to  this  and  other  causes,  the  colony  was 
sometimes  on  the  brink  of  ruin.  The  Indians  gave  the  settlers  great 
trouble,  and  would  probably  have  destroyed  them,  if  it  had  not  been 
for  Captain  John  Smith. 

3.  Captain  Smith  was  a  gallant  man,  and  had  been  a  warrior  all 
his  lifetime.  Before  he  came  to  Virginia,  he  had  fought  against  the 
Turks,  and  had  cut  off  the  heads  of  three  Turkish  lords,  in  single 
combat.  He  showed  himself  equally  valiant  in  his  engagements 
with  the  Indians. 

4.  But  one  day,  when  captain  Smith  was  retreating  from  a  large 
party  of  savages,  he  sunk  almost  up  to  his  neck  in  a  swamp,  so  that 
he  could  neither  fight  nor  flee.  The  Indians  pulled  him  out  of  the 
swamp,  and  carried  him  to  their  king  Powhatan. 


S.  9.  Describe  the  destruction  of  the  fort  ?  10.  11.  Describe  the  death  of  kiDg  Philip  7 
12.  What  of  the  Indians  after  this  war  ?  Ch.  CLX  VI. — 1.  When  was  Jamestow  n  settled  •' 
What  of  the  settlers  of  Virginia  ?    2.  What  of  the  Indians  ? 


UNITED    STATES.  2S1 

5.  Powhatan  was  rejoiced  to  have  captain  Smith  in  his  power,  for 
he  had  been  more  afraid  of  him  than  of  all  the  other  Englishmen 
together.  In  order  to  preven^any  further  trouble,  he  determined  im 
mediately  to  put  him  to  death.  Accordingly,  captain  Smith's  hands 
were  tied,  and  he  was  stretched  on  the  ground,  with  his  head  on  a 
large  stone. 

6.  King  Powhatan,  who  was  a  man  of  immense  size  and  strength, 
then  seized  a  great  club,  intending  to  kill  captain  Smith.  He  lifted 
the  club  on  high  for  this  purpose  ;  but  just  as  the  blow  was  falling, 
his  daughter  Pocahontas  rushed  forward. 

7.  This  beautiful  Indian  maiden  threw  herself  upon  the  body  of 
captain  Smith.  If  Powhatan's  club  had  fallen,  it  would  have  killed 
her,  instead  of  the  prisoner.  Pocahontas  besought  her  father  to 
have  mercy ;  aifd  the  fierce  Indian  could  not  resist  her  tears  and  en- 
treaties. 

S.  Captain  Smith  was  therefore  released,  and  sent  back  to  James- 
town. The  name  of  Pocahontas  will  always  be  honored  in  Virginia. 
She  was  afterwards  married  to  one  of  the  English  settlers,  and  her 
descendants  are  living  in  Virginia  to  this  day. 


CHAPTER  CLXVIL— AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

Braddock'1  s  Defeat,  and  other  Blatters. 

1.  I  must  pass  over  the  remainder  of  the  history  of  Virginia,  till 
the  time  of  the  old  French  war.  This  hegan  in  1755.  Not  king 
after  war  was  declared,  the  British  general  Braddock  marched  with 
an  army  to  attack  the  French  at  Fort  du  Quesne.  This  fort  stood  at 
the  head  of  the  Ohio  river,  where  Pittsburgh  is  now  situated. 

2.  Many  Virginians  and  other  colonists  were  in  Braddock's  army. 
Colonel  George  Washington,  then  a  very  young  man.  was  one  of  his 
aids.  Washington  had  already  acquired  much  warlike  skill;  and  if 
general  Braddock  had  taken  his  advice,  it  would  have  saved  his  own 
life,  and  the  lives  of  hundreds  besides. 

3.  Braddock  and  his  army  marched  onward,  till  they  were  within 
about  seven  miles  of  Fort  du  Quesne.  Thick  woods  were  all  around 
them,  and  the  settlements  of  Virginia  were  hundreds  of  miles  behind. 
Suddenly,  a  terrible  volley  of  musketry  was  fired  at  them  from  be- 
hind the  trees. 

4.  General  Braddock  now  knew  that  he  had  fallen  into  an  ambus- 
cade of  French  and  Indians.  He  galloped  about,  endeavoring  to  en- 
courage his  men;  but  the  bullets  came  so  thick,  that  the  bravest  of 
them  were  appaled. 

5.  The  general  had  five  horses  killed  under  him.  At  last,  a  bullet 
struck  him  in  the  breast.     Nearly  all  the  other  officers  were  either 

3.4.5.6.7.  Relate  the  adventure  of  captain  Smith  with  the  Indians?  8.  What  of 
Pocahontas  ?  Ch.  CLXVII. — 1.  When  did  the  old  French  war  being  ?  Where  was  Fort 
Du  Quesne  .'  2.  What  of  Washington  ?  3.  4.  5.  Describe  the  defeat  and  death  of 
Braddock?  24J|C 


282  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

killed  or  wounded ;  but  Washington  remained  unhurt.     It  seems  as 
if  he  were  preserved  to  be  the  savior  of  his  country. 

6.  An  Indian  chief  had  taken  aim  and  fired  at  him  seventeen 
times,  without  once  hitting  him.  It  was  Washington  who  rescued 
the  army  from  total  destruction.  He  and  the  Virginian  troops  kept 
off  the  Indians,  and  enabled  the  British  to  retreat. 

7.  I  shall  now  proceed  to  speak  of  the  other  colonies.  The  first 
settlement  in  New  York  was  made  in  1613,  on  the  shores  of  the 
Hudson  river,  where  Albany  now  stands.  The  city  of  New  York, 
founded  about  the  same  time,  was  at  first  called  New  Amsterdam ; 
it  derived  its  name  from  the  capital  of  Holland,  for  the  early  settlers 
were  natives  of  that  country. 

8.  In  1664,  the  province  of  New  York  was  surrendered  by  the 
Dutch  into  the  hands  of  the  English.  It  grew  and  prospered  very 
fast,  and  became  one  of  the  most  powerful  of  the  colonies. 

9.  Pennsylvania  was  settled  in  1681.  Its  founder. was  William 
Penn,  a  Quaker,  and  all  the  earliest  settlers  likewise  belonged  to  the 
sect  of  Quakers.  When  William  Perm  arrived  in  the. country,  he 
bought  lands  of  the  Indians,  and  made  a  treaty  with  them. 

10.  This  treaty  was  always  held  sacred.  The  Indians  saw  that 
the  Quakers  were  men  of  peace,  and  therefore  they  were  careful 
never  to  do  them  any  injury.  There  are  no- stories  of  Indian  warfare 
with  the  Quakers  of  Pennsylvania. 

11.  The  province  of  Maryland  was  given  by  Charles  the  First  to 
Lord  Baltimore.  Pie  was  a  Roman  Catholic,  and  in  1634,  he  brought 
over  two  hundred  people  of  the  same  religion,  and  made  the  first 
settlement  in  Maryland. 

12.  Carolina  first  began  to  be  permanently  settled  in  1680.  In 
1729,  it  was  divided  intov North  and  South  Carolina.  The  first  set- 
tlement in  Georgia  was  made  in  1733.  The  principal  founder  was 
general  James  Oglethorpe.  He  came  from  England  with  one  hun- 
dred and  sixteen  settlers,  and  began  to  build  the  city  of  Savannah. 


CHAPTER  CLXVIII.-AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

Causes  ivhich  led  to  the  Revolution. 

1.  The  reader  will  have  learned,  by  the  preceding  chapters,  how 
the  whole  of  the  sea-coast,  between  New  Brunswick  and  Florida, 
became  covered  with  colonies,  which  were  all  under  the  government 
of  Great  Britain.     The  inhabitants  were  growing  numerous. 

6.  What  of  Washington  and  his  troops?  7.  When  and  where  was  the  first  settlement  in 
New  York  ?  What  was  the  city  of  New  York  first  called  ?  8.  What  of  the  province  c; 
New  York  ?  9.  When  and  by  whom  was  Pennsylvania  settled  ?  How  did  William  Penn 
treat  the  Indians?  10.  What  was  the  consequence  of  his  treaty  with  them  ?  11.  Who 
gave  Maryland  to  Lord  Baltimore  ?  What  of  Lord  Baltimore  ?  When  did  he  setll* 
Maryland?  12.  When  was  Carolina  settled?  When  divided?  First  settlement  is 
Georgia?    Who  founded  it :     What  city  did  he  build  ? 


UNITED    STATES.  283 

2.  When  the  king  of  Great  Britain  and  his  ministers  beheld  the 
prosperous  condition  of  the  colonies,  they  determined  to  derive  some 
profit  from  them.  For  this  purpose,  in  1765,  the  British  parliament 
passed  what  was  called  the  Stamp  Act. 

3.  Their  object  was,  to  take  money  out  of  the  pockets  of  the  Ameri- 
cans for  the  use  of  the  king  and  ministry.  Eut  the  Americans  were 
resolved  that  no  king  on  earth  should  take  their  property,  without 
their  own  consent. 

4.  They  made  so  strong  an  opposition  to  the  Stamp  Act,  that  par- 
liament was  forced  to  repeal  it.  But  a  tax  was  soon  afterwards  laid 
on  tea ;  so  that  no  American  lady  could  give  a  tea-party,  without 
paying  a  tax  to  England.  Soldiers  were  sent  out  to  America  to 
compel  the  people  to  obey  these  unjust  laws. 

5.  In  the  year  1770,  a  quarrel  took  place  between  some  of  these 
soldiers  and  the  inhabitants  of  Boston.  A  company  of  the  British 
red-coats  assembled  in  State  street,  and  fired  upon  a  crowd  of  un- 
armed people.  Three  of  them  fell  dead  in  the  street,  and  five  mort 
were  wounded.     This  affair  was  called  the  Boston  Massacre. 

6.  But  instead  of  being  affrighted  by  this  bloodshed,  the  people 
grew  more  determined  in  their  resistance  to  the  tyranny  of  England. 
In  the  year  1773,  some  ships  were  sent  from  London  to  the  colonies, 
laden  with  cargoes  of  tea. 

7.  Three  of  the  ships  arrived  in  the  harbor  of  Boston.  One  night, 
a  number  of  persons  went  on  board,  in  the  disguise  of  Indians,  and 
threw  all  the  tea  overboard.  These  Indian  figures  were  never  seen 
again;  and,  to  this  day,  nobody  can  tell  who  they  were. 

8.  When  tidings  of  this  event  were  carried  to  England,  the  king 
and  ministry  saw  that  they  could  never  make  slaves  of  the  Ameri- 
cans, unless  by  force  of  arms.  They  therefore  sent  over  large  bodies 
of  troops  to  keep  the  people  in  subjection. 


CHAPTER  CLXIX.— AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

Account  of  the  Battle  of  Lexington. 

1.  In  1775,  general  Thomas  Gage  was  the  commander-in-chief  of 
the  British  forces  in  America.     His  head-quarters  were  at  Boston. 

2.  On  the  night  of  the  18th  of  April,  general  Gage  sent  a  detach- 
ment of  «ight  hundred  grenadiers  to  seize  some  cannon  and  ammuni- 
tion at  Concord,  about  eighteen  miles  from  Boston.  The  grenadiers 
marched  all  night,  and  reached  the  town  of  Lexington  at  sunrise. 

Ch.  CLXVIII.— -2.  What  of  Hie  kin;  and  ministers  of  Great  Britain?  What  did  tlie 
parliament  do?  3.  Their  object  ?  What  did  the  Americans  resolve  ?  4.  What  did  they 
do?  What  of  a  tax  on  tea  ?  What  of  soldiers  ?  5.  Describe  the  Boston  massacre  ?  6. 
What  of  the  Americans?  Wiiat  happened  in  the  year  1773?  7.  Describe  the  destruction 
of  the  tea?  7.  What  did  the  king  and  ministers  now  do?  Ch.  CLXIX — 1.  What  ol 
general  Gage  ?     2.  What  did  he  do  ?     What  of  the  grenadiers  ? 


284  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

3.  Lexington  is  a  village  about  twelve  miles  from  Boston.  A 
meeting-house  stood  by  the  road-side,  and  near  it  there  was  a  level 
tract  of  grass.  On  this  green  space,  a  company  of  militia  were 
drawn  up. 

4.  Major  Pitcairn  was  the  British  commander.  As  soon  as  he  saw 
the  militia,  he  galloped  forward,  brandishing  his  sword,  and  drawing 
a  pistol  from  his  holster.  "Disperse,  you  rebels !"' he  shouted. 
"  Throw  down  your  arms  and  disperse  !" 

5.  As  he  spoke,  without  giving  the  militia  men  time  to  run  away, 
he  discharged  his  pistol  at  them.  The  British  soldiers  followed  the 
example  of  major  Pitcairn,  and  fired  a  whole  volley  at  the  Ameri- 
cans.    Several  of  them  were  killed  and  wounded. 

6.  The  British  troops  then  continued  their  march  to  Concord.  But 
the  Americans  were  now  collecting  on  all  sides.  When  the  British 
reached  Concord,  they  had  a  skirmish  with  a  party  of  militia  there. 
They  now  found  it  necessary  to  retreat  as  fast  as  possible. 

7.  As  they  marched  along  the  road,  the  people  fired  at  them  from 
behind  the  fences  and  stone  walls,  and  out  of  the  windows  of  the 
houses.  At  every  step,  some  of  the  British  soldiers  fell;  but  their 
comrades  hurried  on,  without  heeding  them. 

8.  When  general  Gage  heard  what  was  going  on,  he  sent  Lord 
Percy  out  of  Boston,  with  nine  hundred  men  and  two  brass  cannon. 
Lord  Percy  met  major  Pitcairn  and  the  grenadiers  scampering  back 
to  Boston  as  fast  as  they  could  go ;  and,  by  firing  his  cannon,  he  kept 
the  Americans  off. 

9.  But  the  moment  the  troops  resumed  their  march,  the  Americans 
shot  at  them  again  from  behind  the  fences.  Before  the  British 
arrived  in  sight  of  Boston,  they  had  lost  nearly  three  hundred  men, 
in  killed,  wounded,  and  prisoners.  The  loss  of  the  Americans  was 
much  less. 

10.  The  news  of  this  battle  spread  all  over  the  country,  and  wher- 
ever the  story  was  told,  the  people  quitted  their  business  and  turned 
soldiers.  For  now  the  Revolution  had  broken  out,  and  it  was  easy 
to  foresee  that  there  would  be  a  bloody  war. 


CHAPTER  CLXX.-AMEItICA  CONTINUED. 

The  Battle  of  Bunker  Hill. 

1.  In  a  short  time  after  the  battle  of  Lexington,  a  large  American 
army  was  assembled  round  Boston.  The  British  troops  could  not 
venture  out  of  the  town.  They  found  it  difficult  to  get  provisions 
enough  to  live  upon. 

2.  On  the  night  of  the  sixtenth  of  June,  colonel  Prescott  marched 

3.  4.  5.  6.  What  took  place  at  Lexington?  What  followed?  7.  How  v.'ere  the  British 
annoyed  in  their  retreat  to  Boston  ?  8.  What  did  general  Gage  do  ?  8.  What  of  the 
Americans  and  British?  10.  What  effect  had  the  news  of  this  battle?  Ch.  CLXX. — 1. 
Where  did  an  American  army  assemble  ?     What  of  the  British  troops  ? 


UNITED    STATES.  285 

with  a  thousand  Americans  to  Bunker  hill,  in  Charlestown.  On  the 
summit  of  this  hill,  with  their  spades,  they  threw  up  a  wall  of  earth 
and  sods  as  high  as  their  breasts. 

3.  They  intended  this  as  a  fortification,  from*  which  they  might 
fire  upon  the  British  fleet  which  lay  in  Boston  harbor.  No  sooner  did 
the  British  admiral  see  the  wall  of  earth  and  sods,  than  he  began  to 
batter  it  with  cannon-shot  and  bombs.  At  the  same  time,  general 
Gasre  sent  three  thousand  troops  to  take  Bunker  hill  by  storm. 

4.  The  troops  landed  in  Charlestown,  and  marched  boldly  up  the 
hill.  They  made  a  formidable  appearance,  moving  in  a  long  red  line, 
with  their  glittering  muskets.  As  they  advanced,  the  cannon-balls 
from  the  British  fleet  flew  high  over  their  heads,  and  struck  among 
the  Americans. 

5.  But  when  the  British  soldiers  had  come  within  twenty  yards  of 
the  fortification,  the  Americans  suddenly  saluted  them  with  a  tre- 
menduous  volley  of  musketry.  The  smoke  cleared  away,  and  there 
were  the  king's  soldiers  retreating  in  confusion  to  the  water-side. 

6.  But  many  of  them  lay  dead  or  wounded  upon  the  hill.  In  the 
mean  time,  Charlestown  had  been  set  on  fire,  and  was  blazing  like 
an  immense  furnace,  and  throwing  clouds  of  smoke  over  the  whole 
scene. 

7.  The  officers  encouraged  the  British  troops  and  led  them  again 
into  battle.  But  a  second  time  they  were  driven  back  with  terrible 
slaughter.  It  was  not  till  the  third  trial  that  the  British  were  able  to 
reach  the  breast-work. 

8.  The  Americans  had  now  fired  away  all  their  powder  and  ball, 
and  were  forced  to  retreat.  General  Warren  was  among  the  last  to 
leave  the  breast-work.  A  British  officer  snatched  a  musket  from  a 
soldier,  and  shot  the  gallant  Warren  dead. 

9.  But  many  a  brave  Englishman  laid  down  his  life  that  day,  and 
blood  enough  had  been  shed  to  redden  all  the  grass  on  Bunker  hill. 

10.  In  about  a  fortnight  after  this  battle,  general  George  Washing- 
ton arrived  at  Cambridge.  The  continental  congress  at  Philadelphia 
had  appointed  him  commander-in-chief  of  the  American  armies.  He 
managed  matters  so  skilfully,  that  the  British  were  driven  out  of 
Boston,  in  March,  1776. 


CHAPTER  CLXXI.— AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

Progress  of  the  War.      Capture  of  Bur goyne. 

1.  It  was  on  the  fourth  of  July,  1770,  that  the  continental  congress 
declared  the  United  States  a  free  and  independent  nation.  This 
declaration  caused  great  rejoicings  all  over  America.  Yet  our  affairs 
were  not  in  a  very  promising  situation. 

2.  What  did  colonel  Prcscott  do?  2.  What  of  the  British  admiral  and  general  Gage  ? 
4.  5.  6.  7.  S.  9.  Describe  the  battle  or  Bunker  hill?  10.  What  of  general  Washington? 
When  were  the  British  driven  out  of  Boston?  Ch.  CLXXI.— 1.  When  were  the  United 
Starei  declared  free  and  independent? 

'24* 


2SQ  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

2.  After  the  enemy  evacuated  Boston,  general  Washington  marched 
from  that  town  to  New  York.  Some  important  battles  were  fought 
between  our  troops  and  the  British  ;  but  Washington  was  finally  com- 
pelled to  retreat,  by  superior  force.  When  winter  came  on,  the 
American  soldiers  were  almost  naked.  Wherever  they  marched, 
their  bare  feet  left  bloody  tracks  upon  the  frozen  ground. 

3.  But,  on  a  dark,  December  night,  Washington  crossed  the  Dela- 
ware river  with  his  troops,  and  marched  to  Trenton,  in  New  Jersey. 
A.  large  body  of  Hessian  soldiers  were  encamped  at  this  place.  They 
Were  suddenly  startled  by  the  shouts  of  the  Americans,  who  had  bro- 
ken into  their  camp,  and  they  all  laid  down  their  arms. 

4.  Lord  Cornwallis,  the  British  general,  was  now  in  pursuit  of  the 
Americans  ;  but  Washington  marched  to  Princeton,  and  attacked  a 
party  of  the  enemy  who  had  taken  post  in  the  college  edifice.  Sixty 
of  them  were  killed,  and  three  hundred  taken  prisoners. 

5.  The  next  year,  1777,  the  gallant  marquis  de  La  Fayette  came 
from  France  to  assist  the  Americans.  He  was  then  only  nineteen 
years  old  ;  but  congress  appointed  him  major-general,  and  he  became 
one  of  the  bravest  and  best  in  the  army. 

6.  During  this  year,  the  British  general  Burgoyne  marched  with  a 
large  army  from  Canada.  He  sailed  down  Lake  Champlain,  and 
went  from  thence  to  Saratoga.  But  general  Gates  was  wailing  for 
him  there,  with  ten  thousand  American  troops.  Many  battles  were 
fought  between  them  and  the  British. 

7.  In  one  of  these  battles,  colonel  Cilley,  an  American  officer,  took 
a  brass  cannon  from  the  enemy  with  his  own  hands.  He  imme- 
diately got  astride  of  it,  shouting  and  encouraging  his  men,  and 
waving  his  sword,  as  if  he  were  seated  on  a  war-horse. 

8.  On  the  eighteenth  of  October,  general  Burgoyne  was  forced  to  sur- 
render, fie  and  his  aids  rode  out  of  the  camp  to  meet  general  Gates; 
and  Burgoyne  took  his  sword  by  the  point,  and  offered  the  hilt  to  the 
American  general.  At  this  time  all  the  British'  army  grounded  their 
arms. 

9.  This  great  success  of  the  Americans  induced  the  French  to  make 
a  treaty  of  alliance  with  them,  and  to  declare  war  against  Great 
Britain.  France  sent  a  fleet,  and  afterwards  an  army,  to  fight  on 
our  side. 

2.  What  of  Washington  ?  What  of  the  American  soldiers  ?  3.  Describe  the  attack 
upon  Trenton.  4.  Attack  upon  Princeton?  5.  What  of  La  Fayette  ?  6.  What  of  Bur- 
goyne ?  General  Gates  ?  7.  What  of  Colonel  Cilley  ?  3.  Describe  the  surrender  of  gen-. 
eral  Burgoyne.    9.  What  did  the  French  do  ? 


UNITED   STATES.  287 

CHAPTER  CLXXII.-AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

The  Story  of  Major  Arnold  and  Major  Andre. 

1.  It  -would  fill  a  much  larger  book  than  mine,  if  I  were  to  relate 
the  particulars  of  all  the  battles,  skirmishes,  and  other  warlike  events 
that  occurred  daring  the  Revolution.  I  must  therefore,  leave  far  the 
greater  part  of  them  untold. 

2.  One  of  the  most  interesting  incidents  in  the  whole  war  took 
place  in  1780.  General  Arnold,  who  had  shown  himself  a  very  brave 
officer,  became  discontented,  and  resolved  to  desert  the  cause  of  his 
country. 

3.  Pretending  that  his  wounds  rendered  him  unfit  for  active  ser- 
vice, he  requested  that  the  command  of  West  Point  might  be  given 
him.  This  strong  fortress  was  situated  among  the  highlands,  on  the 
shore  of  the  Hudson  river.  Its  loss  would  have  been  a  severe  mis- 
fortune to  the  Americans. 

4.  No  sooner  had  Arnold  got  possession  of  West  Point,  than  he 
sent  to  Henry  Clinton,  the  British  general  at  New  York,  offering  to 
surrender  the  fortress.  Sir  Henry  Clinton  sent  a  young  officer,  named 
Andre,  to  meet  Arnold,  and  contrive  the  means  of  completing  this 
treacherous  business. 

5.  Major  Andre  had  a  meeting  with  Arnold,  and  they  arranged  the 
manner  in  which  the  fortress  was  to  be  given  up  to  the  British.  Andre 
then  wished  to  get  on  board  the  ship  Vulture,  which  had  brought 
him  up  the  river  from  New  York. 

6.  But  the  Vulture  had  now  sailed  further  down  the  stream,  and 
it  was  necessary  for  major  Andre  to  return  by  land.  He  therefore 
took  off  his  uniform  and  put  on  a  common  coat,  in  order  that  the 
Americans  might  not  know  that  he  was  a  British  officer. 

7.  Then  mounting  a  horse,  he  set  out  on  the  road  to  New  York. 
He  had  to  pass  through  a  part  of  the  country  that  was  guarded  by 
the  American  troops ;  but  he  travelled  most  of  the  way  without  any 
trouble  or  hindrance. 

8.  But  when  major  Andre  reached  a  place  called  Tarrytown,  he 
saw  three  young  militia  men  by  the  road-side.  They  came  up  to 
him  and  seized  his  horse  by  the  bridle.  Now  Andre  had  a  passport 
from  general  Arnold  in  his  pocket,  and  if  he  had  shown  it  to  the 
militia  men,  (hey  would  have  let  him  go  free.  But  instead  of  that, 
he  asked  them  where  they  came  from. 

9.  "  From  down  the  river,"  they  replied.  When  Andre  heard  this, 
he  mistook  the  three  militia  men  for  tories,  or  friends  of  the  British. 
"lam  a  British  officer,"  said  he.  "  Let  me  pass  on ;  for  I  am  in 
haste  !" 

10.  But  these  words  were  fatal  to  poor  Andre.     The  three  men 

Ch.  CLXXII.— 2.  What  of  general  Arnold?  3.  What  did  he  request?  4.  To  whom 
•ltd  he  send?  What  did  Sir  Henry  Clinton  do  ?  5.  What  of  Andre?  6.  Describe  :.u 
ourney  and  capture. 


288  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

look  him  prisoner,  and  found  some  treasonable  papers  in  his  boots. 
General  Arnold  made  his  escape  to  New  York;  but  poor  major 
Andre  remained  in  the  hands  of  the  Americans. 

11.  He  was  tried  as  a  spy,  and  condemned  to  death.  Washington 
and  all  the  army  were  sorry  for  him,  but  nothing  could  save  him 
from  the  gallows.     He  was  therefore  executed. 


CHAPTER  CLXXIII.-AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

War  in  the  South.     Surrender  of  Cornwallis. 

1.  In  the  latter  part  of  the  war,  many  important  events  were  trans- 
acted in  the  Southern  states.  In  1780,  general  Gates,  the  conqueror 
of  Burgoyne,  was  defeated  by  lord  Cornwallis  at  Camden,  in  South 
Carolina.  Congress  then  sent  general  Green  to  command  the  army 
of  the  South. 

2.  General  Green  had  been  a  Quaker  in  his  youth  ;  but  when  the 
revolution  broke  out,  he  became  the  best  officer  in  the  American 
army,  except  general  Washington.  This  was  proved  by  his  good 
conduct  in  the  Southern  states. 

3.  He  fought  several  baltles  with  the  British,  and  though  he  was 
sometimes  compelled  lo  retreat  by  the  enemy's  superior  force,  yet 
they  never  gained  any  real  advantage  over  him.  By  his  skill  and 
valor  the  British  troops  were  finally  driven  into  the  city  of  Charles- 
ton. After  this  event,  there  was  no  more  trouble  with  the  enemy  in 
the  South. 

4.  Lord  Cornwallis,  with  a  large  army,  was  now  in  Virginia.  The 
American  and  French  troops  proceeded  thither  to  attack  him.  Gen- 
eral Washington  had  command  of  the  whole;  and,  under  Washing- 
ton, the  count  de  Rochambeau  was  commander  of  the  French. 

5.  They  besieged  the  British  at  Yorktown  ;  for  lord  Cornwallis  did 
not  feel  strong  enough  to  meet  them  in  the  open  field.  The  Ameri- 
cans built  breastworks  round  about  the  intrenchments  of  the  British, 
and  cannonaded  them  night  and  day. 

6.  Finallv,  on  the  nineteenth  of  October,  1781,  lord  Cornwallis 
agreed  to  surrender  his  army.  But  he  was  ashamed  to  go  through 
the  ceremony  of  delivering  his  sword  lo  the  conqueror;  and  he  there- 
fore sent  general  O'Hara  to  do  it  in  his  stead. 

7.  General  O'Hara  accordingly  marched  forth  at  the  head  of  the 
vanquished  army.  When  he  came  in  the  presence  of  general  Wash- 
ington, he  otfered  him  his  sword.  But  Washington  pointed  to  gen- 
eral Lincoln;  for  it  was  not  proper  that  he  himself  should  receive 
the  sw,  d  of  any  but  lord  Cornwallis. 

8.  General  Lincoln  took  general  O'Hara's  sword,  and  the  whole 

Ch.  CLXXIII— 1.  What  took  place  in  1780?  2.  3.  What  of  general  Greene? 
4.  What  of  Lord  Cornwallis?  Who  headed  the  Americans  and  French  ?  6.  Describe  tht 
ilege  of  Yorktown.    0.  Surrender  of  Lord  Cornwallis? 


UNITED   STATES.  £g<) 

Sntish  army  grounded  their  arms,  and  yielded  their  banners  to  the 
notorious  Americans. 

9.  After  the  surrender  of  Cornwallis,  no  important  battles  were 
fought,  although  peace  was  not  declared  till  1783.  In  the  summer 
and  autumn  of  that  year,  all  the  British  troops  sailed  homewards,  and 
left  America  free  and  independent. 

10.  Thus  you  see  that  the  revolutionary  war,  which  began  by  the 
battle  of  Lexington,  in  1775,  was  terminated,  after  having  continued 
eight  years.  The  sufferings  of  our  countrymen  were  very  great,  but 
the  reward  of  their  patience  and  patriotism  was  also  great. 


CHAPTER  CLXXIV.— AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

Affairs  of  the  United  States  since  the  Revolution. 

1.  When  the  revolutionary  war  was  over,  the  people  of  the  United 
Stales  found  it'aecessary  to  adopt  a  constitution  of  government.  The 
present  Federal  Constitution  was  prepared  by  some  of  the  wisest 
men  in  the  country.     It  went  into  operation  in  1789. 

2.  The  good  and  illustrious  Washington  was  our  first  president. 
He  came  into  office  in  17S9,  "mid  was  re-elected  at  the  end  of  four 
years.  In  1797,  John  Adams  was  chosen  to  succeed  him,  and  be- 
came the  second  president  of  the  United  States. 

3.  The  most  mournful  event  that  had  ever  befallen  America,  was 
the  death  of  Washington.  It  took  place  in  1799,  when  he  was  sixty- 
eight  years  old.  The  whole  country  was  overwhelmed  with  sorrow. 
But  Washington  had  done  h;9  work  on  earth,  and  it  was  fit  that  he 
should  ascend  to  heaves. 

4.  The  next  president,  alter  John  Adams,  was  Thomas  Jefferson. 
He  served  during  two  terms  of  office,  and  was  succeeded  by  James 
Madison,  in  1S09.  The  most  remarkable  event  of  Jefferson's  adminis- 
tration, was  the  purchase  of  Louisiana  from  France,  in  the  vear  1S03. 
This  immense  territory  included  the  country  between  the  Mississippi 
and  the  B,ocky  mountains.  It  was  bought  for  fifteen  milliors  of 
dollars.  During  the  administration  of  Madison,  the  United  States 
were  on  ill  terms  with  Great  Britain,  and  there  was  great  reason  to 
fear  that  hostilities  would  ensue. 

5.  Accordingly,  on  the  eighteenth  of  June,  1812,  congress  made  a 
delaration  of  war.  Troops  were  sent  to  invade  Canada.  There 
were  several  gallant  conflicts  on  the  Canadian  frontier ;  but  the 
Americans  did  not  succeed  in  conquering  the  province. 


9.  When  was  peace  declared  .'  What  of  the  Hrilish  troops?  10.  How  long  did  the  rev- 
olutionary war  last.'  What  of  the  sufferings  of  the  Americans?  Their  reward  ?  Ch. 
CLXXIV. —  1.  When  was  the  constitution  of  government  formed  ?  2.  Who  was  the  first 
president?  When  did  he  come  into  office  ?  When  was  John  Adams  chosen  ?  3.  When 
did  Washington'*  death  take  place  ?  Effect  of  his  death?  4.  What  did  Jefferson  pur- 
chase of  the  French  ?  In  what  year?  How  large  a  country  was  it?  What  did  it  coal  ? 
V  lien  was  Madison  made  president  ■  What  of  the  United  States  during  hit  administration 
■k     When  whs  war  declared  '.      What  of  w»r«  in  Canada? 

25 


290  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

6.  Many  glorious  victories  were  won  by  the  American  navy,  both 
on  the  ocean  and  the  lakes.  Hitherto,  the  British  navy  had  always 
been  triumphant;  but  now,  our  brave  sailors  often  compelled  them 
lo  haul  down  their  flag. 

7.  The  last  and  most  brilliant  event  of  the  war,  was  the  battle  of 
New  Orleans.  On  the  morning  of  the  eighth  of  January,  1815,  a 
strong  British  army  advanced  to  take  the  city.  But  they  were  driven 
back  with  immense  slaughter  by  the  Americans,  under  general 
Jackson.  Peace  took  place  in  a  very  short  time  after  this  battle. 
The  United  States  have  not  since  had  any  wars,  except  with  the 
Indian  tribes. 

8.  In  1817,  president  Madison  retired  from  office,  and  was  suc- 
ceeded by  James  Monroe.  During  the  eight  years  of  his  administra- 
tion, the  country  was  quiet  and  prosperous.  John  Quincy  Adams 
became  president  in  1825.  He  was  the  son  of  old  John  Adams,  who 
had  been  the  next  president  after  Washington.     Neither  the  first  nor 

;  ihe  second  president  Adams  continued  in.  office  longer  than  four  vears. 

9.  The  next  president  was  general  Andrew  Jackson.  He  was  in- 
augurated in  1829,  and  began  his  second  term  of  office  in  1S33.  He 
was  succeeded  by  Martin  Van  Buren,  in  1837.  William  Henry  Har- 
rison became  president  in  1841,  and  died  in  thirty  days  after,  being 
succeeded  by  John  Tyler,  then  vice-president.  James  K.  Polk 
became  president  in  1845,  and  Zachary  Taylor  in  1849.  Fillmore  suc- 
ceeded in  1850,  and  Pierce  in  1853. 


CHAPTER  CLXXV.— AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

General  Remarks  upon  the  History  of  the  United  States. 

1.  I  have  now  told  you  a  short  story  about  our  own  country.  You 
will  notice  that  the  first  settlement  made  by  the  white  people  in  the 
United  States,  was  at  Virginia,  in  1607 ;  the  next  in  New  York  by 
the  Dutch,  in  1613;  the  next  by  the  Puritans,  or,  as  Ave  often  call 
them,  the  Pilgrims,  at  Plymouth,  in  Massachusetts,  in  1620. 

2.  Other  parts  of  the  country  were  soon  settled,  chiefly  by  people 
from  England;  but  colonies  were  established  also  by  Swedes,  Ger- 
mans, and  French.  Thus  the  whole  country  along  the  Atlantic 
border  became  inhabited.  By  degrees,  the  settlers  went  farther  and 
farther  into  the  wilderness,  until  towns  and  cities  rose  up  throughout 
the  whole  interior  of  the  land. 

3.  Thus  you  will  observe  that  about  two  hundred  and  thirty  years 
ago,  there  was  not  a  white  inhabitant  throughout  this  vast  country. 
The  Indian  tribes  were  numerous,  and  their  Avhole  number  within 
the  present  boundary  of  the  United  States,  might  have  been  two 
hundred  thousand. 

6.  What  of  naval  battles?  7.  Describe  the  battle  of  New  Orleans  ?  When  did  it  take 
place?  What  was  done  in  1817  ?  In  1825?  Whose  son  was  John  Quincy  Adams?  9. 
When  did  Jackson  become  president?  When  was  Martin  Van  Buren  made  president? 
What  of  Harrison?  Ch.  CLXXV. —  1.  Where  and  when  was  the  first  settlement  in  the 
United  States?  The  next?  The  next :  2.  What  of  other  parts  of  the  country  ?  3.  What 
of  this  country  two  hundred  and  thirty  years  ago  ?     What  of  the  Indians  ? 


UNITED    STATES.  291 

4.  But  these  lords  of  the  forest  gradually  disappeared  before  th« 
white  people.  Many  of  them  were  slain  in  battle  with  the  settlers; 
the  others  gradually  retired,  as  the  forests  were  cut  down,  and  the 
lands  cleared. 

5.  They  lived  by  hunting  wild  deer,  bears,  buffaloes,  and  wild 
turkeys;  and  as  these  animals  fled  from  towns  and  cities,  and  took 
refuge  in  the  forests,  so  the  Indians  went  with  them. 

6.  In  this  way  the  red  men  vanished  from  the  settled  portions  of 
the  country,  and  at  this  day  there  are  few  of  them  to  be  seen,  except 
in  the  far  western  wilderness.  There  herds  of  wild  deer,  vast  flocks 
of  bisons,  bears,  wild  turkeys,  and  other  wild  animals  are  to  be  found, 
and  there  is  now  the  home  of  the  Indians. 

7.  Well,  as  the  Indians  retired,  the  white  people  increased,  being 
all  under  the  government  of  the  king  of  England.  At  the  time  of  the 
Revolution,  they  were  three  millions  in  number,  and  as  the  king 
treated,  them  ill,  they  threw  off  his  authority  and  set  up  a  govern- 
ment for  themselves. 

8.  This  government,  or  coustitution,  was  formed  in  17S9,  and  we 
have  lived  under  it  very  happily  for  nearly  fifty  years;  and  the  little 
nation  of  three  millions  has  how  become  twenty-five  millions  strong. 


CHAPTER  CLXXVI.-AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

General  Remarks  on  the  History  of  the   United  States 
continued. 

1.  In  reviewing  the  history  of  our  country,  we  shall  notice  that  it 
has  been  involved  in  two  wars  since  it  became  independent.  Previous 
to  that  event,  the  colonists,  had  a  great  many  battles  with  the  Indian 
tribes,  and  they  had  a  good  deal  of  fighting  to  do  in  the  old  French 
war,  which  commenced  about  1755. 

2.  The  revolutionary  war  was  a  great  affair.  The  people  were 
fighting  for  independence,  for  liberty.  America  was  poor,  and  Eng- 
land was  rich  and  powerful.  In  this  struggle,  our  country  may  be 
compared  to  a  stout  boy  in  the  grasp  of  a  strong  man,  who  is  trying 
to  bind  him  in  chains.  But  \he  boy  breaks  the  chains  asunder, 
turns  upon  his  oppressor,  and  drives  him  out  of  the  country. 

3.  In  looking  back,  then,  we  see  that  our  forefathers  toiled  and 
suffered  much  to  establish  freedom  in  this  country.  We  are  now 
enjoying  the  fruits  of  their  labors.  Let  us  cherish  their  memory,  for 
they  were  great  and  good  men.  Let  us  be  thankful  to  Heaven,  for 
it  has  sinilled  upon  their  labors. 

4.  Having  taken  a  backward  glance  at  the  history  of  our  country, 

4. 

What  I 

volution 

States  aim  th# 

revolutionary  war?     3.  What  of  our  forefathers? 


2Q2  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

let  us  consider  for  a  moment  its  present  condition.  Look  at  the 
towns  and  cities  that  are  scattered  over  the  country.  Look  at  the 
hills  and  valleys,  covered  with  fruit  trees  and  gardens,  and  yielding 
their  annual  harvests. 

5.  Look  at  the  rivers,  ploughed  with  whizzing  steamboats ;  Jook 
at  the  canals,  bearing  along  their  burden  of  produce  and  merchandise. 
Look  at  the  steam-cars,  hurrying  along  like  birds  upon  the  wine ; 
look  at  our  seaports,  and  see  the  forest  of  shipping  that  is  crowded 
into  their  harbors. 

6.  Visit  the  city  of  New  York,  a  busy,  buzzing  hive  of  men,  con- 
taining nearly  three  hundred  thousand  people.  Observe  its  beautiful 
streets,  its  fine  houses,  the  banks,  the  churches,  and  other  public 
edifices. 

7.  Enter  the  shops  and  notice  the  beautiful  articles  of  merchandise 
brought  from  China,  from  Java,  from  Hindostan,  from  Arabia,  from 
all  the  shores  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  from  England,  France,  Hol- 
land, and  all  the  borders  of  the  Baltic. 

S.  Go  to  the  top  of  the  City  Hall,  where  you  can  have  a  view  of 
the  surrounding  waters ;  notice  the  fringe  of  masts  encircling  the 
southern  portion  of  the  city.  See  there  the  flag  of  every  commercial 
country  under  heaven.  See  there,  too,  ships,  sloops,  schooners,  and 
steamboats,  coming  and  going  like  bees  in  a  summer  morning,  all 
bringing  their  burden  to  the  hive. 

9.  What  a  beautiful  sight  is  this,  and  in  a  country,  too,  which  has 
been  settled  but  little  more  than  two  hundred  years!  And,  if  you 
would  know  more  of  our  country,  get  into  a  steamboat  and  sail  up 
the  Hudson,  one  of  the  finest  streams  on  the  face  of  the  globe. 

10.  Visit  Troy,  Albany,  Utica,  Rochester,  and  Buffalo;  all  of  them 
interesting  and  flourishing  towns.  Observe  the  numerous  villages, 
the  handsome  houses,  and  the  throngs  of  happy  people  that  inhabit 
the  state  of  New  York. 

11.  If  you  are  fond  of  travelling,  cross  Lake  Erie  in  a  steamboat, 
and  proceed  to  Ohio.  See  there  a  country  that  has  not  been  settled 
fifty  years,  now  studded  over  with  thriving  towns  and  villages.  Go 
to  Cincinnati,  Louisville,  Nashville,  St.  Louis,  and  proceed  on  the  bo- 
som of  the  great  Mississippi  to  New  Orleans. 

12.  If  you  are  not  satisfied  with  all  this,  cross  to  the  Pacific;  visit 
the  gold  mines  of  California;  proceed  to  Oregon,  and  from  this  point 
of  view  consider  the  extent  and  resources  of  these  United  States. 

13.  When  you  have  seen  these  interesting  things,  go  home  and  re- 
flect upon  them.  Sit  quietly  down,  review  the  past,  consider  the 
present,  and  look  forward  to  the  future.  What  a  glorious  prospect 
for  our  country,  if  our  present  government  continues,  if  the  people  are 
true  to  their  own  interests,  and  maintain  the  liberty  their  fathers  left 
them ! 

4.  5.  What  shall  we  see  in  looking  at  our  country  ?  6.  What  shall  we  observe  in  the 
city  of  New  York?  8.  What  shall  we  see  on  the  waters  around?  9.  What  of  the  Hud- 
eon?  10.  Cities  of  New  York?  11.  State  of  Ohio?  13.  What  of  the  valley  of  the 
Mississippi  ? 


'    AMERICA.  203 

14.  I  say,  if  the  people  are  true  to  their  own  interests.  We  live  in 
a  fine  country,  we  have  a  good  form  of  government,  but  these  will 
not  insure  happiness.  If  the  people  become  indolent,  or  if  they  be- 
come wicked,  ruin  and  desolation  will  visit  this  land.  Government 
may  be  compared  to  a  house ;  those  who  live  in  it  must  take  good 
care  of  it. 

15.  They  must  keep  their  door3  and  windows  shut,  to  prevent 
storms  from  driving  in.  If  any  part  decays,  or  is  injured  by  a  tempest, 
it  must  be  repaired.  The  fires  must  be  watched  at  night.  In  short, 
the  whole  establishment  must  betaken  care  of  by  people  who  are 
worthy  of  being  trusted,  people  who  are  skilful,  and  who  cannot  be 
tempted  to  neglect  their  duty. 

16.  If  the  house  is  intrusted  to  careless,  ignorant,  or  faithless  people, 
it  may  take  fire,  and  the  inhabitants  be  burned  up.  Or  it  may  decay 
and  fall  down  upon  the  heads  of  those  who  dwell  in  it.  Or  it  may 
become  leaky,  so  as  to  admit  the  cold  wind,  or  the  driving  rain  or  snow. 
It  may  thus  become  a  miserable  and  comfortless  habitation. 

17.  It  is  so  with  government.  If  careless,  ignorant,  or  faithless  ru- 
lers are  chosen  to  take  care  of  the  country,  wars  and  commotions  may 
follow;  poverty  and  vice  may  spread  over  the  land;  ignorance  and 
misery  may  take  the  place  of  knowledge  and  prosperity.  Thus  the 
government,  which,  like  a  house,  is  designed  to  protect  us,  when  ill 
managed,  like  a  house  on  fire,  or  borne  down  by  the  tempest,  may  be 
the  cause  of  our  ruin. 

IS.  Think  of  these  things,  my  young  readers,  and  when  you  be- 
come men,  always  use  your  influence  to  have  no  other  rulers  than 
those  who  are  capable,  honest,  and  sincere  friends  of  the  country. 


CHAPTER  CLXXVIL— AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

About  South  America.     El  Dorado,  and  the  Fountain 
of  Youth. 

1.  No  sooner  had  Columbus  discovered  America,  than  the  pope  of 
Rome  claimed  it  all  as  his  own.  None  of  the  Catholic  kings  of  Europe 
were  supposed  to  hr»ve  any  right  to  plant  colonies  there,  unless  his 
holiness  granted  them  permission. 

2.  Alexander  the  Sixth  was  pope  at  that  time.  He  very  generous- 
ly bestowed  one  half  of  the  new  world  on  the  king  of  Spain,  and  the 
other  half  on  the  king  of  Portugal.  These  kings  then  sent  out  ships 
and  men,  who  conquered  immense  territories,  and  reduced  many  of 
the  inhabitants  to  slavery. 

3.  The  Spaniards  first  took  possession  of  the  West  Indies.  They 
built  the  city  of  Havana,  on  the  island  of  Cuba,  and  the  Spanish  gov- 

14.  To  what  may  government  be  compared  ?  17.  What  will  happen  to  the  land  if  faith- 
less rulers  are  chosen?  Ch.  CLXXVII.— 1.  What  of  the  pope  of  Rome?  2.  What  did 
pope  Alexander  do?    What  of  loo  kiuga  of  Spain  and  Portugal ' 

25* 


294 


SCHOOL    HISTORY 


ernor  had  his  residence  there.  Other  nations  afterwards  took  pos* 
session  of  these  islands.  The  great  object  of  all  who  came  to  Ameri- 
ca, at  this  period,  was  to  get  gold  and  silver.  The  most  wonderful 
stories  were  told  about  the  abundance  of  these  metals  in  some  parts 
of  the  western  continent. 


Natives  of  South  America. 

4.  There  was  supposed  to  be  a  kingdom,  called  El  Dorado,  or  the 
Gilded,  which  was  thus  described.  The  king  was  every  day  covered 
with  powdered  gold,  so  that  he  looked  like  a  golden  image.  The 
palace  of  this  glittering  monarch  was  built  of  brilliant  marble  as 
white  as  snow.  The  pillars  of  the  palace  were  porphyry  and  alabas- 
ter. Its  entrance  was  guarded  by  two  lions,  who  were  fastened  to  a 
tall  column  by  chains  of  massive  gold. 

5.  After  passing  the  lions,  a  fountain  was  seen,  from  which  gushed 
a  continual  shower  of  liquid  silver,  through  four  large  pipes  of  gold. 
The  interior  of  the  palace  was  too  splendid  to  be  described. 

6.  It  contained  an  alter  of  solid  silver,  on  which  was  an  immense 
golden  sun.  Lamps  were  continually  burning,  and  their  dazzling  ra- 
diance was  reflected  from  innumerable  objects  of  silver  and  gold. 
Such  was  the  splendid  fiction,  invented  by  somebody,  and  believed  in 
Europe. 

7.  Numbers  of  adventurers  went  in  search  of  El  Dorado,  and  some 
pretended  that  they  had  really  visited  this  golden  kingdom.  Eut  it 
has  long  since  been  ascertained  that  no  such  kingdom  ever  existed. 

S.  Another  thing  which  the  Spaniards  expected  to  find  in  America, 
was  the  fountain  of  youth.  Far  away  beneath  the  shadows  of  the 
forest,  they  believed  that  there  was  a  fountain,  the  bright  waters  of- 
which  would  wash  away  wrinkles,  and  turn  gray  hair  dark  again. 

9.  Oh,  if  there  were  any  such  fountain,  old  Peter  Parley  would 

3.  What  of  the  Spaniards?  What  was  the  great  object  of  all  who  came  to  America? 
What  of  gold  and  silver?  4.  5.  6.  Describe  the  kingdom  of  El  Dorado  as  it  was  supposed 
to  exist.     8.  9.  10.  Describe  the  fountain  of  youth  I 


AMERICA.  295 

iourney  tbither,  lame  as  he  is,  and  plunge  head  foremost  into  its  bo- 
som !  After  a  while,  the  children  of  America  would  ask, — "Where 
is  that  lame  old  gentleman  who  used  to  tell  us  stories  ?" 

10.  And  there  would  be  a  little  rosy  boy  among  them,  a  stranger, 
whom  they  had  never  seen  before.  He  would  cry  out, "I  was  old 
Peter  Parley;  but  1  have  been  bathing  in  the  fountain  of  youth,  and 
now  I  am  a  boy  again  !  Come,  let  us  see  which  will  hop  farthest !" 


CHAPTER  CLXXVIIL— AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

History  of  the  Mexican  Territories.    Texas.    Guatimala. 

1.  Though  there  was  no  El  Dorado  in  America,  there  was  gold 
enough  to  satisfy  even  the  Spaniards,  if  such  rapacious  people  ever 
could  be  satisfied.     The  empire  of  Mexico  contained  immense  riches. 

2.  This  country  is  in  the  southern  part  of  North  America.  It  ex- 
tends across  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  to  the  Pacific  Ocean.  Its  capi- 
tal city,  which  is  likewise  called  Mexico,  is  one  of  the  most  magnifi- 
cent in  the  world. 

3.  When  America  was  first  discovered,  the  city  of  Mexico  was 
even  more  splendid  than  it  is  now.  It  had  stately  temples  and  houses, 
which  were  profusely  ornamented  with  gold.  Its  inhabitants  were 
more  civilized  than  any  other  natives  of  America. 

4.  In  the  year  1519,  Fernando  Cortez,  a  Spaniard,  invaded  Mexico, 
with  only  about  six  hundred  men.  But,  as  his  followers  wore  iron 
armor,  and  had  muskets  and  cannon,  they  were  able  to  fight  whole 
armies  of  the  Mexicans. 

5.  The  emperor  of  Mexico  was  named  Montezuma.  He  received 
Cortez  and  his  men  with  great  civility,  for  he  was  afraid  to  quarrel 
with  them.  But,  after  a  short  time,  Cortez  threw  Montezuma  into 
prison,  and  loaded  him  with  chains. 

6.  Finding  himself  in  so  unhappy  a  situation,  Montezuma  consented 
to  become  a  vassal  of  the  king  of  Spain.  But  the  Mexicans  raised  an 
insurrection,  and  when  Montezuma  endeavored  to  quiet  them,  they 
uttered  shouts  of  scorn  and  anger. 

7.  So  offended  were  they,  that  they  discharged  arrows  and  stones 
at  him.  One  arrow  struck  poor  Montezuma  in  the  breast,  and  stretched 
him  on  the  ground.  He  would  not  suffer  the  wound  to  be  dressed, 
and,  in  a  few  days,  this  ill-fated  emperor  died. 

8.  The  Mexicans  elected  Guatimozin,  son-in-law  of  Montezuma,  to 
succeed  him.  He  made  a  vigorous  attack  on  the  Spaniards,  and 
drove  them  from  the  city  of  Mexico.  But  Cortez  soon  came  back 
with  an  army,  and  conquered  the  whole  country. 

9.  The  emperor  Guatimozin  was  taken  prisoner.     He  refused  to 

Ch.  CLXXVIIL— 1.  Wliat  of  cold  in  Mexico  ?  What  of  Mexico  ?  Capital?  3.  De 
»cribe  I  Lc  city  of  Mexico  ?  4.  When  did  Cortez  invade  Mexico  ?  5.  What  of  Montezu- 
ma ?  Cortez?  6.  What  did  Montezuma  in  i  What  of  the  Mexicans  ?  7.  Fate  of  Mon- 
tezuma ?     8.  What  did  QnatiinoziD   do?     Cortez?      0.  What   was  doue   to   Guatimozin.' 


•296 


SCHOOL    H1STOR Y 


confess  where  his  treasures  were  concealed.  Some  of  the  Spaniards 
then  laid  him  at  full  length  on  a  bed  of  burning  coals.  There  Guati- 
mozin  writhed  in  agony,  till  he  was  delivered  by  Cortez,  who  had 
borne  no  part  in  this  horrible  cruelty.  But,  about  three  years  after- 
wards, Guatimozin  was  suspected  of  being  engaged  in  a  conspiracy, 
and  Cortez  sentenced  him  to  be  hanged. 


10.  It  has  been  affirmed,  that  Cortez  and  his  soldiers  killed  four 
millions  of  the  Mexicans,  in  completing  the  conquest  of  the  country. 
He  pretended  that  his  only  object  was  to  convert  the  people  to  the 
Christian  religion.  But  he  and  his  soldiers  acted  like  fiends,  rather 
than  Christians. 

11.  From  the  time  of  its  conquest  by  Cortez,  the  Mexican  empire 
continued  under  the  government  of  Spain,  till  the  year  1S10.  A  re- 
volution then  took  place. 

12.  In  1813,  the  Mexican  provinces  declared  themselves  free  and 
independent.  But  their  independence  was  not  established  till  several 
vears  afierwards.  They  are  now  called  the  United  Mexican  States 
One  of  these  provinces  was  Texas,  which  has  lately  become  inde- 
pendent. 

13.  In  1845,  Texas,  which  had  belonged  to  Mexico,  was  admitted  as 
a  state  into  our  Union.  In  1846  a  war  began  between  Mexico  and  the 
United  States,  which  lasted  for  two  years. 

14.  Our  armies,  under  -generals  Taylor  and  Scott,  defeated  the 
'Mexicans  in  many  battles,  and  finally  their  chief  towns,  including  the 
capital,  were  in  our  hands.  Peace  was  made  in  1848,  by  which  we 
gained  California,  the  gold  mines  of  which  have  since  produced  a 
wonderful  effect  on  the  whole  civilized  world. 

Ills  Site?  10.  What,  is  said  of  Cortez?  What  excuse  did  he  give  for  his  cruelty?  11. 
TIow  lona;  was  the  Mexican  empire  under  the  government  of  Spain?  What  took  place  in 
1810!  12.  What  in  1813?  What  are  they  now  called  ?  1^.  What  of  Texas  ?  14.  War? 
15.  What  of  Guatimala? 


PERU. 


297 


15.  The  country  called  Guatimala,  or  the  United  States  of  Central 
America,  is  an  independent  republic ;  the  city  of  Guatimala  is  its 
capital.  The  several  states,  however,  have  been  much  shaken  by  agi- 
tations, and  the  general  government  is  little  regarded  by  them. 

16.  The  late  travels  of  Mr.  Stevens,  however,  has  given  a  new  in- 
terest to  Guatimala.  He  has  described  the  ruins  of  several  ancient 
cities  there,  which  belonged  to  the  native  Indians',  and  which  show 
that  they  had  made  great  advances  in  architecture,  sculpture,  and 
oilier  arts. 


CHAPTER  CLXXIX.— AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

Spanish  Peruvian  Territories. 


Spanish  Inhabitants  of  Peru. 

1.  A  few  years  after  the  conquest  of  Mexico  by  Cortez,  the  Span- 
iards also  conquered  the  vast  empire  of  Peru,  in  South  America.  At 
the  present  day,  Peru  is  bounded  north  by  the  republic  of  Equator, 
east  by  Brazil,  south  by  Bolivia  and  the  Pacific  Ocean,  and  west  by 
the  Pacific.  But  when  the  Spaniards  first  invaded  it,  the  Peruvian 
empire  included  a  much  larger  space. 

2.  The  sovereigns  of  this  empire  were  called  Incas,  and  the  Peru- 
vians believed  that  their  first  inca  was  a  child  of  the  sun.  The  in- 
habitants were  worshippers  of  the  sun. 

3.  Peru  contained  many  magnificent  cities,  and  gold  was  more 
abundant  than  even  in  Mexico.  Of  course,  no  sooner  did  the  Span- 
iards hear  of  it,  than  they  determined  to  make  themselves  masters 
of  the  country. 

4.  The  first  invader  was  Francis  Pizarro.     In  1531,  he  marched 

Ch.  CLXXIX. —  I.  When  was  Peru  conquered  ?  What  of  Peru  at  the  present  lime  ? 
What  of  it  when  the  Spaniards  first  invaded  it  ?  2.  What  of  the  native  sovereigns  of  Peru  r 
The  people?  3.  What  did  Peru  contain?  What  did  the  Spaniards  determine  to  do? 
4    When  did  Pizarro  go  to  Peru? 


298  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

into  Teru,  and  took  the  inca  prisoner  in  his  own  palace.  The  iuc;i*s 
name  was  Atabalipa.  To  regain  his  freedom,  he  offered  Pizarro  as 
much  gold  as  would  fill  a  spacious  hall  of  his  palace,  piled  as  high  as 
he  could  reach.  ' 

5.  But  after  the  gold  had  been  delivered,  Pizarro  refused  to  give 
Atabalipa  his  freedom.  He  was  not  satisfied  with  the  inca's  treasure, 
but  was  determined  to  have  his  blood.  So  he  condemned  him  to 
death  ;  and  Atabalipa  was  accordingly  strangled  and  burnt. 

6.  When  he  had  conquered  tbe  Peruvians,  Pizarro  quarrelled  with 
one  of  his  chief  officers,  named  Almagro.  They  made  war  upon  each 
other,  and  Pizarro  caused  Almagro  to  be  beheaded.  Soon  afterwards 
he  was  himself  murdered. 

7.  In  the  course  of  time,  the  Peruvian  empire  was  divided  into  sev- 
eral provinces.  All  of  them  were  under  the  government  of  Spain. 
The  Spanish  territories  comprised  nearly  all  the  western  part  of  Soutl 
America. 

S.  But  the  kingdom  of  Spain  became  so  weak  that  it  lost  i is  au- 
thority over  these  colonies.  The  first  resistance  to  the  government 
was  made  Avhile  Joseph  Bonaparte  was  king  of  Spain  ;  and  the  people 
would  not  return  to  their  allegiance,  when  the  former  king  was  again 
on  the  throne. 

9.  The  different  states  in  America,  which  were  once  Spanish  prov- 
inces, are  called  the  United  Mexican  States,  the  Republic  of  Central 
America,  New  Grenada,  Venezuela,  Equator,  Pern,  Bolivia,  Chili, 
Buenos  Ayres,  Uruguay,  and  Paraguay.  Most  of  them  are  in  a  very 
unsettled  condition. 


CHAPTER  CLXXX.-AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

Account  of  the  Brazilian  Territories. 

1.  The  vast  country  of  Brazil  is  bounded  north  by  New  Grenada, 
Venezuela,  and  Guiana ;  east  by  the  Atlantic  Ocean  ;  south  by  the  At- 
lantic, Uruguay,  and  Paraguay;  and  west  by  Bolivia,  Peru,  and  the 
republic  of  Equator.  It  is  larger  than  the  whole  United  States  to- 
gether. 

2.  When  the  Spaniards  were  making  conquests  in  other  parts  of 
America,  the  Portuguese  came  to  Brazil.  It  is  said  that,  near  the 
river  Amazon,  they  found  a  nation  of  women,  whose  lives  were  spent 
in  war. 

3.  We  do  not  read  that  the  Portuguese  committed  such  horrible 
cruelties  as  the  Spaniards  did.  The  reason  was,  that  the  natives  of 
Brazil  possessed  but  little  gold;  and  the  Portuguese  hardly  thought 
it  worth  their  while  to  colonize  the  country. 

Who  was  the  Inca  ?  What  did  he  do  ?  5.  Fate  of  Atabalipa  ?  6.  What  of  Pizarro  and 
Almagro?  What  became  of  Pizarro  ?  7.  What  of  the  Peruvian  empire  ?  What  of  the 
Spanish  territories?  S.  What  of  the  kingdom  of  Spain?  The  people  ?  9.  What  of  the 
states  in  America  once  Spanish  provinces  ?  Ch.  CLXXX.— 1.  Boundaries  of  Erazil  ?  Ex- 
tent ?  2.  What  of  the  Portuguese  ?  Amazons  ?  3.  Why  were  the  Portuguese  uot  aj 
cruel  as  the  Spaniards. 


WEST    INDIES.  299 

4.  During  many  years  the  guv.ernment  of  Portugal  was  accustomed 
to  send  nobody  but  criminals  thither ;  so  that  to  be  sent  to  Brazil  was 
considered  almost  as  bad  as  being  sent  out  of  the  world. 

5.  In  154S,  a  multitude  of  Jews  were  banished  to  Brazil.  They 
planted  the  sugar-cane  there  and  successfully  cultivated  it.  When 
the  king  of  Portugal  found  that  the  country  was  rich  and  fruitful,  he 
sent  over  a  governor,  in  order  that  he  might  not  lose  his  share  of  the 
wealth. 

6.  France,  Spain,  and  Holland,  likewise  attempted  to  get  posses- 
sion of  Brazil.  But  the  Portuguese  resisted  them,  and  finally  became 
sole  masters  of  the  country.  Perhaps,  if  the  other  nations  had  known 
of  the  hidden  riches  of  Brazil,  they  would  not  have  given  up  their 
claims  so  easily. 

7.  A  long  time  after  the  settlement  of  the  country,  valuable  mines 
of  gold  were  discovered.  Considerable  quantities  of  this  precious 
metal  are  also  found  in  the  beds  of  the  rivers,  mixed  with  sand  and 
gravel.  The  topaz  and  the  diamond  are  sometimes  seen  glittering 
among  the  gold. 

8.  The  Bio  Pardo,  though  it  is  a  very  small  and  shallow  stream, 
produces  a  great  number  of  diamonds.  Other  rivers  are  likewise  en- 
riched with  them.  Negro  slaves  are  employed  in  washing  the  sand 
and  gravel  of  these  rivers,  and  when  one  of  them  finds  a  very  large 
diamond,  he  receives  his  freedom. 

9.  In  1S06,  the  king  of  Portugal  removed  to  Brazil,  and  established 
his  court  in  the  city  of  Rio  Janeiro.  Fifteen  years  afterwards,  he  re- 
turned to  Lisbon.  His  son  Pedro  was  then  proclaimed  emperor  of 
Brazil. 

10.  In  1831,  the  Brazilians  became  discontented  with  the  govern- 
ment of  Pedro.  He  therefore  gave  up  the  imperial  crown  to  his  son, 
who  was  then  only  five  years  old.  This  boy  was  styled  the  empe- 
ror of  Brazil;  but  the  government  was  carried  on  by  a  council  of 
regency,  till  a  few  years  since,  when  the  emperor  assumed  the 
government. 

CHAPTER  CLXXXI.— AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

The  West  Indies. 

1.  I  must  not  close  my  story  about  America,  without  giving  you 
6ome  little  account  of  the  West  India  islands,  lying  in  the  Atlantic 
Ocean  between  North  and  South  America.  These  consist  of  thrt-e 
clusters,  called  the  Bahamas,  the  Antilles,  and  the  Caribbees.  The 
Bahamas  are  the  most  northerly  of  the  three  groups,  and  lie  near  to 

4.  Who  were  sent  to  lirazil  ?  5.  What  happened  in  15-18  ?  What  of  the  Jews  ?  6.  What 
of  other  countries  ?  7.  What  were  discovered  in  Brazil?  8.  What  of  the  Rio  Pardo  ? 
What  of  the  negro  slaves?  9.  When  did  the  king  of  Portugal  remove  to  Brazil  ?  Where 
did  he  establish  hit  court ?  When  did  he  return  to  Lisbon  ?  What  of  his  son  Pedro  ?  10. 
What  of  the  Brazilians  in  the  year  1S31  ?  What  did  Pedro  do?  Plow  is  lirazil  now  gov- 
erned? Ch.  CLXXXI.— 1.  Where  are  the  West  India  Islands  situated?  Of  what  three 
groups  do  the}  consist?     What  of  the  Bahama  islauds? 


300  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

Florik.     They  are  about  six  hundred  in  number.     Most  of  them  a?8 
small,  consisting  of  sand  and  rocks,  and  are  uninhabited  by  man. 

2.  These  however,  are  the  resort  of  a  great  variety  of  sea-fowl. 
Many  of  the  birds  which  visit  the  lakes  and  shores  of  the  United 
States  in  summer,  retire  to  these  lonely  islands  in  winter,  where  they 
find  a  secure  and  pleasant  abode.  The  Bahama  islands  belong  to 
Great  Britain,  and  contain  about  seventeen  thousand  inhabitants. 
The  principal  are  Turks  island,  Providence,  and  San  Salvador,  or  Cat 
Island.     This  last  was  that  which  Columbus  first  discovered. 

3.  The  Antilles,  occupying  the  middle  portion  of  the  West  Indies, 
consist  of  Cuba,  which  is  the  largest,  and  belongs  to  Spain  ;  Hayti,  or 
St.  Domingo,  which  is  independent,  and  governed  by  blacks;  Porto 
Rico,  which  belongs  to  Spain;  Jamaica,  which  belongs  to  Great  Bri- 
tain, and  a  few  smaller  islands. 

4.  The  Caribbee  islands  are  very  numerous,  and  lie  southeasterly 
of  the  others.  They  stretch  from  Porto  Ptico  in  a  semicircular  group 
to  the  shores  of  South  America.  They  belong  to  different  European 
governments.  The  most  celebrated  of  these  islands  are  Martinique, 
.Barbadoes,  St.  Thomas,  Tobago,  St.  Lucia,  St.  Vincent,  Gaudaloupe, 
Antigua,  St.  Christophers,  Dominica,  Santa  Cruz,  and  Trinidad. 

5.  The  climate  of  the  West  Indies  is  that  of  perpetual  summer. 
Frost  and  snow  never  come  to  visit  them.  The  trees  are  ever  cloth- 
ed with  leaves,  and  many  of  the  shrubs  and  plants  continue  at  all 
times-  to  be  adorned  with  blossoms. 

6.  The  fruits  which  are  common  to  us,  such  as  apples,  pears,  cher- 
ries, and  peaches,  are  unknown  in  these  regions;  but  oranges,  figs, 
lemons,  pineapples,  and  many  other  nice  things,  are  abundant. 

7.  The  people  do  not  cultivate  Indian  corn,  wheat,  rye,  oats,  and 
barley,  as  we  do,  but  they  raise  sugar-cane,  from  which  they  extract 
sugar  and  molasses,  and  they  cultivate  coffee,  cotton,  indigo,  tobacco, 
cocoa,  allspice,  and  other  things. 

S.  The  forests  contain  mahogany,  lignum  vhse,  iron  wood,  and 
other  woods  useful  in  the  arts.  Among  the  birds  are  parrots  of  vari- 
ous kinds,  some  of  which  are  not  bigger  than  a  bluebird.  A  friend  of 
mine  made  me  a  present  of  one  of  these  little  fellows  a  few  years 
since.  Instead  of  silting  upon  his  perch,  J  have  known  him  to  hang 
by  his  claws  to  the  top  wires'  of  the  cage,  with  his  head  downwards, 
and  thus  remain  during  the  whole  night. 

9.  Among  the  quadrupeds  of  the  West  Indies  are  some  curious  little 
monkeys,  and  several  kinds  of  lizards.  The  chameleon  is  the  most 
interesting  of  these.  He  was  formerly  supposed  to  live  on  air,  and 
to  have  the  power  of  changing  his  color  at  will.  But  it  is  now  ascer- 
tained that  he  often  makes  a  sly  meal  upon  insects  that  come  in  his 
way,  and  that  his  color  does  not  vary  more  than  that  of  several  other 
animals  of  a  similar  kind. 

10.  Although  the  West  Indies  are  never  disturbed  by  winter,  they 

2.  What  of  sea-fowl?  To  whom  do  the  Bahamas  belong  ?  Which  are  (he  principal 
ones?  3.  What  can  you  say  of  the  Antilles?  4.  What  of  tlie^Carribbee  islands?  The  prin- 
cipal ones?  5.  What  of  the  climate  of  the  West  Indies?  G.  Fruits?  7.  Production*  '  8. 
Forests?     Birds?     9.  What  of  monkeys?     The  chameleon  ? 


WEST    INDIES.  301 

are  often  visited  by  terrible  hurricanes.  These  sometimes  tome  so 
suddenly  as  to  tear  the  sails  from  the  masts  of  vessels,  and  often  over- 
turn the  houses  and  trees  upon  the  land. 


CHAPTER  CLXXXIL— AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

West  Indies  continued. 

1.  If  you  were  to  visit  the  West  Indies  at  the  present  day,  you 
would  find  them  inhabited  by  Europeans  and  their  descendants,  to- 
gether with  a  great  many  negroes.  But  you  would  meet  with  none 
of  the  native  Indians.     These  have  long  since  disappeared. 

2.  You  already  know  that  Columbus  first  discovered  one  of  the  Ba- 
hamas, to  which  he  gave  the  name  of  St.  Salvador,  and  which  is  now 
called  Cat  Island.  Here  he  found  a  great  many  people  who  appear 
to  have  been  nearly  the  same  as  the  Indians  which  formerly  inhabit- 
ed our  country. 

3.  After  leaving  S.  Salvador,  Columbus  visited  Cuba  and  St.  Domin- 
go. Both  of  these  were  thronged  with  Indians.  It  is  supposed  that 
Cuba  alone  contained  several  millions.  They  appeared  to  live  very 
happily,  for  the  climate  was  mild,  and  the  soil  fruitful.  They  receiv- 
ed Columbus  with  kindness,  and  rendered  him  every  service  in  their 
power.  They  little  thought  of  the  cruel  consequences  which  were 
soon  to  follow. 

4.  Not  many  years  after  the  discovery  of  the  West  India  islands, 
the  largest  and  finest  of  them  were  taken  possession  of  by  the  Spanish 
government.  The  Indians  were  a  gentle  race,  and  were  easily  subju- 
gated. The  Spaniards  did  seem  to  regard  them  as  human  beings, 
but  rather  as  wild  animals,  who  were  to  be  exterminated.  They 
shot  them  down  by  thousands,  and  even  trained  bloodhounds  to  pur- 
sue them. 

5.  In  this  way,  the  numerous  islanders  who  once  swarmed  like 
bees  upon  every  hill-side  and  in  every  valley  of  these  beautiful  regions, 
were  reduced  to  a  very  small  number.  Most  of  these  were  treated 
like  slaves,  and  many  of  them  were  compelled  to  work  in  mines,  where 
they  soon  perished  from  hard  labor,  to  which  they  were  unaccustom- 
ed, and  for  want  of  that  free  ai^  which  Heaven  had  sent  them  before 
the  Europeans  came  to  deprive  them  of  it. 

6.  Thus,  by  degrees,  the  native  West  Indians  vanished,  and  their 
fair  lands  came  into  the  possession  of  various  European  governments. 
Spain  held  Cuba  and  Porto  Rico  in  her  firm  grasp.  England  got  pos- 
session of  Jamaica,  the  Bermudas,  and  some  other  islands.  France 
had  St.  Domingo,  Martinique,  Guadaloupe,  and  several  others.  Some 
of  the  smaller  islands  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  Dutch,  Danes,  &c. 

10.  What  of  hurricanes?  Ch.  CLXXXIL— 1.  How  are  the  West  Indies  inhabited? 
J.  What  of  Cat  island?  What  people  did  Columbus  find  there?  3.  What  islands  did  he 
nextvisit?  Whatof  the  Indians  ?  4.  5.  What  of  (he  Spanish  government  ?  How  did  the 
Spaniards  treat  the  Indians?  6.  Which  islands  did  Spain  obtain  possession  of  ?  EngUud? 
France  ?     What  of  smaller  islands  ? 

26 


802  SCHOOL   HISTORY. 

7.  The  first  object  of  the  Europeans  after  the  discovery  of  America, 
was  to  obtain  gold  and  silver.  They  seemed  to  imagine  that  all  the 
hills  and  mountains  in  this  continent  were  filled  with  these  precious 
metals.  But  this  illusion  soon  vanished,  and  in  the  West  Indies  the 
people  began  to  cultivate  the  soil,  instead  of  digging  into  the  bosom' 
of  the  earth  for  gold  and  silver. 

8.  They  discovered  that  the  land  was  peculiarly  suited  to  the  rais-! 
ing  of  sugar-cane,  oranges,  pineapples,  and  other  productions  of  a  tro-j 
pical  climate.  To  these,  then,  they  devoted  their  attention,  and  the 
lands  soon  became  very  productive.  In  order  to  till  them,  the  people 
sent  to  Africa  for  negroes,  who  were  brought  by  thousands  and  tens 
of  thousands,  and  compelled  to  Avork  as  slaves.  Nearly  all  the  labor, 
at  the  present  day,  is  performed  by  negro  slaves. 


CHAPTER  CLXXXIIL— AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

West  Indies  continued. 

1.  I  shall  not  undertake  to  tell  you  of  all  the  interesting  events 
which  have  occurred  in  the  West  Indies.  Several  of  these  islands 
have  often  changed  hands,  sometimes  belonging  to  one  government, 
and  sometimes  to  another.  They  have  frequently  been  shaken  by 
earthquakes,  and  often  desolated  by  whirlwinds.  But  of  these  events 
I  cannot  tell  you  now. 

2.  I  must  not,  however,  overlook  the  story  of  Hayti.  This  fine 
island  was  discovered  by  Columbus  on  his  first  voyage,  and  here  he 
left  a  part  of  his  men,  who  made  the  first  European  settlement  on  this 
side  of  the  Atlantic.  The  island  was  called  Hayti  by  the  natives,  and 
Hispaniola  by  the  Spaniards.  The  settlement  increased  rapidly,  and 
soon  the  whole  island  became  subject  to  Spain.  In  after  times,  the 
French  obtained  possession  of  a  portion  of  the  country,  and  until  about 
forty  years  ago,  it  was  shared  between  the  French  and  Spanish  gov- 
ernments. 

3.  But  the  negro  slaves  had  become  much  more  numerous  than 
the  white  inhabitants,  and,  in  1791,  they  rose  against  their  masters. 
France,  at  this  time,  was  in  a  state  of  revolution,  and  could  afford  no 
aid  to  put  down  the  insurrection.  The  negroes  therefore  slaughtered 
the  white  people  by  thousands,  pillaging  their  houses,  and  then  set- 
ting them  on  fire.  A  few  escaped,  but  a  large  proportion  were 
killed. 

4.  The  negroes  now  considered  themselves  independent,  and  began 
to  form  a  government  of  their  own.  After  various  revolutions,  the 
whole  island  was  formed  into  a  sort  of  republic,  the  officers  of  which 

7.  What  did  the  Europeans  expect  to  find  abundant  in  America  ?  Result  of  these  expect- 
ations? S.  What  did  they  discover?  What  of  negro  slaves  ?  Ch.  CLXXXIIL— 1.  What 
of  some  of  the  West  India  islands?  2.  Who  discovered  Hayti'  What  settlement  wa» 
made?  Names  of  the  island?  To  what  country  did  it  become  subject?  What  of  France  ' 
3.  What  was  done  in  1791  ?    4.  What  of  the  negroes  ?     Their  government  ? 


WEST  INDIES.  303 

were  negroes  or  mulattoes,  and  so  it  continues  to  this  day.  The 
people  are,  on  the  whole,  pretty  well  governed,  and  the  state  of  so- 
ciety is  improving.  Nearly  all  the  inhabitants  are  colored  people, 
hut  many  of  them  are  intelligent,  and  carry  on  the  various  concerns 
of  agriculture  and  commerce  with  skill  and  success. 

o.  Before  I  leave  the  West  Indies,  I  must  say  a  few  words  about 
the  buccaneers,  a  famous  set  of  sea-robbers,  who  infested  these 
islands  during  the  seventeenth  century.  These  at  first  consisted  of 
men  from  England  and  France,  who  settled  on  the  western  coast  of 
St.  Domingo  and  the  neighboring  island  of  Tortuga,  about  the  year 
1030. 

6.  For  a  while,  they  lived  by  hunting  wild  animals,  but  when  they 
became  numerous,  they  procured  vessels,  and  went  forth  upon  the 
sea  to  rob  and  plunder  whomsoever  they  might  meet.  This  business 
succeeded  so  well,  that  a  great  many  desperate  adventurers  from  all 
parts  of  Europe  united  themselves  to  the  buccaneers.  They  therefore 
procured  larger  vessels,  which  were  equipped  in  the  best  manner  for 
attack.  These  were  filled  with  daring  seamen,  and  commanded  by 
bold  leaders. 

7.  In  this  manner  the  buccaneers  became  very  formidable.  Their 
vessels  hovered  in  the  track  of  the  merchant  ships,  ready,  like  hawks 
in  the  neighborhood  of  a  barnyard,  to  pounce  down  upon  whatever 
might  come  in  their  way.  They  often  captured  ships  laden  with  rich 
merchandise,  and  sometimes  with  gold  and  silver. 

S.  In  this  way,  they  amassed  great  wealth  ;  and  such  was  their 
power  at  one  time,  that  they  made  successful  attacks  upon  large 
cities,  sometimes  pillaging  the  inhabitants,  and  sometimes  laying 
them  under  contribution.  But,  at  length,  the  European  governments 
were  roused,  by  the  violence  and  cruelty  of  these  robbers,  to  measures 
of  retaliation.  They  sent  large  vessels  to  cruise  in  the  neighborhood 
of  the  West  Indies,  and  after  many  struggles,  the  buccaneers  were 
finally  exterminated. 

9.  Jn  later  times,  the  West  Indian  seas  have  been  infested  by  pi- 
rates, who  have  captured  a  good  many  trading  vessels,  but  they  are 
now  seldom  met  with. 

State  of  society  ?  5.  What  of  the  buccaneers?  Where  were  they  originally  from? 
Where  and  in  whet  year  did  they  settle  ?  6.  How  did  they  live  for  a  while  ?  What  did 
Uiey  afterwards  do?  By  whom  were  they  joined?  7.  What  of  the  ships  of  the  buccaneers? 
8.  What  of  the  power  of  these  pirates  ?  How  were  they  finally  subdued  ?  9.  What  of 
other  pirates  ? 


304  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  CLXXXIV.— AMERICA  CONTINUED. 

Chronology  of  America. 

A.  D. 

Icerand  and  Greenland  settled S60 

Christianity  introduced  into  Iceland 9S1 

Severe  winter  in  Greenland,  which  destroyed  the  colony    .     .  1408 

Columbus  born 1442 

America  discovered  . 1492 

Cortez  invaded  Mexico 1519 

French  settlements  made  in  Canada 1524 

Pizarro  goes  to  Peru 1531 

First  settlement  in  Virginia  at  Jamestown 1G(W 

Quebec  founded 1608 

First  settlement  in  New  York 1613 

Settlement  at  Plymouth 1620 

Buccaneers  first  assemble  at  St.  Domingo  and  Tortuga  .     .     .  1630 

Maryland  settled 1634 

First  settlement  in  Connecticut 1635 

Providence  settled .     .  1636 

English  got  possession  of  New  York 1664 

King  Philip's  war  begins 1675 

Carolina  settled 16S0 

Pennsylvania  settled 16S1 

The  Carolina's  divided       .     . 1729 

Georgia  founded 1733 

Capture  of  Louisbourg 1745 

Old  French  war  begins 1755 

Capture  of  Louisbourg  by  Wolfe 175S 

Quebec  taken  by  the  English 1759 

Stamp  act  passed 1765 

Boston  massacre 177C 

Destruction  of  tea 1773 

Commencement  of  the  Revolutionary  war 1775 

British  troops  driven  out  of  Boston 1776 

La  Fayette  came  to  America 1777 

Andre  taken  as  a  spy 17S0 

Gates  beat  by  Cornwallis 17S0 

Surrender  of  Cornwallis .  1780 

Peace  between  Great  Britain  and  the  United  States  ....  1783 

Constitution  of  the  United  States  went  into  operation    .     .     .  17S9 

Washington  made  president 1789 

John  Adams  made  president 1797 

Death  of  Washington 1799 

Ch.  CLXXXIV. — Let  the  pupil  he  examined  in  the  Chronological  table  ;   and  let  him 
tell  what  was  happening  in  Europe,  as  events  were  occurring  in  America. 


MALAYSIA.  305 

A.  D. 

Jefferson  made  president    .         .    .    • 1801 

Purchase  of  Louisiana 1803 

King  of  Portugal  goes  to  Brazil 1S06 

Madison  made  president 1809 

Ptevolution  in  Mexico 1S10 

United  States  declare  war  against  Great  Britain 1812 

Mexican  provinces  become  free 1813 

Battle  of  New  Orleans 1815 

James  Monroe  made  president 1817 

Jackson  made  president 1S29 

Don  Pedro  gives  up  the  crown  of  Portugal  to  his  son      .    .     .  1831 

Van  Buren  made  president 1S37 

Harrison  president , 1841 

John  Tyler  president     . 1841 

Peace  -with  Mexico 1848 

Z.  Taylor  president 1849 

Fillmore  president 1850 

Pierce  president 1853 

CHAPTER  CLXXXV.-OCEANIA. 

About  Oceania-      The  Malaysian  Islands. 

1.  Having  now  related  the  history  of  Asia,  Europe,  Africa,  and 
America,  the  reader  will  probably  think  that  my  Universal  History 
ought  to  close  here.  But,  as  an  Irishman  would  say,  there  is  a  fifth 
quarter  of  the  globe,  on  which  I  must  now  employ  my  pen. 

2.  America  ought  no  longer  to  be  called  the  New  World  ;  for  there 
is  a  newer  one,  composed  of  the  islands  which  lie  in  the  Pacific  and 
Indian  Oceans.  The  name  of  Oceania  has  been  given  to  this  region. 
If  all  the  islands  were  put  together,  they  would  cover  a  space  of 
at  least  four  millions  of  square  miles. 

3.  There  are  three  divisions  of  Oceania.  Those  Islands  which  lie 
in  the  Indian  Ocean,  near  the  continent  of  Asia,  are  called  Malaysia. 
The  largest  of  them  are  Borneo,  Sumatra,  and  Java.  Scarcely  any- 
thin?  has  been  written  about  the  history  of  Malaysia,  for  the  islands 
are  chiefly  inhabited  by  the  natives,  who  keep  no  record  of  passing 
events,  and  have  no  desire  to  know  the  deeds  of  their  forefathers. 

4.  The  history  of  Java  is  best  known,  but  it  is  not  very  important 
or  interesting.  It  was  discovered  by  the  Portuguese,  in  the  year 
1510.  They  found  it  an  exceedingly  fertile  island,  producing  abun- 
dance of  sugar,  coffee,  rice,  pepper,  spices,  and  delicious  fruits.  There 
were  also  mines  of  gold,  silver,  diamonds,  rubies,  and  emaralds. 

5.  The  island  is  six  hundred  and  fifty  miles  in  length.  Soon  afier 
its  discovery,  the  Dutch  got  possession  of  a  large  portion  of  it.  They 
built  the  city  of  Batavia,  on  the  northwestern  coast  of  the  island. 

6.  The  city  is  situated  on  a  low,  marshy  plain,  and  canals  of 
stagnant  water  are  seen  in  many  of  the  streets.     But  the  edifices 

Ch.  CLXXXV.— 2.  What  of  Oceania?  Extent  of  Oceania?  3.  What  of  Malaysia  I 
The  natives?  4.  What  of  Java?  When  was  it  discovered  ?  What  are  its  production*. 
Minei?     5.  Length  of  Java?     WIkj  built  Batavia?     Describe  the  city  ? 

26* 


306  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

were  so  splendid,  that  Batavia  was  called  the  queen  of  the  East.  Its 
beauty  was  much  increased  by  the  trees  that  overshadowed  the 
streets  and  canals. 

7.  In  the  year  1780,  the  "'^nulation  amounted  to  a  hundred  and 
sixty  thousand.  People  from  all  the  different  parts  of  the  world 
were  among  them.  But  i  ..  Europeans  were  the  fewest  in  number, 
although  the  government  ,vas  in  their  hands. 

8.  Of  late  years,  Batata  has  been  fast  going  to  decay.  The 
climate  is  so  unhealthy,  that  strangers  are  very  liable  to  be  attacked 
by  dreadful  fevers.  Sometimes  a  vessel  loses  her  whole  crew  by 
death. 

9.  In  the  year  1811,  the  English  took  possession  of  the  island  of 
Java.  They  kept  it  till  1816,  and  then  restored  it  to  its  former 
owners.  The  Dutch  are  said  to  exercise  great  tyranny  over  the 
natives. 


CHAPTER  CLXXXVI.-OCEANIA  CONTINUED. 

The  Australian  Division  of  Oceania. 

1.  The  second  division  of  Oceania  is  called  Australia.  This  com- 
prises New  Holland,  New  Guinea,  Van  Diemen's  Land,  and  other 
islands  in  the  vicinity.  New  Holland  is  an  immense  island,  contain- 
ing three  millions  of  square  miles,  and  is  about  as  large  as  Europe. 

2.  The  natives  of  New  Holland  arc  described  as  the  most  degraded 
people  in  the  world.  They  are  negroes,  and  have  very  lean  arms 
and  legs.  Their  features  have  a  resemblance  to  the  monkey  tribe, 
and  they  are  said  to  be  not  much  handsomer  or  more  intellgent  than 
the  orang-outangs  found  in  the  Malaysian  islands. 

3.  This  great  island  was  discovered  by  the  Dutch,  in  1610,  but  the 
whole  of  it  is  now  claimed  as  a  territory  of  Great  Britain.  Captain 
James  Cook,  the  celebrated  navigator,  took  possession  of  it  in  1770. 

4.  It  contains  several  settlements.  The  eastern  is  called  New  South 
Wales,  and  the  western  the  Swan-river  colony.  New  South  Wales  is 
the  oldest,  and  began  to  be  settled  in  1778.  It  was  then  called  Botany 
Bay. 

5.  The  first  colonists  were  not  a  very  respectable  sort  of  people. 
The  English  government  conceived  the  plan  of  sending  criminals  to 
New  Holland,  instead  of  keeping  them  in  jail,  or  sending  them  to  the 
gallows.     Accordingly,  ship-loads  were  transported  every  year. 

6.  This  cannot  be  considered  a  severe  punishment,  for  the  soil  of 
New  Holland  is  fertile,  and  the  climate  is  delightful.     Perhaps  the 

T.  Population  of  Batavia  in  1730?     8.  What  of  this  city  oflate  years?     Its  climate?     9. 

What  happened- in    1811?     In    1816?     What   of  the   Dutch?         Ch.  CLXXXVI 1. 

What  is  called  Australia  ?  What  is  the  size  of  New  Holland?  2.  What  of  the  natives? 
3.  When  and  hy  whom  was  New  Holland  discovered  ?  Who  now  hold  it  in  possession  ? 
When  was  it  taken  by  captain  Cook  ?  4.  What  of  the  two  colonies  of  New  Holland  ? 
When  was  New  South  Wales  settled?  What  was  the  settlement  called  ?  5.  Who  wera 
the  first  colonists  ?     Who  were  sent  every  year  to  Botany  Bay  ? 


POLYNESIA.  307 

English  would  have  acted  more  equitably,  if  they  had  transported 
the  honest  poor  people,  who  were  starving  at  home. 

7.  But,  during  many  years,  there  were  hardly  any  honest  men  in 
the  new  colony.  Few  of  the  inhabitants  felt  any  reluctance  to  commit 
crimes,  or  were  ashamed  to  be  found  out;  for  they  knew  that  their 
neighbors  were  as  bad  as  themselves. 

S.  In  later  years,  however,  the  people  began  to  improve.  The 
children  of  the  convicts  were  now  growing  up,  and  their  parents  had 
taught  them  to  be  more  virtuous  than  they  themselves  had  been. 

9.  A  young  girl,  who  was  born  in  New  Holland,  was  once  asked 
whether  she  would  like  to  go  to  England.  "  Oh,  no  !"  said  she ;  "  I 
should  be  afraid  to  go  there,  for  the  people  are  all  thieves !"  The 
child  knew  that  a  gang  of  thieves  arrived  in  every  ship  which  came 
from  England,  and  she  naturally  supposed  that  the  English  were  all 
thieves  alike. 

10.  Criminals  still  continue  to  be  transported  from  England ;  and 
they  are  so  numerous,  that  it  has  been  found  necessary  to  plant  new 
colonies  of  them.  Since  the  year  1S04,  VanDiemen's  Land  has  been 
appropriated  to  that  purpose. 

11.  In  1850,  rich  gold  mines  were  found  in  New  Holland,  which  is 
now  generally  called  Australia.  These  have  caused  a  sudden  and 
extraordinary  prosperity  in  these  colonies. 


CHAPTER  CLXXXVII.-OCEANIA  CONTINUED. 

Polynesia.     The  Sandwich  Islands. 

1.  The  third  division  of  Oceania  is  called  Polynesia.  It  consists  of 
many  groups  of  small  islands,  which  are  scattered  over  a  large  ex- 
tent of  the  Pacific  Ocean.  None  of  them  are  inhabited  by  civilized 
people. 

2.  The  Sandwich  islands  are  among  the  most  important  in  Poly- 
nesia. They  consist  of  ten  islands,  of  which  Owhyhee,  or  Hawaii, 
is  the  largest.  These  islands  were  discovered  by  Captain  James 
Cook,  in  1778. 

3.  He  found  them  inhabited  by  a  race  of  people  whose  forms  were 
very  beautiful,  although  their  complexions  were  darker  than  our  own. 
They  appeared  to  be  of  a  gay,  friendly,  and  sociable  disposition. 

4.  But  there  were  some  shocking  customs  among  them.  They 
were  in  the  habit  of  feasting  on  human  flesh,  and  offering  human 
sacrifices  to  their  idols.  They  were  also  great  thieves,  and  had 
many  other  vices. 

7.  What  can  be  said  of  the  colonies  for  some  years?  8.  What  of  them  in  later  years? 
9.  Relate  the  anecdote  of  the  young  New  Holland  girl?  10.  What  has  it  been  found 
necessary  to  do  on  account  of  the  number  of  criminals  sent  to  Now  Holland  ?  What  was 
done  in  1804?  11.  What  of  gold  mines?  Cn.  CI,XXXVII.— 1.  What  of  Polynesia?  Its 
inhabitants  ?  2.  Which  are  the  most  important  islands  of  the  group  ?  Which  is  the  largest 
of  the  Sandwich  islands  ?  Who  discovered  these  islands  In  1778  ?  3.  What  people  did  cap- 
ain  Cook  find  inhabiting  the  Sandwich  islands  ?  4.  What  were  some  of  their  customs?  303 


308  SCHOOL   HISTORY 

5.  The  natives  at  first  behaved  in  a  very  friendly  manner  to  captain 
Cook.  But,  after  some  time,  a  part  of  them  stole  one  of  the  boats 
belonging  to  his  vessel.  The  captain  went  on  shore,  intending  to 
take  the  king  of  Hawaii  prisoner,  and  keep  him  till  the  boat  should 
be  returned. 

6.  But  when  he  had  landed,  the  natives  mustered  in  great  numbers. 
Captain  Cook  found  it  necessary  to  retreat  towards  bis  own  men, 
who  were  waiting  for  him  in  a  boat  near  the  shore.  The  natives 
followed  him,  shouting,  throwing  stones,  and  brandishing  their 
weapons. 

7.  Captain  Cook  pointed  his  musket -at  them,  but  it  only  made 
them  more  tumultuous  and  violent.  He  then  took  aim  and  shot  the 
foremost  native  dead.  In  a  moment,  before  the  smoke  of  his  musket 
had  blown  away,  the  natives  rushed  upon  him.  One  of  them  beat 
him  down  with  a  club,  and  then  stabbed  him  with  a  dagger.  His 
men  fired  their  muskets  at  the  natives,  but  could  not  rescue  him. 

8.  The  Sandwich  islands  soon  after  became  the  resort  of  whale- 
ships,  and  of  all  other  vessels  that  voyaged  in  that  part  of  the  Pacific 
Ocean.  But  the  inhabitants  did  not  derive  any  advantage  from  their 
intercourse  with  civilized  people. 

9.  On  the  contrary,  they  became  a  great  deal  more  viscious  than 
ever  they  were  before.  They  contracted  so  many  diseases,  that  their 
numbers  were  reduced  from  four  hundred  thousand  to  less  than  a 
hundred  and  fifty  thousand.  There  was  reason  to  fear  that  the 
islands  would  be  depopulated. 

10.  Some  American  missionaries  crossed  the  ocean,  in  hopes  to 
save  these  poor  islanders  from  destruction.  They  preached  the  Gos- 
pel to  them,  and  established  schools,  in  which  the  natives  were 
taught  to  read  the  Bible. 

11.  Kaahumana,  the  queen-regent  of  the  Sandwich  islands,  adopted 
the  Christian  religion.  By  her  assistance,  the  missionaries  met  with 
great  success.  A  number  of  schools  were  established.  It  appeared 
probable  that  the  whole  people  would  be  civilized  and  christianized. 

12.  But  Kaahumana  died  a  few  years  since,  and  her  death  was  a 
great  misfortune  to  the  Sandwich  islands.  Many  of  the  natives  re- 
lapsed into  their  former  vices.    But  the  missionaries  are  still  laboring 

earnestly  for  their  good ;  and  such  has  been  their  success,  that  the 
people  are,  in  a  great  degree,  brought  within  the  pale  of  Christianity 
and  civilization.    These  islands  are  now  in  a  very  promising  condition. 

6.  What  took  place  between  the  natives  and  captain  Cook?    6.  "What  did  Cook  find  it 

necessary  to  do  ?  Relate  what  then  happened  f  8.  What  ships  soon  resorted  to  tho 
Sandwich  islands  ?  What  was  the  consequence  of  the  intercourse  ofthe  natives  with  the 
whites?  What  of  American  missionaries?  11.  What  of  Kaahumana  ?  12.  Consequence 
cf  her  death  ?     What  ofthe  missionaries? 


THE    SOCIETY    ISLANDS.  309 

CHAPTER  CLXXXVIII.— OCEANIA  CONTINUED. 

Polynesia  continued.      The  Society  Islands. 

1.  The  Society  islands  likewise  belong  to  Polynesia.  They  are 
situated  about  a  thousand  miles  south  of  the  equator,  which  is  nearly 
the  same  distance  that  the  Sandwich  islands  are  north  of  it. 

2.  The  largest  of  the  Society  islands  is  called  Tahiti,  or  Otaheite. 
It  is  a  hundred  miles  in  circumference,  and  is  inhabited  by  about  ten 
thousand,  people.  Like  the  natives  of  the  Sandwich  islands,  they 
are  generally  handsome,  and  of  agreeable  manners. 

3.  A  very  interesting  event  took  place  among  these  islands,  many 
years  ago.  The  brig  Bounty,  belonging  to  the  British  navy,  was 
sent  to  the  Society  islands  in  order  to  carry  bread-fruit  trees  from 
thence  to  the  West  Indies.  Her  commander  was  lieutenant  William 
Bligh. 

4.  He  arrived  at  Otaheite  in  17S8.  His  crew  were  delighted  with 
the  island.  The  air  was  balmy  and  full  of  sunshine.  Fruits  grew 
abundantly  on  every  tree.  There  was  no  need  of  toiiug  for  bread, 
since  there  were  trees  enough  which  produced  it  ready  made,  and 
almost  as  good  as  if  it  had  been  baked. 

5.  The  natives  of  Otaheite  received  the  Englishmen  with  kindness. 
The  women  behaved  with  great  affection  towards  the  poor  storm- 
beaten  sailors.  In  short,  the  crew  spent  their  time  so  pleasantly, 
that  they  were  very  reluctant  to  depart. 

6.  They  desired  to  spend  their  whole  lives  in  these  sunny  islands, 
instead  of  wandering  any  moreover  the  wide  and  dreary  sea.  When 
the  Bounty  sailed,  they  cast  many  a  sad  glance  at  the  pleasant  shores 
which  they  were  leaving.  They  had  not  sailed  many  days,  before 
they  formed  a  resolution  to  return. 

7.  A  young  man  by  the  name  of  Christian  was  an  officer  on  board 
the  Bounty.  He  was  not  on  good  terms  with  lieutenant  Bligh,  and 
he  incited  the  crew  to  mutiny  against  their  commander,  and  take 
possession  of  the  vessel. 

8.  One  morning,  before  sunrise,  Christian  and  his  associates  entered 
lieutenant  Bligh's  cabin,  while  he  was  asleep.  They  bound  his 
hands  behind  his  back,  threatening  him  with  death  if  he  made  the 
least  resistance.  He  was  then  put  into  a  leaky  boat,  with  eighteen 
oilier  persons,  who  refused-  to  join  in  the  mutiny. 

0.  I  can  only  say  of  lieutenant  Bligh  and  his  companions,  that  they 
arrived  safe  in  England,  afier  severe  hardships.  The  British  frigate 
Pandora  was  then  sent  to  Otaheite  in  search  of  the  mutineers,  that 
they  might  be  brought  to  justice. 


Ch.  CLXXXVIII.— 1.  Where  are  the  Society  islands  ?  To  what  group  do  they  belong .' 
2.  What  is  the  size  and  population  of  Tahiti  or  Otaheite  ?  What  of  the  natives  ?  3. 
What  of  the  brig  Bounty?  Who  was  tier  commander?  4.  When  did  he  arrive  at  Ota- 
heite ?  How  did  his  men  like  the  island?  5.  How  ilid  the  natives  treat  the  Englishmen  ? 
6.  What  of  the  crew  of  the  Bounty?  What  resolution  did  liny  form?  7.  What  did 
Christian  do?  S.  How  did  he  treat  lieutenant  Bligh  and  eighteen  others?  8.  Did  they 
brrive  in  England  ?     What  ship  was  sent  to  Otaheite  ? 


310  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

10.  The  frigate  arrived  at  Otaheite  and  found  fourteen  of  the 
mutineers.  She  took  them  on  board  and  sailed  for  England,  but  was 
wrecked  on  her  passage.  Four  of  the  mutineers  were  drowned. 
The  other  ten  were  carried  to  England,  where  three  of  them  were 
hanged. 

11.  Christian,  the  ringleader  of  the  mutiny,  had  not  been  taken 
prisoner  by  the  Pandora ;  for  he  and  several  companions  had  sailed 
from  Otheite  in  the  Bounty.  They  had  taken  with  them  a  plentiful 
supply  of  hogs,  dogs,  cats,  and  fowls,  and  also  a  number  of  Otaheitan 
men  and  women. 

12.  For  a  great  many  years,  nobody  could  tell  what  had  become  of 
Christian  and  his  friends,  and  of  the  brig  Bounty,  in  which  they  had 
sailed  away.  As  no  news  were  heard  of  them,  people  universally 
believed  that  the  vessel  had  gone  to  the  bottom,  with  all  her  crew. 


CHAPTER  CLXXXIX.-OCEANIA  CONTINUED. 

Story  of  the  Bounty  concluded. 

1.  But,  after  twenty  years,  when  people  had  long  ajjo  done  talking 
about  the  Bounty,  it  was  found  out  what  had  become  of  her.  In  the 
year  1813,  a  British  ship  of  war  was  sailing  from  the  Marquesas 
islands  to  the  port  of  Valparaiso,  in  South  America.  The  captain  of 
the  vessel  was  Sir  Thomas  Staines.  In  the  course  of  his  voyage,  he 
happened  to  cast  anchor  off  Pitcaim's  island. 

2.  This  small  island  lies  many  leagues  to   the  southwest  of  Ota- 
heite.    It  was  first  discovered  by  captain  Carteret,  in  1767  ;  but  ver^* 
few  people  had  since  visited  it,  for  it  produced  no  valuable  commodi- 
ties, and  it  was  supposed  to  be  uninhabited. 

3.  But,  as  Sir  Thomas  Staines  looked  from  the  deck  of  his  vessel 
to  tbe  shore,  he  was  amazed  to  perceive  that  the  island  was  culti- 
vated, and  that  there  were  small  houses  on  it.  These  houses  were 
better  built  than  those  of  the  savages  generally  are,  and  they  looked 
something  like  the  dwellings  of  poor  people  in  England. 

4.  While  Sir  Thomas  Staines  and  his  sailors  were  wondering  at 
these  circumstances,  a  small  boat  put  off  from  the  shore.  The 
waves  rolled  very  high,  but  the  boat  skimmed  like  a  sea-bird  over 
the  tops  of  them,  and  soon  came  along  side  of  the  vessel. 

5.  The  boat  was  rowed  by  two  young  men.  They  were  hand- 
some, though  of  rather  a  dark  complexion.  When  they  came  near 
the  vessel,  one  of  them  called  out,  in  good  English, — "  Won't  you 
throw  us  a  rope,  friends  ?" 

10.  What  happened  to  the  Pandora  ?  What  became  of  the  mutineers  ?  11.  What  had 
Christian  and  his  companions  done  ?  12.  What  was  supposed  to  have  become  of  them  ? 
Ch.  CLXXXIX.— 1  What  happened  in  the  year  1813?  2.  Where  is  Pitcairn's  island  1 
When  was  it  discovered  ?  3  What  was  seen  from  the  deck  of  the  ship  ?  How  did  the 
houses  appear?  4.  What  of  a  boat  from  shore  ?  5.  Describe  the  young  men  who  rowed 
it ?     What  did  they  call  out  i 


CHRONOLOGY  311 

6.  A  rope  was  thrown  to  them,  and  they  took  hold  of  it  and  clam- 
bered on  board  of  the  vessel.  Sir  Thomas  Staines  asked  them  who 
they  were,  and  how  they  came  to  be  living  on  that  lonely  island. 
The  mystery  was  soon  explained. 

7.  When  Christian  and  his  companions  left  Otaheite,  they  had 
steered  for  Pitcairn's  island,  and  had  run  the  Bounty  on  the  rocks  and 
set  her  on  fire.  They  had  then  built  houses  on  the  island,  and  had 
married  the  Otaheitan  women  whom  they  brought  with  them. 

S.  Christian  and  all  his  associates  were  now  dead,  except  one  old 
man,  whose  name  was  John  Adams.  But  they  had  left  children  and 
grandchildren,  so  that  there  was  now  quite  a  flourishing  colony  on 
the  island. 

9.  Old  John  Adams  had  taught  the  young  people  to  read  the 
Bible,  to  tell  the  truth,  and  to  be  honest  and  upright  in  their  be- 
havior. They  seemed  to  be  the  happiest  set  of  creatures  that  ever 
lived  ;  for  they  hardly  knew  that  there  was  any  sin  and  sorrow  in  the 
world. 

10.  Oh,  it  is  a  pity  that  Sir  Thomas  Staines  ever  anchored  off  Pit- 
cairn's island  !  It  is  a  pity  that  those  poor  people  could  not  have 
lived  and  died  in  their  little  sea-girt  home,  without  ever  beholding  a 
human  creature  but  themselves  ! 

11.  The  more  they  learned  about  mankind,  the  worse  it  was  for 
them.  Their  own  island,  though  a  little  one,  was  large  enough  to 
be  their  world.  I  have  only  to  add,  that  old  John  Adams  is  dead, 
fiecent  accounts  assure  us  that  the  people  remain,  about  one  hundred 
and  ninety  in  number,  very  innocent  and  happy. 


.,  CHAPTER  CXC— OCEANIA  CONTINUED. 

Chronology  of  Oceania. 

A.D. 

Java  discovered  by  the  Portuguese 1510 

New  Holland  discovered  by  the  Dutch 1610 

Batavia,  the  capital  of  Java,  built  by  the  Dutch 1619 

Captain  Cook  took  possession  of  New  Holland 1770 

Botany  Bay,  in  New  South  Wales,  settled 1778 

Sandwich  Islands  discovered  by  Captain  Cook 1778 

Death  of  Captain  Cook 1779 

Ship  Bounty  arrives  at  Otaheite 17S8 

Convicts  sent  to  Van  Dieman's  Land 1S04 

The  English  take  Java  from  the  Dutch 1S11 

Sir  Thomas  Staines  reaches  Pitcairn's  island 1S13 

The  Dutch  take  Java  again  from  the  English 1816 

Missionaries  established  at  the  Sandwich  Islands 1S20 

7.  Where  had  Christian  and  his  companions  steered  on  leaving  Otaheite  ?  What  did 
they  then  do  ?  8.  Who  alone  remained  of  the  mutineers  ?  How  was  the  colony  peopled  ? 
9.  What  had  John  Adams  done  for  the  young  people  ?  10.  What  reflections  cau  you  inaku 
upon  this  incident. 


312  SCHOOL    HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  CXCI. 

General  Vieivs. 

1.  I  will  now  give  you  some  account  of  the  origin  of  government, 
architecture,  and  other  things.  At  the  present  day,  some  nations  are 
governed  in  one  way  and  some  in  another.  In  this  country,  the 
people  are  governed  by  rulers  of  their  own  choice,  and  according  to  a 
constitution  of  their  own  formation.  This  nation  is  therefore  called 
a  Republic. 

2.  Some  nations  are  governed  by  kings  or  emperors,  who  rule  ac- 
cording to  their  own  will.  These  are  called  despotic  monarchies. 
Other  nations  are  ruled  by  kings  or  emperors,  whose  power  is  re- 
strained by  legislative  assemblies,  who  make  laws  for  the  country. 
These  are  called  limited  monarchies. 

3.  In  very  early  ages,  there  were  no  kings  or  emperors.  A  father 
would  rule  over  his  family,  or  a  grandfather  would  rule  over  all  his 
descendants.  This  kind  of  government  was  called  patriarchal.  It 
existed  before  the  flood,  and  continued  in  some  parts  of  Asia  long  after 
that  event. 

4.  But  when  the  people  became  divided  into  nations,  they  went  tc 
war  with  each  other.  The  boldest  and  strongest  man  would  become 
the  leader.  Having  the  soldiers  at  his  command  he  would  acquire 
great  power,  and  become  a  king  or  chief.  As  the  people  became 
rich,  he  would  build  palaces  and  live  in  great  pomp. 

5.  When  a  king  conquered  several  nations  he  would  be  styled  em- 
peror. Thus  you  perceive  that  the  rulers  went  on  acquiring  power, 
until  they  made  slaves  of  the  people.  In  Europe  and  Asia,  nearly  all 
the  nations  are  governed  by  kings  or  emperors. 

6.  At  various  times,  the  people  have  become  tired  of  being  gov- 
erned by  selfish  monarchs,  and  have  established  eovernments  for 
themselves.  In  ancient  Greece  and  Rome,  the  people  threw  off  the 
yoke  of  their  tyrant  kings,  and  for  a  time  enjoyed  freedom.  But  it 
always  happened  that  ambitious  men  have  led  the  people  astray  and 
enslaved  them.  It  is  to  be  hoped  that  the  Americans  will  not  thus 
part  with  their  liberty. 

.  7.  In  looking  round  upon  the  world,  and  observing  the  multitude 
of^  cities  filled  with  beautiful  buildings,  you  would  hardly  imagine 
that  mankind  once  dwelt  in  huts,  grottos,  caverns,  and  tents;  yet 
such  was  the  case  in  early  ages. 

8.  But  as  people  grew  more  civilized,  they  made  themselves  more 
comfortable  houses.  At  first  they  were  of  stone  or  wood,  rudely  put 
together  ;  but  after  a  time  they  learned  to  make  them  more  neatly. 

9.  Having  pretty  good  houses  for  themselves,  they  began  to  erect 
temples  for  their  gods.  Thus  architecture  was  improved  and  became 
a  great  art.  The  ancient  Egyptians,  Babylonians,  Assyrians,  Persians, 
and  Phcpnicians  filled  their  cities  with  splendid  edifices.  But  of  al 
the  ancients,  the  Greeks  built  the  most  pleasing  and  elegant  striae 


GENERAL   VIEWS.  313 

tures.  The  Romans  carrying  their  conquests  over  the  civilized 
world,  copied  and  combined  the  architecture  of  different  countries. 
Many  of  their  edifices  were  exceedingly  splendid,  but  not  so  chaste 
and  beautiful  as  those  of  the  Greeks. 

10.  Agriculture  was  one  of  the  first  arts  of  man.  The  Bible  tells 
us,  that  Cain  was  a  tiller  of  the  ground,  and  that  Noah  was  a  hu» 
bandman,  and  planted  a  vineyard.  For  many  ages,  agriculture  was 
almost  the  only  art  practised  by  mankind. 

11.  The  Chinese,  Japanese,  Chaldeans,  Egyptians,  and  Phoenicians, 
held  husbandry  in  high  estimation,  in  the  earliest  ages.  The  Greeks 
had  but  few  farming  tools;  but  the  Romans  used  a  great  variety. 
They  particularly  venerated  the  plough. 

12.  The  first  mention  made  of  nations  trading  together  appears  in 
the  book  of  Genesis,  chapter  3S:  25,  when  Joseph's  brethren  sold  him 
to  a  band  of  Ishmaelites,  who  were  conveying  spices,  balm,  and  myrrh 
into  Egypt.  The  balm  was  from  Gilead,  and  the  myrrh  was  the  pro- 
duce of  Arabia.  They  were  going  through  the  land  of  Canaan  into 
Egypt,  which  was  then  a  highly  cultivated  kingdom. 

13.  The  central  situation  of  Egypt  made  it  the  ancient  emporium 
of  commerce.  By  caravans,  the  treasures  of  Asia  and  Africa  were 
brought  thither.  Trade  was  always  held  in  esteem,  because  of  the 
wealth  it  brought.  Tyre  and  Sidon,  cities  of  Phoenicia,  were  early 
devoted  to  commerce;  and  Solomon  carried  on  an  extensive  trade 
with  them. 

14.  The  Greeks  had  great  commerce  along  the  borders  of  the 
Mediterranean  Sea.  The  Carthaginians  were  also  a  highly  commer- 
cial people.  The  Romans  preferred  acquiring  wealth  by  conquest 
and  plunder,  rather  than  by  trade.  Of  all  modern  nations,  Great 
Britain  is  the  most  commercial. 

15.  I  have  not  space  to  tell  you  the  history  of  music,  painting  and 
sculpture.  Egypt  was  the  birth-place  of  the  arts  and  sciences,  but 
most  of  the  great  nations  of  antiquity  made  some  progress  in  them. 
Ine  most  beautiful  specimens  of  sculpture  in  existence  are  those  pro- 
duced by  Greek  artists,  at  least  two  thousand  years  ago.  In  painting 
the  modern  Italians  have  excelled  all  other  nations. 


THE  END. 


27 


PARLEY'S  COMMON  SCHOOL  HISTORY. 


This  work  has  run  through  nine  editions  in  this  country,  and  several  in  England,  in  & 
brief  space  of  time,  and  is  now  established  in  the  best  Schools  in  Boston,  New-York,  Phi- 
ladelphia, Baltimore,  and  other  places  throughout  the  United  States.  The  following 
among  a  multitude  of  notices,  will  give  some  idea  of  the  character  of  the  work. 
From  Mrs.  Sigourncy,  Hartford. 
"  I  consider  it  one  of  the  best  works  of  its  talented  and  indefatigable  author.  I  am  sub- 
mitting it  to  the  practical  test  of  daily  lessons  with  my  children,  and  find  them  both  insti  uct- 
ive  and  pleasing." 

Mr.  J.  Bailey,  an  eminent  Teacher  of  New-York  says, 

"I have  carefully  examined  Peter  Parley's  History,  and  am  delighted  with  the  work. 
The  most  prominent  and  important  features  of  the  history  of  all  nations  and  ages,  from  the 
creation  of  man  to  the  present  time,  are  presented  in  a  manner  striking,  familiar,  and  pleas- 
ing,— in  a  style,  pure,  neat,  and  even  elegant,  and  admirably  adapted  to  youth, — and,  at  the 
same  time,  interesting  to  mature  age.  The  geographical  drawings,  interspersed  as  the  ba- 
sis of  this  work,  are  such,  in  fact,  as  should  be  the  basis  of  all  history.  The  engravings  are 
good:  the  figures  numerous,  and  pleasingly  illustrative  of  the  manners  and  customs  of  differ- 
ent ages  and  nations.  The  chronological  and  other  tables  greatly  enhance  the  merit  of  the 
work." 

Mr.  Alden,  a  distinguished  Teacher  of  Philadelphia,  says, 
"  I  am  greatly  pleased  with  Parley's  History,  and  shall  introduce  it  into  my  school.  Ju- 
dicious in  its  arrangements,  attractive  in  style,  and  striking  in  selection,  it  commends  itself 
to  teachers  and  parents  as  particularly  appropriate  to  the  juvenile  mind.  When  known  to 
school  committees  and  others  concerned  with  our  common  schools,  it  cannot  fail  of  being 
introduced  into  general  use." 

From  the  Boston  Times. 
"  The  publishers  have  just  sent  us  a  copy  of  the  ninth  edition  of  this  admirable  school 
book,  and  we  take  pleasure  in  calling  to  it  the  attention  of  teachers,  as  one  of  the  best  his- 
torical works  that  has  ever  been  published  for  academies  and  schools.  History  ought  to  be 
taught  in  every  school,  and  this  work  from  its  clearness,  its  liveliness,  and  its  simplicity,  if 
precisely  adapted  to  the  purpose." 

From  the  American  Traveller. 
"This  work  was  written  for  the  purpose  of  bringing  the  study  of  general  history  within 
the  scope  of  high  schools,  academies,  boarding  schools,  and  even  common  schools.  The 
task  was  a  difficult  one,  for  it  involved  the  necessity  of  abridging  a  vast  amount  of  matter, 
60  as  to  bring  it  within  a  small  compass,  and  at  the  same  time  to  make  this  interesting 
acd  attractive.  This,  however,  has  been  most  happily  accomplished,  and  the  Common 
School  History  is  undoubtedly  one  of  the  most  valuable  contributions  to  the  cause  of  educa- 
tion. We  cannot  do  belter  than  to  commend  it  to  all  teachers  and  others,  who  believe  with 
us,  that  history  should  form  a  part  of  even  the  humblest  education.  The  subjects  are  ar- 
ranged in  easy  chapters,  and  the  whole  may  be  mastered  in  a  few  months.  We  cannot 
conceive  of  a  book  more  agreeable  to  pupil  and  teacher  than  this.  We  take  pleasure  in 
stating  that  the  publishers  uniformly  prodnc*.  ii  in  an  excellent  style." 

JCf*  The  publishers  have  the  pleasure  to  say,  that  they  have  several  hundred  recommend- 
ations of  the  same  general  tenor  as  the  above  ;  they  feel  therefore  great  confidence  in  com 
mending  the  work  as  calculated,  in  an  eminent  degree,  to  make  history  interesting  to  the 
voung.  and  also  to  render  it  easy  to  introduce  fhe  study  of  it  into  all  our  schools,  through- 
uut  the  country. 


PHILADELPHIA- 

No.  67  South  Fourth  Stbbht. 


STANDARD  BOOKS 

PUBLISHED   BY 

&  H.  BUTLER  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


0/  the  following  xHU  be  forwarded  by  maU,  post-paid,  for  a  remittance  of  Cite  price 
against  the  work  or  works  ordered. 


GOODKICH'S  SCHOOL  HISTORIES. 


Goodrich's  Pictorial  History  of  the  United  States. 

A  Pictorial  History  of  the  United  States,  with  Notices  of  other  Portions  of 
America.  For  the  use  of  Schools.  By  Samuel  G.  Goodrich.  1  voL 
12mo.  360  pages. 

Goodrich's  Pictorial  History  of  England. 

A  Pictorial  History  of  England,  Scotland,  and  Ireland.  For  the  UBe  of 
Schools.     By  Samuel  G.  Goodrich.     1  vol.  12mo.  444  pages. 

Goodrich's  Pictorial  History  of  Rome. 

A.  Pictorial  History  of  Ancient  Rome,  with  a  Sketch  of  the  History  of 
Modern  Italy.  For  the  use  of  Schools.  By  Samuel  G.  Goodrich. 
1  vol.  12mo.  333  pages. 

Goodrich's  Pictorial  History  of  Greece. 

A  Pictorial  History  of  Greece,  Ancient  and  Modern.  For  the  use  of 
Schools.     By  Samuel  G.  Goodrich.     1  vol.  12mo.  371  pages. 

Goodrich's  Pictorial  History  of  France. 

A  PirUorial  History  of  France.  For  the  use  of  Schools.  By  Samubl  ft. 
Goodrich.    1  vol.  12mo.  347  pages. 


Parley's  (Goodrich's)  Common  School  History. 

A.  Brief  Compend  of  Universal  History.     For  the  use  of  Schools.     By 
Samuel  G.  Goodrich.     1  vol.  12mo.  309  pages.     Price,  75  cents. 

J9S*  These  -works  are  written  in  a  lively  and  pleasing  style,  abounding  in  illucxaa- 
tiie  anecdotes,  incidents,  and  descriptions,  the  histories,  in  all  cases,  being  based  ra 
Geography,  illustrated  by  maps.  The  manners  and  customs  of  each  country  and  age] 
•re  constantly  kept  in  view.  The  -works  are  freely  supplied  with  engravings,  giving 
eorrect  ideas  of  manners  and  customs,  views  of  cities,  monuments,  battles,  &c.  They 
cave  been  got  up  with  great  care  and  expense,  and  are  published  In  a  superior  style. 
It  is  believed  that  therp  is  no  series  of  familiar  histories,  in  America  or  Europe,  thai 
may  challenge  comparison  with  these,  either  in  interest,  accuracy,  or  beauty  of  me- 
ehanical  execution.  The  publishers  are  able  to  add  that  they  have  received  the  appro- 
bation of  leading  men,  and  are  introduced  into  the  principal  seminaries  throughout 
the  United  States.    They  are  uniform  in  size  and  price. 


MANN  &  CHASE'S  NEW  ARITHMETICAL 
SERIES. 

IN  THREE  PARTS. 

Mann  &  Chase's  Primary  Arithmetic,  Part  1, 

The  Primary  School  Arithmetic :  designed  for  Beginners.  Containing 
copious  Mental  Exercises,  together  with  a  large  number  of  Examples 
for  the  Slate.  By  Horace  Mann,  LL.  D.,  and  Pliny  E.  Chase, 
A.  M.,  Authors  of  "Arithmetic  Practically  Applied."  1  vol.  18mo. 
Price,  25  cents. 

Mann  &  Chase's  Arithmetic,  Part  2. 

The  Grammar-School  Arithmetic  :  containing  much  valuable  Commercial 
Information;  together  with  a  system  of  Integral,  Decimal,  and  Prac- 
tical Arithmetic,  so  arranged  as  to  dispense  with  many  of  the  ordinary 
rules.  By  Horace  Mann,  and  Pliny  E.  Chase,  Authors  of  "  Primary 
Arithmetic."     1  vol.  duodecimo.     Price,  63  cents. 

Mann  &  Chase's  Arithmetic,  Part  3. 

Arithmetic  Practically  Applied :  for  Advanced  Pupils,  and  for  Private 
Jteferenee,  designed  as  a  Sequel  to  any  of  the  ordinary  Text  Books  on 
the  subject.  By  Horace  Mann,  LL.D.,  the  First  Secretary  of  the 
Massachusetts  BoarQ  of  Education,  and  Pliny  E.  Chase,  A.M.  1  toL 
duodecimo.     Price,  $1.00 


ANGELL'S  READING  BOOKS. 

This  is  a  series  of  Spelling  and  Keadmg  Boobs,  in  Six  Numbers;  comjile^ 
by  Oliver  Angell,  A.  M.,  Principal  of  the  Franklin  High  School, 
Providence.  Tha  Numbers  composing  the  series  may  be  briefly  de- 
scribed as  follows : 

Angell's  Reader,  No.  1. 

72  pages  ISmo.  Price,  8  cents. 
The  arrangement  of  the  lessons  in  this  book  is  such,  that  the  child  commences 
reading  as  soon  as  he  commences  putting  the  letters  together  into  syllables,  the  exor- 
cise of  spelling  and  reading  being  simultaneous.  The  same  syllables  and  words  which 
form  the  Spelling  Lessons,  are  arranged  as  Reading  Lessons  directly  opposite,  or  im- 
mediately under  the  Spelling  columns. 

Angell's  Reader,  No.  2. 

136  pages  ISmo.     Price,  14  cents. 

This  is  a  continuation  of  the  First  Number,  containing  Easy  Beading  Lessons,  most 
af  whioh  are  pleasing  stories,  designed  to  interest  the  mind  of  the  learner,  and  afford 
instruction.  Spelling  Lessons,  consisting  of  words  from  the  Keading  Lessons,  presedi 
every  Reading  Lesson. 

Angell's  Reader,  No.  3. 

206  pages  18mo.     Price,  17  cents. 

This  is  a  gradual  advance  from  the  Second  Number,  having  the  Reading  and  Spell 
tog  Lessons  arranged  on  the  same  plan.  The  Lessons,  in  each  of  the  Numbers,  are 
followed  by  a  set  of  Questions,  to  exercise  the  reader  on  what  he  has  read. 

Angell's  Reader,  No.  4. 

252  pages  12mo.     Price,  30  cents. 

Also  designed  as  a  Reading  and  Spelling  Book,  and  containing  a  variety  of  othei 
useful  matter. 

Angell's  Reader,  No.  5. 

296  pages  12mo.    Price,  50  cents.  * 

A  ReadiDg  Book  for  the  higher  classes  in  Common  Schools,  with  Spelling  Lessons 
wid  definitions  adapted  to  each  reading  section;  with  Tables,  Mental  Arithmetic,  &o. 

Angell's  Reader,  No.  6. 

504  pages  12mo.     Price,  75  cents. 

Being  a  selection  of  pieces  in  prose  and  verse ;  designed  as  a  Reading  Bock  for  Uia 
highest  classes  in  Academies  and  Schools. 
These  six  volumes,  compiled  by  Outer  Anqell,  comprise  a  series  which  is  nr» 

3 


Angell's  Reading  Books — continued. 

doubtedly  more  suitable  for  the  purpose  for  which  they  are  designed,  than  any  jw« 
lious  publications;  and  they  are  more  popular  among  those  who  have  the  direct*-* 
of  education  than  any  ever  prepared  in  this  country.  There  is  a  decided  advantage 
in  possessing  sots  of  elementary  books  by  the  same  author,  who  has  pursued  a  similar 
plan  with  each,  rising  step  by  step,  and  who,  it  is  presumed,  would  be  better  able  to 
preserve  the  proper  gradation  of  style  and  matter,  than  several  individuals  would. 
Ihis  will  be  found  to  be  the  case  in  the  present  6eriea. 


Richardson's  English  Dictionary. 

A  New  Dictionary  of  the  English  Language,  by  Charles  Richardsom. 
2  volumes  quarto,  2295  pages.     Price,  $22.50. 

RICHARDSON'S  ENGLISH  DICTIONARY  is  acknowledged  to  be  the  great  The- 
saurus of  English  Philology  and  Lexicography.  Its  character  as  a  work  of  standard 
authority  is  so  well  established,  that  few  scholars  or  professional  men  will  deem  their 
libraries  complete  without  it. 


Fleming  &  Tibbins'  French  Dictionary. 

An  entirely  New  and  Complete  French  and  English,  and  English  and 
French  Dictionary,  adapted  to  the  present  state  of  the  two  Languages. 
By  Prof.  Fleming,  Prof,  of  English  in  the  College  of  Louis-le-Grand, 
and  Prof.  Tibbins,  author  of  several  lexicographical  works  :  with  im- 
portant additions,  by  Charles  Picot,  Esq.,  Professor  of  French  in  the 
University  of  Pennsylvania,  and  Jtjdah  Dobson,  Esq.,  Member  of  the 
American  Philosophical  Society,  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences, 
&c,  <fcc.     1400  pages  royal  8vo.     Price,  $4. 


Fleming  &  Tibbins'  French  Dictionary,  Abridged. 

1  vol.  12mo.  724  pages.     Price,  $1.25. 


Nugent's  French  and  English  Dictionary. 

A  Pocket  Dictionary  of  the  two  Languages.  In  two  Parts.  1.  French  an 
English.  2.  English  and  French.  By  Thomas  Nugent,  LL.  D.  45 
pages  square  12mo.     Price,  63  cents.  . 


Donnegan's  Greek  Lexicon. 

A  New  Greek  and  English  Lexicon,  on  the  Plan  of  the  Greek  and  Geitnar 
Lexicon  of  Schneider;  the  words  alphabetically  arranged, — distin- 
guishing such  as  are  poetical,  of  dialectic  variety,  or  peculiar  to  cer- 
tain writers  and  classes  of  writers ;  with  Examples,  literally  translated, 
selected  from  the  classical  writers.  By  James  Donnegan,  M.  D.,  of 
London.  Revised  and  Enlarged  by  Robert  B.  Patton,  Professor  of 
Ancient  Languages  in  the  College  of  New  Jersey;  with  the  assistance 
of  J.  Addison  Alexander,  D.  D.,  of  the  Theological  Seminary  at 
Princeton.     1422  pages,  royal  8vo.     Price,  $4. 

t5r"  The  quick  sale  of  so  many  large  editions  of  this  Lexicon,  is  the  best  evidence 
thw  publishers  could  desire  of  its  acceptableness  to  scholars  generally. 


Walker's  Pronouncing  Dictionary. 

A.  Critical  Pronouncing  Dictionary  and  Expositor  of  the  English  Lan^ 
guage.  To  which  is  annexed  a  Key  to  the  Classical  Pronunciation 
of  Greek,  Latin,  and  Scripture  Proper  Names,  &o.  By  John  Walker. 
Octavo,  782  pages.     Price,  $1.12^. 


IIurd's  Grammatical  Corrector. 

A  Grammatical  Corrector,  or  Vocabulary  of  the  Common  Errors  of  Speech  < 
being  a  collection  of  nearly  two  thousand  barbarisms,  cant  phrases, 
colloquialisms,  quaint  expressions,  provincialisms,  false  pronuncia- 
tions, perversions,  misapplication  of  terms,  and  other  kindjed  errors 
of  the  English  Language,  peculiar  to  the  different  States  of  the  Union. 
The  whole  explained,  corrected,  and  conveniently  arranged,  for  the 
use  of  Schools  and  Private  Individuals.  By  Seth  T.  Htjrd.  124 
pages  12mo.     Price,  34  cents. 


{Smith's  Grammar. 

nglish  Grammar  on  tho  Productive  System:  a  Method  of  Instruction 
recently  adopted  in  Germany  and  Switzerland;  designed  for  Schools 
and  Acadomies.  By  Roswell  C.  Smith,  author  of  Introductory  Arith- 
metic, Ac.    192  pages  12mo.    Price,  25  cents. 

5 


Hart's  English  Grammar. 

An  Exposition  of  the  Principles  and  Usages  of  the  English  Language.  By 
John  S.  Hart,  LL.D.,  Principal  of  the  Philadelphia  High  SohooL 
192  pages  12ino.     Price,  34  cents. 


Hart's  Class  Book  of  Prose  ; 

AND 

Hart's  Class  Book  of  Poetry  ; 

Each  384  pages  12mo.  Consisting  of  Selections  from  distinguished  Eng- 
lish and  American  Authors,  from  Chaucer  to  the  present  day;  the 
whole  arranged  in  Chronological  Order,  with  Biographical  and  Critical 
Remarks.  By  John  S.  Hart,  LL.  D.,  Principal  of  the  Philadelphia 
High  School.  These  volumes  are  sold  separately.  Price,  75  cents  for 
either  work. 


Hart's  Constitution  of  the  United  States. 

A  Brief  Exposition  of  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States,  in  the  form 
of  Questions  and  Answers.  For  the  use  of  Schools  and  Colleges.  By 
John  S.  Hart,  LL.D.,  Principal  of  the  Philadelphia  High  School, 
and  Professor  of  Moral,  Mental,  and  Political  Science,  in  the  same. 
100  pages  12mo.     Price,  30  cents. 


Comstock's  Elocution. 

A  System  of  Elocution,  with  special  reference  to1  Gesture  and  Defectiva 
Articulation.  With  numerous  Diagrams  and  engraved  Figures,  illus- 
trating the  subject  By  Andrew  Comstock,  M.  D.  1  vo\.  12mo. 
Price,  $1.00. 


Frost's  Composition. 

Easy  Exercises  in  Composition,  designed  for  the  use  of  Beginners.     By 
John  Frost,  LL.  D.     120  pages  12mo.    Price,  25  cents. 

6 


■ 


tag        . 


mnni 


